IT \P^

-VI • .' ",

-^^^^^ .

k-^n

A^-^^

4?r^<

-<'^.

wM

-♦H*

Journal or tbe

Ropal microscopical Societp

CONTAINING ITS TRANSACTIONS AND PROCEEDINGS

AND
A SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

(principally Invertebrata and Cryptogamia)

:Mioi?.osoo:p^5r, Szc.

EDITED BY THE LATE
R. G. HEBB, M.A. M.D. F.R.C.P.

AND

CHARLES SINGER, M.A. M.D. F.R.C.P.

WITH THE ASSISTANCE OF THE PUBLICATION COMMITTEE AND

J. AKTHUR THOMSON, M.A. LL.D. A. N. DISNEY, M.A. B.Sc.

Regius Professor of Natural History in the
University of Aberdeen

FELLOWS OF THE SOCIETY
AND

A. B. RENDLE, M.A. D.Sc. F.R.S. F.L.S.

Keeper, Department of Botany, British Museum

R. M. JONES, M.Sc. RALPH ST. JOHN BROOKS,

Woolwich Arsenal M.A. M.D. D.P.H. D.T.M. & H. (Camb.)

Minimis partibus, per totum Naturae campum, certitude omnis innititur
quas qui fugit pariter Naturam ^\ig\\.—LmncBns.

FOR THE YEAR
1918

TO BE OBTAINED AT THE SOCIETY'S ROOMS

20 HANOVER SQUARE, LONDON, W.i

OF Messrs. WILLIAMS & NORGATE, 14 Henrietta Street, London, W.C.2
AND OF Messrs. DULAU & CO., Ltd., 34 Margaret Street, London, W.i

Council Meetings are held on the third Wednesday, Meetings
of the Biological Section on the first AYednesday in each month
from October to Jnne.

Fellows intending to exhibit any Instruments or Objects, or to
bring forward any Communications at the Ordinary Meetings,
are requested to inform the Secretaries a week before the Meeting
if possible.

THE

|i0gal 3llicif0SC0^itaI

Established in 1839. Incorporated by Eoyal Charter in 1866.

The Society was established in 1839 for the promotion of Micro-
scopical and Biological Science by the communication, discussion, and publica-
tion of observations and discoveries relating to (1) Improvements in the
construction and mode of application of the Microscope, and (2) Biological
or other subjects of Microscopical Eesearch.

It consists of Ordinary, Honorary, and Ex-officio Fellows of either sex.

Ordinary Fellows are elected on a Certificate of Eecoramendation
signed by three Ordinary Fellows, setting forth the names, residence, and
qualifications of the Candidate, of whom the first proposer must have personal
knowledge. The Certificate is read at two General Bleetings, the Candidate
being balloted for at the second Meeting.

The Admission Fee is 2/. 2.s., payable at the time of election ; and the Annual
Subscription is 2/. 2.s., payable on election, and subsequently in advance on
1st January in each year, but the Annual Subscriptions may be compounded
for at any time for 31/. 10s. Fellows elected at a meeting subsequent to that in
February are only called upon for a proportionate part of the first year's sub-
scription. The annual Subscription of Fellows permanently residing abroad
is 1/. lis. Qd., or a reduction of one-fourth.

Honorary Fellows (limited to 50), consisting of Fellows eminent in
Microscopical or Biological Science, are elected on the recommendation of five
Ordinary Fellows and the approval of the Council.

Ex-ofl&cio Fellows (limited to 100), consisting of the Presidents for the
time being of any Societies having objects in whole or in part similar to those of
the Society, are elected on the recommendation of ten Ordinary Fellows and the
approval of the Council.

The Council, in whom the management of the property and afifiiirs of
the Society is vested, is elected annually, and is composed of the President,
four Vice-Presidents, Treasurer, two Secretaries, and twelve other Ordinary
Fellows.

The Journal, containing the Transactions and Proceedings of the
Society, and a Summary of Current Eesearches relating to Zoology and Botany
(principally Invertebrata and Cryptogamia), Microscopy, etc., is published
bi-monthly, and is forwarded post-free to all Ordinary and Ex-officio Fellows
residing in countries within the Postal Union.

The Library, with the Instruments, Apparatus, and Cabinet of Objects
is open for the use of Fellows daily (except Saturdays), from 10 a.m. to 5 p.m.
and also on Wednesday evenings, other than Meeting evenings, from 6 r.M. to
9 P.M., except during the vacations. It is closed for four weeks during August
and September.

Forms of proposal for Fellowship, and any further information, may be obtained
on application to the Secretary, at the L'ooms of the Society, 20 Hanover Square,
London, W.l

a 2

fatron

HIS MAJESTY THE KING.

f asi-fri?stbcnis.

Elected

*Sm Richard Owen, K.C.B. D.C.L. M.D. LL.D. F.R.S. 1840-1

♦John Lindley, Ph.D. F.R.S 1842-3

*Thomas Bell, F.R.S 1844-5

*James Scott Bowerbank, LL.D. F.R.S 1846-7

*GrE0RGE BusK, F.R.S 1848-9

*Arthur Farre, M.D. F.R S 1850-1

*George Jackson, M.R.C.S , 1852-8

*WiLLiAM Benjamin Carpenter, C.B. M.D. LL.D. F.R.S. 1854-5

•George Shadbolt 1856-7

*Edwin Lankester, M.D. LL.D. F.R.S 1858-9

*JoHN Thomas Quekett, F.R.S 1860

*R0BERT James Farrants, F.R.C.S 1861-2

•Charles Brooke, M.A. F.R.S 1863-4

* James Glaisher, F.R.S 1865-6-7-8

*Rev. Joseph Bancroft Reade, M.A. F.R.S 1869-70

*William Kitchen Parker, F.R.S 1871-2

*Charles Brooke, M.A. F.R.S 1873-4

*Henry Clifton Sorby, LL.D. F.R.S 1875-6-7

♦Henry James Slack, F.G.S 1878

♦Lionel S. Beale, M.B. F.R.C.P. F.R.S 1879-80

♦Peter Martin Duncan, M.B. F.R.S 1881-2-3

*Rev. William Hy. Dallinger, M.A. LL.D. F.R.S. 1884-5-6-7

♦Charles Thos. Hudson, M.A. LL.D. (Cantab.), F.R.S. 1888-9-90

■'•■Robert Braithwaite, M.D. M.R.C.S 1891-2

Albert D. Michael, F.L.S 1893-4-5-6

Edward Milles Nelson 1897-8-9

William Carruthers, F.R.S. F.L.S. F.G.S 1900-1

Henry Woodward, LL.D. F.R.S. F.G.S. F.Z.S 1902-3

Dukinfield Hy. Scott, M.A. Ph.D. LL.D. F.R.S. F.L.S. 1904-5-6

♦The Right Hon. Lord Avebury, P.C. D.C.L. LL.D.

F.R.S., etc 1907-8

Sir Edwin Ray Lankester, K.C.B. M.A. LL.D. F.R.S.

F.L.S. F.Z.S 1909

J. Arthur Thomson, M.A. F.R.S.E 1910-11

♦Henry George Plimmer, F.R.S,, F.L.S., F.Z.S., etc 1911-12

G. Sims Woodhead, M.A. M.D. LL.D. F.R.S.E., etc 1913-16

* Deceased.

COUNCIL.

Elected 16th Januaey, 1018.

*JosEPH E. Barnard.

^icc-'^ resit) cuts.

*Edward Heron-Allen,' F.L.S. F.Z.S., F.G.S. M.R.I.A., etc.
Arthur Earland.
*F. Martin Duncan, F.R.P.S.
*EoBERT Paulson, F.L.S.

Creasurcr.

*Cyril F. Hill.

^ecuiavies.

*J. W. H. Eyre, M.D. M.S. F.R.S. Edin.
*David J. Scourfield, F.Z.S.

#rbtnarg gl*"^^^^^ ^^ Council.

Alfred N. Disney, M.A. B.Sc.

T. H. HiscoTT.

J. Milton Offord.

Percy E. Radley.

A. W. Sheppard.
*R. G. Hebb, M.A. M.D. F.R.C.P.

Edward J. Sheppard.

Charles Singer, M.A. M.D.

Charles D. Soar, F.L.S.

Joseph Wilson.

■•■Benj. Moore, M.A. D.Sc. F.R.S.
*B. B. Woodward, F.L.S. F.G.S.

EDITOR.

•R. G. Hebb, M.A. M.D. F.R.C.P.

LIBRARIAN.

Percy E. Radley,

curator of instruments. curator of slides.

Charles Singer, M.A. M.D., etc. Edward J. Sheppard.

ASSISTANT SECRETARY.

A, E. Bull.

* Members of the Publication Committee.

CONTENTS.

TRANSACTIONS OF THE SOCIETY.

PAGE

I. — Report on the Recent Foraminifera dredged off the East Coast of
Australia. H.M.S. " Dart," Station 19 (14 May, 1895), Lat. 29° 22' S.,
Long. 153° 51' E., 465 fathoms. Pteropod Ooze. By Henry Sideboltom.
[Communicated by E. Herou-Allen and A. Earland.] (Plates I- II) ., 1

IL— Microscopy at Ruhlebeii. By R. Paulson, F.R.M.S 2^

III.— A New Species of (longrosim. By G. S. West, M.A., D.Sc, F.L.S.

(One Plate) 30

tV. — Report on the Recent Foraminifera dredged off the East Coast of

Australia. H.M.S. "Dart," Station 19 (14 :\ray, 1895), Lat. 29° 22' S.,

Long. 153° 51' E. 465 fathoms. Pteropod Ooze — continued. By Henry

» Sidebottoni. [Communicated by E. Heron-Allen and A. Earland.]

(Plates III-V) 122

V. — The Royal Microscopical Society during the Great AVar — and After.
Presidential Address, 1917-18. By Edward Herou-Allen, F.L.S., F.G.S.,
F.Z.S., etc 153

VI. — On Fyxidkula invisltata, a Rhizopod new to Britain, and Hediiotystis
spinifera. n new Heliozoon. By James Meikle Brown, B.Sc, F.L.,F.C.S.
[Commuiiicatea by John Hopkinson, F.L.S., F.R.:M.S.] (One Plate) .. 170

VII. — Report on t!ie Recent Foraminifera dredged off the East Coast of
Australia. H.3I.S. " Dart," Station 19 (14 May, 1895), Lat. 29= 22' S.,
Long. 153'- 51' E., 465 fathoms. Pteropod Oizo — concluded. By Henry
Sidebottom. [Communicated by E. Heron-Allen and A. Earland.]
(Plate VI) 249

VIII. — On the Microstructure of Hypo-eutectoid Steel as contrasted with that of
Normal Steel. With a Note on the Microscopical ^Methods adopted in
tiie Examination of Steel Specimens. By E. Atkinson, A.M.Inst.L.E.,
F.C.S., F.R.M.S., etc. (Plates I-III, and One Text-fig.) 265

IX.— Two Valuable ^letho Is of Staining in Bulk aud Counter-Staining. By

E. J.Sheppard 275

X. — Acetone as a Solvent for Mounting Media. By John Ritchie, Jun 279

XL — A New Type of Jnfusorian : Arachnidloptls paradoxa. ByE. Penard, Sc.D.

(One Plate) 283

XII.— An Improved Method of Apertometry. By E. Hartridge, M.A., M.D.,

F.R.M.S., Fellow of King's College, Cambridge. (Four text-iigs.) .. 337

rill CONTENTS.

OBITUARY.

PACK

Richard GraiDger Hebb, M.A., M.D.Camb., F.R.O.P. Lond. 1848-1918. Consult-
ing Physician and Physician Pathologist to the Westminstei Hospital.
(One Plate) 17;'.

Miss Etiiel Sargant, F.L.8. By A. W. Sheppard .. 17.")

William Sydney Gibbons. By W. M. Bale 17(i

Professor Henry George Plimmer, M.R.C.S., F.R.S., etc. (President R.M.S.,

1911-12.) (Portrait) 349

Kate Marion Hall, F.L.S., F.Z.S v558

Albert McCalla, M.A., Ph.D 358

SU3IMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES.
ZOOLOGY.

4

VEBTEBRATA.

a. Embryologry-

LiPSCHiJTZ, A. — Internal Secretions of Gonads 32

Streeteb, George L. — Development of Auditori/ Capsule in Man 33

Rabacd, Etienne — " Dislocated" Mice 33

Jordan, H. E. — HaemopoiesiB in Mongoose Embryo 34

,. Aortic Cell-clusters in Vertebrate Embryos 34

Myers, J. A. — Development of Mammary Glands 34

Hammond, J. — Mammary Glands of Rabbit 35

Stockakd, Charles R., & George N. Papanicolaou — CEstrous Cycle in Guinea-
pig 3r)

Marshall, F. H. A., & E. T. Halnan — Post-oestrous Changes in Dog 36

Pearl, Raymond— i4j^'ec<o?i Progemj of Foivls after Treatment icith Alcohol 37

Jennings, H. S. — Hereditary Characters and Evolution -'.u

Lillie, Frank R. — Study of Free-martin 37

Jordan, H. E. — Germ-cells of Loggerhead T artle 38

Vanneman, Aimee S. — Germ-Cells of Armadillo 177

Corner, George W. — Mcdurution of Ovum in Swine 178

Patterson, J. J., & 0. G. Hartman — Polyembryonic Blastocyst in Opossum .. 178

Harman, Mary T. — Superfetation in Cat 178

Lewis, Margaret Reed — Effect of Vital Stains on Eggs 178

Wentworth, E. N. — Inheritance of Fertility in Sheep 179

Myers, J. A. — Development of Mammary Glands in B(d 179

Howell, J. A. — Effect of Stress and Strain on Bone Development 179

Johnson, C. E. — Development of Liver in Ground Sqtiirrel 180

CONTENTS. IX

PAGB

BAViiGAfiTSE^,E. A.^Development of SerouB Glands of Tongue .. .... .. 180

Sabin. Flobencb R. — Angioblasts and Blood-vessels 180

BouiNG, Alice M.. & Raymond Pearl — Interstitial Cells in Beproduclive Organs

of Chicken 180

Pearl, BAyuo^n— Effects of Pituitary Body and Corpus Luteum on Clucks.. .. 181

Bambki:, RiJTH C. — Hermaphrodite Dogfish 181

Howland, Ruth B. — Femoral of Pronephros of Amphihian Embryo 181

Morgan, T. H. — Inheritance in Fantail Pigeons 181

Pearl, Raymond — Sex-ratio in Domestic Fowl 182

LoEB, Jacques — Further Experiments on Sex of Frogs developed from ArtificiaUy

Activated Eggs •■ .. '-90

Thing. Alice — Zona Pell ucida in Turtle Eggs 290

Gilchrist. J. D. F. — Eggs and Embryos of Bdellostoma 291

Goodrich, Edwin S. — Development of Head-segments of Dogfish 291

WiNTREBERT, P. — Earliest Movements of Dogfish Embryo 291

Werber. E. I. — Morphcgenesis of Dnplicities 201

HuBER. G. Carl — Development of Mammalian Nottjchord 292

Boring, Alice M..& Raymond Pearl — Hermaphrodite Foivls 292

Badertscher. J. A. — XJltimobranchial Bodies in Pig 202

Chapman, W. 1). — Development of Bliiod-res<eh toithout Heart 293

Boyden, Edward A. — Vestigial Gill-filaments in Sauropsida 293

Herlant. Maurice — Cyclic Variations in Permeability of the Activated Ovum .. 293

Pearl, Raymoxd, & Alice M. Boring — Corpus Luteum in Ovary of Chicken .. 293

Duesberg, G. — Chondriosomesin Testis-cells of Fundulus 294

Thompson, Helen B., & Lafayette B. Mendel— (?rotc</t of Mice 294

Clark, Eliot R. — Growth of Blood-vessels in Frog Larvx 294

Whiting, P. W. — Inheritance of Coat-colour in Cats 294

Detwiler, S. R. — Development of Shoulder-girdle and Fore-limb in Amblystoma

punctatum 295

Harrison, Ross G. — Development of Fore-limb of Amblystoma punctatum .. .. 295

Morrill, C. Y. — Ilegeneration after Exarticulation in Diemyctylus viridescens .. 295

Swingle, W. W. — Effect of Starvation on Tadpoles 295

,. .. — lliyro id Feeding of Tadpoles 29G

Allen, Bennet 31. — Removal of Thyroid from Tadpoles 206

Terry, George S. — Effect on Ossification in Tadpoles of Extirpating Thyroid .. 296

Rogers, James B. — Effect of Thyroid Extirpation on Thymus and Pituitary Glands 206

Uhlenhuth, Eduard — Influence of Thymus-f ceding 296

Stewart, Chester A. — Effects of Underfeeding Young Albino Bats 297

Uhlenhuth. E. — Graf Is ii, Amblystoma 297

Hays, Frank A. — Sexual Activity of Male Babbit in Belation to Progeny .. .. 207

Lloyd-Jones, Orren, & F. A. II\ys— Sexual Activity of Male Babbit 298

Smith, Bertram G. — Germinal Vesicle in Cryptobranchus 359

Hill, J. P. — Early Development of Opossum 359

Cole, L. J., & L. J. Bachhuber — Lead-poisoning of Germ-cells 360

Curtis, G. M. — Seminiferous Tubules of Mammals 360

YoccM. Harry B. — Spermatogenesis in Mouse 360

Malone, Julian Y. — Spermatogenesis of Dog .. •• 360

Papanicolaou, George N., & Charles R. Stockard — Idiosome in Spermatogenesis

of Guinea-pig .. .. , 361

Danchakofp, Vera — Development of Bed Blood Corpuscles 361

Stewart, Fred. W. — So-called Thymus IV. of Cat .. 362

X CONTENTS.

PAOI

Atwell, Wayne J. — Development of Hypophysis of Rabbit 362

„ „ — Development of Hj/pophi/sis of Anura 362

Riddle, OsCAK — Right and Left Testes of Pigeons 363

Pearl, Raymond — Influence of Age on Reproductivity of Fowls 363

„ „ — Age and Fertility in Fowls 363

„ „ — Sex-ratio in Domestic Fowl 363

Jordan, H. E. — Case of False Hermaphroditism 364

Harman, Mary T. — Superfetation in Cow 364

Danchakoff, Vera — Grafts of Spleen on Allantois 364

Sundara, Raj B. — Notes on Fresh-water Fishes of Madras {2 Ggs.) 364

Hatai, Shinkishi — Growth of Parts of Rats and of the Whole 366

Pearl, Raymond — Proportion of Sexes in Whitefish 366

6. Histology.

Danchakoff, Vera — Differentiation of Cells in the Developing Organism .. .. 39
Lewis, Warren H., & Margaret R. Lewis — Behaviour of Explanted Striped

Muscle in Cultures 40

Wallin, Ivan E. — Thymus-lilce Structures in Larval Lamprey 40

Erdmann, Rhoda — Chicken Bone-marrow in Plasma Medium 41

Heitz-Boyer & Scheikevitsch — Osseous Regeneration in the Adult 41

DusTiN, A. P. — Epithelial Reversions in Human Thymus 41

Barbieri, Nicola Alberta — Structure of Optic Nerve 41

Jordan, H. E., & J. B. Banks— Jnfercct/aied Discs in Heart-muscle of Ox .. .. 41

Arey, L. B. — Shape of Red-blood Corpuscles in Mammals 182

Reese, Albert M. — Blood-corpuscles of Alligator 183

Retterer, Ed., & H. Necville — Fatty Tissue of Crocodilinns 183

Lewis, Warren H., & Margaret R. Lewis — Time occupied in Mitosis .. .. 183

Fisher, Homer G. — Minute Structure of Retractor Penis-muscle of Dog .. .. 183

Arey, Leslie B. — Phagocytosis by Osteoclasts .. 183

Rasmussen, a. T. — Seasoned Changes in Lnterstitial Cells of Woodchuch 184

Arey, Leslie B. — Shape of Mammalian Red Blood-corpuscle 298

Johnson, Franklin P. — Lobules of Pig's Liver 298

Ruth, E. S., & R. B. Gibson — Melanophores of Lizards 298

Wallin, Ivan E. — Branchial Epithelium of Ammoeoetes 298

HoAG, L. A. — Minute Structure of Sensory Root of Trigeminal Nerve 299

Dewey, Kaethe W. — Lining of Perivasctdar Spaces 366

CoNGDON, E. D. — Heart-muscle of Embryo Chick 366

JORDON, H. E. — Giant-cells of Yolk-sac and Bone-marroio 367

„ „ — Hidolngy of Lymph 367

Rao, C. B. N. — Iridocytes in Batrachian Larvx 307

Clark, E. R., & E. L. Clark — Phagocytosis in Tadpole's Tail 368

Gardiner, J. Stanley, & G. H, F. Nuttall — Fish-freezing 368

Amemiya, I. — Telescope-eye of Goldfish 368

Whitehocse, R. H. — Caudal Fin of Chaudhuria 368

c. General.

^ICK, L. B.— Effect of Alcohol on White Mice 42

Cockerell, T. D. A. — Auditory Ossicles of Aplodontia 42

Calvet, Louis — Atrophy of Right Superior Vena cava in Sheep . , 43

Boutan, L. — R6le of Fins in Teleosts with Swim-bladder 43

CONTENTS. XI

PACK

KoPACZEWSKi, W. — Poison of Mursena 43

„ — Serum of Muraena ., 43

„ — Toxicity of Serum of Murxna 43

RoBLE, Louis — Evolution of Salmonidx 44

Perkier, Edmond — Histenj of Faunaa'and its Felntion to Sex 4

Pearl, Raymond — Measurement of \Degrees of Kinship 44

Donaldson, Henry H. — Myelin and Advanring Age 185

Mayer, A. G. — Theory of Nerve ConduHion .. .. 185

Barbell, Joseph — Origin of Air-hreathirut Vertebrates 185

Hagedoorn, A. G., & A. L. — Bats and Evolution 185

KiTTELSON, John A. — Post-natal Growth of Kidneij of Albino Bat 186

Goodrich, Edwin S. — '■'{Proboscis Pores'^ in Craniate Vertebrates 186

Strong, R. M. — Origin of Melanin in Feather-germs of Fowls 187

Walton, Ch AS. L. — Agricultural Zoologiral Survey of Aberystioith Area 187

Sodthwell, T., & B. Prashad— jS/urf?/ ()/■ il/Zsa 187

Hess, Walter N. — Seasonal Changes in Kidney of Stickleback 299

Legendre, J. — Study of Malagasy Perch 299

Delphy, Jean — Anomalous Pelvic Fins in Cottusbnhalis 299

Williamson, H. Chas. — Otolith-metlwd of Estimating Age of Plaice .... .. 300

Cutler, D. Ward — Bings in Scales of Plaice aiid Flounders 300

LiPPiNCOTT. W. A. — Blue And alusians 300

PococK, R. I. — Bacnlum or Os penis in some Genera of Mustelidx 300

Petersen, C. G. JoH. — Fauna of Coastal Waters 369

J.^^ovT^Mxm^Y.— Food of Post-larval Fishes 370

Smith, Wilbur C. — Disappearance of Conus arteriosus in Teleosts 370

Nanta. a. — Note upon the large Mononuclear Leucocytes of the Peripheral Blood

and the Macrophages at the Site of Injury amongst the Wounded 370

Bablet, J. — The Leucocytes in Experimentnl Spirochetosis ictohxmorrhagica in the

Guinea-pig 371

Tunicata.

Hecht, Selig — Sensory Beactions of Ascidia atra 301

Crozier, W. J. — Photic Sensibility of Balanoglossids 301

Name, WiLLARD G. Van — Philippine Ascidians 371

Hecht, Selig — Vascular System of Ascidian 371

INVERTEBRATA.

MoUusca.

«• Cephalopoda.

Botazzi, F. — Posterior Salivary Glands of Cephalopods 37 2

y. Gastropoda.

Thompson, Elizabeth LocKwooD — Experiments with Physa gyrina 45

Bartsch, Paul — Philippine Species of Amphidromus 45

C0VKi,Ji!,E. G.—Centrifuged Eggs of Crepidula 188

TAYLOTi, Jony W.—Briti>'h Terrestrial and Fresh-w((ter MoUusca 188

Crozier, W. J. — Immunity Coloration in Nudibranchs 188

Gatevby, J.Bronte— Cytoplasmic Inclusions in Germ-cells of Snail 189

Xll CONTENTB.

PAUK

COPELAMD, Manton — Smell (Did Taste in Marine Stiails 301

Olmsted, J. M. D. — Locomotion of Gastropods 301

Parker. G. H. — Pedal Locomotion of Aplysia calif or nica 302

Arthropoda.

CoCKERELL, T. D. A. — Arthropods from Burmese Amber 45

„ „ — Arthropods in Burmese Amber 46

RuEDEMANN, R. — Median Eije in TvUobites 18lt

a. Insecta.

McIndoo, N. E. — Itecognition among Insects 46

'RABAVD,Fj'nEN}iE— Paralyzing Habits of some Hymenoptera 46

Gate^by, A. Brostb— Cytoplasmic Bodies in Germ-cells of Lepidoptei a .. .. 47

Fauchere — Silkworms in Madagascar 47

LiECAihLO'S, A. — Variations ifi Silhworms 48

„ — Parthenogenesis in Silk-moths 48

Feytaud, J. — Parthenogenesis in Otiorhyiichus sulcatus 48

HiTCmE.ViAhrER— Study of 3Tyelophilus minor 48

Taylor, Momc a— Fertilization in Gnat 49

MiSRA, C. .S. — Sugar-cane Leaf-hopper 49

NvTTALL,G. U.F.— -Bibliography of Human Lice 49

„ — Lice and Disease 49

,, — Biology of Lice 50

HowLETT, F. M. — Notes on Lice 51

MviR, Frederick— Philippine Derbidx 51

Rothschild, N. C — Convergence among Ecloparasitic Insects 52

Chopard, L. — Abdominal Extremity in Orthoptera 52

FoucHER, G. — Longevity of Males of Carausius morosis 52

GoLDSCHMiDT, ^iGiikRD—Intersexual Form of Gypsy-moth 52

Mac DowuLL, Edwin Carleton — Bristle Inheritance in Drosophila 53

TiLLYARD, R. J. — Monograph on Dragonflies 55

Nakahara, AVaro — Nuclear Division in the Adipose Cells of Inserts 189

Tillyard. E. J. — Studies in Mecoptera 190

Buxton, P. A. — Protocerebrum of Micropteryx 190

Cockayne, E. A. — Scales of Leaden Males of Agriades thetis 191

JoiCEY, J. J., & G.Talbot — Gynandromorph of Papilio lyophron 191

MoTTRAM, J. C. — Protective Coloration in Lepidopf era 191

Hawkes, Oneka A. Merritt — Inheritance in Silkworms 191

UviE,!^.!!.— Study of Holly Tortrix Moth 191

Thompson, W. R. — Dipterous Parasite in Terrestrial Isopods 192

Warren, Don C. — Mutations in Drosophila busckii 192

Hill, G. F. — Bionomics of the Buffalo-fly {Lyperosia exigua de Meijere) 19ii

Brocket, F. — Circulation of the Blood in Insects 193

NORTHOP, John N. — Growth-period and Duration of Life 194

MuNRO, James W. — Study of Structure, Habits, and Life-history of Hylastes .. 194

Sloane, Thomas G. — Endoskeleton of Head and the Coxid Cavities of Beetles .. 194

Hegner, E. AV., & C. P. Russell — Germ-cell Cycle of Dinuetes nigrior 194

MacGregor, Malcolm E. — Insects and Disease 302

VAN Bemmelen, J. F. — Wing-markings of Arctiidx 302

Tillyard, R. J. — Wing-venation of Lepidoptera 302

CONTENTS. xm

PAGE

Gautieu, Ol. — Observations on Caterpillars of Cahhage-white Caterpillars .. .. :>02

Keys. James H. — Maritime Coleoptera 303

Carpenter, George H., & F. J. S. Toi.hKUViSpirades of Bijpoderma JShujcfot .. S03

Plough, Harold H. — Temperature and Crossing-over in Drosophila :;03

McEwEN, R. S. — Reactions of Drosophila to Light and Gravity 303

Sanford, Eldon W. — Digestion in Coclro'irli. 304

'NvTTAhh, G. R. v.— Pathological Effects of Phthirus pubis 304

Carpenter, George H. — Collembola of Ahor Expedition 304

TiLLYARD, R. 3.— Caudal Gills of Larvx of Zi/gopterid Dragonflies (2 figs.) . . . . 304

Rabaud, E. — Reflex Immobilization in Arthrojiods 372

„ — Rule of Ganglia in Immobiiization 373

WhkkIjER, W.M.— Study of Ant Larva: {2 Hgs.) 373

PiCTET, Arnold — Dimorphic Colourimi in Lepidopiera 374

Reeves, Edna M. — Inheritance of Extra BriMes in Drosophila 375

Shelford, Victor E. — Coloration of Tiger-beetles 375

Cameron, A. E. — Leaf-eating Crane-fly 376

Bacot, A. — Viability of Mosquito-eggs 376

Cameron, A. E.,& R. C. Tkeherne— T/te Pear r/m>s 376

Cdllen, Anna M. — Rectal Tracheatiou of Dragon-fly Larva 376

Jamieson, Janet P. — Rectal Trachex of Dragon-fly Larra 377

Carroll, Mitchel — Hind-gut and Rectal Tracheae in Dragon-fly\Larta 377

BoDiNE, Joseph H. — Experiments on Respiration in Larval Dragon-flies .. .. 377

Machida, J. — Spermatogenesis of an Orthopteron 377

Steven, H. M. — Biology of Chermes 378

Brindley, H. H. — Notes on Earwigs 378

Nuttall, G. H. F. — Biology of Phthirus pubis 378

;S. Myriopoda.

Carl, J. — New Spirostreptidx 195

Brolemann, Henry W. — Peculiar Variation in Brachydesmus .. ..' 305

5. Arachnida.

Berland, Jeanne — Alteration of Instinct in Spider 57

Jordan, H. E. — Cardiac and Skeletal Muscle of Scorpnon 57

Williamson, W. — Rare Hydracarid 57

Hirst, Stanley — New Parasitic Acari 57

Jordan, H. E. — Leg-muscle of Sea-spider 57

Wilson, Edmond B. — Chondriosomes of Scorpion, Spermatozoa 195

Stendall, J. A. Sidney — Ulster Spiders 195

Badoock, H. D. — Ant-like Spiders 195

Walter, C. — Swiss Halacaridm 195

Soar, Charles D. — Fly dracarina of Epping Forest 306

Williamson, AV., & Charles D. Soar— Le?)ert/a *e/re< Walter 306

DE Beauchamp, P. — New Pentastomid from a Eish 306

Faust, Ernest Cauroll — Notes on Mussd-mite 379

Tkouessart, E. L. — Mange Mites 379

Reichenow, Ed. — Intracellular Digestion in an Acarid 379

Teodora, G. — Mites as Disease-carriers 379

Berlese, A. — New Earrest Mite 380

XIV CONTENTS.

«• Crustacea.

PAGE

CHihTQs, GaAUijisis— New Zealand Sandhoppers 58

Pearse, a. S. — New Isopods from British Guiana 58

Hekriott, E. M. — Hahits of Lepidurus viridis 58

Allen, E. J., & E. W. Sexton — Lo»s of Eye-pigment in Gammarus cJtevreuxi .. 195

Stebbing, T. R. R. — Malacostraca of Natal 196

Calman, W. T. — Morphology of Bdthynella 196

Tait, John — Body-coluur and Blood-colour in Amphipods 196

Banta, Arthdr M. — Sex Intergrades in Simocephalus .. 197

LoEB, Jacqi'es. & John H. Northop — Heliotropism of Barnacle Lame 197

Yatsu, Naohide — Maxillary Gland of Cypridina hilijendorfi 198

Gravier, Ch. J. — New Parasitic Copepod 306

Mead, Harold T. — Reactions of Sand Crab 380

Salkind, I. — Sensory Structures (f Crab's Claw 380

Caullery. M., & F. Mesnil — Further Observations on Xenocoelomabrumpti .. .. 380

Chilton, Ohas. — Crustaceans from Interior of Australia 38 1

„ ,. — Fossil Species of Phreatoicus 381

„ „ — Australian Isopods 381

LiM, Robert K. S. — BespiratoryMe-hanismofShore-crah 381

COLLINGE, Walter E. — Neiv Is'>pod from British Guiana 381

., „ — Oral Appendages of Isopoda 381

Tesch, J. J. — Siboga Crabs 382

.Torgensen, O. M. — British Occurrence of Neinntoscelis niegalops 382

„ „ — Notes on Development of Shore-crab 382

Annulata.

Mesnil, F., & M. Caullery — Dimorphism in a Pohjchxt 58

Soulier, A. — Segmentation of Ovum of Prolulameilhaci 58

Mesnil, F., & M. Caullery — Peculiarly Adapted Annelid 306

., „ — Notes on Syll ids 306

Redfield, Alfred C, & Elizabeth M. Bright — Effect of Radium on Fertilization

Membrane of Nereis 307

Ellis, Max M. — Branehiobdellids from Michigan Crawfishes 307

Thapar, G. S. — Lymph-glands of Pherftima 382

Stephenson, J. — OUgoclixfa of Inle Lake 383

Horst, R. — Monograph on Polychxts 383

Nematoheiminthes.

Lopez-Nevra, C. Rodriguez— iV^eu) iVematode/rom Paifm/gre 198

Cobb, N. A. — Filter-bed Nematodes ■ • • - • 307

Stewart, P. H. — Development of Ascaris lumbricoides and A. mystax in Mouse .. 307

„ „ — Life history of Axcdris lumbricoides 307

Van Cleave, H. J. — Acanthoce ilial a of S or th American Birds ^ 308

Welch, Paul S., & L. P. Wehrle — Reproduction in Nematodes 383

Shimamuba, ToRAi, & Hajime Fujii — Toxic Constituent of Nematodes 383

CONTENTS. XV
Platyhelminthes.

PAOE

KuDiN, E. — Tapeworms of Eeptiles 198

ZaCHOKKE, F. — Dibothriocephalus provus Sfej'heHS 198

NicOLL, William — Hijdatid Cysts in Monkeys 199

Johnston, S. J. — Trematodes of Audrulian Birds 199

Andre, Emile — Helmintholagical Notes from Switzerland 199

HiLARio, J. S., & h.'D.^YHAUTO's—Efhinostomailocanum(_Uarrl?on) 199

Lebour, Marie V. — Trem:itode Larca from Buccinum undatmn 308

Gilchrist, J. D. F. — Life-history of Distoma lutein sp. n 308

NicOLL, W. — Trematodes of Queensland Reptiles and Frogs 308

„ — New Treniatode from Australiau Poison Snuhes 309

Weidsian, Fred D. — Structure and Development of Cladorchis 309

WAhTON, C.h.— Liter-rot 309

Olmsted, J. M. D. — Fegeneraiion in Planaria maculata 309

Sooth WELL, T., & Baini Prashad — Cestodes of Hilsa 384

Stewart, F. H. — Hymenolepis nana Siebold and H. murina Dujardin 384

Stunkard, H. W. — North-American Treiuatodes 3«4

Goto, S., «fe Y. Matsudaika — New Amphistomid Trematode from a Fish .. .. 385

Faust, Ernest Carroll — American Stephannphialinx 385

Weimer, Bernol E. — Reactions of Fresli-tcater Turhellari an 385

Kaburaki, ToKio — Triclads from Irdd Lahe 386

Incertae Sedis.

Lameere, Aug. — Life-history of Dicyemids 309

Rotatorio.

Whitney, D. D. — Controlling Sex in Rotifers 310

Echinoderma.

Crozier, W. J. — Midtiplicationhy Fission in Holothurians 59

Hawkins, Heruert L. — Buccal Armature of Conulus 59

LoEB, Jacques — Fertilization and Phagocytosis 200

Lille, Ealph S. — Permeability of Sea-urchin Ova 310

Bather, F. A. — Homologies of Anal I 'late in Antedon 310

Painter, Theophilus S. — Cell-division in Monaster and Narcotized Ova .. .. 311

Olmsted, J. M. D. — Physiology of Synaptula hydriformis 311

Macbride, E. W. — Experiments icith Larrul Echinoids 386

Clark, Austin H. — Unstalhed Crinoids of Siboga Expedition 386

Ccelentera.

Broch, Hjalmar — Australian Alcyonarians . . .. 59

Dehorne, Yvonne — Skeleton of Stromatoporoids 60

Broch, Hjalmar — Coppinia of Grammaria abietina 60

Vaughan, T. W. — Studies on Living Corals 200

Yatsu, Naohide — Physiology of Medusse 200

Mayer, A. G. — Nerve Conduction in Cassiopea 201

Parker, G. H. — Activities of Cor ymorpha 311

„ ,, — Suction in Sea-anemone 312

Stephenson, T. A. — Antarctic Actiniari a 312

Briggs, E. A. — Neio Australian Hydroids 387

Bourne, Gilbert C. — Neio Sea-anemones from New Guinea 387

XVI CONTENTS.

TAGF,

Stephenson, T. A. — Irish Actiniar la .. .... .. :i87

Matthai, G. — Nature of Madreporarian Skeleton :!87

„ — Reactions of Astrseid Corah 388

Yatsu, Naohide — Locomotion and Reactions of Charyhdea 388

Porifera.

Dendy, Arthur — Cheesernan Spicule of LatrunctiNa .. 60

Stephens, Jane — Irish Sponges 61

Vanet, C, & A. Allemand-Martin — Larva of Horse-sponge 201

Crozier, Blanche B. — Buds of Donutia .. !:i01

Kallmann, E. F. — Desmacidonid Sponges 201

Jorgensen, Olga M. — Larvx of Grantia compressa 388

Annandale, Nelson — Sponges from Inle Lahe 389

Protozoa.

Mast, S. O. — Conjugation and Encystation in Didinium nasutuni 62

Geokgevitch, JivoiN — Life-history of Ceratomyxa herouardi 62

LiCHTENSTEiN, Jean L. — New Mode of Multiplication in Amcehidium 63

Alexeieff, A. — Blastocystis entercola 63

Leger, L., & O. Ddboscq — New Species of Pscndoldossia 63

Georgevitch, F. — Life-cycle of Myxidium gadi 63

„ — Leptotheca and Glugea 6.^

DoBELL, Clifford — New Genus of Heliozoa 201

Mathjs, C, & L. Mercier — Entamcela dyscnterix 202

Woodruff, L. L. — Bhythms in Eudomixis 202

„ „ — Influence of Environment on Endomixis 202

Penard, E. — Genus Loxodes 202

FraN9a, Carlos — Classification of Hxmosporidia 203

Hyman, LiBBiE H. — Metabolic Gradients in Amoeba and their Belation to Amoeboid

Movement 312

Kepner, W. a., & J. Graham Edwards — L'eactions of Pelomyxa to Food .. .. 313

Dobell, Clifford — Entamoeba histolytica and Entamoeba ranarum 313

., „ & Margaret W. Jepps — Baces of Enfamoela histolytica .. .. 313

Jepps, Margaret W., & Clifford Dobell — New Amoeba from Man 313

LxJND, E. J. — Intracellular Bespiration in Paramecium 314

YoDNG, R. T. — Experimental Induction of Endomixis in Paramecium aurelia .. 314

Lund, E. J. — Eeversibility of Morphogenetic Processes in Bursaria 314

Leger, M., & E. Parry — Trypanosomes in Monheys 314

Paillot, A. — New Microsporidian in Cabbage White Caterpillars 314

Keilin, D. — New Cephaline Gregarine 315

Newton, R. Bullen — Foraminiferal and Nullipore Structures in some Tertiary

Limestones from New Guinea 315

Schaeffer, Asa A. — New Amoeba: 389

Lund, E. J. — Bespiration in Paramecium 389

Buhig AS, Ramon HoBmiio— Blood-red Seas 390

Schaeffer, Asa A. — New Diatom-eating Flagellate 390

Werner, H., & 0. Wiese — Eelapjsing Fever 390

Gosh, Ekendranath — Studies on Infusoria 390

Bhatia, B. L. — Protozoa of Lahore 391

CONTENTS. XVI 1

BOTANY.

GENERAL,

Including' the Anatomy and Physiology of Seed Plants.

PAGE

GuiLLiERMOND, A. — Mitocliondrias of Plcmt-cells 204

Dangeard, P. A. — Nature and Function of Chondriomes 204

GviLiAEB.uo^i>, A. ^Nature and Significance of the Chondriome 316

Tenopyb, L. A. — Constancij of Cell-Shape 316

Structure and Development.

Veg-etative.

Jaccard, P. — Wood of Beciduous Trees 64

SocEGES, E. — Development of Root-tip in Sagittaiia 205

Brush, W. D. — Distinctive Characters of Woods of North American I'latanus . . 205

Faust, E. C. — Resin Secretion in Balsamorrhiza 206

Rendle, Dr. — The Use of Microscopical Characters in the Systematic Study of the

Higher Plants .. 317

Kryshtofovich, A. — On the Cretaceous Flora of Russian Sakhalin 392

Reproductive.

Brown, M. M. — Emhryogeny of Phaseolus .. 64

SouEGES, R. — Emhryogenij of the Alismacex 65

GuiGNARD, L. — Ovule in Apocynaceas and Asclejnadaceas 65

GuERiN, P. — Development of Pollen in Salvia 206

Le Goo, M. J. — Effect of Foreign Pollination on Cycas Rumphii 317

hx MAHCA.F.—Graft-hylrids 318

Physiology.

Nutrition and Growth.

Smith, E. F. — Mechanism of Overgrowth in Plants 207

Yendo, Y. — Injection Experiments on Plants 207

CRYPTOGAMS.

Pteridophyta.

West, C. — Stelar System of the Marattiacex 66

Kashyap, S. E. — Equisetum dehile .. .. 66

Watts, W. W. — Australian Ferns a7id Mosses 67

WuiST, Elizabeth D. — Apogamy in Phegopteris and Osmunda 67

Farwell, O. A. — Notes on Hippochxte 68

Butters, F. K. — Pellma in North America 68

^AKViELhyO. A.— American Fern Notes 68

h

XVlll CONTENTS.

PAGE

Klebs, G. — Fern I'rothaUia 68

Hayata, B. — Feins of Formosa t>9

howEn,F.O.—Phylogeny of the Pteroidex 208

Sahni, B. — Evolution of Branching in the Filicales 209

Ghose, S. L. — Cone of SelaginelJa iKillidissima 210

DiELS, L. — Asplenium Scelosii Leyh 211

Steil, W. N. — Sfiidij of Some Netv Cases of Apogamy in Ferns 318

Davie, R. C. — Comparative List of Fern Pinna-traces, with some Notes on the

Leaf -trace ill the Ferns 318

Bryop}iyta.

Kashyap, S. R. — Tarfjionia hypophylla 69

MacLeod, J. — iStatistics of Moss Structure 69

Jones, D. A. — Welsh Bryophyta 70

iivR^T,G.V.— Wiltshire Mosses .. 70

Mason, T. G. — Carbohydrates of Musci 71

DoDiN, R. — Water-conduction in Marchantiacefe 71

Heszog, T. — Mid ti cellular Spores in Mosses 71

SCHIFFNER, V. — Lophozia Batcheri and L. Baueriana 72

RIl-ller, K. — European Hepaticas 211

Evans, A. W. — North American Hepati ex 212

Kashyap, S. R. — Indian Liverworts 212

Sisi, T. R. — South African Hepoticte 212

Warnstorf, C. — Pottia 213

TiMM, R. — Mosses of North-west Germany 213

RiVETT, M. F. — Structure of the Cytoplasm, in the Cells of Alicularia scalaris .. 319

DouiN, Ch. ET R. — Le liehoulia Itaddi 319

Ross. J. — Ptilidixim pulclierrinnim 319

Evans, Alexander W. — Neio Lejeunca from Bermuda and the West Indies .. .. 320

BIelin, E. — Archegonium of Spha(inum squarrosum 320

Wheldon, J. A. — Collection, Taxonomy, and Ecolorii/ of the Sphagna 320

Ingham, W. — Moss Exchange Club 320

Frye, T. C. — Bhacomitrium in North America 320

de la Varde, R. Potier — Ptychomitrium subcrispatvm Th&r. & P. de laV 321

Harris, G. T. — Schisfosteria osmundacea - 321

TiMM, R. — Splachnacex 321

Arnell, H. W. — Bryophi/ta of the Vega Expedition 321

Harris, G. 'J'. — On Schistostega osmundacea Mohr 322

Thallophyta.
Algae.

Wesv. G. ^.—Biology of Algx " 72

PiERCY, Alma — Structure and Mode of Life of Hormidium flaccidum 72

Hill, J. Ben — Staining of Minnte Algx 73

Grove, W. B. — Pleodorina illinoiensis 73

Chien, S. S. — Spirogyra 74

BouRQUiN, Helen — Starch-formation in Zygnema 74

PoYMALY, A. DE — Dicliotomosiphon tuheiosus .. 74

CONTENTS. XIX

PAtiS

Oehlkebs, F. — Nuclear Division in Characex 75

SvEDELius, N. — Alternation of Generations in Florideae 75

Mazza, A. — Oceanic Ahjoloijy 76

Collins, F. S., & A. B. HERVET—J/<)f« o/ J5ermuda 76

MuENSCHER, W. L. C. — Algal Associations of San Juan Island 77

Hdrd, Miss, & others — Puget Sound Algas 77

BoRGENSEN, F., & Mdme. Padl Lemoine — Marine Algae of the Danish West Indies 78

Yendo, K. — Japanese Marine Algm • 78

Teiling, E. — Caledonian Phijtoplanldon 218

Schiller, J. — Heterodinium in the Adriatic 214

Mangin, L. — Chsetoceros criophilus 214

Peter, A. — Diatoms from Hanover and the Uaiz 215

Elmore, C. J. — Changing Di'itoms of Devil's Lake, North Dakota 215

TiLDEN, J. E. — My xophijcex of North America 215

Transeau, E. N. — Algm of Michigan 215

'iiAnms,G.T.—De8mid Flora of Dartmoor 215

Schiller, J. — Meringosphxra 216

MacCaughey, V. — Algx of the Hawaiian Archipelago 216

Samsonoff-Aruffo, C. — Calcareous Algx from Malta 216

Rosen viNGE, L. N. — Marine Algee of Denmark 216

Pascher, a. — Ehizopodial Development of the Flagellatm. I. Some Ehizopodial

Chrijsomoiiads with Chromatophores 322

^^ — Ehizopodial Development of the Flagellatx. II. Dinamaeba varians

— a Novelty with Dinoflagella-like Swarmers 322

„ — Ehizopodial Development of the Flagellatx. III. Ehiznpodicd Nets

as Captiiriug-apparatus in a Plasmodial Chrysonwnad 322

„ —Ehizopodial Development of the Flagellatx. IV. Fusion-plasmodia

in Flagellatx, and their Significance in the Descent of Ehizopods

from Flagellatx •• 323

Lebour, Marie V. — Microplankton of Plymouth Sound 323

„ „ — Peridiniales of Plymouth Sound 323

TscHENZOFF, B. — Nuclear Division in Euglena viridis 323

Hartmann, M. — Nuclear Division in Chlorogoni am elongatum 324

ScHVSStfiG. ii. — Fresh-water Algx of the Atistrian Coast Districts 324

Oestrup, E. — Marine Diatoms from the Coasts of Iceland 324

Okdda, Y., & S. Nakayama — The Quality of '' Asakmanori " 324

3Iatsui, H. — Eelation between the Chemical Constituents of " Asakusanori " and its

Quality 324

Okuda, Y.. & P. Eto — Iodine in Marine Algx 325

Howe, ^[ausiiall A. — Murine Algx of Cuba 325

Fungi.

Edison, H. A. — New Phycomycete 79

Grove, W. B. — Rhizophidium acuforme 79

Main, Hugh — Entomophthora americana 79

Melhls, l.Y>.—Peronosporacex 79

HODGETTS, W. J. — Discharge of Spores of Leptosphxria acuta 79

Stevens, F. L. — Spegazzinian Meliola Types ^0

Pool, V. W., & M. B. McKay — Infection by Cercospora belicola HO

Grove, W. B. — Septoria Chenopodii •• ^^

XX CONTENTS.

FACE

Coons, G. H. — Factors involvedin the Growth of P>/cnidia 80

BiJK, P. VAN DER — Notes on Coniothecium 81

Long, W. H.. & others — Uredinex .'. ■ 81

Brown, W. — Studies in the Physiology of Parasitism 81

Mdta, Elisa, & GiNO PoLLACCi — Morphological Variations of Fungi due to

Environment 81

Shear, C. L. — Studies of the Schweinitz Collection of Fungi 82

Lloyd, 0. G. — Mycological Notes 82

Dearness, John, & T. Tanaka — New or Noteworthy Fungi 82

BoTTOMLET, AvERiL Maud — Natal Fungi 82

Maitland, T. D., & E.M.Wakefield — Notes on Uganda Fungi 83

Wakefield, E. M. — Nigerian Fungi. Ill 83

Pbaeger, R. Lloyd — Irish Fungi .. .. 83

Sharples, A. — Rubber Disease 83

Wade, H. Windsor — Pathogenic Fungus 84

Carpenter, C. W. — Tuber-rots caused by Fusarium 84

Stakman, E. C. — Immunity from Parasitic Fungi 84

Quanjer, H. H., & others — Plant Diseases 84

Long, W. H., & others — Disease of Trees 88

DuFRENOY, Jean — Fndotrophic Mycorhiza of Ericacess S8

Murphy, P. A. — Morphology and Cytology of the Sexual organs of Phytophthora

erythroseptica Pethyb 217

RosENBAUM, J. — Study of Phytophthora 217.

Weston, W. H. — Development of Thraustotheca 217

Moreau, F., & Madame — Anomalies in Mucorini 217

l>iFE-iiiSTonY and Poisoning Properties of Claviceps Paspali 217

Hawkins, L. A. — Efei-t of Fusarium on Potato Tubers .. .. 218

Thom, C, & J. N. CuRRiE — Aspergillus niger Group 218

'M.ont:AV,F., & Madame— Endophyllum Spores 218

Potter, Alden A., & G. \V. Cooas—Ustilagineae .. 219

Stakman, E. C, & others — Uredinex 219

BouDiER, E., & others — New or Ikire Fungi 220

Yates, H. S. — Fungi from Southern China 220

Harper, E. T. — Two Eemarhable Discomycetes 220

Shantz, H. L., & R. L. PiEMEiSEL — Fungus Fairy Rings 220

Pool, V. W., & M. B. McKay — Climatic Conditions and Conidial Development .. 221

Thom, C. H., & S. H. Ayers — Effects of Pasteurization on Mould-spores 221

Stevens, Neil E. — Relation of Fungi to Host 221

Cvi.¥E?VER, C \f,. & OTaEv^s—Eff'eci of Blacli-rot Fungus on the Apple 221

Hawkins, L. A. — Growth of Fungi in Concentrated Sohdions 222

Weir. J. K. — Altitudinal Range of Forest Fungi 222

Brooks, C. B., & J. S. Cooley — Apple-rot Fungi in Relation to Temperature . . 222

Wolf, Frederick A. — Citrus Canher 222

Mrlhus, I. E., & others — Spongospora subterranea 223

Weir, J. R., & others — Diseases of Plants 223

Wilson, G, W. — North American Peronosporales 325

^RiKSSOii, J.— Development of Phytophthora 325

Stevens, F. L. — Parasites on Meliola 325

DoiVGE,ETHEh M.— South African Perisporiales 326

KiLLTAN, Karl — Development of Cryptomyces Pteridis 326

Fitzpatrick li.M.— Sexuality in Rhizina undulata 326

Lehman, S. G. — Sphseronema fimbriatum 327

CONTENTS. XXI

PAGE

G BAY ATT, G.PlLIPPO, & OTHERS — £7)efZi7ie« 327

Food Production Office — Swuts of Cereals 327

Harper, E. T., & OTHERS— //2/meriom//ce<e8 328

MAinE.h.— Study of Tn'choloma 328

Long, W. H., & R. M. Harsch — Cullures of Wood-rotting Fungi on Artificial Media 328

Neger, F. W. — Honey-dew Fungi 328

Lloyd, C. G. — Mycological Notes 329

Fragoso,R. G.— New or Rare Fimgi 329

Tanaka, Tyozaburo, & Arthur S. Rhoales — Diseases of Plants 329

Cotton, A. D., & OTHERS — Description and Treatment of Plant Diseases .. .. 329

Ellis, David — Phycomycetous Fungi from the English Coal Measures 392

Lichens.

Porter, Lilian — Attachment Organs of Corticolous Bamalinse 88

Paulson, R. — Varenne Collection of Lichens 89

Herre, A. C. — Lichens of Whatcom County, Washington 89

Riddle, L. W. — Notes on Parmeliopsis 89

Vestal, A. G., & R. Heber Howe — Lichen Ecology 89

Mycetozoa.

Sturgis, W. C. — Notes on New or Rare Myxomycetes 90

Re A, Margaret W., & Margarita DE Stelfox — Irish Mycetozoa 90

KuNKEL, L. O. — Contribution to the Life-histovy of Spongospora subterranea . . . . 90

Meylan, C. — Neto Mycetozoa 393

„ — Mycetozoa from the Jura Mountains 393

Schizophy ta.
Schizomycetes.

Gessard, C. — Erythrogenous Variety of Bacillus pyocyaneus 90

Burnet, E. — Bacteria of Dust 90

Elders, C. — Intestinal Flora of Sprue 91

Matsueka, Y. — Actions of Micro-organisms on Bone-marrow 91

Leygue, G., & J. Haguenau — Epidemic Dysentery on the Somme 92

Chatma^, A. C— Colouring-matter of Red Torulas 227

Petri, L. — Blejiharospora cambivora 227

Berthelot, A. — Bacillus phr.nologenes 227

Doidge, Ethel — Bacillus citromaculans 227

Dorendorf — Botulism 393

Pfeiffer, R., & G. Bessau — Bacteria of Gas Gangrene 394

XXll CONTENTS.

PAGE

MICROSCOPY.

A. Instruments, Accessories, etc.

(1) Stands.

Bavsch & IjOiiB's Metallurgical Microscope, CCM (Fig. 1) 93

(3) Illuminating- and other Apparatus.

^ihhiAM8,K f':.— Interference Refractometer 94

Hubert, H. — Use of the Stereoscope for Examining Superposed Projections .. .. 94

G-LKB.K,'^. ^.—Microscope Illumination {¥\^. I) 228

Kkeley, F. 3.— Polarization and Colour Effects exhibited by certain Diatoms .. . . 332

Godspeed, T. U.— Modified Safety-razor Blade-holder for Temperature Control .. 395
Strutt, Hon. R. J .—Scattering of Light by Dust-free Air, idth Artificial Bepro-

duction of the Blue Sky (1 ^g.) „ 395

AiiiShiE,M. A.—Some Principles of niumination 397

^^ysovDS,¥.Q.— The Polarization of Light 397

^'i^Gvs,'ii.¥.,& Go.— The Barnard Incandescent Gas Lamp (\^g.) 397

(4) Photomicrog-raphy.

Coles, A. C. — Spirochaila icterohsemorrhagica 228

EQGLESTOii.'H..R.— Photomicrographs in Colour 229

Kodak, LmiTEB— Wratten^M" Filters (i figs.) 398

Hallimond, a. F. — Telescopic Focussing Apparatus for Photomicrography (1 fig.) 400

(51 Microscopical Optics and Manipulation.

Guild, J. — Spherometer of Precision 95

Gr.vtson, J. H. — Dividing-engine for Ruling Diffraction Gratings 229

Merwin, H. E.— Dispersion and other Optical Properties in Carborundum .. .. 230

Bale, W. M. — Measurement of Magnifying Power 230

Merwin, H. E.— Optical Properties and Theory of Colour of Pigments and Paints 401

(6) Miscellaneous.

French, J. W.— Balsam P/oWem 230

BoswELL, P. G. H,, & OTHERS — British Resources of Sands and Rocks used in Glass

Manufacture, with Notes on certain Refractory Materials 231

WmGHT,F.'E.—Petrogyaphic Microscope 231

Chauot, E. M.— Chemical Microscopy 402

B. Technique.

CD Collecting- Objects, including Culture Processes.

Bazin — Method for Discovering Fungi in the Sputum of Bronchitics 96

CcTLER, D. W., & R. Williamson — Rapid Differentiation of Amoebae Cysts .. .. 96
ScHEiN, H. — Studies in Cattle-plague 96

CONTENTS. XXlll

PAGE

Shilton, A. W. — Vitality of Einchrpest Virus outside the Animal Body ., .. .. 97

TuLLOCH, W. J. — Medium for Cultivating Bacillus tetani 231

BoQUET, A., & L. Negee — CultivatiiKj the Parasite of Epizootic Lymphangitis .. 232

(.2) Preparing- Objects.

Manalong, C. — Demonstrating Degenei-ation of Peripheral Nerves 98

Gatenbt, J. B. — Demonstrating the Cytoplasmic Inclusion of Germ-cells .. .. 98

HoLLANDE, A. C. — Modification of Bouin's Fluid 2.32

Strong. L. W. — Sliort Method of Preparing Histological Material 232

(3) Cutting', including: Embedding- and Microtomes.

Metcalf, H. E. — Electrifying the Microtome 232

(4) Staining- and Injecting-.

Senevet, G. — Improvised Staining of Malarial Parasites 9S

Eotjbaud, E. — Rapid Examination of Malarial Blood .. 99

Tribondeau, L. — Staining Sporogenoris Bacteria 99

HoRNYOLD, A. GoNDOLFi — Staining Young Eels 99

Tribondeau, L. — Staining Tubercle Bacilli 100

BOTELHO, C. — Simple Method for Double-staining Sporulating Bacteria 233

Cefede, C~ New Method of Staining the Tubercle Bacillus 233

Spehl, P. — Staining Spirilla icith Formol-violet 403

„ — Double Staining of the Tubercle Bacillus : a Modification of Spengler's

Method .. ' .' .. 403

(5) Mounting, including Slides, Preservative Fluids, etc.

Klocker, A. — Preservation of Fermentation Organisms in Nutrient Media .. .. 100

Cropper, J. W. — New Counting Chamber 233

(6) Miscellaneous.

Sezary, A. — Bapid Method for obtaining Hiemohjtic Serum 101

FoucHET, A. — Detection of Bile-pigments in Blood-serum 101

Metallography, etc.

Charpy, G.. & S. Bonnerot — Heterogeneity of Steels 102

Jeffries, Z. — Tungsten-Molijbdenum Alloys ., ., f. .. 102

CoMSTOCK, G. F. — Method for Distinguishing Sulphides from Oxides in Steel .. 103

Mathewson, C. H.. & P. Davidson— ^7).»iea/?wgio/ i?)-OMze 103

Eawdon, H. S. — An Unusual Feature in the Microstructure of Wrought-Iron . . .. 103

Ellis, O.W. — Comparison Screen for Brass 234

Jeffries, Z. — Effect of Great Hydrostatic Pressure on Metals 234

Miller, S. W. — Etching icith Chromic Acid and Hydrogen Peroxide 234

Hurst, J. E. — Heat-treatment of Grey Cast Iron 235

IMoRGANS, T. D.. & F. Rogers — Uniformity of a Cast of Acid Open-heartli Steel .. 235
Brooke, W. J., & F. F. Hunting — Microstructure of Commercially Pure Ironbetween

Ar^and Ar„ .. 235

Bibliography 23d

Cooke, C. J. Bowen — Testing Hardness of Metals by the Boyelle-Morin Apparatus 403

Onslow. H. — S'ature of Grou-ths in Colloidal Silica Solutions 404

Xxiv CONTENTS.

Industrial Processes.

I'AG F.

Harrison, W. — Investigations on Textile Fibres 404

NOTICES OF NEW BOOKS

Harshberger, John W. — A Text-booh of Mycology and Plant Pathology .. .. 330

CusHMAN, J. — The Foraminifera of the Atlantic Ocean. Part I. Astrorhizidas .. 405
Wood, Casey Albert — The Fundus oculi of Birds, especiatly as viewed by the

Opthalmoscope : a Study in Comparative Anatomy and Physiology .. .. 407

MiLNER & Part — Methods in Practical Petrology (I ^g.) 408

SiLBERSTEiN, LuDWlK — Simplified Method of Tracing Rays through any Optical

System 409

jj „ — Elements of the Electro-magnetic Theory of Light .. .. 409

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

Meeting, December 19, 1917 105

January 16, 1918 108

„ February 20, „ 113

March 20, „ 237

Special General Meeting, April 17, 1918 240

Meeting, April 17, 1918 241

May 15, „ 244

June 19, „ 333

October 16, „ 410

November 20, , 420

General Index to Volume 429

dOURN. R. MICR. SOC. 1918. Pl. 1.

4

H. Sidebottom, del. ad. nat.

Adlard & Son & West Newman, Ltd., Inipr.

JOUKNAL

OF THE

EOYAL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY.

MARCH, 1918.

TRANSACTIONS OF THE SOCIETY.

I. — Report on the Recent Foraminifera dredged off the East Coast of
Australia. H.M.S. "Dart," Station 19 (14 i/ay, 1895),
Lat. 29° 22' >S^., Long. 153° 51' U., 4.^^ fathoms. 'Pteropod
Ooze,

By Henry Sidebottom.

[Communicated by E. Heron-Allen and A. Earland.]

{Read October 17, 1917.)
Plates I. -II.

Introduction.

The material which forms the subject of this paper, and which had
been already washed, was sent to me by Mrs. Thornhill after her
husband's death. It had been examined, the Lagense picked out

EXPLANATION OF PLATE I.
wos.

1. — i^uhecularia tibia Jones and Parker, x 75.
2, 3. — Biloculina irregularis d'Orbigny (?). Fig. 2, lateral view. Fig. 3, front
view. X 50.
4. — Spiroloculina nitida d'Orbigny. x 25.
5-7. — S. tenuiseptata Brady. Fig. 6 mounted in Canada balsam, and viewed by
transmitted ligbt. X 75.
8-10. — Miliolina valvularis (Reuss). Fig. 9, oral view, x 25. Fig. 10, trans-
verse section, x 75.
11-14. — If. procera Goes. Figs. 11, 13, lateral views. Figs. 12, 14, oral views.

X 25.
15, 16.— M. o^Zongro (Montagu). Fig. 15, lateral view. Fig. 16, oral view, x 50.
17, 18.— If. limbata (d'Orbignj-). Pigs. 17, 18, lateral views, x 75.
19-21. — M. circularis (Bornemann) var. Fig. 19, lateral view. Fig. 20, oral view.
X 50. Fig. 21, transverse section, x 75.

March 20th, 1918 B

2 Transactions of the Society.

(see Note p. 20) and slides of the other forms prepared, but owing
to the absence of certain species on the slides, which I felt sure
must be present in the material, I went carefully through it again,,
and filled in many omissions. The material weighed (alter
washing) a little over 2^ drams avoirdupois.

I have to thank Messrs. Heron- Allen and Earland for assistance
in the identification of some species, and in the preparation of the
MS. ; Mr. Joseph Wright, of Belfast, for lending me parts of the
late Mr. Millett's album of drawings of published figures ; and my
daughter for finally writing out the MS.

H. S.

The scanty details furnished in the title of the paper constitute
all the available records of the dredging, but are sufficient for a
recoustitution of its origin.

The locality lies off the N.E. corner of the coast of New
South Wales, roughly 250 miles north of Sydney, and more
than 300 miles south of the extremity of the Great Barrier Reef.
The distance from the coast-line is over 50 miles, which, coupled
with the depth of 465 fathoms, show that the material was taken
from the continental shelf beyond the mud line or limit of
terrigenous deposits. The coast in this area slopes rapidly down
to the " Thomson Basin," an isolated deep area lying between 24°
and 52° S. and 149* and 165° E., and having a maximum depth of
3000 fathoms.

" Pteropod Oozes " are found only in tropical and sub-tropical
areas at a considerable distance from, land, and with a depth of
less than 1500 fathoms. The late Sir John Murray and G. V. Lee
in their report on " The Depth and Marine Deposits of the Pacific '^
(Memoirs Mus. Comparative Zoology, 1909, vol. xxxviii., No. 1»
p. 155), draw attention to the absence of this type of deposit in
the Northern and Eastern Pacific, and its extremely limited
distribution in the few localities where it is to be found, viz. in
the neighbourhood of the Great Barrier Reef, the Fiji, Paumotu
and Marquesas groups.

H.-A. & E.

Recent Foraminifera off the East Coast of Australia.

Sub-Kingdom PROTOZOA.

Class RHIZOPODA.

Order FORAMINIFERA (RETICULARIA).

Family MILIOLID.E.

Sub-family Nubeeularinae.

Nuhccidaria Defrance.

Nuhecularia tibia Jones and Parker. (PI. I, fig. 1.)

Nuhecularia tibia Jones and Parker,-1860, Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc, vol. xvi,

p. 455, pi. XX, figs. 48-51.
N. tibia Millett, 1898, etc., 1898, Eept. Rec. Foram. Malay Archipelago,

Journ. Roy. Micr. Soc, p. 261, pi. v, fig. 3.

Tragments occur consisting of from one to three segments.
A solitary translucent specimen has the initial chamber attached.
See illustration and jVTillett's remarks in the above reference under
Articulina conico-articulata Batsch.

Sub-family Miliolinae.
Biloculina d'Orbigny.

Biloculina de/pressa d'Orbigny,

Biloculina depressa d'Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci Nat., vol. vii, p. 298, No. 7.
B. depressa d'Orbigny, Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 145, pi. ii, figs. 12, 15-17 ;
pi. iii, figs. 1, 2.

The orifice, in some of the tests, is a long slit, in others it is
oval and at the end of a short neck,

Biloculina depressa, var. murrhyna Schwager.

Biloculina murrliyna Schwager, 1866, Novara-Exped. Geol. Theil, vol. ii,

p. 203, pi. vi, fig. 15 a-G.
B. depressa, var. murrliyna, Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 146, pi. ii, figs.

10, 11.

A solitary example. The basal spines are not pronounced.

Biloculina lievis (Def ranee),

Pyrgo Iwvis Defrance, 1824, Diet. Sci. Nat., vol. xxxii, p. 273, Atlas,

pi, Ixxxviii, fig. 2,
Biloculina Ictvis, Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 146, pi. ii, figs, 18, 14.

The specimens are of the "depressa" type. The subsidiary
keel is not well developed.

B 2

Transactions of tlie Society.

Biloculina buUoides d'Orbigny.

Biloculina buUoides d'Orbigny, 1826, Ann; Sci. Nat., vol. vii, p. 297, No. 1,

pi. xvi, figs. 1-4.
B. buUoides Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 142, pi. ii, figs. 5, 6.

Two typical tests occur, thougli one of them has a rather long,
narrow flange projecting at its base.

Biloculina ringens (Lamarck).

Miliolitet ringens, Lamarck, 1804, Ann. du Museum, vol. v, p. 351, No. 1,

vol. ix, pi. xvii, fig. 1.
Biloculina ringens Brsidy, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 142, pi. ii, figs. 7, 8.

The orifice varies in shape. One test has the mouth composed,
as it were, of two flanges, the opening being a narrow slit. Another
test has its width greater than its height, and others again tend
towards B. elongata d'Orb.

Biloculina irregularis d'Orbigny. (PI. I, figs. 2, 3 (?).)

Biloculina irregularis d'Orbigny, 1839, Foram. Amer. Merid., p. 67, pi. viii,
figs. 20, 21.

Characteristic examples occur. There are also a number of
small, polished globular tests, which I do not think are immature
specimens of the above. They may be the B. glohclus of Eeuss,
An interesting set, from which I have chosen one specimen for
illustration.

Biloculina sphtera d'Orbigny.

Biloculina sphcera d'Orbigny, 1839, Foram. Amer. Merid., p. 66, pi. viii,

figs. 13-16.
B. sphcera Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 141, pi. ii, fig. 4, a, b.

A solitary example. Schlumberger treats this form as Plani-
spirina, but until the consensus of opinion is more definite upon the
subject, it is perhaps as well to keep it among the Biloculinse.

Biloculina coniata Brady.

Biloculina cotnata Brady, 1881, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xxi, N.S.,

p. 45.
B. coniata Brady 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 144, pi. iii, fig. 9, a, b.

The tests agree with the " Challenger " illustrations.

Spiroloculina d'Orbigny.
Spiroloculina excavata d'Orbigny.

Spiroloculina excavata d'Orbigny, 1846, For. Foss. Vienne, p. 271, pi. xvi,

figs. 19-21.
S. excavata Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 151, pi. ix, figs. 5, 6.

Four occur. They agree well with d'Orbigny's figures in the
above reference.

Recent Foraminifera off the East Coast of Australia. 5

Spiroloculina impressa Terquem.

Spiroloculina impressa Terquem, 1878, Mem. Soc. Q6ol. Fr., ser. 3, vol. i,

p. 53, pi. X, fig. 8.
S. impressa Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 151, pi. x, figs. 3, 4.
S. impressa Sidebottom, 1904, Eec. Foram. Isl. Delos, Mem. Manchester

Lit. Phil. Soc, vol. xlviii. p. 15, pi. ii, figs. 9-11.

The specimens are small, but agree well with the " Challenger "
and " Delos " tests.

Spiroloculina nitida d'Orbigny. (PI. I, fig. 4.)

Spiroloculina nitida d'Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii, p. 298, No. 4.
S. nitida, Millett, 1898, etc.. For. Malay Archipelago, Journ. Roy. Micr.
Soc, p. 265, pi. v, figs. 9-13.

The specimens are in a curious condition, looking as if they had
been plastered over with debris, and it is difficult to make out the
earlier chambers. The surface is dull. The final chamber is
produced, and swollen near the orifice. Three found.

Spiroloculina tenuis Czjzek.

Quinqueloculina tennis Czjzek, 1848, Haidinger's Naturw. Abhandl., vol. ii,

p. 149, pi. xiii, figs. 31-34.
Spiroloculina tennis Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 152, pi. x, figs. 7-11.

Two varieties. One typical, and the other similar to the
" Challenger " illustration, pL x, fig, 9.

Spiroloculina acutimargo Brady.
Spiroloculina acutimargo Brady, 1884, Chall Eept., p. 154, pi. x, figs. 12-15.

Both forms as represented by the " Challenger" figures, 12, 13,
are present.

Spiroloctilina tenuiseptata Brady. (PI. I, figs. 5-7.)
Spiroloculina tenuiseptata Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 153, pi. x, figs. 5, 6.

Figs. 5, 6. — This is an interesting, almost circular form. The
" shelly septum " is concealed by granular substance in most cases,
but a specimen mounted in Canada balsam reveals it clearly, as
shown in fig. 6. The peripheral edge is channelled. The orifice is
situated at the end of a produced neck. In fig. 6 the neck is
broken off. Under the name Spiroloculina dorsata Eeuss, var.
ctrculaiis, Chapman (1915, Zool. Ees. "Endeavour," Nat. Mus.
Melbourne, vol. iii., pt. 1, p. 7, pi. i, fig. 1) figures a form which
appears to be like that illustrated and described above, but he
gives few particulars, and without seeing his specimens it is
impossible to say whether our specimens are identical or not. The
arrangement of the early chambers as viewed in balsam strongly

6 Transactions of the Society.

suggest Opthalniidium, but the dorsal edge is double and grooved,
and it may prove to be a transition form.

Fig. 7. — Five occur, but only one is in perfect condition. -The
tests are transparent and exceedingly fragile, showing no signs of
the " shelly septum " mentioned by Brady. They are similar to
the " Challenger " illustration, fig. 6, except that the " septum " is
wanting. The chambers are tubular, and support each other by
touching at the sides for a short portion of their length. It is
astonishing that a perfect test should have been found, after the
treatment of washing the material. The other four examples have
their central chambers missing. Possibly this form is a local
variation.

Spiroloculina (?) convexiuscula Brady.

S;piroloculina (?) convexiuscula Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 155, pi. x, figs.
18-20.

A single specimen, which appears to be typical.

Miliolina Williamson.
Miliolina valvularis (Reuss). (PI. I, figs. 8-10.)

Triloculina valvularis Reuss, 1851, Zeitschr. d. deutsch. geol. Gesell.,

vol. iii, p. 85, pi. vii, fig. 56.
Miliolina valvularis Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 161, pi. iv, figs. 4, 5.

The overlapping of the chambers is so neatly finished off that in
some of the examples the edges cannot be distinguished. The
section shows the test to be triloculine and the shell-wall thick.

Miliolina seniintdnm (Linne).

Serpula seminuhim Linne, 1767, Syst. Nat., 12th ed., p. 1264, No. 791.
Miliolina seminulum Williamson, 1858, Rec. Foram. Gt. Britain, p. 85,
pi. vii, figs. 183-185.

Tests occur that are rather short and stout, but of good size. A
few small semi-translucent specimens are also present.

Miliolina procera Goes. (PI. I, figs. 11-14.)

Miliolina iwocera Goes, 1896, Bulletin, Mus. Comp. Zoology, Harvard
College, U.S.A., vol. xxix, No. 1, p. 82, pi. vii, figs. 7-9.

Goes states that this is a short, inflated variety of M. semimolum,
and makes further remarks as to its probable allies. One of the
three specimens, figs. 11, 12, is very large, and shows the faint
longitudinal striation on the antepenultimate segment to which
Goes refers in his remarks. The aperture is rather narrow and
lipped.

Recent Foraminifera off the East Coast of Australia. 7

Miliolina ohlonga (Montagu). (PI. I, figs. 15, 16.)

Vermiculum ohlongum Montagu, 1803, Test. Brit., p. 522, pi. xiv, fig. 9.
Triloculina ohlonga d'Orbigny, 1839, Foram. Cuba, p. 175, pi. x, figs. 3-5.
Miliolina seminuhnn, var. ohlonga Williamson, 1858, Eec. For. Gt. Br.,
p. 86, pi. vii, figs. 186, 187.

Only one is typical. Three are roughly triangular in cross-
section, with the corners rounded off. Five are almost tubular, as
shown in figs. 15, 16, pi. I,

Miliolina hosciana (d'Orbigny).

Quinqueloculina hosciana d'Orbigny, 1839, Foram. Cuba, p. 191, pi. xi,
figs. 22-24.

Very rare and not well developed.

Miliolina tricarinata (d'Orbigny).

Triloculina tricarinata d'Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii, p. 299,

No. 7, Modele, No. 94.
Miliolina tricarinata Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 165, pi. iii, fig. 17.

Typical specimens occur, their edges being quite sharp.

Miliolina limhata (d'Orbigny). (PI. I, figs. 17, 18.)

'Quinqueloculina limhata d'Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., p. 302, No. 20.
Q. limhata Fornacini, 1905, sp. Orb. Miliolidi, p. 66, pi. iii, fig. 9.
Miliolina limhata Heron-Allen and Earland, 1915, Foram. Kerimba Archi-

pelago, Trans. Zool. Soc, London, vol. xx, pi. xvii, p. 577, pi. xliv,

figs. 5-8.

I have some doubts in placing this form under the above
Leading. Heron- Allen and Earland, in the text, speak of it as
being quinqueloculine. Mine may be thetrilocuUne form. Of the
four specimens found, one is much more elongate than the others
a.nd approaches the type-ligure as regards length and breadth. The
one I have figured is more oval in outline, and bears a strong
resemblance to Heron-Allen and Earland's illustration, fig. 6. It
also resembles Triloculina reversa, fig. 1, pi. ii, in Fornasini's work ;
«ee above reference. The orifice is almost circular, and has a
small tooth.

*

Miliolina stelligera (Schlumberger).

Quinqueloculina stelligera Schlumberger, 1893, Mem. Soc. Zool., France,

vol. vi, p. 68, pi. ii, figs. 58, 59.
Miliolina stelligera Sidebottom, 1904, Rept. Rec. Foram. Isl. Delos, Mem.

and Proc. Lit. Phil. Soc, Manchester, vol. xlviii, pt. i, p. 14.
M. stelligera Heron-Allen and Earland, 1913, Clare Isl. Proc. Roy. Irish

Acad., vol. xxxi, p. 31, pi. i, figs. 14, 15.
M. stelligera Heron-Allen and Earland, 1916, For. W. of Scotland, T.'an3.

Linnean Soc, London, second series, Zool., vol. xi, pt. 13, p. 215,

pi. xxxix, figs. 28-31.

The tests agree both with specimens sent me by M. Schlum-
berger, and those from the coast of Delos, and show the contrast in
colour between the walls of the chambers and the keels.

8 IVa'nsadions of the Society.

Miliolina circularis (Bornemann).

Triloculina circularis Bornemann, 1855, Zeitschr. d. deutsch Geol. GeselL,

vol. vii, p. 349, pi. xix, fig. 4.
Miliolina circularis Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 169, pi. iv, fig. 3, a, b, c,

pi. V, figs. 13, 14 ?

The tests agree fairly well with the " Challenger" illustration,
pL iv, fig. 3, but they are built up more coiVipactly.

Miliolina circularis (Bornemann) var. (PI. I, figs. 19-21.)

This variation is roughly oval in outline and only slightly
compressed, and the antepenultimate chamber is very little exposed.
The orifice, which is arched, is hearly closed by the tooth, and the
test is not polished. Mr. Earland kindly drew my attention to the
T. loevigata of Bornemann, 1855, Zeitschr. deutsch. geol. Ges.
vol. vii, p. 350, pi. xix, fig. 5, with which it appears to be almost
identical.

Miliolina hucculenta (?) Brady. (PI. II, figs. 1, 2.)
Miliolina hucculenta Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 170, pl. cxiv, fig. 3, a, h.

I am a little doubtful as to the identification of these curious-
forms, so have inserted a query. They are triloculine, and the
antepenultimate chamber is very little exposed. The orifice, a
narrow slit, is slightly lipped. The test is a little compressed at
right angles to the mouth.

There are three examples. The only difference between the
one illustrated and the others is that in the former the small.

EXPLANATION OP PLATE II.

FIGS.

1, 2. — Miliolina hucculenta (?) Brady. Fig. 1, lateral view. Fig. 2, front view.

X 50.
3, 4. — Sigmoilina ovata Sidebottom. Fig. 3, lateral view. Fig. 4, oral view.

X 25.
5-8. — Ophthahnidi'inninconstans'Br&diy. Figs. 5, 6, lateral views, x 50. Fig. 7
X 50. Fig. 8 X 25.
9. — Beophax gtittifera Brady, x 50.
10. — Haplophragmium agglutinans (d'Orbigny). x 50.
11-14. — fl^. globigeriniforme (Parker and Jones). Figs. 11-13, superior views.

Fig. 14, edge view, x 25.
15, 16. — H. sphariloculum (Cushman). Fig. 15, lateral view. Fig. 16, edge view.
X 50.
17. — Trocliammina robertsoni Brady. Fig. 17, lateral view, x 75.
18. — T. plicata (Terquem) var. Fig. 18, superior view, x 75."
19-21. — Textularia inconspicua Brady. Fig. 19, superior view. Fig. 20, inferior-
view. Fig. 21, lateral view. X 75.
22, 23. — Spiroplecta annectens (Parker and Jones). Figs. 22, 23, lateral views.

X 75.
24, 25.^Gaudryina siplwnella Keuss. Figs. 24, 25, lateral views, x 50.
26. — G. scatra Brady. Fig. 26, lateral view, x 50.

JOURN. R. MICR. SOC. 1918. Pl. II.
2 3 4

j.> ■^*!:*!i?&'^

13

''i,..^'--.^.

14

18

15

K-jiAm?

16

23

20

H. Sidebottom, del ad nat.

Adlard & Son & West Newtiian, Ltd.. Impr.

Recent Foraminifera off the East Coast of Australia. 9

exposed chamber extends more to the front. There is a curious
resemblance between my figure and Goes', fig. 374, pi. x, Eet.
Ehiz. Caribbean Sea, 1882, except as regards the position of the-
aperture, but there is a great difference in the faces of our tests.
Goes considers his form to be an irregular triloculine form of
M. ringens Lamarck.

Sub-genus Sigmoilina (Schlumberger).
Sigmoilina edwardsi (Schlumberger).

Planispirina (Sigmoilina) edwardsi, Schlumberger, 1887, Bull. Soc. ZooL,
France, vol. xii, p. 483, text-fig. 8, pi. vii, figs. 15-18.

Sigmoilina edwardsi, Heron-Allen and Earland, 1915, Foram. Kerimba
Archipelago, part ii, Trans. Zool. Soc, London, vol. xx, ^art xvii^
p. 584, pi. xlv, figs. 19-21.

The tests are small and highly polished. Two appear to have
no tooth in the aperture, and in this respect they agree with the
type form, but the others have the aperture blocked with what
looks like granular substance, and in these the aperture may be
cribrate.

Sigmoilina ovata Sidebottom. (PI. II, figs. 3, 4.)

Sigmoilina ovata Sidebottom, 1904, etc., Rec. Foram. Isl. Delos, Mem.

Manchester Lit. Phil. Soc, 1904, p. 6, pi. ii, figs. 12, 13, text-fig. 1.
S. ovata, Heron-Allen and Earland, 1915, Foram. Kerimba Archipelago^

part ii, Trans. Zool. Soc, London, vol. xx, part xvii, p. 584, pi. xlv,

figs. 16-18.

Some of the tests are of larger size than the Delos specimens,
and there is a slight difference in colour and in the appearance of
the surface. The Delos specimens in my cabinet show signs of
deterioration, and it appears to be a difticult species to preserve.
My illustrations in the Delos paper are not satisfactory, and
Heron-Allen and Earland in their Kerimba work give a much
better representation. They consider S. ovata to be closely allied
to S. edu-ardsi Schlumberger. The specimens in my collection,
which I take to be typical >S'. cdivardsi, differ from aS'. ovata, both
in contour and in the texture of the surface. The former has a
highly polished test to which Schlumberger draws particular
attention.

«

Sub -family Hauerininae.

Artictdina d'Orbigny.
Articulina funalis Brady.
Articulina funalis Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 185, pi. xiii, figs. 6-11.

These call for no remarks. Eare.

10 Transactions of the Society.

ArticuUna funalis, var. inornata Brady.

Articulina funalis, var. inornata Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 186, pi. xiii,

figs. 3-5.
A, funalis, var. inornata Millett, 1898, Foram. Malay Archipelago, Journ.

Roy. Micr. Soc, 1898, p. 513, pi. xii, fig. 11.

The specimens agree with Millett's figure. Very rare,

Ophthalmidium Kiibler.
Ophthahnidium inconstans Brady. (PI. II, figs. 5-8.)

Ophthabnidium inconstans Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 189, pi. xii, figs.
5, 7, 8.

Thd^'e are four tests, and they are not in a good state for
examination. There is a certain amount of smooth shell-growth
overspreading them. One tends towards the circular in outline,
another is more elonga^te, while the two largest ones are convex on
the face of the test and concave on the reverse side, as shown in
the drawings (figs. 5, 6). I also illustrate two fragments (figs. 7, 8),
which must have come from large specimens. At first I took
these two to be a carinate form of Nuhecularia, but on comparing
them with large specimens of Ophthalmidium inconstans in my
collection their true character was revealed.

^ Flanispirina Seguenza.

Planispirina celata (Seguenza).

Spiroloculina celata Costa, 1855, Mem-Accad. Napoli, vol. ii, p. 126, pi. i,

fig. 14; 1856, Atti dell' Accad. Pont., vol. vii, pi. xxvi, fig. 5.
Planispirina celata Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 197, pi. viii, figs. 1-4.

The tests are rather more roughly built than is usual in the
specimens I have hitherto found.

Planisinrina sigmoidea Brady.

Planispirina sigmoidea Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 197, pi. ii, figs. 1-3 ;
woodcut, fig. 5, c.

Most of the tests have a sharp edge.

Planispirina auriculata Egger.

Planispirina auriculata Egger, 1893, Abhandl. k. bayer. Akad. Wiss. CI. ii,
vol. xviii, p. 245, pi. iii, figs. 13-15.

P. auriculata Heron- Allen and Earland, 1915, Foram. Kerimba Archi-
pelago, pt. ii, Trans. Zool. Soc, London, vol. xx, pt. xvii, p. 590,
pi. xlvi, figs. 3-7.

The folding down of the circular orifice on one side of the test
is a curious feature of this species.

Jiecent Foraminifera off the Bast Coast of Australia. 11

Sub-family Peneroplidinse.

Cornuspira Schultze.
Cornuspira involvens (Keuss).

Operculina involvens Eeuss, 1849, Denkschr. d. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien, vol. i,

p. 370, pi. xlvi, fig. 20.
Cornuspira involvens Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 200, pi. xi, figs. 1-3.

The tests are all of the microspheric form.

Cornuspira carinata (Costa).

Operculina carinata Costa, 1856, Atti dell' Accad. Pont., vol. vii, p. 209,

pi. xvii, fig. 15.
Cornuspira carinata Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 201, pi. xi, fig. 4.

A solitary example, which it seems right to place under this
heading. The edge of the test is sharp.

Family ASTRORHIZID^.
Sub -family Saccammininffi.

PsammosplKera Schulze.

Psammospiliara fusca Schulze.

F»ammos2}h(rra ftisca Schulze, 1874, II. Jahresb. Untersuch. deutsch. Meere

in Kiel, p. 113, pi. ii, fig. 8.
P, fusca Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 249, pi. xviii, figs. 1-8.

The tests are small in size, and built up of clear sand grains.
One only is of typical colour. Very rare.

Sub-family Rhabdammininae.

Hyperammina H. B. Brady.

Hyperainmina ramosa Brady.

Hyperammina ramosa Brady, 1879, Quart. Journ. Micro. Sci., vol. xix, N.S.,
p. 38, pi. iii, figs. 14, 15.
♦ H. ramosa Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 261, pi. xxiii, figs. 15-19.

There are two fragments, which appear to lielong to this
species ; also several branching fragments which are probably of
the same kind.

Hyperammina vagans Brady.

Hyperammina vagans Brady, 1879, Quart. Journ. Micro. Sci., vol. xix, N.S.,

p. 33, pi. v, fig. 3.
H. vagans, Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 260, pi. xxiv, figs. 1-9.

One specimen, attached to a fragment of shell. It is almost
white in colour, and imperfect in places.

12 Transactions of the Society.

Marsip'ella Norman.
Marsipella cylindrica Brady.

Marsipella cylindrica Brady, 1882, Proc. Roy. Soc. Edin., vol. xi, p. 714,
M. cylindrica Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 265, pi. xxiv, figs. 20-22.

A solitary fragment.

Bhabdammina M. Sars.
Bhahdammina abyssorum M. Sars.

Bhabdammina abyssorum M. Sars, 1868, Vidensk.-Selsk, 1868, p. 248.
B. abyssorum Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 266, pi. xxi, figs. 1-13.

Fragments. One is similar to the " Challenger " fig. 8.
There are straight fragments which I think belong to this species.
I 'cannot discover any constrictions in them. There are also two
which consist of a large, irregular, coarsely-built chamber, very
short portions remaining of what have probably been the branching
arms. These arms would not have been in the same plane, but
branching in all directions. These two fragments may possibly be
a variety, or another species altogether. Until perfect tests are
found, I think it cannot be decided with certainty.

Family LITUOLID.E.
Sub-family Lituolinae.

Beophax Montfort.
Beopliax scorpiurus Montfort..

Beophax scorpiurus Montfort, 1808, Conchyl. System, vol. i, p. 330,

83e genre.
B. scorpiurus Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 291, pi. xxx, figs. 12-17.

The tests are rough and built of clear white sand-grains.

Beophax pilulifcra Brady.
Beophax piluUfera Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 292, pi. xxx, figs. 18-20.

Two fragments. The tests are much more roughly built-up
than the " Challenger " specimens. The pale yellowish-brown
cement used is plainly shown.

Beophax fusiformis Williamson.

Proteonina fusiformis Williamson, 1858, Rec. Foram. Gt. Br., p. 1, pL i»

fig.l.
Beophax fusiformis Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 290, pi. xxx, figs. 7-11.

One test agrees well with the " Challenger " fig. 8.

Becent Foraminifera off the East Coast of Australia. 13

Beophax guttifera Brady. (PL II, fig. 9.)

Beophax guttifera Brady, 1881, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xxi, N.S.,

p. 49.
B. guttifera Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 295, pi. xxxi, figs. 10-15.

Not one of the tests consists of more than four chambers, and
they do not show the separation of the chambers to anything
approaching the extent figured in the " Challenger " Eeport, but
they agree with some of the specimens which Mr. Earland has
kindly sent me from the Faroe Channel.

Beophax distans Brady.

Beophax distans Brady, 1881, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xxi, N.S., p. 50.
B. distans Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 296, pi. xxxi, figs. 18-22.

Two fragments. They are built of clear, wdiite sand-grains.
The choice of this particular kind of sand-grain, for the formation
of tests, is not at all uncommon at this locality.

Beophax spiculifera Brady.

Beophax spiculifera Brady, 1879, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xix, N.S.,

p. 54, pi. iv, figs. 10,' 11.
B. spiculifera Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 295, pi. xxxi, figs. 16, 17.

A few fragments, each consisting of a single chamber.

Beophax difflugiformis Brady.

Beophax difflugiformis Brady, 1879, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xix, N.S.,

p. 51, pi. iv, fig. 3, a, h.
B. difflugiformis Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 289, pi. xxx, figs. 1-5.

A few specimens built of coarse sand-grains, similar to the
■" Challenger " fig. 5. One test is nearly globular, and might be
taken for Saccammina sphxrica, but being an odd specimen, found
in company with the above, and differing from them in no other
respect, it is probably only a more globular form than is usual in
this species. When damped, the tests easily disintegrate. They
are shaded light brown.

o

Haplophragmiuin Reuss. >

Haplophragmium calcareum Brady.

Haplophragmium calcareum Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 302, pi. xxxiii,
figs. 5-12.

Very large specimens occur, built of coarse sand-grains. They are
.narrow in comparison with their length, the segments unusually
high and depressed at their sutures. The outline is lobulated.
They agree with the " Challenger " fig. 7.

y

14 Transactions of the Society.

Haplojihragmium aggluHnans (d'Orbigny). (PL II, fig. 10.)

Spirolijia agglutinans d'Orbigny, 1846, For. Foss. Vien, p. 137, pi. vii,

figs. 10-12.
Haplophragmium agglutinans Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 301, pi. xxxii,.

figs. 19-26.

Four varieties. One example typical. Four tests have the
initial chambers well compressed, slightly sunk at the umbilicus
and the linear portion also flattened at its commencement. Twa
specimens have the planospiral portion rather large, and are very
rough. One of the two has the linear portion twisted. The fourth
variety, fig. 10, PI. II, is very slender. Of the two examples found
one is in perfect condition. The test is built of clear sand-grains,
and the animal has used very few grains to- each chamber, which
gives an angular appearance. Sutures obscure.

Hajolophragmiiim tenuimargo Brady.

Haplophragmium tenuimargo Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 303, pi. xxxiii^
figs. 13-16.

Two fragments. I believe they belong to one another, and if
so they complete the test. Their compression and their jagged
edges seem to identify them with this species.

Haplophragmium latidorsatum (Bornemann) .

Nonionina latidorsatum Bornemann, 1855, Zeitschr. d. deutsch. geol. Gesell.y

vol. vii, p. 339, pi. xvi, fig. 4.
Hajjilophragmium latidorsatum Bradv, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 307, pi. xxxiv.

figs.VlO, 14.

Four out of the five examples are small. One is attached to a
portion of an arenaceous tube.

Haplophragmium glohigeriniforme (Parker and Jones).
(PI. II, figs. 11-14.)

Lituola nautiloidea, var. globigeriniformis Parker and Jones, 1865, Phil.

Trans., vol. civ., p. 407, pi. xv, figs. 46, 47 (pi. xvii, figs. 96-98?)
Haplojjhragmium glohigeriniforme Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 312,,

pi. XXXV, figs. 10, 11.

The two largest tests, figs. 11, 12, PI. II, are white. The others
are of a light rusty-red hue, the final segments being lighter than the
rest. One variety is a neat, comparatively smooth form, of a rich
ferruginous tint, with three to four chambers in the outermost
whorl, PL II, figs. 13, 14. Another variety is larger, and roughly
built. The large white specimen, fig. 11, might be passed for
H. sphfe-roidiformc Brady, referred to in the " Challenger " Keport,
p. 313, as isomorphous with Sph^roidina hulloides, but a close
examination hardly supports this view of it. This test is slightly
flattened.

Recent Foraminifera off the East Coast of Australia. 15

Haplophragmiiim spJiceriloculiim (Cushman). (PL II, figs. 15, 16.)

Haplophragmoides sjyJicerilocuhim Cushman, 1910, Foram. N.P. Ocean, pt. 1,.
Smithsonian Instit. Nat. Mus. U.S.A., Bull. 71, p. 107, fig. 163.

This solitary example answers well to Cushman's description
of the species. It is rich in colour.

Haplophragmimn nanum Brady.

Haplophragmium nanum Brady, 1881, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xxi,

N.S. p. 50.
iT. nanum Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 311, pi. xxxv, figs. 6-8.

The tests are typical and pale in colour.

Haplophragmium ancep)S Brady.

Haplophragmium anceps Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 313, pi. xxxv,

figs. 12-15.
H. anceps Heron-Allen and Earland, 1913, Foram. Clare Island, Proc. Roy.

Irish Acad., vol. xxxi, p. 47, pi. iii, fig. 4.

The examples are small but typical.

Haplophragmium glomeratum (Brady).

Lituola glomerata Brady, 1878, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., Ser. 5, vol. i,

p. 433, pi. XX, fig. 1.
H. glomeratum Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 309, pi. xxxiv, figs. 15-18.

Typical, but varying a good deal in size.

Placopsilina d'Orbigny. j

Placopsilina cenomana d'Orbigny.

Placopsilina cenomana d'Orbigny, 1850, Prod. Paleont., vol. ii, p. 185,
No. 758.

P. cenomena Sidebottom, 1902, etc., Rept. Foram. Isl. Delos, Mem. Man-
chester Lit. and Phil. Soc, 1905, p. 4, pi. i, fig. 7.

Three occur ; two attached to a fragment of a shell, and the
other found in company with a Wehhina clarata.

Sub-family Trochammininee.

Hormosina Brady.
Hormosina carpenteri Brady.

Hormosina carpenteri Brady, 1881, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xxi, N.S.

p. 51.
H. carpenteri Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 327, pi. xxxix, figs. 14-18.

Frasments, One has four segments. All are of small size.

16 Transactions of the Society.

Ammodiscus Reuss.
Ammodiscus incertus (d'Orbigny).

Operculina incerta d'Orbigny, 1839, Foram. Cuba, p. 71, pi. vi, figs. 16, 17.
Ammodiscus incertus Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 330, pi. xxxviii, figs. 1-3.

Three occur. One is large and two are of medium size. Of
the latter, one is white.

Ammodiscus tenuis Brady.

Ammodiscus tenuis Brady, 1881, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xxi, N.S.,

p. 51.
A. tenuis Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 332, pi. xxxviii, figs. 4-6.

The two tests found appear to be Megalospheric, and although
■of fair size consist of only about four convolutions. The tests are
rather flat, but the initial chamber of the first convolution is raised.
Yery pale in colour.

Am,m,odiscus charoides (Jones and Parker).

'Trocjidminina squamata charoides Jones and Parker, 1860, Quart. Journ.

Geol. Soc, vol. xvi, p. 304.
Ammodiscus charoides Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 834, pi. xxxviii, figs.

10-16.

Excellent specimens occur, highly polished, and of a rich
ferruginous colour.

Trochammina Parker and Jones.
Trochammina conglohata Brady.

Trochammina co7iglolata Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 341, pi. xl, fig. 8, 9.
T. conglohata Flint, 1899, Rec. Foram. Rept., W.S., Nat. Mus. for 1897,
p. 281, pi. xxvi, fig. 2.

Four specimens occur, which I think I am right in placing
under this heading. They agree better with Flint's than with the
"Challenger" figure.

Trochammina trullisata Brady.
Trochammina trullisata Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 342, pi. xl,figs. 13-16.

The small form only occurs, similar to fig. 14 in the above
reference.

Trochammina nitida Brady.

Trochammina nitida Brady, 1881, Quart, Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xxi, N.S.,

p. 52.
T. 7iitida Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 339, pi. xli, figs. 5, 6.

A solitary, typical example.

Recent Foraminifera off the East Coast of Australia. 17

Trochammina rohertsoni Brady. (PI. II, fig. 17.)

Trochammina rohertsoni Brady, Journ. Roy. Micr. Soc, 1887, p. 893.
T. rohertsoni Wright, 1891, Proc. Roy. Irish Acad., (3) vol. i, No. 4, p. 469,
pi. XX, fig. 4.

I think I am right in my diagnosis of this form. Two speci-
mens have five chambers showing in the outermost whorl, the rest
having four. The umbilical cavity is more closed in than is usual.
The tests are small, and not quite so highly polished or coloured as
the British specimens in my cabinet, except for a few chambers of
several of the tests.

Trochammina rotaliformis Wright.

Trochammina inflaia (Montagu), var. Balkwill and Wright, 1885, Trans.

Roy. Irish Acad., vol. xxviii. (Science), p. 331, pi. xiii, figs. 11, 12.
T. rotaliformis Heron-Allen and Earland, 1913, Clare Island, Proc. Roy.

Irish Acad., vol. xxxi, pt. Ixiv, p. 52, pi. iii, figs. 11-13.

The tests are small and built of fine sand-grains. They agree
well with Balkwill and Wright's fig. 12 in the above reference.
One of the four is dark coloured ; the others are lighter, especially
as regards the final chambers.

Trochammina ochracea (Williamson).

Botalina ochracea Williamson, 1858, Rec. Foram. Gt. Britain, p. 55, pi. iv,
fig. 112; pi. V, fig. 113.

Trochammina ochracea Millett, 1898, etc., Rept. Rec. Foram. Malay Archi-
pelago, 1899, p. 363, pi. V, fig. 12.

A single example. The curving sutures on the under-surface
are well defined, and " present the only means of distinguishing
this species from the closely allied T. plicata of Terquem," as
Heron-Allen and Earland remark (Foram. Clare Island, Proc. Boy.
Irish Acad., 1913, p. 51).

Another variety appears to be present, that referred to by
Heron-Allen and Earland, 1915, Foram. Kerimba Archipelago,
pt. ii, Trans. Zool. Soc, London, vol. xx, pt. xvii, p. 619, pi. xlvi,
figs. 27, 28 ; but the irregular chitinous carina is very much
wrinkled and covered with fine grey matter. Three examples
occur.

Trochammina plicata (Terquem), var. (PL II, fig. 18.)

Patellina plicata Terquem, 1876, Anim. Plage de Dunkerque, 2™' fasc.

p. 72, pi. viii, fig. 9.
Trochammina plicata, 'RbX^^iW and Millett, 1884, Journ. Micr. Nat. Sci.,

vol. iii, p. 26, pi. i, fig. 8.

In this variety the whole of the upper surface of the sliell is
covered with irregular, branching, and interrupted costse, closely

March Wth, WIS c

18 Transactions of the Society.

set together. Under a fairly high magnification, these costse appear
to be built of minute sand-grains and are of a light brown tint,
showing up well against the dark background. The test is thin,
and the under-surface is not so thickly covered with the same
decoration. As far as I can tell from the inferior surface, the test
has probably six or seven chambers in the final whorl, but the
coiling of the chambers does not show on either surface. Two
specimens occur.

Webbina d'Orbigny.
Webbina clavata (Jones and Parker).

Trochammina irregularis clavata Jones and Parker, Quart. Journ. Geol.

Soc, 1860, vol. xvi, p. 304.
Webbina clavata Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 349, pi. xli, figs. 12-16.
W. clavata Wright, 1891, Kept. Foram. S.W. Ireland, Proc. Eoy. Irish Acad.,

p. 470, pi. XX, figs. 2, 3.

Both the Megalospheric and Microspheric forms occur; the
former having a large, oval, initial chamber, and the latter a much
smaller, generally rounded chamber, highly domed. The tube
of the Microspheric form is sinuous, and has a Globigerina shell
attached in the hollow of each curve. This tube is much stouter
than in the Megalospheric form.

A single white specimen occurs, which is in the Megalospheric
condition.

Sub-family Loftusinse.

Cyclammina Brady.

Cyclammina cancellata Brady.

Cyclammina cancellata Brady, 1879, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xix,

N.S., p. 62.
C. cancellata Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 351, pi. xxxvii, figs. 8-16.

Three occur. They are rather small.

Family TEXTULARID^.

Sub-family Textularinse.

Textularia Defrance.

Textularia gramen d'Orbigny.

Textularia gramen d'Orbigny, 1846, Foram., Foss. Vien., p. 248, pi. xv,

figs. 4-6.
T. gramen Brady, 1884, [Chall. Rept., p. 365, pi. xliii, figs. 9, 10.

Several varieties occur. In one variety the initial chambers
have acute edges, this acuteness being lost as the test broadens out
and thickens.

Recent Foraminifera off the East Coast of Austmlia. 19

A single specimen is comparatively short and broad. The third
variety is very stoutly built and very rough ; the sutures not
Apparent.

Textularia agglutinans d'Orbigny.

Textularia agglutinans d'Orbigny, 1839, Foram. Cuba, p. 144, pi. i, figs.

17, 18, 32-34.
T. agglutinans Brady, 1834, Chall. Eept., p. 363, pi. xliii, figs. 1-3, vara. figs.

4,12.

Two occur.

Textularia sagittula Defrance.

Textularia sagittula Defrance, 1824, Diet. Soi. Nat., vol. xxxii, p. 117,

Atlas Conch., pi. xiii, fig. 5.
T. sagittula Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept.. p. 361, pi. xlii, figs. 17, 18.

Two fairly good examples occur. Besides these, there are
several large specimens, thin and rounded at the commencement,
but soon thickening and broadening out until they become very
stout, with rather square edges. The largest finishes with several
very large chambers of equal width. The tests are very coarsely
built and are probably spiroplectine in the arrangement of the
initial chambers. These forms combine features that are character-
istic of 2\ sagittula Defrance, T. gramen d'Orbigny, and T. can-
deiana d'Orbigny.

Textularia ahhreviata d'Orbigny.

Textularia ahhreviata d'Orbigny, 1846, Foram. Foss. Vien., p. 249, pi. xv,

figs. 7-12.
T. ahhreviata Fornasini, 1887, Boll. Soc. geol. Ital., vol. vi, p. 399, pi. xi,

figs. 1-3.
T. ahhreviata Brady, Parker and Jones, 1888, Trans. Zool. Soc, vol. xii,

pt. vii, p. 219, pi. xlii, figs. 4, 5.

Three examples, one of which has limbate sutures, and appears,
although better developed, to be similar to Fornasini's T. abbreviata,
Boll. Soc. geol. Ital., vol. vi, 1887, p. 399, pi. xi, fig. 1.

Textularia concava (Karrer).

Plecanium concavum Karrer, 1868, Sitzungsb. d. k. Wiss. Wien, vol. Iviii,

p. 129, pi. i, fig. 3.
Textularia concava Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 360, pi. xlii, figs. 13, 14;

and pi. xliii, fig. 11.

Two examples occur, interesting inasmuch as they are typical
in having the lateral face slightly concave and the peripheral
margin square, while the orifice is quite upright. The specimens
differ slightly in form. The one figured is the smaller of the two.

G 2

20 Transactions of the Society.

Textularia concava, var. heterostoma FornaBini.

Sagraina affinis Fornasini, 1883, Boll. Soc. Geol. Ital., vol. ii, p. 189, pi. ii,

fig. 10.
Textularia heterostoma Fornasini, 1896, Mem. R. Accad. Sci. Istit. di

Bologna, Ser. 5, vol. vi, p. 4, pi. figs. 6, 12, 13.

A single example, agreeing well with Fornasini's (1888) illus-
tration, fig. 1, a-c, excepting that the orifice is not set at an angle,
and is placed as in T. concava Karrer.

Textularia striata Cushman.

Textularia striata Cushman, 1911, Foram. North Pacific Ocean, Smithsonian
Instit. U.S. Nat. Mus. Bull. 71, Text, p. 11, fig. 13.

Four occur, the largest having about forty chambers. They
agree accurately witli Cushman's description, excepting that the
apertural end is not "somewhat acute." The same large tests
occur at the " Challenger " St. 185, off Eaine Island, but they are
very roughly built.

Further investigation may prove that these are a variant of
Textularia agglutinans, var. forrecta Brady.

Cushman's species appears to be identical with the forms
recorded and figured by Chapman from Great Barrier Island, New
Zealand, 110 fathoms, under tlie names Spiroplccta sagittida
(Defrance), and S. sagittula, var. fistulosa Brady (Chapman, 1906,.
Trans. N. Zealand Instit., vol. xxxviii (1905), p. 87, pi. iii, fig. 4).
It is a very large form, typical of the " Thomson Basin," and
abundant in dredgings from this area. The early structure is in
our experience usually, if not invariably, Spiroplectine, and Cush-
man's figure suggests a Spiroplectine form, though his description
contains no reference to this feature. But the " Dart " specimens
are of a megalospheric Textularian type, and this would seem to
be proof of dimorphism. The species deserves to be carefully
worked out.

Textularia quadrilatera Schwager.

Textularia quadrilatera Schwager, 1866, Novara-Exped. Geol. Theil.,

vol. ii, p. 253, pi. vii, fig. 103.
T. quadrilatera, Brady, 1884, Chali. Kept., p. 858, pi. xlii, figs. 8-12.

Excellent specimens occur, none of which are spinous at the
base.

Textularia incon8j)icua Brady. (PI. II, figs. 19-21.)

Textularia tncons^tcw a Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 357, pi. xlii, fig. 6.

T. inconspicua Millett, 1898, etc., Kept. Foram. Malay Archipelago, Journ.
Eoy, Micr. Soc, 1899, p. 557, pi. vii, fig. 1.

T. inconspicua Heron-Allen and Earland, 1915, Foram. Kerimba Archi-
pelago, Zool. Soc. London, vol. xx, pt. xvii, p. 623, pi. xlvii, figs. 1-4.

Typical tests are present. Besides these, there are a few
having the base irregular, or nearly so, in outline. One can see

Recent Foraminifera off the East Coast of Australia. 21

by the shape of the earlier chambers that in the young state the
base would be oval, but in maturity the outline becomes circular.
I figure one of these tests. The umbilical cavity is deeply sunk.
Millett remarks, in the above reference, p. 557, that " The Malay
specimens are associated with a minute hyaline Discorbina, to which
they bear a considerable resemblance." I can find no reference to
this form under " Discorbina," and I wonder whether the variety I
have illustrated is the one to which he refers. It appears to me
to be a variant of T. inconspicua. At all events the chambers are
Textularian in arrangement.

Textularia inconspicua, \a.r. jugosa Brady.

Textulariajugosa Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 358, pi. xlii, fig. 7.
T. inconspicua, \&x. jugosa, Millett, 1898, etc., Foram. Malay Archipelago,
Journ. Eoy. Micr. Soc, 1899, p. 558, pi. vii, fig. 2.

A single ill-developed example of the form figured by Millett
in the above reference.

Textularia folium Parker and Jones.

Textularia folium Parker and Jones, 1865, Phil. Trans., vol. civ, pp. 370 and

420, pi. xviii, fig. 19.
T. folium Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 357, pi. xlii, figs. 1-5.

Two occur ; one in very poor condition.

Verneuilina d'Orbigny.

Verneuilina polystropha (Reuss).
Bulimina polystropha Reuss, 1845-6, Verstein, Bohm, Kreid., pt. ii, p. 109,

pi. xxiv, fig. 53.
Verneuilina polystropha Brady, 1884, Chall, Rept., p. 386, pi. xlvii,

figs. 15-17.
V. polystropha Heron-Allen and Earland, 1915, Foram. Clare Isl., Proc. Roy.

Irish Acad., pt. Ixiv, vol. xxxi, p. 55, pi. iv, figs. 1-5.

Two smairtests; one white, the other partially Qoloured.

Verneuilina pygmoia (Egger).
Bulimina pygmcea Egger, 1857, Neues Jahrb. fiir Min., p. 384, pi. xii, figs.

10, 11.
Verneuilina 2W9mcea,Bv&dy, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 385, pi. xlvii, figs. 4-7.
V.pygmma Millett, 1898, etc., Rept. Rec. Foram. Malay Archipelago, 1900,

p. 11, pi. 1, fig. 13.

With two exceptions, the examples are comparatively small.
They are more neatly built than the specimens figured in the
"' Challenger" Keport, and the inflation of the chambers is not so
marked.

The minute hyaline form is well represented, and the tests
agree in every particular with Millett's figure in the above
reference.

22 Transactions of the Society,

Verneuilina spinulosa Reuss.

VerneuiUna spinulosa Reuss, 1850, Denkschr. d. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien, vol i
p. 374, pi. xlvii, fig. 12. ' • ^

V. tpinulosa Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 384, pi. xlvii, figs. 1-3.

The two specimens found are in very poor condition.

Spiroplecta Ehrenberg.
8piro2)lecta annectens (Parker and Jones). (PI. II, figs. 22, 23.)

Textularia annectens Parker and Jones, 1863, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., Ser. 3^

vol. xi, p. 92, woodcut, fig. 1.
Spiroplecta amiectens Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 376, pi. xlv, figs. 22, 23.
S. annectens Millett, 1898, etc., Journ. Roy. Micr. Soc, 1900, p. 8, pi. i, fig. 7,

Both the megalospheric and microspheric forms 'are present.
The initial planospiral portion of the test is much larger in the
megalospheric than in the microspheric form, and the chambers of
the Textularian series are more erect. The test also is very much
shorter and its edges are markedly sinuous.

_ Fig. 23 shows the smallest of the specimens found in the
microspheric condition, but it is the only one from which the
planospiral chambers have not been broken off. The longest
example consists of about seventy-two chambers, thirty -six in
either series, exclusive of the planospherical portion which is
missing.

Under the name Spiropiecta hulhosa Cushman (1911, Monograph
N. Pacific Ocean, pt. ii, TextularitUe, p. 5, figs. 1, a, h) figures a form
which seems to be the same as Millett's illustration in the above
reference. If they are identical it will be a matter of opinion
whether or not they should be treated as a new species.

Spiropiecta biformis (Parker and Jones).

Textularia agglutinans, var. biformis Parker and Jones, 1865, Phil. Trans..

vol. civ, p. 370, pi. XV, figs. 23, 24.
Spiropiecta biformis Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 376, pi. xlv, figs. 25-27.

The examples are small and slender, similar to the " Challeuser "■
fig. 25. ^

Spiropiecta tvrightii Silvestri.

Textularia sagittula Defrance, 1824, Diet. Sci. Nat., vol. xxxii, p. 177;

Atlas, Conch., pi. xiii, fig. 5.
Spiropiecta sagittula (Defrance) Wright, 1891, Rept. S.W. Ireland, p. 471.
S. sagittula (Defrance) Wright, 1902, Foram. Rathlin Island, p. 211, pi. iii.
S. wrightii Silvestri, 1903, Atti d. P. Accad. Romana d. Nuovi Lincei, Ann.

Ivi, sess. iii, pp. 8, 1-5, woodcuts.

The tests are short, the Spiroplectine portion occupving about
one-third of the length of the shell. All appear to ' be in the
megalospheric condition.

h

Becent Foraminifcra off the East Coast of Australia. 23

Gaudryina d'Orbigny.

Gaudryina pupoides d'Orbigny.

Gaudryina pupoides d'Orbigny, 1840, Mem. Soc. G^ol. France, vol. iv, p. 44,

pi. iv, figs. 22-24.
G. pupoides d'Orbigny, 1846, Foram. Foss. Vien, p. 197, pi. xxi, figs. 34-86.
G. pupoides Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 378, pi. xlvi, figs. 1-4.

This species is very well represented. _^

Gaudryina pupoides, var. chilostoma Eeuss.

Textularia cliilostoma Eeuss, 1852, Zeitschr. d. deutsch. geol. GeselL, vol. iv,

p. 18 (fide Reuss).
Gaudryina cliilostoma Reuss, 1865, Denkschr. d. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien,

vol. XXV, p. 120, pi. i, fig. 5.
G. pupoides, var. chilostoma Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 379, pi. xlvi,

figs. 5, 6.

With one exception the typical tests are small.
There are also specimens, both larger and thicker, which are
probably intermediate between G. pupoides and the above.

Guadryina baccaia Schwager.

Gaudryina haccata Schwager, 1866, Novara-Exped. geol. Theil, vol. ii,

p. 200, pi. iv, fig. 12.
G. baccata Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 379, pi. xlvi, figs. 8-11.

The tests are only slightly twisted, but the inflation of the
chambers and the texture of the surface, which is not polished and
has a tendency towards roughness, are sufficient to identify them.

Gaudryina subrotunda Schwager.

Gaudryina subrotunda Schwager, 1866, Novara-Exped. geol. Theil, vol. ii,

p. 198, pi. iv, fig. 9.
G. subrotunda Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 380, pi. xlvi, fig. IB.

Two large specimens occur, also two in an immature stage, the
biscerial portion not having commenced. The tests are very
rough, and the aperture is deeply sunk and placed at some dis-
tance from the inner border of the final chamber. The position of
the aperture is well shown in Flint's illustration (1899, Eec.
Foram. U.S. Nat. Museum, pi. xxxiii, fig. 1).

Gaudryina siplionella Reuss. (PI. II, figs. 24, 25.)

Gaudryina siphonella, 1851, Zeitschr. d. deutsch. Gesell., vol. iii, p. 78,

pi. V, figs. 40-42.
G. syphonella Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 382, pi. xlvi, figs. 17-19.
G. siphonella Millett, 1898, etc., Foram. Malay Archipelago, Journ. Roy.

Micr. Soc, 1900, p. 9, pi. i, fig. 9.

Specimens similar to the " Challenger " figures occur.

In addition to the above there are two forms, one of which

24 Transactions of the Society.

(PI. II, fig. 24) I take to be the same as that figured by Millett.
The tests, however, are more pointed and the chambers more
numerous and narrower than in Millett's example. Two occur.
They appear to be in the microspheric condition.

The other form (Ph II, fig. 25) may also be Millett's variety in
the megalospheric condition. It is more oval in shape, and the
final chambers are not so much inflated. Seven occur.

Under this name Eeuss figured two very dissimilar forms. His
fig. 40 agrees with Brady's figs. (PL xlvi, figs. 17-19), and with
recent specimens from the Indian Ocean. Millett's figure appears
to be based on Eeuss's fig. 42, but the structure is quite different.
Millet's gaudryine chambers are confined to the apex, hardly
noticeable, while the Eeuss type shows a triserial cone from apex
to aperture. The " Dart " specimens are very variable ; one is
similar to the " Challenger " type, the others approximate more
nearly to Millett's figure, and may possibly represent only
gaudryine varieties of Textularia concava (Karrer).

Gaudryina scabra Brady. (PI. II, fig. 26.)

Gaudryina pupoides Brady, 1870, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., vol. vi, p. 300,

pi. xii, fig. 5.
G. scabra Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 381, pi. xlvi, fig. 7.
G. scabra Heron-Allen and Earland, 1915, Foram. Kerimba Archipelago,

pt. ii. Trans. Zool. Sec. London, vol. xx, pt. xvii, p. 635, pi. xlviii,

figs. 7-14.

The specimens are not typical, being more slender than the
" Challenger " example. Several of the tests have six pairs of
Textularian chambers of the typical ferruginous colour, except the
final pair, which are of greyish hue. One specimen is grey through-
out. The triserial portion is obscure, and the arrangement may
be Textularian throughout the entire length of ihe test, but the
irregularity of the initial portion suggests a different manner of
growth. In addition to the above, there are two minute tests, one
grey, the other brown, in which the triserial commencement is well
marked and the biserial portion slightly twisted. These may or
may not belong to this species.

Valvulina d'Orbigny.
ValvuUna fusca (Williamson).

Rotalina fusca Williamson, 1858, Rec. For. Gt. Br., p. 55, pi. v, figs. 114, 115.
Valvulina fusca Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 392, pi. xlix, figs. 13, 14.

I believe I am right in placing these three tests under this
heading. They are very minute, and the chambers (of which
there are three in the last whorl) are slightly inflated. They are
remarkable for their beauty. When lit up by a strong light, the

Recent Foraminifera off the East Coast of Australia. 25

minute, transparent sand-grains, of which each test is built, sparkle
brilliantly. The surface is rough, and the initial chambers are
dark, cement of a beautiful ruby colour being used.

Clavulina d'Orbigny.

Clavulina communis d'Orbigny.

Clavulina communis d'Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii, p. 268, fig. 4.
C. communis d'Orbigny, 1846, For. Foss. Vien, p. 196, pi. xii, figs. 1, 2.
C. communis Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 394, pi. xlviii, figs. 1-13,

Two forms are present, both being long. One is comparatively
smooth, and the later chambers are fitted on to each other in such
a manner as to cause the lower edge of the chambers to project-
slightly. The other form is rough, and the individual chambers
are scarcely discernible.

{To he continued,)

26

II. — Microscopy at Buhlehen.
By E. PaulsOxV, F.E.M.S.

(Read November 21, 1917.)

Those who are acquainted with the internal government of the
civilian camp at lUihleben through letters and printed matter,
received from interned relatives and friends, know already some-
thing of the educational work that has been going on there for the
past two and a half years.

Prisoners have been permitted to send a copy of the prospectus
of the work of the organized classes for each successive term, and
the various numbers of the camp magazine.

As an introduction to the prospectus of work for the autumn
term, 1916, we find among other notices the following : —

" In most subjects the tuition provided at the school ranges
from that required by absolute beginners to that required by
Advanced University Students."

" The Term consists of fourteen weeks ; the total subscription
of 3.50 marks should be paid in advance, if possible."

Eoughly the camp is made up of students from the Public
Schools and Universities, numbers of our best pioneers in com-
merce, trade and industry — men who had gone to health resorts.

Some five months ago Mr. E. J. Sheppard received a letter
from Dr. Lechmere in reference to a paragraph in " Nature," re-
specting a slide exhibited at the Meeting in December 1916 of
the Eoyal Microscopical Society.

It was the preparation of the anther of Lilium candidum, show-
ing the extrusion of nuclear chromatin during mitosis in the
pollen mother-cells.

As the letter was reported to the Council it was suggested that
Dr. Lechmere should be communicated with, and that he should
be asked to give some account of the microscopical work done in
the camp.

A letter was written to this effect, and after a period of eighty-
seven days an answ^er was received, together with a report by
Mr. Michael Pease on " Biological Activities at Euhleben."

Before reading the report it might be well to mention that the
camp is situated on a bleak plateau on the site of the well-known
race-course to the west of Berlin. This fact will account for the
mention of betting-booth, hay-loft and grand-stand. The rigours

Microscopy at Ruhleben. 27

of winter here are extreme. "With inadequate heating it is im-
possible to carry on the necessary work of embedding and cutting
with the microtome. Without knowing these facts the account of
the equipment of the laboratory might conjure up a view of semi-
luxuriance.

These men are living under most depressing conditions, and it
is only due to a dogged determination to weather the storm that
any scientific work is systematically carried on.

Lettek from Dk. a. Eckley Lechmere to E. Paulson, F.K.M.S.,

DATED August 14, 1917.

I am very pleased to supply further information as regards the
microscopical equipment. When the laboratory started in the
spring of 1915, we were fortunate enough to have several micro-
scopes at our disposal. These were supplied by people in the
Cam^ who had their instruments in Germany, I had been work-
ing at plant diseases in Munich with Prof, von Tubeuf, and at the
cytology of sex in insects with Dr. Biichner, so I was fortunate in
having both instruments and a certain amount of material at hand
which Prof, von Tubeuf kindly sent me here. Since then several
more instruments have been obtained by other students. We
have now an excellent microscopical outfit for general laboratory
work. The instruments include the foUowius; items : —

One Leitz binocular, two Leitz C, two Leitz GH, two Winkel,
one Seibert, and one Nietsch, one Baker Diagnostic, and a set of
eight dissecting lenses, two polariscopes, micrometer eye-pieces,,
camera lucida and microspectroscope, one Leitz Minot microtome.

For sitting accommodation we use a large deep bench, fitted
under the windows in the w^all of the loft. The windows them-
selves have been much enlarged, and this year w^e have had sky-
lights let into the roof. For work in the evenings I have arranged
a small transformer to work from the main electric supply, which
gives sufficient current to run twenty 4-volt lamps ; at the same
time it can supply current for heating a small drying- box for the
microtome slides, and is further used for an electric needle for
orientation of sections in wax.

The general instruction in laboratory work and the preparation
of lectures do not leave much time for original work. The only
things I have attempted here have been a series of stages in the
development of the Orange Scale Insect {Aspiclotas), and a few
preparations of a curious mite infesting the earwig. The body of
each mite has a long stalk which forms a branchincr meshwork
gradually covering the body of the host. I have never seen it
before, and do not know the genus. During the months of May
and June this year I kept a series of eggs of Limnxa stagnalis.

28 Transactions of iJie Society.

Planorhis coi^neus and Valcata piscinalis under observation for the
early stages of development. I have a large number of eggs
embedded for future cutting, after using pereny and acetic sub-
limate as fixing reagents. Towards the end of an egg-laying period
in L. stagnalis I frequently found some of the egg-capsules with
numerous eggs, up to fifteen in number, instead of the normal
single egg. I also managed to hatch out several cases of two
■embryos from one capsule. A curious incident occurred with the
aquarium in which there were specimens of P. corneus, and the
only specimen of Pahidina rivipara I have been able to find. One
night five of these snails, including the Paludina, were dragged
out of the aquarium and devoured by a rat. The aquarium is now
removed to a safer place for protection from further invasion.

Eeport on Biological Activities in Euhleben.
Fkom Michael S. Pease, B.A. Cantab., dated August 14, 1917.

The first outward sign of biological activity in Euhleben
appeared in the spring of 1915, when I)r. A. E. Lechmere started a
series of lectures on Elementary Biology. These were held in a
disused betting-booth, and attended by half-a-dozen enthusiasts.
In the summer, one of the grand-stands was set aside for lectures,
and Dr. Lechmere continued his course on the Protozoa, while I
contributed a course of twenty lectures on Heredity. At Christmas,
1915, the loft of Barracks 6 became available for educational
purposes, and tlie first weeks of the new year saw the conversion
of a corner of a somewhat dilapidated hay-loft into a biological
laboratory. By the end of January the accommodation for eight
microscopes was provided. The necessary glass-ware and reagents
were got in from Messrs. Leitz, and practical botany, of a neces-
sarily elementary character, was started with twenty-one students.

In the following terms regular lecture courses in botany were
given by myself, and the corresponding practical work was of a
more thorough and extensive nature. The ground covered has been
as follows : —

Bryophytes and Pteridophytes (Summer, 1916).
Gymnosperms (Autumn, 1916).
Algai (Lent, 1917).
Angiosperms (Summer, 1917).

Spirit material was kindly presented to us by Prof. A, C. Seward,
Dr. Darbishire, and Prof. Tubeuf.

We are indebted to Prof. Engler for a weekly supply of flowers
from the Kgl. Botanischer Garten, Dahlem, for the systematic
course. A pond within the race-course has been our source of
fresh material for Algae and Protozoa.

The equipment of the laboratory has been continuously im-

Microscopy at Ruhlehcn. 21!^

proved. A cable was laid on to give iis electric current day and
night. A transfoiiner was constructed on the premises, and each
microscope provided with a 4- volt lamp for work after dark.

Several electrically heated incubators were also fitted up, and
last Easter permission was obtained to put in sky-lights and to fit
up a water-supply.

With the possibility of a continuous source of heat, we were
able to consider paraffin embedding.

Serious difficulty has been encountered in the construction of
a satisfactory automatic electric thermostat for the embedding
bath. We have recently secured a Hearson's capsule, and an im-
proved model of embedding bath is now being made. Neverthe-
less, a considerable quantity of material has been satisfactorily
embedded, and a beginning is being made with the teclmique of
Cytology. Last Christmas a first-class microtome (Minot model
by Leitz, cutting to l/x) was purchased, but the rigours of the
winter, followed almost instantly by those of a phenomenally hot
May and June, has made it impossible to start microtomy until
recently.

It has been impossible to do practical work in Zoology, but
Dr. Lechmere's lectures have continued to draw an enthusiastic
band of students. His course so far has covered : —
Protozoa (one term).
Coelenterata (one term).
Vermes (three terms).
Echinodermata (one term).

And he has just finished the second term of his course on
Mollusca.

At the same time, he has also started a course on Invertebrate
Embryology. Animal physiology has been very exhaustively
treated (again only theoretically) by Mr. S. R. Edge, B.A. Cantab.
Practical instruction has been given in the testing of agricultural
seeds by Mr. A. Hill, B.Sc. Aberdeen, and for this course a large
electrically-heated incubator was constructed.

This summer new space was alloted to Science, and this was
made use of to accommodate a library, shared jointly by the
biologists, chemists, and physicists. The library provides seating
accommodation for working, and contains over 500 volumes, mostly
the property of the science staff, but many also supplied by the
Board of Education.

At present " Nature " is at once our only periodical and only
link with scientific activity outside.

30

III. — -A New Species of Gongrosira.
By G.^S. West, M.A. D.Sc. F.L.S.

{Read December 19, 1917.)
One Plate.

In September, 1916, Mr. D. J. ScourField forwarded me a lime-
incrusted alga for examination and possible identification. This
alga has proved of very great interest, and a detailed investigation
of its characters sliows that it belongs to the genus Gongrosira, but
that it does not agree with any of the described species. It was
found by Mr. D. J. Scourfield and Mr. G-. T. Harris on wood in a
stream at Weston Mouth, near Sidmouth, Devonshire, growinof
in such a position that it received the full force of the stream,
the water falling about two feet on to the incrusted alga. The
incrustation was from 4-9 mm. in thickness, somewhat nodular on
its upper surface, and of a vivid green colour. Mr. Scourfield kindly
provided me with a fine dried specimen of the calcified alga, one
fixed in formalin, and a living example in good condition.

The genus Gongrosira was established by Kiitzing in 1843,* and
belongs to the sub-family Microthamniere of the Cha3tophorace?e,
the most important family of branched algse in the Ulotrichales.
Fully half the known species of Gongrosira are incrusted with lime,
but the alga collected by Mr. Scourfield and Mr. Harris differs in
many particulars from those previously described.

The following is a diagnosis of the new alga : —

Gongrosira scourfieldii sp. n.

G. aquatica, in rivulis rapidissimis vigens, stratum efformans
vivide viridissimum circa 4-9 mm. crassum, calce valde incrus-
tatum; thalli pars inferior e filamentis densis anastomosantibus
constans, cellulis tumidulis irregularibusque, pars superior e fila-
mentis plus minusve erectis ramulosis, cellulis apicalibus obtusis

* Kiitzing, Phycologia generalis,^1843, p. 281.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE.

Figs. 1-3. — Gongrosira scotirfieldii sp. n, x 500.

1. Part of thallus, showing the nature of the branching. 2 and 3. Parts of

'^the erect filaments, showing the intercalary zoogonidangia.

a. Cell in which there is no pyrenoid in the chloroplast. b. Cell with two

pyrenoids in the chloroplast. zg. Empty zoogonidangia.

JOURN. R. MICR. SOC. 1918

G. S. West del.

GONGROSIRA SCOU RFI ELDl I.

A New Species of Gongrosira. 31

non attenuatis, apicibus filamentorum e crusta calcarea protrusis ;
filamentorum erectorum cellulaj ut plurimum omnes ramorum
iaitia ostendunt. Cellulne plerumque subcylindricie, longitiidine
variabiles, diametro 1-9-plo longiores, omnes chromatophoro parie-
tali, pyrenoide singulo (rarissime binis) instructie.

Zoogonidangia intercalaria, ore laterali prsedita, e cellulis
brevissimis fere semper oriunda.

Crass, cell. fil. bas. 12-16 /i; crass, cell. fil. erect. 7 -5-9 '5 /a;
crass, zoogonidang. 16-19 /x.

Hah. — Ad ^lignum vetustum in rivulis rapidissimum prope
Sidmouth, Devon.

The thallus of Gongrosira scourfieldii may be roughly divided
into an upper part and a lower part, although there is no sharp
line of demarcation between these two layers. The lower part of
the thallus cannot be described as consisting of procumbent fila-
ments, since, although some of them are more or less creeping, they
form a loose anastomosis of short irregular branches. Springing
from this lower part of the thallus are numerous erect branches
which are themselves Ijranched. In fact, almost every cell of an
-erect branch exhibits a tendency to branch {vide fig. 1). The erect
branches are not attenuated, tlie apical cells being bluntly rounded,
and the tips of the branches project beyond the calcareous matrix.
The cells vary 'considerably in length, long cells and short cells
being indiscriminately mixed in the erect filaments. In the longer
cells, which are usually cylindrical and show no trace of incipient
branching, the parietal chloroplast is restricted to a part of the cell,
either submedian or terminal. Every cell of the thallus contains
a single parietal chloroplast with, as a general rule, one conspicuous
pyrenoid. Occasionally two pyrenoids are found in the chloroplast
{fig. 35), and very rarely there are chloroplasts without any
pyrenoids at all (fig. la). There are no empty cells — that is, cells
which have died and are in consequence devoid of contents — in
any parts of the filaments, either erect or procumbent.

The zoogonidangia arise from short cells and are always inter-
calary with a rather wide lateral aperture (figs. 2 and 3 zg).

There are two other incrusted species of the genus with which
{xongrosira scourfieldii should be compared, namely, G. trente-
pohliopsis Schmidle * and G. incriistans (Eeinsch) Schmidle.f From
the first-named G. scourfieldii is distinguished by its somewhat
larger size, its more irregular and on the whole more elongate cells,
its different branching, and its intercalary zoogonidangia. From
Cr. incrustans it differs in having less crowded erect filaments, which
are not parallel and are much more branched, and in the fact that
all the cells contain a large parietal chloroplast.

* Schmidle in Oesterr. botan. Zeitschrift, 1897, No. 2.
t Schmidle in Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Ges., 1901, xix. p. 12.

32

SUMMARY OF CUERENT RESEARCHES

RELATING TO

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY

(principally invertebrata and cryptogamia),

MICEOSCOPY, Etc.*

ZOOLOGY.

VERTEBBATA.

fl> Embryolog-y.t

Internal Secretions of Gonads.:}: — A, Lipscbiitz refers to the ex-
perimental evidence that the internal secretions of the sexual glands of
mammals control the development of sex-characters, fe'teinach has shown
that the internal secretion of the male gonad furthers the development
of only male sex-characters, and inhibits the development of female
sex-characters, and that the opposite holds of the internal secretion
of the female gonad. By replacing ovary with testis Brandes mascu-
linized a doe ; by replacing testis with ovary Goodale feminized a
cockerel. Lipscbiitz describes the transformation of the clitoris of a
castrated and then masculated guinea-pig into a penis-like organ. The
transformation is not due simply to the absence of ovaries, for the
structure of the external urogenital organs of a sister of the masculated
female, castrated at the same time as the latter, but not masculated, did
not differ from the normal.

Steinach has suggested that the soma of the organism is non-sexual
until after the puberty gland has become differentiated into male or
female. This view is supported by the new experiments of Goodale
and of Pezard on the hen. The castrated hen assumes the plumage and
the spurs of a cock ; the castrated cock keeps his plumage and spurs.
It is inferred that the development of the male plumage and spurs does
not depend on stimulation by the male sexual gland, whereas the female
sexual gland transforms a male-like plumage into a female one, and

* The Society are not intended to be denoted by the editorial " we," and they
do not hold themselves responsible for the views of the authors of the papers
noted, nor for any claim to novelty or otherwise made by them. Tha object of
this part of the Journal is to present a summary of the papers as actually pub-
lished, and to describe and illustrate Instruments, Apparatus, etc., which are
cither new or have not been previously described in this country.

t This section includes not only papers relating to Embryology properly so
called, but also those dealing with Evolution, Development, Reproduction, and
allied subjects.

X Journ. Physiology, 11. (1917) pp. 283-6.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 33

inhibits the growth of the spurs. The male phimage and spurs are on
this view regarded as organs which develop out of the characters of the
hypothetic non-sexual embryonic form without any influence of the
sexual glands. " The male plumage and the spurs become male sex-
characters, not because they result from an action of the male sexual
gland on the non-sexual soma, but because the development of these
non-sexual characters is influenced in the female by the internal secre-
tion of the female sexual gland." Generalizing Pezard's suggestion,
Lipschutz proposes to divide the sex-characters of Vertebrates into two
groups : — (1) Sex-characters not dependent on the puberty glands, but
the outcome of the characters of the non-sexual embryonic form ; and
(2) sex-characters dependent on the puberty gland, which evokes them
by acting on the non-sexual embryonic form, either by furtherance or
by inhibition.

Development of Auditory Capsule in Man.* — George L. Streeter
has studied this in human embryos. The changes in size and form
during development are accomplished in part by a progressive and in
part by a retrogressive differentiation of the constituent tissues. Through-
out the entire period of growth, as far as material was available for
study, it was found that the margins of the cartilaginous cavities undergo
a process of continual transformation. They exhibit a state of unstable
equilibrium, in respect to the opposing tendencies toward a deposit of
new cartilage on the one hand, and toward the excavation of the old on
the other. The margins are always either advancing or receding, and in
this way are produced the progressive alterations in their size, shape,
and position. In this manner suitable chambers are provided for the
enlarging membranous labyrinth.

The general tissue-mass of the otic capsule, during the period re-
presented by embryos from i mm. to oO mm. in length, passes through
three consecutive histogenetic periods— namely, the stage of mesenchymal
syncytium, the stage of pre-cartilage, and the stage of true cartilage. In
the subsequent growth of the capsule it is found that in areas where new^
cartilage is being deposited the tissues of the areas concerned follow the
same progressive order of development. In areas, however, where
cartilage previously laid down is being removed, the process is reversed.
The tissue in such areas returns to an earlier embryonic state, that is, it
u ndergoes de-differentiation. Tissue that has acquired all the histological
characters of true cartilage reverts to pre-cartilage, and then to a mesen-
chymal syncytium. In the latter form it re-differentiates into some more
specialized tissue — in this case for the most part into a vascular reticulum.

The perichondrium is a derivative of the periotic reticulum, and forms
an outer limiting membrane along its cartilaginous margin. During the
foetal period the perichondrium does not rest directly against the true
cartilage, but is separated from it by a zone of transitional tissue con-
sisting partly of pre-cartilage and partly of reticulum.

"Dislocated" Mice.f—Etienne Rabaud has studied the hereditary
relations in a race of mice, arising as a mutation in a normal line,

* Amer. Journ. Anat., xxii. (1917) pp. 1-25 (12 figs.).
t Bull. Soc. Zool. France, xlii. (1917) pp. 87-97 (1 fig.).

March 20th, 1918 D

34 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

which he calls " luxees." The bones of the second sesimenfc of the
hind leg are delicate and short ; the femoro-tibial articulation is very
loose ; the animal moves on the distal end of the femur; the rest of the
limb is turned upwards. These peculiar forms bred true among them-
selves, and when crossed with normal forms yield offspring normal and
dislocated in the 3 : 1 proportion. In short, the peculiarity is recessive.
But after some months it was observed that a pair of dislocated mice
gave rise to a normal type. Seventeen normal forms were obtained
from eight recessive pairs. These behave as dominants, but besides
normal offspring they yielded forms dislocated on only one side. When
they were paired with normal forms they behaved as recessives. When
paired with bilaterally dislocated forms they showed a relative reces-
sivity. When inbred they yield unilaterally dislocated, bilaterally dis-
located and normal forms. The author indicates some of the difficulties
in using the factor hypothesis in interpreting his observations. He
inclines to regard the mutation as a quite novel physico-chemical change
in the constitution of gametes, probably induced by some peculiarity in
the amphimixis.

HaBmopoiesis in Mongoose Embryo.* — H. E. Jordan has studied
the development of the blood in the yolk-sac and in intra-embryonic
mesenchyme. The mesenchyme is a fundamental htemogenic tissue.
It produces (by mechanical differentiation) endothelium and meso-
thelium, which retain its differentiative capacity. In early stages both
give rise to hsemoblasts. In the young embryo these ha^moblasts
differentiate into erythrocytes. The htemoblasts seem to be identifiable
with lymphocytes or primitive leucocytes, which are regarded as pro-
genitors of granulocytes. If this be so, it follows that the primitive
leucocytes appear before the erythrocytes. Such an ontogenetic
sequence is in accord with the principle of progressive differentiation
and with the phylogenetic history. It will be seen that Jordan strongly
supports the monophyletic theory of blood-cell origin.

Aortic Cell-clusters in Vertebrate Embryos.f — H. E. Jordan
discusses in a variety of cases (embryos of mongoose, turtle, etc.) these
endothelial derivatives with hsmogenic significance. They illustrate
the inherent capacity of endothelium to produce hsemoblasts. " The
explanation of tlie limited distribution of the clusters is to be found in
a relationship to young or newly formed, only slightly differentiated,
epithelium, rather than in a connexion with regressive blood-vessels
and an associated toxic substance."

Development of Mammary Glands.:!:— J. A. Myers describes the
foetal development of the mammary gland in the female albino rat (litis
tiorvegicus albinus). The early development has been previously de-
scribed by Henneberg, and the post-natal development by Myers. In
f tt'tuses at fifteen days and nine hours the glands are in the club-shaped

* Carnegie Inst. Washington, Publication No. 251 (1917) pp. 291-312 (4 pis.).

t.Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci., iii. (1917) pp. 149-56.

J-Amer. Journ. Anat., xxii. (1917) pp. 195-222 (12 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 35

•stage, the epithelial primordium forming an ellipsoidal body attached
to the epidermis by a constricted neck. The formation of the primary
-duct, the secondary, tertiary, and quaternary ducts, the epithelial hood,
and the mammary pit are described. The primordium of the nipple
was first observed on the twentieth day as a papilla at the bottom of the
mammary pit. The lumina of the ducts were first observed on the
eighteenth day ; they do not reach their definitive stage in the foetus.
They are apparently formed by re-arrangement of the cells. In the
•■earliest stages studied the mesenchymal cells are condensed around the
gland primordium ; they subsequently elongate and develop long fibrous
processes ; at twenty days and six hours these cells and fibres form the
greater part of the gland stroma, which includes (1) the thin mantle
layer immediately surrounding the ducts, and (2) the true stroma
between the ducts and outside of the mantle layer. The true stroma
contains the larger blood-vessels and nerves of the glands.

Mammary Glands of Rabbit.* — J. Hammond finds that the de-
velopment of the mammary gland of the rabbit during the second half
of pregnancy is under the same influence as that which controls the
development during the first half — namely, the corpus luteum. Contrary
to the generally accepted opinion, the corpus luteum is active during the
:second half of pregnancy. The further development of the corpus
luteum, which takes place during the latter part of pregnancy, is due to
the influence of- the foetus. Hammond's experiments do not uphold the
view of Ancel and Bouin that the glandular phase of the mammary
gland is due to something entirely different from that which causes
the growth-changes, but confirm the views previously expressed by
Hammond and Marshall, that milk-secretion in pseudo-pregnancy
takes place in correlation with the involution of the corpus luteum.
Apparently the secretion of milk results whenever the influence causing
the glandular growth (the corpus luteum) is removed or lessened in
amount, provided that the initial development has gone far enough.

(Estrous Cycle in Guinea-pig.t — Charles R. Stockard and George
N. Papanicolaou have shown that a typical oestrous cycle occurs in this
much-studied animal, and have followed the histological and physiological
•changes. The terminology proposed by Heape is used : — anoestrum,
period of rest in the female ; pro-oestrum, the first part of the sexual
season ; oestrum, especial period of desire in the female ; metoestrum,
the short period when the activity of the generative system subsides, and
the normal condition is resumed in case conception did not occur;
dioestrum, the short period of rest which in some mammals lasts only
a few days. The cycle in the guinea-pig, consisting of the four periods
— pro-oestrum, oestrum, metoestrum, and dioestrum — is known as »■
dioestrous cycle.

The regular dioestrous cycle repeats itself in non-pregnant females
about every sixteen days throughout the entire year. During each

* Proc. Roy. Soc, Series B, Ixxxix. (1917) pp. 534-46 (1 pi.).
t Amer. Journ. Anat., xxii. (1917) pp. 225-S2 (9 pis. and 1 fig.).

D 2

36 SUMMAEY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

cycle typically corresponding changes are occurring in the vagina, the
uterus, and the ovary. Each period of sexual activity lasts about twenty-
four hours, and is characterized by a vaginal fluid changing in com-
position with the several stages. These changes are described in detail.
Ovulation seems to occur spontaneously in every heat. During the
dioestrum there is very little fluid in the vagina. A marked correlation
exists between the cestrous changes in the uterus and the developmental'
cycle of the corpora lutea. Tt looks as if the secretion from the corpora
lutea exerted a protective influence over the uterus and vagina, while its
absence permitted the breaking down and degeneration of the uterine
epithelium typical of the heat period,

Post-oestrous Changes in Dog.* ^ F. H. A. Marshall and E. T.
Hainan have studied the post-oestrous changes occurring in the genera-
tive organs and mammary glands of the non-pregnant dog. There is a
pronounced post-oestrous development under the influence of the corpora
lutea, there being a definite pseudo-pregnant period. Retrogressive
changes do not set in with any of these organs until about thirty days
after ovulation, and in the case of the mammary glands a somewhat later
period. The developmental changes are of a similar kind to those
taking place during pregnancy, but do not reach the same degree of
development. The entire series of changes is physiologically homo-
logous with the series shown by the uterus and mammary glands of
the pseudo-pregnant rabbit and marsupial cat.

The relatively long persistence of the corpora lutea in the bitcn i&
probably correlated with the monoestrous habit. This persistence, which
is possibly greater in some individuals than in others, elircidates the not
uncommon phenomenon of bitches which have not been impregnated
secreting milk at or near the end of the pseudo-pregnant period.

The changes which occur in the generative organs and mammary

glands after oestrus are now brought into relation with the rest of the

oestrous cycle. The complete cycle in the bitch may be summarized in

the following scheme : —

Pro-cestrum

>^
CEstrus

Pregnancy ^ \ Pseudo-pregnancy
Ancestrum

The terms pro-oestrum, oestrus, and ancestrum are used as defined by
Heape. The first part of the ancestrum is generally occupied by the
nursing or lactation period, but in the case of animals which have
experienced pseudo-pregnant conditions the lactation period is usually
only very imperfectly represented. The metoestrous period must now be
regarded as unrepresented in the bitch. It exists in those animals which
do not experience pseudo-pregnancy (e.g. in those rabbits in whick
corpora lutea are not formed after oestrus).

* Proc. Roy. Soc, Series B, Ixxxix. (1917) pp. 546-59 (3 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 37

Effect on Progeny of Fowls after Treatment with Alcohol.* —
Raymond Pearl continues his experiments on the effect of alcohol on
fowls and their progeny. The parents were treated with ethyl-alcohol,
methyl-alcohol and ether. The proportion of fertile eggs was reduced
in the matings of dosed parents. The prenatal mortality was reduced ;
the postnatal mortality was reduced ; the sex-ratio was not sensibly
affected ; there was no significant difference in mean hatching weight
when only the male parent was treated ; the oft'spring of alcoholized
parents showed a higher mean hatching weight and mean adult weight ;
the proportion of abnormal chicks was not affected ; many germ-cells
of treated parents did not form zygotes, but those that did were not
injured in any way. There is much to be said in support of the
hypothesis that alcohol and similar substances act as selective agents
upon the germ cells of treated animals.

Hereditary Characters and Evolution, f — H. S. Jennings takes a
survey of his own observations on Difflugia, and compares his results
with those reached by others working with Drosophila, rats, CEnothera
and other forms. The general impressions are the following : —
" 1. Experimental and observational study reveals that organisms are
composed of great numbers of diverse stocks differing heritably by
minute degrees. 2. Sufficiently thorough study shows that minute
heritable variations— so minute as to represent practically continuous
gradations — occur in many organisms ; some reproducing from a single
parent, others by biparental reproduction. 3. The same thing is
reported from palaeontological studies. 4. On careful examination we
find even that the same thing is revealed by such mutationist work as
that on Drosophila ; single characters exist in so many grades due to
minute alterations in the hereditary constitution as to form a practically
•continuous series. 5. It is not established that heritable changes must
be sudden large steps ; while these may occur, minute heritable changes
are more frequent. 6. It is not established that heritable variations
follow a definite course as if predetermined ; they occur in many
directions. 7. It is not established that all heritable changes are by
■disintegration ; although many such do occur, they cannot be considered
steps in progressive evolution from the visibly less complex to the
visibly more complex. Evolution according to the typical Darwinian
scheme, through the occurrence of many small variations and their
guidance by natural selection, is perfectly consistent with what experi-
mental and palseontological studies show us; to me it appears more
■consistent with the data than does any other theory."

Study of Free-martin. J— Frank R. Lillie has studied the sterility
which is the rule, subject to a few exceptions, in the female of the
two-sexed twins of cattle. In such females, commonly known as free-
martins, the internal organs of reproduction are usually predominantly
male in character, and the external organs are usually, at least, of the
female type. There are however considerable variations. The general

* Journ. Exper. Zool., xxii. (1917) pp. 241-310 (7 figs.).
t Journ. Washington Acad. Sci., vii. (1917) pp. 281-301.
X Journ. Exper. Zool., xxiii. (1917) pp. 371-452 (29 figs ).

38 SUMMARY OF CUERENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

idea reached is that the sterile free-martin is zygotically a femalev
modified by the sex-hormones of the male twin, which circulate in both
individuals during the foetal life owing to secondary fusion of the-
chorions and anastomosis of the foital circulation of the two individuals.

The author argues that the free-martin is zygotically a female.
1. The only basis on which it could be logically interpreted as male is-
that it is co-zygotic with its male mate, because it is impossible to
suppose that the association of two males in utero should cause the
transformation of one of them into a free-martin in a certain definite-
proportion of cases. But the free-martin and its male mate arise from
separate zygotes. From this point of view the free-martin must be
interpreted as zygotically female. 2. The somatic resemblances betweea
the free-martin and its mate are not of the order of identical twins,
3. The assumption that the free-martin is male leads to an absolutely
incomprehensible sex-ratio, while the interpretation that it is female
comes nearer fulfilling the expected sex-ratio. From this point of view
also the free-martin is female. The only argument for its male nature
rests on the internal organs of reproduction, which are more or less of
the male type. But the external genitals and the mammary gland are-
almost invariably of the female type.

Lillie discusses a large number of cases and gives figures of great
excellence. The facts suggest the theory that the course of embryonic
differentiation is largely determined by sex-hormones, circulating in the
blood. This secondary differentiation must be distinguished from the
primary zygotic determination of the male and female sex. The
question why the sex-hormones' of the mother do not affect the
reproductive system of male offspring shows the need of further
investigation. It is unlikely that there is any cessation of production,
of sex-hormones during foetal life; it may be that they are neutralized in
some way ; more probably, the placenta is impervious to them.

The intersexual condition of the free-martin is, on Lillie's theory^
comparable to the intersexual condition in some Gypsy Moths. It is-
due, however, to an acceleration or intensification of the male factors of
the female zygote by the male hormones. There are many grades of
transformation, the ovary approximating towards a testis. Thus, sex in
mammals cannot be diagnosed by the character of the gonads alone,,
because a testis-bearing individual may develop from a female zygote.
The unexpected result is reached that the external genitalia and the
mammary gland are more reliable criteria of the female sex than the
internal parts.

Germ-cells of Loggerhead Turtle."— H. E. Jordan has studied
twenty-five embryos of the Loggerhead Turtle {Caretta careita) from the
second day (five somites, 2 mm. in length) to the thirty-second day of
incubation. He found that the early history of the primordial germ-
cells is very similar to that described by Allen for the turtle Chrysemys:
and by Woods for the dog-fish. The primordial germ-cells migrate
during the second day from the yolk-sac endoderm into the lateral
border of the area pellucida on each side of the embryonic disk. By

* Carnegie Inst. Washington, Publication No. 251 (1917) pp. 313-44 (6 pis.).

ZOOLOOY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 39

the beginning of the third day they are sharply segregated into two
bilateral cords situated in the endoderm of the area pellucida, laterally,
in the caudal half of the disc. In the two-day embryo they extend
from the neurenteric canal to the end of the primitive streak ; in the
three-day embryo from the sixth somite to the caudal extremity of the
streak. The cords become more lineally placed, make a linear
connexion with the overlying visceral mesoderm, and their cells
migrate during the fifth day into this mesoderm and thence medially
(during the sixth and seventh days) towards the root of the forming
mesentery of the closing hind-gut. Individual cells migrate medially
also within, or back into, the endoderm of the gut. The germ-cells in
the medial endoderm become included in the mucosa of the closed hind-
gut, those in the mesoderm in the enveloping raesenchyma and the gut-
end of the mesentery. From these locations the majority of the germ-
cells subsequently (seventh to twelfth day) migrate up the mesentery
and across the coelomic angle into the future sex-gland. They become
incorporated among the mesenchymal cells of the gland and the covering
peritoneal epithelium, where they suffer no striking change in form,
size or content, at least up to the thirty-second day of incubation. The
germ-cells migrate by amoeboid activity, probably assisted in small part
by the factor of unequal growth. The migration period is not sharply
limited, but practically ceases by the sixteenth day. A certain number
of migrating germ-cells go astray, and most of these probably degenerate
in situ, but some may persist to form, under appropriate stimulus, a
focus of neoplastic growth. The total number of germ-cells counted in
a twelve-day embryo was 352, the number within the gonads being
about equally divided (118 left, 127 right). Occasional cells may
divide by mitosis or undergo degeneration at any stage. No germ-cells
were found contributing to the formation of the Wolffian duct. The
germ-cells do not differ from young somatic cells in character of mito-
chondrial content. No transition stages between coelomic epithelial
cells and germ-cells appear up to the thirty-second day, and no secure
histological basis can here be found for separating the germ-cells of the
gonads into large " primary genital cells " and smaller " secondary
genital cells " (Felix) or " gonocytes " (Dustin).

The evidence derived from a study of the Garetta embryos is in
complete harmony with the idea of a single uninterrupted line of sex-
cells from primordial germ-cells to oogonia and spermatogonia, and with
the hypothesis of a vertebrate Keimbahn or continuous germinal path.
The fact of fundamental significance with respect to the primordial
germ-cells is their original extra-regional distribution, and their genetic
independence of the soma-cells,

b. Histology.

Differentiation of Cells in the Developing Organism.* — Vera
Dancharoff discusses the problem whether the relations of differently
organized tissue which work together in symbiosis are definitely deter-
mined by their constitutional specificity, or whether there exist in the

* Amer. Nat., li. (1917) pp. 419-2S.

40 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

organism plastic factors which from a homogeneous cell material may
mould differently organized products. On the basis of descriptive
histogenetic studies it seems plausible to admit that environment can
modify isolated cells ; that the metabolic processes of the cells are the
resultant of their physico-chemical constitution plus physico-chemical
conditions of the environment (including hormones, enzymes, and so
forth), and do not depend exclusively upon their physico-chemical
constitution ; that different substances arise in the cell-body (haemo-
globin, various specific granules) in polyvalent cells as the result of
changes, determined by differences in the environment.

Behaviour of Explanted Striped Muscle in Cultures.* — Warren
H. Lewis and Margaret R. Lewis have experimented with muscle frag-
ments explanted from a chick embryo and placed in tissue cultures like
Locke's solution. The muscle-buds show de-differentiation or return to
a more embryonic condition. The de-differentiation never proceeds to
an indifferent stage. The initial stages in regeneration of muscle in
mammals and amphibians are much like those observed in these culture-
experiments. In both there is (1) a formation of young myoblasts, a
return to a more embryonic condition ; (2) the formation of proto-
plasmic buds which grow out from the ends of the old fibres. Such
buds contain many nuclei and lack cross-striations. Their formation is
inherent in the muscle-fibre itself, and becomes manifested when; the
fibre is cut across or injured. Although the initial stages are much the
same in cultures and in ordinary regeneration, it is not to be expected
that even after prolonged cultivation m vitro there will be a re-differen-
tiation of the muscle-buds. This requires more complex developmental
conditions. It is interesting that anastomosis of muscle-buds may occur
in cultures.

Thymus-like Structures in Larval Lamprey.t — Ivan E. Wallin
finds that the lymphocyte accumulations, or placodes, in the lateral
branchial wall of the larval lamprey do not represent primitive thymus
primordia. Similar formations are present in other parts of the
pharyngeal epithelium. An important component of the thymus of
higher animals is a reticulum ; there is no indisputable evidence of a
reticulum in the placodes. They are apparently patches of degenerating
epithelium.

The branchial " epithelium " does not represent a pure endodermic .
epithelium. This " epithelium " devotes hsemopoetic properties in the
advanced larva. " Epithelium " from the gill arches invades the
ciliated epithelium of the epipharyngeal ridge and produces placodes.
These placodes have a relationship to the gill arches and gill pouches
which make them homologous with the thymus placodes of Elasmo-
branchs and are to be considered primitive thymus structures. The
lymphocyte-like cells which originate in the primitive thymus placodes
differ in structural characters, and in mode of origin from the lympho-
cytes which are formed in the gill arches and lamellae.

♦ Amer. Journ. Anat., xxii. (1917) pp. 169-94 (14 figs.).

t Amer. Journ. Anat., xxii. (1917) pp. 127-67 (4 pis. and 3 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC, 41

Chicken Bone-marrow in Plasma Medium.* — Rhoda Erdmann
describes a first period (first to third day) of a somewhat regressive
character — inchiding the degeneration of the erythrocytes and the
nearly full-grown erythroblasts, the ripening of the granulocytes im-
planted with the bone-marrow into the tissue culture, the decay of the
bone-marrow into a network. In the second period (third day to death
of culture) there is an adaptation of surviving cells to the conditions of
the medium. The surviving cells are modified fat cells and newly
formed wanderins- celia of the mesenchyme-like type. After fourteen
days' cultivation, they are, except elongated connective tissue cells, the
only living cells. They belong to the conneciive tissue cell type, and
may, when the medium is renewed, grow indefinitely.

Osseous Regeneration in the Adult. f — Heitz-Boyer and Scheike-
vitsch maintain that ossification in adult man, effecting regeneration, is
always a pathological process, inflammatory from beginning to end. It
is not a re-awakening of the latent powers of the periosteum. The
primum movens of the ossification of the periosteum in an adult is
always accidental, and originates in a bone afl'ected by osteitis. The
periosteum offers an eminently favourable soil, but it has no generative
action. This belongs exclusively to the bone.

Epithelial Reversions in Human Thymus, ij: — A. P. Dustin has
studied the intrathymic epithelial formations which occur in varying
degrees in the thymus. They are due to reversionary involution of the
primary cells of the thymus. They may last a long time, but they do
not give rise to any other structure.

Structure of Optic Nerve. §— Nicola Alberta Barbieri describes the
optic nerve in various types. In fishes it has two forms, cylindrical and
laminar. In Gadidse, Muranidte, and cartiUiginous fishes it is cylin-
drical ; in the others it is laminar. A deep groove (also seen in
Ruminants) marks the end of the cyliudrical optic nerve ; it is absent in
the laminar optic nerve. In Labrax lupus the optic nerves form a
plaited membrane. In birds the optic nerve is laminar in diurnal birds
of prey and web-footed birds ; it is cylindrical in nocturnal birds of
prey and other birds. Barbieri contrasts the Vertebrate optic nerve with
what occurs in Cephalopods, where very short optic nerves lead into
large optic ganglia, surrounded by a capsule, and are not continued into
the retina.

Intercalated Discs in Heart-muscle of Ox.|| — H. E. Jordan and
J. B. Banks have made a careful study of the intercalated discs in
heart-muscle, which have been interpreted as (1) intercellular cement
substance ; (2) regions of muscle-growth or differentiating sarcomeres ;

«

Amer. Journ. Anat.,xxii. (1917) pp. 73-126 (9 pis. and 2 flgs.).
t Comptes Rendu?, clxv. (1917) pp. 518-20.

J Arch. Zool. Exp^r., Ivi. (1917) Notes et Revue, No. 4, pp. 73-87 (7 figs.).
§ Comptes Rendus, clxv. (1917) pp. 677-80.
Jl Amer. Journ. Anat., xxii. (1917) pp. 285-339 (4 pis.).

42 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

(3) of the nature of tendons ; (4) and local modifications of the myo-
fibrils, of the nature of -irreversible contraction phenomena following-
unusual functional conditions or stresses, i.e. in essence, irreversible con-
traction bands (Jordan and Steele). Another view, allied to the inter-
pretation of the discs as tendinous, is Dietrich's co-ordination mechanism
theory. The authors adhere to the interpretation of the discs as
secondary modifications of the myofibrils at certain areas characterized
by unusual functional conditions, probably excessive stresses. These
involve an inability on the part of the contraction bands to revert to the
relaxed condition. The myofibrils are subsequently modified chemicalJT
and mechanically. IMuch histological and embryological evidence is
submitted.

c. General.

Effect of Alcohol on White Mice.* — L. B. Nice found in a previous
series of experiments that white mice were not markedly affected when
given alcohol in their food. But Stockard has brought forward some
striking and conclusive results demonstrating that guinea-pigs are very
sensitive to fumes of alcohol and are decidedly injured by it. Nice,.
therefore, subjected mice to fumes of alcohol every day of the week,,
except Sunday, keeping them breathing the fumes until they became
intoxicated. This took about an hour at first ; after a month a certain
tolerance had been acquired, for it took about two hours.

The results of the inhalation method were much the same as those
of the feeding experiments. The mice were not much the worse of the
treatment. The fecundity of the alcohol mice was greater than that of
the control mice. Six p.c. of the young of the male alcohol line, 6"S p.c.
of the double alcohol line, 9'8 p.c. of the female alcohol line, and 4 p.c.
of the second generation alcohol line died from lowered vitality, while
none of the control young died. Similar results were obtained in the
previous feeding experiments, except that the alcohol line had a higher
death-rate — ll'l p.c. in the first generation, and 12-5 p.c. in the second
generation.

The growth of the young of all the alcohol lines exceeded that of
the controls, as in the former feeding experiments. The young of the
second generation alcohol line outgrew all the others. There were
no abortions, no stillbirths, and no monsters obtained either in the
inhalation or in the feeding experiments.

A comparison with Stockard's experiments on guinea-pigs shows-
the danger of drawing far-reaching conclusions from data obtained on
a single species. It is well known in other connexions that mice are
very resistant in comparison with guinea-pigs. Mice are immune to
the toxin of the tetanus bacillus, and it is not surprising that they
have a considerable degree of resistance to the effects of alcohol.

'Auditory Ossicles of Aplodontia.t — T. D. A. Cockerell has studied
the ear-ossicles in this genus, the only representative in the modem
fauna of an ancient series of Sciuromorph rodents which, in one of it&

* Amer. Nat., li. (1917) pp. 596-607.

t Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist., xxxv. (1916) pp. 531-2 (3 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 43

families, dates back as far as the \Yasatch Eocene. It seemed probable
that the ear-ossicles, hitherto nndescribed, would throw interesting light
on the relationships of the genus. It was found that the incus and
stapes, while possessing marked characters, are not fundamentally
different from those of the Sciurida^. The malleus, on the other hand,
possesses the lamina and processus cephalicus so characteristic of the
Myomorpha, but, lacks the orbicular apophysis. The presence of tbe
cephalic process and lamina fits in with the view that Aplodontia, in spite
of some obvious specializations, is probably the most primitive living
Sciuromorph.

Atrophy of Right Superior Vena cava on Sheep.* — Louis Calvet
calls attention to a case of the complete obliteration of the right
superior vena cava. A similar abnormality has been recorded in man.
The variation recorded is the only one which Calvet observed in about
3,000 hearts supplied to his students for dissection, but he notes that in
many cases they were supplied with the vessels a good deal cut.

Role of Tins in Teleosts with Swim-bladder.f — L. Boutan ha&
experimented with Mugil capito, Lahrus bergylta, and Carassius auratus,
and finds that the fins (paired and unpaired) are not indispensable for
securing equilibrium. Even in fishes, with the centre of gravity very
high, and equilibrium in the normal position very unstable, balance is-
maintained by movements at the end of the trunk or of the opercula.

Poison of MuraBna.l — W. Kopaczewski finds that a dose of 1-5 milli-
grammes of the poison of Mureena helena is fatal to a guinea-pig ; that
violent shocks are produced, but death is never instantaneous ; that the
poison is very stable in heat, retaining its virulence after 15 minutes'
warming at 75° C. ; that boiling destroys the toxicity ; that the strong
hemolytic power is conserved even after heating at 75° C.

Serum of Mursena.§ — "W. Kopaczewski finds that when the toxic
serum of this eel {Mursena helena) has been rendered inactive, by
exposure to physical influences (such as heat, ultra-violet rays, and
prolonged preservation), there are profound changes in its ultra-
microscopic structure. The micellfe, separate from one another and
exhibiting a lively Brownian movement, form united groups and lose
their movement. By artificial alterations in the surface tension of the
serum subjected to the influence of destructive physical agents it is
possible to facilitate or retard the appearance of micellar agglomerations,,
and ipso facto facilitate or retard the disappearance of the toxicity.

Toxicity of Serum of MuraBna.]] — W. Kopaczewski finds that the
serum of this fish lowers the surface tension of the serum of animals,

* Bull. Soc. Zool. France, xli. (1917) pp. 81-5 (2 figs.),
t Comptes Eendus, clxv. (1917) pp. 801-3.
i Comptes Rendus. clxv. (1917) pp. 513-5.
§ Comptes Rendus, clxv. (1917) pp. 725-7.
11 Comptes Rendus, clxv. (1917) pp. 803-6.

44 SUMMARY OF CIJKRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

into which it is injected. The serum of dogfish, skate, and torpedo is
also toxic for gainea-pigs, but not so markedly as that of Murxna,
which is extraorilinary. The toxicity of the serum of Mursena is not
due to the presence of the poison as such, for the serum loses its
toxicity almost entirely at 65°, while the poison resists this. The
toxicity is supposed to reside in a molecular structure, sui generis, such
that injection into another blood induces a break-down of molecular
equilibrium, marked by the appearance of micellar agglomerations and
a lowering of the surface tension of the serum of the poisoned animal.
It must be understood that, while the toxicity depends on something
besides the poison, it is exaggerated by the poison.

Evolution of Salmonidse.* — Louis Roule admits that the distant
ancestors of Salmonidge may have been marine fishes, but argues that
Salmon (Salmo salar) and Sea-trout (Salmo trutta) are fresh-water
forms which have taken secondarily and partially to the sea where they
have a growing period. They are not to be thought of as marine
species which have become adapted to fresh-water conditions.

History of Faunas and its Relation to Sex.f— Edmond Perrier
accepts the theory that fresh-waters are peopled from the sea, but calls
attention to the frequent return to marine life, e.g. in reptiles. Passage
from the sea to fresh-water tends to be followed by disappearance of
males, and the assumption of hermaphroditism (usually protandrous)
on the part of the females, e.g. in Oligoch^eta, Hirudinea, Limnaiidge.
Maleness is always dangerous ; in fresh-water conditions it may be
fatal. The disappearance or reduction of males in Tunicates and
Cirripedes is noted. Nematodes show all transitions — separate sexes,
useless males, hermaphroditism, and parthenogenesis. It is probable
that the hermaphrodite marine Opisthobranchs are derived from
Pulmonates which in turn were derived from Prosobranchs which left
the sea for the fi'esh-waters. From Opisthobranchs returning, via the
littoral zone, to open sea life, the likewise hermaphrodite Pteropods are
derived.

Measurements of Degrees of Kinship.^ — Raymond Pearl adds to
his previous studies of inbreeding a re-definition of the fundamental
concepts involved. On the basis of these definitions he proposes a new
and more accurate method of measuring, and expressing numerically,
the degree of kinship between any two individuals whatsoever whose
pedigrees are known. A new constant, the partial inbreeding index, is
described. Its purpose is to indicate numerically the part of the total
inbreeding exhibited in the pedigree of any individual which is due to
relationship between the sire and the dam of that individual.

* Comptes Rendus, clxv. (1917) pp. 721-3.
t Comptes Rendus, clxv. (1917) pp. 74S-51.
: Amer. Nat., li. (1917) pp. 545-59.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 45

INVERTEBRATA.

MoUusca.

y. Gastropoda.

Experiments with Physa gyrina." — Elizabeth Lockwood Thompson;
has thoufjjht out a modification of Pavlov's method of testing the power
of association-forming. When the snail, gliding under the surface
film with foot and mouth up, is touched close to the mouth with a
particle of food, there follows a repeated opening and closing of the
mouth. This food-stimulus was synchronously associated with pressing
on the foot with a clean glass rod. After 60-110 trials, the snails gave
the mouth response when there was synchronous application of the
two kinds of stimuli. After forty-eight hours' rest the snails thus
"trained" were tried with the foot-pressure stimulus only, and responded
with the mouth reaction. The association had been established. It
persists for a maximum of 91! hours, and then suddenly ceases. An
interesting waning of response in some of the series of trials was
indicated by a reduction in the number of mouth movements. This
indicated that the snails were becoming adapted to the stimulus which
is not followed by its wonted reward. Interesting experiments with a
very simple labyrinth anchored to the foot of the tank showed that the
snails have no power of learning how to deal with it, how to take the
right path leading to air instead of the wrong path which led to no^
reward, but sometimes to the punishment of an electric shock. The
most that they learned was to associate the warning stimulus of an
irritating hair with the ensuing punishment of a shock, for 15 p.c. out
of a total of 930 trials showed a turning from the wrong to the right
path when the warning stimukis of the hair operated. But "selective '^
ability was a-wanting.

Philippine Species of Amphidromus.f — Paul Bartsch has made a
study of the Philippine species of this genus of land snails, which
presents some interesting zoo-geographic problems. Thus some of the
groups — e.g. A. qiiadrasi — show a northward migration from Borneo
into the Philippine Archipelago. The group A. maculiferus divides
up into a series of geographic races, " beautifully accounted for by the
separate habitats which they occupy."

Arthropoda.

Arthropods from Burmese Amber. | — T. D. A. Cockerel! describes
from a single large piece of amber— a Millipede, Polyxeinis burmitkus
sp. n.; an Acarine, Ckeyletus biirmiticus sp. n.; a Dipteron, Winnertziola
burmitica sp. n. ; a beetle, Dermestes larvalis sp. n. ; and two Hymenop-
tera, Scleroderma (?) quadridentatum sp. n. and Apenesia ehctriphila sp. n.
The amber was found in clay of Miocene age, but was derived from
elsewhere, and may be much older.

* Behaviour Monographs, Cambridge, Mass., ill, No. 3 (1917) pp. 1-89 (8 pis.
and 12 tables).

t U.S. Nat. Museum, Bull. No. 100 (1917) pp. 1-47 (22 pis.).
I Psyche, xxiv. (1917) pp. 40-5 (6 figs.).

46 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Arthropods in Burmese Amber.* — T. D. A. Cockerell reports on
some Arthropods in amber found in Miocene clay, but perhaps much
older, conceivably Upper Cretaceous. The collection includes Electro-
hismm acutum g. et sp. n., a Pseudoscorpion ; a new Lepismatid ; two
new Hemiptera ; Electroffjcnus gracilipes g. et. sp. n., a Hymenopteron,
appearing to connect the Foeninae with the Aulacinae ; BethyliteUa
cyllndrella g. et sp. n., in the family Bethylidas, related to Mesitius ;
Burmitempls halteralis g. et sp. n., a Dipteron with enormous halteres,
apparently nearest to Microsania in the family Empididte ; and a small
Impid beetle, CryphaUtei rugosissimus g. et sp. n.

a. Insecta.

Recognition among Insects. f — N. E. Mclndoo finds evidence that
among bees there is a particular queen-odour, drone- odour, family-
odour, hive-odour, and even individual odour among the workers. The
hive-odour is supposed to be composite odour, due to the workers chiefly,
but supplemented by odours from queens, drones, combs, frames. It is
different if the queen be absent. It is carried among the hairs. It
serves for recognition. Thus worker-bees returning from the field pass
the guards unmolested, though their hive-odour is fainter than when
they left, and is also masked in some measure by what they carry. Bees
kept in the open air for three days lose the hive-odour, but retain their
individual odour. The queen's odour lasts in the hive for some time
after she has left. The social life is dependent on the hive-odour and
the queen-odour.

As to the scent-producing structures, there are glandular cells in the
epidermis. (1) There may be no special device for disseminating the
odour or storing the secretion ; (2) the gland-cells may be associated
with hairs and scales which help to scatter the odour more effectively ;
(3) there may be " evaginable " sacs lined with hairs connected with
gland-cells, thus f-ecuring both storage and distribution ; (4) there may
be articular membranes serving as pouches for storing and preventing a
too rapid evaporation of the secretion ; and (5) there may be specialized
tubes and sacs acting as reservoirs for storing and discharging the
secretion. There are thus five types of arrangement. The scent-
producing organ of the honey-bee belongs to the fourth type, and is one
of the most highly developed organs of its kind. It is a pouch of
articular membrane between the fifth and sixth abdominal terga. Gland-
cells Ijelow the membrane secrete a volatile substance.

Paralyzing Habits of some Hymenoptera. % — Etienne Rabaud
refers to the current opinion that the poison of those Hymenoptera that
stab their victims has only a local action, or, at least, that it diffuses
very slowly. Thus it is that the insect has to sting the ganglia, and
that with great precision. Marchal pointed out in 1887 that statements
as to the precision of the stinging should not be accepted without some

* Amer. Journ. Sci., xliv. (1917) pp. 360-8 (8 figs.).

+ Smithsonian Misc. Collections, Ixviii. (1917) pp. 1-78.

t Comptes Rendus, clxv. (1917) pp. 680-3.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 47

reserve. Rabaud has made some experiments. He put into a narrow
tube a Pompilid, Priocnemis variabilis Rossi, and a spider, Mimmena
vatia Clerck. The Hymenopteron did not sting. It seemed that the
sting could not perforate the abdominal cuticle, for when a smaller
spider was supplied, one stab proved sufficient to produce paralysis. In
some cases a large spider was dealt with effectively by stinging at a
weak spot near the anus or the spinnerets. The paralysis followed
.almost instantaneously, although the place of stinging was at some
distance froui the nerve centres. Six species of Pompiiids and nineteen
species of spiders were tried. The Hymenopteron poison, in the case of
spiders at least, diffuses very rapidly. So it is not necessary to sting the
ganglia. Indeed the ganglia in spiders are Well protected. The Hymen-
•opteron does not seek for places corresponding to ganglia, but for places
which are weak spots. Some paralysed spiders lived for eight days.
The distinction between dead provender and paralysed provender is not
very important. Some victims are vulnerable all over, some have but
few' vreak points. There seems to be no seeking for a particular spot,
but rather for any vulnerable spot. The position of th,:; ganglia is of
sscondary imporiance.

Cytoplasmic Bodies in Germ-cells of Lepidoptera.* — A. Bronte
Gatenby has made a careful study of the cytoplasmic inclusions in the
germ-cells of Lepidoptera, e.g. Smerinthns populi, Pieris brassicae and
Ori/i/ia antiqua. A little body, the micromitosome, apparently quite
-different from chromatin, has been followed from the spermatocyte
back into the secondary spermatogonium. It is very probably present
in the primordial germ-cell. It has been definitely found in the female.
It seems to divide in all divisions, and it appears to be a constant factor
in the spermatids of Smerinthus.

It is shown tliat in early stages the cytoplasmic bodies of the female
resemble those of the male. There is a definite period, judged to be
.about the beginning of the growth stage, when the subsequent fate
■of the mitochondria in the male becomes different from that in the
female. The remarkable formation of chromophobe and chromophile
zones in the male mitochondrial body is described, and the author
discusses the use of these zones.

The formation of the macromitosome (middle piece of the sperma-
tozoon) from the mitochondria is described. The acrosome of the
spermatozoon is formed from several acroblasts, which are traced back
to the early growth period of the spermatocyte. The centrosome has
been shown to divide in the young spermatid, and one centrosome is
probably lost, but definite evidence is not forthcoming.

Silkworms in Madagascar.! — Fauchere finds that the races of
Serii'aria mori introduced from the South of Europe to the centre of
Madagascar were originally " monovoltine," i.e. with one generation in
the year, and that after about two years they were "polyvoltints," with
six generations in the year. Their cocoons were not inferior to those

* Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., Ixii. (1917) pp. 407-63 (3 pis. and 5 figs.),
t Comptes Rendus, clxv. (1917) pp. 676-7.

48 SUMMARY OF CUERENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

of monovoitines. The eggs of monovoltines must hibernate if they are
to hatch out regularly ; those acclimatized in Madagascar hatch out very
regularly twelve to thirteen days after being laid, without any exposure
to cold, which is indeed injurious. The author describes a method
of dealing with the pairing methods and the eggs Avhich seems to
lessen the risk of pebrine. There is an indigenous silk-moth, Borocera
madagascariensis, which produces a coarse silk, and has quite different
habits.

Variations in Silkworms.*— A. Lecaillon has inquired into the
characters of "bivoltine" variations which crop up accidentally in
normal races of Bombyx mori. In three sets of eggs showing " bivol-
tinism," there was so little yellow colouring matter that the eggs seemed
almost w'hite. There is some chemical peculiarity in the vitellus
distinguishing them from normal " univoltines." Daring embryonic
development, the colour-changes in the bivoltine eggs were quite
different from the usual succcosion, which is yellow, rose, reddish, dark
red, greyish, slatey-grey. Four days after laying a few of the pale
bivoltine eggs showed a faint rose ; on the fifth day a go.od many were
of this colour ; on the sixth day most of them had still their original
coloration.

Past experience in reoring accidental bivoltine variations has been
very unsuccessful. They seemed to have little vitality or resisting power.
But Lecaillon has not confirmed this. He found them easy enough to
rear, and the mortality from disease was not greater than usual. There
was nothing peculiar in chrysalis or moth, in the pairing or in the
number of eggs laid.

Parthenogenesis in Silk-Moths. f — A. Lecaillon finds that diverse
races or varieties of Bombyx differ in their liability to parthenogenetic
development. In some cases the parthenogenetic changes in the 'ig^
may stop at a very early stage ; in others they result in a vigorous larva.
Actual cases are cited.

Parthenogenesis in Otiorhynchus sulcatus.| — J. Feytaud finds
that this formidable vine-beetle is in general parther.ogejietic. Among^
3000 he found no males ; he has never seen a male. Each female
produces about 150 eggs. Parthenogenesis is known to be the rule in
the allied species 0. tuna, 0. cribricollis, 0. Ugustki.

Study of Myelophilus minor. § — Walter Ritchie gives an account of
the structure and habits of this beetle, rare in Britain, which attacks
pine plantations. It is contrasted in detail with the well-known M.
piniperda. The slight differences between the sexes of M. minor are
indicated. The brood galleries of M. minor are very characteristic,
and it is quite easy to distinguish them clearly from those of M. pini-
perda. The specificity of habit is very interesting. The reproductive

* Comptes Rendus, clxv. (1917) pp. 683-5.

t Comptes Rendus, clxv. (1917) pp. 799-801.

t Comptes Rendus, clxv. (1917) pp. 767-9.

§ Trans. R. Sec. Edinburgh, lii. (1917) pp. 223-3i (2 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MIGKOSCOPY, ETC. 49

organs of both sexes are described, and the life-history and the natural
•enemies are dealt with. The adult beetles, after the laying of the eggs
from which the first brood will develop, leave the parent galleries and
return to the young pine-shoots at the top of the tree with their r.^pro-
ductive organs in an exhausted state. On a nutritious diet the organs
are restored, and a second egg-laying may follow in a new-made mother-
gallery. If the beetles, the parents of the first brood, recuperate in
itime, then from their second laying it is possible that a second issue
of adults may take place in a calendar year.

Fertilization in Gnat.* — Monica Taylor notes that the egg-rafts of
€ulex pipiens are laid most copiously between 10.30 p.m. and 12.0 p.m.
They are also laid between 4.0 a.m. and 6.0 a.m. The process of
fertilization is normal. Segmentation begins in less than an hour
-after the deposition of the last egg. The chromosome number in the
segmenting nuclei is six. A tendency to parasyndesis (side-to-side
pairing of homologous chromosomes) is exhibited by the segmenting
nuclei. " Parasyndesis probably effects the condition of the chromo-
somes in the nuclei of larva, pupa and imago, i.e. is responsible for the
presence of the apparently ' haploid ' character of the nuclei in the
somatic cells."

Sugar-cane Leaf-hopper.f — C. S. Misra has made an admirable
detailed study of Pyrilla aberrans Kirby, which attacks the sugar-cane,
both as a nymph and as an adult. It belongs to the family Fulgoridae,
sub-family Lophopinag. Descriptions are given of the eggs, the hatch-
ing, the five instars of the nymph, the last moult, and the adult. Account
is taken of the few predatory enemies, e.g. occasional ants and dragon-
flies, and of the parasitic Chalcididas, Dryinidse, and Stylopidje. Much
attention is given to practical questions. The memoir is very well
illustrated.

Bibliography of Human Lice.J— Gr. H. F. Nuttall has compiled a
very useful annotated bibliography of the zoological and medical publi-
cations relating to the two species of lice {Pedmilus liumanus Linn.,
1758, and Fhthirus pubis Leach, 1815) infesting man, the part they play
in pathology, the prophylactic measures and means of destruction
employed against them, their structure, functions, habits, and inter-
relations. The bibhography enumerates 639 publications, of which 404
have been consulted in the original, 81 in the form of abstracts or quota-
tions by other authors, whilst 154 are cited by title only, being either
inaccessible or still to be consulted.

Lice and Disease. § — G. H. F. Nuttall gives a critical summary of
the evidence which shows that Pediculus hummius {corporis and capitis)
is the carrier of typhus and relapsing fever. Infection with the typhus

♦ Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., Ixii. (1917) pp. 287-301 (1 pi. and 1 fig.).
+ Mem. Depart. Agric. India, v. (1917) pp. 73-133 (6 pis. and 17 figs.).
t Parasitology, x. (1917) pp. 1-42.
§ Parasitology, x. (1917) pp. 43-79.

Mcirch Wth, 19J8 E

50 SUMMAEY OF CURKENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

virus occurs tlirough the bite of infective lice, or through such lice bein^
crushed upon the skin when it is scratched. liice remain infective for
at least eleven days. Lice are invariably present in connexion with
typhus outbreaks. The destruction of lice upon a typhus patient renders-
him innocuous. The prophylaxis of typhus consists in louse destruction.
Bed-bugs and fleas do not convey the disease.

Epidemiological evidence, as in the case of typhus, points to relapsing
fever being louse-transmitted. The microbe {Spiroch'deta recur rentis}
passes from parent louse to its offspring. As Nicolle and others have
shown, lice do not convey relapsing fever by their bites. Infection
occurs through the lice being crushed on the skin, or infective material
may be carried on the fingers to nose or eye. The spirochaHecan invade
the system through intact mucous membranes. The author discusses
miscellaneous infective diseases which lice may spread, and the primary
effects of biting. The secretion of the salivary glands has some degree
of toxicity. The secretions of the two sets of salivary glands contain^
Nuttall found, a substance which retards the coagulation of the blood.

Biology of Lice.*— G. H. F. Nuttall has gathered together the
observations which have been made on the life and "habits of
Pedmilus humanus, adding here and there his own. The species is
restricted to man, its nearest relative occurring on monkeys. It lives
solely on blood, for sucking which the mouth-parts are adapted.
After the nit or egg-stage, there are three larval stages and the adult ;
from the first larval stage to the adult there are three moults. The
single sharp claw on each leg is suited for progression on hair. Body-
lice {P. corporis, P. vestmenii) and head-lice (P. capitis) are at most
merely racial forms of Pediculus humanus Linnaeus. The distribution
appears to be world-wide, but there is some dearth of precise data.

In modern times lousiness is largely confined to the poorer classes
and to soldiers in the field. It seems that capitis occurs more fre-
quently on females than on males, and that the reverse holds to a
certain extent for corporis ; there is a greater prevalence of capitis in
children and old people. There may be over 10,000 lice of corporis
about one person and over 1,000 of adult and larval capitis ; there
appears to be an increase in winter and a decrease in summer. Man
becomes infested by contact with verminous healthy people ; by contact
with infected sick, dying, and dead ; by contact with infested clothing,
bedding, brushes ; and by stray lice. Lice may be casually carried by
wind and by flies.

The rate of locomotion varies with temperature, illumination, and
the nature of the surface. Nuttall observed on sateen a rate of 1
metre in 2 minutes 43 seconds ; on hair 20 cm. in 1 minute 24 seconds
to 3 minutes 10 seconds, or more. Lice can cover in a few minutes a
distance equal to the length of a man's body.

The second part of NuttalFs paper gives an account of the methods
of raising lice experimentally — notably the felt-cell method and the
wristlet method — and some other practical points. With a questionable

* Parasitology, x, (1917) pp. 80-185 (2 pis. and 12 figs,).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 51

exception of rearing on pigs, there is no record of successful raising of
PecUculus humanus except on man.

There is notable variation in the proportion of the sexes in the
offspring of different parents. There are broods in which one sex pre-
dominates. Oviposition lasts 17 seconds at most. The female walks
backwards along a hair, which glides within the fork formed by the
posterior lobes of the last abdominal segment. The gonopods are flexed
away from the body and against the hair, gripping it ; a minute drop of
hyaline fluid is exuded ; the egg is liberated and cemented ; the female
releases her grip with the gonopods and moves forwards. Full details
are given. A female in optimum natural conditions may lay 9 to 12
eggs a day, 275 to 300 in all. There is, especially in corporis, a marked
tendency to oviposit where eggs have been previously laid. Unferti-
lized eggs may be laid, but they do not develop.

The eggs of corporis do not hatch at 22" C, or below ; the development
is about 16 days at 25° C, 5 to 6 days about 36^-37''; they die without
hatching at 40°-45° C. The eggs of capitis on the wrist at 32°-35°C.
hatched in about 7 days.

An account is given of the obvious changes within the egg, the
emergence of the larva, and the moults. The development from egg to
egg may be passed through in about 17 days— 7 in the egg, 4 in the
first larval stage, 3 in the second, 2 in the third, and 1 day before ovi-
position. A lemale may have 1918 descendants during her lifetime,
and the offspring of her daughters, during their hfetime, would number
"■ 112,778 — 48 days after the original female began ovipositing. A female
may live up to 30 days at 28° C, if fed once daily; 45 days, if fed twice
and kept at 24° by day and 34° by night ; witli more feeding a male
may live 32 days and a female 46. AVhen kept continuously on the
wrist, a male may live 23 days, a female 22 days.

Descriptions are given of the mode of feeding, the gorging when
very hungry, the reactions to various stimuli, the " sham death," and
many other interesting details of behaviour.

Notes on Lice.* — F. M. Howlett found in India that specimens of
Pediculus capitis bred on the body showed in the second generation a
modification of chitinization and colour in the direction of P. corporis.
Previous experiments with an unidentified species of Culex showed that
a warm surface stimulated the female to bite. The proximity of a hot
body (e.g. a warmed comb) stimulated rapid and excited movement in
Pediculus and Phthirus, which made for the warm surface.

Philippine Derbidse.f — Frederick Muir reports on large collections
of these delicate little insects (Rhynchota), and brings the Philippine
list up to ninety-eight species in thirty-nine genera. Many of the species
have been erected on characters of the male genitalia, e.g. the form of
the pygophor, anal segment, and genital styles. The eggs of Derbidaj
have never been described, and the author has failed to find them.

* Parasitology, x. (1917) pp. 186-8.

t Philippine Journ. Sci., xii. (1917) pp. 4C-10i (1 pi. and 4 figs).

E 2

52 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Convergence among Ectoparasitic Insects.* — N. C. Rothschild
discusses the repeated occurrence in different orders of similar structural
details. There may be convergence in reduction of mouth-parts, in
reduction of wmgs, in reduction of eyes, and so on. The degree of
parasitism in adult epizoic insects seems to be of less importance in con-
nexion with the reduction of eye than the absence of liyht. Many
similarities are found in the adaptations which enable the parasite to
hold on to its host, or to move about on it with safety. Many epizoic
insects " glide through the fur of the host as quickly as a seal travels
through water or a corncrake through grass." " The medium in which
a species exists exercises a most powerful influence on its evolution."

Abdominal Extremity in Orthoptera.f — L. Chopard has made a
study of the various structures at the end of the abdomen in Ortboptera.
(1) The term suranal plate should be applied to the last tergite in
Blattidae, Mantid®, and adult Locustidas. The eleventh tergite of other
Orthoptera should be called the superior anal valve. (2) There are two
inferior anal valves, which, in some cases at least, are due to fusion of
the tenth and eleventh sternites. (3) The "subgenital plate" is of
heterogeneous nature, differing in different types. (4) The " oviscapt "
with sis or four valves is found in all female Orthoptera except Cur-
tillinas. Its superior valves are homologous with the lobes of the
male subgenital plate.

Longevity of Males of Carausius morosis.| — G. Foucher obtained
two males among the numerous offspring which he reared from this
parthenogenetic Orthopteron. The male is 60 mm. in length as con-
trasted with 80 mm. for the female. It was very delicate and agile.
Its pairing with the female was observed. One lived for seven months
iind three days, a long time for a male Orthopteron. There is some
indication that starving the parthenogenetic females induces the appear-
ance of males, but more data are required.

Intersexual Forms of Gypsy-Moth. §— Richard Goldschmidt con-
tinues his study of the Gypsy-Moth {Lymantria dispar) as regards
intersexuality. Each sex contains the factors of both sexes. Which
factors become potent depends upon the quantitative relation of the
two sets of factors. Both of them possess a quantitatively definite
strength of action or potency. In normal sex-distribution the right
combinations are regulated by the heterozygosis-homozygosis mechanism.
Different races differ, it is assumed, in regard to the absolute potencies
of these factors. Cross-breeding results in abnormal combinations, seen
in the intersexual forms.

There is a remarkable seriation in both male and female inter-
sexnality. The series is the inverse of the order of differentiation of

♦ Trans. Entomol. Soc. London, 1916, part v. (publ. 1917) pp. cxli-clvi (30 figs.),
t Arch. Zool. Exp6r.. Ivi. (1917) Notes et Revue, No. 5, pp. 105-12 (7 figs.).
X Comptes Rendus, clxv. (1917) pp. 511-3.
§ Journ. Exper. Zool., xxii. (1917) pp. 593-617 (53 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 53

the organs in development. Thus the last organs to differentiate in
the pupa and the first to be intersexual are the branching of the
antennae and the coloration of the wings. The first imaginal organ
differentiated in the caterpillar, and the last in the series to be changed
toward the other sex, is the sex-gland.

The theory that best fits the facts is that the sex-factors are enzymes
(or bodies with the properties of enzymes) which accelerate a reaction
according to their concentration. In the fertilized egg the enzymes
which govern the differentiation of the organism towards one of the two
alternatives, maleness and feninleness, are both present. They may be
called gynase and andrase. The mechanism of sex-distribution — i.e.
through the sex-chromosomes — results in the formation of two kinds
of fertilized ova, differing in the relative concentration of the two
enzymes. Higher concentration results in greater rapidity of reaction,
and the more rapid reaction wins. The dominating enzyme, present
in higher concentration, will first succeed in furnishing the necessary
amount of specific substance acting as determiner, which may be called
the hormone of male or female differentiation. In intersexual forms,
which result in conditions of abnormal concentrations of enzymes,
development must go on under the influence of one enzyme up to a
certain point and then continue under the influence of the other. " A
given organ develops, in the case of female intersexuality, on female
lines up to a given point, when suddenly the male stimulus starts,
and the rest of the development is purely male. The degree of inter-
sexuality is determined by how long the development has been in progress
before the turning-point occurs."

As regards the cytological aspect of the case, Goldschmidt makes
the following suggestion. The chromosomes cannot be regarded as
built up from chromatin particles, which are themselves the chemical
basis of heredity. The chromatin is rather a skeletal substance which
works as an " adsorbens " for the enzymes, which really constitute the
chemical basis of heredity. The quantitative behaviour of the enzymes
is of fundamental importance for the process of heredity. " The
quantity of adsorption of an enzyme by an adsorbens depends upon
the qualities of both and the surface of the adsorbens. Th^ wonderful
uniformity of size and shape of the chromosomes of a given animal
appears, therefore, as a minute mechanism to guarantee the typical
quantity of enzymes of heredity to be assembled at the moment of
fertilization. And all the strange processes preceding the maturation
of the sex-cells appear easily understandable, as well as the meaning
of the peculiar mechanism of mitosis. The formation of a chromosome
means, physically, the same thing as the dropping of a piece of charcoal
into a solution containing enzymes."

Bristle Inheritance in Drosophila.* — Edwin Carleton MacDowell
has worked with a race of flies with extra bristles. Selection was con-
tinued for forty-nine generations for the production of high numbers of
extra bristles. In any generation after the early ones the distribution
of a single family is similar to that of the distribution of all the families

* Journ. Exper. Zool., xxiii. (1917) pp. 109-^6 (10 figs.).

54 SUMiMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

taken together in that generation. For about eight generations the
means rose ; following this were two periods not comparable with each
other, within neither of which was there any evidence of further
advance. Continued selection did not produce any high extremes that
were not obtainable near the beginning of th6 experiment. The range
of variation changed only very slightly ; the low limits being most
frequently at 0 or 1, the high limit at I) for the females, at 7 for the
males. The standard deviations rose and fell together with the means ;
as the means of the females are higher than those of the males,
so the standard deviations of the females are higher than those of
the males. These relationships do not hold true when the complete
yields of the bottles are not included (generations 33-49). Changes
in the means of the parents are not accompanied by changes in
the means of their offspring, except at the beginning of the experi-
ment.

By selecting low-grade parents from the second generation of the
extra-bristled race it was found possible to establish a race of flies which
had markedly lower means than the high-selected race.

By selecting low-grade flies from the fifteenth generation of the high
race and continuing to select for low grades, it was found impossible in
eight generations to establish a race that was distinguishable from the
high race. The attempt was repeated, starting from the twenty-sixth
generation of the high race, and continued for six generations with
similar results. Keturn selection does not reverse the progress made
by the advance selection. Flies with high and low bristle grades
appear to have very similar offspring.

By selecting low-grade parents from the Fj of a cross between
normals and flies from the sixteenth generation of a high race, a low
race was established (extracted low). One selection was sufficient to
establish this race as distinct from a high race ; for four generations
the curves of the parents and offspring wre parallel, and after that
completely independent ; for four generations the low selection continued
to lower the means ; except in the first few generations the curves of
the progeny rise and fall in harmony with the curves of the high race,
when families raised at similar times are compared ; besides being
lower than the high race, the variability of the extracted race is less
than that of the high race ; in response to the same improvement in
conditions it does not advance as far.

Comparing the different races, it is found that, no matter what the
percentage, they all exhibit high points and low points at the same
time. This means that environment is accountable for the variations
in most of the generations. But the initial rise in the high race was
not due to environment, as this rise resulted in a genetic change in
the race.

The supposition of a single varying factor to explain the above
results cannot be justified ; it would require numerous other assumptions.
All the results are simply explained on the assumption that there were
genetic differences present among the original flies with extra'bristles ;
that these genetic differences (or genes) are entirely independent of the
main factor that occasions the monohybrid ratio in crosses with
normal flies.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 55

Monograph on Dragonflies.* — R. J. Tillyard has provided an
admirable monograph on Odonata, correlating morphological, phylo-
genetic, and physiological data, and including numerous personal
•observations. It is in every way a first-class piece of work. The
Odonata form a.singularly isolated group, marked by high specializations
of structure, superimposed upon an exceedingly archaic foundation. No
near relatives exist to-day, nor since Palaeozoic times. The Plectoptera
or May- Flies are nearest to the Odonata, but the affinity is slight.
The Protodonata of the Upper Carboniferous were the ancestors of the
present-day Odonata, but an unfortunate gap in the Trias hides the
€xact line of descent from our view.

The leading characters of the order are summarized ; a detailed
account is given of the external features of adult and larva. In the
male of Hemiphlebia mirabiUs the anal appendages of the male are
rather long, white, and very conspicuous. The inferior pair are like
white ribbons. The male uses them to attract the attention of the
female by waving them about while at rest on a reed stem. The female
replies to his signals by showing the whitened underside of the tip of
her abdomen.

A full account is given of the general structure, histology and
development of the wings. The wing-bud is an ectodermic evagination,
in the form of a small bag lined internally with hypoderm cells and
■externally with the cuticle. Between the layers of hypoderm is a
narrow prolongation of the hsemocoele, filled with blood. Into this
space the tracheae soon penetrate and fine nerves accompany them. At
the metamorphosis the wings appear as crumpled bags ; blood is forced
in and the bag expands, is smoothed out, and dries. The fluid persists
for an hour or two or for several days, according to the weather and
other factors, and gives the wings a pale greenish colour, while the
additional refraction of the rays of light through the still separated
media gives a beautiful iridescence to the surface.

The author gives an account of the macroscopical and microscopical
structure of the various systems. Various authors have stated that the
mushroom bodies of the dragonfly's brain are rudimentary, and that the
intelligence is of a low order, but the fact is that the mushroom bodies
-are very well developed, though of a generalized type, and the assump-
tion that they are the sole seat of intelligence is unwarranted. The
movements of feeding are almost certainly controlled from the sub-
<ESophageal ganglion, and many facts show that the ventral ganglia
have much independence. The vision is probably the keenest among
invertebrates, and its range for the detection of movements may be
ten to twenty yards. A dragonfly sees objects best at distances from a
few inches to five or six feet, but this is long-sighted compared with
other insects. The number of facets in the compound eye ranges from
about 10,000 in the smaller Zygoptera to 28,000 or more in the largest
^Eschninas. The so-called "internal light" of a dragonfly's eye, which
is beautifully coloured, is a reflection from the interior. The compound
•eyes are large and functional in the newly-hatched larva ; the ocelli

* The Biology of Dragonflies. Cambridge : 1917, xii and 396 pp. (4 pis. and
188 figs.).

56 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

appear late in larval life or only at metamorphosis. Clean-cut removal
of the antennae does not disturb dragonflies in the least. Smell seema
to be practically absent. Hearing is dubious, and is probably represented
by a sense of equilibration or poise. The larvte may have a chemical
sense.

Tracheal gills are developed in the larvae of dragonflies in three
places : (1) in all Anisoptera, within the anterior portion of the rectum,
by specialization of the rectal epithelium and pads (forming the beautiful
branchial basket) ; (2) in most Zygoptera, on the two caudal cerci and
the appendix dorsalis ; and (3) on a few archaic Calopterygidse (which
have also caudal gills), on the sides of certain abdominal segments.
Besides these the rectal pads or folds of Zygopterid larvae probablv
function as blood-gills. The structure of the various types of gill is
described with great care. The spiracles of the larva are either closed
or only partly functional.

"The dragonfly differs from all other insects in the fact that the
great muscles of the synthorax are directly connected with the wing-
bases by means of tendons. In all other insects the muscles by means
of which the action of the wings is controlled are not directly connected
with those organs, but are connected with the notum. . . . The
direct attachment to the wing- bases has been brought about by the
■ development of special sclerites, derived from the notum, in the formation
of those bases." The fore and hind wings work quite independently.
There is only one true axillary or wing-pivot.

The copulatory apparatus of the male dragonfly is one of the most
remarkable structures in the animal kingdom. It " is not homologous
with any known organ ; it is not derived from any pre-existing organ ;
and its origin, therefore, is as complete a mystery as it well could be."
A careful description is given.

The egg, when laid, consists of the nucleus, the formative proto-
plasm in the yolk, the periplasm around the yolk, the yolk, the vitelline
membrane, the chorion with one micropyle, and some gelatinous matter.
The embryonic development is described.

Out of the egg comes a " pronymph " enveloped in a cuticular
pronymphal sheath. It swells very rapidly and moults, liberating the
free-swimming larva. There are eleven to fifteen instars, each with an
ecdysis. The larva may reach maturity in a year, or not for five years..
The " mask " is a transformation of the second maxillte. The changes-
during larval life include the appearance of ocelU, the increase in the
number of elements in the compound eye, the increase in the number of
joints in the antennae from three to seven, the development of wings,
the correlated changes in the thorax, the increase in the number of
Malpighian tubes, and so on. The final metamorphosis is described,,
with some reference to the peculiarities in Fetalura gigantea.

After _ discussing the classification (429 genera, 2457 species), the
geographical distribution, the fossil forms, the author concludes his fine
monograph with a very interesting paper on bionomics, an account of
British species, and practical advice as to coJlecting and preserving. ,

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 57

5- Arachnida.

Alteration of Instinct in Spider.* — Jeanne Berland observed that
females of Nemoscolus laurse, which were induced to make webs in Bore!
tubes, altered the plan from an orb with a large diameter to a sector
elongated vertically and with few rays (as in the genus Hyptiotes). In
adaptation to a narrow space the characteristic form of web was pro-
foundly altered.

Cardiac and Skeletal Muscle of Scorpion. f—H. E. Jordan finds
that the striped muscle of the Florida scorpion is very similar to that
of Limulus, and accordingly conforms more closely to the Vertebrate
type of striped muscle than to the Arthropod type as exemplified by
certain insects and by the sea-spider. The cardiac muscle of scorpion
and of Limulus conforms with Vertebrate heart muscle in its syncytial
structure, in the more or less regular radial arrangement of the myofibril
bundles (lamellfe), and in the definite character of the relatively less
complex cross striping. The skeletal muscle also of these forms agrees
with Vertebrate skeletal muscle with regard to the major stripes, and in
the absence (or extreme tenuity) of the mesophragma and the accessory
disc (N-disk) of Engelmann and Rollet, conspicuous in certain insect
muscles. There is in the scorpion an essential identity in microscopic
structure between the cardiac and skeletal muscle. The axial location of
the nuclei, the radial lamellar arrangement of the myofibrils, and the
relative simplicity of the striations all indicate a relatively low degree of
differentiation. Many details as to structure are communicated.

Rare Hydracarid.|— W. Williamson reports the occurrence of a
female of Lebertia densa Koen. at Craigallian Loch, and gives a descrip-
tion and figures. The rare species does not seem to have been recorded
since Koenike found it at Harburg in 1902. Its discovery at Craigallian
brings the number of British species of Lebertia up to eleven.

• New Parasitic Acari.§— Stanley Hirst describes Chirodiscoides caviee
g. et sp. n., a curious minute mite found on the hairs of the posterior
region of the guinea-pig's back. As in Chirodiscus the anterior legs are
adapted to form hair-clasping organs. During copulation the male
attaches himself to the generative nymph by little suckers on the venter
and also by the elongated legs of the fourth pair, the hook of the tarsus
becoming fixed in the projecting posterior margin of the second epimeron.
A description is also given of Demodex muscardini sp n., from a dormouse,,
and D. erinacei sp. n., from a hedgehog.

Leg-muscle of Sea-spider. || — H. E. Jordan finds material of ex-
ceptional clearness in the leg-muscle of Anoplodactylus lentits. It differs-
from that of Limulus in being of the typical insect type, while that of

* Arch. Zool. Exper., Ivi. (1917) Notes et Eevue, No. 5, pp. 134-7 (4 figs.).

t Anat. Record, xiii. (1917) pp. 1-20 (21 figs.).

X Scottish Nat., 1917, pp. 271-4 (2 figs.).

§ Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., xx. (1917) pp. 431-4.

II Anat. Eecord, x. (1916) pp. 493-508 (7 figs.).

58 SUMMARY OF CUKKENT Kb:SP:A.KCHES RELATING TO

Limulus corresponds more closely to the Vertebrate type. The micro-
scopic structure is described in detail, but it is difficult to give an
intelligible summary without a figure showing the discs, lines, and other
differentiations.

«• Crustacea.

New Zealand Sandhoppers.* — Charles Chilton describes three New
Zealand species of Talorchesfia, and gives a diagnostic key and excellent
figures. In the male of T. tellnris there is an extraordinary process on
the fifth pertBopod (hind margin of the carpus). There is a suggestion
•of dimorphism among the males, for there are two forms with very
different second gnathopods. It is possible, however, that the second
form should be ranked as a separate species.

New Isopod's from British Gruiana.f — A. S. Pearse describes some
new species, and establishes a new genus, Circoniscus, which is closely
allied to Sphseroniscus Gerstaecker, but differs iu having only two
segments in the flagellum of the second antenna.

Habits of Lepidurus viridis4 — E. M. Herriott has studied this
interesting Phyllopod, common in shallow pools in New Zealand. Their
sudden appearance is due to the rapid development of the " winter " or
■" resting " eggs, which are able to survive desiccation for months.
When feeding they usually lie on their back, moving all their limbs.
They bite at the caudal setae of their neighbours, and devour the dead
bodies of their fellows. There is considerable diversity of coloration
and size. The exhausting process of moulting is described, and the
rapid movements— mostly with ventral surface downwards — are also
dealt with.

Annulata.

Dimorphism in a Polych8et.§— F. Mesnil and M, Caulleryfind that
^pio martinensis is dimorphic. Some sets of eggs develop into a typical
Spionid larva of pelagic habit ; other sets develop within the spawn-mass,
directly and without any pelagic stage. In the second case there is
cannibalism or adelphophagy. The phenomenon requires further study ;
it seems to be similar to what Griard called poecilogony.

Segmentation of Ovum of Protula meilhaci.|| — A. Soulier notes
that after the eight-cell stage there are two vertical cleavages in new
planes, at angles of 45° with the first vertical planes. The two planes
do not appear simultaneously, though, in general, the posterior ele-
ments are formed before those anteriorly. In the fifth stage there is
the same lack of simultaneity in the formation of two more cleavage

• Trans. New Zealand Inst., xlix. (1917) pp. 292-303 (18 figs.).

t Mus. Zool. Univ. Michigan, Occasional Papers, No. 46 (1917) pp. 1-8 (3 figs.).

X Trans. New Zealand Inst., xlix. (1917) pp. 284-91.

§ Comptes Rendus, clxv. (1917) pp. 646-8.

II Arch. Zool. Exp6r., Ivi. (1916) Notes et Revue, No. 4, pp. 100-3 (6 figs.).

ZOOLOGY- AND BOTANY. MICROSCOPY, ETC. 59

planes parallel to the first equatorial plane. Thirty-two cells are thus
established, but Soulier explains how it is that, as a matter of fact, there
are thirty- four,

Echinoderma.

Multiplication by Fission in Holothurians.* — W. J. Crozier
observed nine cases in which Holothuria surinamensis divided itself
into two parts. The animals concerned seemed healthy, and bore no
visible signs of having been in any way injured. In no case did the
halves divide again, although in two cases the resulting portions lived in
the laboratory for a month, during which time, even in the absence of
food, missing" parts were regenerated. In one case the division occupied
five days ; in another, twenty-four hours. It begins midway in the
body with a deep insinking of the dorsal bivium. A powerful circular
■constriction, accompanied by some local disintegration of the integument,
completes the separation. During the progress of division the animal is
quiescent, although it may be adhering firmly by its tube feet to the
vertical wall of the aquarium. When the constriction and separation of
the skin and muscle-layers is completed, a short length of intestine
usually remains for a time connecting the two pieces ; it may rupture
<;lose to one of them, or may disintegrate completely. The resultants of
the division do not move apart, but remain quiescent. Many regenerat-
ing specimens were observed. There is thus good reason to believe
that Holothuria surinamensis in the adult state normally multiplies by a
process of binary fission.

Buccal Armature of Conulus.f — Herbert L. Hawkins describes the
buccal plates and girdle of Oonuhis albogaUrus, an Echinoid from the
Upper Chalk. The perignathic girdle is very like that of Discoides, with
modifications due to the greater degree of thickening of the inter-radial
coronal plates and to the massive character of the buccal plates. The
existence of a lantern is inferred, the arguments being based upon the
known characters of the girdle, and upon analogy with related types.
Certain imperfect ossicles within the test of a small specimen are
considered to represent portions of the lantern.

Coelentera.

Australian Alcyonarians.|— Hjalmar Broch reports on a collection
of Alcvonarians made bv E. Mjoberg's Swedish Scientitic Expeditions to
Australia (1910-13). There were ~' twenty-five species, fourteen new.
The representation of the different families is curious, ))ut finds its
-explanation in the bathvmetrical conditions of the locality (a pearl-bank
west-south-west of Cape Jaubert) where the collection was made. Of
considerable interest was the following ■.—NephthyigorgialdlkenthaU^^. n.,
StmlerioUs crassa, Suberiopsis australis g. et sp. n. (near Anthothelii),
Titanideum mjohergi sp. n., and Alertigorgia orientalis (Ridley).

• Amer. Nat., li. (1917) pp. 560-6 (2 figs.).

+ Geolog. Mag.,iv. (1917) pp. 433-41 (1 pi.).

: K. Svensk. Vetensk. Handliugar, lii. (1916) pp. 1-48 (4 pis. and 62 figs.).

GO SUJMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Skeleton of Stromatoporoids.* — Yvonne Dehorne finds that the
minute structure of the skeleton of these extinct Hydrozoa is apt to lead
to fallacious conclusions. Thus that of the typical Actinostromaria
stellata is like that described by Ogilvie in the Madrepore Pontes in-
crustans. The zooecia of some Polyzoa show a similar structure. The
minute structure of the wall depends greatly on the mode of fossilization
and on subsequent transformations of this. Definition must depend
rather on the individualization of the zooids, on the mode of arrange-
ment, and on the growth of the whole colony, which permits of a recon-
struction of the aspect of the living hydrorhizal surfaces.

Coppinia of Grammaria abietina.f — HjalmarBroch has studied in
this hydroid the aggregates of gonangia ^hich are known as coppinia.
The formation begins with the appearance of secondary stolons, which
form a feltwork over the primary twigs and give off the tubes and
gonothecse of the coppinia. The primary and secondary stolons are
united by numerous anastomoses. Into the coppinia the hydrothecs also
project, but they grow so that the oral apertures project beyond the felt-
work. After the reproduction is completed the secondary parts of the
coppinia are discarded, and the elongated hydrothec® are left for a time
conspicuously projecting.

An account is given of the stinging-cells of the protective polyp. In
the lumen of the protective polyp traces of ova were sometimes found,
and these were traced through the stolons to the nutritive polyps. It
seems that the latter may devour liberated ova — a danger at the very
threshold of life. The author discusses the migration of the young ova
from the ectoderm of the primary and secondary stolons to the gonangia.
They may move in the endoderm as well as in the ectoderm in amoeboid
fashion, and they readily penetrate the middle lamella. The reproduc-
tive individuals show sex-dimorphism. The male gonophores are crypto-
medusoid in structure, the female heteromedusoid.

Porifera.

Chessman Spicule of Latrunculia.| — Arthur Dendy discusses the
development of the " discorhabd " of Latrunculia bocagei and L. apicalis.
In the former species it consists Of a straight, stout shaft, expanded at
the lower end to form a knob-like base (the " manubrium ") ornamented
with two circles of short spines. A little beyond the middle of the
shaft there is a whorl of three flattened lobes with denticulate or crenate
margins, followed after a short interval by a similar whorl, and then,
after another short interval, by a third whorl which differs from the
other two in not being subdivided into three lobes. Immediately after
the third whorl comes the broad, hemispherical apex, provided with a
number of short, capitate spines, and forming a sort of crown. Tlie
whorls may be called median, subsidiary, and apical. The length or
height of the fully-grown spicule is about 0'07 mm.

In L. apkalis the spicule is continued beyond the apex into a slender

* Comptes Rendus, clxv. (1917) pp. Vffl-G.

t K. NorskeVidensk. Selskabs. Skrifter,1916,No. 1, pp. 1-16 (2 pis. and 3 fig.^.).

: Journ. Quekett Micr. Club, liii. (1917) pp. 1-16 (3 pie.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 61

taperino^ process like the " leader " of a growinsr fir-tree, with a single
or double circlet of small spines at the base. The median whorl is a
little farther from the apical whorl than in L. hocagei, being approxi-
mately midway between the apical whorl and the manubrium. The length
•of the fully-grown spicule is about 0'126 mm.

The spicules are well adapted to protect the surface against parasites
and other enemies. They are arranged in a dense forest, with their
manubria firmly implanted in the cortex. They are developed, however,
in the interior of the body, far removed from their final position.

A siliceous spicule contains an axial thread or " protorhabd," out-
side which is the coating of hydrated silica or opal. Very slender
protorhabds were found, which were at any rate near the initial stage.
The protorhabd is responsible for the spicule's growth iii length, and
may continue its activities independently of any possible mother-cell.
With the protorhabds minute formative cells were found associated ;
they are probably responsible for the arrangement of the silica around
the protorhabd foundation. There are also larger accessory cells,
probably silicoblasts, which supply the formative cells with the necessary
material.

The author describes the devefopment of the discorhabds, and
advances the theory that the position of the whorls corresponds with
the nodes in a vibrating rod, the vibration being due to the stream
of water through the canal system. The coincidence of the positions
of the median and subsidiary whorls with those of the rings of
formative cells is noted. It may be that the formative cells have a
sort of tropism ; that they are sensitive to vibrations in such a way
that they are induced to avoid the internodes and take up their positions
at the points of comparative rest of the vibrating rod, with which they
are doubtless at first in immediate contact. The diflference in the
position of the median whorl in the two species can be mechanically
accounted for. It is unlikely that natural selection has had to do with
the differences in the apices of the spicules in the two species. The
facts support the view that the characters separating species are usually
of little or no importance to their possessor in the struggle for existence,
while adaptations are usually shared by many different species.

Irish Sponges.* — Jane Stephens reports on the sponges collected by
the dredging expeditions of the Royal Irish Academy and the Royal
Dublin Society. The number of species is thirty-eight, including two
species new to science — MycaU (Faresperella) atlantica and Forcepia
fragilis. The first is especially interesting, because it is the first repre-
sentative of the sub-genus Paresperella found in the Atlantic Ocean. The
following five species are noted for the first time within the Irish area : —
Laxosuberites ectyoninus Topsent, Desmacidoyi fruiicosum (Montagu),
Hymenancoraconjungens Lundbeck, 3Iicrociona Isevis Bowerbank, Tragosia
polypoides Schmidt. The first and third have not been taken previously
off any part of the British Isles ; each, in fact, has only been recorded
once before— the former in the Mediterranean, the latter off the south
coast of Iceland. A plate of spicules is given.

* ProC. B. Irish Acad,, xxxiv. (1917) pp. 1-16 (1 pi.).

62 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Protozoa.

Conjugation and Encystation in Didinium nasutum.* — S. 0. Mast

has studied various groups of pure lines of this Ciliate, between April,
1910, and May, 11)14. During this time there were produced without,
conjugation an average of 164G generations per line, and without encyst-
ment an average of 1035 generations per line. At the close the stock
was very weak, but it did not die out. It is not likely that either
conjugation or encystment is necessary for continued existence in this.
Infusorian.

From time to time new groups of lines were started from old ones,.
some after conjugation, others after encystment, and still others without
either conjugation or encystment. There were, consequently, continu-
ously present a number of groups of lines which differed in the number
of generations produced since conjugation or encystment had occurred.

The rate of fission varied greatly throughout the experiment, owing
largely to changes in temperature, but at any given time there was-
approximate uniformity in the fission-rate (and also in the death-rate) in
all the groups of hues regardless of the distance removed from conjuga-
tion or encystment. There was, therefore, no evidence indicating the
presence of cycles related to these processes.

There was no evidence that conjugation or encystment has any
appreciable effect on death-rate, fission-rate, or variation in fission -rate.
This would indicate that neither conjugation nor encystment is a re-
juvenating process, at least not in the sense in which Calkins uses the
term.

In one of the groups of lines, 721 generations after conjugation and
197 generations after encystment, some of the offspring suddenly began
to divide more rapidly than others. The difference in the rate of
fission in these two sets of individuals remained fairly constant
throughout the remainder of the experiment, 315 days. During this
time one set produced an average of 838 generations per line, 2| per
day ; the other, an average of 634 generations per line, 2 per day.

Life-history of Ceratomyxa herouardi.f — Jivoin Georgevitch gives
an account of this interesting Myxosporidium which he found in the
gall-bladder of Box salpa. Ripe spores from another host enter the
gall-bladder from the food canal. The spores, which have lost their
capsular filaments (used in their pilgrimage), liberate the sporoplasm
which is binucleate. The sporoplasm emits a pseudopodium ; the two
nuclei unite completely, forming a zygote or pansporoblast which fixes
itself by pseudopodia to the wall of the gall-bladder. The nucleus
divides twice, forming a large vegetative nucleus and two smaller germi-
native nuclei.

The pansporoblast may exhibit schizogony, or schizogony with
repeated divisions of the germinative nuclei, or it may exhibit direct
sporulation. In a very complicated fashion, of which the author gives
an indispensable diagrammatic illustration, there is an alteration of a
sexual phase and numerous asexual phases.

* Journ. Exper. Zool., xxiii. (1917) pp. 335-59.

t Arch. Zool. Exp^r., Ivi. (1917) pp. 375-99 (2 plf. and 3 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 63

New Mode of Multiplication in Amoebidium.* — Jean L. Lich-
tenstein describes in a species of Amcebidium from Simocephalus vetulus
how an active amoeboid unit, which emerf^ed along with seven others
from a fragmenting " tube," became after a time fixed on the host and
elongated into a " tube " or " endoconidium." Tiiis lends support to>
the view that Amoebidiacea; are Thallophytes, not Protozoa.

Blastocystis entercola.t — A. Alexeieff discusses the reserve albu-
minoid bodies of this organism (consisting of paravolutin or
metachromatin), the mitochondria and what they give rise to, the
nuclear origin of the mitochondria, and the amoeboid parasite Mitrnria
dangeardi AlexeieflF, which penetrates the Blastocijstis cysts and feeds on
the reserves. The conclusion that Blastocystis is fungoid is confirmed.

New Species of Pseudoklossia.:}: — L. Leger and 0. Duboscq describe
a new Coccidian, Pseudoklossia pectim's sp. n., from the kidney of Fecten
ynaximus. They give an account of the gamonts, the macrogametes^
and the formation of sporozoites. Xo microgametocyte was found. The
relationships of Adeleidge and Eimeridas are discussed.

Life-cycle of Myxidium gadi.§ — F. Georgevitch describes the life-
history of this parasite, which he found in the gall-bladder of Gadus
poUachia. From the ripe spore there emerges a binucleate sporoplasm ;
the zygote exhibits schizogony, and there are several generations of
schizonts ; these exhibit sporogony with one spore or two spores or
many spores. When there are many spores, there are often phenomena
of plasmotomy. The parasites are never intracellular.

Leptotheca and Grlugea.|| — J. Georgevitch describes Leptotheca
elongata Thelohan, a Myxosporidian, from the gall-bladder of MoteUa
. tricirrata, the three-bearded rockling. An account is given of the spores,
the vegetative forms, the schizogony, and the sporulation. In the
sporulation a vegetative (plasmodial) nucleus is to be distinguished from
a dozen (germinative) spore-nuclei. The author also gives a minute
account of the spore of Glugea marionis from the gall-bladder of JuJis,

* Arch. Zool. Exper., Ivi. (1917) Notes et Kevue, No, 4, pp. 95-9 (1 j&g.).
t Arch. Zool. Exper., Ivi. (1917) Notes et Revue, No. 5, pp. 113-28 (3 figs.).
+ Arch. Zool. Exper., Ivi. (1917) Notes et Revue, No. 4, pp. 88-94 (8 figs.).
$ Comptes Rendus, clxv. (1917) pp. 797-9.
ill Bull. Soc. Zool. France, xlii. (1917) pp. 99-107 (10 figs.).

■♦-M^l ^

64 SUMMA.RY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

BOTANY.

GENERAL,

Including the Anatomy and Physiology of Seed Plants.

Structure and Development.
Veeretative.

Wood of Deciduous Trees.* — P. Jaccard Las studied the chano'es
brought about in the wood of dorsi-ventral branches of deciduous trees,
by subjecting the branches to alternative pressures, varying in duration,
direction, and intensity. The anatomic characters of the wood were
compared with those of the wood of normal branches, and the following
results were obtained : — Under the influence of longitudinal tensions and
compressions the wood of the upper and lower surfaces differed greatly
in morphology and chemical composition. An analogous difference may
also be brought about by other causes, such as geotropism, or by any
force which creates a longitudinal tension or pressure. The difference
is characterized by the formation of typical tension-fibres and compres-
sion-fibres. Such fibres are only formed in trees, and are never found
in shrubs or woody annuals ; they must not be regarded as specific in
character, since they only occur in response to external mechanical
pressure. It is not possible to ascribe to them the value of an acquired
character which can be transmitted by heredity ; neither have they any
phylogenetic significance.

Reproductive.

Embryogeny of Phaseolus.f — M. M. Brown has studied the
development of the embryo-sac and of the embryo in five varieties of
Fhaseolus vulgaris. The chief features of interest are as follows : — At
an early stage in the growth of the ovule, a large hypodermal cell takes
on the functions of a macrospore-mother-cell, and when fully grown
forms part of the third or fourth layer from the micropylar end of the
nucellus ; ultimately an axial row of three macrospores is formed, the
innermost of which forms the embryo-sac. All the nucellar tissue is
absorbed except that at the base of the sac, where it undergoes some
changes, but finally disappears. The polar nuclei approach each other
at an early stage, and after remaining in contact for some time, finally
fuse just below the egg. At the time of fertilization the three antipodal
cells disappear, but the synergids form a conspicuous filiform apparatus.
The pro-embryo is composed of three cells, of which the two basal ones

* Rev. G6n. Bot., xxix. (1917) pp. 225-43 (2 pis.).

t Bull. Torrey Bot. Club, xliv. (1917) pp. 535-44 (2 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY. ETC. 65

form the suspensor and the terminal one the embryo proper. Dermatogen
is cut off at the fourth division of the embryo -^the suspensor consists of
four rows of cells, the two basal rows of which are swollen and elongated.
The primary endosperm nucleus divides before the egg ; the subsequent
•divisions give rise to endosperm on each side of the egg and in the
outer parts of the embryo-sac ; these divisions may be simultaneous, or
represent all stages in different parts of the sac. Endosperm forms near
ihe embryo, but is soon absorbed.

Embryogeny of the Alismaceae.* — R. Soueges publishes a short
note upon the embryogeny of the Alismaceae, dealing more especially
with the development of the apex of the stem of Sagittitrla sagittaefoUa.
The present work appears to show that the monocotyledonous condition
cannot be derived from the dicotyledonous condition, for the cotyledon
in the former originates in a different and much more extended pro-
embryonic region than in the latter. In the monocotyledons the two
upper cells of the tetrad give rise to the quadrants, and the eight coty-
ledonary octants ; the two cotyledons of the second group arise solely
from the four upper embryonic octants, which are identical with the
four upper cotyledonary octants of the monocotyledons. The author
regards these observations as supporting Worsdell's theory, that the
organization of the apex of the embryo, by a phenomenon of acceleration,
represents a very reduced image of the organization of the stem of the
adult plant. In the dicotyledons the arrangement of the cotyledons
around the embryonic axis recalls the general arrangement of the leaves
around the stem. In the monocotyledons the mode of growth is mono-
podic and is seen in the embryo, where the main axis aborts, giving rise
to a single terminal cotyledon, while a new axis develops laterally.

Ovule in Apocynaceae and Asclepiadaceae-f — L. Guignard publishes
a short account of his studies of the development and structure of the
ovule in the Apocynacese and the Asclepiadacete. After describing the
work previously done and the indefinite results obtained in the examin-
ation of these two groups, the author gives an account of the ovule
based upon the examination of twenty species. In the Apocynacea; the
number of ovules is variable and the development is not always identical.
Each ovule arises as a hemispherical papilla which elongates more or less
until it is cylindrical in form, the apex being conical and directed
towards the top of the carpellary cavity. The primordial mother-cell of
the embryo-sac or archesporium is formed just below the epidermis of
the apex ; subsequent development is variable. In the greater number
of species the nucellus is represented by a minute protruberance, and
since the tegument develops early and rapidly, the nucellus is frequently
imperceptible. In some cases the archesporium is completely enveloped
in an epidermal layer, which is quite distinct from the tegument, and
the nucellus may be regarded as complete. In other cases the epidermis
gradually disappears towards the base of the archesporium, and in others
it is only represented by a few cells. Thus, in the Apocynaceae the

* Comptes Eendus, clxv. (1917) pp. 1014-17.
t Comptes Rendus, clxv. (1917) pp. 981-87.

March Wth, 1918 F

66 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

nucellus varies considerably and may exhibit all degrees of reduction ;
the archesporium, however, is more uniform, and consists of four cells^
the lowest of which forms the embryo-sac. In the Asclepiadacese, the
bicarpellary ovary has numerous ovules which exhibit remarkable
uniformity of structure and development. The twelve genera studied
all exhibit the same characters as has been observed in Apocynum. The
nucellus is represented by the archesporium and rudimentary epidermis,
but the latter disappears during the development of the tegument.
Such peculiarities as are found in this group leave no reason to suppose
that it does not follow the normal course of development in the
Gamopetalffi. The reduction of the nucellus must be regarded as a
condensation of development adapted to the rapid formation of the
tegument of the ovule. This is a constant and interesting character of
the Asclepiadacea?, marking a very liigh degree of differentiation. The
author will publish shortly a complete account of the investigations,
reviewed in this preliminary paper.

CRYPTOGAMS.

Pteridophyta.

(By A. Gepp, M.A. F.L.S.)

Stelar system of the Marattiacese.* — C. West, in giving the results
of a comparative study of the structure and development of the stelar
system in the Marattiaceje, with special reference to the adult sporophyte
of Dansea, discusses the quescion of the symmetry of the sporophyte in
the Marattiacefe. He states that : 1. A primitive radially symmetrical
type of shoot is distinctly suggested. 2. The single apical cell of the
stem of the young sporeling is later replaced by a group of equivalent
initial cells or by a meristematic region. 3. A single large apical cell
occurs at the apex of the primary and earliest adventitious roots. At
the apex of the later adventitious roots of moderate size a group of
about four equivalent initial cells is found, while the more robust roots
generally possess a definite meristem consisting of a numbei' of indepen-
dent initial cells. In brief, the number of initial cells found at the
apex of the Marattiacean roots is clearly related to the bulk, and not
necessarily to the age of these roots. 4. The six genera which com-
prise the Marattiaceffi show remarkable uniformity in their morpho-
logical, anatomical, and histological characters, and constitute a very
homogeneous and natural family, which probably occupies an isolated
position amongst modern Vascular Cryptogams.

Equisetum dehile.t— S. R. Kashyap publishes some notes on the
endodermis and the prothallium of Equisetum dehile Roxb, 1. The
endodermis in this species is very unstable. At the nodes it surrounds
each vascular bundle of the underground and of the aerial sterile shoot ;
but in the internodes of these shoots there is a transition from this con-

* Ann. Bot., xxxi. (1917) pp. 331-414 (2 pis. and figs.).
t Ann. Bot., xxxi. (1917) pp. 4-39-45 (figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY', ETC. 67

dition to a condition of two endoderraal layers, one external and the
other internal, ronnd the ring of bundles as a whole. This transition is
independent of the distance at which it occurs from the node. The
two rings of endodermis fuse here and there, leaving islands of paren-
chymatous tissue in the interfascicular region. At the point of junction
of the two layers a single cell may show radial bands on three or four of
its walls or two bands on the same wall. 2. As to the prothallium, if
the spores are sown thickly the prothallia remain small and show one
growing point only and usually bear only one kind of sex-organ. If the
spores germinate at a distance from each other, leaving enough space for
the prothallia to develop fully, the latter become very large and develop
a meristem all round on the circular margiu, and produce archegoma
first and antheridia later. It is possible to prolong the life of the pro-
thallia beyond their normal span, by removing the embryo and protect-
ing them from heat ; quite possibly they could be kept growing for over
a year.

^ Australian Ferns and Mosses.* — W. W. Watts publishes notes on
cryptogamic matters. 1. He proposes and defines a new tribe of Poly-
podiaceae — namely, Dryopteridese — in order to avoid [a) the unscientific
separation of Phegopteris from the vicinity of Dnjopteris ; {b) the inclusion
of exindusiate ferns among the Aspidieaj ; and (f)the growing cumbrous-
ness oii\\ege\m?> Dnjopteris Vb's, defined in Christensen's " Index Filicum."
This new tribe includes Lastrea, Nephrodium, Phegopteris, Goniopteris
and Mp-niscium, all regarded as genera. Twenty-seven Australian species
fall within the limits of the new title. 2. He describes and figures a
new fern, Athyrliim hiimile, from the Ellenborough River. 3. He
publishes notes and records of the following ferns — Hymenophyllum
peltatum (Poir) (the British H. Wilsoni) ; H. rarnm R. Br. ; Dryopteris
acuminata (Lowe) and var. cristata (a new variety) ; Platyzoma micro-
phyllum. 4. He also gives a description and figures of Fissidens
{AmblyothalUn) humilis Dixon & Watts, a new moss from Newcastle,
New South Wales ; and publishes notes and records of the following two
mosses — Leptostomiim indinans R. Br. and Hampeella pallens (Lacoste)
Fleischer, with the interesting synonymy and distribution of the latter.

Apogamy in Phegopteris and Osmunda.f — Elizabeth D. Wuist
describes the production of apogamous embryos on prothallia of
Phegopteris polypodioides, Osmunda cinnamomea, and 0. Glaytoniana in
cultures on Prautl's and Knop's full solutions, and certain modifications
of the Prantl's solution. The first cases of apogamy were observed
about six months after the spores of Phegopteris were sowed on Prantl's
solution from which ammonium nitrate had been omitted. Similar
cases of apogamy were obtained on Knop's full solution in six months.
The development and morphology of the embryos are described.
Apogamous embryos of the two species of Osmunda were obtained on
Prantl's full solution, and on the solution with ammonium nitrate and
magnesium sulphate respectively omitted.

* Proc. Linn. Soc. New South Wales, xli. (1916) pp. 377-86 (1 pi.).
t Bot. Gaz., Ixiv. (1917) pp. 435-7.

Y 2

08 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Notes on Hippochsete." — 0. A. Farwell, who prefers the name
Hippoclmte for the scouring-rush section of Eqimetum, publishes notes
on Hippochaete laevigata and H. prealta. The type of the former is
Eqimetum Jsevigatum A. Br., which has been misunderstood through
Braun's error in regarding it as a perennial stemmed species. But a
careful analysis of the original description identifies the plant with the
smooth annual stemmed species, E. kansanum Schaffner. In clearing
away some errors with reference to H. prealta (Raf.) he finds a variety
without a valid name, and proposes for it the varietal name pseudo-
hyemalis.

Pellsea in North America.f— F. K. Butters publishes some notes
on Pellsea atropurpurea (L.) Link and P. glabella Mett. ex Kuhn. From
a careful study of herbarium specimens and living material he is able to
show that the ranges of these two species barely overlap, P. glabella
having a northern, and P. atropurpurea a southern range in North
America. They are perfectly distinct species, as F. L. Pickett % has
indicated. To the specific differences brought out by Pickett sofiie
further points are added by Butters in respect of the structure of the
scales and the spores. There are two western varieties of P. glabella—
one, var. simplex, a novelty which the author describes ; and the other,
var. occidentalis (E. Nelson), which has been confused with P. Breiceri
and P. atropurpurea. Finally, the author gives the distinctive characters
and the range of P. Breweri Eaton.

'a^

American Fern Notes. §—0. A. Farwell, in publishing a series of
notes on ferns, calls attention to Sir John Hill's " Family Herbal "
(1755) and to his use of Fdix (p. 171) in a generic sense, and gives a
list of new combinations of North American species transferred from
Dryopteris to Filix. The notes on Ophioglossacese include a number of
new varietal combinations, and a new variety Botrychium multifidum,
var. dichotomum, which is described and figured. Lgcopodium obscurum
L. is discussed, and a new variety {hybridum) is constituted, which repre-
sents L. dendroideum Willd. (non Michaux). L. complanatum and its
varieties are discussed, and a key to the latter is provided.

Pern Prothallia.|l— G. Klebs has made a study of the physiology of
the developing fern prothallia. The first part deals with the influence
of light and temperature upon development. Experiments were made
principally with the spores* of Pteris longifolia, and the results were as
follows : 1. Light is, with few exceptions, necessary for the germination
of the spores, and the resulting organism develops differently according
to the intensity of the light. These are described in detail, with the
corresponding degree of candle-power. 2. The primary rhizoid arises

* Amer. Fern Journ., vii. (1917) pp. 73-6.
t Amer. Fern Journ., vii. (1917) pp. 77-87.
X Amer. Fern Journ., iv. (1914) p. 97.

§ Eighteenth Annual Report, Michigan Acad. Sci., 1916, pp. 78-94.
II Sitzungsber. Heidelberg Akad. Wiss. Math.-Naturw. KI. B., 4 Abhandl.
(1916) pp. 3- 82 (figs.). See also Bot. Centralbl., cxxxiv. {1211) pp. 220-2.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 69

with the earlier germination, its growth being accelerated by increasing
intensity of light. Secondary rhizoids need higher intensity for their
development, and their number increases with increase of light.
3. From a certain degree of light onwards, no further increase affects
the development, i. The duration of light of a certain intensity need
not be long. Experiments were made with intermittent lighting, and
the results are given. 5. Daylight has in the main the same result as
electric light, though the relation between germination and formation of
the prothallium on the one hand, and light intensity on the other, differs
in daylight from that in electric light, the difference being due to
different composition of the spectrum. Further experiments in the
effect of light on the germinating filaments are described under varying
conditions of culture ; other fern species gave analogous results.

Ferns of Formosa.* — B. Hayata pubUshes descriptions of some new
or rare mosses collected in Formosa. Archaiigiopteris Sotnai is described
and figured, and is shown to be an interesting link between Archangio-
pteris Henryi and the old genus Angiopteris. Though eight species of
AlsopMa have been recorded from Formosa, three of them seem
referable to A. latehrosa and two to the genus Dryopteris ; thus leaving
only A. formosana, A. podophylla, and A. latehrosa in the list; sterile
specimens are difficult to distinguish. Ten species new to science are
described in the paper, and a plate is devoted to the illustration of the
characters of Bhchiium {Blfchnidium) plagiogyriifrons. The determina-
tion of the Formosan species of Vittaria is facilitated with the help of
a key.

Bryophyta.

(By A. Gepp.)

Targionia hypophylla.f — S. R. Kashyap publishes a supplementary
note on Targionia hypophylla. He has thoroughly re-examined the
Mussooree material for which he proposed the varietal name integerrima
in 1914, and finds that the two main differential characters, upon which
he relied, are not sufficiently constant to maintain the variety. The
peculiar male shoots described for the Indian plant have been shown by
O'Keeffe to occur in British specimens ; and the absence of tooth-like
interlocking processes from the involucral valves is but a variable
condition.

Statistics of Moss Structure. | — J. MacLeod raises the question
whether it is possible to identify a species by means of numbers that
represent the value of the specific characters. Having obtained satis-
factory results with insects, he has applied the method to the genus
Milium, and limiting himself to a study of the leaves of the fertile stem
of ten British species. The successive leaves of a given stem from the

* Icones Plantarum Formosarum. Taihoku : (1916) vi. pp. 154-63 (2 pis.).

t New Phytologist, xvi. (1917) pp. 228-9.

X Journ. Linn. Soc, xliv. (1917) pp. 1-58 (9 figs.).

70 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

base upwards gradually increase in length to a maximum and then
diminish gradually. MacLeod limits his work to that part of the
stem which extends from the lowest leaf up to the longest one. This
part of the stem (as the number of leaves is very variable) he divides
into ten intervals, and measures the minimal, medium, and maximal
value of each character in the leaves of each interval. The measure-
ments of each given interval are thus made comparable with those of the
same interval in all the stems and species. The description of a species
according to the author's method consists of a number of tables giving
the gradation of each character. For each species he has recorded in a
series of tables the following characters : — Length, breadth, breadth at
the base, number of cells and breadth of the cells at the place of greatest
breadth, breadth of the border and number of cells of the border at the
same place, number of teeth at the border and on the nerve, length of
the nerve (reaching the summit or not), tooth at the summit of the leaf
(present or absent), total number of leaves of the fertile stem. For
purposes of identification he gives a series of tables showing the minimal
and maximal values of each character of the leaves of the tenth interval
(longest leaves), together with other characters. LTsually four of these
numerical characters suffice for the determination of a specimen, but
twelve to fifteen characters are available if necessary.

Welsh Bryophyta.* — D. A. Jones gives an account of the mosses and
hepatics of the south-west of Anglesey, where he has succeeded in finding
several rare and interesting species. He describes the geology and
physical geography of Newliorough Sands, giving lists of the species
which characterize the different soil-formations, and an enumeration of
181 species of mosses and 55 hepatics.

The same author t publishes an enumeration of the mosses and
hepatics of Denbighshire, prefaced by an account of the geology and
physical geography of the county, and of the moss-floras characteristic of
the various rocks ; and also of the injurious effects of the smoke of such
industrial centres as Ruabon and Wrexham upon vegetation. The
number of mosses recorded is 229, and of hepatics, 61.

Wiltshire Mosses. | — C. P. Hurst gives an account of the' mosses of
East Wiltshire, collected mostly in Savernake Forest, and to the south-
east of it. The moss-flora of the sarsen stones is interesting ; these
siliceous rocks are found on chalk downs at Marlborough and Aldbourne,
and bear such interesting silicicolous species as Grimmia trichophylla,
G. suhsquarrosa, Hedwii/m ciliata, Orthotrkhum rvpestre, Ulota Hutchinsiae
— the first and last of which would probably be found no nearer than
on the granite rocks of Cornwall and South Wales ; and it has been
suggested that the spores have been carried thence by westerly winds.
In Savernake Forest fruiting specimens occur of certain specimens which
are usually sterile elsewhere. About 150 species are enumerated.

* Lancashire and Cheshire Naturalist, Aug. 1917, pp. 111-51.

t Naturalist, 1917, pp. 285-92, 321-7.

: Wilts. Archseolog. & Nat. Hist. Mag., xxxix. (1917) pp. 449-55.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC, 71

Carbohydrates of Musci.* — T. G. Mason describes the methods of
detecting the different sugars in the three mosses — Polytrkhum commune,
Thuidium tamariscinum, and Sphagnum ci/mbifolium, and the storage
and translocation of carbohydrates in these plants. He found dextrose,
levulose, and sucrose in all three species, and maltose in Polytrickum and
Sphagnum wherever starch is present. Sucrose is the first sugar to
appear after illumination ; and the author is of opinion that sucrose is
the first formed sugar in the chloroplast, and that in Polytrkhum
commune and Sphagnum cymbifolium it is in the form of hexo^es that
the sugars undergo translocation.

Water-conduction in Marchantiaceae.t — R. Douin points out that
the female capitulum and the male disc of the Marchantiaceae present
three methods of water-absorption more and more perfect in correspon-
dence with the apparatus employed by the plant. In the first case, the
water rises to the posterior cavity, and then spreads into the others by
means of laterarfascicles {Grimaldia, etc.). In the second case, quite a
special one {Fegatella), the capitulum is everywhere in contact with the
cylindric felt-work of absorbing hairs. In the third case (Marchantiaceae
with two-furrowed stalk), the water is distributed directly among the
cavities.

Multicellular Spores in Mosses. :|: — T. Herzog describes two new
species of Cryphsea, C. macrospora, and C. gracillima, which are.
■characterized by having very large and multicellular spores, a character
hitherto confined to Dicnemonacete. The ripe spores measure 44-48 /*
and 44-52 /x respectively. They are irregularly globular to shortly
cylindrical, and provided with clearly developed longitudinal and trans-
verse walls. Division does not take place until the spore has reached
its full size. In G. macrospora division is fairly regular and takes place
in quadrants ; in G. gracillima division is more irregular and takes place
in stages of four to eight cells. The tough exospore does not split
finally as in Dicnemonaceee, but remains preserved. The author con-
siders the Gryphsea spores as an intermediate form between the usual
spores and the highly specialized multicellular type of the Dicnemonaceae,
in which not only the division but also the germination of the giant
spores begins inside the capsule. The author also discusses the spores
of Macromitrium macrosporum, which measure as much as 70 /x, but are
always unicellular ; as well as the spores of his genus Wernerobryum,
•which is in various ways allied to the Dicnemonacege, and has spores
120 /i. long and about 60 /a broad, but unicellular. A note states that
Fleischer's Sphserotheciella sphaerocarpa, which has abnormally large
multicellular spores, was not known to the author when he wrote this
paper.

* Notes Bot. School Trin. Coll. Dublin, ii. (1916) pp. 319-34. See also Bot.
Centralbl., cxxxii. (1916) p. 541.

t Comptes Rendus, clvii. (1913) pp. 997-9. See also Bot. Centralbl., cxxxii,
(1916) p. 567.

X Flora, cix. (1916) pp. 97-9. See also Bot. Ceutralb., cxxxiv. (1917) p. 87.

72 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Lophozia Hatched and L. Baueriana.*—Y. Schiffner discusses the
two species of Lophozia, L. Hatcheri and L. Baueriana, which he has
studied from original specimens, and decides that the species are not
identical, notwithstanding their remarkable likeness. The two nearest
habitats of the respective species are 11,000 kilom. apart and separated
by the tropical zone. The extraordinary morphological resemblance
may be explained in three ways:— 1. Both are of common origin, the
original ancestor having been distributed over an enormous area, but
owing to geological and climatic changes it has died out in the inter-
mediate regions. 2, Carriage of the spores or gemmae, which is only
possible in species of Riccia which inhabit water. 3. Convergence,,
which is probably the solution of the problem under consideration.

Thallophyta.
Algae.

(By Mks. Ethel S. Gepp.)

Biology of Algae. — G. S. West publishes the first volume of a
treatise on Algtii in which he gives a biological account of all the Alga?
included in the Myxophycefe, Peridiniete, Bacillarieai and Chloro-
phyceas, both fresh-water and marine. In a future volume it is proposed
to give a complete systematic account, with illustrations, of all the British
Fresh-water Algje, with the exception of Desmids and Diatoms. In the
present work the chief space is allotted to the Chlorophyceae. These
are arranged under four sections — Isokontse, Akontse, Stephanokontae,
Heterokontae. Under Isokontae are six orders : — Protococcales, includ-
ing all the unicellular and colony-forming types ; SiphonaJes ; Siphono-
dadiahs ; UJvaUs ; Schizogoniales ; UJotrichaJes. The Akontie comprise
the Conjngatse ; the Stepbanokontte, the (Edogoniales ; and the Hetero-
kontffi comprise the orders Heterococcales, Heterotrichales, and Hetero-
siphonales. A chapter is devoted to the occurrence and distribution
of fresh-water Algte, describing Sub-aerial Associations, Associatious
of Irrorated Rocks, and Aquatic Associations.

Structure and Mode of Life of Hormidium flaccidum. |— Alma
Piercy gives a general account of the life of a form of Hormidium
Jiaccidum A. Braun in its native habitat. The survival of the vegetative
filaments throughout successive seasons of the year is described, and
their modification during drought, chiefly in the accumulation of
refractive granules, and in changes of the longitudinal walls and septa.
A detailed description is given of the two common methods of repro-
duction, viz. : (1) transverse splitting of the filaments- at the septa ;
and (2) production of aplanospores. Regarding (1), a general breaking
up of the filaments into isolated cells or few-celled pieces has not been.

* Oesterr. Bot. Zeitschr., Ixvi. (1916) pp. 83-8 (figs, in text). See also Bot>
Centralbl., cxxxiv. (1917) p. 187.

t Algse. Cambridge University Press : (1916) i., x and 475 pp. (271 figs.).
X Ann. Bot., xxxi. (1917) pp. 513-37 (figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 73

observed ; the splitting occurs at somewhat distant points in a filament,
though in favourable circumstances a minor proportion of the filaments
become divided into few-celled fragments. It is suggested that splitting
is due to the effects of renewed turgor on desiccated filaments
in which degeneration of the cuticle or a weakening, due to the
development of mucilage between the two lamellae of the septa, has
taken place. (2) The production of aplanospores occurs in all seasons
of the year, but is dependent on an ample supply of water. Cells that
give rise to aplanospores usually contain an abundance of a special
substance and also granules. A white refractive substance is described ;
it appears in the cells under certain conditions in the form of
granules and rounded masses. It arises chiefly in the region of the
polar vacuoles, but also sparsely distributed in the peripheral proto-
plasm. Two conditions favour its production, viz. drought, and a
plentiful supply of carbohydrates, e.g. glucose. It appears to be
associated with a second special substance (referred to above), and
possibly is formed as a result of concentration of this substance. Since,
in suitable circumstances, the cells ai'e capable of eventually absorbing the
granules, these evidently serve as a food-store. During the first weeks
of a period of drought the death-rate decreases, while the abundance of
granules increases to a maxiinum. When growing in its native habitat,
this alga in all probability rarely passes beyond this first stage of
desiccation, as the spells of dry weather in temperate regions are
comparatively short, and dew is continually deposited, especially in
summer when the drought is most extreme.

Staining of Minute Algae.'' — J. Ben Hill describes a satisfactory
method of manipulating microscopic organisms in staining, to prevent
the loss of such minute objects as SphsereJla, Pandorina, VolvoXy
Pediastriim, and the Desmideee. From the killing solution the material
is transferred to a filter, and there washed with distilled water from a
wash-bottle. It is then treated withO'l p.c. iron-alum solution, and
washed as before; then stained cautiously with O'l p.c. aqueous
haematoxylin, and thoroughly washed as before. The stain is carefully
differentiated with 0"1 p.c. iron-alum solution; and once more a
thorough washing with distilled water from the wash-bottle follows.
Then the filter-paper is punctured, and the material is dehydrated in an
open vessel with glycerin, followed by washing on a filter with 95 p.c.
and absolute alcohol. The material is then quickly transferred to
10 p.c. Venetian turpentine for concentration and mounting.

Pleodorina illinoiensis.f — ^X. B. Grove publishes a supplementary-
note on Pleodorina ilUnolensis, which he recorded as occurring in cart-
ruts at Harborne, Warwickshire, in the spring of 1915. He found it
in the same place in 1916 and 1917 ; but in April 1917 it was in larger
quantity, and associated with equal quantities of Pandorina Morinn and
Eudorina elegans, and with other Algae. And, though the elliptical

* Bot. Gaz., Ixiii. (1917) pp. 410-12.
t New Phytologist, xvi. (1917) p. 180.

74 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

form and the posterior protuberances were as marked as ever, yet a
greater number of stages transitional between it and Eudorina were
found intermixed. And the author claims these as an entire justifi-
cation of his suspicion that this Fhodorina is merely a well-marked
mutation of Eudorina — on the way to becoming a species.

Spirogyra.* — S. S. Chien describes the peculiar eiTects of barium,
strontium, and cerium on Spirogyra. He summarizes his results as
follows : — 1. The chloroplasts of certain species of Spirogyra contract
away from the cell-wall in a peculiar and characteristic fashion in
solutions of CeCl.^, BaCL, and BrCl., (in the case of the smaller kind
in the last two only). The effect is observed in dilutions as great as
O • 00005 M of CeClg (in the case of the larger species), and in 0 • 0001 M
of BaClo. SrClo also produces this efifect, but not at such great
■dilutions as CeClg and BaCI.,. 2. In the smaller species of Spirogyra
the effect of BaCl., is inhibited when BaCU is mixed with CeCla or
•CeCla in proper proportions.

Starch-formation in Zygnema.f — Helen Bourquin has studied the
subject of starch-formation in algte, and has chosen Zyg^iema for
investigating the process, on account of the large size and the typical
nature of its chromatophore. She gives a resume of previous work on
the subject, describes her own material and methods, and then gives an
account of her work, which she summarizes as follows : — The chroma-
tophore of Zygnema is a plastid containing embedded in its substance
a pyrenoid which lies near the middle, and starch-grains which usually
lie radially about the pyrenoid. The pyrenoid cannot take part in
starch-formation because it is always confined to the centre of the
plastid and is separated from the starch by the plastid, and because
the small young grains of starch are always found in the periphery
of the plastid. The plastid, therefore, must form these minute starch-
grains. The starch-grains come to lie radially about the pyrenoid in
the following manner : — The plastid adds to them in such a way that
they become cuneate in sliape. In this manner they grow down
between the starch-grains already formed until they are of the same
length as the large grains. The plastid then broadens them at the base
until they become rectangular in shape.

Dichotomosiphon tuberosus.:}: — A. de Puymaly writes on Dichotomo-
siphon tuberosus, which he lias studied from living material collected by
him near Bagneres-de-Bigorre, at a height of about 600 metres. It was
growing in a small basin, 10 by 20 metres, in which the water was
•continually being renewed and was tepid to the touch, being 20" C. The
alga was growing so luxuriantly that it almost covered the bottom of the
basin, which was 1 to 2 metres deep. The plant evidently requires
warmth, in which it resembles its near allies, the Udotete group. In
contrast to Vmicheria, the filaments of D. tuberosus are upright and

* Bot. Gaz., Ixiii. (1917) pp. 406-9 (figs, in text).
t Bot. Gaz., Ixiv. (1917) pp. 426-34 (1 pi.).
X Bull. Soc. Bot. Geneve, 1917, pp. 120-5.

*

ZOOLOGY AND BOTAI^Y, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 75

bushy, 5 to 10 cm. high, and disposed fairly regularly ; they often form
small loose bundles, resembling locks of hair. These upright filaments
emerge from a creeping substratum which grows on the slime, and is
■composed of entangled rhizomatoid filaments. It is at the expense of
the creeping part that the tubercles are developed which play so great a
part in the multiplication of the plant. The rhizomatoid filaments
produce here and there irregular swellings provided with papillte, some
of which develop into new green shoots and others into rhizomatoid
filaments. These latter are capable of producing in their turn new
swellings, and so on. Thus the plant is able to spread over large
surfaces, and the thallus of separate plants becomes intermixed. The
author found plants bearing the sexual organs which have seldom been
observed, and only once previously in Europe, under natural conditions.
They are sufficiently rare when they do occur, and a search of several
square decimetres barely produced ten, while the same material fur-
nished easily more than a hundred tubercles. The oospores apparently
remain inside the oogonia, and the latter adhere for several months' to
the individuals which produce them. It is evident that multiplication
by means of the tubercles and the rhizomatoid filaments is very much
more usual than sexual reproduction, and is possibly in course of taking
its place. In D. pusillus, described by Collins, sexual organs have not
been found. As regards the structure of the cells, the author finds that
Mirande alone of previous writers is correct in his conclusions. The
membrane is constituted like that of the Udotefe, and consists of a
callus associated with pectic components. The author proposes in a
further work to discuss the germination of the oospores.

Nuclear Division in Characese.'- — F. Oehlkers discusses nuclear
division in Characeai. Tlie number of chromosomes in C. fragiUs is
twenty-four, in C. fcetida sixteen, and in NiteJla syncarpa twelve. hX
the germination of the zygote of C. fcBtida, the zygote nucleus divides
into two daughter-nuclei, which then undergo further division. Of the
three transverse walls, two are dissolved, while the third, which separates
off the fourth nucleus in a protoplasmic cup, remains. Only this last
nucleus survives, while the other three gradually go to pieces. This
fourth nucleus divides into two by a wall parallel to the longitudinal
axis of the zygote. Through further divisions of these two cells, two
knobs are formed above the first transverse wall, and these are the point
of issue of the new Chara plant. The number of the chromosomes
in the second division was sixteen, the same as that of the vegetative
division. Reduction-division takes place, therefore, at the actual germi-
nation of the zvffote.

'to^

Alternation of Generations in Florideae.t — N. Svedelius discusses
the problem of the alternation of generations in Florideae. The signifi-
cance of the reductions-division does not lie entirely in the restoration

* Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., xxsiv. (1916) pp. 223-7. See also Bot. Centralbl.
cxxxiv. (1917) p. 279.

t Naturw. Wochenschr., n.f. xv. (1916) pp. 353-9, 372-9. See also Bot. Cen-
tralbl., cxxxiv. (1917) pp. 314-5.

76 SUMMARY OF CUJiRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

of the number of chroiDosomes, but also in that it brings about new-
combinations of chromosomes in the daus^hter-nuclei, which in the
somatic equal division cannot take place. The reductions-division plays
as important a part in the new combination of chromosomes in the
nucleus as fertilization itself, and may be regarded as its final act. By
the reductions-division there is formed as great a possibility for new
combinations of chromosomes inside the nucleus, as by the fertilization
itself a possibility is given of new combinations of nuclei, and thereby of

. the number of chromosomes. In Floridea3, which are treated in special
detail by the author, reductions-division takes place in the tetraspore
formation. Here the life of the diploid generation divides into two
different phases : the first, the gonimoblast phase in the cystocarp, in
intimate connexion with the gametophyte, as in the moss-sporogonium ;
the second, the tetraspore-forming phase, which takes its origin from the
germinating carpospore and arises here as an independent form of life,
entirely resembling externally the gametophyte. Floridea3, on the ftther
hand, which do not produce tetraspores have a reductions-division which

• follows immediately on fertilization ; and the monospores which are pro-
duced by this type are purely germinating cells, and are not an integral
part of the alternation of generations. These two types of reduction
show also this difference— in the latter type only one sort of individual i»
produced, namely monoecious or dioecious sexual individuals with or
without monospores ; while the former type produces two sorts of indivi-
duals, sexual (monoecious or dioecious) and asexual (tetrasporic). The
former type is called by the author the haplohionik, the latter the diplo-
hiontic. He regards the haplobiontic as the original, from which the
diplobiontic has sprung, by the delay for some reason of the reductions-
division.

Oceanic Algology.* — A. Mazza continues his description of types of
oceanic alg^. ' Completing his account of the non-articulate Corallineae
by a description of the structure of Masiophora, he passes on to a con-
sideration of the articulate Corallinese, describing Amphiroa and five of
its species; together with four varieties of A. tuberculosa, also Metagonio-
lithon with three of its species.

Algae of Bermuda.!— F. S. Collins and A. B. Hervey publish a
Flora of the Algae of Bermuda, omitting the families Pihizophyllidaeea?,
Squamariaceae and Corallinacea?. In the introduction they discuss the
geological formation of the small group of islands, refer to previous
published work on the algs, and give a comparison of the flora with that
of nine of the best known regions where a similarity might be expected.
This is drawn up in tabular form, but is not intended to be in any way
exhaustive, owing to the impossibility of producing a complete com-
parison at this time of world-wide chaos. A list of important stations
is then given, with an indication of the characters of each, for the use of
future collectors. Concise keys have been drawn up for all the species
in a genus, aud a number of new species are described and figured. In

* La Nuova Notarisia, xxix. (1918) pp. 1-34.

t Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts and Sci., liii. No. 1 (1917) 195 pp. (6 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 77

the case of other species, details additional to previous knowledge have
ilDeen added where possible, but no full descriptions. Full notes are
given as to character of station, with exact localities. Full synonomy
IS omitted, but reference is made where possible to a good figure, and
to essiccata.

Algal Associations of San Juan Island." — W. L. C. Muenscher
publishes a study of the Algal Associations of San Juan Island. He
describes them carefully with the aid of maps and a vertical section of
the coast, and concludes that the rocky shores of the island possess a
very dense algal flora, whilst the sandy beaches and bays are almost free
from algae. From the high-tide line to the Nereoctjsiis beds he distin-
guishes five distinct associations : — (1) Eiidocladia, (2) Fiicus, (3) Lira,
(4) Laminaria, (5) Zostera. The number of species common to each
increases in the lower associations, and the algse are larger. The different
groups of algse are not restricted to any definite associations.

Puget Sound Algse.f — Puget Sound Marine Station issues a fascicle
of papers on marine algological work done in Friday Harbour, Washington,
in 1916.

Miss Hurd finds that young NereocysHs plants can accommodate
themselves gradually to 5.5 p.c. of fresh water. The rapid elongation of
the stalk of this species she states to be due to the low intensity of light
in deep water, the growth of the stipes being greatly retarded by strong
light near the surface of the water ; and there is no relation between
rate of growth and mechanical stretching in the stalk.

In another paper she shows that the Codium adhserens Ag. of San
Juan Islands and Puget Sound is C. dimorphwn Sved., since it has no
utricle hairs and has two types of utricles, the one with unmodified end-
wall, and the other with thickened, striated end-wall. She believes the
different end-walls to be due to environmeut ; the thick-walled type
sometimes predominates over the whole thallus, sometimes only around
the margin and beneath the lobes, and sometimes is wanting entirely.

W. L. C. Muenscher enumerates the marine algae of Shaw Island,
giving their zonal distribution and relative abundance, and discussing
the ecological factors involved.

Miss Kibbe investigated the parasitic fungus {Chytridium alarium, a
new species) that infests Alaria fistulosa in Alaska, but apparently does
not attack any other brown alga.

Miss Karrer throws some light on the metabolism of Nereocystis by
means of microchemical reactions. The cell-walls are composed of
cellulose and algin. Inorganic substances (Ca, Mg, Na, K, CI, sulphates,
carbonates, phosphates, iodine) can be demonstrated in the cell by the
methods of Tunmann and Molisch.

Miss Clark, by methods of titration, found all the thirty-one marine
iilgae that she tested to be acid.

* Puget Sound Marine Station Publications, i. (1915) pp. 59-64. See also
Bet. Centralbl., cxxxiv. (1917) pp. 195-6.

t Puget Sound Marine Station Publications, i. Nos. 17-24 (1916) pp. 185 -248
<pls.) See also Bot. Gaz., Ixiii. (1917) pp. 415-17.

78 [SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Langdon made the important discovery that carbon monoxide is
present in the bladder of Nereocystis, in varying quantities ; but carbon
dioxide is rarely present, and in minute quantity. This carbon monoxide^
as the anhydride of formic acid, may well have a bearing on the
theories of photosynthesis, and may occur more generally in plant
tissues than has been supposed.

Marine Algae of the Danish West Indies."' — Under this title F.
Borgesen continues the work begnn some time ago before the sale of
the islands, which he feels very grievously. The last pages of Squa-
mariace^ are followed by the treatment of Melobesiea? by Madame Paul
Lemoine. After an introduction, in which she discusses the distribution)
and affinities of the species collected by Borgesen, she gives a key
of the genera and species which amounts to a synopsis. This is
followed by a full description of each species, with many text figures.
The treatment of the Corallinefe is continued by Borgesen, who'
then begins Ceramiales, which is carried into the sixth sub-family,.
Spyridie^. The work is interspersed with numerous drawings of the
structure of the species de_scribed.

Japanese Marine Algae.f — K. Yendo publishes Part VII. of his
Notes on Algte new to Japan. He records twenty-five species, adding
important and enlightening notes to each on synonomy, geographical dis-
tribution, and structure. Bryopsis corticuJans Setch. is reduced to a
form of B. plumosa, as forshadowed by Setchell in his original descrip-
tion, the rhizoidal cortication in the genus being possibly indicative
more of a state of robustness of an individual plant than of a specific
character. Chsetomorpha antennina Kiitz. is now truly recorded from
Japan, the original record by Martens having proved to be erroneous.
It occurs on the Bonin Islands. Boodha sianmisis also occurs there,
and makes the third out of five known species to be recorded from Japan.
Under Sargassum Smidei the author discusses the duplicated or turbi-
narioid leaf found in that species, and in S. dupUcatum and others, and
so closely resembling the turbiuarioid form in the genus Turhinaria as
to suggest a link between the genera. The result of a study of -S'. Sandei
shows that the degree of duplication in that species (1) is gradual in a.
range of species ; (2) differs according to the stages of development of
the thallus ; (3) varies according to the parts of the thallus ; (4) differs
according to the sex of the plant. Male plants have, as a rule, luxuriant
foliage, and poorly, or not at all, duplicated leaves. Gracilaria lingva,
only recorded in a few specimens from the Arabian Sea and from Amoy
and now from the Bonin Islands, may possibly represent a state of
G. corticata, a variable species.

* Marine Algffi of the Danish West Indies. III. Rhodophycese. Copenhagen :
(1917) pp. 145-240 (figs. 149-230).

t Bot. Mag. Tokyo, xxxi. (1917) pp. 183-207 (figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 79

Fungi.
(By A. LoRRAiN Smith, P.L.S.)

New Phycomycete.* — H. A. Edison describes a new genus and
species, Rheosporangium aphanidermatus, which causes damping off of ,
seedlings of sugar-beet and of radishes, to which he referred in a previous
paper as an nndescribed member of the SaprolegniacCc-e. The new
fungus resembles Fythium Debaryannm except in the asexual frniting-
stage. The mycelium is aerial or aquatic ; reproduction is by zoospores
under aquatic conditions and by oospores. From the hyphfe is cast off
a terminal swollen portion termed the prezoosporangium, which ruptures
and allows the escape of the contents ; this body becomes surrounded hj
a delicate wall, and by cleavage forms zoospores.

Rhizophidium acuforme.t — This minute Phycomycete was found
by W. B. Grove on cells of Chlnmydomonas intermedia in a cart-rut.
He describes the growth and development of the parasite, the bursting
of the sporangia, and the reinfection of the algje by the zoospores. No
resting spores were seen.

Entomophthora americana.i — Hugh Main reports this species, new
to Britain, from Epping Forest. It was collected in August, 1916, on
the trunk of a hornbeam, about three feet from the ground. It
consisted of a mass of white hyphte growing from the body of a large
fly which has been identified by K. G. Blair as Hyetodesia erratica.
J. Ramsbottom examined the fungus and found it identical with the
above species of Entomophthora.

PeronosporaceaB.§ — I. E. Melhus comments on the reported perennial
condition of Pliytophthora infestans in the Irish potato, and he points
out that perennial species have been determined belonging to four genera,,
the mycelium passing the winter either in the aerial or the underground
organs of winter annuals, biennials, or perennials.

In a further paper Melhus |1 describes his culture experiments with
PhyJophtliora infestans, and he claims to have proved that the mycelium
persists in the tube, and from it passes into the shoots. The planting of
diseased tubers may thus give rise to an epidemic. He found no
evidence that conidia in the soil gave rise to new infections.

Discharge of Spores of Leptosphaeria acuta.! — W. J. Hodgetts
has followed the process of spore discharge by mounting ripe perithecia
in water and withdrawing the hymeniuni. The outer wall of the ascus
is burst by the spores still enclosed in the inner gelatinous wall, which

* Journ. Agric. Research, iv. (1915) pp. 279-91 (4 pis.).

+ New Phytologisf, xvi. (1917) pp. 177-80 (1 fi^.).

X Essex Naturalist, xviii. (1917) pp. 107-8 (1 fig.).

§ Journ. Agric. Research, v. (1916) pp. 59-69 (1 pi. and 1 fig.).

li Journ. Agric. Research, v. (1916) pp. 71-102 (5 pis.).

t New Phvtologist, xvi. (1917) pp. 139-46 (14 figs.).

:80 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

issue explosively, and are then carried away by rain or dew. The writer
•describes the changes that take place in the ascus, and compares spore
discharge in this fungus with others.

Spegazzinian Meliola Types.* — F. L. Stevens has received a number
■of packages containing Spegazzini's types, descriptions and drawings
of MelioJa. He has had the drawings carefully copied and compared
with the type material, and he now publishes them, with references to
the original publication. There is a long list of these species. Stevens
values very highly the work Spegazzini has done, and desires to
emphasize the great indebtedness of mycology to his careful work.

Infection by Cercospora beticola.f — V. W. Pool and M. B. McKay
have made a study of the leaf infection by this fungus with reference
to penetration by the germ-tubes of the stomatal opening. For this
purpose they have made a prolonged study of the beet stomata, and have
stated the various conditions influencing stomatal movements, and there-
fore infection. Penetration occurs only through open stomata, and
most frequently on mature leaves. Infection probably takes place
during the day-hours. The fungus forms a dense mycelium in the
air-chamber below the stoma ; it then grows towards the parenchyma
cells and flattens out against their walls. It may immediately grow out
again by the pore and form conidia, but usually it penetrates deeper.
The host -cells may mass material and remain turgid, thus isolating the
invading parasite, but usually they collapse and allow its further growth.

Septoria Chenopodii.J — W. B. Grove publishes an account of the
synonymy of this fungus, which is large and varied. The differences in
view have arisen primarily from the spore conditions. They are for a
long time simple, in which condition the fungus has been naturally
classified under PhijllosUcta. In time the spores become one or more
septate, and have been placed in other genera. The species was found in
this country by M. C. Cooke at Holloway. It has since been found on
Chenopodiwn and on Atnplex at various other localities. Grove adds a
variety emaculata when it occurs on stems without any distinct " spots "
Toeing formed.

Factors involved in the Growth of Pycnidia.§— G. H. Coons has
made a large series of cultures of the fungus Pletiodomus fascomaculans
to determine the conditions that favour pycnidial formation or the
reverse. He employed a great variety of media, chemical and others,
and took note of temperature and light conditions. The difl'erent results
obtained in the various foods supplied were due to their acid or alkaline
nature. Aeration is essential for reproduction. Pycnidia were only
found in cultures exposed to light ; the ordinary room temperatures
were sufficient.

* Bot. Gaz., Ixiv. (1917) pp. 421-5 (3 pls.)."

t Journ. Agric. Eesearch, v. (1916) pp. 1011-38 (2 pis.).

: Journ. Bot., Iv. (1917) pp. 346-8.

§ Journ. Agric. Research, v. (1916) pp. 713-69.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 81

Notes on Coniothecium.* — P. van dev Bijk has had occasion to
examine Coniothecium clwmatosporum as an apple-blister and apple-
cracking disease. He now gives the resnlts of cultural studies of the
species. He describes the type of mycelial growth from the spores. He
produced in the cultures pycnidia of Phoma Mali, and has demonstrated,
as others had done, that Coniothecium is a form genus. Whether all
species of Coniothecium are related to Phoma remains to be proved. It
is the Coniothecium stage that causes the disease on apple. The author
describes the growth of the mycelium, noting the peculiar formation of
buds on the mycelium.

Uredineas.t — W. H. Long records the finding of Peridermium pyri-
forme (the fecidial stage of Cronnrtium pijriforme) on Pinus rigida.
The fungus causes three forms of disease on pines — one with slight or
no hypertrophy on P. divaricata, P. punr/ens, and P. ponderosa var.
scopulorum ; a second forming a fusiform swelling ; and a third causing
spheroid galls, the latter very like those caused by Peridermium cerebrum.

A serious disease of the seedlings of Pinus ponderosa was traced by
J. R. Weir + to the fungus Peridermium filamentosam. The acidio-
spores taken from the Pinus were sown on Castilleja minicata, and pro-
duced the Cronartium stage. Advice is given as to dealing with the
disease.

H.S. Jackson § signals the establishment of a species of Rosstelia on
a Japanese pear-tree in Oregon. Tlie tree {Pyrus sinensis) grew in the
yard of a Japanese family. It was found to be the same as Rmstelia
koreansis ; the Gymnosporangium stage was cultivated on Juniperus
chinensis.

Studies in the Physiology of Parasitism. || — W. Brown summarizes
his paper (No, i), and the results are as follows : — 1. Two types of
enzymic preparations derivable from cultures of Botrytis cinerea are :
(«) watery extracts of the ground mycelium, and {b) the media in which
germination and growth have taken place. 2 The amounts of {a)
enzyme and (&) enzyme-retarding substances in the media depend on
the density of sowing, age of culture, and nature of medium. An
account of these is given. 3. A discussion is given of the bearing of
these results on the technique of enzyme extraction, on the one hand,
and on the process of enzyme extraction by fungi, on the other.

Morphological Variations of Fungi due to Environment. f — Elisa
Muta and Gino Pollacci find in the study of Coniothyrium tirolense that
a change in culture media influences the dimensions and shades of colour
of the conidia. In Phyllosticta pirina a change of medium brought

* Agric. Journ. Sci., xvi. (1916) pp. 649-57 (6 pis. and 2 figs.).
t Journ. Agric. Research, v. (1915) pp.^289-90 (1 pi.).
X Journ. Agric. Research, v. (1916) pp. 781-5.
§ Journ. Agric. Research, v. (1916) pp. 1003-9 (2 pis.).
li Ann. Bot., xxxi. (1917) pp. 489-98.

t Bull. R. Accad. Lincei Rome, xxvi. (1917) p. 498-502. See also Bull. Agric.
Intell. Rome, viii. (1917) p. 1319.

March iMh, 1918 G

82 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

about a delicate septation of the spores, and in the same medium (lemon-
juice neutralized by caustic soda with gelatin) the septa persisted in new
generations ; they disappeared when the nutritive medium was changed.
They found in the culture, club-shaped muriform bodies formed which
they have termed " macrosporioide," from their resemblance to Macro-
sporium or AJternaria spores. These have also been observed in cultures
of Phoma Richardise.

Studies of the Schweinitz Collection of Fungi.* — C. L. Shear
and N. E. Stevens publish a second contribution on this subject.
Schweinitz's herbarium passed to the Academy of Natural Sciences,
Philadelphia, at his death in 1834. Since that date various fungologists
have worked at the collections, and the writers of the paper here give an
account of these men and the results of their labours. They also trace
the Schweinitz specimens that were sent to other workers. These are to
be found at Berlin, Kew, Paris, and Upsala. A bibliography of papers
referring to Schweinitz is appended.

Mycological Notes, f — Three sets of these notes have been issued
recently by C. G. Lloyd, each prefaced by information concerning some
active fungologist, with a photograph. The first indicates the branch
of f ungological work undertaken by J. Barton Cleland, an Australian
botanist. In the pages following, the genus Cytharia is discussed, a
small but peculiar genus of Ascomycetes, found so far only in South
America and Australasia. Notes are also given oli some peculiar
Xylarise and on some Basidiomycetes from South America or from
Australia.

In the second pamphlet there is a sketch of Spegazzini and his work
on the fungi of South America, and an account of various little-known
genera and species from AustraHa, Africa, Japan, etc.

The third series gives a photograph and some few details as to the life
-and activity of Karsten, who died recently. He collected over practically
the same region as Fries. This series of notes deals mainly with South
African and Austi'alian fungi, and includes the description of a new
genus, Pyrenopolyporis, a Pyrenomycete that simulates a Polypore.

New or Noteworthy Fungi. f — John Dearness gives a descriptive
iist of fifty microfungi from various regions of North -West America. A
■considerable number are new to science. The list includes both parasites
and saprophytes.

A further contribution of new Japanese microfungi is published by
T. Tanaka.§ He describes four species, Massaria moricola, M.japonica,
Mycosphserella Horii, PhyUosticta ciiricola, all of which grow on living
material and cause more or less of disease.

Natal Fungi.ll — Averil Maud Bottomley has revised and issued a list
of the fungi collected by J. Medley Wood. The specimens, amounting

* Mycologia, ix, (1917) pp. 333-44.

t Cincinnati, Ohio, 1917, Notes No. 48-50, pp. 670-716 (83 figs.).

1 Mycologia, ix. (1917) pp. 345-64.

§ Mycologia, ix. (1917) pp. 365-8.

y South African Journ. Sci., xiii. (1917) pp. 424-6.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICKOSCOPY, ETC. 83

to some 550, have been incorporated with the Mycological Herbarium,
Pretoria. The various families and genera are well represented, from
the Mjxomycetes, with six species, down to the Hyphomycetes, with four
different genera. The author mentions as of particular interest a species
•of Rodwaya and Woodiella ; the latter, named after the collector, is a
member of the Patellariaceaj.

Notes on Uganda Fungi.*— T. D. Maitland and E. M. Wakefield
publish a long list of fungi, mainly collected by the former during two
years spent in the forests of Uganda. There are, in the introduction,
•copious notes and observations on the ecological features of the forest
lands, in which the rainfall is greater and the humidity higher than in
the surrounding country. The larger species are mainly saprophytes,
belonging to the more woody Agaricacea^ or to the Polyporaceae, etc.
A large number of microfungi are included in the list.

Nigerian Fungi. Ill.f — The present contribution by E. M. Wake-
Held is based on collections by C. 0. Farquharson in South Nigeria
during the period 1914-16. Several species are new to science. One
species, Ustidina zonata, on diseased Hevea brasiliensis, has been
described as a rubber disease in the Malay States. A long account is
given of Monilia carbonaria, which appears very quickly on charred
wood ; no ascigerous form has been identified with certainty, but a note
is appended describing Melanospora eri/fhraea, which developed in a
•culture of Oospora gilva, which latter fungus may be the same as
Monilia carbonaria.

Irish Fungi.l — R. Lloyd Praeger records the collection of several
aquatic fungi : Vibrissea truncorum in three feet of water at Lake
Brandon, and in one foot of water at Lough Dan, Wicklow, and else-
where. Mitrida phalloides grew on dead heather in several inches of
water near Hare's Gap, Mourne Mountains.

The same writer also gives an account of a number of species of
Clavaria, and other unusual fungi collected in Co. Leitrim. One of
them, Otidea grandis, was the first record for Ireland.

Rubber Disease.§ — A. Sharpies writes oh bark canker in Hevea
hrasiUensis, very largely due to Phytophthora Faberi. He describes the
results of several workers on canker disease, and quotes the opinion of
Dastur, that there are two species of Phytophthora causing bark-disease,
one identical with the pod-disease of Cacao, the other causing " Black-
thread Disease."

In a second article he discusses the special significance of these
diseases for Malayan rubber. He thinks that there is serious danger of
bark-diseases spreading there. Fungus diseases are most dangerous
when there are large acreages under one crop, and the whole of the
Malay peninsula is planted with rubber-trees.

* Kew Bull., No. 1 (1917) pp. 1-19.

t Kew Bull, No. 3 (1917) pp. 105-11.

X Irish Naturalist, xxvi. (1917) pp. 55-6.

§ Kew Bull., No. 6 (1917) pp. 211-5 and 225-9.

G 2

84 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Pathogenic Fungus.* — H. Windsor Wade has studied in Manila a
new type of fungus, causing a peculiar chronic skin infection. Cultures
were made, and in time the mycelial form of the fungus was obtained.
Various growth-phases were observed that are not generally recognized
as occurring among fungi, but it is believed that under certain con-
ditions fungi might revert to these forms — gelatinous and vescicular-
body formations, etc. The classification and name of the new fungus
are left in abeyance to await the results of further study.

Tuber-rots caused by Fusarium.t — C. W. Carpenter has devoted
much attention to this subject, with regard to the rotting of potatoes.
He describes his method of testing parasitism, and gives a general
account of the various strains, with descriptions of the different species.
In his summary he notes a new species, Fusarium eumartii, which causes
stem-end and wound-invading dry-rot, a wide-spread disease in Penn-
sylvania. It is similar in action to F. radicicoJa. The latter, associated
with F. oxysporum, gives rise to jelly-end rot, " a serious trouble in the
tule lands of California." F. oxysporum and F. hyper oxysporum may
entirely destroy potato-tubers.

Immunity from Parasitic Fungi.l — B. C. Stakman, following in
the lines of previous workers, has made a study of infection by Puccinia
graminis. He found that the host-plant in many instances is hyper-
sensitive to the fungus, the cells being killed .by the invasion, and the
further progress of the true parasite being prevented. He carried out
a large series of inoculations of P. graminis from one host to another,
from oats to rye, oats to barley, etc. In almost every case the parasite
succumbed. He found that ithe germ-tubes gained entrance, but that
the cells very soon became disintegrated, their death promptly following
the invasion by thehyphte. The death of the hyphfe themselves follows
sooner or later, probably from lack of the nourishment required by the
parasite, or from some definite antagonism between the host and the
parasite which requires further explanation.

Plant Diseases. § — A report on wart-disease of potatoes as regards
the immunity of certain varieties is now published. The immunity
trials were carried on at Ormskirk during the years 1915-1917. It
had been already proved that any fungicide, such as lime, sulphur,
formalin, etc., to be of service had to be employed in such strength that
the potato-plants themselves were killed. Immunity is an inherent
quality of the variety, and is not affected by outward conditions, and it
has becu proved that such variety retains its immunity an indefinite
number of years. Reports have been received to the contrary, but
investigation has always shown that the diseased plants were " rogues "
of susceptible varieties present amongst the crop. A detailed account
is given of various plantings, and the results are carefully tabulated, so

* Philippine Journ. Sci., xi. (1916) pp. 267-83 (5 pis.).

t Journ. Agric. Research, v. (1915) pp. 183-209 (4 col. and 6 photo, pis.).

X Journ. Agric. Research, iv. (1915) pp. 193-9,

§ Journ. Board Agric, xxiv. (1917) pp. 801-18.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY. MICROSCOPY. ETC. 85

that the grower may choose without difficulty tlie variety that is adapted
to special soils as well as being immune. The article is also issued as a
Food Production Leaflet, No. 21, by the Board of Agriculture.

An account of phloem necrosis lias been published by H. H . Quanjer, '■
assisted by Van der Lek and 0. Botjes. Potato-plants which were
affected showed the disease in the curling of the leaves ; the phloem
was found to be abnormal, the cell-walls being swollen and discoloured,
the injury being most marked in the older portions of the tissue near
the bast-fibres. The trouble could be traced from the leaf-midrib to the
underground parts of the stem near the seed-tuber. Xo specific organism
has been detected as the origin of the necrosis.

A paper by Tan der Lek f gives the results of his investigations on
Rldzodonia violacea, a fungal disease of beet-root, carrot, etc. He has
proved by culture experiments that it is not identical with R. Solani.
In the cultures on artificial media a fine mycelium was produced, which
in time became purple ; minute sclerotia were found, but no definite
reproductive bodies were observed.

A. Cendner J describes an attack on Mathiola vaUsiaca hj Sderotinia.
The effect of the fungus was to wither the inflorescences, the petals
changing from the normal violet colour to red, as if they had been acted
upon by an acid. Other Crucifers in the neighbourhood were similarly
affected. The disease was traced to a species of Sderotinia not hitherto
described ; small black sclerotia w-ere detected within the stems.

A. Osterwalder § describes the fungus causing a disease of Raspberry
in Switzerland. It is due to an Ascomycete, DidymeUa applanata, which
attacks the young stems and branches, and is easily recognized by the
reddish-brown or purple patches of the diseased areas.

V. B. Stewart \\ describes a leaf -disease of Kerria japonica, due to a
species of Cylindrosporium. He describes the development of the fungus,
with its effect on the leaf, in which it forms a mass of tissue or stroma.
The leaves turn yellow and fall prematurely ; there is no shot-hole effect ;
the twigs which are also affected become black. In the autumn the
stroma increases, and early in the spring the perfect fruiting-form
develops. Stewart has determined that it is an Ascomycete, belonging
to the Phacidiales, Coccomyces Kerrise sp. n. He also found on the leaf
small pycnidia-like spermogonia with minute spermatia.

L. M. Masseylf describes a crown-canker disease of rose that has caused
great damage in the United States to plants grown under glass. Lesions
are formed just at the surface of the soil, and may extend several inches
up the stem. Massey has determined the fungus as Cylindrodadium
scoparium, only known hitherto as a saprophytic Hyphomjcete. Cultures

* Meded. Nijks Hoog. Land-Luin-Bosch-bouwsch., x. (1916) 138 pp. (12 pis.).
(Dutch, with English translation.)

t Meded. Nijks Hoog. Land-Luin-Bosch-bouwsch., xii. (1917) 112 pp. (9 pis.).
'(French translation.)

X Bull. Soc. Bot. Geneve, ser. 2, ix. (1917) pp. 21-9 (3 figs.). See also Bull.
Agric. Intell. Rome, viii. (1917) p. 1198.

§ Schweiz. Obst.-Garteubau-Zeit., No. 12 (1917) pp. 175-7 (1 fig.). See also
Bull. Agric. Intell. Rome, viii. (1917) p. 1199.
. 1! Phytopathology, vii. (1917) pp. 399-405 (7 figs.).

il Phytopathology, vii. (1917) pp. 408-17 (3 figs.).

86 SUAI.MAllY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

and inoculation experiments were successfully carried out. The writer
finds that the fungus is "low in parasitism, and that conditions of
moisture are important factors in its development."

A. H. Gilbert and C. W. Bennet * have made a descriptive and
cultural study of Scierotinia Trifoliorum, the cause of stem-disease in
Clovers ; it causes the wilting of the leaves and the final destruction of
the clover crop. Sclerotia are formed in spring and germinate in
autumn, to form apothecia. The ascospores from this form hyph^,.
which live in the soil and attack the clover-plants in spring. Rotation
of crops is the cure most frequently recommended. Deep ploughing
and liming of the soil have also had good results. It is not ye"t
known whether, or how long, the mycelium can live in the soil on other
plants than alfalfa.

B. Peyronel f records the presence of SpondyloclacUum atrovirens, a
Hyphomycete parasite on potato-tubers in Italy. It is of very wide-
spread occurrence, but its pathogenic importance is limited. It invades
the corky cells of the outer periderm of the potato, but it does not reach
the inner starch-layers.

J. R. Weir J has confirmed the finding of Sturgis that HerpotricMa
nigra and Neopeckia Coulteri are not allied. The latter always attacks
Pines ; the former grows on other Conifers. The fungi differ not only
morphologically, but in their effect on the host -plants. Weir describes
another fungus, Herpotrkhia quinqiiesejjtata sp. n., which attacks Picea
Engelmamii.

W. 0, Glover § describes a disease of Clematis causing stem-rot
and leaf-spot as due to Ascochyta demaUdina. The plants are killed by
the growth of the fungus down the petiole into the stems, thus girdling
the plants at the node. The development of the fungus is given in detail^
and means of cure suggested.

The only known parasitic fungus of leafless mistletoes, Wallrothiella
Arcentholii, has been described" by J. R. Weir.|| It is of common
occurrence in Montana and Idaho on the false mistletoes of Conifers,
and is of economic value in affecting the control of the mistletoes.
It is a Pyrenomycete, the spores of which are globose, thick- walled, and
hyaline at first, but become brown-black. An account is given of the
ecology of the fungus and the conditions influencing its development.

H. A. Edison 11 has found that four different fungi cause damping-
off of seedlings of sugar-beet in America ; these are Phoma Betse,
Rhizoctonia sp., Pythium Debaryanum, and a member of the Sapro-
legniaces. The latter has not been identified, but it is not Aphanomyces
Isevis, which has caused damping-off in other localities.

A study oi^ Phoma Betse was made by V. W. Pool and M. B. McKay.**
It forms light brown spots on the leaves. An account is given of its

* Phytopathology, vii. (1917) pp. 432-42 (5 figs.).

+ Rend. R. Accad. Lincei Rome, xxvi. (1917) pp. 509-12. See also Bull. Agric.
Intell. Rome, viii. (1917) p. 1320.

X Journ. Agric. Research,

iv. (1915) pp. 251-3.

§ Journ. Agric. Research, iv. (1915) pp. 331-42 (5 pis.).
II Journ. Agric. Research, iv. (1915) pp. 359-78 (2 pis.).
H Journ. Agric. Research, iv. (1915) pp. 135-68 (10 pis.).
** Journ. Agric. Research, iv. (1915) pp. 169-77 (1 pL).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 87

distribution, and of experiments to test the vitality of the spores.
The thermal death-point of Phoma on leaves exposed to dry-heat for
half-an-hour was 80° to 90° C. It dies after three months' storage in
soil. It does not sarvive the process of ensiling the beet-tops.

H. A. Edison * has also studied Phoma Betse from a histological point
of view. The period that the host is susceptible to infection is the
seedling stage. The cells of the plant attacked were often nearly
filled with the fungus, and it seems probable that though the middle
lamella is dissolved the parasite does not live on it. Heavily invaded
cells are consumed ; the cytoplasm disappears, and the nuclei dis-
integrate. There may exist also less virulent infections, in which,
though the fungus is established i in the tissues, the beet continues a
healthy growth ; the balance is, however, not a healthy one, and in
storage the activity of the parasite may be renewed.

A root-rot of Ginseng has been determined by J. Rosenbaum f as
due to the Hyphomycete Alternaria panax ; it results in yellowing and
wilting of the leaves. Cultures and inoculations were made.

As a result of cultural and morphological studies, J. Rosenbaum %
has established the pathenogenicity of a Sderotinia causing the white-
rot of Ginseng, and he has proved its identity with S. libertiana, which
occurs on lettuce, celery, and a number of other hosts. He has also
studied the Sderotinia that causes black-rot of Ginseng, and finds it
identical with S. SmUacina.

W. D. Valleau § has studied the resistance of plums to brown-
rot, Sderotinia cijierea. Infection may take place at any time through
the skin, but different varieties have different powers of resistance
after infection, due to parenchymatous plugs of the stomatal cavity, the
production of corky walls, etc., rather than to any peculiar content of
the fruit. Brown-rot is essentially a rot of ripe plums, at the stage
when the fruits are softening. The hyphaj are intercellular, but do
not dissolve the middle lamella. It was not possible to extract an
enzyme from the fungus. The internal hyphas lend support to the
plums, hence it is a firm rot and the plums mummify. PenicilUum
expansum, on the contrary, produces a soft rot by dissolving the middle
lamella.

Die-back of apple-trees has been traced to the fungus Cytospora
leucostoma by Van der Byl.|| It also occurs on other fruit-trees of the
Rosaceae. It begins as a brownish-black coloration near the soil and
spreads upwards. Diseased trees usually die the second summer after
attack. Species of Cytospora have been determined as the pycnidiat .
stage of Valsa, but the writer was unable to produce any higher fruiting
form in his cultures. He gives a detailed description of the disease and
suggests methods of cure.

A disease of Sweet-Potato known as scurf was studied by Halstead If

* Journ. Agric. Research, v. (1915) pp. 55-7 (2 pis.),
t Journ. Agric. Research, v. (1915) pp. 181-2 (2 pis.).
i Journ. Agric, Research, v. (1915) pp. 291-7 (2 pis. and 1 fig.).
§ Journ. Agric. Research, v. (1915) pp. 365-95 (3 pis.).
11 African Journ. Sci., xvi. (1915) pp. 545-57 (4 pis. and 4 figs.).
^ Journ. Agric. Research, v. (1916) pp. 787-91 (2 pis.).

88 SUMMARY OF CURHENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

and found by him to be due to a fungus, Monilochsetesjnfnscans g. et
sp

n. He gave no technical account of the fungus. The disease has

again been examined by L. Ti. Barter, who now describes both the
disease and the fungus. The latter, a member of the Dematiacefe, is
superficial on the potato and causes a brown discoloration, but does not
penetrate the epidermis.

Disease of Trees."'— "W. H. Long has investigated the heart-rot of
oaks caused by Stereum subpileatimi. The fungus enters the wood of
the host only through wounds that expose the heart-woods, through
fire-scars or through branch stubs. The heart-wood is delignified by the
action of the fungus. The sporophores were found only on dead trees
or on dead areas of living trees. The rot is very widely distributed in
America.

A root-rot of apple-trees in North Carolina has been determined by
F. Wolf and R. 0. Cromwell f to be due to Xylaria sp. The disease
has been notified from various parts of the State and elsewhere. The
roots are covered with black fungus incrustations, from the margins of
which radiate minute black rhizomorphs. The cortex becomes corroded,
and the disintegration of the wood follows, although slowly.

P. A. van der Byl | has given an account of Polyporns lucidus which
has caused the death of many acacia trees around Pretoria. He gives a
systematic resume of allied or synonymous species, and a description of
the fungus itself and of its development within the tissues. The hyphfe
do not pierce the M'alls of the wood vessels, they gain entrance by the
pits. The fungus is a wound parasite, and the trees attacked are mostly
in a previously enfeebled condition.

Endotrophic Mycorhiza of Ericace3e.§— Jean Dufrenoy has made a
study of Mycorhiza in Arbutus Unedo. He finds that the roots are
clothed with a dense mantle of hyphte, some branches of which penetrate
the tissues of the root, and haustoria are formed in the living cells of
the host. Rootlets which have been inoculated early cease to grow
apically and form tubercles. The base of the shoot also develops into
a very large tubercle from which many lateral stems spring. The
fungus penetrates into every part of the tree, even into the assimilating
and reproductive tissues. The writer discusses the relations between
the host-plant and the invading parasite.

Lichens.

(By A. LoBRAiN Smith, F.L.S.)

Attachment Organs of Corticolous Ramalin8B.||— LiUan Porter
gives a historical account of work done on the anatomy of the Ramalinae,
especially with regard to their organs of attachment. She then describes

* Jouru. Agric. Research, v. (1915) pp. 421-8 (1 pL).

t Journ. Agric. Research, ix. (1917) pp. 269-76 (3 pis. and 4 figs.).

X South African Journ. Sci., xiii. (1917) pp. 506-15 (5 pis. and 6 figs.).

§ New Phytologist, xvi. (1917) pp. 222-8 (4 figs.).

II Proc. Roy, Irish Acad., xxxiv. (1917) pp. 17-32 (3 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICUOSCOPY, KTU. 89

her own methods of work. The species she examined were R. calicaris,
R.fraxinea, R.fastigiata, and R. pollinaria. She finds that the attach-
ment organs are strands of closely- woven hyphaj longitudinally arranged,
and continuous with the cortical tissues. They penetrate the periderm
by cracks or lenticels, and by wedge action cause extensive splitting.
New plants arise from the horizontal branches of these strands. She
finds that the Hving tissues of the tree may be penetrated and injured.
She also found evidence to prove that hypertrophy of the peridermal
tissue of the host arises, and erosion of the wood by ingrowths of hyper-
trophied tissue. Methods of clearing the trees from lichen growths are
su": crested.

DO

Varenne Collection of Lichens.* — This collection formed part of the
herbarium of the late E. G. Yarenne, who died in 1<S87. R. Paulson has
made a systematic study of the lichens, which amount to 440 specimens.
He has verified the determinations, and renamed them according to
modern requirements The Essex lichens among them, to the number
of 124, form a nucleus for a lichen flora of the county. They are now
in the possession of the Essex Field Club.

Lichens of Whatcom County, Washington.f — A. C. Herre gives a
descriptive and ecological account of the county, as well as of the lichens
found there. Originally the district was covered by typical dense coni-
ferous forest, but intermingled with the Conifers are various deciduous
trees, especially on low ground. Lichens are less prominent a feature
in the region than mosses and hepatics ; there are practically none of the
very large species, but crustaceous forms on rocks, soil or trees are fairly
abundant.

Notes on Parmeliopsis.iJ: — L. W. Riddle writes a full description of
all the plants of this genus (or section of Parmelia). He gives a
careful historical account of eich species, and bases his conclusions on
his examination of types as far as possible. The species occur in
America as well as in Europe, and all have the same habitat — old fence-
rails and the bark of Conifers.

Lichen Ecology. § — In discussing the ecology of the Foothills vegeta-
tion of the Rocky Mountains, A. G. Vestal includes lichens as an
Association ; the ^■arious members of the Association have been deter-
mined and described by R. Heber Howe. The rocks are dry surfaces
much exposed to sun and wind, and they are first invaded by primitive
xerophytic stages of fine-grained criistose species, notably the black-
grey Rmodina radiata ; coarser species follow, and later Parmelia
conspersa becomes established as the dominant lichen. Notes on moist
surface lichen species are also given.

* Essex Naturalist, xviii. (1917) pp. 133-4.
t Bryologist, xx. (1917) pp. 76-84.
X Brvologist, XX. (1917; pp. 69-76 (1 pi.).
§ Bat. Gaz., Ixiv. (1917) pp. 360-2 (1 fig.).

90 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEA.RCHES RELATING TO

Mycetozoa.

(By A. LoRRAiN Smith, F.L.S.).

Notes on New or Rare Myxomycetes.* — W. C. Sturo^is has been
studying a series of interesting Mycetozoa collected mainly by himself in
Colorado. He describes and figures three new species, and gives many
notes on the habitat and developments of other forms.

Irish Mycetozoa.t— The records of all Irish Mycetozoa up to the
present date have been compiled by Margaret W. Rea and Margarita de
Stelfox. The list, which includes thirteen species not previously reported
from Ireland, is followed by notes on the habitat and occurrence of a
number of species. The species Physarum pulcherripes was found in a
larch plantation at Rostrevor ; it is the first European record. The
writers have also found the typical form of Stemonitis splendens, all
other collections in the British Isles being the variety Webberi. Licia
minima is also a new British record.

Contribution to the Life-history of Spongospora subterranea.f
L. 0. Kunkel finds that infection of potato-tubers by this organism is
accomplished, not by separate amoebae, but by creeping plasmodium
which passes down through and between the epidermal cells. Usually
a number of cells are killed at the point of entrance. Once beneath the
epidermis it spreads out in all directions, and forms a rather flat disc-
shaped mass, which separates the epidermis from the tissue beneath.
The subsequent developments of the organism and its influence on the
host are followed and described. In cultures allowed to become dry
" the Plasmodium encysts, as is common among the Myxomycetes. In
many respects it accords with members of the Dictyosteiiacefe ; branched
sporophores are formed and spores as in DictyosteJium. The spores on
germinating give rise to amoebae each with one nucleus."

Schizophyta.
Schizomycetes.

Erythrogenous Variety of Bacillus pyocyaneus. §— C. Gessard
received a culture of B. fyocyanem obtained from a wound. After a
time on special media the organism developed a red pigment. The most
favourable medium appears to be a mixture of pepton, glycerin, and
agar. This medium became stained a bright red throughout.

Bacteria of Dust.||— E. Burnet has made an investigation of the
bacteriology of dust collected from various sources, such as traracars,.
railway carriages, theatres, and cinematographs, and from the interior of

* Mycologia, ix. (1917) pp. 323-32 (2 pis.),
t Irish Naturalist, xxvi. (1917) pp. 57-65.
\ Journ. Agric. Research, iv. (1915) pp. 265-78 (5 pis.).
§ Comptes Rendus, cliv. (1917) pp. 1071-3.
!! Ann. Inst. Pasteur, ixxi. (1917) pp. 593-600.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 91

vacuum-cleaners. The tubercle bacillus was recovered from three out of
eighteen cultures from fresh dust, and was found to be full of virulence.
Other organisms isolated were B. subtilis, various representatives of the
Mesentericus group, and putrefactive organisms such as B. serogenes
capsulatus, B. enteriditis sporogenes, B. tetani, and the bacillus of Rodella.
The anaerobic bacteria of the dust are derived from the earth, smoke,,
and foecal matter. They are the ordinary intestinai flora of man and
the domestic animals. The author states that from the point of hygiene
it is important to preserve our food and respiratory mucous membranes
from the spores of such microbes. He thinks, indeed, that many cases-
of tetanus, in which the portal of entry cannot be found, are due to the
action of contaminated dust acting on slightly abraded surfaces.

Intestinal Flora of Sprue.*— C. Elders has isolated an organism
with the following characters from a case of typical sprue. AYith
Neisser's stain the bacilli gave blue-staining polar bodies, with brown
coloration of the bodies of the organisms. On glycerin-agar, after twenty-
four hours at 37° C, a growth of small grey colonies with wavy edges
was obtained. Milk curdled and soured in four days. The bacteria
were non-motile and did not form spores. Mannite, lactose, and glucose
were fermented. The bacteria grew best anaerobically, and glucose-agar
stab-culture gave colonies having branching outgrowths. There was
no growth in gelatin. It is possible that these diphtheroid bacilli may be
lactic-acid bacilli derived from the milk-diet on which the patient had
been placed.

Actions of Micro-organisms on Bone-marrow.f — Y. Matsueka
records the results of his experiments on the effect of infection with
staphylococci, streptococci, and tubercle bacilli on bone-marrow trans-
planted into the spleen. From previous experiments (IDIG) it was seen
that bone-marrow transplanted autoplastically into the spleen is com-
letely healed over five months after transplantation, there being no
evidence of connective tissue reaction. The present experiments were
designed with the view of finding if various forms of functional
stimulation of the graft could call forth a distinctive active manifes-
tation of function. Bouillon cultures of streptococci and staphylococci,
or cultures of tubercle bacilli, were injected into the auricular veins
of rabbits, which had previously been treated witli marrow-grafts.
Bone-marrow autoplastically transplanted into the spleen is converted
mainly into cellular marrow and partly into gelatinous marrow by
chronic streptococcic and staphylococcic infection, which eventually
causes the death of the rabbit. The uninjured marrow in the femur
shows exactly the same changes. The graft of bone-marrow is in
part converted into cellular marrow by slight irritation of a tuberculous
infection, whereby the reaction in the graft and in the marrow itself
is identical. Bone-marrow autoplastically transplanted into the spleen
is enclosed and healed over in strange surroundings without loss of
its functional capacities, and, when infected, it shows the same

* Nederl. Tijdschr. v. Geneesk., i. (1917) pp. 17-20..
t Journ. Path, and Med., ixi. (1917) pp. 501-10.

92

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

reactions as the non-transplanted bone-marrow. Biologically, bone-
marrow can therefore be transplanted into the spleen. In chronic
infections with streptococci and staphylococci extra-medullary deposits
make their appearance : these, however, are neither so large nor so
numerous as in chronic anaemia.

Epidemic Dysentery on the Somme.* — G. Leygue and J. Haguenau
have studied an epidemic of 449 cases of bacillary dysentery which
occurred among French colonial troops to the south of the Somme during
the autumn of 1916. B. dysenteric Shiga was isolated in thirty-
six cases, B. dysenterise Flexner in five cases, and B. dysenterise Hiss
in twenty cases. In a smaller group of cases three other groups of
organisms were isolated, with the following group characteristics : —

Type I

Type II

Type III

o

m

Agar

Litmus
Milk

0 -

Slight
tur-
bidity

No
lique-
fac-
tion

ditto ditto

ditto

ditto

Colonies Slightly
a little redded
thicker

than i
Flexner

ditto ditto

ditto ditto -f i -f - t-f

-1-

-f-

-i-

+

V ^

-I-

Media uot fiagmeuted

-f + 4-4- +

s ^ ^

Media fragmented

+

+ 1 +

Agglutination was tried in 325 cases, with 190 positive results
(175 — to Shiga and 15 - to Flexner). Complement fixation was
performed in ten cases, with negative results. Mixed infections with the
enteric group were observed, B. paratyphosus A being isolated on four
occasions and B. paratyphosus B twice. Agglutination was positive with
B. typhosus in three cases and with B. paratyphosus A on one occasion.

* Presse Med., xxv. (1917) pp. 4214.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

93

MICROSCOPY.

A, Instruments, Accessories, etc.*
il) Stands.

Bausch and Lomb's Metallurgical Microscope, COM. f — This
instrument (fig. 1) which has been made after the design of Dr. Albert
Sauveur, of Harvard University, has a foot of horseshoe form. The

Fig. 1.

* This subdivision contains (1) Stands ; (2) Eye-pieces and [Objectives ; (3)
Illuminating and other Apparatus ; (4) Photomicrography ; (5) Microscopical
Optics and Manipulation ; (6) Miscellaneous.

t Catalogue, Microscopes, Bausch and Lomb Optical Co., New York, pp. 70-1.

^4 SUMMARY OF CUKEENT RESEAECHES RELATING TO

pillar, rectangular in section, is provided with inclination joint and
clamping lever to secure the instrument in any position by means of
vertical and horizontal stops. The arm is of handle type and of enlarged
•design ; it provides ample space for manipulation of object. The body-
tube has 39 mm. of outside diameter, and is provided with society screw
thread ; the oculars are the Bausch and Lomb standard sized eye-pieces.
The draw-tube is graduated in single millimetres, with every tenth line
numbered. The coarse-adjustment is by standard rack and pinion, and
has a stop to prevent pinion from over-riding rack. The fine-adjustment
is of lever type, with milled micrometer screw head in two parts for slow
and rapid movement, the larger graduated into 100 divisions, each equal
to 0* 002,5 mm. in vertical movement, and provided with hinged
indicator, which may be turned back from head ; the fine-adjustment
ceases to operate when objective touches specimen. The vertical
illuminator is a plane glass reflector, readily adjustable, provided with
three different sizes in revolving sleeve. The stage is adjustable
vertically by standard rack and pinion to increase working distance and
allow focusing without displacing vertical illuminator with reference to
light ; it is circular in shape, 102 mm. in diameter, with distance of
75 mm. from centre to base of arm ; it is made of metal with vulcanite
top, and is provided with centring screws and spring clips, removable
for substitution of attachable mechanical stage. The mirror is plane
and concave, 50 mm. in diameter, and adjustable in two planes in a fork

mounting.

f3) llluminatingr and other Apparatus.

Interference Refractometer.* — E. S. Williams, in pointing out the
importance of measuring the refractive index of liquids in estimating
their purity, observes that the effect of temperature can be best elimi-
nated by measuring, not the absolute refractive index, but the index
relatively to some standard liquid in the same bath. But while a
refractometer of the Abbe type, for absolute values, gives results reliable
to two units in the fourth decimal place, much greater accuracy can be
obtained from an instrument which depends on the interference of light
waves. The author finds that with such a refractometer a refractive
index may be measured with an accuracy of from 0*00006 to O'OOOOOOS,
which is, of course, far beyond the capabilities of a refractometer of the
Abbe or Pulfrich type.

Use of the Stereoscope for Examining Superposed Projections.f—
H. Hubert believes that his appHcation of the stereoscope to the exami-
nation of suspended orthogonal projections is a novelty, and he seems to
find it very successful. As an example he quotes the superposition of a
topographical surface and an underlying geologic layer. In the ordinary
manner superposition of such surfaces would be very confused, while the
superposition of three surfaces would be hopeless. But stereoscopic

* Journ. Inst. Brewing, xxiii. (1917) pp. 457-60 (3 figs.),
t Comptes Rendus, clxv. (1917) pp. 1059-60.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC, 95

fusion of two views renders the superposed projections absolutely inde-
pendent of each qther, because they appear in relief. The transforma-
tion of the superposed orthogonal projections into stereoscopic views is
very simple, because in constructing each contour curve, it is only
necessary to concern oneself with the scale of reduction, and with the
position of the centre of the sheet of paper containing the projections. •
Each contour curve being, in regard to a surface immediately under it,
supposed brought near to the observer by a quantity proportional to the
graphic equi-distance (a quantity chosen arbitrarily once for all), the
scale of reduction is given by the formula a//, in which a is a variable
equal to the distance of the sheet of paper from the observer's eyes,
and / a constant equal to the distance between the observer's eyes and
the stereoscopic views. As to the centre M of the sheet of paper, it will
always lie at that normal to the stereoscopic views which passes through
the middle of the line joining the optic centres 0, 0' of the two eyes.
'Consequently its projection in is always in the plane xy passing through
the centres S, S' of the stercvoscopic views. Moreover, it is as much to
the left (for the right eye) or more to the right (for the left eye) of
S and of S' as the variable a is proportionally smaller. Its position may
be obtained either by construction (intersection of D M and of 0' M
■with xy) or by the calculation m^ = cif/a, where 6? is a constant equal

0 0'

to . The construction of the two views is so much the more

2

simplified, inasmuch as the projection of each curve intended for the
left eye is rigorously superposable on the corresponding projection
intended for the right eye. The only difference between two corre-
sponding curves is that the projection of the centre M, instead of having
the same relation with regard to S and to S', is placed symmetrically
with regard to the middle of the straight line joining these two pdints.
In practice there is advantage in drawing much enlarged the stereoscopic
images and in reducing them photographically. There is also a gain in
not putting the two corresponding views on the same mount : partly,
because each observer can then place them at the most favourable
separation, and, partly, because the position of the two views can be also
arranged for inversion, which will sometimes be more convenient for the
•observation of certain details.

(5) Microscopical Optics and Manipulation.

Spherometer of Precision.* — The chief feature of this instrument,
•says J. Guild, is the method employed for detecting the exact contact
between the micrometer screw and the surface under test. The micro-
meter terminates in a small sphere of about 1 • 5 mm. diameter. A
microscope with a suitable illuminating apparatus is mounted above,
and the Newton's rings surrounding'the point of contact are observed.
By watching the behaviour of the rings when the screw is brought up
the exact point of contact is determined. The sensitivity is about one-
ten-thousandth of a millimetre.

* Trans. Optical Sec, January 10, 1918.

96 SUMMARY OF CUKEENT EESEARCHES RELATING TO

B. Technique.*
Q) Collecting: Objects, including: Culture Processes.

Method for Discovering Fungi in the Sputum of Bronchitics.f
Bazin, after alluding to the difficulty of finding fungi in non-tuberculous
sputum, states that if the sputum be cultivated in a suitable medium at
37° C. for forty-eight hours colonies of fungi ^yill be found to have
developed. Raulin's fluid as a culture medium does well, but the author
prefers glucose-glycerin water. For examining lactophenol was used.
By the foregoing procedure he has identified five species of Aspergillus
and two of Sterigmotocystis. He adds a note to the effect that iodide
of potassium gives remarkable curative results.

Rapid Differentiation of Amoebae Cysts. |—D. W. Cutler and R.
Williamson, with the intention of facilitating the rapid recognition of
intestinal amoeba, have applied the following method of examination : —
A loopful of faeces is emulsified in a drop of 1 in 1000 solution of neutral-
red in 0*85 p.c. sodium chloride solution. The preparation is covered
with a cover-slip, and examined with ^-inch objective and No. 10 eye-
piece. A warm stage is an advantage, but is not essential. In such a
preparation the vegetative form of E. Jnjstolytka takes up the neutral-
red, and the stained amoebse can be readily seen and recognized. The
pink dye is uniformly distributed throughout the endoplasm, while the
ectoplasm remains unstained. Entamceba coli is not stained, and appears
as a light grey body. The method forms an easy and satisfactory means
of differentiation between the two micro-organisms. The neutral-red
method presents no disadvantage in looking for cysts, which appear as
colourless refractile bodies. When difficulty has arisen in deciding to
what species of entamoeba the cysts beloug, the well-known iodine
method can be employed. The large amoebae of the " tetragena "
type are usually easily recognized without the neutral-red method. It
is the smaller form of hystolytka, known as the " minuta " form, which
appears only in the f ajces in numbers as acute symptoms abate, which
offers great difficulty in diagnosis. This type, however, reacts in
exactly the same way to the neutral-red as does the " tetragena " type.

Studies in Cattle-plague. § — H. Schein has conducted a series of
researches on the etiology and treatment of cattle-plague in ludo-China,
and has arrived at the following conclusions with reference to this
disease : — 1. The goat is a good subject for experimentation. Its

* This subdivision contains (1) Collecting Objects, including Culture Pro-
cesses ; (2) Preparing Objects ; (3) Cutting, including Embedding and Microtomes;
(4) Staining and Injecting ; (5) Mounting, including slides, preservative fluids, etc.;
(6) Miscellaneous.

t C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, Ixxx. (1917) pp. 771-3.

t Journ. Path, and Bact., xxi. (1917) pp. 511-3.

§ Ann. Inst. Pasteur, xxii. (1917) pp. 571-92.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 97

susceptibility to bovine plague is nearly the same as the buffalo, in
Indo-China at all events. 2. yoVtr c.cm. of virulent blood constitutes
a certain lethal dose. 3. ^3-^ot5' c.cm. of blood is the smallest infective
dose. 4. yV c.cm. of plasma is comparable to the minimal lethal dose.
5. The virus of bovine plague resides in the leucocytes, though it is
sometimes found free in the plasma. 6. There are about 25,000
microbes, or groups of microbes, per c.cm. in the whole virulent blood.
7. There are about 10 organisms per c.cm. in the centrifuged citrated
plasma. 8. Sensitization of the virus has not given good results in the
author's hands. 9. Anti-pest serum does not act upon the virus itself
but upon the organism of the experimental animal. 10. " Sero-infection "
appears to give good results with the buffalo, provided a sufficient
quantity of serum is injected {^Q c.cm. per 100 kilos, body-weight for
adults, more for young animals), and infecting with the least possible
quantity of virus, in order to retard the rapid growth of the parasite.

Vitality of Rinderpest Virus outside the Animal Body.* — A. W.
Shilton has carried out a series of elaborate investigations, at Muktasar
in Northern India, with reference to the viability of the rinderpest
virus outside the animal body under natural conditions, and has come
to the following general conclusions : —

1. At the Muktasar Laboratory rinderpest infection was found to
persist in certain buildings for forty-eight hours after the removal of sick
animals, but not for longer periods of time ; frequently infection was
absent after shorter intervals. Ground which was shaded by trees, when
contaminated by cattle suffering from rinderpest, was found to be
infective to healthy stock eighteen hours after the removal of the sick
animals, but not for longer intervals. Ground entirely exposed to direct
sunlight did not remajn infective beyond eight hours.

2. In the plains, buildings were found to remain infective for twenty
hours after the removal of the sick animals, but non-infective after
longer intervals. Areas shaded by trees remained infective for twenty-
four hours, and those exposed to direct sunlight for six hours after the
removal of the sick animals, but not for longer periods of time.

3. The rinderpest virus was found to survive in mixed faeces and
urine protected from direct sunlight for periods of fifty-four hours
after excretion by sick animals, but when exposed to direct sunlight
the. virus did not survive for longer periods than eight hours. Saliva
and nasal discharge from sick animals did not remain infective beyond
forty-four hours.

4. It may be concluded, therefore, that in buildings and on areas
infected by the natural discharges of sick animals, the rinderpest virus
is unable to survive for more than two or three days, and when air
and sunlight are freely admitted its destruction is even more rapid.

5. The carcases of animals which have died from the disease must,
however, be regarded as possible sources of infection for some consider-
able time after death, especially when the air-temperature is low, as it

* Mem. Dept. Agric. India, Veterinary Series, iii. No. 1 (1917).
March SOth, 1918 H

98 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

has been sliown that the virus can survive for fifty-one days in blood
from a sick animal when this has been freely exposed to the air and
allowed to become putrid ; in meat and bones also the virus may persist
for many days.

Further observations are necessary to determine the factors influenc-
ing the duration of the vitality of the rinderpest virus in dead animals'
tissues.

(2) Preparing Objects.

Demonstrating Degeneration of Peripheral Nerves.* — C. Manalong
adopted the following technique : — From 2-J: centimetres of the vagus
and posterior tibial nerves are laid on a strip of cardboard and treated
as follows : 1. Harden in equal parts of Miiller's fluid and formaldehyde
(10 p.c.) for twenty-four hours. 2. Replace by Miiller's fluid for fifteen
days. 3. Wash in running water for from twelve to twenty-four hours.

4. Transfer the tissue for fifteen days to the following solution : Miiller's
fluid 2 c.cm,, 2 p.c. osmic acid solution 0'5 c.cm., distilled water 0'5 c.cm.

5. Wash in running water for from twelve to twenty-four hours.

6. Dehydrate in graded alcohols, changing the absolute alcohol twice.

7. Clear in origanum oil, tease under a dissecting microscope and mount
in chloroform balsam.

Demonstrating the Cytoplasmic Inclusions of Germ-cells. f — •
J. B. Gatenby in his work on the snail used the following fixatives :

1. Modification of Flemming's strong formula without acetic acid.

2. Same fluid diluted one-sixth. 3. Champy's fluid. 4. Flemming's
strong solution, the acetic acid being replaced by nitric acid. For
staining, Ehrlich's hematoxylin and eosin, Mayer's acid ha^malum, iron-
haematoxylin, with Orange G, Bensley's acid fuchsin, methyl-green, and
alizarin-toluidin-blue. The following was the best of the fixing and
staining methods: — 'The animals were anaesthetized in chloroform vapour,
-and after the shells were removed the ovotestis is cut out. This is cut

in half longitudinally, and thrown into Flemming without acetic acid,
diluted one-sixth with distilled water. Next day they are washed in run-
ning water for two hours, then passed through upgraded alcohol to
absolute and xylol. Sections, 6/x, are stained in iron-alum-haematoxylin
by the long method — i.e. ten to twelve hours in iron-alum, ten to fourteen
in hajmato^ylin. After differentiation the sections are stained with
Orange G or van Gieson. The mitrochondria and nebenkern are intense
black and beautifully clear.

C4) staining: and Injecting-.

Improvised Staining of Malarial Parasites. J — G. Senevet used
the following improvised eosin-azure stain for malarial blood, in the
absence of special stains for this purpose : —

Two solutions are used : 1. Methylen-blue 1 gram, sodium borate

* Philippine Journ. Sci., xii. (1917) p. 171.

t Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., Ixii. (1917) pp. 562-4.

J Bull. Soc. Path. Exeta, x. (1917) pp. 540-2.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 99

S gram, distilled water 100 grams. The solution is left to ripen
for eight to fifteen days at a temperature of 37° C. 2. Watery eosin
1 gram, distilled water 100 grams. Stain for two or three hours, for
preference, with a weak solution of the stain — one drop of the eosin
stain, and one or two drops of the blue stain to 20 c.cm. of neutral distilled
•water.

Rapid Examination of Malarial Blood.* — E, Roubaud recommends
the following rapid method of detecting malarial parasites : — A thick
blood-film is quickly dried by heat (45°-55^C.) aud then hsmolyzed
for five to ten minutes in distilled water. This technique destroys the
parasite but leaves the distinctive yellow-brown pigment, which can be
shown up more clearly if the film is stained for a few seconds with carbol-
violet or thionin. In benign tertian infection the irregular streaks of
:small pigment-granules of the schizont can be distinguished with ease
from the masses of pigment of the female gamete and the dense
platelets of the male. The form of the other species of parasite are
not so easily demonstrated. For the rapid detection of crescents the
author places the dried thick film in a solution of thionin in distilled
water, of the strength of 1 to 10,000, for ten to fifteen minutes. The
li^molysis of the film and the staining of the crescents occur simul-
taneously.

Staining Sporogenous Bacteria.f — L. Tribondeau makes a film
from the culture in the usual way, and then fixes it by passing through
the flame of a Bunsen six to ten times. When cool the slide is covered
with LugoFs solution and then heated to vaporization. Next the film
as covered with carbol-crystal violet and then heated to vaporization.
After a wash in tap-water, the slide is covered with an aqueous solu-
tion of vesuvin (1 to 500). This is allowed to act for one to two
minutes. After a wash in tap-water it is dried. The spores stand
out a dark violet against the yellow-brown bodies of the bacteria.
Instead of the foregoing, carbol-fuchsin and methylen-blue may be used
.as stain and counterstain.

Staining Young Eels. — A. Gandolfii Hornyold sends the following
method, which he hopes may interest readers of the Journal. He writes
from the Marine Biological Laboratory, Mallorca : — '' In small eels the
•ovaries and the testicles have exactly the same appearance, . namely,
that of a very fine transparent band or ribbon, and it is only when
the eels are about 24-26 c.cm. long that it is possible to distinguish
the two sexes with a pocket-lens. Walter, in his monograph, ' Der
Tenpaal,' advises to examine a fragment of the organ under the micro-
scope with a low-power x 50. If no eggs can be distinguished, the
eel is most probably a male. The following method gives good results :
I pour a little alcohol (90 p.c.) on the organs, and it istheti quite
easy to detach a fragment with a fine forceps, as coagulation renders

* Bull. Soc. Path. Exot., x. (1917) pp. 702-3.
t C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, Ixxx. (1917) pp. 880-1.

H 2

100 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

them white and more visible. I then put it on a slide in water to
which is added a small drop of Loeffler's raethylen-blue. I watch the
staining under the microscope with a low power (I use Zeiss AA, with
eye-piece No. 2 or 4). Staining takes place rapidly, and it is much
more easy to distinguish the eggs than in an unstained fragment-
One can afterwards mount in glycerin or in Apathy's gum-syrup. By
this method I have been able to distinguish the sexes in eels 23*5 c.cm.
long. I have tried vital staining on elvers. Neutral broth gives very
good results, and does not appear to harm them. These stained elvers
are very pretty in aquaria."

Staining Tubercle Bacilli.* — L. Tribondeau adopts the following-
procedure : The dried films of sputum are flooded with carbol-fuchsin,
and heated to vaporization thrice. The stain is then thrown off and the
film treated with nitric acid (acid 1, water 2) until it is yellow. It is-
then washed in running water, followed by alcohol (90 to 100 p.c.)^
until the film is of a pink colour. After a rapid wash in tap-water, it is
treated with a saturated aqueous solution of picric acid (1 vol. plu&
alcohol 90-100 p.c. 1 vol.), or with a solution of methylen-blue
(medicinal M.B. gr. 0'50, distilled water 150 c.cm.). These counter-
stains are allowed to act for five to ten seconds. The slide is then
quickly washed and dried. The picric acid treatment is preferable if
tubercle bacilli only are sought for ; the methylen-blue if the cell-
elements, etc., are to be shown.

(5) Mounting', including- Slides, Preservative Fluids, etc-

Preservation of Fermentation Organisms in Nutrient Media.-f —
A. Klocker makes an important communication on this subject.
Hansen's conclusion that a 10 p.c. solution of cane-sugar forms an
excellent medium is confirmed, but beer-wort is also very good. The
Pasteur flask is undoubtedly the best form of vessel for prolonged pre-
servation. The present observations were made, dui'ing a period of
more than thirty years, on 820 cultures of yeasts and moulds. These
included Saccharomycetes, Schizosaccharomycetes, Torulte, Mycoderma,
Endomyces, Monilia, Chalara, Oidiwn, and Mucor. For the most part
the nutrient medium employed was a 10 p.c. solution of cane-sugar, in
which 461 cultures were grown, but 290 cultures were made on beer-
wort and 69 on other media. Of the 461 cultures on cane-sugar
solution (231 of these being Saccharomyces) 403 survived, whilst 58
perished. In the case of the 290 cultures grown on beer-wort (190
Saccharomyces) 268 survived and 22 perished. Thus it must be
concluded that fermentation organisms can be kept alive for upwards of
thirty years. The exceptions to this rule are : — (1) The asporogenic
varieties of Saccharomyces ; (2) Saccharomycodes Ludivigii ; (3) Schizo-
saccharomyces ; and (4) Aspergillus glauciis. Of the first only 44 p.c.

• C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, Ixxx. (1917) pp. 780-2.

t C.R. des Travaux du Laboratoire de Carlsberg, ii, pt. 6 (1917). See also
Nature, Dec. 13 (1917) pp. 289-90.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 101

survived on cane-sugar and 21 p.c. on beer- wort ; of the second only
one in nine survived on cane-sugar for more than 7 ' 5 years, but all five
cultures on beer-wort survived for twenty-five years. Only two out of
five cultures of Schizosaccharomyces on cane-sugar survived, but ten out
of eleven of those on beer- wort were living. Of six cultures of
A. glaucus only one survived, and two of the remaining five perished in
less than two years.

(6) Miscellaneous.

Rapid Method for obtaining HaBmolytic Serum.* — A. Sezary
recommends the following rapid method : — Into the peritoneal sac of a
rabbit a single injection of washed sheep's-corpuscles is made. The
■quantity of red corpuscles is that which is found in 85 c.cm. of de-
fibrinated blood. The animal is bled eight days afterwards. The
hEemolytic'serum is just as powerful as if the animal were injected four
or five times.

Detection of Bile-pigments in Blood-serum.f — A. Fouchet obtains
blood by venous puncture (5 c.cm.). The serum is obtained by centri-
fuging or by leaving it to exude. Five drops are placed on some white
surface, and then a similar quantity of the following reagent is added :
Trichloracetic acid, 5 grm. ; water, 20 c.cm. ; perchloride of iron,
officinal, 2 c,cm. The two are thoroughly mixed with a glass rod. In less
than twenty minutes a colour is obtained ; this is greenish-blue and
stable. If there be -^-q^^-q of bihration the colour comes out at once.

* C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, Ixxx. (1917) pp. 797-8.
t C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, Ixxx. (1917) pp. 826-8.

I

102 - SUMMARY OF CUERENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Metallography, etc.

Heterogeneity of Steels." — By treating polished sections of steel
with a cupric reagent and then removing the deposited copper by solu-
tion in ammonia, 6. Charpy and S. Bonnerot find that pearlite appears
white and ferrite darli, i.e. the appearance is the reverse of that
obtained l^y etching with ordinary reagents, such as nitric or picric
acid. The parts which are darkened are those which receive the first
deposit of copper, even in samples which appear to have received an
almost uniform coating of copper. The selective action of the cupric
reagent is determined mostly by the phosphorous and other elements
in the ferrite, and not by the carbon, as with acid reagents. The
dendritic structure of cast-steel is shown very clearly by this method of
etching, the dendrites appearing white and the remainder of the mass,,
which has solidified later and contains the greater part of the foreign
elements, dark ; and the authors have used it to trace the progressive
deformation of the dendrites during rolling of the steel. The dimen-
sions of the dendrites and their variation with conditions of cooling
were also studied. Variations in size of ingot have little effect on the
size of the fine dendrites formed by contact with the walls of the ingot-
mould ; those which form in the centre of the ingot increase considerably
in size with increase in size of ingot. In ingots of relatively pure steel
and of medium size, variations of 1 to 10 in the relative size of the
dendrites in the peripheral and central portions were observed.

Tungsten-Molybdenum Alloys, f — Alloys of tungsten and molyb-
denum were prepared by Z. Jeffries by mixing the powdered metala
(obtained by reduction of the oxides in hydrogen) in the requisite
amounts, pressing into briquettes and sintering in hydrogen at 1300° C,,.
and then heating just below the fusion temperature (previously deter-
mined approximately) for twelve minutes. After such treatment the
alloys were completely crystalline, and could be rolled or drawn. The
melting-points were determined by a novel electrical method, depending^
on the number of watts consumed in melting a wire in an atmosphere
of hydrogen, the melting-points and fusion-wattage of the pure metals-
being known. The melting-point curve shows that the alloys form a
continuous series of solid solutions. This was confirmed by microscopical
examination of the structure of the alloys. AVhen properly prepared, all
consisted of homogeneous polygonal crystals. The alloys were etched
with a boiling solution of hydrogen peroxide. Examination of etching-
pits in the pure metals showed that they both crystallized in the iso-
metric system, the crystal units being cubes.

* Comptes Eendus, clxv. No. 17 (1917) pp. 536-40 (6 figs.).

t Trans. Amer. Inst. Mining Engineers, No. 115 (1916) pp. 1225-36 (11 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 103

Method for Distinguishing Sulphides from Oxides in Steel.* —
It is shown by G. F. Comstock that light grey inclusions seen in
polished unetched sections of steel do not always indicate manganese
sulphide, as commonly believed. Iron oxide occasionally presents a
similar appearance. In cases of doubt the nature of the inclusions can
be definitely determined by the use of boiling alkaline-sodium picrate,
the reagent used to darken cementite. This reagent attacks sulphide
inclusions, changing the colour from light grey to black, while oxide
inclusions are quite unattacked. Numerous photomicrographs are given
illustrating the use of the reagent. It is made by dissolving 25 grm.
sodium hydroxide in GO-70 c.cm. water, adding 2 grm. picric acid, and
heating till the acid is dissolved, when the volume is made up to
100 c.cm. with watei'. To etch, the solution is brought to boiling, the
specimen immersed, and boiling continued for ten minutes. Then the
specimen is removed, washed, and dried.

Annealing of Bronze.f — An elaborate study has been made by
C. H. Mathewson and P. Davidson of the combined effects of time
and temperature of annealing and of cold-working with regard to the
production of uniform structures and growth of recrystallized grain in
bronzes containing 1 to 8 p.c. tin. The time necessary for the removal
of the cored structure of the solid solution by diffusion is the same
whether the alloys have or have not been cold-worked after casting.
A given grain-size produced by annealing after deformation corre-
sponds to the same degree of diffusion whatever the combination of
time and temperature used in the annealing. Alloys which have been
rendered homogeneous by a preliminary annealing develop a coarser
grain on subsequent cold-working and annealing than alloys which are
similarly treated but receive no preliminary annealing before cold-
working. Numerous photomicrographs are shown in support of these
conclusions.

An Unusual Feature in the Microstructure of Wrought-Iron.t— A

peculiar structure sometimes shown by wrought-irons high in phosphorus
is described by H. S. Rawdon. The ferrite crystals present a mottled
appearance after prolonged etching with an acid reagent such as 5 p.c.
nitric acid in alcohol, which extends in streaks over the surface of the
specimen. This intra-crystalline etch-pattern is quite distinct from the
etching-pits which result from prolonged etching of ordinary wrought-
iron. It is considered to be due to the non-uniform distribution of
dissolved phosphorus in the ferrite, the area constituting the mottled
etch-pattern being relatively high in phosphorus. By using Stead's
cupric chloride reagent the patterns can be more strikingly developed.
The fractures in some wrought-iron articles which had failed in use, and
which showed these features in their structure, ran parallel to the

* Trans. Amer. Inst. Mining Engineers, No. 120 (1916) pp. 2103-10 (17 figs.).
t Int. Zeitschr. Metallographie, viii. (1916) pp. 181-218 (28 figs.).
X Engineering, cv. (1918) pp. 77-9 (18 figs.).

104 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES.

mottled bands, and are considered to have been caused by them owing
to the brittle character of ferrite rich in phosphorus. Attention is
drawn to the slowness of diffusion of phosphorus in ferrite, which
accounts for the persistence of the non-uniform structure during the
heating and rolling operations undergone by the wrought-iron articles
before reaching the finished condition.

105

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

AX ORDmARY MEETING

OF THE Society was held at No. 20 Hanover Square, W., ox
Wednesday, December 19th, 1917, Mr. E. Heron- Allen,
President, in the Chair.

The Minutes of the last jMeeting, having been circulated, were taken
as read, confirmed, and signed as correct bv the President.

Mr. Fendick was elected a Fellow, and the names of four gentlemen
were proposed for Fellowship, to be balloted for at the next Meeting.

Donation. — The President announced the receipt of a model of the
diatom Sun'reUa hifrons, made by the late Mr. John D. Hardy in 1888.
It was very interesting as an early specimen, and had been presented
by Mr. Rousselet, to whom a cordial vote of thanks was unanimously
accorded.

Mr. Martin Duncan exhibited two photomicrographs of bacteria,
which he took in 1896, by dark -ground illumination. Makers always
insisted upon the necessity for using high-power immersion dark-ground
condensers ; but as these were now unobtainable, it would probably
interest many, and particularly medical men, to realize that the ordinary
achromatic condenser could be used if the correct stop was cut oat and
adjusted. Dr. Dallinger, in 1806, suggested the feasibility of these
methods, and the two photomicrographs now shown were obtained in that
way.

Mr. Martin Duncan was thanked for his exhibit.

A paper by Prof. G. S. West, M.A. D.Sc, on "A New Species of
Gom/rosira,'" was read by Mr. Scourfield. Tlie new species was described
as a lime-incrusted alga forming somewhat nodular masses, 4-9 mm.
thick, of a vivid green colour, which h?.d been found by Mr. Scourfield
and Mr. Harris at Weston Mouth, Devon, growing in such a position

106 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

that it received the full force of a stream of water falling about 2 feet.
It proved to be new, and was described as G. Scourfieldii.

Mr. Scourfield then called attention to three specimens of the new
species which he was exhibiting.

Under one microscope was a mounted specimen of a free growth
of this alga, which took place in a Petri dish, in which some little
pieces of the lime-incrusted specimen were placed.

Under another microscope could be seen an edge view of a piece of
the incrusted alga, showing that it grew somewhat spasmodically. A
layer of intense growth, represented by the amount of chlorophyll
in the algal threads, was succeeded by a layer of carbonate of lime
without so much chlorophyll in the threads penetrating it ; then,,
again, there was more chlorophyll in the threads, and so on, causing
a banded appearance. He did not think the alternating bands re-
])resented long seasonal periods, but there was evidently some periodic
difference in the intensity of growth of the alga and the deposit of
lime. The incrusted specimen was not now of the vivid green it wa&
when first collected ; at that time it looked like a piece of polished
malachite.

Under a third microscope a decalcified section of the incrusted
specimen was shown.

Mr. Paulson asked how long Mr. Scourfield had had the alga grow-
ing in a free state. He assumed that it was growing in water con-
taining no great proportion of lime, and it would be interesting to know
whether any difference had been noticed in the growth, or whether the
piece now being shown was exactly like the plant as he got it when
dissolving the lime away.

Mr. Scourfield replied that he thought there might be slight dif-
ferences between the decalcified specimen and that grown freely. The
latter had been growing for a month or so, and in water containing a
good deal of lime, in ordinary tap-water in fact.

The Meeting accorded a vote of thanks to Professor West for hi&
paper.

Prof. W. Bateson, M.A. F.R.S., then gave an address on " Cytology
and Genetics," in which he said that attempts to find regularity in the
distribution of chromosome numbers had generally been unsuccessful ;
but called attention to the recent work of Winge, who, by preparing a
graph of these numbers in plants, had shown that simple multiples of
two and three occur with special frequency, while prime numbers are
rare and exceptional. A survey was given of the phenomena of linkage
between genetic factors as demonstrated in breeding experiments, with
a discussion of Morgan's suggestion that this linkage is due to a linear
arrangement of the linked factors in the same chromosome. Whether
the proposition in its entirety was established or not might be doubtful,
but the factors certainly behaved as if arranged in lines, and, a&
represented by the theory, a great diversity of genetic and cytological
observations relating to the heredity of sex and other characters assumed
an orderly form.

PROCEEDINCxS OF THE SOCIETY. 107

Mr. E. J. Sheppard referred in this connexion to two new fixatives
that had recently been introduced. One of them contained Boyne's
fixative with the addition of chromic acid and urea. In the second there
was a combination of urea with Flemraing's solution, used at different
temperatures. He had employed the first of these, and so far had
found it possessed great power of separation of the chromosomes iu
the synaptic stage ; he had not worked with any material which showed
very few chromosomes, such as hydrophalla. AVith other fixatives, the
chromosomes were found tremendously compacted.

The President, in his usual happy phraseology, proposed a very
cordial vote of thanks to Prof. Bateson for his address, which was carried
by acclamation, and Prof. Bateson replied.

Colonel Clibborn was duly proposed, seconded, and agreed to as
Fellows' Auditor for the current year.

The President announced that the next Meeting wonld be held on
January 16th, 1918, and the next Meeting of the Biological Section on
January 2nd.

The following Objects, etc., were exhibited : —

Mr. D. J, Scourfield : — Specimens of the new species of Gongrosira {Cr.
scourfieldii) described in Prof. West's paper : —

1. Mounted slide of free-growing alga.

2. Lime-incrusted mass of alga, showing banded structure.

3. Decalcified section.

108 PUOCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

AN ORDINARY MEETING

OF THE Society was Held at -20 Hanover Square, W., on
Wednesday, January 16th, 1918, Mr. E. Heron-Allen, F.L.S.
F.Z.S. F.G.S., President, in the Chair.

The Minutes of the previous Meeting, having been circulated, were
taken as read, confirmed, and signed by the President.

Mr. Blood and Mr. David were appointed as Scrutineers of the ballot
for the election of Officers and Council for the ensuing year.

The President announced that the following gentlemen had been
proposed for membership, and would be balloted for at the next Meet-
ing : — Messrs. Adams, Seymour Jones, Ross, and Young,

The President announced that he had received a communication from
the Conjoint Board of Scientific Societies, as the Society's delegate,
asking him to bring it before the Fellows of this body : —

" The Puhlication of Scientific Information.

" rt has been brought to the knowledge of the Executive Committee
that the publications of Scientific and Technical Societies sometimes
include papers containing information which might be of value to the
enemy.

" It is exceedingly difficult to control the transmission to neutral
•countries of publications or of information that might be extracted from
them. The Executive Committee therefore desire to impress upon the
constituent Societies the desirability of minimising the risk, so far as
possible, by postponing till the end of the war, the publication of any
paper containing information which might be of use to the enemy.

" As experience has shown that authors are themselves occasionally
unaware of the use that could be made of their writings for purposes
•connected with the conduct of the war, the Executive Committee is
considering whether any steps could be taken to assist, when desired, in
cases of doubt and difficulty, the Publication Committee of the
Constituent Societies."

That was a matter which only needed to be brought before the
■Society to be acted upon.

He also referred to another matter a propos of the commandeering of
the museums by the various Government departments. He had re-
ceived a communication from Dr. Smith Woodward, of the Natural

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

109

History Museum, and from Sir Edward F. Kenyon, of the British
Museum, asking whether he would net immediately as President of this
Society, and in the name of the Society. He therefore protested against
the proposed commandeering of these buildings in a communication"to
the Prime Minister, which was duly acknowledged, and he now reported
what liad been done.

Mr. D. J. Scourfield read the Report of the Council for 1917, as
follows :—

FELLOWS.

The number of Ordinary Fellows elected and reinstated during the
year 1917 was 15, while 9 died, (5 resigned or were removed. One
Honorary Fellow has been lost by death.

Hon.
Fellows.

Ex-otticio
Fellows.

Ordinary
Fellows.

Corre-
sponding
Fellows.

'I'ntal

January 1, 1917

Enrolled during year ,.

Died

Resigned or removed . .
January 1, 1918

29
0

1
0

28

81
0
0
0

81

396

15

9

6

396

1
0
0
0

1

507
507

The List of Fellows now stands as follows : — 396 Ordinary, 1 Corre-
sponding, 26 Honorary, and 81 Ex-officio, or 507 in all.

JOURNAL.

In the Transactions are recorded nine ori^'inal communications.

The Summary of Current Researches relating to Zoology, Botany^
and Microscopy has been maintained as far as has been practicable under
the circumstances brought about by the war.

The Council takes this opportunity of thanking the Editorial Staff
for its work during the past year.

LIBRARY.

The condition of the labrary continues to improve, and during the
past year greater advantage has been taken by the Fellows of their
privilege in regard to borrowing books from it.

The Society continues to subscribe to Lewis's Circulating Scientifie
Library, and the Council is glad to note that increasing use is being
made of the volumes thus rendered accessible to the Fellows.

INSTRUMENTS AND APPARATUS.

The instruments and apparatus are in excellent condition, and
during 1917, in addition to the New Optical System for the projection

110 PEOCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

of lantern slides, microscopical slides, fresh specimens, and book-plates or
photographs purchased by the Society, the following donations were
received : —
March 21st :—

Stand for the Society's 1917 projection apparatus. Presented
by Mr. J. E. Barnard and Mr. C. F. Hill.
October 17th :—

An old Microscope of the Ellis Aquatic type. Presented bv

Mr. P. E. Ptadley.
A small collection of Accessories. Presented by Mr. Ingpen : —

1. An Immersion Paraboloid Illuminator devised by Dr.

James Edmunds.

2. A Substage Condenser for Oblique Light.

3. An Abbe Diffraction-plate, Diaphragm, and Carrier.

4. The Abbe " aa " Objective used by Professor Abbe in

demonstrating his Diffraction Theory.

CJt^INET.

The work of re-organizing the collection, with a view to weeding out
the useless slides and making the valualtle ones more easily accessible to
Fellows, has been entrusted to Messrs. Earland and Sheppard, and has
already made considerable progress.

The following additions have been made to the Slide Cabinet during
the past year : —

March 21st : — Four slides of Mycetozoa. Presented by Mr. H. J.
Howard.

MEETINGS.

The full number of Ordinary Meetings has been held during the
year, and have, on the whole, been well attended by Fellows and visitors,
despite travelling difficulties and lighting restrictions.

Original communications, probably owing to the fact that Fellows are
Ibecoming more deeply involved in war work, have been less numerous and
voluminous than in 1916, although quite as important.

The Council is pleased to note that the miscellaneous exhibits, dealt
with prior to the evening's " paper," have increased in number and
interest. This is a particularly valuable feature of the Meetings, and one
■which should especially appeal to research workers as affording a means
of discussing observations and testing theories during th6 progress of
their work, and before their main results are ready for publication.

Of the Sectional Meetings, those devoted to Biology have alone
survived the strain of war conditions ; indeed the Biology Section may
be congratulated on a very good Session's work. Eight Meetings have
been held, with an average attendance of 22" 4 — the highest recorded
since the Section was instituted.

CONJOINT BOARD OF SCIENTIFIC SOCIETIES.

An attempt has now been made to correlate the activities of the
various Scientific Societies of Great Britain, and to prevent loss of energy

PKOCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. Ill

through overlapping of work, by means of a Conjoint Board of Scientific
Societies that has been formed under the auspices of the Royal Society
of London. The Royal Microscopical Society having been invited to
nominate to one seat on this Board, the Council commissioned Mr.
E. Heron- Allen to represent its interests during 1917, and' has now
requested him to continue to occupy this important post during the year
1918.

FINANCE.

Owing to various difficulties, it has again proved impossible to prepare
a statement of the Society's financial position in time for the Annual
Meeting. Comment must therefore be reserved for the February
Meeting.

The President announced that the Scrutineers reported the unani-
mous election of the following Fellows to till the various offices : —

President. — Joseph E. Barnard.

Vice-Presidents. — Edward Heron-Allen, F.L.S., F.Z.S., F.G.S.,
M.R.I.A., etc. ; F. Martin Duncan, F.R.P.S. ; Arthur Earland ; Robert
Paulson, F.L.S.

Treasurer.— (^'YviX F. Hill.

Secretaries.- i. W. H. Byre, M.D., M.S., F.R.S. Edin. ; David J.
Scourfield, F.Z.S.

Ordinary Members of Council. — Alfred X. Disney, M.A., B.Sc. ;
R. G. Hebb, M.A., M.D.,>.R.C.P. ; T. H. Hiscott; Benj. Moore, M.A.,
D.Sc. F.R.S. ; J. Milton Off ord; Percy E. Radley ; Edward J. Sheppard ;
A. W. Sheppard ; Charles Singer, M.A., M.D., F.R.C.P. ; Charles D.
Soar, F.L.S. ; Joseph Wilson; B. B. Woodward, F.L.S., F.G.S.

Librarian. — Percy E. Radley.

Curator of Instruments, etc. — Charles Singer, M.A., M.D.

Curator of Slides. — Edwai'd J. Sheppard.

The President then delivered his valedictory Address, in which he
^ave a review of the war-conditions under which the Society had met
since August, 1914, and of such part of the work of the Society as is ripe
for publication in connexion with the war. He gave an analysis of
the work of the Society's Abstractors during the periods 1901-1913
and 1914-1917, and adumbrated a contraction and specialization in the
activities of the Society in the future, in the direction of the technical
optics of the microscope and its application to all branches of industry
and research.

Mr. Blood moved that the President be asked to allow his most
interesting address to be printed in the Journal, and so follow precedent
for similar occasions during many years. No words of his were needed
to emphasize the desirability of that.

Mr. Earland seconded the proposal, and it was carried.

The President said he was very much obliged to the Meeting fortlie
kind way in which his address had l)een taken, and would, of course, be
proud to see it published in the Journal.

112 PKOCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

The President asked the Meeting to record a hearty vote of thanks
to the Honorary Officers of the Society for their sei vices during the past
year.

The resokition was carried by acclamation.

Mr. Wilson gave notice of the following resolution : —

"That this Meeting instructs the Council to take the necessary
action to remove all alien enemy Honorary, Ex-officio, and Ordinary
Fellows from the Society's Roll."— (By-Law 34.)

Mr Hiscott seconded Mr. Wilson's proposal, and pointed out that it
was not proposed to put the resolution for decision on the jDresent
occasion ; according to the By-Laws (7H, Mfi) the resolution would have
to be posted for a period of two months. At the second Meeting, there-
fore, in March, Fellows would have an opportunity of discussing and
voting upon it.

Messrs. Earland, Bruce Capell, Dr. Singer, and Col. Clibborn having
spoken briefly,

The President reminded the Meeting that the subject was not before
it for discussion at the moment.

Mr. Earland proposed the adoption of the Annnal Report of the
Council.

Mr. Blood seconded, and it was carried.

Dr. Eyre reminded Fellows that the Financial Statement had had tO'
be deferred.

The President announced that the next Meeting of the Society
would be held on February 20, and of the Biological Section on
February 6.

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY, 113

AN ORDINARY MEETING

OF THE Society was Held at 20 Hanover Square, W., on
Wednesday, February 20th, 1918, Mr. J. E. Barnard,
President, in the Chair.

The President, before proceeding to the formal business, expressed
liis thanks to the Fellows of the Society for the honour done him in
electing him to the Presidential Chair.

The Minutes of the last Meeting, having been circulated, were
taken as read, confirmed, and signed by the President.

The President directed that ballot should be taken for the four
candidates for Fellowship, and read the nomination papers of Messrs.
Bourke and Mortimer.

The President made sympathetic reference to the death of Miss
Ethel Sargant, F.L.S., F.R.M.S., who was well known to the Fellows as
a botanist of considerable distinction. He proposed, and the meeting
carried, a vote of sincere condolence with the lady's relatives.

Mr. Scourfield read a letter from the son of the well-known micro-
scopist Mr. Henry Van Heurck, of Antwerp, who was at present in'
England, but was unable to continue his studies from lack of necessary
apparatus. He wished to know if any Fellow of the Society could help
him in procuring a modern microscope and a few accessories.

The President remarked that whilst many Fellows had already done
their utmost, as individuals, to further the national interests since the
outl)reak of war an opportunity had now occurred for action by the
Society in its corporate capacity. As a preliminary it was proposed to
prepare a new list of members which should l)e a members' directory,
indicating the branch of work each Fellow was specially interested in.

March Mh, 191S l

Ii4 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

H(j hud ascertaiued from the Venereal Diseases Committee tliat con-
siderable diificulty was experienced in getting certain pathological
material examined, particularly in country places, in some cases owing to
lack of apparatus, and in others owing to lack of technical skill in its
use, since the medical general practitioner was not, of necessity, an expert
microscopist. Fellows of this Society could render the greatest possible
assistance in work which was of great national importance, by advising
the local medical, man all over the country in the use of the microscope
and the dark-ground illuminator, perhaps even setting it up for him.
It would not entail very much time and labour, and probably one or two
sittings would suffice to set mutters in working order.

It had been further suggested to him just before tlie meeting, by a
well-known Fellow, that the Society might issue some kind of certiticate
or guarantee that certain Fellows were competent to assist in this way :
that a mild form of examination might be instituted, to which Fellows
could submit themselves, to enable that guarantee to be given. In this
connexion, it had been proposed to devote the March meeting to the
subject of dark-ground ilkimination, and he was pleased to be able to
announce that Professor Conradi, of South Kensington, had agreed to
deal with the theoretical side of the subject. That gentleman was, of
course, the authority on microscopical optics in this country, and he
would invest the evening with great interest. Especially was that a
pleasant announcement as Professor Conradi had not been among the
Fellows at meetings for a long time. He (the President) would say a
few words on the practical side, and would also try to get the English
makers to send microscopes and dark -ground illuminators. He hoped
that any Fellow who possessed similar apparatus would bring it along.
Invitations would be extended to the memliers of the Venereal Diseases
Connnittee, medical men and others, so as to make that meeting as
representative as possible. If Fellows had any suggestions or criticisms
to offer on this matter, he would be glad to hear them now. There
being no dissentients, he assumed that his propositions were approved.

Mr. Wilson exhibited a Heliozoon {Acantluicyslis) and a Rhizopod
(Lasqueremia) to call attention to the fact of their abundance at this
time of year.

The Society's thanks were accorded to Mr. Wilson.

The President expressed the regret with which the Council heard of
tlie serious illness of Professor Moore, in consequence of which he was
unable to give the demonstration announced for the evening. Though
progressing satisfactorily, he would be unable to attend for some weeks.
His contril)ution was, therefore, deferred, and Fellows would look forward
with pleasure to it at no very distant date.

PROCEEDINGS OF THE S0CIP:TV. 115

Col. H. E. Rawson, C.B., R.E.,F.L.S., who had arranged an exhibit
of mounted specimens to ilkistrate some of the points dealt with in
Professor Moore's communication, was also unable to be present. His
notes, however, were read by Mr. Scourfield, and from them it appeared
that the specimens were drawn chiefly from Tropseolum majus, but they
were typical of the responses made by several other species to the action
of sunlight. The changes of colour and structure were produced by a
system of selective screening under an English sun — full sun l)eing
screened from the plant at selected intervals of daylight, while paying-
due attention to the background. The screens might be at a distance
of thirty feet and more. All the colouring-matters of T. majm were
affected, and analysis of the observations of the past thirteen years
justified the statement that changes of colour and structure were pro-
duced at different altitudes of the sun. Low sun of the early morning
fostered the yellow colouring-matter, and the highest sun of mid-day
the violets, blues, and purples, while middle sun stimulated the reds.
Thus by giving a self -crimson form a maximum of low sun the flowers
had been changed to yellow, with only fine red honey-guides showing in
tlie posterior petals. Such changes reappeared in the plants raised from
the seed if similarly screened. In this way a new purple form was
obtained from other red and yellow forms which now came true in the
open garden. The colour of the foliage also changed, as well as the lo])ing
of the leaves. The scent of the flowers varied with the colour. When
individual branches of the same plant were differently screened and the
.seed allowed to fall and sow itself, two new forms appeared which were
well known to gardeners, but had not been previously seen in these
experiments, suggesting that " sports " were the response of a plant to
peculiar screening of a selective character. While plants were being
screened to obtain new colours, changes of structure appeared, which
also bedame identified with low, middle, and high sun, and could be
repeated at will. Flowers greW' with six, seven, and eight petals instead
of the normal five, and their shapes were altered. The spiirs were
formed in a way which is stated to be unique, for they extend a petal
instead of a sepal, and the number was increased to four. Experience
soon enabled such extra spurs to be reproduced at will, together witli
the changes in the number and shape of the petals which were cor-
related with them. In addition to spur peloria, other " sports " well
known to botanists appeared, such as proliferation, fsesciation, leaf-
division, synanthy, etc., and were illustrated in the exhibit. They
had been produced repeatedly, and a specimen of T. tuberosum had
just been deposited in the Natural History Museum, South Kensington,
whose leaves were kept entire, or were divided into two, three, four,
or five lobes as pre-arranged. The microscope had been used assidu-
ously throughout these experiments, the growing flowers being arranged
under the objective as the changes were in progress, and some very
simple explanations of certain apparently complex phenomena had been
obtained. Many of the colour-changes depended upon the form, size,
and number of the epidermal papilke, upon the turgidity of the Uving
pells, and tlie concentration of their contents, In the leaf-division of

IK) PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

T. tiihf'rflSiHm n precipitation of the cell-contents was first observed
which blocked the cord conveying the nutrition to the margin. An
investigation by trained microscopists would undoubtedly bring most
valuable information, and would advance our knowledge of the photo-
synthetic action induced in living cells and their products.

Mr. Scourfield and Dr. Rudd Leeson commented upon some of the
points raised by Col, Rawson,

Mr. F. I. G. Rawlins made a short communication on the Techni([ue
of the Vertical Illuminator, in which he pointed out that from experience
in metallography it had been found unnecessary to use objectives in
special short mounts with the vertical illuminator up to and including
^}th powers, provided the objectives were corrected for work on un-
covered objects. Obviously, this was an advantage in war time, when
specially mounted lenses were unobtainable. It was quite possible to use
the illuminator diaphragmed down to its smallest aperture, and so
increase the definition. An illuminant such as the electric arc, giving
light of short wave-lengths of considerable energy within the visible
spectrum, was preferable for this work. Great import<ince was attached
to the levelling of specimens, since failure to achieve this threw a large
part of the reflected light outside the tube of the microscope. Level-
ling was best done by pressing the specimen face downwards on to a
piece of plate-glass with a small quantity of plasticine on a common
3 in. by 1 in. slip. The latter was rested on the two edges of an
accurately cut ring, and held there until the preparation had become
embedded in the plasticine. For preserving metal specimens, a thin
coating of a concentrated solution of gun-cotton in amyl-acetate was
recommended — a method originally due to Professor Le Chatelier — as
a preventive against rust. This was dropped on to the surface, and
the section tinted until 'the drop found its own level, and set quite
evenly to a thin layer, sufficiently transparent for use with a J.th objec-
tive. The varnish must not be applied with a brush, or ridges resulted
which gave brilliant interference colours when viewed under the micro-
scope, . In any case it was important to line the inside of the tube
with black velvet (such as was done in microphotography), to lessen
the reflection as the light returned from the specimen to the observer,
and in the cover-glass pattern illuminator to obviate the flare caused
by that portion of the light which did not suffer reflection at the surface
of the glass disc of the illuminator, but which penetrated the glass and
struck the opposite wall of the tube.

Fellows were referred to a paper in the " Philosophical Magazine "
for November, 1917, for employment of the vertical illuminator for
biological work, where Lord Rayleigh dealt with the optical properties
of collodion films (suggesting a possible analogy with a cover-glass).

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 117

Perhaps, also, a microscope such as Swift's " Arsenal," with tilting-stage,
mii^-ht assist in securinc;; a level field of view. These two suggestions,
iiowever, had not been tested by the author, but are given for what they
might be worth.

The President, in inviting discussion on the communication, said
this was a subject which the Society had need to have brought before
it. Mr. Rawlins had given enough openings, and he hoped some
Fellows would discuss it.

Mr. Blood asked how Mr. Rawlins secured absolute uniformity and
eveimess of the layer of collodion or gun-cotton. Also, was it thick
enough to give a cover-glass effect, and necessitate the tube-length
correction ? Further, did it give complicated reflections between the
upper and lower surface ?

Mr. Rheinberg said that recently he had occasion to measure up some
films of collodi>on in other solvents which acted similarly to amyl-acetate.
They were stripped off the glass and were found to be about ^trVfftli of
an inch. He thought it might be possible to get amyl-acetate or
collodion almost as thin as that.

Dr. Leeson asked whether ordinary thin balsam would not do as
well.

Mr. Scourfield said he had obtained striking effects with the vertical
illuminator on living organisms. But there was the difficulty of reflec-
tions from the cover-glass, and some internal reflections from the
objective, which produced haze and rendered observation of the speci-
mens difficult. If that difficulty could be overcome, there would be a
great field for biologists working with the vertical illuminator.

The President said the balsam would take a long time to dry, and
there were dust possibilities. Evaporation took place quickly with amyl-
acetate, and the film was more or less homogeneous. It was impossible
that any amyl-acetate film could dry to anything like the thickness of a
cover-glass. A 5 p.c. solution put on of appreciable thickness would
dry down to very thin dimensions. He would have liked to hear
Mr. Rawlins say something about the relative advantages and disad-
vantages of the type of vertical illuminator in which the prism was
used, as compared with that employing a cover-glass, or a mica film.
He considered that the difference in efifect was, that with the prism
illuminator one did not get the illumination truly normal to the surface,
and one was only using half -aperture of the objective ; while with the
other type there was the possibility of aberrations induced owing to
irregularities of the cover-glass, unless it were an optically-worked one.
He knew that practical metallurgists varied in their opinion as to the
relative. advantages of these two types. The object of covering with
celluloid was not clear to him. If it was simply to prevent tfirnishing,
the thinnest form would do, but if it was to take the place of a cover-

118 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

glass, he did not see why the thin cover-glass, cemented on with Canada
balsam would not be better, as the irregularity of surface would not
obtain.

Mr. Rawlins replied that his method was to take the section to be
varnished, with an old photographic plate, and on to that he put a blob
of plasticine, and set up the metal specimen. Usually it had a jagged
under-surface, and stuck readily to the plasticine. He then poured the
solution on to the polished surface. Observation was kept of any spot
at which there was a tendency for it to settle. The plate was tilted
backwards and forwards until the liquid settled in the centre. In thirty
minutes, especially if placed in a draught, it became quite dry, and free
from laminations or ridges, and penetrable up to l-th leus. The thick-
ness would be up to three-quarters of a cover-glass. If moi'e than one
drop were put to a cover-glass, it would be far too thick, and the
correction would be upset. This method, with ^th lens, did not land him
into any difficulties, and it preserved the specimen for an indefinite time.
There were no other inconvenient reflections. If a blob were allowed
to be in any one place, especially as it was apt to ba gummy at an
angle of something like 57°, it might start plane polarization. At first
he had difficulties because he used a camel-hair brush, which set up
ridges. With a concentrated solution, the preserving effect would not
be so good. He agreed that ordinary thin balsam would probably do
as well. He tried the method he had described because of a recipe he
got from a French photographist. He had, so far, only tried to use the
film as a preservative ; he could see the possibilities of trying it with a
cover-glass.

A hearty vote of thanks was accorded to Mi-, Rawlins for his com-
munication.

A paper by Mr, Ritchie (Acetone as a Solvent for Mounting) was
read in abstract by Mr. Scourfield. On the motion of the President
the Society thanked th» author for his communication.

The President, as required by the By-laws, again read the motion
proposed at a previous meeting by Mr. Wilson, to empower the Council
to remove all alien enemy Fellows from the Society's roll.

The President announced that the hour of the Meeting on March
20th would be 5.30, on account of the uncertainties in the conditions
for an evening Meeting during a bright moon. The alteration seemed
specially desirable as it was hoped the next Meeting, a special one,
would be largely attended,

Proceedings of the society. 119

Mr. Wilson re(|uested that in view of the alteration in the hour of
the Meeting the discussion of his motion might be postponed until the
April Meeting, at the usual hour. In April summer time would be
operative, and the conditions would probably be more favourable for an
evening Meeting than now.

This Avas agreed.

JOUENAL

OF THE

ROYAL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY.

JUNE, 1918.

TEANSACTIONS OF THE SOCIETY.

IV. — Ecport on the Recent Foramiiiifera dredged of the East Coast
of Austmlia. B.M.S. " Bart,'' Station 19 (14 Ilaij, 1895),
Lat. 29° 22' >S'., Long. 153° 51' B., 465 fathoms. Pteropod
Ooze — continued.

By Henky Sidebottom.
[Communicated hij E. Heron-Allen and A. Earland.]
. (Eead October 17, 1917.)
Plates III-V.

Sub-family Bulimininse.
Biilimina d'Orbigny.

Bulimina pyrula d'Orbigny.

Biilimina caudigera d'Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., voL vii, p. 270, No. 16,

Modele No. 68.
B. pyrula d'Orbignv, 1846, For. Foss. Vien, p. 184, pi. xi, figs. 9, 10.
B. pyrula Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 399, pi. 1, figs. 7-10.

Fair examples are present.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE III.

FIGS.

l-i,— Bulimina ovata d'Orbigny. Figs. 1-3, lateral views, x 25.
i-Q.—B. declivis Reuss. Figs. 4-6, lateral views, x 50.

7.— J3. subcylindrica Brady. Fig. 7, lateral view, x 50.
8-10. — B. elegantissima d'Orbigny, var. fusiforniis uov. var. Figs. 8-10, lateral
views, x 50.
11.— B. elegantissima d'Orbigny, var. apiculata Chapman. Fig. 11, lateral
views, x 50. [contimied.

K

122 Transactions of the Society.

Bulimina ovata d'Orbigny. (PI. Ill, figs. 1-3.)

Btdimina ovata d'Orbignv, 1846, For. Foss. Vien, p. 185, pi. xi, figs. 13, 14.
B. ovata Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 400, pi. 1, fig. 13.

The specimens are very large and in excellent condition. I
believe that both the forms I have ligured belong to the same
species, the one (fig. 1) being in the megalospheric, the other
(figs. 2, 3) in the microspheric condition.

Btdimina subteres Brady.

Bulimina presli, var. elegantissima, Parker and Jones, 1865, Phil. Trans.

vol. civ, p. 374, pi. XV, figs. 12-17.
B. subteres Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 403, pi. 1, figs. 17, 18.

The tests agree with the " Challenger " figures of this species.

Bulimina declivis Eeuss. (PI. Ill, figs. 4-6.)

Bulimina declivis Eeuss, 1863, Sifczungsb. d. k. Ak. Wiss. Wien, vol. xlviii,

p. 55, pi. vi, fig. 70 ; pi. vii, fig. 71.
B. declivis Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 404, pi. 1, fig. 19.

Two found, both of which I have illustrated. Fig. 4 is very
nearly the same as Eeuss's fig. 71.

Bulimina suhcylindrica Brady. (PI. Ill, fig. 7.)

Bulimina suhcylindrica Brady, 1881, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xxi,

N.S., p. 56.
B. suhcylindrica Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 404, pi. 1, fig. 16.
B. suhcylindrica Millett, 1898, etc., Eept. Eec. Foram. Malav Archipelago,

1900, p. 377, pi. ii, fig. 6.

Typical examples occur.

Bulimina elegantissima d'Orbigny.

Bidimina elegantissima d'Orbigny, 1839, Foram. Amer. Merid., p. 51,

pi. vii, figs. 13, 14.
B. elegantissima Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 402, pi. 1, figs. 20-22.

A single small specimen, which I unfortunately flicked off the
slide after examination

EXPLANATION OF PLATE 111.— continued.

FIGS.

12-15. — B. magdalidiforme (Schwager). Figs. 12, 13, two views of the test.
Fig. 14, half section of the test. Fig. 15, section viewed by transmitted
light. X 25.
16. — Virgulina schreibersiana Czjzek. Fig. 16, lateral view, x 50.
17, 18. — Bifarina mackinnonii Millett, var. robusta nov. var. Fig. 17, lateral
view. Pig. 18, edge view, x 50.
19. — Bolivina textilarioides Reuss. Pig. 19, lateral view, x 50.
20, 21. — B. lobata Brady. Fig. 20, lateral view. Fig. 21, oral view, x 75.

22. — Cassidtdina calabra (Seguenza). Fig. 22, ventral view, x 25.
23-25. — Nodosaria radicula (Linne). x 50.

Becent Foraminifera off the East Coast of Australia. 123

Bulimina elegantissima d'Orbignv, var. fusiformis, nov, var.

(PL III, figs. 8-10.)

The test is fusiform, opaque and polished. The sutures show
feebly. Five found. The specimens may be compared with
Bulimina pupa, Terquem.

Bulimina elegantissima d'Orbigny, var. apiculata Chapman.

(PL III, fig. 11.)

Bulimina elegantissima d'Orbigny, var. ajnculata Chapman, 1907, Tert.

Foram. Victoria, Australia, pt. i, Journ. Linn. Soc. ZooL, voL xxx,

p. 31, pL iv, fig. 77.
B. elegantissima d'Orbigny, var. ajnculata Chapman, 1915, ZooL Res.

" Endeavour," Nat. Mus. Melbourne, vol. iii, pt. i, p. 18.

Two tests, somewhat more elongated than that figured by
Chapman in the above reference. The basal spine is well developed.
This species occurs also off Pernambuco, " Challenger " Station 120.

Bulimina rostrata Brady,

Bulimina truncana Hanken, 1875, Mittheil, Jahrb. d. k. Ung. geol. Anstalt,

vol. iv, p. 61, pi. vii, fig. 5.
B. rostrata Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 408, pi. li, figs. 14, 15.

The species is well represented.

Bulimina aculeata d'Orbigny.

Bulimina aculeata d'Orbignv, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii, p. 269, No. 7.
B. aculeata, Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 406, pi. li, figs. 7-9.

The examples are rather small.

Bulimina marginata.

Bulimina marginata d' Orbigny 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii, p. 269, No. 4,

pi. xii, figs. 10-12.
B. marginata Brady, 1884, Chall. Piept., p. 405, pi. li, figs. 3-5.

A single, good example.

Bulimina inflata Seguenza.

Bulimina infiata Seguenza, 1862, Atti del' Accad. Gioenia, vol. xviii, Ser. 2,

p. 109, pi. i, fig. 10.
B. infiata Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 406, pi. li, figs. 10-13.

Excellent specimens occur.

Bulimina contraria (Eeuss).

Botalina contraria Reuss, 1851, Zeitschr. d. deutsch. geol. GeselL, vol. iii,

p. 76, pi. V, fig. 37.
Bulimina contraria Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 409, pi. liv, fig. 18.

There are beautiful examples of this very interesting form.

K 2

124 Transactions of the Society.

Bulimina convoluta Williamson.

Bulimina pi(2)oides, var. convoluta Williamson, 1858, Eec. Foram. Gt.

Britain, p. 63, pi. v, figs. 132, 133.
B. convoluta IBrady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 409, pi. cxiii, fig. 6,
B. coilvohita Millett, 1898, etc., Foram. Malay Archipelago, Journ. Roy.

Micr. Soc, 1900, p. 279, pi. ii, fig. 9.

The specimens are small, but typical, and rather more erect than
is usual in this species. The secondary chambers are well de-
veloped. Frequent.

Bulimina Willianisoniana Brady.

BiUimina toilliamsoniana, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 408, pi. li, figs. 16, 17.

B. luilliamsoniana Millett, 1898, etc., Foram. Malay Archipelago, Journ. Roy.

Micr. Soc, 1900, p. 279, pi. ii, fig. 8.
B. williamsoniana (Buliminoides) Cushman, 1910, etc., Foram. N. Pacific

Ocean, 1911, U.S. Nat. Mus. Bull. 71, pt. ii, Textulariidie, p. 90,

fig. 144.

Two very short tests occur.

Bulimina magdalidiforme (Schwager). (PI. Ill, figs. 12-15.)

Ataxopliragmium magdalidiforme Schwager, 1866, Geol., ii, p. 194,
pi. iv, fig. 1,

I was quite unable to decide to which genus the specimens
should be allocated, and therefore submitted examples and sections
to Mr. Earland, who is of opinion that they are the same as
Schwager's species. After reading a translation of Schwager's
description and remarks I am in agreement with Mr. Earland.

Test rough, subcylindrical or ovate, superior end rounded off,
inferior end tapering to a blunt point. Colour, a light yellowish
grey.

In the following remarks the quotations are from Mr. Earland's
letter to me: "The walls are built up of fine calcareous and
siliceous mud on a basis of calcareous cement." The sutural lines
do not show on the surface of the test owing to a " certain amount
of overlapping external shell deposit masking the sutural lines."
In the section the sutural lines can be seen between the later
chambers. The- aperture in fig. 12 differs from the type-form
(which is comma-shaped and erect), and is arched and liorizontal,
and situated as shown. In some of the tests it is more or less in-
definite and depressed. Nine occur.

This is a very curious and abnormal form differing widely in
structure from any of the associated species of Bulimina. It does
not appear to have been recorded since its discovery by Schwager
in the Tertiary of the Nicobar Islands, and a further investigation of
its structure may necessitate its removal to a new genus.

JOURN. R. MICR. SOC. 1918. Pl. III.
2 3 4

12

13

-^

14

I

H. Sidebottom, del. ad. nat.

Adlard & Son & West Newman, Ltd., Impr.

Recent Foraminifera off the East Coast of Atistra.lia. 125

Pleurosfomella Eeuss.

Pleurostomella alternans Schwager.

PleurostomelJa alternans Schwager, 1866, Novara-Exped. geoL Theil, vol. ii,

p. 238, pi. vi, figs. 79, 80.
P. alternans Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 412, pi. li, figs. 22, 23.

A solitary, immature specimen.

Virgulina d'Orbigny.

Virgulina schreibersiana Czjzek, (PL III, fig. 16.)

Virgulina schreibersiana Czjzek, 1848, Haidinger's Naturwiss. Abhandl.,

vol. ii, p. 147, pi. xiii, figs. 18-21.
V. schreibersiana Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 414, pi. lii, figs. 1-3,

This variable species is only represented by a long, islender,
compressed form. The chambers are upright, slightly inflated, and
textulariau throughout the entire length of the test. The basal
chamber is armed with a long stout spine. The orifice is com-
pressed. Six occur.

Virgulina suhsquamosa Egger.

Virgulina suhsquamosa Egger, 1857, Neues Jahrb. fiir Min., etc., p. 295,

pi. xii, figs. 19-21.
V. suhsquamosa Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 415, pi. lii, figs. 7-11.

The tests are somewhat similar to the " Challenger" fis;. 10.

"O^

Virgulina squamosa d'Orbigny.

Virgulina squamosa d'Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii, p. 267, No. 1 ;

Modele No. 64.
V. squamosa Millett, 1898, etc., Foram. Malay Archipelago, Journ. Eoy.

Micr. Soc, 1900, p. 281, pi. ii, fig. 14.

The examples agree with Millett's figure in the above reference.

Bifarina Parker and Jones.
Bifarina macMnnonii Millett, var. rohusta, nov. var. (PL III, figs. 17, 18.)

This variety is much more heavily built than the type-form.
The tubercles are large and the virguline cluster of chambers also
are tuberculate. The test is opaque, and all the interstices of the
later chauibers are rough. I have a somewhat similar test from
the "Challenger" Station Xo. 185. Two occur.

Bolivina d'Orbigny.
Bolivina textilarioicles Eeuss. (PL III, fig. 19.)

Bolivina textilarioides Eeuss. 1862, Sitzungsb. d. k. Ak. Wiss. Wien.,

vol. xlvi, p. 81, pi. X, fig. 1.
B. textilarioides Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 419, pi. lii, figs. 23-25.
B. textilarioicles Heron-Allen and Earland, 1908, etc., Eec. and Foss.

Foram. Selsey Bill, Jouru. Eoy. Micr. Soc, 1911, p. 316, pi. 10,

figs. 10-12.

Some of the tests agree fahdy well with Eeuss's figure, and
others with the "Challenger" fig. 23. The longer specimens

126 Transactions of the Society.

appear to be in the microspheric, and the shorter in the megalo-
spheric condition.

Another set is of the same variety as that figured by Heron-
Allen and Earland in the above reference, having the roughened,
granular deposit in the neighbourhood of the sutures referred to by
them.

There are also two large tests which appear to be intermediate
between B. textilarioides and V. texturata Brady. I have illus-
trated one of these (fig. 19).

Bolivina punctata. d'Orbigny.

Bolivina imnctata d'Orbigny, 1839, Foram. Amer. Merid., p. 63, pi. viii,

figs. 10-12.
B. punctata Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 417, pi. lii,fig. 18, 19.

Good examples are present. They are long and narrow.

Bolivina rohusta Brady.

Bolivina rohusta Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 421, pi. liii, figs. 7-9.
B. rohusta Heron-Allen and Earland, 1915, Foram. Kerimba Archipelago,
Zool. Soc, vol. XX, pt. xvii, p. 646.

The type-form is well represented. Most of the tests have the
spine at the base ; in the other cases it has most probably been
broken off.

There are more numerous specimens of what appears to be a
weak form. These are much narrower, and the edges of the test
are rounded off. There is no basal spine. Probably this is one of
the forms referred to by Heron- Allen and Earland in the above
reference.

Bolivina heyrichi Eeuss.
Bolivina heyrichi Eeuss, 1851, Zeitschr. d. deutsch. geol. Gesellsch.,

vol. iii, p. 83, pi. vi, fig. 51.
B. heyrichi Terrigi, 1880, Atti dell' Accad., Pont. ann. xxxiii, p. 198, pi. ii,
fig. 44.

Fair specimens occur.

Bolivina heyrichi, var, alata Seguenza.
Valvulina alata Seguenza, 1862, Atti dell' Accad., Gioenia, ser. 2, vol. xviii,

p. 113, pi. ii, figs, 5, 5a.
Bolivina heyrichi, var. carinata Terrigi, 1880, Atti dell' Acad., Pont.

ann. xxxiii, p. 198, pi. ii, fig. 43-45.
B. hetjrichi, var. alata Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 422, pi. liii, figs. 2-4.

Three fair specimens and two short ones.

Bolivina nohilis Hantken.
Bolivina nohilis Hantken, 1875, Mittheil. Jahrb. d. k. ung. geol. Anstalt,

vol. iv, f). 65, pi. XV, fig. 4.
B. nohilis Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 424, pi. liii, fig. 14, 15.

Two rather feeble specimens.

Recent Foraminifera off the East Coast of Australia. 127

Bolivina hantkeniana Brady.

Bolivina hantJceniana Brady, 1881, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xxi,

N.S.,p. 58.
B. hanfkcniana Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 424, pi. liii, figs. 16-18.

Three rather small tests and a large one were found.

They are of the elongate type. In the case of the large speci-
men the chambers on one side of the alternating series are much
more inflated than on the other.

Bolivina plicata d'Orbigny.

Bolivina plicata, 1839, Foram. Amer. Merid., p. 62, pi. viii, figs. 4-7.
B. plicata Halkyard, 1889, Trans, and Ann. Eept. Manchester Micr. Soc,
p. 65, pi. i, fig. 13.

Four occur, but they are not quite characteristic. Perhaps the
usual markings are concealed through age.

Bolivina tortuosa Brady.

Bolivina ^oriwosa Brady, 1879, etc., Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., 1881, N.S., p. 57.
B. tortuosa Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 420, pi. lii, figs. 31-34.
B. tortuosa Heron-Allen and Earland, 1915, Foram. Kerimba Archipelago,
pt. ii. Trans. Zool. Soc, London, vol. xx, pt. xvii, p. 645.

One typical specimen, and one which is probably identical with
the variation mentioned by Heron- Allen and Earland in the above
reference. As they remark, " the test is covered with raised and
contorted lines of shell-substance." I have also four examples of
this variation from South Australia, so that it appears to be a
definite form.

Bolivina Tcarreriana Brady.

Bolivina Tcarreriana Brady, 1881, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xxi,

N.S., p. 58.
B. karrcriana Brady, Chall. Eept., p. 424, pi. liii, figs. 19-21.

Three typical specimens.

Bolivina lobata Brady. (PI. Ill, figs. 20, 21.)

Bolivina lohata Brady, 1881, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xxi, N.S., p. 58.
B. lohata Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 425, pi. liii, figs. 22, 23.
B. lobata Herou-AUen and Earland, 1915, Foram. Kerimba Archipelago,
pt. ii. Trans. Zool. Soc, vol. xx, pt. xvii, p. 647.

The examples are not so fully developed as the " Challenger "
specimens, being shorter. The aperture is situated in a depression
and is not " a long oval slit contracted at the middle " as stated by
Brady in his description of the species.

Millett, in his Malay Eept., 1898, etc., Journ. Eoy. Micr. Soc,
1900, p. 6, pi. i., fig. 2, figures an example showing a further de-
velopment, under the name Bigenerina fiinbriata. Eight occur.

128 . Transactions of the Society.

Bolivina decussata Brady.

Bolivina decussata Brady, 1881, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xxi, N.S., p. 58.

B. decussata Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 423, pi. liii, figs. 12, 13.

There are excellent specimens of this interesting form, but they
are rough, and the protujjerances are not rounded off smoothly, as
shown in the " Challenger " illustrations.

Mimosina Millett.

Mimosina ecliinata Heron-Allen and Earland.

Mimosina ecliinata Millett, var. Sidehottom, 1904, etc., Eec. Foram. Isl.

Delos, Mem. Manchester Lit. Phil. Soc. 1905, p. 16, pi. iii, fig. 9. ,
M. ecliinata Heron-Allen and Earland, 1915, Foram. Kerimba Archipelago,

pt. ii, Trans. Zool. Soc, London, vol. xx, pt. xvii, p. 651, pi. 1,

figs. 12-18.

A few found. They have all the characteristics of the Delos
specimens, and vary in the same manner in size and shape.

Sub -Family Cassidulininae.

Cassidulina d'Orbigny.

Cassidulina Iwvigata d'Orbigny.

Cassidulina laevigata d'Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii, p. 282,
pi. XV, figs. 4, 5, Modele No. 41.

C. laevigata Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 428, pi. liv, figs. 1-3.

The tests are rather small.

Cassidulina crassa d'Orbigny.

Cassidulina crassa d'Orbigny, 1839, Foram. Amer. Merid., p. 56, pi. vii,

figs. 18-20.
C. crassa Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 429, pi. liv, figs. 4, 5.

Good examples, varying in size.

Cassidulina hradyi Norman.

Cassidulina hradyi (Norman M. S.) Wright, 1880, Proc. Belfast Nat. Field

Club, App., p. 152.
C. hradyi Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 431, pi. liv, figs. 6-10.

A solitary example.

Cassidulina stibglohosa Brady.

Cassidulina suhglobosa Brady, 1879, etc.. Quart. Journ. Sci., 1881,

vol. xxi, N.S., p. 60.
C. suhglobosa Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 430, pi. liv, fig. 17.

Good examples.

Cassidulina calabra (Seguenza). (PL III,, fig. 22.)

Burseolina calabra Seguenza, 1879, Formaz. Terz. Eeggio., p. 138,

pi. xiii, fig. 7.
Cassidulina calabra Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 431, pi. cxiii, fig. 8.

Fine specimens occur. The tests are highly polished, and in
some of the examples the sutural lines can hardly be distinguished.

Recent Foraminifera off the East Coast of Australiu. 129

Elirenhergina Eeuss.

Ehrenhergina serrata Reuss.

Ehrenhergina serrata Reuss, 1849, Denkschr. d. k. Akad. Wiss, Wien.,

vol. i, p. 377, pi. xlviii, fig. 7.
E. serrata Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 434, pi. Iv, figs. 2-7.

There are eight good examples of this interesting form.

Family CHIL0ST0MELLIDJ5.

Cliilostomella Reuss.

Cliilostomella ovoidea Reuss.

Chitostomella ovoidea Reuss, 1849, Denkschr. d. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien.

vol. i, p. 380, pi. xlviii, fig. 12.
C. ovoidea Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 436, pi. Iv, figs. 12-23.

With one exception the tests are narrow.

Seabrookia Brady.

SeabrooJiia. eartandi J. Wright.

Seabrookia eartandi Wright, 1891, Rept. Foram. S.W. Ireland, Proc. Roy.

Irish Acad., p. 477, pi. xx, figs. 6, 7.
S. carlandi Heron-Allen and Earland, 1913, Foram. Clare Island, Ireland,

Proc. Roy. Irish Acad., p. 72, pi. v, figs. 10-12.

This interesting and minute foraminifer is well represented.

Family LAGENID^.

Sub -family Lageninse.

Lagena Walker and Boys.

Note. — AH the Lagenpe found in this material have been
described or referred to in my paper : Eept. Lagense S. W. Pacitic
Ocean, 1913, Journ. Quekett Micr. Soc. Club, ser. 2, vol. xii, 1913,
No.- 73, pp. 161-210, pis. xv-xviii. This station is indicated by
the No. 43 in the localities. In the following list references are
also made to my 1912 work: Lagenie S. W. Pacific, H.M.S.
"Waterwitch," Journ. Quekett Micr. Club, ser. 2 vol. xi, No. 70,
pp. 375-434, pis. xiv-xxi. Most of the specimens have been
transferred to the collection of Lagenre described in the above
papers, and are deposited in the South Kensington Museum under
Mr. Thornhill's name. A few duplicates remain in my hands.

Lagena glohosa (Montagu). Varying in size and shape. — Sidebottom, 1913,

p. 164.
L. gJobosa (Montagu). Single and bilocular form. — Sidebottom, 1913, p. 164.
L. globosa (Montagu), var. emaciata Reuss. — Sidebottom, 1913, p. 165.
L. ajnculata (Reuss). — Sidebottom, 1913, p. 165.
L. ajnculata (Reuss), var. iiiinctulata Sidebottom. — Sidebottom, 1913, p. 165 ;

and 1912, p. 382, pi. xiv, figs. 21-23.

I'^O Transactions of the Society.

L. ovum (Ehrenbnrg).— Sidebottom, 1913, p. 166.

L. boteUiformis Brady.— Sidebottom, 1913, p. 166; and 1912, p. 383, pi. 14»
figs. 24, 25. ^ 'F r

L. Icevis (Montagu). Various forms. — Sidebottom, 1913, p. 166.

L. loivis (Montagu), var. distoma Silvestri. — Sidebottom, 1913, p. 167.

L. elongata (Ehrenberg).— Sidebottom, 1913, p. 167.

L. aspera Reuss.— Sidebottom, 1913, p. 167.

L.' ampulla-distoma Eymer Jones.— Sidebottom, 1913, p. 168.

L. hispida Eeuss.— Sidebottom, 1913, p. 168.

L. striata (d'Orbigny). Various forms.— Sidebottom, 1913, p. 169 : and 1912,

p. 386, pi. XV, iig. 8. •

L. striata (d'Orbigny), var. tortilis Egger.— Sidebottom, 1913, p. 169.
L. lineata (Williamson).— Sidebottom, 1913, p. 170. Costte curved, 1912,

p. 387, pi XV, fig. 15.
L. costuta (Williamson).— Sidebottom, 1913, p. 170 ; and 1912, p. 388, pi. xv,

figs. 16, 19. 1 . F .

L. acuticosta Eeuss. — Sidebottom, 1913, p. 171.

L. hexagona (Williamson). Several forms present.— Sidebottom, 1913.

p. 171.
L. sulcata (Walker and Jacob).— Sidebottom, 1913, p. 172. Apiculate forms

likewise occur.
L. plumigera Brady. — Sidebottom, 1913, p. 173.
L. gracilis Williamson. Various forms.— Sidebottom, 1913, p. 173.
L. semistriata Williamson.— Sidebottom, 1913, p. 174.
L. crenata Parker and Jones, var. — Sidebottom, 1913, p. 174.
L. steUigera Brady, var. eccentrica Sidebottom. Compressed form. —

Sidebottom, 1913, p. 175.
L. striato-jmnctata Parker and Jones. Several forms.— Sidebottom,

1913, p. 175.
L. striato -punctata Parker and Jones, var. spiralis Brady. — Sidebottom.

.1913, p. 176.
I/, foveolata Reuss. Sculpture of the test exceedingly fine. — Sidebottom.

1913, p. 177.
L. foveolata 'RexxsB, var.— Sidebottom, 1913, p. 177 ; and 1912, p. 395,

pi. xvi, figs. 16, 17.
L. lamellata Sidebottom.— Sidebottom, 1913, p. 177.
L. hertwigiana Brady.— Sidebottom, 1913, p. 178.
L. hertivigiana Brady, var. undulata Sidebottom. — Sidebottom, 1913,

p. 178 ; and 1912, p. 397, pi. xvi, figs. 26-28.
L. spttmosa Millett.— Sidebottom, 1913, p. 179.
L. spumosa Millett, var.— Sidebottom, 1913, p. 179; and 1912, p. 398,

pi. xvi, fig. 30.
L. chasteri Millett (var.?).— Sidebottom, 1913, p. 180; and 1912, p. 398,

pi. xvi, figs. 32-34.
L. laevigata (Reuss). Various forms, including Fissurina ohlonga Reuss. —

Sidebottom, 1913, p. 181.
L. Iwvigata (Reuss).— Sidebottom, 1913, p. 181, pi. xvi, fig. 5.
L. acuta (Reuss).— Sidebottom, 1913, p. 182.
L. lucida (Williamson).— Sidebottom, 1913, p. 183.
L. multicosta (Karrer).— Sidebottom, 1913, p. 183.
L. fasciata (Egger).— Sidebottom, 1913, p. 183.
L. staphyllearia (Schvirager).— Sidebottom, 1913, p. 185. '
L. quadrata (Williamson).— Sidebottom, 1913, p. 185.

L. marginata Walker and Boys. Several forms.— Sidebottom, 1913, p, 186.
L. marginata Walker and Boys, var. striolata Sidebottom.— Sidebottom,

1913, p. 188 ; and 1912, p. 408, pi. xviii, figs. 10, 11.
L. marginata-perforata Seguenza.— Sidebottom, 1913, p. 189.
L. wrightiana Brady.— Sidebottom, 1913, p. 189.

Recent Foraminifera off the, East Coast of Australia. 131

L. lagenoides (Williamson). Several forms. — Siclebottom, 1913, p. 190 ; and

1912, p. 411, pi. xviii, fig. 22.

L.formosa Schwager. Several forms. — Siclebottom, 1913, p. 191.

L. orhignyana (Seguenza). Several forms. — Sidebottom, 1913, p. 194.

L. orhignyana (Seguenza), var. lacunata Burrows and Holland. — Sidebottom,

1913, p. 194.

L. orhignyana (Seguenza), var. ioallerianay^xigh.i. — Sidebottom, 1913, p. 195.
L. orhignyana (Seguenza), var. dathrata Brady. — Sidebottom 1913, p. 196.
L. bicarinata (Terquem), var. — Sidebottom, 1913, p. 197, pi. xvii, fig. 19.
L. auriculata Bradv. — Sidebottom, 1913, p. 198 ; and 1912, p. 420, pi. xx,

figs. 4, 7, 8, 13.
L. aurictdata Brady, var. circunicincta Sidebottom. — Sidebottom, 1913,

p. 199,
L. auriculata Brady, var. cJypeata Sidebottom. — Sidebottom, 1913, p. 199.
L. auriculata Brady, var. — Sidebottom, 1913, p. 199, pi. xviii, fig. 6.
L. fimbriata Brady. — Sidebottom, 1913, p. 201.
L. protea Chaster. — Sidebottom, 1913, p. 203.
L. invaginata Sidebottom. — Sidebottom, 1913, p. 204, pi. xviii, fig. 13.

Eighteen occur. I omitted to record the specimens from this station

in the 1913 report.

Sub-family Nodosarinas.
Nodosaria Lamarck.

Nodosaria {Glandulina) laevigata d'Orbigny.

" Cornu Hammonis erectum globosius " Plancus, 1739, Conch. jNIin., p. 16,

pi. ii, fig. 3.
N. (Gl.) htvigata d'Orbignj^ 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii, p. 252, pi. x,

figs. 1-3.
N. (GL) hevigata Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 490, pi. Ixi, figs. 20-22.

One large and three small specimens.

Nodosaria calomorpha Eeuss.

Nodosaria calomorpha Eeuss, 1865, Denkschr. d. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien.,

vol. XXV, p. 129, pi. i, figs. 15-19.
N. calomorpha Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 497, pi. Ixi, figs. 23-27.

Most of the tests are slightly curved, and consist of from three
to five transparent chambers.

Nodosaria radicula (Linne). (PI. Ill, figs. 23-25.)

" Cornu Hammonis erectum " Plancus, 1739, Couch. Min., p. 14, pi. i, fig. 5.
Nodosaria radicula Haensler, 1890, Abhandl. schweiz. pal. Gesell., vol. xvii,

p. 92, pi. xiii, figs. 41-45, 47, 48, 50, and pi. xiv, figs. 3, 4.
N. radicula Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 495, pi. ixi, figs. 28-31.

The specimens are unsatisfactory, the chambers varying very
much, as will be seen from the figures. They appear to be in the
microspheric condition. Fig. 2.3 is not far from Haensler's
illustration of Glandulina lievigata in the above reference, pi. xiii,
fig. 62.

132 Transactions of the Society.

Nodosaria radicula (Linne), dentaline form. (PI. IV, figs. 1-5.)

This form, which I have found at several localities, has puzzled
me for a long time. I have sent specimens to various authorities
and obtained different opinions regarding them. Most of the tests
are transparent, the others slightly clouded. I am treating them
as a dentaline form of N. radicula. Dentalina ohesa Costa, 1856
(Atti. Accad. Pontaniana, vol. vii, fasc. 2, pi. xxvii, fig. 13, not
described) agrees best with my specimens. Excellent examples
occur at Darval Bay, lat. 4° 11' N. ; long. 118° 37' E. ; 315 fms.

Nodosaria simplex Silvestri.

Nodosaria simplex Silvestri, 1872, Nodos. Foss. e Viv. d'ltal., p. 95, pi. xi,

figs. 268-272.
N. simplex Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 496, pi. Ixii.'fig. 4, 5, 6 (?).

A single typical example.

Nodosaria sp. ? (PI. IV, fig. 6.)

The tests are slender. The orifice is phialine in those speci-
mens which have a perfect final chamber. There are no signs of
spines, but the surface of the last two segments is roughened in
several examples. It is possible this may be a nude form of
sagrina virgtda which is often without the uvigerine segments.
Somewhat similar forms are : N. egregia Eranzenaw (Math,
termesz ertesito, 1889. vol. vii, p. 253, pi. 4, fig. 7), and N. annidifera
Oiimbel (Abh. m-pl CI. k-bayer. Ak. Wiss. x. 1868 (1870), p. 614,
pl. i, fig. 21).

Nodosaria pyrula d'Orbigny.

Nodosaria pyrula d'Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii, p. 253, No. 13.
N. pyrula Williamson, 1858, Eec. Foram. Gt. Br., p. 17, i)l. ii, fig. 39.

There are fairly long fragments of well-developed specimens.

EXPLANATION OP PLATE IV.

FIGS.

1-5. — Nodosaria radicula (Linn6), dentaline form, x 50.
6. — Nodosaria sp. (?). x 75.
7. — N. (D) pauperata d'Orbigny. x 25.
8, 9. — N. catcnulata Brady, x 50.
10, 11.— iV. (D) obliquestriata Reuss. Fig. 10 x 25. Fig. 11 x 50.
12, 13. — N. raphanistruni (Liune). x 50.

14, 15. — Frondicularia spathulata Brady. Pig. 14 x 50. Fig. 15 x 75.
16, 17. — F. pacifica sp. n. Fig. 17, oral view, x 50.
18. — F. nitida Terquem, var. x 75.
19. — F. tcnera (Bornemann). x 75.
20-25. — Bhabdogoniu7n carinaitmi ST[). n. Fig. 21, oral view, x 50.
26-31. — Marginulina glabra d'Orbigny. x 50.

JOURN. R. MICR. SOC. 1918. Pl. IV.

20

14"

21

14 i

22

17

<cx>

23

12

18

13

Y^t)

30

24 25

31

H. Sidebottom, del. ad. nat.

Adlard & Son & West Newman, Ltd., Impi'.

Recent Foraminifera off the East Coast of Australia. 133

Nodosaria soluta Eeuss.

Nodosaria (D) soluta Eeuss, 1851, Zeitschr. d. deutsch. geol. Gesellsch.,

vol. iii, p. 60, pi. iii, fig. 4.
N. soluta Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 503, pi. Ixii, figs. 13-16.

Two large fragments, and one of fair size.

Nodosaria inflexa Reiiss.

Nodosaria inflexa Reuss, 1866, Denkschr. d. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien, vol. xxv,

p. 131, pi. ii, fig. 1.
N. inflexa Eeuss, 1870, Sitzungsb. d. k. Ak. Wiss. Wien, vol. Ixii, p. 472,

No. 16 ; Schlicht, 1870, Foram. Pietzpuhl, pi. xxxviii, fig. 3.
N. inflexa Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 498, pi. Ixii, fig. 9.

A single test, very near to the " ChpJlenger" figure.

Nodosaria (D) farcimen (Soldani).

" Orthoceras Farcimen'' Soldani, 1791, Testaceographia, vol. i, pt. ii, p. 98,

pi. cv, fig, 0.
Nodosaria farcimen, Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 498, pi. Ixii, figs. 17, 18.

Two capital examples, similar to the " Challenger " form, fig. 18 ;
also a fragment, consisting of five chambers, which more nearly
resembles Soldani's figure.

Nodosaria (D) communis d'Orbigny.

Nodosaria (D) communis d'Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii, p. 254,

No. 35.
N. communis Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 504, pi. Ixii, figs. 19-22.

The best examples are very near to those figured in the Chall.
Eept., although one or two have a tendency towards N. roemeri.
There are also several slender tests which may be brought under
this heading.

Nodosaria (D) pauperata d'Orbigny. (PL IV, fig. 7.)

Dentalifia pauperata d'Orbigny, 1846, For. Foss. Vien, p. 46, pi. i, figs. 57,

58.
N. pauperata Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 500, woodcuts, fig. 14, a, b, c.

Good examples occur. Several have a tendency towards
N. roemeri in the later chambers. One large test (fig. 7) has the
initial chamber inflated and the shell slightly compressed for a
short distance. I have a similar specimen from the " Challenger "
Station No. 3.

Nodosaria (D) fiUformis d'Orbigny.

•' OrtJioceratia filiformia aut capillaria " Soldani, 1798, Testaceographia,

vol. ii, p. 35, pi. X, fig. e.
Nodosaria fiUformis d'Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii, p. 253, No. 14.
N. (D) fiUformis Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 500, pi. Ixiii, figs. 3-5.

A long example and two shorter ones. They tend towards
N. eonsohrina, var. emaciata Eeuss. The sutures are horizontal.

134 Transactions of the Society.

Nodosaria (D) roemeri Neugeboren.

Dentalina roemeri Neugeboren, 1856, Denkschr. d. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien,

vol. xii, p. 82, pi. ii, figs. 13-17.
Nodosaria roemeri Flint, 1899, Kept. U.S. Nat. Mus. for 1897 (1899), p. 310,

pi. Ivi, fig. 2.
N. (D) roemeri Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 505, pi. Ixiii, fig. 1.

A fine example, agreeing with the " Challenger " illustration ;
and two others not so long, but stouter,

Nodosaria (D) mucronata (Neugeboren).

^' Orthoceras intortum " Soldani, 1791, Testaceographia, vol. i, pt. ii, p. 98,

pi. cv, fig. 5.
Nodosaria (D) obliqua, d'Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii, p. 254,

No. 36, Modele No. 5.
Dentalina viucronata Neugeboren, 1856, Denkschr. d. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien,

vol. xii, p. 83, pi. iii, figs. 8-11.

Two occur, one of which is apiculate.

Nodosaria catenulata Brady. (PI. IV, figs. 8-9.)
Nodosaria catenulata Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 515, pi. Ixiii, figs. 32-34.

Three fragments, two having four chambers.

They are not typical, the chambers being farther apart than is
shown in the " Challenger " illustrations, but the four costae are
present, bridging the depressions between the segments. Fig. 8 is
from the specimen that has the segments most widely separated.
Fig. 9 is more typical.

Nodosaria vertebralis (Batsch).

Nutilus (Orthoceras) vertebralis Batsch, 1791, Conchyl. des Seesandes, p. 3,

No. 6, pi. ii, fig. 6, rt, b.
Nodosaria vertebralis Flint, 1899, Kept. U.S. Nat. Mus. for 1897, p. 312,

pi. Ivii, fig. 5.
N. vertebralis Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 514, pi. Ixiii, fig. 35 ; pi. Ixiv,

figs. 11-14.

Three occur. The final chambers are more or less inflated and
without decoration.

Nodosaria sc'alaris (Batsch).

Nautilus {Ortlioceras) scalaris Batsch, 1791, Conchyl. des Seesandes, No. 4,

pi. ii, fig. 4, a, b.
Nodosaria scalaris Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 510, pi. Ixiii, figs. 28-31 ;
var. pi. Ixiv, figs. 16-19.

Six occur. Only one has three chambers, the rest being in the
bilocular condition. Four have the embryonal chamber smaller
than the one following. Millett, in his Malay Eept. Journ. E.
Micr. Soc, 1902, p. 520, draws attention to the fact that the multi-
locular forms have the embryonal chamber sometimes smaller and
sometimes larger than the next ; and discusses the question as to

Becent Foraminifera off the East Coctst of Australia. 135

the probable relationship of both N. 2J'f'0xima, 0. silvestri, and
N.jimplex Silvestri to N. scalaris Batsch.

Nodosaria rapJiarms (Linne).

" Cornu Hammonis erectum striatum" Plaucus, 1739, Conch. Min., p. 15,

pi. i, fig. 6.
Nautilus raphanus Linne, 1767, Syst. Nat., 12th ed, p. 1164, No. 283.
Nodosaria rajjhanus Jones, Parker and Brady, 1866, Foram. Crag. Pal. Soc,

p. 49, pi. i, figs. 4, 5, 22, 23.
N. ra;plianus Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 512, pi. Ixiv, figs. 6-10.

A single, small specimen, similar to the " Crag " illustration,
fig. 4.

Nodosana liispida d'Orbigny.

** Orthoceratia quasi Msjnda" Soldani, 1798, Testaceographia, vol. ii,

p. 15, pi. ii, fig. P.
Nodosaria hispida Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 507, pi. Ixiii, figs. 10,

11, 12-16.

A single specimen, similar to the " Challenger " illustrations,
pi. Ixiii, figs. 10, 11.

Brady remarks that " it is difficult to say whether they are
arrested individuals of the present species, or belong to one of the
allied forms like N. setosa Schwager (Novara-Exped. geol. Theil,
vol. ii, p. 218, pi. V, fig. 40), to which in some respects they bear
greater resemblance."

Two examples similar to the " Challenger " fig. 12, and five
fragments of tests resembling figs. 14, 15.

Nodosaria (D) obliquestriata Reuss. (PI. IV, figs. 10, 11.)

Dentalina obliquestriata Reuss, 1851, Zeitsch. Deutsch. Geol. Gesell.,

. vol. iii, p. 63, pi. iii, figs. 11, 12.
Dentalina obliquestriata Jones, Parker and Brady, 1866, Foram. Crag.
Pal. Soc, vol. xix, p. 56, pi. i, fig. 19.

This is an interesting variety of N. (D) obliqua. As will be
noticed in the illustration, the obliquity of the strife is lost in the
final chamber.

Two found, of which one is imperfect.

Nodosaria raphanistrum (Linne). (PI. IV, figs. 12, 13.)

Nautilus raphanistrum Linne, 1767, Syst. Nat., 12th ed, p. 1163, No. 282.
Dentalina subarcuata, var. jugosa (piartc) Williamson, 1858, Rec. For.

Gt. Br., p. 20, pi. ii, fig. 44.
Nodosaria raplianistrum Jones, Parker and Brady, 1866, Foram. Crag.

Pal. Soc, p. 50, pi. i, figs. 6-8.

This is a rare form in the recent condition. It is apparently
fragile. Seven fragments occur, five of which have the initial
chamber intact. In some there is a dark band showing just above
the sutures.

136 Transactions of the Society.

LinguUna d'Orbigny.

Lingulina pellucida Sidebottom.

LinguUna j)eZZiictf7« Sidebottom, 1904, etc., Eept. Rec. For. Delos.

Manchester Memoirs, 1907, vol. li, No. 9, p. 4, pi. i, figs. 22-25.
L. ;pclluci(la Heron-Allen and Earland, 1913, Clare Island " Survey, Proc.

Roy. Irish. Acad., pt. 64, Forams., p. 96, pi. viii, fig. 10.
L. i^ellucida Sidebottom, 1910, Rep. Rec. For. Bay of Palermo, Manchester

Memoirs, vol. liv. No. 16, p. 20.
L. pellucida Heron -Allen and Earland, 1916, Foram. South Cornwall,

Journ. Roy. Micr. Soc, p. 47, pi. vii, fig. 4.

Two typical tests, one of which has three chambers. This
species occurs also at Marseilles, and Heron-Allen and Earland
report it at Noss Head in the Moray Firth.

Frondicularia Defrance. (Pi. IV, figs. 14, a, 14, b, 15.) '

Frondicularia spathulata Brady.

Frondicularia spathidata Brady, 1879, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xix,

p. 270, pi. viii, fig. 5.
F. spathulata Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 519, pi. Ixv, fig. 18.
F. spathulata Sidebottom, 1904, etc., Rept. Rec. Foram. Isl. Delos, Mem.

Proc. Manchester, Lit. Phil. Soc, 1907, vol. li. No. 9, p. 5, pl. i, fig. 26.
F. spathulata, 1910, Rept. Rec. For. Bay Palermo, Mem. Proc. Manchester

Lit. Phil. Soc, vol. liv. No. 16, p. 21, pl. ii, fig. 22.

Fig. 14a is somewhat similar to the " Challenger" illustration
of Lingulina carinata, pl. Ixv, fig. 16, but the sutures of the earlier
portion of the test are arched. The initial chamber is inflated, and
the four following chambers are well flattened.

Fig. 15 has a continuous depression running down the centre
of the test similar to the " Palermo " example in the above reference.
Bruckmann (1904, Foram. der litanisch-kurischen Jura, pl. i,
figs. 18, 19) figures specimens with depressions under the name
F. spatidata Terquem, but the curving of the sutures is not the
same as in the example I figure. Besides the above there are
nine other tests, varying in minor details from fig. 14. Most of
these are more compressed.

Frondicularia pacifica, sp. n. (Pl. IV, figs. 16, 17.)

Test compressed, chambers arched, sutures sunk. Initial
chamber circular and inflated. Immediately above the initial
chamber a depression commences, which is continued throughout
the length of the test. The orifice is slightly produced and stellate.
The edges of the test are rounded and lobulate. The chambers, as
they are added, increase rather rapidly in width. The nearest
published figure to this form appears to be F. woodwardi Howchin,
1895, Carb. Foram. Western Australia, p. 197, pl. x, fig. 4 (Eept.
Aus. Ass. Sci., Adelaide, 1893, p. 366); but my specimen chiefly

- Recent Foraminifera off the East Coast of Australia. 137

differs in having the sutures sunk, and the central depression
referred to above. Howchin remarks that his form " somewhat
resembles F. complanata Defrance," and states' in what way it
differs. Mine, I think, is more nearly related to F. spathulata
Brady.

A solitary example.

Frondicularia nitida Terquem, var. (PL IV, fig. 18.)

Frondiculuria nitida Terquem, 1858, Mem. Acad. Imp. de Metz, vol. xxxixi

p. 592, pi. i, fig. 9.
F. nitida Millett, 1898, etc., Foram. Malay Archipelago, Journ. Roy.

Micr. Soc, 1902, p. 525, pi. xi, fig. 19.

This little specimen (PI. IV, fig. 18), is nearer to Millett's example
than to the original. It differs chiefly from Millett's in having the
final chamber neither so large nor so much pointed. Another
example is not quite so regular in outline, and a third is doubtful.

Frondicularia tenera (Bornemann). (PI. IV, fig. 19.)

Lingulina tenera Bornemami, 1854, Lias von Gottingen, p. 38, pi. iii,

fig. 24, a-c.
L. tenera Tate and Blake, 1876, Yorkshire Lias, p. 455, pi. xviii, figs. 15,15a.
Frondicularif, piqya Terquem and Berthelin, 1875, Mem. Soc. Geol. France,

p. 26, pi. iii (xiii) fig. 1, a-o.
F. pupa Terquem, 1883, Cinquieme Mem. Foram. Oolithique, p. 346,

pi. xxxviii, fig. 7a, b.
F. millettii Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 524, woodcut fig. 16, a, h.

There are six tests on the slide, and I have chosen the largest
one for illustration. The mouth is fractured, but it has evidently
been circular. There are five costse on either edge of the test. The
remaining five specimens vary in size and in minor details. One
is in the microspheric condition. I find that the curving of the
sutures is best seen when the light falls directly down the test.

Messrs. Heron-Allen and Earland, in the above reference, state
fully their reasons for placing this varying form under the name
F. tenera Bornemann. I have a similar test from the " Challenger "
St. 185, and also from Cebu, Philippine Islands, 120 fms.

Rhabdogonium Eeuss.

Bhabdogonium tricarinatum (d'Orbigny).

Vaginulina tricarinata d'Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii, p. 258,

No. 4, Modele No. 4.
Bhabdogonium pyramidale Karrer, 1861, Sitzungbr. d. k. Ak. Wiss. Wien,

vol. xvi, p. 19, pi. i, fig. 34.
B. tricarinatum Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 525, pi. Ixvii, figs. 1-3.

Good examples occur, similar to the " Challenger " figures.

L

138 . Transactions of the Society.

Rhabdogonium carinatum, sp, n. (PI. IV, figs. 20-25.)

The test is triangular in cross-section, and the orifice is stellate
and somewhat produced. The chambers are narrow and slightly
embracing, and each successive chamber increases very little in
height. The sutural depressions are arched. Each chamber is
carinate at its angles. Sometimes the carination is continuous.
The tests are transparent, and vary a good deal in outline.
Probably both the megalospheric and microspheric forms are
present.

Ten occur ; one is very much malformed, and two are not cari-
nate ; these latter are probably immature. The specimens appear
to be closely allied to Chapman's BhaMagonium tricarinatum
d'Orbigny, sp., var. acutanguhim Eeuss, var. (Journ. Roy. Micr.
Soc, 1894, p. 159, pi. iv. fig. 8), and may prove to be nothing more
than a local form. I have two examples of this form from the
"Challenger" Station No. 185, Raine Island, one of which is
identical with my fig. 20, and which I submitted to the late Mr
Millett for his opinion. He wrote : " The clear shelled RhaMog-
onium is a splendid specimen, and you must figure it — Chapman
gives something like it from the Gault, he calls it acutangulum, but
1 doubt if yours is that species."

I have also a specimen that I found in material received from
the U.S. Nat. Museum, marked " U.S. steamer ' Albatross,' St. 2150 ;
382 fms., near Old Providence Island."

Fig. 25 is no doubt a young shell, and is somewhat similar
to Pieuss' B. globiferum, Sitz. d. k. Ak. Wiss. Wien., vol xl, 1860,
p. 201, pi. vii, fig. 6, and B. pygmmum, Denkschr. d. k. Ak. Wiss.
Wien, vol. xxv, 1865, p. 138, pi. ii, fig. 32, and B. 2)yg'}n6eum
(Pieuss) Terquem, Ess. Anim. Plage Dunkerque, pt. i, 1875, p, 22,
pi. 1, fig. 8.

Marginulina d'Orbigny.

Marginulina glabra d'Orbigny. (PI. IV, figs. 26-31, and PI. V,

figs. 1 (?), 2, 3.)

Marginulina glabra d'Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii, p. 259, No. 6,

Mcdele, No. 55.
M. ])edtim d'Orbigny, 1846, For. Foss. Vien, p. 68, pi. iii. figs. 13, 14.
M. similis, d'Orbigny, 1846, For. Foss. Vien, p. 69, pi. iii, figs. 15, 16.
M. glabra, Flint, 1899, Eept. U.S. Nat. Mus. for 1897 (1899), p. 313, pi. Ix,

fig. 1.

One hesitates to add to the numerous figures of this species and
its varieties, but the specimens I have figured are interesting as
being recent examples, and I am bringing them all under the
above heading. Other tests are more characteristic of the species.

.Fig. 26 is not far removed from 31. suhcrassa Schwager, 1866,

Recent Foraminifera off the East Coast of Australia. 139

Novara-Exped. Geol., p. 240, pi. vi, fig, 82, and M. glabra Fornasini,

1890, Mem. Ace. So. Bologna, ser. iv, vol. x, p. 470, fig. 29.

Fig. 28 is not far removed from M. similis d'Orbigny, fig. 15
in the above reference.

Figs. 29, 30, 31, 32 (?) are somewhat similar in character to
M. hullata Eeuss, 1845-6, p. 29, pi. xiii, figs. 34-38 ; and to M.
suhbullata Hanken, 1875 (1876), A magy. Kir. foldt. int. evkonyve,
p. 39, pi. iv, figs. 9, 10, and pi. v, fig. 9 ; and M. glabra Terrigi,

1891, Mem. Eeg. Com. Geol. d'ltal. vol. iv, p. 93, pi. iii, fig. 5.
Fig. 1, PI. V may be a malformed test or a " cluster " of Lagena

globosa.

Figs. 2, 3, PI. V. The nearest figures to these that I can find
are Glandulina adunca Costa, 1856, Atti Accad. Pontaniana,
vol. vii, p. 128, pi. xi, fig. 24; Psecadium ovatum Seguenza, 1880,
Atti. E. Ace. Lincei, vol. vi, p. 139, pi. xiii, fig. 8.

A few very small tests occur, which I am also placing under
M. glabra.

Vaginulina d'Orbigny.

VaginuUna leguynen (Linne).

Nautilus legumen Linne, 1788, Syst. Nat., p. 3378, No. 22, ed. xiii.
Vaginulina legumen Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 530, pi. Ixvi, figs. 13-15.

A single, long, narrow specimen.

^ Vaginulina costata (Cornuel). (PI. V, figs. 4, 5.)

Planularia costata Cornuel, 1848, Mem. Soc. Geol. France, Ser. 2a, vol. iii,

p. 253, pi. ii, iigs. 5-8.
Vaginulina jmtens Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 533, pi. Ixvii, figs. 15, 16.
V. costata Silvestri, 1904, Atti della Pont. Ace. Kom. del Nuovi lincei Lincei,

anno Ivii, p. 142, woodcuts 3, a-d.
V. costata Chapraan, 1907, Rec. For. Victoria, p. 130, pi. 9, fig. 10.

The three specimens found agree best, as regards outline, with
Chapman's figure in the above reference. They are in good con-
dition. The sdtures appear to be limbate. The initial chamber is
inflated, but when viewed with the light falling directly down the
test it has the appearance of being grooved (see fig. 4).

Chapman and Silvestri bring V. patens Brady under V. costata
Cornuel, and my examples appear to me to be nearer to theirs than
to Brady's V. patens. In my cabinet I have two specimens from
Eaine Island, which have the sides of the test more nearly parallel
than those of the " Challenger " examples.

Vagulina rheophagica sp. n. (PL V, figs. 6, 7.)

Test elongate, slightly compressed and curved. Each segment
bears four costse, two on either side. The segments appear to be bottle-

L 2

140 Transactions of the Society.

shaped, with rounded base and produced neck. The neck of each
segment is longer than that of the one preceding it. Each segment
is fitted on to the back of the preceding one in such a manner as
to conceal the produced neck of the latter when viewed from the
back of the test. On the lateral sides of the initial chamber there
is a short costa. Sutures oblique and deeply sunk, orifice marginal.
Only one occurs. In some respects the specimen bears a
resemblance to Chapman's Vaginulina neocomiana, Quart. Journ.
Geo. Soc, 1894, p. 711. pi. xxxiv., figs. 10, 11, but the descrip-
tion of his species shows that there are marked differences between
the two forms.

Cristellaria Lamarck.
' Cristellaria crepidula (Fichtel and Moll).

Nautilus crepidtda Fichtel and Moll, 1803, Test. Micr., p. 107, pi. xix,

figs. g-i.
Cristellaria crepidtda d'Orbigny, 1839, Foram. Cuba, p. 64, pi. viii,

figs. 17, 18.
C. crepidula Flint, 1899, Kept. U.S. Nat. Mus. for 1897 (1899), p. 316,

pi. Ixiii, fig. 2.

There are twenty-two tests, which I have brought together
under the above heading. They are small, with the exception of
two or three. Several are typical. One clearly resembles C.
crepidula d'Orbigny in the above reference, but has fewer
chambers. Intermediate forms are present, linking this species to
C. schloenhachi Eeuss, 1862, Sitzungsb. d. k. Ak. Wiss. Wien., vol.
xlvi,-p. 65, pi. vi, figs. 14, 15.

Cristellaria tenuis (Bornemann).

Marginulina tenuis Bornemann, 1855, Zeitschr. d. deutsch. geol. Gesellsch.,

vol. vii, p. 326, pi. xiii, fig. 14.
C. tenuis Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 535, pi. ixvi, figs. 21-23.
C. tenuis Flint, 1899, Kept. U.S. Nat. Mus. for 1897 (1899), p. 315,

pi. Ixi, fig. 2.

A single, excellent example,

Cristellaria latifrons Brady.

Cristellaria latifrons Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 544, pi. Ixviii, fig. 19;
and pi. cxiii, fig. 11.

The two tests found are not typical ; they are more compressed
than the type-form. One has the orifice at the end of a produced
neck, and the other has probably been in the same condition, but
it is fractured. They represent, I think, a weak form of the above
species.

I have typical examples of this rare species from Cebu,
Philippine Islands, 120 fms.

Recent Foraviinifera off the East Coast of Australia. 141

Cristellaria variabilis Reuss. (PL V, fig. 8.)

Cristellaria variabilis Reuss, 1850, Denkschr. d. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien.,

vol. i, p. 369, pi. xlvi, figs. 15, 16.
C. variabilis Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 541, pi. Ixviii, figs. 11-16.
C. variabilis Heron-Allen and Earland, 1916, Foram. West of Scotland,

Trans. Linn. Soc. London, vol. xi, pt. 13, p. 263.

Beautiful specimens occur, both in the young and adult stage.
The carinate variety is similar to the " Challenger " examples.
The non-carinate is elongate and much narrower than the other
variety, also the initial portion is -smaller. This may possibly be
the microspheric form. Twelve of the carinate and nine of the
non-carinate variety were found.

Cristellaria artictdata Reuss.

Robulina ariiadata Reuss, 1863, Sitzungsb. d. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien.,

vol. xlviii, p. 53, ]A. v, fig. 62.
Cristellaria articidata Reuss, 1870, Sitzungsb. d. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien.,

vol. xlviii, p. 483 ; Schlicht, Foram. Pietzpuhl., 1870, pi. xvii, figs. 5-12.
C. articidata Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 547, pi. Ixix, figs. 1-4, 10-12.

One only found, and it is of the wild, growing variety, having
two angular chambers in the linear series. The specimen is small
and carries a small keel as far as the commencement of the
upright chambers. »

Cristellaria acutauricularis (Fichtel and Moll).

" Hamnionioi subrotundce," etc., Soldani, 1879, Testaceographia, vol. i,

pt. i, p. 61, pi. xlix, fig. X.
Nautilus acutauricularis Fichtel and Moll, 1803, Test. Micr., p. 102,

pi. xviii, figs. g-i.
Cristellaria acutauricularis Flint, 1899, Rept. U.S. Nat. Mus., for 1897,

p. 316, pi. Ixiii. fig. 5.

Three occur. The smallest is near to the " Challenger " figure,
the other two are broader and more heavily built.

Cristellaria dentata Karrer(?). (PI. V, fig. 9.)

Cristellaria dentata Karrer, 1867, Sitzungsb. d. k. Ak. Wiss. Wien. ,

vol. Iv, p. 348, pi. i, fig. 1.
C. dentata Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 540, pi. cxiii, fig. 12.

Although my drawing bears a strong likeness to Chapman's
C. tricarinella, 1909, Eept. Foram. Sub-antarctic Islands, New
Zealand, p. 343, pi. xvi, fig. 3, it seems to me to be better placed
under C. dentata, with a query against it. The test, however, is
keelless, and may be an immature specimen. Except in the
matter of the keel, it agrees almost perfectly with Brady's
" Challenger " figure of C. dentata. The test is not flattened as in
G. tricarinella, and when placed alongside of the many fine
specimens I possess of the " Challenger " form of C. tricarinella, it
can be seen at once that it differs from them in many respects.

142 Transactions of the Society.

Cristellaria echinata (d'Orbigny).

" Nautili echinati sive Papillosi, d circumradiati " Soldani, 1780,
Saggio Oritt., p. 98, pi. i, fig. 6. ; 1789, Testaceographia, vol. i, pt. i,
p. 65, pi. lix, figs, qq, rr.

Cristellaria ecJiinata Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 554, pi. Ixxi, figs. 1-3.

One small example in poor condition.

Cristellaria convergens Bornemann.

Cristellaria convergens Bornemann, 1855, Zeitschr. d. deutsch. geol.

Gesellsch., vol. vii, p. 327, pl. xiii, figs. 16, 17.
C. convergens Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 546, pl. Ixix, figs. 6, 7.

One specimen is typical, and the other has a tendency towards
C. gibha d'Orbigny.

Cristellaria rotnlata (Lamarck).

Lenticulites rotulata Lamarck, 1804, Ann. Mus., vol. v, p. 188, No. 3 ; and

1806, vol. viii, pl. Ixii, fig. 11.
Cristellaria rotulata Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 547, pl. Ixix, fig. 13.

A few occur. They are rather stoutly built.

Cristellaria cultrata (Montfort).

Bohulus cultratus Montfort, 1808, Conchyl. System, vol. i, p. 214, 54^ genre.
Cristellaria cultrata. Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 550, pl. Ixx, figs. 4-8.

Excellent examples occur. A few have a tendency towards
C. orbicularis (d'Orbigny).

There is one magniticent specimen, measuring about three-
sixteenths of an inch in diameter.

Cristellaria orbicularis (d'Orbignyj.

Bohulina orbicularis d'Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii, p. 288, pl. xv,
figs. 8, 9.

B. imperatoria d'Orbigny, 1846, For. Foss. Vien., p. 104, pl. 5, figs. 5, 6.
-Cristellaria orbicularis Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 549, pl. Ixix, fig. 17.

A single example.

Cristellaria crq,ssa d'Orbigny.

Cristellaria crassa d'Orbigny, 1846, For. Foss. Vien., p. 90, pl. iv, figs. 1-3.

C. crassa Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 549, pl. Ixx, fig. 1.

This solitary specimen is not typical, but, judging by the
number of chambers and the thickness of the test, it appears to be
nearer to C. crassa than to C. gibba.

Amphicoryne Schlumberger.
AmpJiicoryne bradyi (Silvestri).

"Intermediate specimen withVaguline commencement and final Nodosarian
chamber," Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., explanation of plate, pl. Ixvi,
fig. 20.

Recent Foraminifera off the East Coast of Australia. 143

Nodosariopsis bradii A. Silvestri, 1902, Atti Accad. Pontif. Nuovi Lincei,

anno Iv, p. 53.
AmpJdcoryne hradyi Millett, 1898, etc., Foram. Malay Archipelago, Journ.

Roy. Micr. Soc, 1903, p. 260, pi. v, fig. 3.

Three typical tests occur. The spines on the final chamber are
conspicuous.

Sub-family Polymorphininae.
Polymorphina d'Orbigny.

Polymorphina amygdaloides (Reuss).

Globulina amygdaloides Reuss, 1851, Zeitschr. deutsch. geol. Gesell, vol. iii,

p. 82, pi. vi, fig. 47.
Polymorphina amygdaloides Reuss, 1855, Sitzungsb. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien,

vol. xviii, p. 250, pi. viii, fig. 84.

One found.

Polymorphina lactea, var. oblonga Williamson.

Polymorphina lactea (W. and J.), var. oblonga Williamson, 1858, Rec.
Foram. Gt. Britain, p. 71, pi. vi, fig. 149.

Four occur, three of which are small.

Polymorphina regina Brady, Parker and Jones.

Polymorphina regina Brady, Parker and Jones, 1870, Trans. Linn. Soc,

vol. xxvii, p. 241, pi. xli, fig. 32.
P: regina Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 571, pi. Ixxiii, figs. 11-13.

A single, small specinien.

Polymorphina acuTuinaia (d'Orbigny). (PL V, figs. 10-11.)

Pyrulina amiminata d'Orbigny, 1840, Mem. Soc. Geol. Fr., vol. iv, p. 43,

pi. iv, figs. 18, 19.
Atractolina, sp. von Schlicht, 186.9, Foram. Septar. Pietzpuhl, p. 70, No. 397,

pi. XXV, figs. 9, 10.
Pyrulina, sp. id. ibid.. No. 422, pi. xxv, fig. 53.
Polymorphina. acuminata. Brady, Parker and Jones, 1870, Trans. Linn. Soc,

vol. xxvii, p. 219, pi. xxxix, fig. 4.

There are eight tests on the slide, and, although not quite
typical, I tliink they may be brought under the above heading.
All are pointed at the base, except one, which happens to be
fractured, and four taper to a point at the upper portion of the
shell. They are, however, not so symmetrically built up as in the
type-form. With two exceptions, the way in which the final
chamber is set on causes the test to be slightly lobsided.

It is possible that this variety may be related to some of the
forms which are more or less pointed at both ends, and figured in
von Schlicht's work. Brady, Parker, and Joues state in the above

144 Tra7%sactions of the Society.

reference that " although it is probable that P. acuminata might
be found wherever P. gutta occurs, it is, so far as our present
knowledge goes, a rare species, and, like its close ally, unknown in
a recent condition." It may be that the former is the microspheric
and the latter the megalospheric form.

Pohjmorphina gutta d'Orbigny. (PL V, fig. 12.)

Polymorpliina (Pyrulina) gutta d'Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii,

p. 267, No. 28, pi. xii, figs. 5, 6, Modele No. 30.
P. gutta Jones, Parker and Brady, 1866, Monogr. Crag. Foram. Pal. Soc,

vol. xix, p. 256, pi. i, figs. 46, 47.
Bostrolina, sp. von Schlicht, 1869, Foram. Septar. Pietzpuhl., p. 72,

Nos. 408, 409, 411, pi. xxvi, figs. 1-6, 10-12.
Pyrulina, sp. id. ibid, Nos. 423, 424, pi. xxv, figs. 55, 56 ; pi. xxvii, figs. 13-15.
Polymorpliina gutta Brady, Parker and Jones, 1870, Trans. Linn. Soc,

vol. xxvii, p. 218, pi. xxxix, fig. 3.

If I am right as regards P. acuminata, most likely I am also
right in putting these forms under P. g^Uta, as Brady, Parker and
Jones speak of their probable association. There are four tests,
two of which are ratber stouter in build than the others.

Polymorpliina, sp. Fistula form.

There is a single specimen of fair size. The inflated, fistulose
chamber is roughly globular and spinous, with a few straight
tubular processes also covered with minute spines. The body of
the test, which is only half revealed, is nearly round in section ;
the chambers are only very slightly inflated, and they also bear
numerous short, fine spines.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE V.

FIGS.

1 (?), 2, 3. — Marginulina glabra d'Orbigny. x 50.
4, 5. — Vagijiulina costata (Cornuel). x 75.

6, 7. — V. rheophagica sp. n. Fig. 6, lateral view. Fig. 7, back view.
8. — Cristella7-ia variabilis Reuss. x 50. Non-carinate form.
9.—C. dentata Karrer (?). x 75.
10, 11. — Polymorpliina acuminata d'Orbigny. x 50.

12.— P. gidta d'Orbigny. x 50.
13, 14. — Polymorphina (?) complcxa Sidebottom. Fig. 14, oral view, x 50.
15, 16. — Dimmphina millettii. Fig. 16 is drawn from a Seycbelles Island
specimen, x 50.
17. — D. lingulinoides Millett. x 75.
18-22. — D. nodosaria d'Orbigny. x 50.

23. — Uvig erina porrecta ^r&dLj, \&r. fimbriata yair. uov. x 75.
24. — Sagrina columellaris Brady, x 50.
25-27. — Globigerina dutertrei d'Orbigny (?) Fig. 25, superior view. Fig. 26,

inferior view. Fig. 27, edge view, x 75.
28, 29. — Spirillina denticulo-granulata Cbapman, var. Fig. 28, superior view .
Fig. 29, inferior view, x 75.

JOURN. R. MICR. SOC. 1918. Pl. Y

11

16

w

23

^

12

17

13

19

25

26

14

27

28

29

10

15

H. Sidebottom, del. ad. nat.

Adlard & Son & West Newman. Ltd., Impr.

"N

Recent Foraminifera off the East Coast of Australia. 145

Pohjmorphina (?) complexa Sidebottom. (PI. V, figs. 13, 14.)

PoJymorphinaC}) cow^jZ^xa Sidebottom, 1904-1909, Rept. Rec. Foram. Isl.

Delos. Mem. Proc. Manchester Lit. Phil. Soc, 1907, vol. 11, No. 9,

p. 16, pi. iv, tigs. 1-9, and p. 16, figs, in text, 3-7.
P. comj^lcxa Sidebottom, 1910, Rept. Rec. Foram. Bay of Palermo, Sicily,

Mem. Proc. Lit. Phil. Soc. Manchester, vol. liv. No. 16, p. 22.
P. com])lexa Heron-Allen and Earland, 1915, Foram. Kerimba Archipelago,

Trans. Zool. Soc. London, vol. xx, pt. xvii, p. 673, pi. li, figs. 1-3.
P. comjilexa Heron- Allen and Earland, 1916, Foram. South Coast, Cornwall,

Journ. Roy. Micr. Soc, p. 48, pi. viii, figs. 5-7.

A solitary specimen, well-developed and typical. It is curious
that single* specimens of this species have been found at various
localities, Heron- Allen and Earland reporting odd examples from
four stations in the Kerimba Archipelago, and from the coast of
Cornwall.

Dimorphina d'Orbigny.
Dimorphina millettii, sp. n. (PI. V, figs. 15, 16.)

Polymorphina lactea, var. ohlonga (Williamson), Millett, 1898, etc., Foram.
Malay Archipelago, Journ. Roy. Micr. Soc, 1903, p. 262, pi. v, fig. 5.

With regard to this form, Millett writes in the above reference
as follows : — " The example figured well represents the normal form
with the exception that it possesses a supplementary chamber of a
Nodosarian character. This is evidently a monstrosity, otherwise
the specimen would have to be assigned to the genus Dimorjphina.
This chamber appears to have nothing in common with the fistu-
lose extraneous growths so frequently found in the Polymorphina
generally, but rare or unknown in the examples from the Malay
Archipelago."

Tliis solitary specimen has the added chamber bent to one side,
as seen in fig. i 5. I have broken the test, but luckily the draw-
ing was made before the accident occurred. Fig. 16 is from a
Seychelles Island specimen.

As I have also found four excellent examples from Mahe
Harbour, Seychelles Islands, 14 fms., it is evident that this form
is not a monstrosity, and must be assigned, ^as Millett said, to the
genus Dimorphina, so I name it after my old friend.

Dimorphina linguUnoides Millett. (PI. V, fig. 17.)

Dimorphina lingiilinoides Millett, 1898, etc., Foram. Malay Archipelago,

Journ. Roy. Micr. Soc, 1903, p. 266, pi. v, fig. 6.
D. (?) lingulinoides Chapman, 1910, Foram. Funifuti, Journ. Linn. Soc,

vol. XXX, p. 414.

Except that the orifice is not quite typical, the specimen agrees
well with Millett's description and figure. I think the aperture is
a short slit, with the central opening slightly oval.

146 Transactions of the Society.

Dimorphina nodosaria d'Orbigny. (PI. V, figs. 18-22.)

Dimorphina nodosaria d'Orbigny, 1846, Foram. Fobs. Vienne, p. 221,
pi. xii, figs. 21, 22.

The tests are in excellent condition, some of them quite trans-
pirent; but even in these latter ones I am not able to indicate in
the drawings all the chambers of the polymorpliine commencement.
The specimens are curved and round in section, and all are in the
microspheric condition. I am of opinion that they are closely
related to, if not identical with, those I have described (and figured)
under Nodosaria radicula, dentaline form. I have excellent
examples of both forms from Darvel Bay, lat. 4° 11" N., long.
118° 37" E., 315 fms. Some of the specimens of the two forms are
practically identical apart from the polymorphine commencement.

TJvigerina d'Orbigny.
Uvigerina j^ygmcea d'Orbigny.

TJvigerina pygrncea d'Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii, p. 269, pi. xii,

figs. 8, 9, Modele No. 67.
TJ. jjygnuea Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 575, pi. Ixxiv, type, figs. 11, 12;

Elongate variety, figs. 13, 14.

Two or three are typical, the rest lying between U. ])yginsea and
U. aculeata.

TJvigerina aculeata d'Orbigny.

TJvigerina aculeata d'Orbigny, 1846, For. Foss. Vien, p. 191, pi. xi, figs.

27, 28.
U. aculeata Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 578, pi. Ixxv, figs. 1, 2.

I liave brought four specimens under this heading, three of
which, however, have a tendency towards U. pygmgex.

TJvigerina asperula Czjzek.

TJvigerina asperula Czjzek, 1848, Haidinger's Naturwiss. Abhandl., vol. ii,.

p. 146, pi. xiii, figs. 14, 15.
TJ. asperula Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 578, pi. Ixxv, figs. 6-8.

Two small examples. The spines are not well developed.

TJvigerina asperula, var. ampullacea Brady.

TJvigerina asperula, var. ampullacea Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 579,

pi. Ixxv, figs. 10, 11.
TJ. asperula, var. ampullacea Flint, 1899, Eept. .U.S. Nat. Mus. for 1897

(1899), p. 320, pi. Ixviii, fig. 5.

Capital examples occur. Some of them are more drawn out
than the "Challenger" specimens, and all have the earlier chambers-
more comT)act.

Recent Foraminifera off the East Coast of Australia. 147

Uvigerina interrupta Brady.

Uvigerina interrupta Brady, 1879, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., N.S., vol. xix,

p. 274, pi. viii, figs. 17, 18.
U. interrupta Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 580, pi. Ixxv, figs. 12-14.

Seven typical tests occur.

Uvigerina angulosa Williamson.

Uvigerina angulosa Williamson, 1858, Rec. Foram. Gt. Britain, p. 67, pi. v,

fig. 40.
U. angulosa Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 576, pi. Ixxiv, figs. 15-18.

The examples are rather short, and the triangular contour of
the tests is not pronounced.

Uvigerina angulosa, var. spinipes Brady.

Uvigerina spinipes Bradv, 1881, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xxi, N.S.,

p. 64. " .

U. angulosa, var. spinipes Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 577, pi. Ixxiv,

figs. 19, 20.

The tests are more elongate and less angular than in the species
previously mentioned, and they occur more frequently.

Uvigerina porrecfa- Brady.

Uvigerina porrecta Bradv, 1879, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xix, N.S.,

p. 274, pi. viii, figs.' 15, 16.
U. porrecta Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 577, pi. Ixxiv, figs. 21-23.

A single example.

Uvigerina porrecta Brady, \a.r. fimhriata, var. nov.
(PI. V, fig. 23.)

Test elongate ; earlier chambers biserial and compact ; later
chambers subspiral, more or. less distinct, interrupted, and alterna-
ting irregularly. Peripheral edges of the chambers angular and
minutely serrate; surface free from markings ; aperture situated
in a produced tubular neck with everted lip.

This is an interesting variation. The test is transparent, and
smaller than the type-form. The chambers are free from surface
decoration.

Eather rare. The species occurs in the Dimor Sea, Java,
50 fms., also rare.

Uvigerina auberiana d'Orbigny, var. glabra ]\I<illett.

Uvigerina auberiana d'Orbigny, var. glabra Millett, 1898, etc., Foram.
Malay Archipelago, Journ. Roy. Micr. Soc. 1903, p. 268, pi. v, figs. 8, 9.

148 Transactions of the Society.

U. auberiana (d'Orbigny), var. glabra Sidebottom, 1904, etc., Rec. Foram.

Isl. Delos, Mem. Proc. Manchester Lit. and Phil. Soc. 1908, p. 2,

pi. i, figs. 5, 6.
U. auberiana (d'Orbigny), var. glabra Sidebottom, 1910, Foram. Bay of

Palermo, id. ibid., p. 23.
U. auberiana, var. glabra Heron-Allen and Earland, 1915, Foram. Kerimba

Archipelago, j)t. ii. Trans. Zool. Soc. London, vol. xx, pt. xvii, p. 674.

Short and long forms are present, the former being more
stoutly built than the latter. Some of the specimens are slightly-
twisted, all are smooth.

Sagrina (d'Orbigny) Parker and Jones.
Sagrina columellaris Brady. (PL V, fig. 24.)

Sagrina columellaris Brady, 1881, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., N.S.,

vol. xxi, p. 64.
S. columellaris Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept.,,p. 581, pi. Ixxv, figs. 15-17.
Sijaliogenerina glabra Schlumberger, 1883, Feuille Jeunes Nat., p. 118,

pi. iii, fig. 1.

Fine specimens ; both of the megalospheric and microspheric
forms are present. Those in the microspheric condition are more
frequent, and have the commencement of the test flattened and
turned to one side. The initial chamber of the megalospheric
form is large, as shown in the figure. The specimens are semi-
transparent and show the syphon.

Sagrina dimorjpha Parker and Jones.

Uvigerina (Sagrina) dimorpha Parker and Jones, 1865, Phil. Trans.,

vol. civ, p. 420, pi. xviii, fig. 18.
Sagrina dimorpha Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 582, pi. Ixxvi, figs. 1-3.

Typical and in good condition.

Sagrina raphanus Parker and Jones.

Uvigerina (Sagrina) raphanus Parker and Jones, 1865, Phil. Trans.,

vol. civ, p. 364, pi. xviii, figs. 16, 17.
Sagrina raphanus Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 585, pi. Ixxv, figs. 21-24.

A single small example occurs.

Sagrina virgula Brady.

Sagrina virgula Brady, 1879, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., N.S., vol. xix, p. 275,

pl. viii, figs. 19-21.
S. virgula Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 588, pl. Ixxvi, figs. 4-10.
S. virgula "S-exon-kWen and Earland, 1915, Foram. Kerimba Archipelago,

pt. ii, Trans. Zool. Soc. London, vol. xx, pt. xvii, p. 676, pl. li, figs. 4, 5.

Some of the specimens are well developed, but the uvigerine
initial chambers are wanting.

Eecent Foraminiftra off the East Coast of Australia. 149

Sub-family Ramulininae.

Bamulina Rupert Jones.

Bamulina glohulifera Bradj.

Bamulina glohulifera Brady, 1879, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xix., N.S.,

p. 272, pi. viii, figs. 32, 33.
B. globtilifcra Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 587, pi. lxxvi,!fig. 22-28.

Three large fragmeuts and a small one.

Family GLOBIGERINID.E.

Globigerina d'Orbigny.

Globigerina bulloides d'Orbigny.

Globigerina bulloides d'Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii,p. 277, No. 1.

Modeles Nos. 17 and 76.
G. bulloides Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 593, pi. Ixxvii, pi. Ixxix, figs. 3-7.

The forms figured in tlie Chall. Eept. (pi. Ixxix, figs. 5-7) are
present. Besides these there are small tests similar to fig. 5, of a
rosy tint. Two other tests have some coarse spines on the earlier
chambers.

Globigerina rubra d'Orbigny.

Globigerina rubra d'Orbigny, 1839, Foram. Cuba, p. 82, pi. iv, figs. 12-14.
G. rubra Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 602, pi. Ixxix, figs. 11-16.

None of the specimens show signs of the colour from which
they take their name.

Globigerina helicina d'Orbigny.

Globigerina helicina d'Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii, p. 277, No. 5.
G. helicina Brady, Chall. Rept., p. 605, pi. Ixxxi, figs. 4, 5.
G. helicina Sidebottom, 1904, etc., Rept. Rec. Foram. Isl. Delos, Mem.
Proc. Manchester Lit. Phil. Soc, 1908, p. 4, pi. i, fig. 9.-

Three capital examples of this unsatisfactory species.

Globigerina dubia Egger,

Globigerina dubia Egger, 1857, Neues Jahrb. fiir Min., p. 281, pi. ix, figs. 7-9.
G. dubia Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 595, pi. Ixxix, fig. 17.

The tests are rather more flattened than the " Challenger "
specimens.

Globigerina sacculifera Brady.

«

Globigerina sacculifera Brady, 1834, Chall. Rept., p. 604, pl. Ixxx, figs.
11-17 ; pl. Ixxxii, fig. 4.

The examples are go 3d.

150 Transactions of the Society.

Glohigerina digitata Brady.

Glohigerina digitata Bradv, 1879, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xix, N.S.,

p. 286.
G. digitata Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 599, pi. Ixxx, figs. 6-10 ; pi. Ixxxii,

figs. 6, 7.

There are a few good examples of this beautiful foi m.

Glohigerina cooiglohata Brady.

■Glohigerina conglohata Brady, 1879, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., N.S., vol. xix,

p. 286.
G. conglohata Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 603, pi. Ixxx, figs. 1-5 ;

pi. Ixxxii, fig. 5.

Tliere are fine specimens of this thick-walled and coarsely
perforated variety.

Glohigerina acquilateralis Brady.

■Glohigerina acquilateralis Biiady, 1879, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., N.S.,

vol. xix, p. 285.
G. acquilateralis Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 605, pi. Ixxx, figs. 18-21.

Only a few specimens of this planospiral form.

Glohigerina triloba Eeuss.

Glohigerina triloba Reuss, 1849-1850, Denkschr. d. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien,

vol. i, p. 374, pi. xlvii, fig. 11.
G. hulloides, var. triloba Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 595, pi. Ixxix,

figs. 1, 2 ; pi. Ixxxi, figs. 2, 3.

Occurs occasionally.

Glohigerina inflata d'Orbigny.

Glohigerina inflata d'Orbigny, 1839, Foram. Cuba, p. 134, pi. ii, figs. 7, 9.
G. inflata Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 601, pi. Ixxix, figs. 8-10.

The examples are normal.

Glohigerina dutertrei d'Orbigny,

Glohigerina dutertrei d'Orbigny, 1839, Foram. Cuba, p. 84, jiLiv, figs. 19-21.
G. dutertrei Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 601, pi. Ixxxi, fig. 1.

The tests are not quite typical, the final whorl consisting of
only three or four chambers and the aiched orifice (with one
exception) being sealed up.

Glohigerina dutertrei d'Orbigny (?). (PI. ^, figs. 25-27.)

Test much compressed, transparent, outline lobulated. Five
chambers in final whorl.

I was, and am still, doubtful as to the identification of this
variety. I submitted specimens to A. Earland, who thinks,

Recent Foraminifera off the East Coast of Australia. 151

judging from the aperture, that they are young examples of
G. dutertrei. They differ so much, however, from the specimens
which I have placed under that name that I think it best to put
a query after it. Twelve are on the slide.

Orhulina d'Orbigny.

Orhulina universa d'Orbigny.

Orhulina universa d'Orbigny, 1839, Foram. Cuba, p. 3, pi. i, fig. 1.
0. universa Brady, 1884, Ghall. Kept., p. 608, pi. Ixxviii; pi. Ixxxi,
figs. 8-26 ; pi. Ixxxii, figs. 1-8.

The examples are in good condition and well developed.

Hastigerina Wyville Thomson.

Hastigerina pelagica (d'Orbigny).

Nonionina pelagica d'Orbigny, 1843, Foram. Amer. Merid., p. 27, pi. iii,

figs. 13, 14.
Hastigerina pelagica Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 613, pi. Ixxxiii, figs. 1-8.

Two occur, both bearing short spines.

Pullenia Parker and Jones.

Pullenia, spJutroides (d'Orbigny).

Nonionina sjihwroides d'Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci, Nat., vol. vii, p. 293,

No. 1, Modele No. 43.
Pullenia sphceroides Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 615, pi. Ixxxiv, figs. 12, 13.

Excellent examples, some of which have five chambers in the

final whorl.

Pullenia quinqueloba Reuss.

Nonionina quinqueloha. Renss, 1851, Zeitschr. d. deutsch. geol. Gesellsch.,

vol. iii, p. 71, pi. V, fig. 31.
Pullenia quinqueloba Bia.dj, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 617, pi. Ixxxiv, figs. 14, 15.

The number of chambers in the final whorl varies in the
different specimens from four to seven.

Pullenia ohliquiloculata Parker and Jones.

Pullenia ohliquiloculata Parker and Jones, 1865, Phil. Trans., vol. civ,

p. 368, pi. xix, fig. 4.
P. ohliquiloculata Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 618, pi. ixxxiv, figs. 16-20.

The tests are typical and normal in size.

SphoRroidina d'Orbigny.

Sphwroidina bulloides d'Orbigny.

Sphmroidina huUoides d'Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii, p. 267, No. 1,

Modele No. 65.
S. huUoides Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 620, pi. Ixxxiv, figs. 1-7.

Bare, but normal.

152 Transactions of the Society.

Sphceroidina dehiscens Parker and Jones.

Splice roidina dehiscens Parker and Jones, 1865, Phil. Trans., vol. clv

p. 369, pi. xix, fig. 5.
S. deJiiscens Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 621, pi. Ixxxiv, figs. 8-11.

Eare, but typical.

Candeina d'Orbigny.

Candeina nitida d'Orbigny.

Candeina nitida d'Orbigny, 1839, Foram. Cuba, p. 108, pl. ii, figs. 27, 28.
C. nitida Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 622, pl. Ixxxii, figs. 13-20.

Fair examples occur.

{To be continued.)

153

A^. — The Royal Microscopical Society during the Great War —

and After.

Presidential Address, 1917-18.
By Edward Heron- Allen, F.L.S., F.G.S., F.Z.S., &c.

{Rtad January 16, 1918.)

On the 17th of June in the year 1914 the Meetings of the Royal
Microscopical Society were suspended as usual for the summer
recess. To all outward seeming the whole world appeared to be
passing through, or, more accurately speaking, to have arrived at a
general condition of ease and peaceful luxury that had hitherto
been unknown in its history. Indeed there were not lacking
serious thinkers who saw, in the unprecedented luxury and com-
petitive hedonism of the times, signs of the Writing on the Wall.
The gradually increasing extravagance and lavish expenditure both
in public and in private life, the apparently ever-decreasing influence
of home and family ties, the almost frenetic pursuit of pleasure at
all costs which was gradually permeating every class of society,
gave cause for anxious thought, and occasion for ominous prophecy
to the more far-seeing student of political and domestic economy.
If a notable extravagance in dress, in amusements, in sports and in
•travel might be taken to be a proof of firmly-founded national
prosperity, we were living in a Golden Age — and if the gold
rang sometimes false, and sometimes stood revealed as a gilding
upon baser metal, the shadow seemed to satisfy the vast majority of
the world's population as fully as a more real substance might have
done.

It was only eleven days later — on the 28th — that, in the
Bosnian capital, Sarajevo, the Archduke Francis Ferdinand, heir to
the throne of Austria-Hungary, and his wife were assassinated. On
that day the stone was flung upon the apparently placid waters
of the world's prosperity, whose resultant ripples were destined to
assume the proportions of a tidal wave that should eventually
fall with shattering force upon the shores of the whole habitable
universe.

We met again on the 21st October, and met as inhabitants of
a world altered indeed, but, though dazed by the events which had
crowded the fateful weeks since the 4th August, few of us, if any,
would have admitted the possibility of the changes which were '
impending — and which are not yet fully developed. So full indeed

M

154 Transactions of the Society.

have been the months, which since then have lengthened into years
of varying struggle, that it is not amiss sometimes to look back
and recapitulate the events of those early days. The Retreat from
Mons was already a thing of the past, and on the 6th September
we had begun to breathe more fully with the commencement of
the Battle of the Marne, followed ])y that of the Aisne on the
16th. But Antwerp had fallen on the 9th October, and the day
before we met (on the 20th) Death had begun to ply his sickle with
renewed fury in the flower of Britain's manhood at Ypres. We
met, it seemed to me at the time, as it were, in an atmosphere of
dream — of nightmare — for the opening acts of the German Army
had fulfilled the promise of their Emperor to " stagger humanity."
It seemed as though, with the savage and sacreligious humour that
has distinguished many of his declarations, he was echoing the
words put by Milton into the mouth of the Arch-Fiend : —

" ' Honour and Empire, with revenge enlarged
By conquering this new world, compels me now
To do what else, though damned, I should abhor.'

So spake the Fiend, and with Necessity,
The Tyrant's plea, excused his devilish deeds." — (IV., 390).

Few of us probably remember to-day that on that 21st October
we were to have held a Conversazione, one of a series that had bidden
fair to go far towards consolidating both the social and scientific
sides of our Society's activity. In the absence of our President,
Dr. Sims Woodhead, I had the honour of presiding over the
Meeting on this occasion, and it fell to me to announce the post-
ponement of that Conversazione — few, if any of us, realized for
how long. It was difficult to adumbrate at that time the extent
to which the necessarily individual efforts of Fellows of the Society
would or could be thrown into the struggle before us. It was for
Dr. "Woodhead to observe in the following January : " We go into
this fight with a magnificent fighting force ; to be efficient that
force must be healthy. It must be well fed, it must be protected
from disease, and its wounded must be well cared for. How much
of the knowledge, the application of which ensures all this, do we
owe to the Microscope ? "

The ensuing three years were destined to be pregnant with
circumstances in which the specialized knowledge of individual
Fellows was to become of vital importance to the nation. I have
no hesitation in saying that every such juncture has produced a
Man. On that first occasion, before the scientific resources of the
Empire had been sorted out, marshalled and organized, the Man
was to the fore, and I look back to the fact with pride, as the first
episode in our Society's grapple with forthcoming events. The
Man was James Wilson Ogilvy, who came to the Council Meeting
with a plan ready cut and dried, the successful execution of which

Presidential Address. 155

has produced results which only those in command of our Camps at
home and abroad can estimate at their enormous value. He had
already formulated his scheme to provide simply expressed
Lectures and Demonstrations in our Camps ; Lectures on Natural
and Physical Science, and on the Medical and Hygienic problems
vvliich confront the soldier at every turn. We do not require to
be reminded to-day of how the Young Men's Christian Association
has " made good " in this War. When the History' of the War
comes to be written the historian will endorse every word of un-
stinted gratitude, admiration and praise — and they have been
neither few nor far between — uttered by our Commanders, from
successive Commanders-in-Chief down to the most harassed and
obscure Company Officer. I wish that time would permit me to
give a full abstract of Ogilvy's reports to the Y.M.C. A. on the work
of his Microscopical Section, and I am proud to think that from
this Chair it was my privilege to help him to set the ball rolling at
our first Meeting during the War.

The first Fellow of the Society to respond to my announcement
was Dr. Eudd Leeson. who with Mr. A. M. Allison as demon-
strator, and J. W. Ogilvy as Chauffeur, paid a visit by motor car to
Frensliara Camp and delivered a lecture on "The Common Fly."
after a journey the disastrous incidents of which fully entitle these
gentlemen to honourable " mention in despatches." From this
beginning, neither small nor unimportant, nor, I may say, devoid of
personal bravery, sprang a series of lectures and demonstrations
which in the following season reached the number of fifty-nine.

These demonstrations were given, not only in and near London,
but far afield. In January 1916 Ogilvy had sixty-five active
microscopists on his list, many of them having surpassed our
allotted span of three score years of age ; later the number was
increased to seventy-nine, of whom only twenty-six had less than
ten attendances to their credit. From October 1916 to May 1917,
188 exhibitions were held, and 89 lectures delivered. This last
Easter twenty-one of Ogilvy's Band visited the Camp on Salisbury
Plain and in three days gave twenty-five Exhibitions and delivered
five lectures. All of his Band are not Fellows of this Society —
we should welcome them all with honour — but I have made it my
business to ascertain that among his workers are twenty-three
Fellows of the Society, who have been responsible for 354 lectures
and demonstrations.

In addition to this there have been as many or more lectures
and demonstrations given by Microscopists who, though not
Fellows of the Society, are such regular attendants at our Meet-
ings that we almost count them as such.

That these demonstrations are of vital value needs no words of
mine to impress. Almost every branch of science has been repre-
sented in their scope, the most important from a military point of

M 2

156 Transactions of the Society.

view being those dealing with medical and hygienic subjects in
general and with venereal diseases in particular. We hear of one
lecture upon Syphilis which was delivered at a camp near London,
with immediately beneficial results, to an audience of between
three and four hundred men. Lately Ogilvy has extended his
activities among the Hostels for Munition Boys at Woolwich and
elsewhere, and there is abundant resultant proof that these
Scourges of the Army to which I have referred flourish almost
entirely by reason of the ignorance of the men and boys with
regard to the nature of the dangers to which they are exposed.

I have no hesitation in saying that even if no other Fellow of
the Society had devoted his time and his knowledge to War work,
the work of James Wilson Ogilvy is in itself a complete answer to
those critics who have expressed the opinion that the Eoyal Micro-
scopical Society " has not risen to the occasion."

So much for the outcome of the first Meeting of the Society
during the War. Whilst that Meeting was in progress it is not
too much to say that the Nation was passing through perhaps the
most anxious moments that it has kuown since the War began.
There seemed no reason to suppose on the 21st October, 1914, that
the Germans would not reach Calais and occupy the northern
French Ports — so imminent indeed was the danger that the inspired
Press was telling us almost daily that these Ports were of no
strategic importance, and that their loss would be, from a military
point of view, a matter of no real moment. But a week later that
terrifying advance was checked — at a terrible cost indeed, but
checked definitely. By the end of the year, however, the War
" had been brought home to us." On the day of our Meeting in
December — the 16th — Hartlepool, Scarborough, and Whitby had
been bombarded by the German Fleet, with a casualty list of 127
killed and 567 wounded. The Air Kaids, with which we are now
familiar, almost to the regrettable verge of contempt, had begun,
tentative at first, but on the day before our January Meeting in
1915 — the 19th — we had our first Zeppelin Raid on the East coast,
and learned the opening words of a lesson destined later to be
bitterly driven home, that the inhabitants of these Lslands could
be murdered from the air with comparative immunity to the
murderers. Earlier in the month the world had been staggered by
the Ileport of the Commission upon the Atrocities committed by
the Germans in Belgium. On the day on which we met in
February 1915 the Submarine Policy of Germany was declared,
and we had experienced six months of a War which our optimists
had declared could not last more than six weeks. I have often
been reminded since then of a phrase of a modern novelist —
R. W. Chambers — who, in describing one of his characters, observed,
" He was a natural-born swindler, not only of other people, but of
himself — in other words, an optimist."

Presidential Address. 157

It was, therefore, with feelings something akin to awe that we
met on the 17th February to hear Dr. Sims Woodhead's Presidential
Address " On some of the Microbiological Problems of the Present
War." That address — reading it to-day in the light of later and
bitter experiences — throws a significant light upon the then really
commencing War -work of many of our most active and prominent
Fellows. The President referred to the preventive inoculation
against enteric fever associated with the name of our Fellow, Sir
Almroth Wright, and dealt with the origin of, and remedies for,
frost-bite, which by that time was looming large in the medical
history of the War. He explained the rapid sterilization of water
by the use of hypochlorous acid as a preventive of typhoid fever,
cholera, and bacillary dysentery, and it is satisfactory to-day to
reflect that some of the problems connected with the life-history
of the meningococcus which he adumbrated have been solved by
the researches of himself and his fellow-labourers.

The War-work of individual Fellows finds no published
expression in our Transactions for that year for two obvious and
unanswerable reasons. In the first place, the work of our Society's
Fellows was primarily of a nature which could not be published
during the War, and in the second, they had no time to write. We
met from month to month, the dates of our Meetings being punc-
tuated by great happenings which have formed landmarks in history.
Air-raids by Zeppelin and Aeroplane had become " incidents of our
job," as King Humbert remarked to his aide-de-camp, when he
narrowly escaped assassination on the Pincian Hill. On the day
of our March Meeting our blockade of Germany began ; in April
our casualties had reached the total of 140,000, and the Govern-
ment had decided only the day before that universal military
service was neither necessary iior desirable. When we met on the
19th of May, the world had been staggered again by a new feature
in warfare — the use of poisonous gas at the front (and, in the
opinion of some, of a considerable amount of " poison gas " at
home), and by the sinking of the " Lusitania." But a few days
before the Meeting we had decided to intern alien enemies in this
country. Three days later Italy joined the Allies, in the midst of
one of the most severe crises of the war.

During the recess of 1915 Bulgaria declared against us. Lord
Selborne told us that the submarine menace " M^as well in hand,"
and by the time we meet on November 17th Serbia was virtually
annihilated. The day of our December Meeting, the 15th, was
marked by the retirement of Sir John French and the assumption
of the command of our armies by Sir Douglas Haig ; and General
Townshend had retired to Ivut-el-Amara.

On January the 19th in 1916 I occupied this Chair for the first
time as President. Gallipoli had been evacuated, and Montenegro
over-run, and I am informed that some of our critics have com-

158 Transactions of the Society.

plained that I did not pronounce for a programme of organized
War-activity by the Society as a Society. Perhaps I may be
allowed to reply after this interval of time that when I took this
Chair I was already fully aware of the tremendous amount of work
which was being done in devoted silence by all our best men ; I
considered, and rightly as I still think, that it was no part of my
duty as your President either to expose the activity of these
workers, or to advertise the efforts of some who were pushing and
pulling in various directions to reap personal advantage and renown
from the turmoil of scientific and commercial activity which flung
them, at intervals, ,to the surface of things. During the whole of
that year, 1916, it will be remembered that our Meetings attained
a numerical as well as a scientific importance, that contrasted
vividly with the immediately antecedent period, and that we met
always with the sensational reflection that our Meetings might be
broken up, in more senses than one, by the attacks of hostile
aircraft. In March the Battle of Verdun had entered upon its
epoch-making course, and lasted through the year with fluctuating
fortunes. When we met in May Kut-el-Amara had fallen ; and
the grave problem, as yet unfortunately unsolved, of Irish dis-
affection and doubtful neutrality liad introduced a new and
disturbing factor. In June the Battle of Jutland had been
fought, Lord Kitchener had perished at sea, and we parted for the
recess, asking ourselves under what circumstances we should meet
again. When we did meet again the Battle of the Somme had
hardened the nation to grimmer effort, and Poumania had joined
the Allies, only, alas ! to meet with disaster before the date of the
November Meeting, by which date (the 15th) we ourselves on the
Ancre, the French at Verdun, and the Italians on the Carso, had
effected results wliich made our hearts beat higher with hope
than had been the case for many a weary month.

In December we met under the Premiership of Mr. Lloyd
George, but the day of our Meeting was punctuated by President
Wilson's Peace Note, to which, by the time we met in January
1917, the Allies, sure of their powers to prevail in and to the end,
had replied with no uncertain voice. By February our conviction
of ultimate triumph had been strengthened by the intervention of
the United States and the contribution of over a thousand millions
of " new money " by the public to the sinews of war. In March
we had begun to reap the fruits of these efforts ; Baghdad had fallen
to our arms, and the German retreat had begun, but we met under
the shadow of the Eussian Revolution — on the 12th — which was
destined to alter all preconceived plans, and sensibly modify the
ultimate aims of the Allies.

The rest is modern history, and requires no recapitulation. Since
that Meeting in March we have seen the entry of the United States
into the War, with all its gigantic possibilities ; our advance in

Presidential Address. 159

Flanders ; the collapse of Eussia ; the clanger of Italy. But we
meet to-day more hardened, more determined to win, to endure, to
suffer, if necessary, than ever before ; more convinced than ever
before of the righteousness of our cause, and of the ultimate
triumph of peaceful civilization, founded by, and reposing upon,
the solidarity and the world-influence and power of the combined
English-speaking race. More than ever to-day we can realize the
fundamental truth expressed by Dr. Sims Woodhead in that
Presidential Address to which I have already referred, when he
said, " We had no alternative, we must fight or be content to see
the weak trampled upon, the free fettered, liberty restricted, and
brute force worshipped as a fetish by a nation hypnotized by the
concentration of a self-conscious gaze upon its own intellectual
achievements and material prosperity, and led, or misled, by a
small, but powerful, if not intellectual, caste of self-seeking and
overbearing Prussian militarists."

Meanwhile, it has become possible for some of the workers
upon War-problems to publish to the world a certain portion of
their results, and the Transactions of the Eoyal Microscopical
Society afford significant evidence of the work that has been done.
At our February Meeting, Dr. Cropper exhibited to the Society the
results of his work upon dysenteric cysts ; in March, Mr. (now Sir)
Kenneth W. Goadby read a paper on the " Bacteriology of Septic
War Wounds " ; in April, Dr. Sort read a remarkable — if contro-
versial— paper on the " Life-history of the Meningococcus." These
are papers, to which m'c have given the considered and deliberate
authority of publication in our Journal, on departments of War-
work that can properly be published during the War. But I ask
you to reflect for a moment upon the other — the as yet unwritten
papers, dealing with even more important War-work for which
Fellows of this Society are responsible. With a view to confut-
ing the ohiter dicta of some of our critics, I have made it my duty
to follow the activities of many of our Fellows, and I deeply regret
that at the present moment of time it is not permissible to do
more than hint — and often not even that — at work to which we
shall be able proudly to look back after the War. We all know
— often to our inconvenience and cost — the widespread and
jealous powers of the Defence of the Realm Act, referred to by its
irreverent critics as " Dora." This prngmatical Force, as well as
the sense of decency and becoming modesty of the most impor-
tant workers, p'-ohibits more than a passing reference to the
real and solid work of the Society during the War, but we may
hope that the day is not far distant when the lips of our working
Fellows will be unsealed, and we shall be enabled to make revela-
tions which must, and will, deeply impress the scientific world.

At this juncture it has seemed to me that it would not be unin-
teresting to make a detailed examination into the effect of the War

160 Transactions of the Society.

upon the main feature of our Journal — the Abstracts of Current
Researches which give to it a world-wide value — and for this pur-
pose I have, with the help of the Assistant Secretary, analyzed the
figures since 1900. The results of this analysis are printed in
extenso as an Appendix to this Address.

From this document of record it will be seen that from the
year 1900, up to and including 1913, the Society published
abstracts of 21,295 papers dealing with researches primarily
dependent upon Microscopic Manipvilation and Technique, an
average of 1,638 in every year, and made up as follows : —

Vertebrata 3019

Invertebrata 5723

Botany 8500

Microscopy 3286

Metallurgy 817

21,295

During the four years affected by the War (though perhaps the
effect of the War sliould not have been seriously felt before 1915)
the Society published abstracts of 3925 papers, an average of 981
in each year, made up as follows : —

Vertebrata 599

Invertebrata 1224"

Botany 1500

Microscopy 391

Metallurgy 211

3925

This gives us a total of 25,220 papers abstracted in our Journal
since the beginning of the Twentieth Century.

This reduction in the number of abstracts since 1913 is, how-
ever, not so significant of "War conditions as would appear at first
sight to be tlie case. In that year it had been decided to reduce
the number of published abstracts for several reasons, principal
among them being that many Societies were by that time publish-
ing abstracts of papers dealing with the microscopical side of the
subjects especially included in the scope of their work. In that
year, 1913, accordingly, the number of abstracts — excluding
Microscopy and Metallurgy — fell to 855, and in 1914 numbered
863. It will therefore be observed by a reference to the Table
that since the beginning of the War such abstracts have only
fallen off on an average by about 20 or 30 per annum, which
speaks well for the activity of our Abstractors, regard being had to
the increased difficulty in obtaining the foreign journals which
afforded a major portion of the material submitted to them. It
will be observed that the most noticeable falling off is in the
number of papers abstracted dealing with pure Microscopy and

Presidential Address. 161

Metallurgy, but this is readily explained by the national, and for
obvious reasons unpublishable, nature of researches in Technical
Optics and Metallurgy and their application during the War,
practically the whole work of labourers in these fields of Science
having been devoted to the solution of problems arising out of the
War itself. We may properly look forward to the publication of a
great body of work in these directions as soon as circumstances
will permit. I think it a matter for sincere self-congratulation
that, in spite of the difficulties to which I have referred and of the
fact that our Abstractors have had unprecedented calls made upon
their time, this feature of our Journal has been maintained at such
a high level of quantitative and qualitative excellence. That the
War should have so little affected the work of the Society in this
respect is, in itself, an answer to those who suggest — from
insufficient knowledge — that we have not "risen to the occasion."
We have not required or condescended to fall back upon one of
the most prominent curses of the War — the War Excuse. A
recent writer has said : — " The war has given a great and grievous
fillip to that most pitiful of all prevarications — the Excuse. . . .
War is the super-excuse, the quibble democratic, the ubi-
quitous ululation of inefficiency. . . . On the face of it,
we might reasonably suppose that it -would be those who are
taking an active part in the War that would be most in need of
its Excuse. Yet the word for them has gone right out of the
Dictionary. They are busy enough to do without it, . . . but
to those who are comfortably sheltered, or comparatively immune
from the dangers and discomforts of these times, the word is a
veritable leaning-post — a loll-wall against which their short-
comings can lounge luxuriously and till all is blue."

I repeat that I very deeply regret that I am unable to give you
precise and concrete details of the War-work of many individual
Fellows of the Society, but this is impossible again for two major
reasons. In the first place, a recital in the shortest form of such
activities would constitute a volume of matter far beyond the
limits of time and space allowable to a Presidential Address. In the
second, however communicative our Fellows may be under normal
social conditions, an enquiry as to the details of the work they are
known to be engaged upon has the instantaneous effect in almost
all cases of inducing a condition akin to aphasia. You might
just as M^ell ask a soldier home on leave why he got the Military
Cross, the Distinguished Service Order, or any other meritorious
decoration ; their answer takes only two forms — in my experience
— it is either " I don't know " or " Just for walking about." It is
therefore only by lucky happening upon a paragraph or article in
some technical or scientific journal that one learns that some
Fellow of the Society has executed some work of supreme national
importance. The day may come when Professor Benjamin Moore

1G2 Transactions of the Society.

will tell us at first hand how, by deliberately poisoning himself
with Trinitrotoluene he acquired the primary stages of the too-
often fatal Toxic Jaundice, which, in the early days, sorely afflicted
our Munition workers, and so discovered not only the method of
its acquirement but the means of its prevention and cure. There
is consequently to-day no reason why those who handle high
explosives should not do so with perfect immunity from any dele-
terious results. The work of Professor Plimmer, our penultimate
President, upon the prevention and cure of Tetanus is at present
(like the origin of Mr. Jeames Yellowplush) wrapped in insoluble
mystery, but the day will come when it will prove a landmark in
prophylactic medicine. There is other work associated with his
name, the value of which is incalculable, but as to the nature of
which it is not even permissible to drop a hint. The new depart-
ment of Technical Optics which has come into being at the
Imperial College of Science under our Fellow, Prof. F, J. Cheshire,
as its first Director, is perhaps one of the most important outcomes
of the War. It has entered upon its labours with every indication
of a robust vitality, and I only regret that the series of Lectures
being delivered before that body by our new President on Micro-
scopic Technique, as well as those being delivered by our sometime
Fellow, Prof. A. E. Conrady, Professor of Optical Design in the
Department, on the Theory of the Microscope, are not being
delivered from this platform, valuable — indeed essential — though
they be in the place that has claimed them. We may hope, how-
ever, that the connexion of our new President with the Depart-
ment will result in a co-ordination of the work of the Department
and of this Society which cannot fail to be of benefit and advantage
to both organizations, and to Science in general. It is a matter of
common knowledge that our new President, Mr. J. E. Barnard,
has practically devoted the whole of his time since 1914 as a
member of the Medical Research Committee to the solution of
optical problems connected with the War, the practical results of
which have contributed in a hitherto unknown degree, because un-
publisliable, to the work of the Ministry of Munitions, and so to the
efficiency of our fighting force. It must be quite unnecessary to
refer to the great stress which War conditions have imposed upon
nearly all of us in connexion with, and in addition to, our ordinary
pre-War occupations — this alone amounts to a vast volume of
essential War- work done by the Society, represented by volunteer
work of all kinds : iu organization, relief work, and that somewhat
shadowy and misdirected sphere of usefulness vaguely described
upon the hoardings as " National Service." These are incidents
of the War which, whilst contributing largely to the efficiency of
the national machine, have necessarily militated against the pro-
gress of the purely scientific work of a large proportion of our
most active Fellows.

Presidential Address, 163

Many of us have become members of the Volunteer Force, and,
speaking from personal experience, those of us who have been
selected to take commissioned rank in that force find that to do our
duty properly to our companies and platoons makes consecutive
and systematic research work an impossibility. Again, in this
connexion, I may be allowed to paraphrase an opening sentence of
Professor Sims Woodhead's Address, and say on my own behalf, that
when I should have been continuing, or perhaps even completing,
certain work on the nature and behaviour of the protoplasmic
bodies of Foraminifera, the results of which I thought might be
placed befoi'e you in the form of a Presidential Address this evening,
I have had to devote much of my time and energy to military
organization, and to that subject which is of paramount importance
in the minds of many of us, the promotion of science teaching in
schools, and the applications of pure and applied science to the
industries both of war and peace in this country. I have felt that
the position to which you elected me two years ago gave to my
efforts in this direction an authority which they would otherwise
have lacked, and that though my own work has had to suffer neglect,
the opportunities which have been afforded me of speaking on all
available occasions, as it were from this cliair, upon this vital matter
should not be, nor have they been, neglected.

Many of us have been at one or other of the Fronts, and though
for the most part our ages have kept us from the fighting line, we
have been able to render significant services to the Army. Among
such I need only mention Dr. Singer, who has spent most of his
time in one of the most " unhealthy " areas of the War. It is
permissible to refer to our late President, now Colonel Sims Wood-
head, who has returned from the charge of a great convalescent
hospital at Tipperary to take up a post of great importance at
Headquarters in London ; and to our late Secretary, Dr. Shillington
Scales, who, in addition to his normal X-ray and electro-thera-
peutical work, has devoloped during the War into the position of
general handy-man, and substitute for medical colleagues called to
the Front from the Cambridge hospitals. I would that it were
politic or possible to speak of the work of Dr. Eyre, Professor
Hewlett, Mr. Denne, Mr. Eheinberg, Mr. Pledge, Colonel Clibborn,
and many others whose modesty, no less than the nature of their
work, forbids me to do more than merely to mention their names,
but whose industry during the War' in various Government Depart-
ments is destined to live in the annals of this pan-clastic struggle
in the cause of freedom, justice, and civilization.

The future is a word which it requires some courage to-day to
pronounce. It is a subject which appears premature — in a new and
ominous acceptation of the term — as never before in our history it
has been premature, to discuss ; but, amid the welter of change and
event, it is not difificuU to distinguish one or two points in

164 Tvansoictions of the Society:

connexion with the future of the Eoyal Microscopical Society which
are ripe for postulation if not for discussion. You have conferred
upon me the honour of nomination, and of rc;-nomination, as your
representative upon the Conjoint Board of Scientific Societies, a
body whose labours constitute, in the opinion of many, perhaps the
most important work of the Royal Society of Great Britain in the
present War, and I have been afforded opportunities of observing in
what direction some of the activities of that body seem most
likely to develop. I think it is clear from the deliberations of the
" Sub-Committee on the Catalogue of Scientific Literature," of which
I have the honour to be a member, that the established Scientific
Societies of this country will be asked to develop a policy of closer
concentration upon the subjects which constitute the primary
reasons — the rationale — of their existence ; and each Society will
be expected to become responsible for the record, the catalogue, and
the index of the literature of its special subject. As far as the
Hoyal Microscopical Society is concerned, the effect of this policy
of concentration will probably be most marked in our Journal. I
have already alluded to the contraction of our spheres of work
dating from the year 1913. I think that that contraction must, in
the future, from the nature of things, become more pronounced.
There is a widely felt, and widely expressed, opinion, that the
work of many Societies, and, consequently the subjects dealt with
in their publications, overlap. In years gone by, when the possession
of a microscope and a knowledge of its technique and application
to scientific research may almost be said to have constituted a
science by itself, tliere was no branch of microscopical research
which was not essentially and of itself a field for our especial
enquiry and record. It is to enunciate the baldest of truisms to
say that those times have changed. The microscope, which has
properly been described as the most important of all optical instru-
ments, and the one for which there is the greatest commercial
demand, has become almost as universal a tool as the scissors ; it
enters into the daily life of all scientific laboratories and of all
trades, from that of the protozoologist to that of the linen-draper.
It becomes, therefore, daily and hourly more apparent that the
results of microscopic manipulation tend to become decentralized,
and that most of the subjects which naturally found a place in
our Journal in the first half-century of its existence, are, at the
present day, amply and fully discussed in the publications of other
Societies founded for the promotion of special — perhaps somewhat
over-specialized — branches of science. The science of Technical
Optics, to which allusion has been made, has become a concrete
entity, of which all that appertains to theoretical microscopy and
microscopic technique is only a branch, but a branch which
possesses an importance equalled by few and excelled by none
other. I cannot help thinking that in the future we shall have to

Fresidential Add i ess. 165

concentrate still farther, and to devote our pages to the record,
catalogue, and index, primarily, of the progress and development of
the instrument itself, the methods of its application to every
branch of science, and to the highly technical problems connected
with tliat progress and development, and with those methods.

I have heard the opinion expressed at the meetings of the
Catalogue Sub-Committee of the Conjoint Board that our records
are not of themselves such as to demand a separate section in the
Catalogue of Scientific Literature : to take a concrete instance,
that the record of a new method of observation such as a develop-
ment in the polarization of rock-sections, or even the remarkable
results of Mr. J. E. Barnard's work in connexion with the exami-
nation of the internal structure of the Foraminifera by means of
the X-rays, should be included in the sections of the Catalogue
devoted to Mineralogy, Zoology, or Palaeontology. With this view
I entirely disagree, and against it I have consistently fought, and
am persistently fightinfr. Workers, in whatever the branch of
science that may be in question, wishing to know what has l^een
done towards the perfection of manipulative methods, must be able
to see at a glance M'hat has been, and what can be, done by a
reference to the index of our Journal. It is idle to suggest that
they must search the indices of every scientific journal to see
whether any technical process has been described which may be
applicable to the problem immediately before them. The proper
— and only — place which is clearly indicated as the storehouse of
the records of such facts is the Journal of the Koyal Microscopical
Society. I agree that a new fact in relation to rock-structure,
discovered by the ability and manipulative skill of a worker
making use of established methods, may properly be relegated to
the Journal of the Mineralogical Society ; but a new fact resulting
from the use of a new optical combination, or method of illumina-
tion, belongs to us, and to our journal, for the reason — if for no
other — that the new process may, and probably will, be applicable
to research in directions very far removed from the study of
minerals.

Not to labour the point— which might indeed be pressed by
object-lessons derived from every branch of research — I return to
the main question, the future of our Journal. I cannot help
thinking that we shall best justify our continued existence as a
separate Scientific Society by sparing no efforts to keep track of,
and to record, the progress of Microscopic Technique, the develop-
ment and improvement of the instrument and of its accessories,
and the expert manipulation of the apparatus already existing, or
destined to be called into existence by the necessities of progressive
enquiry. In a word, upon the Zoological, Biological, and other
branches of our work will rest the foundation of that sense of
social good-fellowship and camaraderie which, in the main, holds

166 Transactions of the Society.

scientific societies together, and upon that foundation will arise the
central fortress within which will be developed and protected,
encouraged and recorded, the methods of microscopical research,
and to which workers in all branches of science will fly when con-
fronted with the technical difficulties inseparable from their work.
The main object of our Journal in the future must, in my opinion,
be the publication of the means, and not of the ends. The ends
will find their proper place for publication in the journals of other
societies.

You will observe that I have based the expression of my views
on the future of our Society primarily upon the text of its Journal.
But it is not only in our Journal that our future must express and
justify itself; it is — of necessity in the first instance — in our
active work, and in the proceedings at our Meetings. There are
prominent Fellows of the Society who have shaken their heads at
me dismally when I have adumbrated these views in the past ;
they have warned me that if the " Bug and Slug " men are asked
to retire and leave the field to the " Brass and Glass " men, our
Meelings will become so dull and technical that our President
will be reduced — like the unsuccessful Theatrical Manager — to
addressing his audience as "Respected Individual in the Pit."
But this is by no means a prospect to be seriously looked forward to
as even remotely probable — for the " Brass and Glass " man cannot
indulge in his beloved physical experiments and mathematics
unless provided with material by the "Bug and Slug" man. Without
going so far as the Technical Optician who asserted that the
Diatomace?e were created solely for the purpose of testing object-
glasses, I do look forward to a happy combination of effort, when
the Biological Fellow will be pouring out his woes of limitation on
the sympathetic bosom of the Purely-optical Fellow, and the
latter will be hailing with glee the difficulties of the former as
providing him with new worlds to conquer, and new equations
with which to overawe the mere research student.

One task which we have set before ourselves as a body corpor-
ate is especially of interest to me, anTl to its due performance I
intend, as I announced at the February Meeting in 1916, to devote
my special energies and all the resources at my command as soon
as the conditions allow, and that is the Society's authoritative
History of the Microscope and Catalogue of the Society's collection
of instruments and apparatus. It will be within the recollection
of Fellows that a committee of the Council — with power to add to
the number — was formed for this purpose early in 1916 under
the Chairmanship of Dr. Charles Singer, than whom there is no
greater authority upon the subject living to-day. We have the
material and the men, and the men have the energy and the
enthusiasm required to bring the work to a successful issue. Tliis
work will be, when completed, a landmark in our history destined

Presidential Address. 167

to carry conviction of the value of our Society's energy throughout
the length and breadth of the Scientific World.

In our new President — nominated, if I may be allowed to say
so, in a lightning flash of prophetic inspiration by the Council, a
nomination ratified by his election at your hands — we have the
man above all others best fitted and equipped to grasp the helm
which will direct the course of our Society's progress at this
moment of departure along a specialized and strengthened line of
endeavour. I believe that I may say — though I say it with
all humility — that the experiment of electing to this Chair an
enthusiast from the " Bug and Slug " section within the Society,
has not resulted in any retrogression in our history ; on the
contrary some echoes of our work during the past two years have
disturbed the serenity of several learned bodies — from the Royal
Society downwards — which had fallen almost into the habit of
forgetting our existence. I take it as a reward for any efforts I
have made for the welfare and the development of the Society
that you have repeated the experiment. You have elected an '
enthusiast from the " Brass and Glass " section within the Society,
and under his cautious and capable influence I look forward to
seeing the Society take the place which is ours by right — a place
the importance of which it would be impossible to overestimate
among the Scientific Societies of the whole world.

Gentlemen, I have done. My last words from this Chair have
been spoken, and I will conclude with an expression of my
conviction that both as a body corporate, and in our individual
capacities as citizens of this great Empire, we shall go on to the
end of the present strife, our mental vision fixed upon the dawn of
better things, and, in the immortal words of Abraham Lincoln,
" With malice towards none ; with charity for all ; with firmness
in the right as God gives us to see the right — let us strive to finish
the work we are in ; to bind up this nation's wounds ; to care for
him who shall have borne the battle and for his widow and orphan ;
to do all which may achieve and cherish a just and lasting peace."

168

Transactions of the Society.

■<
o

w
K
H

O

h3

-«}

o
W

H

O

O

l-H

►J

W H
K ^

^ o
w <j

^ 2

o

&

»

K

H

O

cc

I— I

OS

00

.-I
<X)

CO

CO

OD I SO

• C3 . ™

05

01

<M

t- rH «D m
CO t~ T»( tH
(M l-H r^

00 00 00 rH

t~»Ct~05C0 iOO<JOCOQO-<KOCO-^
53 -^CM C~00O5CT iOOlCOOO

CO rH _|

CO

5 «

CO .^

fl 3)

■s-s

o

o

00

O

o

o

«

o

(N iH O
t- CO CO

■* « i-l lO

cDi-i>HiOt~ OJiOt-cO(Ni-i-*050
05 rHCO tHCMtH iHOq CO

(N T»( -^Jt <M
CO CO -*

l-H tH (M CM

00 IrHCO (M(NOJ rH<M ■*

(M O 00 CD
00 -* CO

(M CT »0 lO

10 iH IM 00 t-
00 <M

iH(M-*»OeOOOOt-
(M l-H (M (M <M rH CO

1-1 CO ■* t-
iO to CO

■—I CO O 05

rH (M Tj( rH CO
CO iH CM

-ROCOCO |<M-<*HOOCO
i-H <M Sq I rH Cq CO

05

o

of

CO
CM

t-

O iH (M CO
i-H 05 <M 05
O CD <M

CO t~ 00 tH
CO iO CO CO

CO CO iH CO ■»!<
O t- (M 00 00

(M oq irt

-'*<01b-00005CMCO
C>»HlOiOO»OCO(Mt-
■*(M-*i-lrHCqTjir-IOO

CO lO CO Tt(

»o m CO

1-1 CO l-H 10

g(MrHT)<0 CMO>00t~t^(MrHCqTH

•^ COt— li— liH T-lrHiO

»o o t- o

CO 00 CO

eo (M 05

COtH |t-CO COOt-CqtOrHCOOCO
00 IrHCM (MOJIM- <MC*)T-iaO

CO CO CO tH

00 »o o

00 eo CO O

^t-0<jT»tt- ■*C00505CO(MCDrHCD

OJ CO-^J1 COIMCO THO^Tjlr-IO

05 O tH T»l

t- o o

I 00 (M 00

CO <N

cq CD

■^lOCTSO-^OliCi-ICO
•«H(MCOi-l (NOiHOO

rH O «0 C75
CO CO 00

I CO tH 05
(M

aooocot-t~ t~-*T*(cOi-i'»*<Oi-io

00 (MO -*(NCOtHr-IO<IlOrHt-

■* rH CO <N
t> 10 00 rH

CO 00 ■<»( C
(N rH

OV

CO CO
(M O

»OOtHOC~COCOCOOO

CO Ol t- 00
t- -W CN

rH CO t^ 00

«o-* -^ot-t-oot-ooMH

CTlO COtMCOrH rHrJ(rH05

05 rH CO C35
05 10 T«t

rH 10 CO OJ
(N

O»0C0rHC0 rH(MCO»CCOt~0005lO

rH COlO -^C^THi-lrHiHCO OO

CM 00 C- O
00 CD (M rH

CO 0 C~ (M

CM rH

00
O

(M O rH

CO 10

(MO5rHO50<ICDrHCOCO
■^ rH tK Oq CO iO

UO 00 CO CO
CD -^ O

(N CO CO 00
CN r-{

OOCO ICDUO O505CNC0O<MiOC000

05 IrHCO (M (MrHrHtMCM CO

CO O rH CO
CO O 05

CD

05 O
CM rH

t-00(MrjirH »0(J5t-rHCCOt-rHC0

O rHCO CM COrH rH(MrHTt(

CJ5 lO -"H CD
CJ3 ■'Jf 05

« O CM O
rH « rH

CO CM CO CO CO
t- rH cq CO

0003iCt~COC0050
CM rH <M rH rH CM >0

CO CO (75 CD
O >0 00 rH

■^ «0 rH 00
rH (M

t- rH lO CD 00
t- rH rH CO

COO5t~O5CD00Tj(COrH
■^ ■«*< rH (M CD

P^ • • •

00

° >>

«

C <-i ^ i^ 0

fi

"^-^ -is £; -n

^

g B.2 g§

-0

-SHWOH

-a

- o

O T;J >J

c8 & o -O
~ 3 " li <D

;^
8

c8

'2 S "

O cs .^

cS

<D

■^ o 2 o ja -S
Si, to SL o (S s

O^ n kH '-' >H »H

^►^SPh<!0

a

I

"a!

O
c3

<U
.-3 fQ

a s

-2

s
^=5

-^3 (D

S^5

C9 O)

■E'2

o o

Oi c8

a <o

« fcl C)
o o n

Presidential Address.

169

Q

o

in

o

g

CO

in

CO

(M
CM

o

o

-*

in

cs

CM

Q

CO

rH rH

<M

«

Q

(M

OirH

O

CM

in

CO

CO CM

CD

05

rH

CO

CO

CC -^ t^

^ 00

t- 00 <M -W

g

CO

o>

CD

00

rH t- 1 rH

CM

CN XI

o o

lO ■* O i-(

(N

t-

rH

rH

eo-* 1 rH

Q

•

iH (»

CO •*

cq

CO
CO

CM <M

CO

O Ol -^

00 t-

coco eo eo

■<*l

o

t-

"*

-*(

i-l CO 1 o

05

i-H

CM CO

00 •* iH

-*

o

00

rH

rH »0 1 CO

rH

rH

•
00

O ?D 1

CO CO

o CO ^ lo

to

05

05

in

in

t- CO 1 03

00

CQ 1

CN -^

O O rH

eo

a

CD 1 CM

1-^

c3

o

rH

t~

r-i

l-H 00 1

O CT>

t:~ C~ (M rH

rH

^^

O

CO

CO

in CO 1 CD

CO

r^ 1

CO lO

00 00 rH

CD

rH

CO

CM

•* 1 o

CO

rH

o -H cc

00 CI

■^ iO CO »o

05

CO

CO

Tj(

eo

00 00 1 CO

CM

1-1 CO

(M CO

05 1-1 rH

■n

^

CO

00 1 05

CO
CM

^

(M

CO t~

CO

in

^^

■>X

CO rH

m

05

m

(N

CM 00

O

CM

00

t-

eo

■*

T-{

rH

CM

O 1— 1 iH

■^ t~

O <N CO C5

o

CM

05

eo

CD

CO OD t~ t-

CO

■^X »C iH

>0 05

lO »C tN CO

CO

^

CO

CO

rH

00 O CM rH

in

.

(M 00 »0

CO rH

■.«( rH Oq

rH

CM

00

i-i

CM

rH in CO 00

o

T-(

rH <?!

T-i

t-

T-{

■<*i

,

CO -^ 1

C- 00

CO Cq C5 Ttl

b-

in

O

CM

-*

rH CO 00 03

?q

•«< 1

CO CO

rH C<1 -H
y-{ ■r-<

■*

in

00

rjl

i—{

rH t- CD

CM
CM

rH
H2

o

rt -^ t-

CO 00

rH rH t- 00

t-

1—^

O

o

i-t

C35 CO 00 00

CM

CO

»0 05

CD CD r-1

CD

CO

CO

y-t

rH

rH O t~

C5

rH rH

rH

7-{

CM

rH

t- CO o

■<tl -^

CD VO 00 CO

lO

•*

CO

CO

rH

00 rH CO in

CO

'SI (N

00 i«

r-l

-* t- (M rH

rH rH

oo

rH

in

rH

m

rH

rH

rH (» rH -*

rH

■*

CO

CO lO CO

CO -"K

■* 05 00 O

o

oq

in

oq

t-

in CM t- in

CO

T-l CO T-H

O CD
rH 1-1

CO t- !M rH
7-\ rH

CO

CO

in

rH

in

i-t

CM

rH -^Jt rH ■»«

03 C3 CO

O t~

C- lO O O

in

'^f

00

CO

o

t- O ■* t~

05

^<M

C5 ■>*<

Tj( CO CM rH
7-< r-i

t~

in

T-{

1-i

rH O rH CM

CO
CM

CO CD ^

oo

O O 00 CO

00

05

rH

rH

CO

in CO rH CO

00

i-H CO <M

lO CM

rH -rH rH rH
rH rH

t-

CO

(M

rH

00

rH

T-i

T-i C^ r^ 7-1

rH r-<

co

CO --H t-

(M in

in 05 (M rH

<M

O

CO

O

m

t- t- t~ CO

CM

T-l lO <M

COrH

CN -^ CM rH
rH rH

OS

00

y-{

CM

rH CO rH Oi
1-1

00
CO

c-cq iH

OO

in rH 05 1

X

o

■^

■*

o

CO ■* in CD

C35

T-l CO CO

\n rH

05 CO (M !

o

t-

CD

i-{

CM

rH 05<M in

00

I-t

i-{

rH

rH

T-\

CO

•^ -# ;0

CD 00

CD -*l t- rH

00

1-i

■>*

CO

t-

00 CM rH in

o

CO lO -^

tH CO

00 CO <M

CO

CO

rH

05

rH

CM

rH ^ rH ■<*(

in

CO

«C <M CO

(M t-

■^ "^ 00 1*

CD

S

in

oq

CO

CO CM in in

00

■<H «D CO

oq t-

005 rH
rH 7-\

CD

O
<M

in

r-i

CM

rH rH CM CM

7-t

CO
CM

O 00 o

t- <M

lO <N 1 0^

cq

(^

05

t~

CO

t- O 00 00

CM

CO 05 »0

rHOi

rH t- 1
rH Cq

05

CO

r-l

CO

rH

(M

O CM rH
rH

S

00 OS cq

05 05

■* CO 1 1

■<*(

t-

7-{

i-<

t-

rH CO CO 1

CD

CN -^ O

CO (N

CO m 1 1

oq

O

t~

CM

rH rH in 1

t-

tH

rH

rH

2

1-t

(M

■^ -* CO

CO 1

O lO 1 00

00

in

CO

CM

CM

CO in ■>»( 1

05

1-1 CO -^

<M 1

in 03 1

■^

CO

in

r-{

c-o> 1

CO

iH >H

y—^

CO

CM

. ". .

• •

....

■

rJ2

■

1
cS

O

3

. •

•

• ■ • •

•

< .

■^3

>,

^

a,
a

....

ft =3

CO

P

ca

eg

IrH

tn 05 >>

S.

-S

cc

6fl

O d-^

>^

£"c8

c8

O
S.4

^3

o • o ft

CD m m ^

m bO

■■Ji-*='

o

J >»

en

9

Miscellan
Techniqu
INIiscellan
Metallogr

General
Structur
Physiol 0

Pteridop
Bryopby

allophyta
AlgEe .
Fungi
Lichens
Mycetoz

■gcC

croscopy .
Instrum
series

Photomi

Optics a

tion

o

S

eg

§

N

170

VI. — On Pyxidicula invisitata, a Ehizopod new to Britain, and
Hedriocystis spiniftra, a neiv Heliozoon.

By James Meikle Brown, B.Sc, F.L.S., F.C.S.

[Communicated by John Hopkinson, F.L.S., F.R.M.S.]
{Read April 17, 1918.)
One Plate.

During the examination of material collected in different parts of
the country for the purpose of studying the distribution of fresh-
water Khizopods, 1 have frequently come across small, inconspicuous
species whose identity is difficult to determine, partly owing to
their diminutive size and partly to their almost transparent nature.
For these reasons it is also difficult to obtain a clear idea of their
structure. Naturally these minute creatures are frequently over-
looked.

Amongst such there commonly occurs a species of Pyxidicula
which has not yet been reported as occurring in this country. It
seems to be referable to the species P. invisitata Averintzeff,
described very briefly in 1906 (" Arch. f. Protistenk,," Bd. viii. pp.
86-7).

Since the publication of that paper I have seen no further
reference to this species. As it appears to be widely distributed in
Britain, a fuller description of it should be of interest.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE.
Figs. 1-4, — Pyxidicula invisitata Averintzeff.

FIGS.

1. — Dorsal view of living animal.
2. — Transverse section of empty test.
3, 4. — Different forms of the marginal flanges, p.v., pulsating vacuole ; fl., flange
margin of test.

All X 1000.

Figs. 5-7. — Hedriocystis spinifera Brown.

5. — Active individual, x 2400.

6. — Portion of capsule, with spines. X 5000.

7. — Portion of capsule and plasma, with nucleus and contractile vacuole, x 5000.

JOURN. U. MICR. SOC. 191S.

.'fl

/

/K-fl

P'

^

^\

K

\ \"'

\ '-

\

/

■^/

-^x

\

\

/

\

\

/

7

1-1. PYXIDICULA INVISITATA.

5-7. HETEROCYSTIS SPINIFERA Sp. nov.

Face p. 111).

On Pyxidicula invisitata and Hedriocystis spinifera. 171

Sub-Class EHIZOPODA.

Order Conchulina.

Pyxidicula invisitata Averintzeff.

Test watch-glass shaped, often flattened dorsally, delicate,
chitinoid ; middle region (disc) varying in colour from light yellow
to dark brown ; marginal region (flange) always lighter in colour
and frequently almost colourless ; middle region in surface-view
punctate ; marginal flange showing radial striations.

In transverse section the margin of the test appears to be
double, owing to the flange being inserted above the edge of the
disc, which is turned inwards slightly, thus contracting the
mouth-aperture. Protoplasm greyish in colour, granular, contain-
ing numerous green and brown bodies (food-particles) ; nucleus
indistinct (Averintzeff figures it with dark prominent central
nucleolus) ; contractile vacuole usually single, prominent.

Diameter of test 25-50 /a, most often about 40 /u. (Averintzeff
gives 45-50 /i).

Habitat. — Wet moss and moorland pools.

Distribution. — Derbyshire, Westmorland, Cumberland, Inver-
ness-shire, Argyllshire, Perthshire, Elginshire, Eoss-shire.

It appears to be common, but is easily overlooked.

The margin of the test is distinctive. In dorsal view it appears
as a transparent flange, as in P. cyrnbalum Penard. In optical
section the edge of the darker disc shows a marginal thickening
triangular in section, and from the two lower corners of the triangle
arise an outer and an inner flange, the outer one being that seen
from above, and the inner one being, perhaps, merely a continuation
oral-wards of the disc. Some tests show the outer flange curved
ventrally inwards, while others show both flanges curved together.

In surface-view the animal might easily be mistaken for a small
specimen of P. cyrnbalum.

Amongst a quantity of damp moss from the Isle of May,
Pirth of Forth, and reported on in the " Scottish Naturalist " for
1912 (pp. 108-14), a small number of individuals of a minute
Heliozoon related to Hedriocystis reticulata. Penard (" Les Helio-
zoaires d'eau douce," 1904, p. 284) were discovered. They present
sufficiently important differences from that species, however, to
warrant regarding them as belonging to a new species.

N 2

172 Transactions of the Society.

Sub-Class HELIOZOA.

Order Desmothoraca.

Hedriocystis spinifera sp. n.

Capsule very minute, transparent, thin, colourless or of a pale
yellow, spherical, having numerous facets more or less regularly
polygonal, of usually five or six sides, with raised borders from
the junction of many of which arise slender spines ; no pedicel
observed ; body spherical, nearly filling the capsule ; plasma bluish
in colour, granular ; nucleus single, placed sub-centrally ; a single
contractile vacuole normally present ; pseudopodia long, radiating,
straight, tenuous ; habit solitary.

Diameter of capsule, 8-12 /x.

HaMtat. — Wet moss.

Locality. — Isle of May, Scotland (Brown).

The other fresh-water members of this genus {H. jJellucida
H. & L., and ff. reticnlata Penard) are provided with a stalk or
pedicel, but so far no individuals of this species have been found
with this appendage. In collecting from a material like wet moss
they may easily have been broken off.

In the well-known genus Clathrulina the chitinous capsule
is a reticulated framework, also spherical in shape, the openings
in which are of such a comparatively large size that a mere
latticework separates them from one another ; but in the genus
Hedriocystis the test is continuous, the pseudopodia passing through
a mmute pore in the centre of each facet. The presence of these
pores can only be recognized when the animal is alive, by the
pseudopodia emerging from them ; but in specimens treated with
sulphuric acid Penard observed small bubbles of gas escaping, by
which their presence was indicated.

The capsules in this genus are so transparent and colourless that
only the thickened portions can be distinguished.

The smaller size and the presence of spines at the angles of
the facets of the capsule distinguish this species from H. reticulata
Penard (about 25 /i diam.), which likewise has only been recorded
from one locality in the British Isles, namely, Craigcaffie,
Scotland (Brown, in " Scottish Naturalist," 1916).

H. pellacida H. & L. has not till now been recorded from
the British Isles ; it is distinguished by the small pore in each of
the facets being surrounded by a conical boss or nipple.

Propagation by means of division taking place within the test
has been observed in H. reticulata, but it is not known how the
individuals so formed escape from the capsule. .

The author is much indebted to Mr. G. H. Wailes for assistance
in drawing up the descriptions of these species.

JOURN. R. MICR. SOC. June, 1918.

EiCHARD GrRAiNGER Hebb, M.A., M.D.Camb., F.R.C.P.Lond.,

Consulting: Physician and Physician Patholoo-ist to the Westminstei- Hospital.
Secretarv to the Royal MicroscojMcal Society,
of the Royal Microscopical Society,' 1902-1918.

1898-1911. Editor of the ■Journal

173

OBITUAEY.

Richard Gbainger Hebb, M.A., M.D. Carab., F.E.C.P. Loud.

1848-1918.

Consiiltiug Physician and Physician Pathologist to the
Westminster Hospital.

The announcement of the death, on May 12, 1918, of Dr. E. G.
Hebb brought a deep sense of personal loss to a wide circle of
■scientific colleagues and friends, felt with particular keenness
by the Fellows of the Eoyal Microscopical Society, to whom
Dr. Hebb had endeared himself by his tact and geniality, no less
than by his erudition and intimate acquaintance with microscopical
lore during the thirty-three years he had been connected with the
Society.

His association with the Society was not only lengthy, it was
particularly close and intimate. Elected an Ordinary Fellow in
November, 1885, he was appointed a few years later to a seat on
the Council, and soon became a powerful factor in guiding the
deliberations of that body.

In 1S92 he became co-Secretary with Dr. Dallinger, and for
nearly twenty years he was virtually responsible for the conduct of
the Society's affairs. After the resignation of Dallinger, in 1907,
Hebb became in name, as lie had long been in fact, the senior
Secretary, and had as associate secretaries, first, Mr. Gordon, and.
subsequently F. Shillington Scales. In 1911 ill-health compelled
him to resign his post, and he was elected a Vice-President.
During the time he held office, Hebb proved himself an ideal
Secretary, and the Society, which has lost a devoted officer, has
hardly yet realized the extent of the debt it owes to his exertions.

But his work for the Society ante-dated his Fellowship by
many months, for it was quite early in 1885 that the then Secretary,
Sir Frank Crisp, who was engaged in re-organizing the Journal,
enlisted Hebb's services on his staff, and henceforth he was a
consistent and regular contributor, and personally prepared nearly
all the abstracts dealing with " Technique " that appeared in its
pages. On the death, in 1902, of A. W. Bennett — the Lecturer on
Botany at St. Thomas's Hospital — Hebb succeeded to the editor-
ship of the Society's Journal (a post which he continued to hold at

174 Obituary.

the time of his death), and by his strenuous exertions and the
exertions he incited in the faithful band of contributors he gathered
around him, he succeeded in raising the prestige of the Journal to
a unique position, and constituted it a most valuable asset to the
Society.

The first number of the Journal for which he was solely
responsible was that for April, 1902, whilst the passing of the
proofs for the present one occupied his latest working hours.

A graduate in Arts and Medicine of Cambridge, King's College
Hospital shared with the University in fostering that keenness in
Microscopy which occupied so large a share of his life's work.
Pathology, both naked-eye and microscopical, early claimed his
energies, and he was undoubtedly seen at his best in the post-
mortem room or laboratory ; but, at the same time, he was a sound
clinical teacher, and made his mark in the Out-patient Department
and in the wards of the Westminster Hospital — the staff of which
he joined in 1888, and where for many years be held the dual posts
of Physician and Physician Pathologist. He was also Pathologist
to Queen Charlotte's Hospital.

In the Medical School of Westminster Hospital he held succes-
sively the posts of Lecturer in Forensic Medicine, in General
Medicine, and finally in General Pathology. Some years ago he
was appointed " Eeader in Morbid Anatomy " in the re-constituted
London University.

Dr. Hebb leaves behind him a widow, but no children, since
his only daughter died a little over a year ago.

An appreciation written by a medical colleague, and which
appeared in the " British Medical Journal " of May 29, contains
the following paragraph, which so exactly describes the man and
his work that we cannot refrain from quoting it :—

" Of his own work in pathology, none but those who worked with
him will ever appreciate its worth ; he wrote but little, though his
experience was great and his memory very remarkable. His modesty
was so ingrained that the value of his observations was discounted
by a reluctance to publish that owed something also to a rather
cynical sense of the fleeting value of many contributions to the
professional press. . . . Scholar and gentleman, his teaching will
long bear fruit in the work of generations of students who owe
their fundamental ideas to him."

Obituary. 175

Miss Ethel Sarqant, F.L.S., F.K.M.S.

It is with great regret we have to record the death of Miss Sargant,
which occurred on January 16 after a brief illness, at the early age
of fifty-four. By her death botanical science sustains a severe
loss, as she had obtained a well-merited position amongst botanists.
Miss Sargant was educated at the North London Collegiate
School and at Girton College, Cambridge ; she took the two parts
of the Natural Sciences Tripos in 1884 and 1885. In 1913 she
was elected to an honorary fellowship of Girton College. She was
the first woman to preside over a Section of the British Association
— Section K at the Birmingham Meeting in 1913 — and she was
also the first woman to serve on the Council of the Linnean
Society of London. Miss Sargant's earlier botanical work was
chiefly cytological, and dealt with the formation of the sexual
nuclei in Lilium martagon. These researches into the structure
of the embryo-sac led at a later date to an interesting theory
regarding the meaning of " double fertilization " in Angiosperms,
on which subject she made a contribution to the " Annals of
Botany " in 1900. She was a lady of some means, and established
a private botanical laboratory, first at her mother's home at
Eeigate, and later at the " Old Eectory," Girton, Cambridge. Miss
(now Dr.) Ethel N . Thomas was at this time her assistant, and
together they did some very valuable work, chiefly on the anatomy
of the bulbous Monocotyledons. This research led Miss Sargant
to conclude that that group was derived from the Dicotyledons, as
a result of an adaptation to a geophilous habit. At the British
Association Meeting at Southport in 1903 Miss Sargant opened a
discussion on the " Evolution of the Monocotyledons," in which
she put forward her views on the subject.

Miss Sargant's most important research, and one which she
made peculiarly her own, was the vascular anatomy of mono-
cotyledonous seedlings. She applied microtome technique with
great skill to the elucidation of the transition from root to stem in
the hypocotyl, the extreme shortness of which in the majority of
monocotyledonous seedlings renders the elucidation one of great
difficulty. Her contributions on the anatomy of seedlings, and her
well-known theory of the origin of the Monocotyledons, appeared
in the " Annals of Botany." As Tresident of Section K (British
Association, 1913) she gave a masterly resume of " The Develop-
ment of Botanicol Embryology since 1870."
Miss Sargant was elected F.R.M.S. in 1910.

A. W. Sheppard.

176 Obituary.

William Sidney Girbons.

By the death of William Sidney Gibbons, of Melbourne, which
occurred in July last, the Society loses one of its oldest Fellows,
Gibbons' fellowship dating from 1858. The deceased gentleman
was ninety-two years of age at the time of his death, which was
the result of an accident. William Gibbons was a patriarch among
Australian microscopists, having been one of the first to encourage
the popular knowledge of microscopy in the early days of Victoria.
In 1852 he was carrying on investigations into the adulteration of
foods, and, like Hassall, he combined these researches, which came
more particularly within the scope of his activities as an analytical
chemist, with excursions into various branches of natural science.
In 1856 the " Quarterly Journal of Microscopical Science" printed
some notes of his on several points of microscopical manipulation,
and figured a section-cutting instrument which was considered
an improvement on thos3 then in use. Later he contributed
several papers on microscopical subjects to local journals, and in
1858 he furnished to the " Microscopical Transactions " a descrip-
tion of a new method of micrometry. This involved the use of
a series of slips of card, one for each combination of powers. Laying
one of these on the stage of the microscope, which was focussed on
a stage micrometer, and observing the micrometer-image with one
eye, and the card with the other, he marked off the micrometer-
divisions on the card, which thus became a rule of one-hundredths
or one-thousandths, so that whenever he wished to measure an object
which he was observing with that combination, it was only necessary
to lay the scale on the stage beside the object, and read off the
measurement. The method had the advantage over all others of
simplicity, and cost nothing, but, of course, was not suited for
conditions requiring a high degree of accuracy.

Mr. Gibbons was mainly instrumental in founding, in the later
fifties, the first microscopical society in Victoria, possibly in the
British Colonies. This, which was quaintly named the " Microscopic
Society of Victoria," was somewhat premature, and had but a
short existence. In 1873 another attempt was made, and the
" Microscopical Society of Victoria " was founded, Mr. Gibbons
being one of the most prominent of its promoters. This Society
survived till 1887, when it amalgamated with the Eoyal Society of
Victoria.

Mr. Gibbons had long since retired from the active practice of
his profession, and was little known to the younger generation
of microscopists, but he retained his interest in science, and was
present at a meeting of the Eoyal Society not long before his death.

W. M. Bale.

177

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES

RELATING TO

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY

(principally invertebrata and cryptogamia),

MICROSCOPY, Etc.*

ZOOLOGY.

VERTEBRATA.

a. Embryolog-y. f

Germ-Cells of Armadillo.^ — Aimee S. Vanneman has studied
the germ-cells of Tatuski novemcincta, and finds that they are conspicu-
ously large, and first discernible along the endodermic wall of the
blastocyst, just preceding the primary bud-stages. They are extremely
few in number. The active, embryonic germ-cells, however, probably
do not arise until the time of the secondary bud-stage, appearing in the
vicinity of each of the four embryonic areas.

During early primitive streak stages germ-cells are seen dividing,
previous to pushing a way into the endoderm of the future gut region.
After gaining entrance into the gut endoderm, the germ-cells are carried
in the thickening intestinal wall as, during the somite stages, it rounds
up to form a closed tube. By the time the embryo has attained a length
of 4 mm., and has a pronounced cervical bend, the germ-cells may be
seen in the act of leaving the ventral, intestinal wall to enter the
surrounding mesenchyme tissue. They are amoeboid.

In embryos of 5 and 6 mm., the germ-cells appear at the base of
the well-developed mesentery, usually not below the level of the three
blood-vessels of that region. They are also present in the loose mesen-
chyme under the aorta, and en route to the germinal epithelium which
has not yet thickened.

In the 10 mm. embryo the germ-cells are established in the indifferent
gonad. They are slightly enlarged, preparatory to division.

A study of early stages suggests that germ-cells may arise from

* The Society does not hold itself responsible for the views of the authors
of the papers abstracted. The object of this part of the Journal is to present
a summary of the papers as actually published, and to describe and illustrate
Instruments, Apparatus, etc., which are either new or have not been previously
described in this country.

t This section includes not only papers relating to Embryology properly so
called, but also those dealing with Evolution, Development, Reproduction, and
allied subjects.

♦' Amer. Journ. Anat., xxii. (1917) pp. 341-63 (3 pis. and 2 figs.).

178 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

certain cells of the blastocyst endoderm (yolk-sac endoderm) daring
secondary bud formation. The path of the migration is from the
embryonic endoderm into the intestinal wall, thence into the surrounding
mesenchyme to the mesentery, and onward into the germinal epithelium.
No germ-cells are found at any stage in the blood-vessels. It may be
concluded that the germ-cells of the four embryos of one vesicle do not
have a common origin, in the sense of having arisen from a pre-localized
region of the early plastocyst.

Maturation of Ovum in Swine.* — George W. Corner has studied
the maturation phenomena in swine. This is the first case in which the
maturation of the ova of an Ungulate has been observed. The sequence
is the same as in previously-studied forms of other orders, the first
polar body being extruded, and the second polar division proceeding as
far as spindle formation before fertilization occurs, the second polar
body being cut off only after the entrance of the spermatozoon.

Polyembryonic Blastocyst in Opossum.! — J- J- Patterson and
C. G. Hartman describe a blastocyst of Didelphys virginiana which con-
tained four embryos, three abnormal and one normal. The arrangement
of these on the blastoderm suggests a certain similarity to the condition
in the armadillo (Tatusia novemcincta), where four are normal. It is
possible that the rare occurrence of multiple-embryo formation in
B. virginiana has become a permanent phenomenon in the development
of D. marsupiaUs, as reported by Bluntschli. In any case we have here
the rare case of a polyembryonic blastocyst in a multiparous mammal.

Superfetation in Cat.J — Mary T. Harman notes that the word
" superfetation " has been used to denote that condition in which the-
uterus contains embryos of different degrees of development. This
condition may result from a second coition, or a second conception may
have taken place without a second coition. Although superfetation is-
rare and abnormal, many cases have been reported in man and in other
mammals which do not seem to be satisfactorily explained, except on the
supposition that a second conception has taken place. It is possible
that all cases of superfetation are not attributable to the same cause.
In the case of the cat described in this paper it seems as reasonable to
think of the less advanced embryo of the four as the result of delayed
fertilization, as to account for it on the ground of delayed development.
or a second coition.

Effect of Vital Stains on Eggs.§— Margaret Eeed Lewis finds that
the eggs of the Nemertean Cerehratidus lacteus may take up Janus green
in their gelatinous membrane, and may thereafter develop up to the
fourth or eighth cell-stage before they are killed by the stain. The-
membrane keeps the stain back. Unprotected eggs are at once killed by

* Anat. Record, xiii. (1917) pp. 109-12.

t Anat. Record, xiii. (1917) pp. 87-95 (2 pis. and 1 fig.).

t Anat. Record, xiii. (1917) pp. 145-57 (2 pis.).

§ Anat. Record, xiii. (1917) pp. 21-35.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. ITO'

Janus green. In the case of the sand-dollar {Echinorachnius parma)
slightly stained spermatozoa were in a few cases able to fertilize ova ;
slightly stained eggs were occasionally fertilized by stained or unstained
spermatozoa ; in most cases Janus green was fatal, but brilliant cresyl-
blue and neutral red proved true vital stains, for development went on,
though the cells showed stained granules. The ova of the angler
(Lophius piscatorius) developed into embryos in neutral-red solution,
and the cells showed stained granules. Many details are given in regard
to ova and spermatozoa and the influence of various stains.

Inheritance of Fertility in Sheep.* — E. N.Wentworth finds evidence
that sheep of high birth-rank tend to produce offspring of high birth-
rank. Data referring to Southdowns indicate that the highest record
of a ewe is a better selection standard for high fertility than a random
record. The frequency of multiple births in sheep varies with the
breed. Inheritance is affected by the vigour of the ewe, the feeding and
age of the ewe, the season and region. There seems to be no relation
between high fertility and additional mammge. There is no evidence of
a sex linkage of fecundity factors in the pedigrees tabulated. Evidence
from Shropshire triplet pedigrees suggests that triplets are genetically
different from twins and singles, which two are probably genetically
alike.

Development of Mammary Glands in Rat.f— J. A. Myers has
studied this in male and female albino rats from the late foetal stages to
ten weeks old. When the gonads are in the indiiferent embryonic stage,
there is no apparent difference in the primordia of the mammary glands
in the two sexes. At eighteen days the primordia in the male differ
from those of the female in possessing no mammary pit ; at twenty
days, when the nipple primordia are present in the female, they are
absent in the male ; the nipples fail to develop in the males ; the
epithelial hood is also absent. Until about the fifth post-natal week
the milk-ducts of the two sexes are much the same ; in the ninth week
(age of puberty) the ducts of the female branch very profusely, while
those of the male show little change. The second inguinal gland in the
male is rudimentary or absent. The number of glands is more variable
in the male than in the female.

Effect of Stress and Strain on Bone Development.^ — J. A.
Howell followed Pottorf in observing the effect of cutting the main
nerves of the branchial plexus on the right side of puppies (about four
weeks old) in order to produce paralysis of the muscles. To the question
whether all bone-growth is dependent upon the amount of stress and
strain, the answer is definitely in the negative. Bones deprived of the
action upon them of all but a negligible amount of stress and strain
grow considerably. But the answer to the question whether bone-
growth is entirely independent of the action of stress and strain is also
definitely in the negative. This is shown conclusively by the very

* Amer. Nat., li. (1917) pp. 662-82.

t Anat. Record, xiii. (1917) pp. 205-26 (7 figs.).

t Anat. Record, xiii. (1917) pp. 233-52 (1 figs.).

180 SUiMMAKY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

much smaller diameter, thickness of com pacta, size of trabecular, and
greatly reduced weight of bones which were experimentally deprived of
the influence of mechanical stress and strain. The growth in diameter
is particularly affected.

Development of Liver in Ground Squirrel.''" — C. E. Johnson has
studied the development of the liver in two species, Citdlus tridecem-
lineatus and C. franJcUni, and finds that it does not differ essentially
from that observed in other mammals. The earliest primordium is a
ventral thickening of the gut ; it becomes an outpouching of the wall ;
it shows three lobe-like divisions ; it becomes spindle-shaped and smooth-
walled ; trabeculse make their appearance ; to the primary hepatic
diverticulum or pars hepatica there is added the pars cystica, which arises
as an evagination of the gut wall, occupying the angle between the
pars hepatica and the yolk stalk ; this pars cystica is not a separate area
so much as a caudal extension of that thickened part of the tube which
has already given rise to the pars hepatica. The development of the
ducts is described.

Development of Serous Glands of Tongue.j — E. A. Baumgartner
finds that serous glands first appear in the 8 • 5 human foetus as out-
growths of the vallate papilla of the tongue, usually from the lower
border, sometimes from the outer wall. The first outgrowth is knob-
like. Soon a stalk develops giving rise to lateral branches with enlarged
end-pieces. In a 19 cm. foetus these enlargements present bulgings of
the surface and beginnings of alveoli. In the newborn the serous gland
is alveolar, with some anastomoses between the alveoli. In the adult
some of the glands are tubular, with some anastomoses. In the new-
born, many knob-like outgro\\ths appear on the large ducts, probably
primordia or potential primordia of future glands. Cystic dilatations
of the serous ducts may occur. Mucous end-pieces occasionally open
into the ducts of the serous glands of ihe vallate papilla. Maziarski
referred the serous glands of the vallate papilla of man to the branched
tubular type. They belong to the branching tubulo-alveolar type.

Angioblasts and Blood-vessels. | — Florence R. Sabin has studied
in chick embryo the differentiation of angioblasts from the mesoderm.
They are vaso-formative cells, more granular and more refractile than
the mesoderm cells ; their daughter-cells form dense syncytial masses,
Blood-vessels arise within the bodies of angioblasts, not between them.
The angioblasts produce blood-plasma, endothelium, and red blood-cells.
Red blood-cells arise from the endothelial lining of blood-vessels, and
also from angioblasts directly.

Interstitial Cells in Reproductive Organs of Chicken. §— Alice M.
Boring and Raymond Pearl discuss the conflicting results : interstitial
cells are reported present and absent for male birds of practically every

* Anat. Record, xiii. (1917) pp. 169-75 (4 figs.).

t Journ. Amer. Anat., xxii. (1917) pp. 365-83 (3 pis.).

X Anat. Record, xiii. (1917) pp. 199-204.

§ Anat. Record, xiii. (l917) pp. 253-68 (6 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 181

age. It appears to be definitely established that true interstitial cells
are always present in the ovary ; it is in regard to the testes that the
discrepancy exists between observers. The anthors find interstitial cells
in the testes of just-hatched chicks. But they may be, and usually are,
totally absent from the testes of males over six months of age and of
full sexual maturity, both in respect of primary and secondary characters.
It is difficult to suppose that they have any causal influence upon
secondary sex-characters. The true interstitial cells are not merely
homologous, but indeed structurally identical in the male (when present)
and in the female.

Effects of Pituitary Body and Corpus Luteum on Chicks.* —
Raymond Pearl finds that feeding with corpus luteum and the anterior
lobe of the pituitary body retarded the growth. The retardation was
greater with corpus luteum. After forty-three days the birds fed with
pituitary substance weighed on the average -4 '01 p.c. less than the
control birds, those fed on corpus luteum substance 9 '31 p.c. less.
There was no apparent difference in the time of attaining sexual
maturity. There is no evidence that the administration of pituitary
substance hastened in any way the initial activation of the pullet ovary.
The corpus luteum treatment does not produce any physiological dis-
turbance.

Hermaphrodite Dogfish.f— Ruth C. Bamber describes a case of
hermaphroditism in ScyUium cankiila, which showed two testes, and on
the dorsal anterior of the right one a small mass of ova. Except for the
absence of sperm-sacs, the animal had the complete genital systems
of both male and female. Externally it was a typical male.

Removal of Pronephros of Amphibian Embryo.| — Ruth B. Rowland
removed the pronephros from both sides of AmhJystoma larvse. This
induced oedema and death. The presence of one sufficed to keep the
embryo in health. Excision of one wfis followed by an increase in the
size of the other, and in the diameter of the segmental duct. Removal
of one pronephros has no essential effect on the development of the
pronephric glomerulus of that side, but the segmental duct appears
in varying stages of atrophy. Anterior and posterior nephrostomes
may regenerate from the coelomic epithelium. Early developmental
stages of the mesonephros are normal after the excision of one hind-
kidney.

Inheritance in Fantail Pigeons. § — T. H. Morgan crossed fantails
with 29, 30 and 32 tail feathers and ordinary homers with 12. In the
Fj generation the range of variation was 12 to 20, with the highest
frequency in the 14-feather class. " Evidently one or more of the
factors of the fantail act as partial dominants, producing tails that have

* Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. U.S.A., ii. (1916) pp. 50-53.

t Proc. Zool. Soc, 1917, pp. 217-9 (2 pis.),

X Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. U.S.A., ii. (1916) pp. 231-i (1 fig.).

§ Amer. Nat., lii. (1918) pp. 5-27 (14 figs.).

182 SUMMARY OF CUKKENT RESEAKCHES RELATING TO

for the most part more tail feathers than has the common pigeon,
but less than the fantail." In the F^ generation the 12-feather tail
reappeared in considerable numbers ; the " curve " is at least bimodal
with one apex in the 14, 15, 16 rows, and the other in the 12 row ; a
few individuals approached the lower range of variation of the fantail,
viz. those with 24, 25 and 26 tail feathers. It is probable that a gene
for more than 12 feathers, and the gene for no oil gland, and a gene for
white colour are linked, i.e. are.carried by the same chromosome.

Sex-ratio in Domestic Fowl.* — Raymond Pearl considers data
representing 22,000 chicks. The ratio of males per 1000 females is
944, or 48 • 57 p.C-, and it is interesting to notice that Darwin's figure
was 48 * 64. There is variability from stock to stock and from year to
year. Before aberrant sex-ratios can be considered indicative either of
environmental or hereditary effects, it is necessary to show that they
occur with such frequency as to exceed considerably that expected on
the basis of chance alone. Prenatal mortality in the fowl is not differen-
tial in respect to sex, and in consequence the observed sex-ratio at birth
is to be regarded as substantially the same as the initial zygotic sex-
ratio.

b. Histolog-y.

Shape of Red Blood-corpuscle in Mammals.t — L. B. Arey has
made a series of experiments to solve the much-disputed problem of the
normal shape of the red blood-corpuscle in mammals. He discusses the
evidence derived from (1) drawn blood, (2) circulating blood, and (3)
fixed tissues or smears, by other investigators, and supplemented by his
own experiments. He finds that the shape of the mammalian red blood-
corpuscle depends largely on the osmotic pressure of the examining
medium. In solutions corresponding to about 0 ' 9 p.c. sodium chloride
the erythroplastid possesses a biconcave form. In progressively less
•concentrated (hypotonic) solutions water is imbibed, and the corpuscles
swell to thin-walled cups, thick-walled cups, dimpled spheres, and finally
lake-forming "shadows." In hypertonic solutions crenation results.
Between the limits of form induced by a 0'3 p.c. sodium chloride
solution and by mild crenation the shape of the red blood-corpuscle is
repeatedly reversible. Individual variability exists in the response of
erythroplastids to diluting media ; this is perhaps referable to diverse
elasticities of the corpuscular membranes. Undiluted drawn blood and
blood diluted with human serum show the corpuscles to be bi-concave
discs. Human serum must be diluted about one-third with water before
cups begin to form. The study of circulating-blood in non-ansesthetized
living mammals corroborates the view of the normality of the disc. The
results gained by the use of fixatives, although seemingly adverse to the
disc view, can be satisfactorily interpreted in terms of unequal fixation ;
this is supported by experiment. The several lines of experiment seem
to justify the conclusion that the bi-concave disc represents the normal

* Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc, Ivi. (1917) pp. 416-36 (3 figs.),
t Amer. Journ. Anat., xxii. (1917) pp. 440-74 (1 fig.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC, 183

shape of the mammalian erjthroplagtid, the concavo-convex cup being
merely an occasional modification.

Blood-corpuscles of Alligator.* — Albert M. Reese has studied the
blood of Alligator mississippiensis as regards the corpuscles. The average
dimensions of the fresh erythrocytes were "Z^'ll micra in length, 12*78
in width, 4 •17 in thickness. The cytoplasm was transparent, and
:seemed to be homogeneous. The nucleus was in most cases ellipsoidal.
Hints of amitotic division were seen. There were various types of
leucocytes, which are described.

Fatty Tissue of Crocodilians.t — Ed. Retterer and . H. Neuville
find that the fat in Crocodilians, as in mammals, is due to an elabora-
tion or transformation of the hyaloplasm of the cells of reticulate
connective tissue. The hyaloplasm changes into fatty corpuscles, which
are separated by trabecule which stain readily with hf^matoxylin. The
adipose cells are bound together by re*"iculate septa, which also stain
readily with haematoxylin, and are in part elastic. The perinuclear
portion of the cytoplasm of an adipose cell is capable of developing
with the nucleus so as to form a blood-corpuscle.

Time occupied in Mitosis. | — Warren H. Lewis and Margaret R.
Lewis have observed the time required for mitosis in mesenchyme cells
from embryo chicks four to eleven days old, and cultivated in Locke's
solution with or without the addition of bouillon. The time required
for the complete process of mitotic cell-division was within the following
Hmits : Prophase, 30 to 60 minutes ; metaphase, 2 to 10 minutes ;
anaphase, 2 to 3 minutes ; telophase, 3 to 12 minutes ; and the
reconstruction period, 30 to 120 minutes ; total, 70 to 180 minutes.
A fair estimate would be between two and three hours. In more
normal conditions — namely, a four-day chick with the amnion intact in
Locke's solution — the division of the smooth muscle-cells was observed :
Prophase, 33 minutes ; metaphase, 2 to 15 minutes ; anaphase, 1 to 3
minutes ; telophase, 3 to 5 minutes ; and the first part of the recon-
struction period, 4 to 10 minutes. It seems very probable that the
duration of mitosis is not very different in different types of cell.

Minute Structure of Retractor Penis-muscle of Dog.§ — Homer
Gr. Fisher refers to the discrepant histological descriptions of this
muscle. The fact seems to be that the muscle is mixed. In the
anterior three-fifths the fibres are wholly smooth, while in the posterior
two-fifths the fibres are both smooth and cross-striated.

Phagocytosis by Osteoclasts. || — Leslie B. Arey finds that bone
cells laid bare by the resorptive process may be engulfed by osteoclasts.
The phagocytic inclusion of a bone-cell by an osteoclast is described and
figured.

* Anat. Kecord, xlii. (1917) pp. 37-44 (8 figs.),
t G.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, Ixxx. (1917) pp. 795-7.
i Anat. Record, xiii. (1917) pp. 359-67.
§ Anat. Record, liii. (1917) pp. 69-79 (2 pis.).
II Anat. Record, xiii. (1917) pp. 269-72 (4 figs.).

184 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Seasonal Changes in Interstitial Cells of Woodchuck.* — A. T.
Rasmussen publishes the results of a study of the changes in the
interstitial cells of the testis in thirty-five woodchucke {Marmota monax)
examined at different seasons of the year. The woodchuck is sexually
active only in spring, the female bringing forth a single litter in late
April or early May. Hibernation is profound and lasts for four months ;
no food is stored up. For purposes of investigation the testes were
usually removed from the living animal under ether, but in some cases
they were removed immediately after death, and in a few several hours
after the animal was shot. During late summer and autumn the
interstitial cells of the testis are minimal in size and probably reduced in
number. The scanty cytoplasm of these cells contains numerous
pigment granules, some fine lipoid granules, but only a few cells contain
coarser, more fat-like granules. There are a number of large interstitial
cells which are gorged with prominent pigmented granules, and which
have resulted from the degeneration of other and more numerous types
of interstitial cells. A new spermatogenic cycle is in progress. The
testis is small, dark in colour, and abdominal in position. There is no
sudden change in the interstitial cells with the onset of hibernation, and
little or no change during dormancy, except that there is a slight gradual
decrease in pigmentation. Spermatogenesis remains much the same
during the torpid state as just before the winter-sleep sets in. The
tubules are filled with spermatocytes showing open maturation figures
during the entire winter. In the spring, as the animal is waking up,
the interstitial cells rapidly enlarge and apparently increase in number.
The nucleus increases only slightly. The great increase is primarily in
the cytoplasm, and is due to the development of a dense central mass of
cytoplasm and the accumulation of fatty globules in the more peripheral
portion. Fine lipoid granules are also abundant in the central cytoplasm.
The great interstitial cell-development forces apart the tubules and
doubles the diameter of the testis, which descends into a pouch essen-
tially representing a scrotum, remaining in communication with the
abdominal cavity proper. Spermatogenesis suddenly shows renewed
activity, and free sperms are seen two or three weeks after the wood-
chick has waked up. The interstitial cells do not reach their maximal
size till the end of April. There is a distinct decrease in pigmentation.
Regressive spermatogenesis begins in late April and a new cycle begins
early in May, but the interstitial cells remain well developed for two
months longer By July the testes have returned to the abdominal
position, the interstitial cells show signs of decreasing, and by August
they are little more than naked nuclei. A few cells do not decrease,
their lipoid content having been, transformed into pigment granules.
The testis as a whole is reduced to about an eighth of its former size,
and is darker in colour than at any other stage. Spermatogenesis is
slowly progressing uninterruptedly. Interstitial cell-growth seems more
uniformly related to the later and regressive stages of spermatogenesis
than to the initial stages, but there is evidence of variability even in
regard to these.

• Ann. Journ. Anat., xxii. (.1917) pp. 475-513(3 lis.).

ZO©LOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 185

C. General.

Myelin and Advancing Age." — Henry H. Donaldson has inquired
into the fact that, starting from birth, the water-content of the mam-
raalian body as a whole, and in certain systems, diminishes with age. In
the albino rat he finds that there is a progressive loss in the percentage
of water in the brain and in the spinal cord. This proceeds thirty times
faster than in man. Donaldson's observations show further that the
diminution is not in the cell-bodies and their unsheathed axons, but is
mainly due to the accumulation of myelin — with a water-content of
about 60 p.c. The myelin must be regarded as a more or less extraneous
substance, having but little significance for the characteristic activities
of the neurons. Myelin formation is a function of age.

Theory of Nerve Conduction.t — A. G. Mayer has been led by experi-
ments on the jelly-fish, Cassiopea xamacliana, to the theory that
adsorption may play a fundamental role in nerve-conduction, and that
the only cations which are necessary to the reaction are the adsorbed
sodium, calcium, and potassium ions, the rate of nerve-conduction being
proportional to the concentration of these adsorbed ions. There is a
change in the rate of nerve-conduction in Cassiopea in successive dilutions
of sea-water. Nerve-conduction is probably a phenomenon of adsorption
combined with an ordinary chemical reaction.

Origin of Air-breathing Vertebrates. % — Joseph Barrell accepts
Chamberlin's theory that fishes arose in land-waters, and constituted
primarily a river fauna. The lung-fishes arose under semi-arid climates
and in seasonal waters. The evidence is strong that the air-bladder was
originally a supplemental breathing-organ, although in modern fishes it
has been mostly diverted to other uses. "Among certain Devonian
fishes, living under more and more strenuous climatic conditions of
seasonal dryness, the use of the air-bladder for respiration became essential,
and with the diminishing availability of the waters of certain regions
the gills in those species became correspondingly atrophied. The
amphibians thus arose under the compulsion of seasonal dryness."
" Climatic oscillation is a major ulterior factor in evolution."

Rats and Evolution.§— A. G. and A. L. Hagedoorn, dealing
particularly with rats, define a species as " a group of individuals which
is so constituted genotypically, and which is so situated, that it auto-
matically tends to restrict its total potential variabiUty." The " total
potential variability" is "the quantity of genes which not all the
members of a group have in common, or for which they are not pure
(homozygous), and the variabihty which this impurity makes possible in

* Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. U.S.A., ii. (1916) pp. 350-6.
t Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. U.S.A., ii. (1916) pp. 37-42.

X Bull. Geol. Soc. America, xxvii. (1916) pp. 345-436. See also Proc. Nat Acad
Sci. U.S.A., ii. (1916) pp. 499-504.

§ Amer. Nat., Ii. (1917) pp. 385-418.

0

186 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

the descendants." Crossing or recombination of genes by mating, of
individuals of unequal genotype is the only real cause of variability.
Mutation exclusively consists of an occasional loss of a gene without
visible cause. No matter where we find rats of the Rattus group
there are never more than one kind of tree-rat of this group, one
house-rat, and one field-rat simultaneously present in one locality. The
three kinds cross with facility and produce fertile hybrids ; colonies of
aberrant forms thus arise. In seaports new types are continually arising
by crossing with imported rats. There is no real antagonism between
Mus rattus and M. norvegicus, but these do not mate together, or, if they
do, no offspring result.

Evolution is the result of a combination of all those causes which
heighten variability and which limit it. The only cause of inheritable
variability in Metazoa is amphimixis. All those causes that tend to
reduce the potential variabiHty of a group tend to make varieties or
species of these groups. Such causes are isolation, migration, adaptation,
selection, and especially the fact that either periodically or regularly
the number of individuals of one generation is very much smaller than
that of the preceding one. This cause of purification of the type occurs
everywhere, and operates quite regardless of adaptation or fitness. To
this cause, working upon variation, may be ascribed numerous charac-
teristics for which we can invent no use. for which species are never-
theless pure.

Post-natal Growth of Kidney of Albino Rat.* — John A. Kittelson
has made a minutiose series of measurements and enumerations. The
post-natal growth of the cortex of the kidney is fairly uniform, show-
ing in comparison with the entire body a relative increase between birth
and two weeks, decreasing slightly thereafter. The growth of the
medulla is more varied. The volumetric ratio of medulla to cortex
changes greatly in the course of growth.

The new-born rat has 10,465 fully-formed renal corpuscles, or 15,533
including those incompletely formed. The similar numbers at one week
are 19,682 and 26,598 ; at two weeks, 24,061 and 24,091. At three
weeks 25,930 were counted, at seven weeks 28,583, at twelve weeks
28,863 ; so that practically the total number is reached during the third
post-natal week. The average diameter increases from about 62 micra
in the new-born to about 127 in the adult. In the adult human kidney
there are about 1,040,000 renal corpuscles,

"Proboscis Pores" in Craniate Vertebrates.f— Edwin S.Goodrich
gives an account of the complex minute structure of the epithelium
lining Hatschek's pit on the roof of the buccal cavity in Amphioxus,
and of the development of this pit and of the pre-oral pit from the
left anterior ccelomic sac and an ectodermal ingrowth respectively.
The pre-oral pit becomes the wheel-organ of the adult. The ciliated
cells of Hatschek's pit are of mesodermic origin, but the rod- bearing

♦ Anat. Record, xiii. (1917) pp. 385-408.

t Quart. Journ. Micr. Soc, Ixii. (1917) pp. 539-54 (1 pi. and 8 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC, 187

cells appear to come from the ectoderm. The evidence favours Bateson's
comparison of the opening of Hatschek's pit with the proboscis pore
in Balanoglossm and the water-pore of Echinoderms. The anterior
coelomic sacs of Amphioxus are homologous with the pre-mandibular
somites of Craniates, and the tubular outgrowths of the latter opening
into or fusing with the hypophysis correspond to " proboscis pores." All
are of the nature of coelomostomes. The hypophysis of Craniata is
represented in Amphioxus by the wheel-organ, and it is suggested that
its original function was to drive food into the mouth.

Origin of Melanin in Feather-germs of Fowls.* — R. M. Strong
has re-investigated the development of melanin pigment in feather-
germs of Plymouth Rock and Brown Leghorn fowls. Melanin granules
occur occasionally in the so-called cylinder and inner-sheath cells of
feather-germs from the common fowl. Further evidence was obtained
that the melanin pigment of feathers is epidermal in origin, Melano-
phores were found in the dermal pulp at the proximal end of the feather-
germs. They are presumably homologous with the dermal melanophores
of the skin. Some of these pulp melanophores have processes which
are usually relatively short, but they do not appear to distribute pigment
to other cells, and they have no part in the histogenesis of the feather
or its pigment. A few of these dermal melanophores were found in
contact with the basement membrane, but none had penetrated it.

Agricultural Zoological Survey of Aberystwith Area.j — Chas. L.
Walton makes a very interesting report on the agricultural zoology of
this area, which includes mountain upland, coastal plateau, and the
intermediate fall line. He deals with the occurrence of gid (Multiceps
midticeps), Echinococcus, the tapeworms {Moniezia expansa and if.
trigonophora) of sheep and lambs, " husk " or verminous bronchiiis (in
part at least due io Strong gins filar ia), gape-worm {Syngamus trachealis),
Ascaris suilla, various Ixodida?, Red Water or Bovine Piroplasmosis,
scab, scaly leg, ten blood-sucking flies, sheep maggot-fly, sheep nostril-
fly, and so on. This excellent and suggestive Report should be used as
a model for other districts.

Study of Hilsa.:^ — T. Southwell and B. Prashad have made a study
of Hilsa ilisha ( = Clupea ilisha), the highly esteemed Indian shad. It
has a wide distribution in the Indian Ocean, where it is hardy and
powerful ; but it ascends rivers to breed, and is then delicate and easily
killed. They swim rapidly in the river, near the bottom, and seem to
fast. The females are much larger than the males. An account is
given of the eggs, which swell in water after fertilization from 0*8 mm.
to 1 • 8 mm. ; of the fungoid parasite that attacks them ; of the enemies
and parasites of the adults ; and so on.

* Anat. Record, xiii. (1917) pp. 97-108 (6 figs.).

t Parasitology, x. (1917) pp. 206-31.

X Dept. Fisheries Bengal, Bihar, and Orissa, Bull. No. 11 (1918) pp. 1-12.

0 2

188 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

INVERTEBRATA.

Slollusca.
y. Gastropoda.

Centrifuged Eggs of Crepidula.* — E. G. Conklin subjected the eggs
of this marine Gastropod to centrifugal force approximately two thousand
times gravity. The yolk is thrown to the distal or centrifugal pole, the
oil and other light substances to the centripetal pole, while the nucleus
and centrosphere, together with most of the cytoplasm, occupy the
middle zone between the other two. If there is time in fertilized eggs
before the first cleavage, there is a restoration of the normal positions.
If cleavage occur before restoration, the two daughter-cells have an
abnormal distribution of substances. But in them there is speedy
restoration to something like the normal. By organic regulation there is
a restoration of the normal polarity and pattern. There seems to be a
" ground substance " which is not moved by the centrif uging — a frame-
work of protoplasmic strands which preserve the relative positions
of nucleus and centrosphere in the cell-axis.

British Terrestrial and Fresh-water Mollusca.f — John W. Taylor
deals, in Part 23 of his Monograph, with Hygromia, Ashfordia, and Theha,
and announces, we regret to see, that the work must be suspended until
the conclusion of the War.

Immunity Coloration in Nudibranchs.$ — W. J. Crozier refers
particularly to the large brilliant Chromodoris zebra of Bermudas. Its
pattern is an irregular streaking of yellow or orange upon a field of blue.
Large numbers are found in quite shallow water, though they go down
to 10 fathoms. The skin secretions are repugnant to many animals, and
the odour is penetrating and disagreeable. The repelling material
contains globules of the blue pigment, but the main constituent is a
coagulated white substance containing only globules. Cloth bags con-
taining the nudibranch are avoided by fishes, and blinded fishes are also
repelled. The success of Chromodoris in the shoal waters of the coral-
reef region is conditioned by the secretion ^nd the odour, and by the
unpalatable nature of the jelly surrounding the eggs. The eggs develop
slowly, but the animals reproduce throughout the year. Crozier accepts
Reighard's reasonable theory that the startling colours have arisen for
internal physiological reasons under conditions of immunity which have
been attained by characters other than those of coloration. " The
coloration of C. zebra is a metabolic accident, at least in regard to its
protection, for a single experience with a normally coloured specimen is
sufficient to cause snappers, turbots, and groupers to have nothing
to do with subsequent individuals offered to them, even though these

* Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. U.S.A., ii. (1916) pp. 87-90.

t Monograph of the Land and Fresh-water Mollusca of the British Isles,
Part 23, pp. 65-112 (4 pis. and many figs.).

X Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. U.S.A., ii. (1916) pp. 672-5.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 189

individuals are stained red or blue." This view does not exclude the
possibility that the colour may at times serve to warn predatory foes ;
but the conspicuous coloration did not evolve as the result of its selection
as a warning.

Cytoplasmic Inclusions in Germ-cells of Snail.* — J. Broute
Gatenby tiuds that the ovotestis of Helix aspersa consists of finger-like
diverticula, which are hollow at the lower ends connecting with the
hermaphrodite duct, while the upper ends contain more yolk and are
filled with metamorphosing male cells. The elements differ in nucleus,
mitochondria, uebenkern, and volume according to nutritive conditions
and number of divisions. The minute structure is described. Macro-
mitochondria and micromitochondria are distinguished, and the function
of the nebenkern is discussed. Only confusion will result, we think, if
the author persists in the terminology indicated in the following
sentence : "The determination of the sex of the indifferent cell seems
to be brought about by a variety of causes. The explanation of
femaleness by presence of yolk-cells is held to be inadequate, for male
progerminative cells also appear in regions choked with yolk."

Arthropoda.

Median Eye in Trilobites. — R. Ruedemann calls attention to the
presence of a median eye on the glabella. It appears as a tubercle in
upwards of thirty genera. There is sometimes a lenticular cavity below
a thin cornea ; this may have been filled with sea-water or with some
body-fluid. It is comparable to the median eye of some Phyllopods.
Indirect evidence for the visual function of the tubercle is submitted.
There is least trace of the tubercle in forms with highly-developed lateral
eyes ; in genera usually considered as blind because of reduced or absent
lateral eyes the median tubercle is most distinctly'developed.

a. Insecta.

Nuclear Division in the Adipose Cells of Insects. J — Waro
Nakahara makes a preliminary note on amitotic division in adipose
cells. There is good evidence that amitosis does not mean the
approach of degeneration or aberration, as Flemming believed. It is a
kind of nuclear division which, as Chun suggested, secures the increase
of surface to meet the physiological necessity which is due to active
metabolic interchanges between nucleus and cytoplasm. It occurs in the
adipose cells preparatory to and simultaneous with certain metabolic
changes in which the nuclei take the role of essential importance, viz.
the formation of albuminous granules. It appears that acidophile
granules are extruded from the nucleus into the cell-body, forming the
characteristic albuminous granules.

* Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., Ixii. (1917) pp. 555-611 (6 pis. and 5 figs.).
t Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. U.S.A., ii. (1916) pp. i231-7.
I Anat. Record, xiii. (1917) pp. 81-5 (11 figs.).

190 SUMMAEY OF CUERENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Studies in Mecoptera.* — R. J. Tillyard has made an interesting
study of a new family, Nannochoristidse, in the ancient order of
Mecoptera, or Scorpion-flies. The Nannochoristidae are minute insects,
represented by four new Australian species of the new genus Nanno-
chorista, which is " an example of a highly specialized reduced type
based upon a very archaic foundation," and by an allied New Zealand
new genus, Choristella, with one species. The archaic characters of
Nannochorista include the high roof-like manner of folding the wings,
and the presence of a wing-coupling apparatus, with frenulum well
developed. The coenogenetic characters include the reduction of size,
the loss of macrotrichia from the wing-membrane, the reduction of
the sub-costal vein, the loss of the first apical fork, the high specializa-
tion of the mouth-parts. To students of Panorpoid orders the new
type will be of great interest. The male closes his anal forceps on the
tip of the abdomen of the female in a lock-grip. The New Zealand
type has a wing-venation even more reduced than in Nannochorista.
The distribution of this highly-specialized family derived from a very
ancient stock (in Tasmania, the Eastern Highlands of Australia, and
New Zealand) can only be explained by dispersal from an original
common Antarctic ancestor.

Protocerebrum of Micropteryx.t — P. A. Buxton has made a
thorough study of the protocerebrum of Micropteryx {Eriocephala)
caUhella, the smallest insect of which the brain has been investigated in
any detail. Most entomologists regard Micropteryx as a primitive
Lepidopteron ; there is good ground for regarding it as a Trichopteron.
Chapman has raised it to ordinal rank (Zeugoptera).

The neurilemma, which covers the whole of the central nervous
system in one continuous sheath, is a thin syncytium. Beneath it
are found the ganglion-cells and the asonic parts of the nervous
system. Over the protocerebrum the layer of ganglion-cells is deep,
and four types can be distinguished : the normal type, the mushroom-
body cells, the cells of the optic lobes, and the giant cells. Neuroglia
cells are found in the substance of the protocerebrum in small numbers,
and the tracheal system of the brain is very slightly developed. The
protocerebral lobes exceed in bulk the rest of the protocerebrum. A
mid-dorsal protocerebral lobe is specially described as the tumnlus.
The mushroom-bodies are small and simple, with a spherical head
which contains minute glomerular masses of nerve-fibres regarded as
association-centres. An account is given of the stem of the body and
its division into three roots (inner, forward, and backward). The central
body is large, and consists of an outer and an inner capsule, the latter
containing a number of minute glomerular bodies. The tracts passing
from or to the central body are numerous, and some of them are
large. The nerves from the ocelli run inwards across the front of the
head of the mushroom-body and pass gradually into the substance of
the protocerebral lobes, and a few fibres pass into the bridge. Two
small bodies beneath the central body are probably the ocellary glomeruli

* Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W.. xlii. (1917) pp. 284-301 (2 pis. and 3 figs.).
t Trans. Entomol. Soc. London, 1917, pp. 112-53 (4 pis. and 3 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 191

of othf r observers. The bridge is simple and straight ; its ends are
rounded and consist of " Punktsubstanz," and into these pass the axons
of a few cells which are situated in the immediate neighbourhood. The
middle of the bridge is formed of a large number of fibres which pass
across the middle line.

Scales of Leaden Males of Agriades thetis.* — E. A. Cockayne
finds that in these aberrant forms the smoky scales and androconia are
of the normal shape, size, and colour, but all the colour scales are very
thin, and have their distal part rolled up to form a tube. " By reflected
light the curled-up edges and tubular ends of these scales look silvery,
and under a low-power of the microscope appear as ghostly triangles
overlying the dark scales, which are much exposed to direct view and
give the leaden colour to the wings." The peculiarities of the scales are
probably due to some inborn error of development. Similar aberrations
are widespread through the blue Lycaenids. Breeding experiments with
the leaden males would be interesting.

^&'

Grynandromorph of Papilio lycophron.t — J. J. Joicey and Gr.
Talbot describe and figure a remarkable specimen of this Peruvian
butterfly in which the right hind wing above is normal.

Protective Coloration in Lepidoptera.| — J. C. Mottram shows
how concealment may be effected by the apparent disruption of surface
in a plane at right-angles to the surface. Outline may be concealed by
disruptive coloration and solidity by counter-shading. Many small
details of pattern are of value in concealment, and one should be slow
to conclude on negative evidence that small differences such as often
distinguish species can have no value in the struggle for existence.

Inheritance in Silkworms. § — Onera A. Merritt Hawkes has studied
inheritance in the hybrid Philosamia {Attacus) ricini (Boisd.) male and
Philosamia cynthia (Drury) female. The plain or non-spotted condition
of the larva of P. ricini is recessive to the spotted condition of the larva
of P. cynthia (Ning-po variety). The domination in the F^ generation
is incomplete ; all the larvae are spotted, but not all have the full
complement. The spots are probably represented by a group of related
genes in the chromosome, not by one gene. The dominant homozygous
and the heterozygous forms can be distinguished only by breeding, as
both may be either full-spotted or partly-spotted. A number of
abnormal larvse with reduced tubercles occurred in the F2 generation ;
when these were mated with normal larvae the character behaved as a
recessive. A careful account is given of the minute structure of a
tubercle.

Study of Holly Tortrix Moth.H — L. H. Huie has made a study of
Eudemis nsevana, the larva of which eats off the young leaves of holly

* Trans. Entomol. Soc. London, 1917, pp. 165-8 (1 pi.)

t Proc. Zool. Soc, 1917, p. 273 (1 pi.).

X Proc. Zool. Soc, 1917, pp. 253-7 (4 figs.).

§ Journ. Genetics, vii. (1918) pp. 135-54 (1 pi. and 2 figs.).

\ Proc. Roy. Phys. Soc. Edinburgh, xx. (1917) pp. 164-78 (1 pi.).

192 SUMMARY OF CUERENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

and usually destroys the growing point. The moths emerge after
pupation about the end of July and beginning of August. The eggs
are laid in August on the under sides of holly leaves ; the larvae hatch
out in late April or early May of the following year, and proceed at
once to the apices of the shoots to feed on the young leaves of the
opening buds. Four moults take place. During the third and fourth
instars the larvas protect themselves when feeding by fastening the
leaves together by a silken webbing, which prevents the buds from
unfolding. Under this cover the larva devours the youngest leaves and
often gnaws the growing point. The caterpillar is full fed about the
end of June or beginning of July. About the same time the surviving
leaves break the webbing and the apex of the shoot becomes exposed.
The caterpillar seeks a retreat lower down, and after the fourth moult
passes into the pupal state about a week after it has ceased to feed.
The moths emerge in two to three weeks. Nicotine spray was very
effective.

Dipterous Parasite in Terrestrial Isopods.* — W. R. Thompson
found in ForcelUo scaber and Oniscus asellus, two common wood-lice,
the larva3 of a fly, Fh7/to mdanocephala, of which three stages are
described. The first stage is elongated, covered with minute chitinous
plates, with very long antennary organ, with well-developed sensory
structures, with a very remarkable bucco-pharyngeal armature. The
second stage is colourless, with reduced sensory structures and antennary
organ, with an ordinary form of bucco-pharyngeal armature. The
third stage has a two-jointed bucco-pharyngeal apparatus, and is amphi-
pneustic, the two preceding stages being metapneustic. The larva
castrates its female hosts at least. It probably enters the wood-louse
towards autumn ; the fly emerges in early summer.

Mutations in Drosophila busckii.f — Don C. Warren reports the
occurrence of two mutations in eye colour — " red eye " and " chocolate
eye "— in D. busckii, apparently the first mutations that liave occurred
in this species. This is the eighth species of Drosophila in which
mutations have been recorded. The " red eye " acts as a non-sex-linked
recessive character, with the red class falling a little short. The same'
is true of the " chocolate eye," but the chocolate class falls considerably
below expectation.

Bionomics of the Buffalo-fly (Lyperosia exigua de Meijere).J—
Gr. F. Hill gives an account of the habits and life-history of Lyperosia
exigua de Meijere, known to stock-owners in the northern territory of
Australia as the Buffalo-fly. Though it is less voracious and causes less
loss of blood than the larger flies of the genera Tabanus and Silvius it is
a more formidable pest because of the great number of individuals of
the species and the longer period of its seasonal occurrence. Unlike the
larger blood-sucking flies, too, Lyperosia attacks abraded surfaces, and

* C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, Ixxx. (1917) pp. 785-8 (7 figs.).
+ Amer. Nat., 11. (1917) pp. 699-703.
[ X Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xli. (1916) pp. 763-8 (1 pL).

r

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 193

con^^regates in great numbers on a small area wheie by repeated bites it
produces a practically constant state of irritation. Old, poor-conditioned
and sickly stock suffer most. Hair-colour appears to make no appreci-
able difference, but some individuals are not molested. Goats are
seldom attacked : dogs, pigs, sheep, and kangaroos are apparently immune.
Horses, cattle, and buffaloes are the most frequent victims, but the
characteristic sores are less severe on the buffalo, pi'obably because of its
thicker skin and its habit of standing up to the neck in mud or water
for long periods.

The eggs of Lyperosia are usually deposited in the fresh droppings
of cattle and horses ; accumulated heaps of stable-manure are not
favourable to their development, but milking yards are great centres of
infection. The eggs are pale Ih'owu in colour, and are laid singly on the
wet surface of the dung, oviposition taking two to four minutes. The
young larvae descend into the dung and pupation takes place there. In
those reared under laboratory conditions the life-cycle was completed on
an average in 1(V.) hours. The species is believed to have been intro-
duced into Australia since 1824 with some of the earlier importations
from the East Indies of buffaloes, cattle and horses. Its distribution
coincides, on the whole, with the range of the introduced buffaloes.
Few indigenous birds pick food from dung, and Lyperosia has not many
natural enemies except some species of ant which gathers the eggs, and
a small Hymenopteron which captures the flies while feeding or at rest.

Circulation of the Blood in Insects.* — F. Brochet has followed
up his paper on the circulation of the blood in the larva of Dyticus
marginalis by a study of Agrionid larva?. These are particularly well
adapted for study because they are transparent after moulting, and can
be kept so in clean water. Before examination under the microscope
they were not fed for twenty-four hours, so that the alimentary canal
should not be opaque. In the Agrionid larva, as in Dyticus, the dorsal
vessel functions mainly as an inspiratory pump ; it tends continually to
drain the abdominal cavity, and thus indirectly acts as exhauster for all
the blood in the body. The circulation of blood in the wings is effected
by two special pulsating oi'gans in the meso- and meta-thorax. In the
legs the mechanism is quite different, the circulation of the blood in
them depending on the respiratory action. Certain structural and
physiological facts were clearly observed : the presence in the thorax
of the larv« of Aeschna of two transverse diaphragms provided with a
■ sphincter through which the oesophagus passes ; the presence in the
femur of a true blood-vessel ; the presence in the tibia of a longitudinal
partition pierced by two small orifices ; and the presence of two pulsat-
ing organs in the meso- and meta-thorax. It was possible to observe,
especially in Agrionid larvae, the relation between the movements of
rectal expulsion and the gush of blood into the femur, and the fact that,
in anaesthetized insects, the blood flows towards the abdomen and towards
the dorsal vessel under negative pressure, therefore as a result of an
inspiration, and not under positive pressure, as would be the case if it
Tvere a question of propulsion.

♦ Arch, de Zool. Exp6r. et Gen., Ivi. (1917) pp. 445-90.

194 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Growth-period and Duration of Life.* — John N. Northop has
experimented with larvae of Drosophila, whose growth can be greatly
retarded by growing them on sterile fruit or other substances containing
no yeast. The deficiency is probably in " vitamines," or growth-
promoting substances. The prolongation of the larval period is without
effect on the duration of the pupal period, but the total duration of life
can be prolonged. This shows that the relative durations of the larva,
pupa, and imago stages are independent. It is probable that the duration
of each of the stages is determined by the formation (or by the
disappearance) of a definite specific substance.

Study of Structure, Habits, and Life-history of Hylastes. f —
James W. Munro has made a valuable study of this genus of Scolytid
bettles, three-species of which are of considerable interest to the forester,
namely Hylaster ater, H. palUatus, and H. ctmicularius. All the three
attack Conifers. A well-illustrated account is given of the external
features, the appendages, the alimentary canal, and the reproductive
organs. The mother-galleries and the larval-galleries in the roots of the
Conifers are described. The life-histiories of the three are carefully
contrasted, and the economic importance of the insects is discussed. The
illustrations of this very useful paper are of great merit.

Endoskeleton of Head and the Coxal Cavities of Beetles.:}: —
Thomas G. Sloane has studied the endoskeletal plate and its supports
inside the head of Carabidae and Cicindelidae. They serve for the
support of the muscles of the mouth-parts. Their differences in the
two families are indicated. He also deals with the structure of the
anterior coxfe, and with the different forms of anterior coxal cavities in
the Carabidae. The facts do not seem to the author to support the
current view that the open anterior coxal cavities are more primitive
than the closed cavities.

Germ-cell Cycle of Dineutes nigrior.§— R. W. Hegner and C. P.
Russell find that in this whirligig beetle an ultimate oogonium divides
into two daughter-cells of unequal size. The smaller gives rise to
nurse-cells only. The larger, " the oocyte grandmother-cell," contains
an oocyte determinant. Its division into four cells is differential, for
one product, " the oocyte mother-cell," receives all of the oocyte deter-
minant, the other three lack this body and become nurse-cells. Each
of these four cells undergoes a single mitotic division resulting in the
formation of seven nurse-cells and one oocyte, the latter containing the
oocyte determinant. In Dytiscus there are four differential divisions,,
and the oocyte is accompanied by fifteen nurse-cells ; in Dineutes nigrior
there are three differential divisions, and the oocyte is accompanied by
•seven nurse-cells.

* Journ. Biol. Chemistry, xxxii. (1917) pp. 123-6.

t Proc. Roy. Phys. Soc. Edinburgh, xx. (1917) pp. 123-58 (28 figs.).

I Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xlii. (1917) pp. 339-42.

§ Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. U.S.A., ii. (1916) pp. 356-6 (6 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 195

/3. Myriopoda.

New SpirostreptidsB.* — J. Carl describes new species of Foratnphilus,
Thyropygus and Doratogonus, and establishes two new genera, Stennuro-
streptus and Stenostreptus in this family of Diplopoda. Particular
attention is paid to the structure of the gonopods, which is of great
diagnostic value.

S. Arachnida.

Chondriosomes of Scorpion Spermatozoa.f — Edmond B. Wilson
contrasts the nuclear chromosomes and the cytoplasmic chondriosomes
carried by the spermatozoon into the egg. He has studied them in two
scorpions, Opidhacanthus elatus and Centrums exilicauda. In the latter
it is possible to conclude with certainty that the chondriosome material
is divided with exact equality among all the spermatozoa. It is concen-
trated into a ring-shaped body which is equally divided, so that each
spermatid gets a quarter. In Opisthacanthus the chondriosome material
has the form of about twenty-four fairly large, separate, hollow spheroidal
bodies scattered without discernible order in the protoplasm. In division
each spermatid receives six chondriosome spheres as a rule, but some-
times five or seven — a sort of hit-or-miss segregation. On its face the
contrast would seem to indicate that a wide distinction should be drawn
between chondriosomes and chromosomes in respect to their power of
division and their relation to heredity.

Ulster Spiders.f — J. A. Sidney Stendall gives a list of what remains
(twenty-five species) of the late Mr. Thomas Workman's collection of
Ulster spiders. In Workman's list sixty-four species were recorded.
The author has made a fresh collection from Ulster, and gives a list of
sixty species. Of these, one species, Leptyphantes nebulosus Sund, is
new to Ireland, and five are new to Ulster.

Ant-like Spiders. § — H. D. Badcock reports on a collection of ant-
like spiders from Malaya, including eight new species of Myrmarachne.
Many of the specimens were accompanied by ants from the same
localities.

Swiss HalacaridaB.|| — C. Walter describes, from Swiss lakes, Limno-
halacarus ivalkeri (Walter), synonymous with Halacarus walkeri Walter ;
Soldanellonyx chappuisi g. et sp. n., a blind form with a very remarkable
calyx-like claw on the first leg ; S. parviscutatus sp. n. ; and Lohmanella
violacea (Kramer).

*• Crustacea.

Loss of Eye-pigment in Gammarus chevreuxi.f — E. J. Allen and
E. W. Sexton have made a Mendelian study of the progressive degenera-

* Rev. Suisse Zool., xxv. (1917) pp. 383-409 (26 figs.).

t Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. U.S.A., ii. (1916) pp. 321-4 (11 figs.).

X From Proc. Belfast Nat. Hist, and Phil. Soc, 1915-16, pp. 1-7.

§ Proc. Zool. Soc, 1917, pp. 277-321 (12 figs.).

II Rev. Suisse Zool., xxv. (1917) pp. 411-23 (13 figs.).

•j Journ. Marine Biol. Assoc, xi. (1917) pp. 273-353 (7 pis.).

196 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

tion of the eye in this Amphipod. It took place in a series of definite
steps or stages, each of considerable magnitude. The end was an entire
loss of the eye-pigment, a broken irregular arrangement of the ommatidia,
and a great reduction in their number. The continuation of the process
for a few steps further may be thought of as likely to lead to the
complete absence of eyes seen in Amphipod genera from subterranean
waters. The changes all took place in exact conformity with Mendel's
Law. The mutation from black to red pigment arose only once in the
course of the work ; the complete loss of the inter-retinal coloured
pigment occurred four times in one family of 733, and never again ; the
loss of the white, extra-retinal pigment originated on several occasions
and in apparent independence. The experiments give striking illustra-
tions of the way in which the offspring of two abnormal parents may be
quite normal in their characters, and yet transmit the abnormalities.

Malacostraca of Natal* — T. R. R. Stebbing reports on the higher
Crustaceans of Natal, and deals especially with Platylamhrus quemvis
sp. u., Atergates fioridus (Linn.), Macrophthalmus grandidieri A. Milne-
Edwards, Ura lacteus de Haan, Dotilla clepsydra sp. n., and Rhyncho-
cinetes typus Milne-Edwards.

Morphology of Bathynella.f — W. T. Caiman discusses some of the
structural peculiarities of Bathynella nutans, one of the most remarkable
of living Crustacea. It is undoubtedly a degenerate member of the
Syncarida, a group of Crustacea which has persisted from Carboniferous
times, and of which the only other living representatives are found in
Australia and Tasmania. It was found in 1882 in a well in Prague ; it
has been recently rediscovered in Switzerland. In some features, such
as the absence of eyes, it shows degeneracy, which may be correlated
with life in subterranean waters, though mere minuteness of size may
also be a factor. The division Syncarida, and the order Anaspidacea
include five families : — Anaspidse, Koonungidge, Acanthotelsonida3,
Bathynellidte, and Uronectidse. The Syncarida form by themselves a
division of equal rank with the Eucarida and Peracarida, but allied
more closely with the former than with the latter.

Body-colour and Blood-colour in Amphipods.J — John Tait finds
that some of the Gammaridea owe their body-colour in a large degree to
the colour of their blood. In Isopods this is the case to a much less
degree. A dark green Gammarus has greenish blood plasma, a slate-
grey specimen bluish plasma, a brown has brown, while a brownish-red
has violet plasma. Pale yellow and white specimens of Gammarus have
plasma that is almost colourless, while the blood of some of them,
viewed in bulk, is actually milk-white. Specimens of OrchesUa in which
a blue tint is visible have bright blue plasma ; those in which no blue is
to be seen, yellow-brown specimens, have yellow plasma. The external
covering of these shore Amphipods being devoid of chromatophores, and

* Ann. Durban Museum, ii. (1917) pp. 1-33 (6 pis.).

t Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., Ixii. (1917) pp. 489-514 (14 figs.).

: Proc. Roy. Phys. Soc, xx. (1917) pp. 159-63.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 197

being more transparent than that of most Isopods, the hue of the blood
largely determines the colour of the animal. For this reason their
colour is not subject to reflex alteration, but remains fixed in spite of the
change of eye illumination. Even Isopods that possess chromatophores
may derive part of their colour from that of the blood. Tait finds that
pale specimens of Gammarus marinus are infected with what seems to
be a very large bacterium, which cii'culates in large numbers in the
blood. The infected animals become white in colour, owing to their
blood being deprived of pigment, and to reflection of light from the
bacteria. The animals were apparently healthy in spite of the over-
whelming infection. The length of the rice-grain-shaped organisms
was about equal to the diameter of a human red blood corpuscle.
Vejdovsky has described, in spirit specimens of Gammarus zschokkei
from Garschina Lake, Switzerland, the occurrence of a " gigantic "
nucleate micro-organism, which he has named Bacterium gammari. It
causes some change in metabolism, whereby already-formed blood pig-
ment is destroyed, or the manufacture of new pigment is inhibited.

Sex Intergrades in Simocephalus.*— Arthur M. Banta has found
intermediate sex forms in the Phyllopod Simocephalus vetulus, which
reproduces for long periods parthenogenetically. It may be noted that
gynandromorphs are really sex-mosaics, inasmuch as a definite portion
of the body, frequently one half, possesses in toto the definite characters
of one sex, while the rest of the body is distinctively of the other sex. But
sex intergrades are intermediate not as sex-mosaics but quantitatively^
and are as a whole different from either the normal male or the normal
female. Banta found forms of Simocephalus which were male with
one or more female secondary sex characters, females with one to
several male characters, and some hermaphrodites with various combina-
tions of male and female secondary sex characters.

Eight secondary sex characters distinguish the female of Simo-
cephalus vetuhis from the male — larger size, position and size of the
eye, outline of the head, absence of the nuchal protuberance, features
of the first (rudimentary) antennge, outhne and armature of the lateral
post-abdomen margins.

The sex intergrades are of almost all possible sorts. More than half
the individuals are neither whole male or wholly female, but possess
definite morphological sex characters of both sexes. Sex here reveals
itself not as a fixed and definite state but as a purely relative thing.
The usual sex balance is disturbed. Environmental factors probably
wield the determining influence. The disturbance influences not only
the individual, but also its germ-plasm, and the disturbed balance is
evident throughout succeeding generations. Noteworthy is the produc-
tion from sex intergrades of strains which produce only normal females,
and on occasion only normal males.

Heliotropism of Barnacle Larvae. f — Jacques Loeb and John H.
Northop have experimented with these larvse, which move in a straight

* Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. U.S.A., ii. (1916) pp. 578-83.
t Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci., iii. (1917) pp. 539-44 (2 figs.).

198 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

line towards or away from a single source of light and at right angles to
the line connecting two lights of equal intensity. The experiments go
to show that the " instinctive " movements of these animals are phenomena
of automatic orientation (heliotropism), and a function of the constant
intensity of light. The exact expression of the function is the Bunsen-
Roscoe law of photo-chemical action.

Maxillary Gland of Cypridina hilgendorfi.* — Naohide Yatsu
describes the minute structure of the group of unicellular glands which
forms the maxillary gland. The gland-cells are not differentiated into
gland proper and duct. There are two kinds of elements — raucous, with
granular cytoplasm ; and yellow gland-cells, with fibrillar cytoplasm.
The yellow secretion, which emits light, is in the form of coarse,
somewhat angular granules. There is no common reservoir for the
gland-cells, but the lower part of each gland-cell functions as a temporary
reservoir of the secreted products.

Nematohelminthes.

New Nematode from Partridge.f — C. Rodriguez Lopez-Neyra
describes Oyrnea seuratii sp. n. from the gizzard of the red partridge
{Caccabis rufa). The genus, one of the Spiroptera, occurs in burrows in
the median tunic of the gizzard, between the muscle and the horny
lining, and is characterized by the displacement of the vulva towards the
posterior end of the body. The body of the new species is robust,
translucent white, with a finely striated cuticle, with two strong lateral
lips besides a dorsal and a ventral. A contrast is made between the two
sexes, and between the new species and the allied C. eurijcerca Seurat.

Platyhelminthes.

Tapeworms of Reptiles. J— E. Rudin describes eleven species of
IchthyotsEuiidae from reptiles, discusses their common characteristics,
and gives a sketch of a natural classification of the family. He deals
with eight new species of Ophiotaenia, and two of Acanthotaenia, besides
0. racemo^a. Altogether there are now known thirty-nine Ichthyotse-
niidffi from reptiles and amphibians. They are Tetraphyllids with
small head, with sessile suckers without appendices ; the apical sucker
may be present, absent, or rudimentary ; there is no rostellum ; they are
confined to fishes, amphibians, and reptiles. The family includes six
genera : — Ichthyotsenia, Choanoscolex, Batrachotaenia g.n. Crepidobothrium,
Acanthoisenia and Ophiotaenia. Many details in regard to the minute
structure of the new species are communicated.

Dibothriocephalus parvus Stephens. § — F, Zschokke has made a
study of this tapeworm from man, which J. J. W. Stephens described

* Journ. Morphology, xxix. (1917) pp. 435-40 (4 figs.).

t Comptes Eendus, clxvi. (1918) pp. 79-82 (2 figs.).

1 Rev. Suisse Zool., xxv. (1917) pp. 179-381 (3 pis. and 26 figs.).

§ Rev. Suisse Zool., xxv. (1917) pp. 425-40.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 199

in 1908 as a new species. He also discusses the variety tenellus, which
Grassi established within the species Bothriocephalus (or Dihothrio-
cephalus) latus. He describes his own observations on forms of this
species, and comes to the conclusion that D. parvus and D. latus var.
tenellus are just crippled forms of D. latus.

Hydatid Cysts in Monkeys.* — William NicoU describes from the
abdominal cavity of Cynocephalus porcarius a hydatid with numerous
scolices attached to the wall of the cyst. It seems to be the hydatid
cyst that occurs in cattle, sheep, pigs, deer, and about forty hosts in all,
the adult occurring in Carnivores, particularly dogs. The author does
not name it.

Trematodes of Australian Birds, f — S. J. Johnston describes no
fewer than twenty-one new species, belonging to nine families or sub-
families. In connexion with Scaphanocephalus ausiralis sp. n., it is
suggested that the " cone-shaped " body of Jagerskiold may assist to
form a cavity at the genital sinus, whereby self-fertilization may be
secured. Notably minute is the new species Levinseniella howensis,
specimens of which are less than a millimetre long. A new genus,
Austrobilharzia, is established, and is compared in detail with the other
genera of the family. Many interesting notes are communicated on the
new species ; a list of the previously described Australian Trematodes
is given ; the parasites are also classified under their avian hosts.

Helminthological Notes from Switzerland. J — Emile Andre gives
a list of Trematodes, Acauthocephala, and other worm parasites which
he has observed for the most part near Geneva. The Trematodes
include Diplodiscus suhclavatus (Goeze) from Amphibians (and its
cercaria from the grass snake), Allocreadium isoporum (Looss) from
Gobio gobio, Gryptocotyle concavum Crepl. from the eider duck,
Plagiorchis mentulatus from Lacerta viridis, Strigea variegata (Crepl.)
from the bursa Fabricii of a crested grebe, and many more. The
Acauthocephala include Polymorphus minutus from the swan, Fom-
phorhynchus laevis from Silurus glanis, and some others. The
Cestodes include Ocenurus serialis from the rabbit, where it formed a
mass the size of a very large apple. The Nematodes noted are
Agamonematodum tritonis v. Linstow, in Triton alpestris, and Ancyra-
canthus denudatus v. Linstow from Phoxinus Isevis.

Echinostoma ilocanum (Garrison). § — J. S. Hilario and L. D.
Wharton report the occurrence of this minute fluke in the intestine
of patients of the Manila Hospital, natives of Zambales. Garrison's
specimens came from Ilocos Sur. The fluke is a blood-sucking parasite,
and some anaemia is always associated with its presence. A description
is given of its structure and ova.

* Parasitology, x. (1918) pp. 288-9.

t Journ. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 1. (1916) pp. 187-261 (11 pis. and 10 figs.).

: Rev. Suisse Zool., xxv. (1917) pp. 169-77.

§ Philippine Journ. Sci., xii. (1917) pp. 203-13 (2 pis.).

200 SUMMARY OF CURRENT KKSEARCHES RELATING TO

Echinoderma.

Fertilization and Phagocytosis,*— Jacqiies Loeb suggests that the
absorption of the spermatozoon by the ovum may be regarded as a kind
of phagocytosis. He bases his suggestion on a study of the conditions
which make it possible to fertilize the ova of a sea-urchin, Strongy-
locmtrotus purpuratus, with the spermatozoa of a starfish, Asterias
ochracea. It is not proved that the entrance of the spermatazoon into
the ovum depends on processes of phagocytosis (or surface-tension), but
the idea of phagocytosis facilitates the interpretation of the phenomena
which condition penetration.

Coelentera.

Studies on Living Corals.t — T. W. Vaughan distinguishes two
sub-faunas in the West Indies coral reef : (1) the strong, firmly-attached,
usually massive forms, which can withstand breakers and the pounding
of the surf, e.g. Orbicella annularis and Acropora palmata ; and (2) the
weakly-attached and branching forms, which can only survive in quiet
water, e.g. Maeandra areolata and Porites furcata.

The depth to which the more massive forms extend is between
18 and 31 metres ; in general, the lower depth of the shoal- water
coral fauna of the West Indies is about 37 metres, approximating to
conditions in the Pacific.

All the corals studied have the capacity of removing sediment from
their surfaces. This is effected by the non-nutrient particles becoming
imbedded in mucus, and by cilia wafting off both.

The food-catching depends on ectodermic nematocysts, ectodermic
cilia, mucus secretion, tentacular action, and mesenteric filaments, which
in many species can be extruded through the column walls. The food
is purely animal plankton.

Strong light is essential for the vigorous growth of shoal-water corals.
The minimum temperature for viability is about 18' 15° C. Reef -corals
are usually, if not always, confined by temperature to water less than
18u metres deep. The limiting of downward growth is also affected by
sediment, illumination, and food supply. The saHnity limits are between
27 and 38 p.c.

The larval forms are able to swim for two to twenty-three days, which
explains the wide distribution. The growth of Orbicella annularis is from
5-7 mm. per year. Any known living coral-reef might have formed
since the disappearance of the last continental ice-sheets.

Physiology of Medusae. J — Naohide Yatsu has made interesting
observations on Charyhdea rastonii, a Cubomedusa common at Misaki.
Transference from diffused light to direct sunlight evokes no change in
the swimming. The concretion is always at the lowest end of the
rhopalium, whatever be the position of the animal. Extraction of the
concretion does not cause any change in swimming. Medusre deprived

* Ann. Inst. Pasteur, xxxi. (1917) pp. 437-41.

t Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. U.S.A., ii. (1916) pp. 95-100.

1 Journ. Coll. Sci. Univ. Tokyo, xl. (1917) pp. 1-11 (5 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 201

of all the rhopalia usually ceased to pulsate. The pulsation centre is
between the eye part and the stalk of therhopalium. The nerve plexus
is probably absent in the upper third of the bell and in the region near
the velarium. The phacellse are nine to ten in number in each inter-
radial corner of the gastral cavity. They are not dendritic. Each
consists of a very elastic stalk and a terminal tuft.

Nerve Conduction in Cassiopea.* — A. G. Mayer finds that the rate
of nerve conduction in this Medusa may be independent of the electrical
conductivity of the solution surrounding the nerve, but is proportional
to the concentration of the sodium, calcium, and potassium cations in
the sea-water. R. S. Lillie is right in stating that the rate of nerve
conduction in Cassiopea in diluted sea-water does not decline in accord
with Freundlich's law of adsorption,

Porifera.

Larva of Horse-sponge.t — C. Vaney and A. Allemand-Martin discuss
the larval development of Hippospongia equina on the Tunis coast. The
larvae escape from the oscula between the end of March and the third
week in June. They are covered with short cilia, except on a limited
pigmented ring posteriorly, where there are very long locomotor flagella.
They seek shade, but not darkness. They are very sensitive to changes
in salinity. The whole surface is covered with minute cylindrical
epithelial cells. Beneath these is a zone of crowded nuclei. The rest of
the body consists of cells mostly fusiform and a number of muscular and
elastic fibrils. There is no cavity.

Buds of Donatia.l — Blanche B. Crozier has studied Bermudian
species of Donatia {Tethya) and their budding. In D. seycheUensis a
typical full-grown bud is spherical or egg-shaped, 2-5 mm. in diameter,
of a bright clear orange colour, borne on a stalk projecting on the
distal side. They contain, like the body of the sponge, megascleres of
the Strongyloxea type, spherasters, oxyasters, and chiasters. The buds
drop off and settle on the bottom. A description is also given of two
varieties of D. ingalli and D. lyncurium.

Desmacidonid Sponges.§ — E. F. Hallraann defines, with much detail
as regard the siliceous spicules, the genera Echinaxia and Rhabdosigma,
with remarks on their probable relationships, and re-descriptions of their
type-species.

Protozoa.

New Genus of Heliozoa.|| — Clifford Dobell describes Oxnerella
maritima g. et sp. n., an Aphrothoracan Heliozoon of very small size
(10 /x to 22 fji in diameter). It is a solitary form, free-floating or

* Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. U.S.A., ii. (1916) pp. 721-6.

t Comptes Rendus, clxvi. (1918) pp. 82-4.

I Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., i. set. 9, pp. 11-18.

§ Proc. Linn. Soc, xlii. (1917) pp. 391-405 (2 pis. and 2 figs.).

U Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., Ixii. (1917) pp. 515-3S (1 pi.).

202 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

creeping, feeding chiefly on vegetable matter. It is spherical, with
numerous very fine radiate pseudopodia (asopodia), with streaming
granules and with axes rooted in a centrally- placed centroplast. It has
no stalk, no contractile vacuole, no gelatinous investment, no spicular
skeleton, no sharply-differentiated ectoplasm and endoplasm. The
nucleus is single, large, excentric, vesicular, with a large karyosome. The
reproduction is by equal binary fission, in which the nucleus divides by
mitosis, the centroplast playing the part of a centrosome.

Entamoeba dysenteriae/"' — C. Mathis and L. Mercier discuss the
great differences in the dimensions of the cysts in this species. The
most frequent dimensions are between 12'5 /x and 14 /a, but there are
some of 10^ and others of 15 ji. Some have suggested that there are
different races within the species, but the authors are'inclined to regard
the differences of size as modificational fluctuations, depending on the
food or the like.

Rhythms in Endomixis.t — L. L. Woodruff has met the criticism
that the re-organization process called endomixis may be peculiar to his
long-pedigreed race of Parammcium aurelia. Data from every culture
studied, isolated from diverse localities (as widely separated as Germany
and Ohio), prove that endomixis is a normal periodic phenomenon which
occurs in all races of the species.

Influence of Environment on Endomixis. f—L. L. Woodruff finds
that general changes in the environment of different races of Paramm-
cium aurelia — e.g. markedly different culture media and temperatures^do
not permanently alter the length of the rhythm or the time between
successive endomictic periods which is characteristic of the species.
Sudden marked changes in the normal culture conditions may initially
hasten the endomixis, but this is soon compensated for. There is a
remarkable synchronism of the endomictic process in all the races bred
simultaneously, regardless of the environmental conditions. The length
of the rhythm and the rhythmic periods are synchronous. But the
" generation-periodicity " — i.e. the number of cell divisions between one
occurrence of endomixis and the next— may be modified to a considerable
extent by the culture conditions which lower the division-rate. The
cessation of endomixis in the experiments was always followed, usually
within a rhythm or two, by the death of the culture involved. Every-
thing points to the conclusion that a periodic occurrence of the definitive
endomictic phenomena is a sine qua no7i for the continued life of the
race.

Genus Loxodes.§ — E. Penard discusses some of the peculiarities of
this remarkable Ciliate. In reference to L. rostrum, he describes, for
instance, the external envelope, the buccal area, the attaching filaments,
the vacuolation of the cytoplasm, the twenty to thirty nuclei, the abrupt

♦ C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, Ixix. (1917) pp. 791-3.
t Biol. Bulletin, xxxiii. (1917) pp. 51-6.
; Biol. Bulletin, xxxiii. (1917) pp. 437-62 (12 figs.).
§ Rev. Suisse Zool., xxv. (1917) pp. 453-89 (12 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY. ETC.

203

disintegration which, after a few hours, leaves no trace of the creature.
In reference to L. striatiis, he deals especially with Miiller's vesicle (a
statocyst with an enclosed statolith), and with the peculiar nuclei and
their division. Penard remains sceptical in regard to Kasanzeff's theory
that L. rostrum can change in L. striatus. As to the unique position of
the genus Penard asks whether it is a relict type like Spirula.

Classification of HaBmosporidia.* — Carlos Franga defines the sub-
order Ha3mosporidia as consisting of Protozoa inhabiting the blood-
corpuscles, either erythrocytes or leucocytes ; with a schizogonic phase
in a Vertebrate and a sporogonic phase in an Invertebrate. The
Invertebrate, in which the sexual part of the cycle occurs, represents the
primary host, and is the vehicle of transmission. Along with Coccidia,
the Hsemosporidia form the order Coccidiomorpha in the class Sporozoa.
The author goes on to define the four families — Hsemogregarinidae,
Plasmodidffi, Piroplasmidse, and Toxoplasmidte, and the genera they
contain. A list is given of the various species recorded, these being
arranged so as to show the hosts.

A provisional classification is submitted : —

non-pigmented

/without fla-
gelliform mi-
' crogametes

in the blood

Hsemosporidia

i.with flagelli-
form micro-
gametes, with
schizogony in
internal organs;
genus Leucocy-
tozoon : family
Hsemamcebidse.

pigmented,
with flagelli-
form micro-
gametes, with
schizogony in
blood cor-
puscles either free or in organs ; genera
Plasmodium, Laverania, Hcemoproteus,
Proteosoma, Hcemocystidium, family
HaemamcBbidaa.

Schizogony within

cysts in internal

organs ; family Hse-

J mogregarinidee ;

2 genera

' Schizogony in cor-
puscles free in cir-
culation or in inter-
nal organs ; family
Piroplasmidse.
9 genera.

\ in organs, non-pigmented without flagelliform
microgametes, with schizogony inside cells ;
genus Toxoplasma, family Toxoplasmidae.

* Journ. Sci. Acad. Sci. Lisboa, i. n.s. (1917) pp. 26-65 (many figs.).

p 2

204 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

BOTANY.

GENERAL,

Including the Anatomy and Physiology of Seed Plants.

Cytology,
Including Cell-Contents.

Mitochondrias of Plant-cells."' — A. Guilliermond publishes a reply-
to some of the objections made to recent theories as to the nature and
function of the mitochondrias of plant-cells. The writer endeavours to
show that the plastids of plant-cells are of the same nature as the mito-
chondrias of animal-cells, and that such being the case, they are
*' organisms of elaboration." After prolonged study of these structures
in the cells of Tulipa and Iris germanica, the author is convinced that
they are identical with those found in animal-cells. They fall into two
categories — viz. short, granular or rod-like bodies, which usually represent
a purely vegetative or resting stage ; or elongated, thin, flexuose chon-
driocontes having the power of elaborating pigment, starch, or fat. When
osmotic equilibrium is disturbed these latter structures swell and assume
the form of vesicles or vacuoles with a thick wall enclosing an aqueous
liquid with numerous refractive granules held in suspension. The author
points out that these observations are identical with those made by
zoologists in connexion with animal-cells. Moreover the behaviour
towards staining reagents is the same. Finally, it appears as a result
of the present work, that the so-called plastids of plant-cells are of the
same nature as the mitochondrias, and share the elaborating functions of
the latter. They are not to be regarded as organisms restricted to
chlorophyll-producing cells, biat as definite organisms of the cytoplasm
and the seat of most diverse elaborations both in plant- and animal-cells.

Nature and Function of Chondriomes.f— P. A. Dangeard pubhshes
a summary of his observations, based upon several years' study of chon-
driomes, which induce him to discredit the theories of those writers who
regard chondriomes as living entities giving rise to the various plasts and
to cell-contents such as starch, oil, etc. According to the author, the
cell encloses (apart from the nucleus) two " sorts of formations — viz. the
plastidome, composed of plasts, or plastids ; and the chondriome, or vacuolar
system. The latter contains in solution a more or less thick substance
— the metachromatin ; both the chondriome and the contained meta-
chromatin are entirely independent of the plastidome, and differ from
the latter in becoming bright red when stained with Cresyl-blue. This

ft

* C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, Ixxx. (1917) pp. 917-24 (2 pis.),
t Comptes Rendus, clxvi. (1918) pp. 439-46 (4 figs.).

ZUOLOG-Y AND BOTANY. MICROSCOPY, ETC. 205

peculiarity in staining makes it possible to follow the diflFerent transfor-
mations of the vacuolar system, and it is found that mitochondrias,
chondriocontes, and chondriomites are transformed so rapidly into each
other, often ramifying and anastomosing into a iine network, that it is
impossible to regard them as being of the nature of plasts. On the
other hand, it is easy to trace the transformation of the elements of the
chondriome into ordinary vacuoles. The metachromatin solution is
conveyed to those parts of the cell where there is least resistance, and
during cell-division is transferred from one cell to another ; it is
opposite in action to the cytoplasmic fluid, and has a certain osmotic
power. The metachromatic corpuscles are formed in the vacuoles at the
exnense of the metachromatin.

Structure and Development.
Vegetative.

Development of Root-tip in Sagittaria.* — R. Soueges contributes
a further note upon the embryogeny of the Alismaceas. The writer has
studied the development of the root-tip of Sagittaria sagittsefolia, and
finds that the low'er cell of the pro-embryonic tetrad gives rise to the
greater part of the hypocotyl, the hypophysis, and the suspensor. The
hypophysis is of complex origin, for it arises from two cells of different
ages. The four initial-cells of the root-cap serve only for the increase
of the number of layers of this tissue ; they divide first by vertical and
subsequently by tangential walls. It would appear that those authors
are wrong who regard these cells as having the same functions as in
other Angiosperms.

The present note will be followed shortly by a full account of the
work done in connexion with the embryogeny of Sagittaria.

Distinctive Characters of Woods of North American Platanus.f
W. D. Brush has studied the wood of three species of North American
" sycamores" — viz. Platanus occidentaUs, P. Wrightii, and P. racemosa —
in order to discover some distinguishing characters which would serve
for identification. The chief of these characters are the sapwood, the
heartwood, and the size of the pith-rays. There is no well-defined limit
between the sapwood and the heartwood, but the former occupies only a
thin zone and is usually of a different colour. In the first species the
sapwood is light brown and the heartwood is of a reddish tinge ; in the
other species the sapwood is yellowish and tiie heartwood is darker, but
slightly tinged with red. In the eastern species the annual rings are
less well-defined than in the other species, but the pith-rays are larger
and darker. In tangential section the pith-rays are broadest horizon-
tally and lowest vertically in P. occidentaUs ; . in P. racemosa they are
narrowest horizontally and highest vertically. In P. occidentaUs the

* Comptes Rendus, clxvi. (1918) pp. 49-52.

t Bot. Gaz., Ixiv. (1917) pp. 480-96 (7 pis. and 3 figs.).

206 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

average width of the pith-rays is 14 cells, or 0*29 mm., with an average
height of 1 ' 36 mm., or 60 cells. In P. Wrightii the average width is
8 cells, or 0"16 mm., with average height of 84 cells, or 1 "84 mm. In
P. racemosa the average width is 5 cells, or 0 ■ 9 mm., with an average
height of 107 cells, or 2 "36 mm.

Resin Secretion in Balsamorrhiza.'^ — E. C, Faust has studied the
secretion of resin in Balsamorrhiza sagittata in order to discover the
origin of the secretory tissues and the cause of the secretion. This
species is the most prominent plant of the inter-mountain of Wyoming
(British Columbia), and depends upon the growth of the root-stock for
propagation ; flowers are produced in the third or fourth season. The
radicle is of the tetarch type. The resin-canals arise in two concentric
rows above and within the root-stock, with radial canals between the
longitudinal ones of the primary series. In the lowest parts of the root-
stock and in the subsidiary roots only the outer series of canals is found.
There is also a double series of canals in the stem and leaves, viz. an
outer series in cavities of the cortex opposite the interfascicular regions,
and a second inner series. The root-canals and the stem-canals have a
separate origin, and remain distinct. The canals do not appear until
resin has been formed in the meristem. Balsamoresene and balsamo-
resinic acid are formed from inulin in this species, probably by
polymerization and reduction. The resene and the resinic acid derived
from it are both toxic in character. Secretion is dependent on physio-
logical activity in the meristem, inulin being used in anabolism, and the
resine and the resinic acid being waste products. The two latter
substances are transferred to schizogenously-formed secretory-canals. It
thus appears that " a polysaccharide, inulin, produced during photosyn-
thesis, is broken down, thus causing a bye-product, balsamoresene, to be
produced. This resene is then changed to resinic acid."

Reproductive.

Development of Pollen in Salvia-f— P. Guerin contributes a short
note upon the stamen and the development of the pollen in Salvia. As
the result of studying the different stages of growth in numerous species,
the writer concludes that the development of the pollen varies with the
species. Sometimes the pollen mother-cells form one layer and at other
times two layers. The inferior branch of the connective may or may
not be fertile ; in S. splendens it is rarely so ; in S. canariensis it is
frequently so ; while in a number of other species it is the normal condi-
tion. The loculus is always smaller than that of the upper branch and
may be reduced to a single pollen-sac, as in *S'. canariensis, in S. officinalis,
S. interriipta, 8. triloba, 8. plebeia, etc., there are two sacs. A number
of species, including 8. officinalis, must therefore be regarded as having
bilocular anthers with loculi of unequal size.

* Bot. Gaz., Ixiv. (1917) pp. 441-79 (4 pis. and 2 figs.),
t Comptfes Eendus, clxv. (1917) pp. 1009-12.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 207

Physiology.
Nutrition and Growth.

Mechanism of Overgrowth in Plants.* — E. F. Smith has experi-
mented with Bacterium tumefaciens, the crown-gall organism, with the
object of ascertaining if the growth of tumours in plants and animals is
due to chemical substances liberated in the tissues of the host by para-'
sites. By means of careful injections from specially prepared cultures
the author has succeeded in causing abnormal growths in sufficient
quantity to allow of chemical analysis, and has proved that with this
species of bacterium the following substances are produced and conveyed
to the host-plant : — Ammonia, amines, aldehyd, alcohol, acetone, acetic
acid, formic acid, carbonic acid. It has also been proved that ammonia,
amines, aldehyd, acetic acid and formic acid are able to induce the
growth of tumours. The growths produced were small, but it seems
reasonable to believe that if the stimulus were continuous, as would be
the case if a living organism were attacked by a bacterium, the growth
would continue. The actual mechanism of these growths is primarily
due to a physical cause — namely, " to an increase in the osmotic pressure
due to the heaping up locally of various soluble substances excreted by
the bacteria as a result of their metabolism." These growths may be
regarded as continually modified wound-reactions due to the presence of
a parasite.

In conclusion, the writer draws attention to the important bearing
which these discoveries may have upon such problems as plant-diseases
and monstrosities, various problems of modification by environment, the
distribution of dormant germ-cells among somntic cells, and the etiology
of various human and other animal tumours.

Injection Experiments on Plants.! — Y. Yendo has experimented
with numerous vascular and non-vascular plants in order to discover
whether " a certain amount of a substance injected into a certain part of
the plant-body is conducted through the entire plant " ; also, if " the
effect of injection differs according to the kinds of plants, organs, and
tissues." The injections were carried out by means of a medical syringe,
and aqueous solutions of lithium-nitrate, copper-sulphate, eosin, and
aniline-violet were used. The author finds that the rate of conduction
of an injected fluid varies according to the nature of that fluid, lithium-
nitrate being the most easily conducted and aniline-violet the least.
Injected liquids usually pass to those organs where transpiration is most
active ; lithium-nitrate when injected into the stem travels more fre-
quently to the leaves than to the inflorescences ; when injected into the
root or cotyledon it passes to the shoot ; when injected into water-plants
it passes chiefly to the aerial portions, little or none going to the sub-
merged parts. Injections into deciduous trees during winter travel much
less freely than when the tree is in full leaf. Upward conduction is
most frequent, downward conduction less so, and transverse conduction

* Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc. (Philadelphia) Ivi. No. 6 (1917) pp. 437-44.
t Journ. Coll Sci. Tokyo, xxxviii. No. 6 (1917) pp. 1-46 (2 pis.).

208 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

is very feeble. Injections are conducted mainly through the xylem, less
through the phloem, and to a limited extent through other tissues. The
rate of conduction varies according to the concentration of the injection,
the solution of least concentration travelling at the slowest rate. A few
fungi were able to conduct injections, but the algffi scarcely conduct any
of them, although a certain amount of diffusion may take place. It is
possible to trace the course of vascular bundles by means of injection.

CRYPTOGAMS.

Pteridophyta
(By A. Gepp, M.A., F.L.S.)

Phylogeny of the Pteroideae."' — F. 0. Bower, continuing his studies
in the phylogeny of the Filicales, discusses the Pteroidese. In summa-
rizing his results, he states that : 1. The gtelar ontogeny of Scldzaea and
Anemia starts from protostely {Lygodium), and shows successive steps
of stelar advance, namely, medullated monostele {S. pusilla and S.
rupestris) ; ectophloic siphonostely (-S. fl?ic^o/o/na) ; amphiphloicsiphono-
stely or solenostely {Anemiorrhiza) ; dictyostely {En-anemia and Mohria).
In Schizsea rupestris and S. digitata the sporangia are of marginal origin ;
and the later-formed indusium originates superficially below the spor-
angia. 2. Within the Fterideae of Prantl are two probably distinct
lines of phylesis — the first called " Pteridese bi-indusintae," the second
'' Pteridese uni-indusiatse." With the latter (Cheilanthoid) series the
present paper is not concerned ; the former (Pterid) series includes
Lindsaya, Psesia, Pferidium, Lonchitis, Histiopteris, Anopteris, Pteris,
Acrostichum, and is traceable from a two-lipped Dicksonioid origin.
3. Lindsaya has a primitive type of stele, and also has a fusion-sorus
which is actually marginal ; and the indusial flaps originate superficially
below it ; and the sporangia, at first gradate, later become mixed. In
Dictyoxiphium the fusion-sorus differs in the absence of the upper
(adasial) indusium. 4. The fusion-sorus of Pteridium is marginal in
origin, with two indusial flaps ; the gradate sporangia soon assume a
mixed condition. 5. Paesia has a, typical solenostele ; the marginal
sorus is usually two-lipped, but shows inconstancy of the inner (abaxial)
indusium. 6. Lonchitis is intermediate between the bi-indusiate types
and the genus Pteris. 7. Pteris {Histiopteris) incisa closely resembles
Pteridium in habit ; it is advanced as regards scales and venation, but
less complex in stelar condition. Its fusion-sorus fluctuates from
exact marginal origin, and the inner indusium is absent. The sporangia,
at first basipetal, become mixed. 8. Pteris (excluding Doryoptens) has
scales as well as hairs, is more or less solenostelic, has a single or double
strap leaf -trace, and reticulate venation. The fusion-sorus is superficial
in origin ; and the inner (abaxial) indusium is absent. The succession
of sporangia is mixed. In all these characters there is an advance
from the Lindsaya- Psesia type. 9. Acrostichum praestantissimum and

* Ann. Bot., xxxii. (1918) pp. 1-68 (43 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 209

A. aureuni appear to be acrostichoid derivations of Pieris, from some
Litotrorhia type. 10. Thus, in the Pterid series either the outer (adaxial)
or the inner (abaxial) indusium may be abortive. Steps of abortion of
the inner indusium are seen in the following DicksonioideEe—Z^e/Mis/as^/^/Vz,
HypoJepis, PoUjpodium punctatum, and Monachosorum subdigitatum. In
Hypolepis and Monachosorum the outer (adaxial) indusium may receive
a vascular supply from the receptacle, and appear flattened aa a marginal
lobe of the pinnula. Phyletically Hypolepis and Monachos^orwn are
derivatives of the Dicksonioid-Dennstjedtioid series. {Acrophorus and
Cystopteris are distinguished from these by their scales and advanced
dictyostely, and are related to the Nephrodioid ferns.) 11. The large
series of the Dicksonioids are characterized by the sori maintaining their
identity as discrete developments on the separate endings of the veins.
They have dermal hairs, not scales, excepting their Davallioid derivatives.
TheDicksonioids probably sprang ultimately from some Schizteoid source,
through types of the nature of Lorsomopsis and Thyrsopteris, and cul-
minated in the Davallioid sequence. 12. The Pterid series are distinguished
from the Dicksonioids by the lateral fusion of their marginal sori, which
are linked together by lateral commissures. They are related to the
Dicksonioids as a collateral branch, attaching probably in the neighbour-
hood of Microhpia ; and they culminated in Acrostichum. 13. The
Cheilanthoids, though usually ranked with the Pterids, have yet to be
studied as to whether they have any near phyletic relationships. 14. All
the ferns studied for the present memoir belong to the Marginales. In
some cases the sorus has slid from a marginal to a superficial position.
15. In the Superficiales the sorus-slide occurred so early in their descent
that the two sequences must be regarded as phyletically distinct, notwith-
standing all analogies.

Evolution of Branching in the Filicales.* — B. Sahni publishes
some observations on the evolution of branching in the Filicales. The
most important progress of this evolution has been in specialization
for vegetative propagation ; but subsidiary efforts have been made in
the direction of epiphytism {Nephrolepis volubiUs) and of food or water
storage (iV. ttiberosa, etc.). It is found that the branching of ferns
may be arranged in a series beginning with those in which the rhizome
divides into two more or less equal bra'nches, and ending with forms in
which the proximal part of one of the branches attains a great length
and bears either reduced leaves (Struthiopteris, etc.), or none at all
(Nephrolepis). This portion, a stolon, serves to remove the leafy branch-
apex away from the mother-axis and sustain it until it forms an
independent root-system. The process is carried to an extreme in
Nephrohpis by the production of a large number of lateral branches,
each of which is a potential individual plant. The view that this
elaborated form of branching is derived from the simple dichotomous
type, and is connected with it by an unbroken series of transitions, is
corroborated by a study of the branching of ferns from the point of
view of their vascular anatomy. In the latter case a series of transi-
tions is found parallel to the former. When the growing apex of a

* N»w Phjtologist, xvi. (1917) pp. 1-23 (figs.).

210 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

fern stem divides, the resulting growing points may continue to grow
simultaneously (dichotomy), or one of them may at once become dormant,
while the other continues its growth in the line of the original axis
(monopodial axis) ; or, thirdly, the dormancy of one of the growing
points may be delayed for a variable period. The second case is derived
from the first and involves the sacrifice of one branch for the good of
the other ; the third case is intermediate. But there is no parallelism
between the evolution of the modes of branching on the one hand and
the evolution of the plants themselves on the other ; the two processes
have been independent of each other. Dichotomy still persists among
the higher ferns, while some of the most primitive ferns (Ophioglossacese)
show an advanced monopodial type of branching. The monopodial
type of branching has been derived from the dichotomous by a process
of retrogressive evolution in the basipetal direction, involving the succes-
sive intercalation, at the base of the branch, of a series of stages, each
morphologically less complex than the preceding. This process naturally
finds its full illustration in forms with reticulate steles. The basal
protostele of the specialized branch is therefore a coenogenetic feature,
not strictly primitive. The departure from dichotomy was entered
upon at a very early period in the history of the Filicales.

Viewing the group of Filicales as a whole it may be said that the
branches do not hold any regular position with respect to the leaves,
and where the branches do arise in some relation to leaves, this associa-
tion is, in its evolutionary origin, a secondary phenomenon attributable
to possible biological advantages, one of which may be the protection of
the young bud. In such cases the stele of the axillary branch may
arise independently of the subtending leaf-trace, or may sometimes be
confluent with it at base. As to adventitious buds on the fronds and
the formation of new individuals from them, this is the most recently
evolved method of branching ; but it is difficult to relate it to the usual
method, in which the branches always spring from buds laid down at
the growing apex of the mother-axis.

Cone of Selaginella pallidissima.* — S. L. Ghose describes the
external morphology of the cone of Selaginella })aUidisswia. It is a
branched structure up to 5 cm. long. The sporophylls are very little
differentiated from the ordinary vegetative leaves and are inserted quite
loosely on the axis, so that the cone does not at all form a separate com-
pact structure. The sporophylls of the upper plane are quite sterile,.
and only those of the lower plane have sporangia, one in the axil of each
sporophyll. Megasporangia and microsporangia are distributed indis-
criminately on the cone. Sometimes megaspores are unequal in size.
Microsporangia are saddle-shaped. The cone can be regarded as a very
primitive one on account of its big size, branched nature, loose insertion
of sporophylls, little differentiation of the latter from ordinary foliage
leaves, and indiscriminate distribution of megasporangia and micro-
sporangia on the axis. The absence of any dorsal flap or ridge on the
comparatively simple sporophylls of S. pallidissima and a comparison of
the more comple:^ sporophylls of S. spinosa, S. Emmeliana, S. serpens^

* Journ, Bombay Nat. Hist. Soc, xxv. (1917) pp. 284-9 (1 pi.).

• ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 211

jS. Martensii, S. Kraussiana, S. chrysocaulos and S. chrysorrhizos, tend to
show that the presence of the dorsal flap in the sporophylls of Selaginella
is not primitive, but has been evolved in the genus

• Asplenium Seelosii Leyb.* — L. Diels discusses the ecology of
Aspleninm Seelosii, having studied the earlier development stages in the
Dolomites. The hairs of the primary leaves consist of cylindrical cells
of equal diameter, and contain chlorophyll grains ; they serve for the
absorption of dew. A necessary condition for the development of the
fern is the association of algae and moss, namely, Eadadium verticillatum
and colonies of Nostoc in the clefts of the Dolomite. The young plant
turns its leaves to the illuminated surface of the rock-wall, the orienta-
tion being brought about by means of the stipes. It curves itself
downwards in the upper third, and thereby brings the lamina into the
light. A plant 6 cm. high has a root system which penetrates 20 cm.

■deep into the rock. The luxuriantly produced spores are mostly distri-
buted by small animals (wood-lice). The dead fronds reiiiain long on
the plant. The prothallium grows in clefts containing clay, the fronds
accommodating themselves to the dry rock surface. The species appears
to "have a defined habitat between Etsch and Tagliamento. Since the
species belongs to the genetic Mediterranean element of the Alpine flora,
it is possible that it occurs as Christ states in the Catalonian Pyrenees.

Bryophyta.
(By A. Gepp.)

European Hepaticae.f — K. Miiller publishes a further part of his-
Liverworts of Germany, Austria and Switzerland. In it he deals with
the puzzling genus Cephaloziella, following Douin's grouping, but without
according generic rank to the separate groups. Critical remarks are
given for G. striatula, C. Limprichtii, C. Bryhnii, C. bifidioides, and
C. dentata. A new diagnosis and figures are given of C. ohtusa, an
ally of C. integerrima. Under Calypogeia it is shown that C. paludosa
is in no way worthy of specific rank, and that the sporogonium-valves of
G. sphagnicola are liable to many variations of cell-structure. Under
Pleurozia it is stated that the sterile tubular-organs are also found on
the European species. In this part begins Section viii of the whole
work, which is devoted to the geographical and ecological distribution
of the European liverworts, tip to the present time lack of definite
knowledge as to the limits and true relations of the various species, as
well as their general and European distribution, has prevented a complete
treatment of their distribution as a whole. The author shows that
liverworts, like the higher plants and the ferns, have strictly Hmited
areas, and that only a few are cosmopolitan. One of the most important
results of this study of distribution is the conclusion that liverworts

* Verb. Bot. Ver. Prov. Brandenburg, Ivi. (1914) pp. 178-83. See also Bot. Cen-
tralbl.. cxxxiv. (1917) p. 330.

+ Rabenborst's Kryptogamen-Flora, Band. vi. : Lebermoose. Leipzig : 1916,
pp. 785-848 (figs.). See also Bot. Centralbl.. cxxxiv, (1917) pp. 845-7.

212 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

differ as regards their geographical distribution absolutely from phanero-
gams and mosses, and follow more the lines of the lower organisms,
notably algae. For in contrast to the two higher groups named they
have hardly developed a single endemic mountain species since early
Tertiary times. Another point of interest is the markedly large number
of species common to Europe and N. America, and apparently to Asia.
The various regions are discussed and compared with the flora of similar
regions in other continents and islands ; and the results are given in
tabular form at the end.

North American Hepaticae.* — A. W. Evans publishes notes on the
structure, life-history and distribution of Scalia Hookeri, Harfcmthus
Flotowianus, and Galypogeia fissa, which are recorded for the first time
from New England, and on the structure and systematic position of
Rkcia Frostii, whether or not it should be transferred to Ricdella.

Indian Liverworts.t — S. R. Kashyap publishes an account of thirty-
one thalloid hepatics collected by him in the Western Himalayas from
Mussoorie to Kashtwar in 1912-14, Structural and systematic details
have already been published in vols, xiii, xiv of " The New Phytologist."
Among the novelties in the present paper are two new genera : —
1. Mindal pangiensis, named after Mindal temple in Pangie, where it
occurs commonly at an altitude of 8000 feet ; it has affinities with
Reboulia and Plagiochasma. (2) Sauchia spongiosa, named after Sauch
Pass, 10,000 feet, forms a connecting link between the Astroporeai of
Leitgeb and the Exormotheca line. Two new species of Fimbriaria,
one each of Grimaldia and Athalamia, and fiive of Riccia are
described. The author holds that his view as to the origin of the
Ricciete from a Targionia-like ancestor is confirmed by a comparative
study of these new species of Riccia. Cyathodium represents onS step
in the shifting of the archegonia to the dorsal surface. By a further
forward growth of the thallus in Riccia pathankotensis the archegonia
become shifted into a broad dorsal channel, and the involucre is sup-
pressed. The most reduced stage is represented by R. sanguinea, which
has no trace of a dorsal channel, and an absence of scales and tuberculate
rhizoids. But it is possible that Riccia has originated from two sources,
for the structure of the section Ricciella resembles that of Corsinia.

The author % in completing his paper gives a list of fifteen more
species, among which is a new species of each of the following genera :
Fimbriaria, Plagiochasma, RieJla, Aneura, Metzgeria, Anthoceros.

South African Hepatic8e.§ — T. R. Sim, while collecting materials
for a handbook of South African Bryophyta, gives a general introduc-
tory account of the macroscopic structure of the native hepaticai, and of
their ecology and reproduction, with a discussion of the questions of
variation and migration, and a history of 'South African hepaticology.

* Rhodora, xix. (1917) pp. 263-72.

t Journ. Bombay Nat. Hist. Soc, xxiv. (1916) pp. 343-50 (5 figs ).

X Journ. Bombay Nat. Hift. Soc.xxv. (1917) pp. 279-81.

§ South African Journ. Sci., xii. (1916) pp. 426-47.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 213

He has also drawn up a synopsis of 47 genera and 163 species, furnish-
ing short descriptions of the orders, families and genera, but not of the
species.

Pottia."' — C. Warnstorf publishes some studies on the genus Fottia,
as a preliminary to a monograph of Pottia Ehrh. (sens. str.). In an
introduction the author gives a general account of the distribution and
organization of Pottia in a restricted sense, and then deals with the
systematic arrangement. Material from the Berlin Botanical Museum
is discussed, including Gomphoneuron LorenizH Warnst., and Bidijmodon
argentiniensis Warnst., a new species, as well as a large number of speci-
mens which lack sporogonia. Pottia Macleana Rehm. is placed in
Pterygoneurum, and is described and figured. In a Latin key the genus
is divided into RhynchostegiiB and ConostegiaB, and each is further
divided into Gymnostoma^ and Odontostomse ; thus arranging the
species under four distinctly marked morphological groups. Diagnoses
of each species follow with critical notes, and figures of the distinguish-
ing characters. The circle of P. Heimii is made to include as new
varieties or forms six hitherto independent species. Four species are
sunk into P. truncata as varieties. Three new species are described.

Mosses of North-west Germany.! — E,. Timm gives a list of species
new to the region of Hamburg, Schleswig-Holstein, Llibeck, and the
Liineburg Heath, including a few Liverworts. Fontinalis laxa Warnst.
is recorded in fruit for the first time. To many of the records are
appended notes of a morphological and biological cliaracter, notably
Campylopus brevipiJus, Cratoneuron decipiens, Fissidens exiUs,F.pusillus^
and 2'etraplodon mnioides. OUgotrichum hercynicum is recorded from a
clayey ditch on the Liineburg Heath.

Thallophyta.

AlgSR.

(By Mrs. Ethel S. Gepp.)

Caledonian Phytoplankton.| — E. Telling publishes a preliminary
account of Caledonian phytoplankton. Wesenberg-Lund has divided
Europe into four regions, one of which is N. and W. Europe. The
author regards England as being typical of this region, as the English
fresh-waters contain quantitatively little, qualitatively very rich, phyto-
plankton. A large number of Desmids and Protococcoideoe are present,
a considerable Diatom flora, and a quite inconsiderable Myxophycete
flora. The Baltic plankton contains fewer species of algag, which almost
all occur in England ; the association, however, shows a quite distinct

* Htidwigia, Iviii. (1916) pp. 35-80, 81-152 (67 figs). See also Bot. Centralbl.,
cxxxiv. (1917) pp. 332-3.

fAUgem. Bot. Zeitschr., xxii. (1916) pp. 17-27. See also Bot. Centralbl.,
cxxxv. (1917) pp. 45-6.

X Svensk. Bot. Tidskr., x. (1916) pp. 506-19. See also Bot. Centralbl., cxxxv.
(1917) pp. 88-4.

214 SUMMARY OF GUKRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

picture. Very few species of Desmids and green algse occur, and these
almost disappear in summer. On the other hand, a Diatom flora
flourishes in spring, autumn and winter, poor in quality, but very rich in
quantity. In summer the Baltic fresh-waters are characterized by a
monotonous Myxophyceae flora, very rich in quantity, which mostly
^appears as water-bloom. The author has examined waters in the
neighbourhood of Stockholm and finds therein both types of plankton.
Most of them are typically Baltic, but two contained English and
Norwegian species. The author maintains that this difference of
plankton vegetation depends on the peculiar composition of the lakes.
Waters in thickly inhabited districts are fouled by nitrogen-containing
matter, which encourages the development of Myxophycea. The Baltic
waters are in districts which have been built over for a long time ; while
the mountain waters in the highlands of England, Norway and Sweden
are poor in nitrogen, and are therefore not inhabited by Myxophyceae,
but by Chlorophyceffi. The author regards the following species as the
most leading features of the Caledonian plankton-formation : — Arthro-
■d'^smus Incus, A. quiriferus, A. crassiis, Cosrnarium contractum var.
•eUipsoideum, Spondiplosium planum, Staurastrum aretiscon, S. lunatum
var. planctonicum, Xanthidium antilopseum, Crueigenia rectangularis and
var. irregularis, Quadrigula closterioides, Stichoglaa Dcederleinii, Ceraiium
curvirostra, and Tabellaria Jiocculosa va.r. pelagica.

Heterodinium in the Adriatic* — J. Schiller describes the differences
between the genera Peridinium and Heterodinium. Two new species are
•described : H. crassipes, which occurs in very salt water in Dalmatian
waters, rarely in the high seas, never on the Italian coast waters, steno-
haline ; H. Kofoidi, with very transparent frustule, found throughout
the entire middle and south Adriatic, at a depth of 10 m., in autumn
and winter, strongly euryhaline and stenotherm, and, therefore^ with a
wide power of physiological adaptation.

ChaBtoceros criophilus.f — L. Mangin, having studied the plankton
•of the Antarctic Expedition of the " Pourquoi-pas ? " and of the " Scotia,"
finds that the true Chsetoceros criophilus Castr., has nothing to do with
the Arctic forms attributed to it, and he denies the presence of the true
v. criophilus in the Arctic zone. He gives a detailed description of the
species, with figures, illustrating among other points the insertioa of the
horns. In a later paper the author treats of the forms designated by
authors as C. criophilus. The G. criophilus of Gran is considered a new
species, to which the author gives the name of C. concavicortiis, with a
variety currens (Cleve). The only true C. criophilus is the species
•described by Castracane in the Diatoms of the " Challenger " Expedi-
tion, and it differs from the Arctic G. concavicornis by the mode of the
insertion of the horns. The latter species is most closely allied to
C. peruvianus, and its synonyms are : C. criophilus Joerg., G. Brightwdlii
■Gran, G. borealis var. Brightivellii Cleve, and G. peruvianus Vanhoffen.

* Arch. Protisteuk., xxxvi. (1916) pp. 209-13 (4 figs.). See also Bot. Gentralbl. ,
•cxxxv. (1917) p. 52.

t Comptes Rendus, clxiv. (1917) pp. 704-9 (4 figs.) ; 770-4 (.3 fig?.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 215

Diatoms from Hanover and the Harz.* — A. Peter gives a list of
Diatoms from Southern Hanover and the Harz Mountains, with their
distribution. C'Omparisons are made between the different localities,
and critical repiarks are o:iven. Twenty-eight genera and 173 species
and many forms are recorded.

Changing Diatoms of Devil's Lake, North Dakota.f — C. J, Elmore
discusses the phenomenon of the changing diatoms in Devil's Lake,
North Dakota. The lake is passing through a rapid transition, having
been formerly a fresh- water lake fed by streams. The water is now
becoming salt, but the salinity is quite different from that of the sea.
The author identified 56 species of diatoms. Of these, 25 are genuine
fresh-water species ; 20 are found in fresh or brackish water; 2 in fresh,
brackish, or salt-water ; 2 in brackish or salt-water ; and 4: marine only.
The importation of the marine species can be explained by the action of
migratory birds. The greatest anomaly is presented by the 25 species
of fresh-water diatoms, for there is nothing in their appearance to indicate
that they have been in any way modified by their change of environ-
ment. This fact would tend to confirm what has been observed else-
where, namely, that diatoms adapt themselves readily to changes in
environment.

Myxophycese of North America. J — J. E. Tilden publishes a synopsis
of the Blue-green algaj. The first part of her work is devoted to an
account of the group under the following headings : Collecting Blue-
green alga?, structure, reproduction, water-supply alga?, thermal algte,
calcareous algse. Descriptions are then given of the families, Chroo-
coccacete, Oscillatoriaceai, Nostocacese, Scytonemacese, Stigonemacese,
and Eivulariaceae. Then follow keys to the genera and species, with
references to the figures on the plates. A glossary and bibliography
complete the work.

Algae of Michigan. § — E. N. Transeau publishes a list of algse
collected by himself and others in the ponds, lakes, and streams. The
species are for the most part new records for the State. In addition to
the records, there are some indications regarding the distribution of the
fresh-water alga? that are of interest. The variety and abundance of
the Green algas decrease notably as we go northward, while the Blue-
green algie form an increasingly conspicuous part. Zygnema cyano-
spermum Cleve, previously reported only from Greenland, is recorded.
One new species and two new varieties are described.

Desmid Flora of Dartmoor. || — G. T. Harris has explored five
districts of middle and north Dartmoor — Metherall, Gidleigh, Lydford,
Haytor, Postbridge— and gives a tabular census of the 391* species and
varieties, with their distribution and relative frequency ; also a general

* Nachr. kgl. Gesell. Wiss. Gottingen, 1913, pp. 1-83. See also Bot. Centralbl.,
cixxv. (1917) pp. 68-9.

t Bot. Gaz., Ixv. (1918) pp. 186-90.

i Trans. Amer. Micr. Soc, xxxvi. (1917) pp. 179-266 (13 pis.).

§ Ohio Journ. Sci., xvii. (1917) pp. 217-32.

II Journ. Quekett Micr. Club, xiii. (1917) pp. 247-76 (2 pis.).

21G SUMMARY OF CUHREMT EKSEARCHES RELATING TO

introduction, a number of special notes. About a score of the plants
are figured. Previous literature on the subject is very scanty, and the
species recorded very few. The bogs explored by the author are mostly
situated at altitudes of about 12-1300 ft.

Meringosphsera.* — J. Schiller writes on new species of Jleringo-
sphsern and the deposition of silica in the membrane The species
described by Lohmann are discussed and partly figured. 31. mediterranea
was found by the author in the northern part of the Adriatic, descending
to 20 metres deep, sparingly distributed, living also in brackish water.
Two new species, M. Henseni and 31. triseta (with tliree bristles) are
described. The former is a stenohaline, purely salt-water species, the
latter a typical brackish -water form. 31. divergens at Messina is not
euryhaline. Wille places the genus in Chloropbycete (Oocystacea^). It
is the first green alga recorded with a siliceous membrane. Phseodactylum
Bohlin has a weakly silicified membrane and hardly belongs to the
Chlorophycese, The three species of 3Ieringosphsera recorded from the
Adriatic are described and figured.

Algae of the Hawaiian Archipelagcf — V. MacCaughey has made
a study of the algae of the Hawaiian Archipelago, during a residence of
ten years in the islands, and publishes here his results. He quotes also
the records of other collectors, notably Tilden, Reed and Lemmermann.
In the first part of his paper he discusses coral reefs, Kauai and
Oahu, ecological zones on reef, tides, coralline algee, tidal pools,
coral reefs on other islands, Taro loi and rice-fields, ditches and flumes,
caves, mountain streams, hot springs and thermal waters, summit bogs,
brackish waters, halophytes, fish-ponds, phytoplankton, deep-water
forms, and endemism. In the second part he gives a list of all the
species recorded, with the habitat and geographical distribution. Items
of special interest, such as economic uses, are also noted. The chief aim
of the whole paper is to summarize available data, and thus to indicate
the need for more detailed and intensive investigations.

Calcareous Algae from Malta. | — C. SamsonoflF-ArufTo publishes the
result of her examination of four samples of calcareous colonies of
Lithothamnion collected by Prof, de Stefani in different localities in
Malta, especially in the Helvetian limestone of the Middle Miocene. The
paper also contains an account of the first sample coming from Kala
(Gozo), in which the authoress recognizes the existence of Lithothamnion
intprmedium Kjellm., and of Goniolithon 3Iartellii Sams.

Marine Algae of Denmark, §— L. N. Rosenvinge publishes the
second part of the Rhodophycete in his important monograph on the

* Arch. Protistenk., xxxvi. (1916) pp. 198-208 (9 figs.). See also Bot. Centralbl.,
cxxxv. (1917) p. 53.

t Bot. Gaz., Ixv. (1918) pp. 42-57, 121-49.

X Rend. R. Accad. Lincei, ser. 5, xxvi. (1917) pp. 564-9. See also Nuova
Notarisia, xxix. (1918) pp. 48-9.

§ D. kgl. Dansk. Vidensk. Selsk. Skrift., ser. 7, vii. (Kjobenhavn, 1917) pp.
154-284 (2 pis. and 128 Sgs. in text).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 217

marine algae of Denmark, In the notes appended to each record the
author discusses their structure and development in great detail, and
adds a large number of new figures to illustrate his full descriptions.
New species are described in several genera.

Fungi.
(By A. LoRRAiN Smith, F.L.S.)

Morphology and Cytology of the Sexual Organs of Phytophthora
erythroseptica Pethyb. •' — P. A. Murphy has made a careful cytological
study of the whole process of fertilization in this fungus. He confirms
tlie work done by Pethybridge, and adds further details.

Study of Phytophthora. t — J. Rosenbaum has published a systematic
study of the various species of each genus, giving the morphological
and other characters that are of importance in determination of the
species. He decides that the separation and relationship of species
should be made on the aggregate of characters, it being borne in mind"
that the proportionate value to be attached to each character must
necessarily vary. In measuring conidia, the ratio of length to width is
of extreme importance. On the lines indicated he has drawn up a key
for the determination of the various species.

Development of Thraustotheca.| — This water-mould, which was first
discovered in Germany, appeared recently at Great Barrington, Mass.,
and a cultural development study of it has been made by W. H. Weston.
The results include the formation of sporangia and spores, and of the
sexual organs and their spores. The writer finds a resemblance to
Achlya rather than to Dictyuchus.

Anomalies in Mucorinl.§ — F.andMadameMoreau have experimented
with SporocUnia grandis on a variety of culture media, and have shown
the very great variations in spore sizes and forms thus produced. Great
diffei-ences in size were also noted -in the sporangiophores and in the
zygospores.

In cultures of Mucor Mucedo a sporangium was produced without a
columella, and with spores occupying the upper parts of the stalk as well
as the sporangium.

Life-history and Poisoning Properties of Claviceps Paspali.|| —
The forage grass Paspalum dilatatum is much used for feeding cattle in
the States, but it has been found that the cattle are liable to be poisoned

* Ann. Bot., xxxii. (1918) pp. 115-53 (2 pis.).

t Journ. Agric. Research, viii. (1917) pp. 233-76 (7 pis. and 13 figs).

t Ann. Bot., xxxii. (1918) pp. 155-73 (2 pis. and 2 figs.).

§ Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxxiii. (1918) pp. 84-49 (12 figs.).

jl Journ. Agric. Research, vii. (1916) pp. 401-5 (2 pis. and 1 fig.).

Q

218 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

by the sclerotia of Glaviceps which develop in the grass heads. In some
pastures 90 p.c. of old grass heads showed infection. The sclerotia
when mature are globular in shape. They fall to the ground in autumn,
and germinate in spring when the grasses begin to flower, the pistil of
the flower being attacked by the germinating spores, which are probably
carried by insects. The fungus produces a peculiar nervousness, and in
the end may be fatal. Moving pastures one or more times, as mature
sclerotia threaten to become abundant, is an effective method of prevent-
ing poisoning.

Effect of Fusarium on Potato Tubers.* — L. A. Hawkins has
shown by a series of experiments in connexion with the nutrition of
fungi, that generally the fungi in the potato " reduce the contents of
sugar, both sucrose and reducing sugar, pentosans, galactans and dry
matter. The starch and methyl pentosans are apparently not affected
appreciably, and the crude-fibre content was not reduced." It was
shown that the two species Fusarium radicicola and F. oxysporum, both
of them tuber-rot fungi, secrete sucrase, maltase, xylanase and diastase,
and that the diastase is apparently incapable of acting on unaltered
starch grains. When potato starch is gelatinized it is then readily
hydrolyzed by the enzymes. The fungi grow for the most part in the
cell-walls and are thus set ii;i close contact with the starch grains.

Aspergillus niger Group.-j- — C. Thorn and J. N. Currie give us a
cultural study of the species grouped round Aspergillus niger. They
grow under a wide range of cultural conditions. The range of morpho-
logical characters point to the existence of a series of closely related
strains in which the differences are shown in measurement of parts,
intensities of colour, and quantitative differences i^i the production of
particular reactions. The writers gather from their results that A, niger,
as commonly understood, belongs to an unstable or mutating group,
comparable to OEnothera spp. They reject the generic name 'SS/er/^-
matoctjstis,'" based on the character of the sterigmata ; they see no
evidence for separating the species of that genus from Aspergillus. They
have grouped the many species described under representatives of
sections. These are : A. nanus, the diminutive form ; A. niger, with
primary sterigmata, 20-30 /a in length ; A.pluenicis, with three sterigmata,
about 50 /x in length ; A. pulverulent us, or A. Strychni, with very long
sterigmata ; A. Carhonarius, with long sterigmata and very long conidia,
from 5*5/Ato 10*5/Ain diameter.

Endophyllum Spores.j — F. and Madame Moreau find that the
gecidiospore of E. Euphorhise-silvaticae is constantly bi-nucleate. The
two nuclei pass into the promycelium, and there divide. There is at no
time any karyogamy.

* Journ. Agric. Research, vi. (1916) pp. 183-96.

t Journ. Agric. Research, vii. (1918) pp. 1-15.

i Bull. Soc. Mycol., Prance, xxxiii. (1918) pp. 97-9 (5 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 219

Ustilagineae."" — Alden A. Potter and G. W. Coons s^ive notes on
the differences between Tilletia Isevis and T. Tritici. These consist
in their effect on the flowering-stalk, and in the sori on the smutted
grains. The distribution of the two species is also discussed.

UredineaB. — E. C. Stakman f has carried out a series of infections
of Timothy-grass by Puccinia graminis in order to study the possible
origin and developmental tendencies of biologic forms. The uredine of
Timothy-grass, Puccinia Phlei-pratensis, resembles very closely the bio-
logic form P. graminis-avenae, and the latter was used in the inoculations.
It was found possible to infect with this fungus, but the spores produced
were considerably reduced in size. Practically the same results were ob-
tained when barley was used as the host-plant. Stakman considers that
P. Phlei-pratensis may thus have been evolved through P. graminis-
avense.

R. H. CoUey % has found the teleutospores of Gronartium rihicola
developing internally in the petioles of Rihes, chiefly in the pith and
pericycle region. Such development has been recognized in the rusts,
and should be regarded, he says, as a rather common teratological
phenomenon.

R. E. Stone § gives a note as to the distribution of Gymnoconia
inter stiticd is in Canada, an orange-rust of Ruhiis spp. Notes are also
given of the germination of the spores of the Geeoma stage.

J. R. Weir and E. E. Hubert || have made a series of inoculation
experiments with the spores of Hyalospora Polypodii, which grows
frequently on Woodsia, and of H. aspidiotus on Phegopteris. The
results of their experiments went far to prove that these rusts have no
alternate hosts, that they winter over by means of teleutospores, and are
propagated during the summer by uredinia.

E. C. Stakman and F. J. Piemeisel^ give descriptions and results of
experiments with the biologic forms of Puccinia graminis on cereals and
grasses. Tables are given showing the inoculation results from one host
to another, and the effect of external conditions. A long summary of
the results obtained is appended.

Paul C. Standley ** publishes a Hst, with copious notes, of rusts and
smuts collected in New Mexico in 1916. The species are not new, but
in some the hosts are new.

J. R. Weir and E. E. Hubert ff have made observations on the over-
wintering of rusts on forest trees, and find that a number continue
growth by means of the uridineal stage.

The same writers %% ^^so publish results of cultures of Melampsorella

* Phytopathology, viii. (1918) pp. 106-13 (4 figs.).

t Journ. Agric. Kesearch, vi. (1916) pp. 813-16.

X Journ. Agric. Research, viii. (1917) pp. 329-32 (1 pi.).

§ Phytopathology, viii. (1918) pp. 27-9 (1 fig.).

II Phytopathology, viii. (1918) pp. 57-8.

«jf Journ. Agric. Research, x. (1917) pp. 429-95 (8 pis.).
** Mycologia, x. (1918) pp. 34-42.
tt Phytopathology, viii. (1918) pp. 55-9.
XX Phytopathology, viii. (1918) pp. 114-8.

Q 2

220 SUMMAEY OF CURRENT EESEARCHES RELATING TO

spp. and Melampsora sp. on trees. M. elatina causes witches'-broom
and a dwarfing of tips and branches of Picea excelsa.

New or Rare Fungi. — E. Boudier* has described a number of new
species under the title " Dernieres etincelles mycologiques." He is on
the eve of his ninetieth year, and explains that the species now described
have accumulated during his work on the " Icones." The list includes
Basidiomycetes and Ascomycetes, all of them illustrated in colour.

F. and Madame Moreauf describe a Pyrenomycete, Epicymatia
aphfhosse sp. n., which was growing as a parasite on the lichen Peliidea
aphthosa. It occurs in the region of the cephalodia.

A new species, Melanospora Mangini, has been described and figured
by F. Vincens,+ obtained in a gelatine culture of " blue wood." i

A new Discomycete, Tricophsea Boudieri has been described by
L.-J. Grelet.§ It grew on shaded marshy soil.

N. Patouillard has described a series of fungi from Tonkin, a number
of them new to science.

Fungi from Southern China. || — H. S. Yates publishes the fungi of
a small collection made by E. D. Merrill. Most of them were forms
already known, and of wide distribution. Only microfungi had
evidently been collected. There is a new species of Trabutea (Phylla-
choraceEe), and a new Uredine, Uredo cantonensis. Cercospora personata,
recognized as a serious disease of pea-nut in the West Indies, was also
collected.

Two Remarkable Discomycetes.lf — E. T. Harper describes fully two
large Ascomycetes from Michigan and Illinois. These are Undenvoodia
columnaris, a new member of the Helvellaceae, the ascophores of which
are columnar, and the hymenium covers the exterior. The second,-
Pustularia gigantm, was previously described, but is now published with
more details and with photographs.

Fungus Fairy Rings.** — A study of these rings in Eastern Colorado,
especially those caused by Agaricus tabidaris, and their effects on
vegetation, has been made by H. L. Shantz and R. L. Piemeisel. They
give a long list of fungi which have been observed to form the rings, due
to the centrifugal growth of the mycelium from the point of departure.
The effect of the fungus filaments on the soil is to reduce a part of the
organic matter to ammonia, which forms ammoniacal salts, or becomes
converted by bacteria from nitrites to nitrates. The increase in nitro-
gen stimulates the growth of grasses, etc., making larger demands on the
soil-moisture. When this is exhausted by A. iabidnris, the felt of
hyphffi prevents the penetration of rain-water, and the surface -plants
die of drouth. The area is thus left bare, but in a few years the

* Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxxiii. (1918) pp. 7-22 (6 pis.). •
t Bull. Soc. Mycol. Prance, xxxiii. (1918) pp. 23-7 (2 figs.).
X Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxxiii. (1918) pp. 67-9 (1 fig.).
§ Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxxiii. (1918) pp. 94-6 (1 pi.).
II Phil. Journ. Sci., xii. (1917) pp. 313-16.
% Bull. Torrey Bot. Club, xlv. (1918) pp. 77-86 (3 pis.).
** Journ. Agric. Research, xi. (1917) pp. 191-245 (31 pis.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 221

mycelium dies and moisture again penetrates the soil. The succession
of vegetation on the bare area is then (1) an earlj-weed stage, (2) a late-
weed stage, (3) a short-lived grass stage, (4) a perennial stage, which in
time gives way to (5), the original short-grass cover. A copious biblio-
graphy is appended.

Climatic Conditions and Conidial Development.* — Y. W. Pool and
M. B. McKay have carried out a research on this subject, with special
reference to the wintering of Cercospora veticola, the fungus of sugar-
beet leaves. Dnring the winter the conidia remained viable for about
eight months in dry conditions ; in a moist atmosphere they died in from
one to four months. Humidity is of much more influence than tem-
perature on the development, and conidia are therefore more abundant
on the lower surface of the leaves, but also partly because they are
washed off the upper surface by rain.

Effects of Pasteurization on Mould-spores, f — C. H. Thom and
S. H. Ayers have directed their attention to the success attained in
.destroying spores of fungi in milk by various stages of heating. The
different processes are described, with the results obtained. The " holder
process," in which milk is heated to 14.5° F. for a duration of thirty
minutes, killed the conidia of every species investigated except those of
Aspergillus repens, A. /favus, and A. fiimigatus, and these occur very
rarely in milk. After the "flash process" (165" F. for thirty seconds)
very few mould-spores survived. Oidkmi lactis and Mucors are killed
by the low temperature of the former process.

Relation of Fungi to Host. | — Neil E. Stevens has published the
results of an investigation as to the effects of Botrytis on strawberries, as
compared with that of Rhizopus. With the former the mycelium invades
the cells of every part of the fruit, filling them up and producing some-
what of a mummified condition. The Rkizopus liyphai grew between
the cells, chiefly in the outer portions of the berry, separating them and
■apparently extracting the cell-sap, but if grown on berries in a dry
atmosphere the mycelium penetrates to the centre of the berry, and
hyphge are frequently found inside cells. The berries attacked by
Rkizopus are soft and easily flattened. Stevens cites from literature a
parallel case where a Mucor reduced the pulp of a tomato to a fluid-mass,
the mycelium in this case also growing between the cells, while Fusarium,
which penetrated the cells, produced a dry-rot.

Effect of Black-rot Fungus on the Apple. § — C. W. Culpepper,
J. S. Caldwell, and A. C, Foster record results of their investigation as
to the effect produced by Sphseropsis malorwn on the tissues and cell-
contents of the apple. The fungus attacks branches, twigs, leaves and
fruit ; their attention was restricted to the fruit. The loss of water,
they found, was small, but there was a very considerable reduction of

* Journ. Agric. Research, vi. (1916) pp. 21-60 (2 pis. and 10 figs.),
t Journ. Agric. Research, vi. (1916) pp. 153-66 (3 figs.).
X Journ. Agric. Research, vi. (1916) pp. 361-6 (2 pis.).
§ Journ. Agric. Research, vii. (1916) pp. 17-40.

222 SUMMARY OF CUKRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

total solids, and the substances that are removable by extraction with
alcohol, ether or \tater were very much reduced. Other substances,
such as lipoids, proteids, etc., are discussed and the results given.
Finally, they state that there is progressive decrease of the acid-content,
and a large increase of alcohol-content in the tissues.

Growth of Fungi in Concentrated Solutions." — As a result of
experimental cultures and research, L. A. Hawkins has found that
parasitic fungi are able to grow in relatively high concentrations of salts
and sugars, higher even than the concentrations present in the cell-sap
of the host-plant. A large selection of parasites were tested, including
Fusarium, Rhizopus nigricans, Sphaeropsis malorum, etc.

Altitudinal Range of Forest Fungi. f — Most of these, as observed
by J. R. Weir, have a very great range, from sea-level to the extreme
limit of timbered zones, though they are less abundant on the heights,
and though certain species " predominate in particular forest zones or
types." The altitude also affects the form and structure, etc., of the
fungi, especially of certain timber sporophores, but may not materially
influence their development within the substratum.

Apple-rot Fungi in Relation to Temperature. J — C. B. Brooks
and J. S. Cooley have conducted a series of cultural studies of Alternaria
sp., Botrytis cinerea, Fusarium radicicola, Sphxropsis malorum, etc., on
apples at varying temperature. They give a resume of similar researches
undertaken by previous workers, and then describe in detail their own
results.

All the fungi grew at 0°, except Fusarium and Glomerella, but with
most of the fungi the initial incubation stages of growth on the fruits
had been more inhibited by low temperatures than the later ones, which
shows the risks run when storage is unduly delayed ; but there is great
variation according to the prevalent fungus, and the variety and maturity
of the fruit.

Citrus Canker. §— Frederick A. Wolf describes a disease of Citrus
recently introduced into the citrus-growing sections oi the Gulf Coast
States. The attack is a very severe one, many varieties and species being
affected, and probably none are immune. Grape-fruits are especially
liable to injury, but oranges, lemons, and limes are also susceptible to
the disease. The primary cause of Citrus canker is a bacterial parasite,
Pseudomonas Citri, and a full account is given of the development of the
bacterium and of its effect on the host-tissues. Fungi belonging to the
genera Fhoma, Fusarium, and Glwcosporium have also been isolated
from Citrus cankers. Fhoma sp. was the most active in the disin-
tegration of the tissues ; it has been described as Fhoma soda sp. n. The
destruction of diseased trees and the observance of proper sanitary
precautions are strongly advised.

* Journ. Agric. Eesearch, vii. (1916) pp. 255-60.

t Mycologia, x. (1918) pp. 4-14.

X Journ. Agric. Research, viii. (1917) pp. 127-63 (6 pis. and 25 figs.).

§ Journ. Agric. Eesearch, vi. (1916) pp. 69-99 (4 pis. and 8 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 223

Spongospora subterranea.* — I. E. Melhus, J. Rosenbaum, and E. S.
Schultz have made an exhanstive study of the geographical extension of
this fungus in the United States, of the nature of the soils which become
infected by the disease, and also of the disease-galls and accompanying
fungi. It has been known in the States for some time, and is capable
of persisting in the soil for five years. The roots are generally attacked,
and the presence of the fungus gives rise to small white galls. The
canker of the tuber is more rare, as the growth of the potato is fairly
rapid.

The histology of the galls which occur on other hosts than
Solanwn tuberosum bears considerable resemblance to the histology of
Plasmodiophora Brassicse.

Several types of dry-rot follow Spongospora ; the most serious is
caused by Phoma tuherosa sp. n. Many other fungi accompany or
follow the disease, and traces of them abound in or on the tubers, notably
the bulbils of Papulospora coprophUa, which bear a great resemblance to
the spore-balls of Spongospora.

Treatment of seed-tubers lessens the disease, as does treatment of
the soil with sulphur, but no radical cure has yet been discovered.

Work has been done on this disease also by Gr. B. Ramsey.f He had
observed that the hot dry season of 1916 was unfavourable for the
development of the disease, so he undertook a series of parallel cultures
of potato-plants in soil known to be infected with Spongospora. The
pots containing the plants were grown in different conditions of tempera-
ture and moisture, and the results showed that a cool moist season or
climate is most favourable to the development of the disease. There was
no infection when the temperature was high or when the soil was too dry.

Diseases of Plants. | — J. E,. Weir describes a new fungus, Hypo-
derma deformans, which causes a serious disease of the needles of
the Western yellow pine {Pinus ponderosa) in Idaho, Washington,
and Montana. It induces a conspicuous hypertrophy by the extension
of its mycelium into the tissues of the twigs, and also through the
destruction of the youngest needles, thereby impairing very seriously
the vitality of the trees. Another effect of the fungus is the formation
of spherical-shaped witches'-brooms on trees past the seedling stage.
The brooms may weigh 100 lb., and measure 5 or 6 feet in diameter.

E. S. Schultz § has investigated the disease of Silver-scurf on potatoes,
caused by the black mould Spondylocladmm atrovirens. He found it to
be a slow-growing fungus, taking ten days for development in culture
media. The spores vary enormously in size, measuring from 18-64 /x
in length in the same culture. The fungus enters the tuber by the
lenticels or through the epidermal layers, and destroys the outer layers
of corky cells ; owing to the products of the coloured spores the whole
tuber may become sooty-black. Infection may take place at any time
throughout the storage season.

* Journ. Agric. Research, vii. (1916) pp. 213-53 (9 pis. and 1 fig.).
t Phytopathology, viii. (1918) pp. 29-31.

X Journ. Agric. Research, vi. (1916) pp. 277-88 (1 pi. and 4 figs.).
§ Journ. Agric. Research, vi. (1916) pp. 339-50 (4 pis.).

224 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

0. A. Pratt ■" calls attention to the frequency of storage-rot in
potatoes, in the majority of cases these being due to surface-wounds
caused in harvesting. He has investigated the worst of these rots, due
to the attack of Fusarium trichothecioides, which produces " powdery
dry-rot." It does not attack any part of the growing plant, and as to
the tubers it is entirely a wound-parasite. The diseased portion usually,
presents a wrinkled sunken appearance, and in advanced stages may
show a pinkish-white growth of the fungus. The decayed tissue varies
in colour from light brown to nearly black ; internal cavities partially
filled with the mycelium and spores of the fungus are frequently found
in decayed tubers. The fungus does not develop under 2° C, and in
dry well-ventilated storage-houses loss would be very slight. The disease
may also be effectively checked by disinfecting the stock with mercuric
chloride or formaldehyde, provided the disinfection is done within
twenty-four hours of digging.

J. A. McClintock t has described a disease of peanut (Arackis
hypogsea) due to Sclerotium Rolfsii, a fungus that attacks the plants when
one to two months old, and continues to develop during the season. The
disease shows itself in the wilting of the leaves, while round the shoots
at or near the surface of the soil appears, first, the white mycelium, and
later the brownish sclerotia, about the size of a mustard -seed.

C. W. Edgerton % has explained his method of testing disease-
resisting varieties of plants in order to secure such plants on the least
possible acreage of ground. He experimented with tomato-wilt, a disease
due to a Fusarium which lives in the soil. He selected the seed of such
plants as had resisted the disease though grown in badly infected soil,
and these he subjected also to diseased conditions. A hmited extent of
soil was also sterilized and reinfected with tomato-wilt, and the plants
were then reared on this soil ; by this method it was possible to collect
data as to the varietal resistance to disease, the virulence of the fungi,
and the influence of the different soils.

C. Jagger and V. B. Stewart § have studied the various types of
VerticilUum disease in a series of cultures of the fungus from various
hosts. They noted in all the ultimate formation of numerous black
sclerotia-like bodies. The cultures differed mainly in the rate of growth
of these bodies. Experiments were conducted in the field by inocula-
tion and by mixing healthy with diseased plants.

L. M. Massey || records the results obtained in the use of various
fungicides. The iiests were made on diseases of roses due to Diplomrpon
Rosse (blackspot) and on Sphserotheca pamiosa (powdery mildew). In
both cases he found that dusting the bushes with a mixture of ninety
parts of finely-ground sulphur and ten parts powdered arsenate of lead
was the most effective remedy, and also less unsightly than the sprays
generally used,

F. A. Wolf and E. E. Stanford If describe a disease of fig-trees in

' " Jouru. Agric. Research, vi. (191G) pp. 817-31.

t Jouru. Agi-ic. Research, viii. (1917) pp. 441-8 (2 pis.),
j Phytopathology, viii. (1918) pp. 5-14 (4 figs.).
§ Phytopathology, viii. (1918) pp. 15-9.
■ II Phytopathology, viii. (1918) pp. 20-3.

i Phytopathology, viii. (1918) pp. 24-7 (2 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 225

North California caused by Macrophoma Fici which has been recorded
from Africa. It causes cankers on the larger branches, and fruits
inoculated 'with the spores were destroyed by development of the fungus.
The pycnidia grew well in cultures ; the great variation in the size and
shape of the spores is noted.

A disease of Squashes, due to Choanephora cucurbitarum, has been
studied by F. A. Wolf.* It causes a blight of the flowers and a rot of
the fruit, considerable loss having resulted from its presence. It is the
only known species of the genus recorded in America, and a full account
of the fungus is given. Sporangial, chlamydosporic and zygosporic
stages were developed in artificial cultures.

A new strain of Rhizoctonia Solan i and its effects on potato .tubers
forms the subject of a paper by J. Rosenbaum.f He claims that the
different strains can be distinguished with accuracy in macroscopic
growth on various media as well as by morphological comparisons.
Strain R5, the new fungus, is more pathogenic on the stems and produces
a distinct necrosis of the tubers. Differences were found in the size,
etc., of the sclerotia and of the hyphal cells.

A Rhizoctonia potato disease has also been examined and described
by G. B. Ramsey. I It attacks the tubers and seems to have been con-
fused with potato-scab. The tubers are attacked through the lenticels,
and the scab formed may penetrate to the core of the tuber, or, in
another phase, the shrinkage of the tissues causes the formation of a
pit or canal, frequently suggesting wire-worm injury.

A needle-blight of Douglas fir has been described by J. R. Weir §
which has caused great damage in forest and nursery. The needles
affected develop spots in early winter of a slightly yellow colour on the
under surface. The infected needles fall at all seasons of the year, and
the trees may become entirely defoliated. The fungus is as yet unde-
scribed, but seems to be a member of the Stictidaceie. Spraying with
soap and Bordeaux mixture is recommended.

F.I). Fromme and H. E. Thomas |1 describe a Xylaria root-rot of
apple-trees that is becoming a serious menace in the chief orchard
sections of Virginia. It is marked by l)lack encrustations on the surface
of the roots, with dark zonations in the internal bark and wood. The
progress of the fungus (A'. Hypoxylon) is comparatively slow, but two
years of infection may produce the death of the tree.

A new leaf -spot on turnip has been reported in various localities in
Georgia and has been identified by B. B. Higgins IT as due to Colleto-
trichum Brassicse, or to a new species, C'- Higginscanum Sacc. Inocula-
tion experiments were made on seed-pods with the results indicated that
though the pods were infected and many seeds destroyed, the fungus
was not carried over in the seed.

A nursery blight of Cedars {Juniperus, Thvja and Cupressus) has

* Journ. Agric. Research., viii. (1917) pp. 319-27 (2 pis.).

t Journ. Agric. Research, ix. (1917) pp. 405-19 (2 pis.).

X Journ. Agric. Research, ix. (1917) pp. 421-6 (4 pis.).

§ Journ. Agric. Research, x. (1917) pp. 99-103 (1 pi. and 3 figs.).

ll Journ. Agric. Research, x. (1917) pp. 163-73 (2 pis. and 1 fig.).

\ Journ. Agric. Research, x. (1917) pp. 157-61 (2 pis.).

226 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

been traced by G. G. Hahn, C. Hartley and E. G. Pierce ■"■ as due to the
attack of a Phoma sp. It is primarily a disease of seedlings ; trees of
over four years old sfenerally escape. Inoculation and control experi-
ments were carried out with success. The fungus occurs on lesions in
the stems.

An " end-rot " disease of the cranberry is described by C. L. Shear.f
It attacks the cranberry at the blossom end and causes a softening of
the tissues. The diseased part is lighter coloured than the sound
portion of the berry, and the discoloration spreads as the rot develops.
The cause of the rot is a Sphsropsidaceous fungus, Fusicoccwn putrefaciens
sp. n., and it is surmised that it is a stage of a Genangium sp. The
disease has been found to occur in all the cranberry-growing sections of
the United States, and has caused considerable damage.

A. D. Cotton I is the author of Leaflet No. 56 recently issued by the
Board of Agriculture, which deals with apple canker due to a
minute fungus, Nectria ditissima. The influence of the soil is discussed.

J. R. Jolewalaie and S. C. Bruner§ have described PMjllachora
Roy'stoneae sp. n. as a disease, though unimportant, of the royal palm,
Roystonea regia.

G. H. Godfrey 1| records the occurrence of ScUrotium Rolfsii as a
disease of wheat. ' The lesions occurred on the crown and lower portions
of the culms. The heads on the diseased culms, though normal in
general appearance, were entirely devoid of grain.

L. Garbowski IT has noted the presence of Sclerospora macrospora on
corn in Podolia (Russia). Oospores were found in the tissues of the
leaves. In a further communication the same author gives a long list
of parasitic fungi collected by himself in the same region during the
summer of 1915. He determined four new species of microfungi and
new hosts for others. The list extends to 121 species.

R. C. Faulwetter *" describes a leaf-spot of cotton due to an AUernaria
not unlike A. tenuis. It is a weak parasite, and only infects healthy
tissues in favourable conditions ; it is most prevalent on leaves already
affected by red spider or by Bacterium malvacearum.

M. B. McKay and Venus W. Pool ft tiave made a field study of '
Cercospora heticola. They record the different plants on which it occurs,
its effect on the host-plant, and the methods of dealing with the disease.
Placing the diseased leaves in silo was found to be effective, as the
fungus did not survive the silage process for even two weeks.

E. Schaffhit and G. Voss JJ have repeated their field experiuients with
black-wart of potatoes {Synchytrium endoUoticim). After eight years
the spores survived in infected ground and caused a severe attack of the
disease.

* Journ. Agric. Research., x. (1917) pp. 533-9 (2 pis.).

t Journ. Agric. Research, xi. (1917) pp. 35-41 (1 col. pi.),

X Journ. Board Agric, xxiv. (1918) pp. 1263-5 (1 pi.).

§ Mycologia, x. (1918) pp. 43-4 (1 pi.).

II Phytopathology, viii. (1918) pp. 64-6 (3 figs.).

i Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, xxxiii. (1918) pp. 33 and 73-91 (4 figs.).
** Phytopathology, viii. (1918) pp. 98-105 (3 figs.),
tt Phytopathology, viii. (1918) pp. 119-36 (2 figs.).-
XX Zeitschr. Pflanzenkr., xxvii. (1918) pp. 339-46.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 227

Schiz ophy ta.
Schizomycetes.

Colouring-matter of Red Torulse.* — A. C. Chapman investigated
the colouring-matter of red torulae. Surface-colonies on agar were scraped
off, ground with sand and extracted with various solvents. Chloroform
and carbon-bisulphide dissolved the colouring-matter, forming deep-red
solutions. Chloroform solutions when warmed and exposed to light
became colourless ; this suggested that the substance might be related
to carrotene, but it was found that the absorption spectra were different.
The solubility of the substance in light petroleum would indicate that
it does not belong to the xanthophyll group.

Blepharospora cambivora.f — L. Petri transferred from carrot-
cultures mycelium to the following solution: — Nitrate of calcium, 0*4;
sulphate of magnesium, 0*1.5; acid phosphate of potassium, 0'15;
chloride of potassium, 0'6 ; water, 1000. Ciliated zoosporangia formed
in this medium, and by cultivating in the humus of chestnuts zoo-
sporangia and Gogonia were formed. Inoculation experiments on healthy
plants were successful. '

Bacillus phenologenes. t— A. Berthelot gives a description of this
organism, of which the following is a summary : — The most important
feature of this organism is its presumed relationship to sclerosis of
arteries, as was suggested in 1910 by Metchnikoff. It apparently derives
its subsistence from tyrosin, which it splits up, forming phenol. Its
principal characters are as follows : — It is a short plump bacillus, the
elements of which are longer on solid than in liquid media. It is
ciliated and only faintly motile. It does not form spores, and is stained
by Gram's method. It is a potential anaerobe, and its optimum tem-
perature is 37°. The author gives numerous appearances of cultures
made in different media. In media containing tyrosin it grows well,
with formation of phenol. Its pathogenic action on laboratory animals
is nil.

Bacillus citroniaculans.§ — Ethel Doidge has ascertained that the
citrus " spot " disease, which attacks not only the fruit but also the leaf
and branch of the tree, is due to a bacterium. Bacillus citromaculans.
The organism apparently invades the tree through wounds, though
stomatal infection cannot be altogether excluded.

* Biochem. Journ., s. (1916) pp. 548-50.

t Atti. R. Accad. Lincei, xxvi. (1917) pp. 297-9,

X Ann. Inst. Pasteur, xxxii. (1918) pp. 17-36.

§ Ann. Applied Biol., iii. (1917) pp. 53-81 (10 pis.).

228

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

MICKOSCOPY. .

A. Instruments, Accessories, etc.*
(3) Illuminating- and other Apparatus.

Microscope Illumination.t— K J. Clark has patented an apparatus
for illuminating microscope specimens by means of a low-voltage electric
lamp which is supported immediately below or within the substage con-
denser and is adjustable for focussing. As shown (fig. 1), the lamp B and
a reflector A are carried by an arm C, clamped to a vertical rod E bv a

Fig. 1.

nut D, the rod E being mounted on a stand F so that it may be rotated
or may be raised or lowered by means of a nut G. The illumination of
the specimen may be regulated by means of an adjustable resistance in
the lamp circuit. The lamp may be used with a dark-ground condenser
to obtain oblique illumination or dark-ground effects.

(4) Photomicrography.

SpirochaBta icterohaemorrhagica.ij:— A. C. Coles has succeeded in
photographing the minute spirals, 10-12 to each 5 /*, in spirochsetes
obtained from the common rat in England. They are diagnostic of
the newly-created genus, the Leptospira of Noguchi.

* This subdivision contains (1) Stands ; (2) Eye-pieces and ^Objectives ; (3)
lUuminatmg and other Apparatus; (4) Photomicrography; (5)' Microscopical
Optics and Manipulation ; (6) Miscellaneous.

t English Mechanic, Feb. 1, 1918, p. 16.

J Lancet, March 30, 1918, pp. 468-9 (6 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 229

Photomicrographs in Colour.* — H. R. Eggleston describes the
process of making lantern-slides representing photomicrographs of
stained sections. The process is as follows : — Lantern-plates are sen-
sitized by bathing for five minutes in a 2^ p.c. solution of ammonium
bichromate containing 5 c.cm. of ammonia to the litre, the temperature
of the bath being not above 60° F. The plates are then rinsed for two
or three seconds in clean water, drained and dried as uniformly as
possible, being kept in the dark while drying. The sensitized, plates are
then exposed through the glass under the negative to the light of an
arc lamp, the average exposure being about three minutes at IS inches
distance. The exposed plates are then developed by rocking in trays of
water at about 120° F. until all soluble gelatin is removed. The plates
are then rinsed in cold water, fixed in hypo, and washed free of the hypo.
They are then ready for staining. The staining is done with a 1 p.c.
solution of dye containing 1 p.c. of acetic acid, the dye being selected to
simulate most closely the original stain of the section. When sections
stained with two different colours are being photographed, negatives are
made through suitable colour-filters, and are then dyed in the two stains
and placed face to face, so that a two-colour slide is obtained. Suppose
a section is stained red and green Two negatives are made on panchro-
matic plates — one with a red filter, which will cause the green to appear
as clear spaces in the negative and will not record the red, and the other
with a green filter, which will record the red and not the green. The slides
made from bichromated gelatin are stained — -that from the red negative
with the original green stain, and that from the green negative with the
original red stain. The filters used are Wratten M filters. The choice
of the filter is decided by visual trial. Thus photographing a section
stained with htematoxylin and eosin the A (red) filter shows no trace of
the eosin and gives a good strong negative of the hfematoxylin. The
B and C filters are used together for the other negative, giving a blue-
green colour and recording the eosin and haematoxylin both fully, and
from these two negatives positives are made and stained with a blue and
a red dye.

C5) Microscopical Optics and Manipulation.

Dividing-engine for Ruling Diffraction Gratings.f — • " Xature "
records that part 1 of vol. xxx. of the Proceedings of the Royal Society
of Victoria contains a description of a new dividing-engine for ruling
diffraction gratings by J, H. Grayson, of the University of Melbourne.
The design and construction of this machine have occupied Grayson,
whose skill in work of this type is well known, for seven years, and
the completion of the task places spectroscopists under a great debt of
gratitude to him. His paper contains a detailed description of the
machine, and gives full particulars of the methods used for grinding
and testing the screw\ The machine is set up in a room of its own
in the basement of the University, and is driven by a ^^ h.-p. hot-air
engine placed in an adjoining room. Ruling-diamonds are broken
stones, in which the fracture along a cleavage-plane intersects an outer

* Trans. Amer. Micr. Soc, xxxvi. (1917) pp. 279-81.
t Nature, March 21,' 1918, p. 51.

230 SUMMARY OF CURKENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

crystalline face and gives a good knife-edge. Grayson finds the stones
from the diamondiferous drift of New South Wales best for this purpose,
and when ruling properly such a diamond makes no noise. The photo-
graphs which accompany the paper show that the rulings are extremely
regular, and warrant the hope that gratings ruled on the machine will
give exceptionally clear spectra. The verdict of spectroscopists on the
gratings will be awaited with considerable interest. In the meantime
all will congratulate Grayson on the completion of his work, and the
University of Melbourne on the public-spirited way in which it has
provided facilities for that work.

Dispersion and other Optical Properties of Carborundum."' — H. E.

Merwin's investigations on carborundum show that for wave-lengths
ranging from 755 /a/a to 410 /x/a, w ranges from 2*616 and c from 2 '654
to 2*812. Microscopical study of several samples of granular carbo-
rundum revealed no definite variations in the refractive index for red
light, even in grains of different colour.

Measurement of Magnifying Power.f — W. M. Bale describes a
simple method of measuring the magnifying power of a microscopical
combination. His procedure is : — (A) Measure with the camera lucida
the exact diameter (at 10 inches) of the magnified field ; (B) measure
with the stage micrometer the actual diameter of the field. Then A
divided by B is the magnifying power. At the same time there are
sundry precautions to be taken to ensure success, especially if the investi-
gation does not concern the centre of the field. These difficulties the
mithor fully deals with.

(6) Miscellaneous.

Balsam Problem. J — At a Meeting of the Optical Society on April 11
J. W. French stated that for cementing optical parts together Canada
balsam is almost invariably employed. Although on starting or starring
of the balsam-layer actual separation of the parts or deformation of
the optical surfaces frequently occurs, there is no appreciably better
substance known. Optical parts may be combined with an air-space
between the surfaces by optical contact, with or without scaled edges, by
•optical welding or by cementing. The disadvantages of the various
methods were enumerated, the loss of light at transmission surfaces being
particularly discussed. A considerable number of lialsam specimens, of
ages varying up to ten years, had been opened, and photomicrographs of
the balsam-layer were exhibited. In all cases there were fluid layers
between the harder balsam and the glass surface, and the photographs
demonstrated particularly the smallness of the adhesion to the glass.
Specimens artificially produced were also exhibited. In many cases the
age of the specimen was shown to be deducible from the configuration.
So-called granulation of balsam was stated to be due to the action of
moisture on the balsam surface. No trace of crystallization of glass-

* Journ. Washington Acad. Sci., vii. No. 14 (1917) pp. 445-7.
t Journ. Quekett Micr. Club, xiii. (1917) pp. 1-8 (1 fig.).
X Nature, April 18, 1918, p. 139.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 231

quality balsam was found in any of the experiments, but a number of
the photographed specimens showed definite right-angled fractures
occasionally observed in torn gelatin films.

British Resources of Sands and Rocks used in Glass Manufacture,
with Notes on certain Refractory Materials.* — The above is the title
of a valuable Supplementary Memoir, by P. G. H. Boswell, with contri-
butions by W. B. Wright, H. F. Harwood, and A. A. Eldridge. The
title gives a clear guide to the contents, seven chapters of which deal
exhaustively with the raw materials suitable for glass manufacture found
in the British islands ; there is also one chapter devoted to American
grade glass-sands. The book includes elaborate tables of mechanical
and chemical analyses, and some of the plates are microphotographs of
British and American grlass-sands.

o^

Petrographic Microscope. f — F. E. Wright's contribution on this
subject is an interesting exposition of the possibilities of petrographic
•examination. He does not deal much with constructional principles,
but limits himself to a description of the results which can be obtained
with the view of advocating a wider use of the instrument.

B. Technique.!
CI) Collecting: Objects, including' Culture Processes.

Medium for Cultivating Bacillus tetani.§ — W. J. Tulloch has
discovered the following selective medium for the enrichment of B. tefcfii
against other organisms accompanying it. The prepai'ation of the
medium is as follows : — Take 1 lb. of chopped meat, add 1 litre of
Avater, boil 30 minutes, cool to 45° C, adjust reaction of fluid so that it
is slightly alkaline to litmus. Trypsinize as for Douglas's broth ;
incubate in open vessel for five days at 37° C. Filter products of
putrefaction through paper, add sodium formate 1 p.c. of total, adjust
reaction of fluid to neutral point for phenolphthalein. Fluid is then
filtered through a Berkefeld and Doulton filter in series, stored under
paraffin in sterile flask mounted with a hooded delivery pipette, so that
medium may be distributed into tubes. Before use each tube of 10 c.cm.
is <5nriched by addition of \ part of fresh rabbit kidney, removed (after
Jiiiling animal) by sterile operation. Author usually employs tubes
containing 5 c.cm. of medium and adds -^^ part of kidney to each. To
ensure sterility, 5, 1, 0"5, O'l, and O'Ol c.cm. are inoculated into meat
tubes which are incubated anaerobically for fourteen days and should
show no evidence of growth.

* Longman, Green and Co., London, 1917,92 pp. (7 pis. and maps).

t Trans. Optical Soc. Amer., i. No. 1, Jan. 1917, pp. 15-21 (1 pi.).

X This subdivision contains (1) Collecting Objects, including Culture Pro-
cesses ; (2) Preparing Objects ; (3) Cutting, including Embedding and Microtomes;
(4) Staining and Injecting ; (5) Moimting, including slides, preservative fluids, etc.;
(6) Miscellaneous.

§ Lancet, April 20, 1918, p. 578.

\

232 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Cultivating the Parasite of Epizootic Lymphangitis. "' — A.. Boquet
and L. Negre first obtained cultures of Cryptococcus farcinosus in horse-
dung agar, but after two or three passages the organism was transferred
to Sabourand's medium, potato and carrot. After a time the coccus
develops a mycelium which forms spores and chlamydospores. The
cultures were successfully inoculated on horses.

(2) Preparing: Objects.

Modification of Bouin's Fluid.!— A. C Hollande, after praising
the eminent qualities of Bouin's picro-aceto-formalin mixture, states
that it may even be improved by the addition of neutral acetate of
copper. He gives the following formula : Picric acid, 4 grm. ; neutral
acetate of copper, 2*5 grm.; 40 p.c. formalin, 10 c.cm. ; glacial acetic
acid, 1 • 5 c.cm. ; distilled water, 100 c.cm. The acetate of copper is
dissolved in 100 c.cm. of distilled water ; then are added 4 grm. of picric
acid. After the picric acid is dissolved the fluid is filtered, and to the
filtrate are added 10 c.cm. of the 40 p.c. formalin and the acetic acid.
The pieces to be fixed are immersed in the fixative for three days. They
are next washed several times in distilled water during twenty-four
hours. They are afterwards passed through upgraded alcohols. This
is important, as direct passage to strong alcohol gives rise to a precipitate.
The author gives a list of eight fluids through which the fixed tissue
should be passed.

Short Method of Preparing Histological Material.^ — L. W.

Strong publishes a modification of the usual routine by which the time
is reduced to three days, with considerable saving in labour and reagents :
1. Fix in 10 p.c. formalin in SO p.c. alcohol overnight. 2. 95 p.c.
alcohol, eight to ten hours. 3. Acetone, from one-half to two hours.
4. Chloroform-paraflin, overnight in warm place. 5. Paraffin, four
hours ; 48° C. m.p., two hours ; 52° C. m.p., two hours. 6. Embed.

(3) Cutting:, including Embedding: and Microtomes.

Electrifying the Microtome. § — H. E. Metcalf derived his inspir-
ation from an electric sewing-machine. The device consists of a small
motor with a cork friction-wheel, and mounted on a base, so that when
put underneath a sewing machine fly-wheel a strong spring in the base
will press the cork friction-wheel against the fly-wheel of the sewing-
machine. The motor was turned on its side with its base bolted to
a block, and the block bolted to the table. The microtome- wheel was
then backed up on to the cork friction-wheel of the motor until the
requisite tension was secured, and then it was bolted to the table. Thus
both motor and microtome are both rigidly fastened down.

Variations in speed are obtained by means of the foot-controller
which accompanies the motor. Although this controller allows only six

* Comptes Rendus, clxvi. (1918) pp. ,308-11.

t C.K. Soc. Biol. Paris, Ixxxi. (1918) pp. 17-20.

X Trans. Amer. Micr. Soc, xxxvi. (1917) pp. 280-1.

^ Trans. Amer. Micr. Soc, xxxvi. (1917) pp. 267-9 (1 fig.).

• ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 233

variations in speed, it is regulated satisfactorily. While cutting serial
sections the assistant never has to touch the fly-wheel with his hands, as
he is able merely by using the foot-control to ruove the paraffin-block
a fraction of an inch at a time, as well as being able to cut sections one
by one if necessary. In this manner colloidin sections have been cut
with a slanting knife. Much time and expense are saved by this device.

(4) staining- and Injecting.

Simple Method for Double-staining Sporulating Bacteria.* — C.
Botelho recommends the following procedure : — Dissolve light green
4 grm. and acid-fuchsin 2 grm. in a solution of glacial acetic acid and
distilled water, 50 c.cm. of each. The material, with a drop of water, is
placed on a slide and fixed by heat. The film is then covered with
the stain and heated to vaporization. This procedure is repeated three
or four times. When cool wash with distilled water. Dry and examine.
Spores are stained red, the bacilli green.

New Method of Staining the Tubercle Bacillus.|— C. Cepede recom-
mends the following procedure : — The sections or smears are first
treated with carbol-fuchsin, heated for five minutes. They are then
immersed in the following solution for two to three minutes : —
Methylen-blue in excess ; lactic acid, 40 c.cm. ; distilled water, 160 c.cm.,
1 part ; alcohol 95 p.c, 4 parts. The preparation is then washed in tap-
water, and if any red remain the blue solution must be reapplied. Then
dry and examine. In urine the technique is slightly different. Before
colouring with fuchsin the preparation is treated with a soda solution
to which 5 p.c. alcohol has been added. This removes the fat from the
smegma bacillus, and prevents confusion.

C5") Mounting', including- Slides, Preservative, Fluids, etc.

New Counting Chamber.| — J. W. Cropper read a note on a
" New Counting Chamber for the Enumeration of Protozoa and other
Organisms" (from the Marcus Beck Laboratories, Eoyal Society of
Medicine). The chamber was designed on the principle of the ha3mo-
cytometer, but with a considerably larger area — namely, 5x5 mm. —
of the platform rialed in squares, the latter also being increased in size.
For various practical reasons the depth of the chamber was retained as
yV mm. as in the older chambers. Thus the organisms or cells in a
comparatively large volume — namely, 2*5 c.mm. — could be counted, and
in cases where the number present was scanty it was possible to count a
sufficient number of organisms to minimize the statistical errors which
were inseparable from a small count. The size of the smallest squares
had been so arranged that they occupied the central half of the diameter
of the field of the microscope, using a ^-in. objective and a x 7 eye-
piece, this permitting a rapid count being made. In cases where the
organisms or cells could be easily recognized with a low-power magnifica-

* C.R. Soc. Biol. Paris, Ixxxi. (1918) pp. 183-4.
t Comptes Rendus, clxvi. (1918) pp. 357-9.
t Lancet, March 2, p. 387.

R

234 SUMMA.RY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

tiou, it had been found preferable to employ an extemporized device,
consisting of a large-sized microscope-slide on which columns ^ mm.
in width had been ruled. On this a ring of paraffin-wax, applied while
molten by means of a turn-table, was placed. A definite volume — say,
10, 20, or more c.mm.^of the suspension of organisms to be counted
was expelled from a graduated capillary pipette on to the ruled slide,
and a cover-slip was allowed to fall upon it. The organisms in the whole
of the drop were easily and rapidly counted by working along the columns
from end to end. The chamber and ruled slides could be obtained from
Messrs. H. F. Angus and Co., Wigmore Street, W.

Metallography, etc.

Comparison Screen for Brass.* — A simple method for determining
approximately the grain-size of annealed brass is described and illus-
trated by 0. W. Ellis. A glass screen is employed carrying prints on
transfer-paper of photomicrographs of standard samples which have
been subjected to different but known heat-treatments, arranged in the
form of a ring. The image of the structure of the sample under
examination is projected on to the centre of the screen, and direct
comparison is then readily made with the standard samples.

Effect of Great Hydrostatic Pressure on Metals. j — Z. Jeffries has
found that cylinders of pure aluminium and of an aluminium-copper
alloy (88 p.c. aluminium), after subjecting to hydrostatic pressure up
to 12,400 kilograms per square centimetre at temperatures of 25° and
40°C.,are practically unchanged in dimensions, or in regard to hardness,
strength, and microstructure. Both the metals tested had fine-grained
structures, and owing to the haphazard orientation of the crystals it is
considered that the resistance to deformation would be equal in all
directions, and hence no permanent deformation would result from
great hydrostatic jjressure. A single crystal or a piece of metal com-
posed of a few larger grains, on the other hand, would show diiferent
degrees of resistaoce to deformation in different directions, and might
suffer permanent deformation under great hydrostatic pressures.

Etching with Chromic Acid and Hydrogen Peroxide.| — This
mixture is stated by S. AV. Miller to be a useful etching reagent for all
bronzes and brasses, and also for silver. The reagent is made by adding
a few drops of hydrogen peroxide to a very dilute solution of chromic
acid. Addition of hydrogen peroxide causes strong effervescence, and
turns the solution a very dark brown colour. If the chromic acid solu-
tion is too strong large gas-bubbles are evolved which prevent uniform
etching. The specimen is immersed in the effervescent solution for a
few seconds and then washed immediately in running water. Photo-

* Journ. Inst. Metals, xviii. (1917, 2) pp. 171-2 (1 fig.).

t Journ. Inst. Metals, xviii. (1917,2) pp. 243-7.

J Journ. Inst. Metals, xviii. (1917, 2) pp. 253-5 (2 figs.).

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 235

micrographs of a brass and a bronze are given illustrating the effects of
the reagent. The reagent is recommended particularly for the etching
of brass welds.

Heat-treatment of Grey Cast Iron." — The behaviour of cast iron
under the influence of heat has been studied by J. E. Hurst in con-
nexion with the cracking of Diesel engine piston-heads, which during
working attain a temperature of at least 900° C. Chemical analyses of
different parts of cracked piston-rods show that the combined carbon
is gradually all converted into the graphitic form in the portion exposed
to high temperature. Microscopical examination showed an increase
in the dentritic structure and in the number of graphite plates in the
portion subjected to the influence of heat ; while the extreme edge of
the piston is directly in contact with the flame the extent of the
dentrictic structure is less, the graphite is more finely divided, and
numerous small holes appear. Experiments with samples of a high
phosphorus grey cast iron showed that under certain conditions —
annealing at high temperatures (above 900° C.) — a portion of the free
carbon is reabsorbed. The structure at the extreme edge of the piston-
head is connected with this phenomenon. Fracture ensues from the
internal strain caused by the slight volume-changes which accompany
these changes in the condition of the carbon, as well as from the weaken-
ing of the iron caused by the separation of carbon.

Uniformity of a Cast of Acid Open-hearth Steel.f — The results
of an investigation to determine the general quality and uniformity
of a cast of steel from a 40-ton acid open-hearth furnace are given by
T. D. Morgans and F. Rogers. The steel was made for the manufacture
of H.E. shell, and contained approximately 0*5 p.c. carbon. Chemical
analyses, tensile and hardness tests, and microscopical examinations
were made on the top, middle, and bottom billets of each of twenty-
one ingots. The manganese-content showed a slight decline from the
first to the last ingot poured. Beyond this and the usual slightly
higher percentage of elements found in the upper parts of the ingots, all
properties approached a high degree of uniformity. The structure
consisted of a ferrite network, whose meshes were filled with generally
lamellar jDearlite. Towards the edge of the billets the network size was
smaller, and was largest towards the centre. No variation in structure
which would prove detrimental to the steel in use was found.

Microstructure of Commercially Pure Iron between Arg and Ar.^J
■ The very pure iron (99*84 p.c. iron) known as "Armco" iron, which
is made in the ordinary basic open-hearth furnace, is peculiar in show-
ing brittleness when subjected to mechanical treatment between 900°
and 800° C. ; at any other temperature outside this range the material
is remarkably ductile and malleable. The cause of this unusual red-
shortness has been investigated by ^Y. J. Brooke and F. F. Hunting by

* Journ. Iron and Steel Inst., xcvi. (1917, 2) pp. 121-8 (8 figs.).
t Journ. Iron and Steel lust., xcvi. (1917, 2) pp. 209-18 (21 figs.).
X Journ. Iron and Steel Inst., xcvi. (1917, 2) pp. 233-9 (14 figs.).

R 2

236 SUMMAHY OF CUKRENT EESEAKCHES.

heating samples above 1000° C, allowing to cool slowly, and quenching
individual samples at various temperatures. Photomicrographs of all
the quenched samples are given. The microstructures of all samples
quenched above 900° or below 800 C° were as normally obtained with
pure iron, but those qu.enched between these temperature-limits showed
a peculiar "eutectoid" constituent, with double boundaries at the
junctions of many of the crystal boundaries. The composite character
of the constituent was always characteristic, the central structure being
more or less pearhtic, surrounded by a ferrite zone which connected
up in a definite manner with the adjacent crystal grains. The com-
position of the " eutectoid " has not been determined by the authors,
but a combination of sulphide, phosphide, and carbide is suggested.
Increasing the oxygen-content of the iron was not found to increase the
amount of the eutectoid. From the coincidence of the temperatures of
appearance and disappearance of the constituent with those of the
brittle range, it is considered very probable that the constituent is the
cause of the red-shortness shown by " Armco " iron.

Fay, Hekry — Microscopic Examination of Steel.

[A guide to others engaged iu the inspection of steel.]

Wiley & Sons and Chapman & Hall : iv and 18 pp. (65 photos.).

237

PEOCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

AN ORDINARY MEETING

OF THE Society was held at 20 Hanover Square, W., on
Wednesday, March 20th, 1918, at 5.30 p.m., Mr. J. E.
Barnard, President, in the Chair.

The Minutes of the last Meeting, having been circulated, were taken
as read, confirmed, and signed by the President.

The President reviewed the purpose of the Meeting, and, after
welcoming Professor Conrady, requested him to address the Meeting on
" The Theory of Dark-ground Illumination."

• Professor Conrady's address, which was freely illustrated by sketches
and diagrams on the blackboard, may be briefly summarized as follows : —

Objects lying in a perfectly transparent medium are seen on a dark
ground when illuminated exclusively by rays at a greater obliquity than
the objective can receive, because the only light which can then enter
the instrument is that which has been scattered by the objects.

Some objects only scatter the light in directions close to that of the
illuminating rays ; hence the gap between the latter and the most
oblique rays which the objective can receive should be as small as
possible. Other objects scatter the light in distinct, widely-separated
beams ; to accommodate these, very oblique illuminating rays are also
necessary.

The scattering may be in any direction ; the entrance of light into
the instrument therefore depends upon uniform distribution of the
illumination with reference to the axis of the instrument — in other words,
a perfectly centred hollow cone of rays is essential.

The realization of these conditions by a condenser with dark-ground
stop depends on the condition that the stop is depicted in the limiting
aperture of the objective. This condition is not even approximately
fulfilled by the condensers of high N.A. and short focal length, hence
the bad effects obtained and the call for reflecting condensers.

The theory of microscopic resolution under dark-ground illumina-
tion is simple only in the case of regular structures treated on Abbe's
principle. It then leads to the conclusion that the condenser should
have three times the N.A. of the objective, and that full resolving power
is therefore only obtainable with objectives up to 0*35 or 0*45 N.A.

238 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

The President (Mr. J. E. Barnard) prefaced his remarks on Dark
ground Illumination by stating that in this method the object had to be
illuminated in such a way that no direct light entered the microscope.
This could be achieved by placing a " stop " at the back of an ordinary
achromatic or any suitable condenser, or, preferably, by using either
a paraboidal or a spherical surface-reflecting condenser made specially
for the purpose. He did not propose to discuss the relative merits of
particular dark-ground illuminators ; each had its good points, and most
of them were capable of producing satisfactory dark-ground effects.
(At the close of the meeting several of the best-known illuminators
were shown, and the particular type of beam projected by each was
demonstrated.)

He then pointed out that success or failure depended upon :■' —

1. Selection of illumination.

2. Exact centrality of all the optical parts of the microscope.
The selection of the illuminant was a difficult problem. The

tendency was to employ a source of light of too great intensity. An
ordinary electric filament lamp gave light of large dimension in one
direction and small in the other. The result was to fill the condenser
in one direction and iiot in the other, so that with such objects as
Spirocha?tes perfect illumination of the convolutions throughout the
length of the organisms was lacking. An arc lamp could be employed, but
with its use many inconveniences were experienced. The background
was not so black as it should be ; the image was not so well shown, and,
especially when dealing with blood-plasma, minute particles, usually
described as "ultra-microscopic," become annoyingly obvious. The
ideal source of light for this method was the " Pointolite " lamp of the
Ediswan Co. It consisted of a 4-mm. tungsten sphere, and when incan-
descent its image could be projected into the object-plane and perfect
uniform illumination secured.

Another point which had an important bearing on this question of
the intensity of the source of light was this : If one took an objective,
such as a 4-mm. Apo. N.A. 0 ' 95, and illuminated the object by means of
an arc light, one was unable to get satisfactory dark-ground illumina-
tion with four condensers out of five. With some it Avas possible, but
only when the obliquity of the light was at its maximum. Take a
weaker source of light — he had one which he had been using for the last
day or two — and it became possible to use a 0*95 N.A. objective with
any condenser, and, while the ground was not black, it was dark enough
to enable Spirochseta pallida to be seen with all its characteristic features.
It was true a fair amount of direct light came through, as well as an
obHque beam which went to form the dark-ground image. He had
been criticized for using only a dry lens for dark-ground work, but
Professor Conrady had now justified the method. On theoretical grounds,
it was clear that an objective of 0"65 N.A. was doing all that could be
done, although it might, under certain circumstances, be advisable to
use an objective of higher numerical aperture. Therefore the use of a
very powerful source of light was to be avoided.

The next point was that of centration. The matter was really a
very simple one. The method he advocated, though not the only one

PKOCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 239

or perhaps the best, was at least effective, and it had the advantage of
simpHcity. The one part of the microscope which was at the bottom of
the trouble in centration, either for dark-ground illumination or for
direct illumination, was the mirror. He had made a board on which
there was an acetylene lamp, a condensing lens, and a fixed mirror which
was inclined at the proper angle to project a beam of light which was
vertical to the board. This he thought would be a valuable method
for microscopic work, and would do away with many of those errors of
centration which arise. Mr. Barnard then gave the following direc-
tions : — Remove the sub-stage mirror from the microscope, and place
the microscope centrally over the mirror on the board (unless set within
narrow limits of accuracy nothing will be seen). To adjust the instru-
ment remove the dark-ground illuminator from the microscope, put in
a low-power ocular only, and put the source of light at such a position
in relation to the condensing lens — which must be used between the
mirror and the source of light— that a rough image of the illuminant
is thrown on to the centre of the mirror. Then project this light up
through the microscope tube, there being nothing intervening between
the mirror and the ocular, and throw on to the ceiling a disc of Hght,
and that disc is a perfect indication of centration. If there is any
want of centration, some reflection may be seen from either the inside
of the tube of the microscope or the inside of the ocular, or from the
sub-stage fitting if there is considerable lack of concentration. When
centrality is secured do not touch the light, the condensing lens or the
mirror in any way. Put the objective on, put on to the stage the
object to be observed, having previously put in the dark-ground
illuminator, with either oil or glycerin to secure immersion. Next get
the object into view with a low-power objective, focus up the image of
the radiant, getting as sharp and as small an image of it as possible.
When viewed, if not at the centre of the field, bring to the centre by
means of the sub-stage centring-screws. Then replace the low-power
ocular by the higher power, x 12 or x 18, and all should be in order.
Finally, slides and cover-glasses should be carefully calibrated, and
cleanliness of these two essential accessories was of the greatest
importance.

Messrs. Akehurst, Heron-Allen, Sheppard, Scourfield and Dr. Rudd
Leeson took part in the discussion that followed.

Colonel Harrison, M.D., on the invitation of the President, dealt
briefly with the difference between various Spirochaetes. In distin-
guishing S. pallida from other varieties, the points he laid stress upon
were : first, the extreme fineness of the pallida ; secondly, its pallidity.
If the focus was shifted, even a little, other varieties assumed a rusty
hue, whereas the S. pallida retained its delicate pallor. S. perfringens,
too, was much more dazzling than S. pallida. Hence the illumination
which sufficed fairly well for other Spirocha^tes was not enough for
>S'. pallida. Another feature was the great flexibility of S. pallida,

240 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

which was very active in a small radius. The only Spirochseta which
might cause differential difficulty was S. microdeiitiim, an organism
obtained from the mouth of certain cases. But this had black portions
on its body, so that it was naturally demarcated into luminous and
dark portions, as against the uniform pallor of .S'. pallida. Also the
body was thicker. He recommended examination of material from
the syphilitic papule, rather than from any other part of the patient,
to those who were endeavouring to become familiar with the micro-
scopical appearance of S. pallida.

Professor Conrady and the President briefly replied to points which
had been raised on their respective communications, and the meeting
resolved itself into a series of practical demonstrations.

A SPECIAL GENERAL MEETING

OF THE Society was held at 20 Hanover Square, W., on April
17th, 1918, at 7.55 p.m., to consider the following Motion
BY Mr. Wilson : —

" That this Meeting instructs the Council to take the necessary
action to remove all alien enemy Honorary, Ex-officio, and Ordinary
Fellows from the Society's Eoll " —

of which due notice had been given on January 16th, 1918, and a copy
of the resolution itself hung in the Society's Rooms during the pre-
scribed period of at least two mouths, in accordance with By-law 34.

The President opened the Special General Meeting, and called upon
Mr. Wilson to propose the resolution standing in his name.

Mr. Wilson then read out the terms of his motion, and explained
that there were twelve honorary alien enemy Fellows, and made a short
speech in support of the resolution.

The President pointed out that the matter was in no sense a political
one, since the individuals concerned were elected to the Society on
account of their scientific attainments and eminence, and requested
Fellows toconfine their comments strictly to the terms of the resolution.

Mr. Hiscott, the Honorary Solicitor to the Society, seconded the
resolution.

Dr. Rudd Leeson, who rose to support the resolution, was ruled out
of order by the President.

There being no amendment proposed to the Meeting, the resolution
was put and enthusiastically carried by the necessary two-thirds majority.

The President then declared the resolution carried, and instructed
the Secretary to make an entry in the Minute Book to that effect (By-
law 73), ^ ^

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. • 241

AN ORDINARY MEETING

OF THE Society was held at 20, Hanover Square, W., on
Wednesday, April 17, 1918.

The Minutes of the preceding Meeting, having been circulated,
were taken as read, confirmed, and signed by tlie President.

The nomination papers of Messrs. Lancaster and Whitaker were read.

The Financial Statement for the year 1917, which should have
been included in the Annual Report of the Council, was now presented
by the Treasurer and read by the Secretary, and is here inserted.

Finance.

The Revenue Account shows an excess of expenditure over income
of £141 16s. M.

Compared with last year, the income of the Society again shows a
decrease, the revenue from subscriptions having again fallen, while the
total expenditure has increased by some £182 ; the increased cost of the
Journal alone being some £151.

The value of the Society's Securities has been left at the same
figure as last vear, the investment account therefore remaining at
£1981 Us.

The Society's holding of £400 of 4^ % War Loan was converted to
£421 of 5 % War Loan.

During the year the sum of £75 19s. 6d. was expended on the
purchase of a Zeiss Optical Bench and Projection Apparatus, and this
amount has been added to the Property Account.

: ' During the year one Ijife Composition fee has been received, and
the Council has decided to open a special Life Compositions Account.

The balance from the Revenue Account has been charged against
the Reserve Fund, and this fund is therefore reduced by £141 16s. ^d.,
and now stands at £71 18s. Sd. ,

The Council regret that the high cost of printing and the growing
scarcity of paper have compelled them to reduce the issue of the Journal
to four numbers per annum instead of six, and the first quarterly
number will be issued in March.

The Balance-Sheet, which had been audited by Col. Clibborne and
Mr. Wilson, was exhibited, and is here inserted.

CO 00 O

cj 05 i-H
^ O CO

O CJ O C5
1-1

O CO 1-1 CO
tH iH iH rH

t- O »0 .H

00

O ■*

CO CO

O 05

CO C<J

w

a.2

0.22

w
-^
fl
CD

a
®

CO

n
o

1-3

CO CO

to

fl

a

CD

>
0

55 *"*
la 9

>> CO cj

^ ? fl

pq - -

U5 O CO CO o

CD '^ 05 t~ O

CD t^" 00 O O

CM CO ■* r-l rH

00

CD CD i-H CO
I-l

tH 05 CO 00

CD O -^ 10
CO ■* rH CO
M< i-H >0

CD

I P S .=! t)0

e3 -£ CO Ti ^
d ^ :j .1^ CO

O
EH

■OC

a

M
I'd

fl CO

.2 a? CD

O) .u> Pj CD

O >-i c6 >-!
O 'o O a

•"I fl oa (D

'S * -a
^.2 H-a

1^^-^

i-l o o

■* o o

t- rH O

■^ (?q iH

• a

• o
w

o

CO cri

<D -^

^^
^ CD

c5 g'o

rj} ri W ^
<D .S 03 O

CO ^< CO m

03 03 O

t») !a t") a

H ■*=' -^ a

BccPhQ
02

=*!

m

O

m.

^ ^

0 tc

CDO

CM

rA ^

tH 0:

i-H iO

CO

60

tH r^

T—

rH rH

-<*< ,H

0

VI OC

CO (M

CO rH

CD

(M

0

T-H C^l

CD

rH

Ol

rg" 0 00 00

OCO

=ti

CO 0 0 tH

(M <y>

iH

^.■. d 0 rH

00 10

CrtOX'

00 t-

CM

_c^

fH

4=

03
03

CO

<D
0

t-

rH

rH

CO

jdcc fl

eS

j3

w • • •

ts as per last Balance S
North British Railway
Nottingham Corporatio
New South Wales 3J %

India 3%

Metropolitan Water Bo

c8

'sh
0

Ass
eposit Account
iirrent Account
etty Cash Account . .

a

08

0

crew Gauges
Account, as per last Ba
pparatus purchased d

03

03

fl 0 00 >« 0 T-H

02^

<

fi

Qo(^

go OC

CO
03
>

t-H

5 rH 10 CM

H 02 rH '^

0 2

mP-t

'«

h

1

to _ «

c3 - -

a

jcrtcftcrt

CO

;;

n rs

=

rg ■ tH >0 00

1 «M

^ CO-H CO

CO

(M CD rH

0

«*^ t- rH t-

CD

r-l -*

CO

(M

(M

-ti ^ C3 0

»o as

t^ t- lo 0

"^ rH iH tH

10 CD

i-H 7-H

Q1 t- (M ^

^Ol rH CO

CO rH

rH -Tj<

i-H

<M rH

CM

■*3

CD ■ • ■

w ■ • ■

3

»— (
H

t— t , , .

J . . .

1— 1

CD 8

PQ

r 0

< . . .

I-H , . .
1-1

^g

CO 0

eS f^

■t; a

2--^

nds
Fun
ershi

^ a §

a (s.^

2 C3 c3

t^ ^ a

o-=^pq

■s^^

b? «

apit:
how
ife J

fl to '"^

rj 03

•

Occh:!

COM

0 - -

^ #»

H " "

*

^

PEOCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 243

On the proposition of Dr. Eyre, seconded l)y Mr. Wilson, it was
resolved that the Statement of Accounts and the Treasurer's Financial
Statement should be received, adopted, and entered on the Minutes.

Mr. Webster exhibited some specimens of Planorhis corneus which
he had found in a small pond on a farm in Hertfordshire. He had
not heard of this variety of P. corneus having been previously found,
but as he had had a specimen brought to him by a dealer some two
years ago, found in Esses, he assumed that it was not so scarce as usually
supposed.

A vote of thanks to Mr. Webster for his exhibition was given.

Mr. E. J. Sheppard then made a communication on " Two Valuable
Methods of Staining in Bulk and Counter-staining," which will appear
in abstract in the Journal of the Society.

Mr. E. Atkinson then made a communication on " Hypo-eutectoid
Steel," copiously illustrated by lantern slides. This paper will also
appear in the pages of the Journal.

A short discussion ensued, in wliich Messrs. Hill and Rawlins and
the President took, part, and Mr. Atkinson briefly replied.

A paper by Mr. J. M. Brown, on " Pyxidicula invisitata, a Rhizopod
new to Britain, and Hedriocystis spinifera, a new Helizoon," was then
read by Mr. Scourfield. This will also appear in the pages of the
Journal.

The thanks of the Society were accorded to each of these exhibitors
and authors for their valuable contributions.

The President announced that the next Meeting of the Biological
Section would be held on May 1, and the next Ordinary Meeting of the
Society on April 15, to be devoted to the usual "Pond-life" exhibition.

244 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

AN ORDINARY MEETING

OF THE Society was held at No. 20 Hanover Square, W., on
Wednesday, May 15th, 1918, Mr. J. E. Barnard, President,
IN THE Chair.

The Minutes of the Special General Meeting, April 17, and Ordinary
Meeting, April 17, were read, confirmed, and signed by the President.

Death of Dr. Hebb. — The President reported the death of Dr.
Hebb, who was elected a Fellow of the Society as long ago as 1885.
He had always taken a very active part in the work of the Society,
acting as Secretary for some ten or twelve years, and he had edited the
Journal with marked ability up to the time of his death. He believed
it was a statement of fact that his work on the Journal was probably
the last thing that Dr. Hebb did. One outstanding feature of his
character that appealed to them all was his unfailing geniality under all
circumstances. He was sure that it was the wish of the Society that a
letter should be sent from them expressing their great regret. He had
attended the funeral service held that morning in the Westminster
Hospital Chapel, with Dr. Eyre and Mr. Scourfield, to represent the
Society, and had laid a wreath on the coffin in the name of the Society.
It was intended to send a letter of sympathy to Mrs. Hebb, and he
asked those who were in favour of a Vote of Condolence being passed
to stand in their places.

The Death of Miss Kate M. Hall, elected in 1910, was also
announced.

Donation to the Society.— The President reported that Lady Flower
had kindly offered an old Microscope by Hugh Powell, with accessories,
and that the Council had accepted the same on behalf of the Society.

Mr. Parsons moved, and Mr. Grundy seconded, " That a very hearty
vote of thanks be accorded to Lady Flower for her kindness in presenting
the Microscope to the Society."

Carried unanimously.

The Society already possesses a similar instrument, but Lady Flower's
donation has several additional accessories. It will therefore be a
desirable acquisition to the Society's Cabinet.

Among the accessories are 2-in. and |-in. objectives, the latter
having cover-glass adjustment and a lieberkiihn ; three eye-pieces, the
medium power being fitted with an arrangement for varying the position
of the diaphragm through a range of rather more than J-in. The
concave mirror forms a " white cloud " reflector. There is a piece of
apparatus for holding a glass tube containing weed or living objects

PKOCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 245

in water while under examination. There are two stages, a small spring-
safety stage and a large stage which can be substituted for the small one.
There are also a stage bull's-eye condenser, stage forceps, dark wells, etc.
For particulars of the stand see the Journ. R. M, S. 1901, p. 728,
where Mr. Nelson gives a most interesting historical description of a
similar example presented by Messrs. Watson and Sons.

Pond-Life Exhibition. — The President then called upon Mr. Scour-
field to make some observations on the Exhibition of Pond-Life which
had been arranged by Fellows of the Society and Members of the
Quekett Microscopical Club.

Mr. Scourfield said he thought it might be fairly clauned that general
" Pond-Life " exhibitions had a decidedly educational and scientific
value. This was not so much because particular exhibits were of great
rarity or possessed special scientific interest, although this might some-
times be the case, but rather because of the general effect upon both
those who had previously given little or no attention to the subject and
those who had already specialized in some one branch. To the former
there was no doubt that these exhibitions did give, in a very attractive
way, an indication of the manifold variety of microscopic fresh-water
organisms and of the wonderful structure and exquisite beauty of many
of them. To the specialist, on the other hand, they were at least
useful as a reminder that the objects of his own study did not live
altogether in a world of their own, and that he must therefore not lose
sight of the probable inter-relationships of other groups of organisms
with his own particular pets. To those who were not exactly either
novices or specialists these exhibitions certainly gave encouragement to
go still more whole-heartedly into the subject.

The general effect, therefore, should be to extend the desire for
further and deeper knowledge of all kinds of fresh-water organisms, and
of their conditions of existence — in other words, to lead to an increased
interest in the study of fresh-water biology. To go into the many
questions arising from a study of fresh-water organisms would, however,
lead too far from their purpose that evening, and he intended to refer
to three only which seemed to be of some practical importance at the
present time.

In the first place, it could scarcely be doubted that the diseases of
fresh-water organisms, and more especially, perhaps, the diseases carried
by them, was a subject of the utmost importance. There was still much '
work to be done in this field, and it was open to all pond-life workers
to add to the knowledge of the subject by making careful notes of all
cases of diseased or parasite-bearing organisms which came under their
notice.

Then there was the problem of what might be called the food-chain
which existed in ponds, lakes, and other fresh waters, extending from
the lowest algse up to the fishes. From the point of view of scientific
fish culture it was very necessary to know something of this dependence
of one organism upon another in a gradually ascending series. In this
connexion attention might be called to the great importance which had

246

PKOCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

only in qnite recent years been found to attach to the extremely minute
free-swimming or free-floating organisms constituting what was now
known as the nannoplaukton.

Lastly, there was the question of pure water supply. The problems
involved in this were very largely biological, and the more detailed the
knowledge of pond-life organisms the more complete would be the
control which could be exercised under all circumstances over this very
vital matter.

To those interested in this subject the little pamphlet on the
-" Biology of Waterworks," issued by the Natural History Museum, could
be recommended.

Mr. Scourfield then j^roceeded to call attention to the various
exhibits, commenting upon some of their more prominent peculiarities.

At the conclusion of Mr. Scourfield's remarks, the President said
that, there was no question about it that the study of Pond-Life was as
likely to be as utilitarian as any form of study. What it might lead up
to was quite unseen at the time the work was done. Even at the present
time, with the extraordinary sanitation in the Army and measures being
taken to stamp out disease, 80 p.c. of the illnesses were due to infections
conveyed by parasites, living things that are in the strictest sense
microscopical. In the case of an enormous proportion of those out of
action through disease, the cause might be traced to some parasitic
type of living thing. He moved, " That a hearty vote of thanks be
accorded to the Fellows of the Society and to the Members of the
Quekett Microscopical Club who have exhibited specimens, and to .
Mr. Scourfield for the remarks he has made on the exhibits."
Carried unanimously.

The President announced that the Biological Section would pay a
Tisit on June 15 to the John Lines Horticultural Institution at Merton,
by kind invitation of Professor Batesou. At the next Meeting of the
Biological Section, on June 5, there would be a communication by Mr. J.
Burton on " Some Fresh-water Alga?."

The business proceedings then terminated.

The following

Mr. C. H. Bestow
Mr. A. J. Bowtell
Mr. F. W. Chipps

Objects were exhibited : —

M
M

M
M
M:
M
M

E. Cuzner .

D. Davies .

E. D. Evens
J. Grundy .
A. Hardcastle
C. E. Heath
T. H. Hiscott

Vaginicola crystallina.

Monas sp.

ConocMlus volvox ; Polyzoa {Alc7jo-
nella) developing from statoblasts.

Melicerta ringens ; Carchesium sp.

Free-swimming Rotifers.

Larva of SimuUum ; ova of fish.

Glenodinium sp. ; Plumatella repens.

Stephmioceros eichhornii.

Hydra vulgaris.

Closterium lineatum conjugating, show-
ing double zygospore ; Lecquereiisia
spiralis. ■

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 247

Mr. J. J. Jackson . . , . Hydra fusca.

Dr. J. R. Leeson .... Spirogyra in conjugation.

Mr." H. H.Mortimer . . . Water-mite (P<o?ir« c«mews).

Mr. J. M. Offord .... Gnat larvse {Gulex) emerging from

egg-raft.
Mr. R. Paulson .... Colacium sp., parasitic on Cyclops.
Mr. F. J. W. Plaskitt . . . Surirella spiralis.
Mr. J. Richardson . . . . Acanthocy stis turf acea ; ^^^^c^noi ^owdi-

snail.
Mr. St. George .... Ifelicerta ringens ; Vorticella sp.
Mr. D. J. Scourfield . . . Scapholeberis mucronata, an Entomo-

stracan which makes use of the

surface-film of water for support.
Mr. R. S. W. Sears . . . Conochilus volvox ; Volvoz globator ;

Stentor polymorphus.
Mr. C. D. Soar Water-mites {Neumania spinipes, Ar-

rhmiurus glohator, Acercus lutescem).
Mr. G. Tilling Water-mites {Diplodontus dispiciens,

Arrhenurus caudatus).
Mr. W. R. Traviss .... Plumatella repens.
Mr. W. J. Webster .... Planorhis corneus, red variety ; Vallis-

neria spiralis, large variety.
Mr. J. Wilson Actinosphaerium eichhornvi ; Acantho-

cystis turfacea.

New Fellows : —

Elected January 16, 19 IS :—

Mr. Maurice A. AinsHe, R.N., B.A., F.R.A.S.

Mr. Harold Downes, M.B., CM., L.R.C.P., F.L.S.,etc.

Mr. Bertram H. Jones.

Mr. Hubert French Springall.

Elected February 20, 1918 :—

Mr. Basil Adams, R.E., F.C.S.
Mr. Sydney Walter Ross.
Mr. Alfred Seymour-Jones.
Mr. George William Young.

Elected March 20, 1918 :—
Sir Stanley Bois, Kut.
Mr. George Edwin Burke.
Mr. Hugh Hamilton Mortimer.

Elected May 15, 1918 :—
Mr. Henry C. Lancaster.
Mr. Oscar Whittaker, F.E.S.

COUNCIL

OF

THE ROYAL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY.

ELECTED 1918.

PRESIDENT.

Joseph E. Baenaed.

VICE-PRESIDENTS.

Edwaed Heeon-Allen, F.L.S.,

F.Z.S., F.G.S., M.R.I.A., etc.
F. Maetin Duncan, F.R.P.S.

Aethue Eaeland.
EoBEET Paulson, F.L.S.

TREASURER.— Cyeil F. Hill.

SECRETARIES.

J. W. H. Eyee, M.D., M.S., F.R.S. Edin.
David J. Scouefield, F.Z.S.

ORDINARY MEMBERS OF COUNCIL.

Alfeed N. Disney, M.A. B.Sc. Chaeles Singee, M.A.,' M.D.

T. H. HiscoTT. F.E.C.P.

BEN.J. Mooee, M.A., D.Sc, F.R.S. Chaeles D. Soae, F.L.S.

.J. Milton Offoed. ^ Joseph Wilson.

Peecy E. Radley. G. Sims Woodhead, M.A., M.D.

A. W. Sheppaed. LL.D., F.R.S.E., F.R.C.P.

Edwaed J. Sheppaed. B. B. Woodward, F.L.S., F.G.S.

Editor.— Chaeles Singee, M.A. M.D.

Librarian. — Peecy E. Radley.

Curator of Instruments, etc — Chaeles Singee, M.A., M.D.

Curator of Slides — Edwaed J. Sheppaed.

Assistant Secretary. — Chaeles J. Lock,

JOURN. R. MICR. SOC. 1918. Pl. VI.

8

14

2a

11

y

10

17

£!i!I5J&£»

16

21

25

24

27

19

.^

18

22

26

30

34

^a%.

H. Sidebottom, del ad. nat.

Adlard & Son & West Newman, Ltd., Impr.

JOURNAL

OF THE

EOYAL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY.

SEPTEMBER, 1918.

TEANSACTIONS OF THE SOCIETY.

VII. — Report on the Recent Foraminifera dredged off the East Coast
of Australia. H.M.S. " Dart;' Station 19 (14 ifay, 1895),
Lat. 29° 22' >S'., Long. 153° 51' E., 465 fathoms. Pteropod
Ooze — concluded.

By Henry Sidebottom.

\_Commxinicated by B. Heeon-Allen and A. Earland.]
{Bead October 17, 1917.)
Plate VI.

Family KOTALIDiE.

Sub-family Spirillininae.

Spirillina Ehrenberg.

Spirillina limhata Brady.

SpiriUina limhata Brady, 1879, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xix, N.S.,

p. 278, pi. viii, fig. 26.
S. limhata Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 632, pi. Ixxxv, figs. 18-21.

The " Challenger " figures show more space between the. raised
portion of each whorl of the tube than do the tests found in this

EXPLANATION OF PLATE VI.

FIGS.

1_3. — Discorbina bertheloti (d'Orbigny), var. complanata var. nov. Fig. 1,

superior view. Fig. 2, inferior view. Fig. 3, edge view, x 75.
4, 5. — D. circularis sp. n. Fig. 4, superior view. Fig. 5, inferior view, x 50.
6_8. — D. tuberculata Balkwill and Wright, var. acuta var. nov. Fig. 6, superior

view. Fig. 7, inferior view. Fig. 8, edge view, x 110.
9-11. — B. pustulata Heron- Allen and Earland. Fig. 9, superior view. Fig. 10,

inferior view. Fig. 11, edge view, x 75.
12-14. — D. lingulata Burrows and Holland, var. unguiculata var. nov. Pig. 12,
superior view. Fig. 13, inferior view. Fig. 14, edge view, x 76.

[continued.
S

250 Transactions of the Society.

material. Two out of the three found are of moderate size, the
third being smaller.

Spirillina decorata Brady.

SpirilUna decorata Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 633, pi. Ixxxv, figs. 22-25.

One large specimen, deeply furrowed ; the other two much
smaller tests might almost be taken for aS'. limhata, var. denticulata^
except for the subcarination of the peripheral edge. Judged by
the " Challenger " figures and Brady's description none of the three
tests are typical, but seem to be intermediate forms between
S. decorata and S. limhata, var. dcnticulata.

SpirilUna vivipara Ehrenberg.

SpirilUna vivipara Ehrenberg, 1841, Abhandl. k. Akad. Wiss. Berlin, p. 422,

pi. iii, fig. 41.
S. vivipara Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 630, pi. Ixxxv, figs. 1-5.

Two occur : one is concave on both surfaces of the test, but
more so on the superior surface ; the other is slightly concave on
the inferior and convex on the superior surface.

SpirilUna denticulo-granulata Chapman, var. (PI. V, figs. 28, 29.)

SpirilUna dentictdo-granulata Chapman, 1907, Journ. Quekett Micr. Club,

Ser. 2, vol. x, p. 133, pi. x, figs. 6, a-c.
S. denticulo-granulata Chapman, 1909, Subantarctic Islands, New Zealand,

Article xv. Report Forams., p. 354, pi. xvii, fig. 3.

Five examples occur which are allied to Chapman's species.
The chief difference between my specimen and Chapman's is the
absence of any limbation. Chapman's figure in the 1909 paper
shows very little, if any, limbation of the test. The character of
the tubercles, or " small grulations " on the inferior surface varies
in different specimens. In the largest test they completely cover
the surface, so that the coil is hidden ; in the one chosen for illustra-
tion the granulation is confined to the centre of the test, the outer

EXPLANATION OF PLATE ^1— continued.

FIGS.

15_17. — J), involuta sp. n. Fig. 15, superior view. Fig. 16, inferior view. Fig, 17,

edge view, x 50.
18, 91. — D. chasteri, var. bispinosa Heron-Allen and Earland. Fig. 18, superior

view. Fig. 19, inferior view, x 100.
20, 21. — Truncatulina tenuimargo Brady. Fig. 20, inferior view. Fig. 21, edge

view. X 76.
22-25. — Anomalina sinuosa sp. n. Fig. 22, inferior view. Fig. 23, superior view.

Fig. 24, edge view. Fig. 25 mounted in Canada balsam and viewed

by transmitted light, x 75.
26. — Pulvinulina Karsteni (Reuss). Fig. 26, superior view, x 75.
27-29. — Eotalia soldani d'Orbigny (?). Fig. 27, superior view with *' balloon "

chamber. Fig. 28, superior view. Fig. 29, edge view, x 50.
30-34. — Operculina ammonoides d'Orbigny var., inrnquilateralis var. nov. Pigs.
30, 31, 83, lateral views. Figs. 32, 34, edge views. X 50.

Recent Foraminifera off the East Coast of Australia. 251

coils being " barred." The periphery is subject to slight variation,
but none of my tests show it concave as in Chapman's work, 1907,
g- 6c.

Spirillina spinigera Chapman.

SpirilUna spinigera Chapman, 1900, Journ. Linn. Soc. London, Zool.,

vol. xxviii, p. 10, pi. i, fig. 7.
Idem, ibid., 1901, vol. xxxviii, p. 188, pi. xix, figs. 9, 10.
S. decorata Brady, var. Sidebottom, 1908, Mena. Proc. Manchester Lit. Phil.

Soc, vol. lii, pt. V, p. 8, pi. ii, fig. 6.

A solitary example. It agrees well with the " Delos " specimen
which I treated as a variation of aS'. decorata Brady, and which
Chapman considers to be referable to his S. spimgcra (see Chapman,
1909, Foram. Subantarctic Islands, New Zealand, p. 353). It is
difficult to discover whether the superior surface is decorated or
not owing to granular matter, but I think there is evidence of it.
The inferior surface is covered with minute tubercles, and the
peripheral edge is very finely serrate.

Sub-family Rotalinae.

Patellina Williamson.

Fatellina corrugata Williamson.

Patellina corrugata Williamson, 1858, Eec. Foram. Gt. Britain, p. 46, pi. iii,

figs. 86-89.
P. corrugata Bradj', 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 634, pi. Ixxxvi, figs. 1-7.

Several occur ; all in excellent condition.

Cymbalopora Hagenon.

Cymbalopora 'poeyi (d'Orbigny).

Rotalia squamosa d'Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii, p. 272, No. 8.
Eosalina poeyi d'Orbigny, 1819, Foram. Cuba, p. 92, pi. iii, figs. 18-20.
Cymbalopora poeyi Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 636, pi. cii, fig. 13.

C. poeyi Heron-Allen and Earland, 1915, Foram. Kerimba Archipelago, pt. ii.

Trans. Zool. Soc. London, vol. xx, pt. xvii, p. 687.

Only small specimens occur. The number of lobes on the
inferior surface is four, with the exception of two cases where there
are only three. None of the tests are high-domed, like the
" Challenger " fig. 13, but appear to be weak forms of C. pceyi, var.
"Challenger" fig. 14.

Discorhina Parker and Jones.

Discorbina peruviana (d'Orbigny).

Bosalina peruviana d'Orbigny, 1839, Foram. Amer. Merid., p. 41, pi. i,

figs. 12-14.
Discorbina vilardcboana Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 645, pi. Ixxxviii, fig. 2.

D. peruviana Heron- Allen and Earland, 1913, Clare Isl. Foram., Roy.

Irish Acad., p. 122, pi. xi, figs. 1-3.

The height of the spire varies. The peripheral edge is sharp.
Some of the specimens are very near to the " Challenger " figure of

s 2

252 Transactions of the Society.

D. vilardeloana, pi. Ixxxviii, fig. 2, which Heron-Allen and Earland
consider should be placed under D. peruviana d'Orbigny.

Discorhina squamula Reuss.

Discorbina squamula Eeuss, 1867, Sitz. k. Ak. Wiss. Wien., vol. Iv. (i),
p. 101, pi. V, fig. 2.

This is a weak form of D. rosacea, but as Mr. Earland considers
it identical with I), squamula Eeuss, it is perhaps worth while
recording it under that name. Nine occur.

Discorbina cor a (d'Orbigny).
Bosalina cora d'Orbigny, 1839, Foram. Amer. Merid., p. 45, pi. vi, figs. 19-21.

There are only two examples, and they are not quite typical,
although much depressed and sharp edged. The final chamber
occupies a much larger portion of the superior face of the test than
is usual in this species.

Discorbina araucana (d'Orbigny).

Bosalina araucana d'Orbigny, 1839, Foram. Amer. Merid., p. 44, pi. vi,

figs. 16-18.
Discorbina araucana Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 645, pi. ixxxvi, figs. 10, 11.

The tests are small and not quite typical.

The limbation along the sutural lines is concave, and broad
considering the size of the test, and there is no lobulation of the
peripheral edge.

Discorbina rosacea (d'Orbigny).

Rotalia rosacea d'Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii, p. 273, No. 15,

Modele No. 39.
Discorbina rosacea Flint, 1899, Rept. U.S. Nat. Mus. for 1897 (1899),

p. 327, pi. Ixxii, fig. 3.
D. rosacea. Heron-Allen and Earland, 1913, Clare Isl. Foram., Proc. Roy.

Irish Acad., p. 124, pi. xi, figs. 7-9.

The examples are not quite typical, having a strong tendency
towards the Asterigerina planorbis d'Orbigny, of the Vienna
Memoir. The asterigene chambers in the umbilical region are
rounded off and not star-shaped.

Discorbina isabelleana (d'Orbigny).

Bosalina isabelleana d'Orbigny, 1839, Foram. Amer. Merid,, p. 43, pi. vi,

figs. 10-12.
Discorbina isabelleana Brady, 1884, Cball. Rept., p. 646, pi. ixxxviii, fig. 1.

Excellent specimens occur in beautiful condition.

Discorbina concinna Brady.

Discorbina concinna Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 646, pi. xc, figs. 7, 8.

The examples agree in all respects with Brady's figures in the
above reference.

Recent Foraminifera off the East Coast of Australia. 253

Discorbina bertheloti (d'Orbigny).

Rosalind bertheloti d'Orbigny, 1839, Foram. Canaries, p. 135, pi. 1, figs. 28-80.
D. bertheloti Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 650, pi. Ixxxix, figs. 10-12.

The smaller specimens, with one exception, are notable for the
strong limbation along the margins of the segments ; the larger
ones are more normal in this respect and lead up to the largest
example present, which appears to me to be the D. bertheloti,
var. haconica Hantken, var. as figured by Brady (1884, Chall. Eept.,
p. 651, pi. xc, fig. 1), and which he states to be an unimportant
variety.

Discorbina bertheloti (d'Orbigny) var. complanata nov. var.

(PI. VI, figs. 1-3.)

Test much depressed, superior surface slightly convex, inferior
surface very slightly concave. Seven to eight chambers, narrow
and curved, in the outer whorl. Sutures limbate, heavily so on
the margins of the earlier chambers. Periphery bordered and
acute. The tests are in beautiful condition, and are semi-
transparent. I think there is no doubt that this interesting form
is closely allied to the D. bertheloti (d'Orbigny). I submitted
specimens to Mr. Earland, who writes me as follows : —

" The peculiar sigmoid sweep of the chambers is rather striking.
If the specimens are wetted you will see that there is excessive
and radially increasing limbation of the sutures .... The flatness
of your specimens is their striking feature." Ten occur.

Discorbina ojpercularis (d'Orbigny).

Rosalina opercularis d'Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii, p. 271, No. 7.
B. opercularis d'Orbigny, 1839, Foram. Cuba, p. 93, pi. iii, figs. 24, 25 ;

pi. iv, fig. 1.
Discorbina opercularis Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 650, pi. Ixxxix, figs. 8, 9.

The tests are dull and opaque. They are identical w4th the
" Challenger " specimens.

Discorbina rarescens Brady.

Discorbina rarescens Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 651, pi. xc, figs. 2, 3.
D. rarescens Egger, 1893, Abhandl. k. bayer. Akad. Wiss., cl. ii, vol. xviii,
p. 388, pi. XV, figs. 45-47.

Six examples of this thin-shelled Discorbina were found.

Discorbina circularis, sp. n. (PI. VI, figs. 4, 5.)

Discorbina rarescens Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 651, pi. xc, fig. 4(?).

Test circular in outline ; superior surface highly convex and
glassy in appearance ; chambers long, narrow and curved, with

254 Transactions of the Society.

the marginal edge, except in very small specimens, slightly raised.
The inferior surface is almost flat, except towards the umbilical
region, where it is sunk. On this surface the perforations show
conspicuously. The aperture appears to be arched. The test,
when full-grown, carries a well-developed keel. The final chamber
extends to about three-quarters of the circumference.

I think there is no doubt that this form is the one figured
by Brady, 1884, in the "Challenger" Eept., pi. xc, fig. 4, as " Z>.
rarescens (?) " It differs totally from D. rarescens, having a circular
outline, long narrow chambers, and conspicuous perforations on
the under-surface. In Brady's figure the long chambers are faintly
indicated, also their raised edges. This form occurs more frequently
in the material than D. rarescens, ten specimens being found.

Discorbina patelliformis Brady.

Discorbina patelliformis Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 647, pi. Ixxxviii,
fig. 3 ; pi, Ixxxix, fig. 1.

The specimens are very small and agree best with the
" Challenger " illustration, pi. Ixxxviii, fig. 3, but two out of the
four found are more conical.

Discorbina tuberculata Balkwill and Wright.

Discorbifia tuberculata Balkwill and Wright, 1885, Eept. Eec. Foram.

Coast of Dublin and Irish Sea, Trans. Roy. Irish Acad., vol. xxviii,

p. 350, pi. xiii, figs. 28-30.
D. tuberculata Sidebottom, 1904, etc., Eept. Eec. Foram. Coast of Isl.

Delos, Mem. Manchester Lit. and Phil. Soc, pt. v, vol. lii, 1908,

p. 15, pi. V, fig. 5.

The six examples that occur are quite typical.

Discorbina tuberculata B. & W., var. acuta nov. (PI. VI, figs. 6-8.)

This is evidently a variant of D. tuberculata, in which the
tubercles on the superior surface are confined to the acute peripheral
and inner edges of the chambers.

The superior surface is less convex than in the type-form, and
the sutures, which have a jagged appearance, are not so deeply
sunk. The under-surface of the test is more convex than the
superior, and the tubercles are more normally placed.

Disoorbina pustulata Heron-Allen and Earland. (PL VI, figs. 9-11.)

Discorbina jyustulata Heron-Allen and Earland, 1913, Clare Island Survey,

Proc. Eoy. Irish Acad., vol. xxxi, pt. Ixiv, Foram., p. 129, pi. xii,

figs, 5-7.
D. pustulata Heron-Allen and Earland, 1915, Foram. Kerimba Archipelago,

pt. ii. Trans. Zool. Soc. London, vol. xx, pt. xvii, p. 701, pi. lii,

figs. 24-26.

Becerit Foraminifera off the East Coast of Australia.. 255

Two excellent examples occur, which agree best with the
" Keriraba " illustration in the above reference, but the tubercles
on the superior surface of the test are much more numerous,
practically covering the whole surface, and giving a beautiful
appearance to this interesting species. The sutures are slightly
sunk and almost hidden by the tubercles, which are arranged in
lines on either side.

Discorbina biconcava Parker and Jones.

Discorbina biconcava Parker and Jones, 1865, Phil. Trans., vol. civ, p. 422

pi. xix, fig. 10.
D. biconcava Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 653, pi. xci, fig. 2.

A single small specimen, more compressed than the type-form

Discorbiyia lingulata Burrows and Holland.

Discorbina lingulata Burrows and Holland, Foram. Crag., 1895, pt. ii, Pal.

Soc, p. 297, pi. vii, figs. 33, a-c.
D. biconcava Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 653, pi. xci, fig. 3.

Six immature tests occur.

Discorbina lingulata Burrows and Holland, var. unguiculata nov. var.

(PI. VI, figs. 12-14.)

The inferior surface corresponds with that of the type-form, but
the chambers on the superior surface are keeled, and sometimes
instead of lying flat are more or less tilted up. Six were found.
Mr. Earland kindly suggested the varietal name.

Discorbina involuta sp. n. (PI. VI, figs. 15-17.)

Superior surface convex, or more or less flattened. The septse
between the chambers are produced as highly limbate walls ; the
surface between the limbate sutures is tuberculate. Inferior
surface flat, the internal septse hardly visible on either surface.
The number of chambers in the out- whorl is probably about seven.
Subsidiary septiC project from the outer margin into the interior of
the chambers, between the upper and lower walls. In the adult
stage the test is opaque.

Nearly the whole of the above description is taken from notes
kindly sent to me by Mr. Earland, to whom I submitted specimens,
and who has spent considerable time on their examination. He
also points out that no doubt with the increase in size of the test
the number of the subsidiary septie would liecome more numerous,
and eventually the chambers would become semi-labyrinthic.
Personally, I think the subsidiary septse are the foundation of the
numerous tubercles which appear on the superior surface. The
test chosen for illustration is one of the flatter specimens.

256 Transactions of the Society.

Discorbina chasteri, var. bispinosa, Heron-Allen and Earland.

(PI. VI, figs. 18, 19.)

Discorbina chasteri, var. bispinosa Heron-Allen and Earland, 1913, Clare
Island Survey, Proc. Roy. Irish Acad., vol. xxxi, pt. Ixiv, Foram.,
p. 129, pi. xiii, fig. 4.

The under-siirface agrees with the type-form.
Two found.

Truncatulina d'Orbigny.

Truncatulina lobatida (Walker and Jacob).

" Nautilus spiralis lobatus, etc.,'' Walker and Boys, 1784, Test. Min., p. 20,

pi. iii, fig. 71.
N. lobatulus Walker and Jacob, 1798, Adam's Essays, Kanmacher's Ed.,

p. 642, pi. xiv, fig. 36.
Truncatulina lobatula Williamson, 1858, Rec. Foram. Gt. Britain, p. 59.

pi. V, figs. 121-23.

A large specimen, and a few smaller ones.

Truncatulina wuellerstorfi (Schwager).

Anomalina wuellerstorfi Schwager, 1866, Novara-Exped. Geol. Theil, vol. ii,

p. 258, pi. vii, fig. 105.
Truncatulina wuellerstorfi Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 662, pi. xciii, figs,

8, 9.

Capital examples of this depressed species are present.

Truncatulina akneriana (d'Orbigny).

Rotalina aJcneriana d'Orbigny, 1846, For. Fobs. Vienne, p. 156, pi. viii,

figs. 13-15.
Truncatulina akneriana Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 663, pi. xciv, fig. 8.

Numerous examples occur, varying a good deal in size. The
larger tests are more coarsely built than the smaller ones.

Truncatulina ungeriana (d'Orbigny).

Rotalina ungeriana d'Orbigny, 1846, For. Fobs. Vienne, p. 157, pi. viii,

figs. 16-18.
Truncatulina ungeriana Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 664, pi. xciv, fig. 9.

The tests agree with the " Challenger " examples.

Truncatuliyia robertsoniana Brady.

Truncatulina robertsoniana Brady, 1881, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xxi^

N.S., p. 65.
T. robertsoniana Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 664, pi. xcv, fig. 4.

There are six tests. They answer to Brady's description.,
except that the chambers in the iinal whorl are not quite so
numerous, and only one specimen is of the typical colour.

Recent Foraminifera off the East Coast of Australia. 357

Truncatulina haidingerii (d'Orbigny).

Botalina haidingerii d'Orbigny, 1846, For. Fobs. Vienne, p. 154, pi. viii,

figs. 7-9.
Truncatulina haidijigerii Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 663, pi. xcv, fig. 7.

Similar to the " Challenger " tests in every respect.

Truncatulina reticulata (Czjzek).

Botalina reticulata Czjzek, 1848, Haidinger's Naturw. Abhandl., vol. ii^

p. 145, pi. xiii, figs. 7-9.
Truncatulina reticulata Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., 669, pi. xcvi, figa. 5-8.

The examples are well developed.

Truncatulina pygmcea Hantken.

Truncatulina pygnma Hantken, 1875, Mittheil. Jahrb. d. k. ung. geol.

Anstalt, vol. iv, p. 78, pi. x, fig. 8.
T. pygmcea Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 666, pi. xcv, figs. 9, 10.

This is one of the best represented forms of the Truncatulina
in the gathering. The convexity of the superior surface varies.
The lobulation of the periphery and the slight roughness of both
the surfaces are distinctive.

Truncatulina culter (Parker and Jones).

Planorbulina culter Parker and Jones, 1865, Phil. Trans., vol. civ, p. 421,

pi. xix, fig. 1.
Truncatulina culter Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 668, pi. xcvi, fig. 3.

This, again, is one of the well-represented forms. Most of the
tests show "a certain amount of colouring of a light brown shade.
In one case the keel is well developed.

Truncatulina tenera Brady.
Truncatulina tenera Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 665, pi. xcv, fig. 11.

Brady mentions the difficulty of distinguishing between T.
tenera and Puhinulina umhonata Eeuss. I have placed the
specimens under the above heading on account of the pronounced
lobulation of the test, which, in the " Challenger " illustrations of
the two forms, is much more marked in T. tenera Brady than in
P. umhonata Eeuss.

Truncatulina tenuimargo Brady. (PI. VI, figs. 20, 21.)

Truncatulina tenuimargo Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 662, pi. xciii, figs. 2,5,
T. tenuimargo Egger, 1893, Abhandl. k. bayer. Acad. Wiss., cl. ii, vol.

xviii, p. 399, pi. xvi, figs. 7-9.
T. tenuimargo Heron-Allen and Earland, 1908, etc., Rec. and Foss. Foram.

Selsey Bill, Sussex, Journ. Roy. Micr. Soc, 1909, p. 680, pi. xx, fig. 2.

A most interesting set.

The small form (fig. 3 in the Chall. Eept.) is present ; but

258 Transactions of the Society.

the chief interest centres round the variety, fig. 2, in which, in
some cases, the chambers on the inferior surface assume the form
of erect cones, the sutures being very deep ; in fact, the last two
■chambers in some of the specimens are almost independent of each
other. The keel is well developed. Two of the tests show colour,
one being of a light brown tint and the other much darker,
especially in the earlier chambers.

Four occur similar to the " Challenger " fig. 3, and fourteen
of the variety specially mentioned. These latter vary in size.

Anomalina d'Orbigny.
Anomalina ammonoides (Keuss).

Hosalina ammonoides Reuss, 1845, Yarstein. bohm. Kreide, p. 36, pi. viii,

fig. 53 ; pi. xiii, fig. 66.
Anomalina ammonoides Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 672, pi. xciv, figs. 2, 3.

Excellent examples occur.

Anomalina coronata Parker and Jones.

Anomalina coronata Parker and Jones, 1857, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist.,

Ser. 2, vol. xix, p. 294, pi. x, figs. 15. 16.
A. coronata Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 675, pi. xcvii, figs. 1, 2.

Two good specimens occur.

Anomalina polymorplia Costa.

Anomalina polymorpha Costa, 1856, etc., Atti dell' Accad. Pontan., vol. vii,

p. 252, pi. xxi, figs. 7-9.
A. ]}olymori)ha Brady, 1884, Chall, Kept., p. 676, pi. xcvii, figs. 3-6.

This rough and spinous Anomalina is represented by two
excellent specimens.

Anomalina simiosa, sp. n. (PI. VI, figs. 22-25.)

Test compressed. Superior surface flat or slightly concave.
Inferior surface slightly convex, with sloping sides and generally
a little hollowed in the region of the earlier chambers. Peripheral
edge acute. The cham])ers, of which there are five or six in the
outermost whorl, are irregular in shape, .sinuous and difficult to
distinguish (except when the test is mounted in Canada balsam
and viewed as a transparency), owing to the excessive limbation,
which is often broader in parts than the adjacent portion of the
chamber. The limbation along the septal lines is raised and
rounded, varies in width and is extraordinarily sinuous. The
test is semi-transparent, a little roughened on the inferior face.
The aperture is difficult to distinguish, but appears to be situated
near the inner edge of the very narrow septal face of the final
chamber. The end of the final chamber does not always project

Recent Foraminifera off the East Coast of Australia. 259

as in the drawings, but sometimes finishes off regularly, I have
found it a difficult foraminifer to draw and describe, but the
drawings are quite sufficient for its identification. The tests
chosen for illustration were selected as the easiest to draw, the
limbation being not quite so excessive as in the others.
Twelve occur.

Pulvinulina Parker and Jones.
Pulvinulina menardii (d'Orbigny).

Eotalia menardii d'Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii, p. 273, No. 26,

Modele No. 10.
Pulvinulina menardii Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 690, pi. ciii, figs. 1, 2.

This species is well represented.

Pulvinulina tumida Brady.

Pulvinulina menardii, var. tumida, Brady, 1877, Geol. Mag., Ser. 2, vol. iv,

p. 535.
P. tumida Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 692, pi. ciii, figs. 4-6.

This thick variety is also present.

Pulvinulina canariensis (d'Orbigny).

Botalina canariensis d'Orbigny, 1839, Foram. Canaries, p. 130, pi. i, figs.

34-36.
Pulvinulina canariensis Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 692, pi. ciii, figs. 8-10.

Excellent examples.

Pulvinulina patagonica (d'Orbigny).

Botalina patagonica d'Orbigny, 1839, Foram. Amer. Merid., p. 36, pi. ii,

figs. 6-8.
Pulvinulina patagonica Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 693, pi. ciii, fig. 7.

There is a great contrast in size between this and F. canariensis,
to which Millett considers it is closely related.

'Pulvinulina crassa (d'Orbigny).

Botalina crassa d'Orbigny, 1840, Mem. Soc. Geol. France, vol. iv, p. 32,

pi. iii, figs. 7, 8.
Pulvinulina crassa Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 694, pi. ciii, figs. 11, 12.

The tests are well developed.

Pulvinulina truncatulinoides (d'Orbigny).

Botalina truncatulinoides d'Orbignv, 1839, Foram. Canaries, p. 132, pi. ii,

figs. 25-27.
B. micheliniana d'Orbigny, 1840, Mem. Soc. Geol. France, vol. iv, p. 31,

pi. iii, figs. 1-3.
Pulvinulina truncatulinoides Ehumbler, 1900, in Karl Brandt's Nordisches

Plankton, Heft 14, p. 17, figs. 16-18.

The examples are quite normal.

260 Transactions of the Society.

Pulvinulina elegans (d'Orbigny).

Botalia (Turbinulina) elegans d'Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. xii,

p. 276, No. 54.
Pulvinulina elegans Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 699, pi. cv, figs. 4-6.

Pulvinulina partschiana (d'Orbigny).

Botalina partschiana d'Orbigny, 1846, For. Foss. Vienne, p. 153, pi. vii,

figs. 28-30 ; pi. viii, figs. 1-3.
Pulvinulina partschiana Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 699, pi. cv, fig. 3, and

p. 700, fig. 21.

These allied forms are both present, and the carinate form
also. This latter is quite transparent, and the specimens are much
smaller than those of the type-form.

Pulvinulina auricula (Fichtel and Moll).

Nautilus auricula, var. a, Fichtel and Moll, 1798, Test. Micr., p. 108, pi. xx,

figs, a, b, c.
Pulvinidina auricula Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 688, pi. cvi, fig. 5.

Fine typical tests occur. Eare.

Pulvinulina oblonga (Williamson).

Pulvinulina auricula, var. /3, Fichtel and Moll, 1798, Test. Micr., p. 108,

pi. XX, figs, d, e, f.
P. auricula Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 688, pi. cvi, fig. 4.

The tests are small, but they occur more frequently than
P. auricula.

Pulvinulina exigua Brady.
Pulvinulina exigua Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 696, pi. ciii, figs. 13, 14.
This small form occurs frequently.

Pulvinulina Itarsteni (Reuss). (PI. VI, fig. 26.)

Botalia Jcarsteni Reuss, 1855, Zeitschr. d. deutsch. geol. Gesellsch., vol. vii,

p. 273, pi. ix, fig. 6.
P. Tiarsteni Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 698, pi. cv, figs. 8, 9.
P. Tcarsteni Heron-Allen and Earland, 1916, Foram. West of Scotland,

Trans. Linn. Soc. London, 2nd ser, Zool., vol. xi, p. 276, pi. xlii, figs.

34-37.

I submitted tests to Mr. Earland for inspection, and he writes
to me that " these immature and pauperate forms are frequent in
British dredgings."

The specimens are hyaline and agree with the illustrations
from the West of Scotland in the above reference. Frequent.

I

Recent Foraminifera off the. East Coast of Australia. 261

Pulvinulina hauerii (d'Orbigny),

Botalina hauerii d'Orbigny, 1846, For. Foss. Vien., p. 151, pi. vii, figs. 22-24.
Pulvinulina hauerii Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 690, pi. cvi, figs. 6, 7.

Except that the tests are not quite so stout, the examples agree
with the " Challenger " fig. 7.

Botalia Lamarck.

Botalia orbicularis (d'Orbigny).

Gyroidina orbicularis d'Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii, p. 278, No. 1,

Modele No. 13.
Botalia orbicularis Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 706, pi. cvii, fig. 5 ;

pi. cxv, fig. 6.

Good examples of this neat form occur.

Most of the specimens are of a clear light brown tint, deepen-
ing at the centre of the superior face.

The tests are highly polished, and some of them are almost
flat on the upper surface.

Botalia soldanii (?) d'Orbigny. (PI. VI, figs. 27-29.)

Botalia {Gyroidiiia) soldanii d'Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii, p. 278,
No. 5, Modele No. 36.

Test polished ; superior surface, if anything, rather more convex
than the inferior; umbilicus flush, not excavated; periphery rounded;
aperture a curved slit on the inferior face of the last segment, close
to the line of union of the previous convolution.

The specimens may be a pauperate form of B. soldanii, but
this is open to question, and therefore I have put a query. The
chief interest regarding this form is the presence of a " balloon "
chamber on three out of the eight examples found, and a fourth
(figs. 28, 29) shows traces either of its having had a " balloon "
chamber, or of one having been commenced. The orifice and a
considerable area of the test are enclosed by this extra chamber.

Family NUMMULINID^E.

Sub-family Polystomellinae.

Nonionina d'Orbigny.

^onionina stelligera d'Orbigny.

Nonionina stelligera d'Orbigny, 1839, Foram. Canaries, p. 128, pi. iii, figs. 1, 2.

N. stelligera Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 728, pi. cix, figs. 8-5.

N. stelligera Heron-Allen and Earland, 1916, Foram. West of Scotland,

Trans. Linn. Soc, London, 2nd ser. Zool., vol. xi, p. 280, pi. xliii, figs.

8-10.

Both the forms figured in the " Challenger " Kept, are present.
The larger one, with the fewer and more inflated chambers, is
frequent ; the other very rare.

262 Transactions of the Society.

Nonionina depressula (Walker and Jacob).
Nautilus depressulus Walker and Jacob, 1798, Adam's Essays, Kammacher's

edition, p. 641, pi. xiv, fig. 33.
Nonionina depressula Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 725, pi. cix, figs.

A fair number of specimens found. They vary a good deal in
shape. Most of them are slightly elongate, and the edge view of
these is not quite symmetrical, the final chambers being a little
lobsided. Some of these examples match the JSf. scapha (?) figured
by Brady (Chall. Kept., pi. cix, fig. 16), but I have put them under
this heading as the greater number are more circular in outline
and therefore nearer to N. depressula.

Nonionina umhilicatula (Montagu).
Nautilus umbUcatulus Montagu, 1803, Tert. Brit., p. 191 ; Suppl., p. 78,

pi. xviii, fig. 1.
Nonionina umhilicatula Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 726, pi. cix, figs. 8, 9.

Excellent examples occur.

Nonionina scaplia (Fichtel and Moll).

Nautilus scapha Fichtel and Moll, 1798, Test. Micr., p. 105, pi. xix, figs. d-f.
Nonionina scapha Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 730, pi. cix, figs. 14, 15,
and 16 (?)
The tests are rather small, but occur fairly frequently.

Nonionina turgida (Williamson).
Botalina turgida Williamson, 1858, Eec. Foram. Gt. Britain, p. 50, pi. iv,

figs. 95-97.
Nonionina turgida Brady, 1884, Chall. Kept., p. 731, pi. cix, figs. 17-19.

Several forms found. The one which occurs most frequently is
not well developed. It is equilateral and narrower than the type-
form. The inequilateral variety is much smaller and rare.
Besides these, there are a couple nearer to the type, but one of
them is much flattened.

Nonionina houeana d'Orbigny.

Nonionina houeana d'Orbigny, 1846, For. Foss. Vienne, p. 108, pi. v, figs.

11, 12.
N. houeana Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 729, pi. cix, figs. 12, 13.

A single specimen, not quite circular in outline, with narrow,
slightly curved chambers. The test is compressed and small, and
cannot be considered typical.

Nonionina orhicularis Brady.

Nonionina orhicularis Brady, 1881, Denkschr. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien.,

vol. xliii, p. 105, pi. ii, fig. 5.
N. orhicularis Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 727, pi. cix, figs. 20, 21.
N. orhicularis Madsen, 1895, Medd. Dansk. Geol. Forening, No. 2, p. 217,

pl., fig. 7.
N. orhicularis Millett, 1898, etc., Foram. Malay Archipelago, Journ. Eoy.
Micr. Soc, 1904, p. 600, pl. xi, fig. 1.

A single example. It agrees best with Millett's figure, though
the test is rather more compressed. The granulation along the
sutural line is well marked.

Recent Foraminifera off the East Coast of Australia. 263

Polystomella Lamarck.

Polystomella crispa (Linne).

Nautilus crispus Linne, 1767, Syst. Nat., ed. 12, p. 1162, No. 275.
Polystomella crispa Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 736, pi. ex, figs. 6, 7.

Only two or three very small and weak specimens found.

Polystomella macella (Fichtel and Moll).

Nautilus macellus Fichtel and Moll, 1798, Test. Micr., p. 66, pi. x, figs. e-ff.
Polystomella macella Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 737, pi. ex, figs. 8, 9, 11
and (?) 10.

Two very small, immature specimens.

Polystomella striatopunctata (Fichtel and Moll).

Nautilus striatopunctatus Fichtel and Moll, 1798, Test. Micr., p. 61, pi. ix.

figs. a-c.
Polystomella striatopunctata Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 733, pi. cix,

figs. 22, 23.

A solitary, imperfect, and very small example.

Polystomella verriculata Brady.

Polystomella verriculata Brady, 1881, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., N.S.,

vol. xxi, p. 66.
P. verriculata Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 738, pi. ex, fig. 12.

Two occur.

Polystomella imperatrix (?) Brady.

Polystomella imperatrix Brady, 1881, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., vol. xxi,

N.S., p. 66.
P. imperatrix Brady, 1884, Chall. Rept., p. 738, pi. ex, figs. 13-15.

Three small tests, which are not typical.

They carry several spines, but the limbate septal lines and
retral bars are irregular and very pronounced for the size of the
test, partaking much more of the character of P. verriculata than
of the typical P. imperatrix. The specimens might with equal
propriety be considered as a spinous form of P. verriculata.
Until more examples are found I have thought it best to put
a query.

Polystomella milletti Heron-Allen and Earland.

Polystomella verriculata Millett, 1898, etc., Foram. Malay Archipelago,

Journ. Roy. Micr. Soc., 1904, p. 604, pi. xi, fig. 3.
P. milletti Heron-Allen and Earland, 1915, Foram. Kerimba Archipelago,

pt. ii, Trans. Zool. Soe. London, vol. xx, pt. xvii, p. 735, pi. liii,

figs. 38-42.

Two occur. They are small and not typical, but I think there
is no doubt that they are a variety of this evidently variable
species. Each has only seven chambers in the outer whorl, and
is slightly inequilateral, one face being slightly convex, and the
other more flattened. The tests are also more compressed than»in

264 Transactions of the Societ/j.

the type. They are decorated with what appear to be exceedingly
fine, short spines, which often seem to coalesce and so give a sugary
appearance to the test. I have a fine range of specimens of the
type-form from the Seychelles Islands, Mahe Harbour, 14 fms.
Some of these attain large dimensions, with only slight lateral
compression, and with probably sixteen to eighteen chambers in
the final whorl. The lobulation of the rounded peripheral edge is
almost lost, and the umbilical region filled up with clear shell-
substance, and little decorated. The decoration of the tests con-
sists of reticulations. In some cases this decoration is exceedingly
fine and beautiful. Small examples are compressed and smoother,
and the outline is lobulated.

Sub-family Ifumraulitinae.
Amphistegina d'Orbigny.

Amjjhistegina lessoni d'Orbigny.

Amphistegina lessoni d'Orbigny, 1828, Ann. Sci. Nat., vol. vii, p. 304,

No. 3, pi. xvii, figs. 1-4, Modele No. 98.
A. lessoni Brady, 1884, Chall. Eept., p. 740, pi. cxi, figs. 1-7.

One occurs ; similar to the " Challenger " fig. 2.

Operculina d'Orbigny.

Operculina ammonoides d'Orbigny, var. incequilateralis, var. nov.

(PL VI, figs. 30-34.)

The type-form is not present, but this interesting variety is
well represented. The amount of convexity of the upper surface
and the concavity of the under surface varies in the different
specimens. In fig. 30 the under surface is almost flat, the septa-
tion and aperture being typical. In fig. 33 the edge of the test is
sharper, and the septation of the last chambers not so apparent,
and the under surface is markedly concave. This latter form,
although varying in these particulars, appears to belong to the
.same variety. The perforations on the under surface are conspicu-
ous in both forms.

COERIGENDA AND ADDENDA (JoUHl. R. Micr. SoC, 1918).

Page 20, line 1 from foot, for " irregular " read " circular."
,, 130 ,, 15 from top, for " costuta " read " costata."
,, 136 ,, 21 from top, after " spathulata " add " Sidebottom."
,, 137, after line 19 from foot, add " F. tenera Heron-Allen and Earland, 1916,

Foram. West of Scotland, Trans. Liuu. Soc. London, vol. xi, pt. 13,

p. 260."
,, 139, line 5 from top, deZeie " 32 (?) "
,, 141 ,, 19 ,, delete comma and put a hyphen.

„ 146 ,, 15 ,, for " pygmoea " read "pygmaea."

-,, 150 ,, 14 ,, for " acquilateralis ■' read " aequilateralis."

,, 150 ,, 15 ,, Ditto, ditto.

„ 150 „ 17 „ Ditto, ditto.

265

YIII. — On the Microdruchire of Hypo-eutectoid Steel as contrasted
icith that of Normal Steel, tvith a Note on the Micro-
scopical Methods adopted in the Examination of Steel
Specimens.

By E. Atkinson, A.M.Inst.L.E., F.C.S., F.E.M.S, etc.,
Engineer and Metallurgist.

{Read April 17, 1918.)
Plates I-III, and One Text-Fig.

Although for many years the microscope has proved absolutely
indispensable in many fields of research, it is only during compara-
tively recent years that it has found a place in metallurg}-. Previous
to the introduction of the microscope, " science " was often looked
on either with suspicion or contempt by the practical man engaged
in the manufacture of iron and steel. Even the analytical chemist
was merely tolerated rather than recognized as being of value or
assistance in the production of steel on a commercial scale.

Analyses made by several chemists on the same steel were
occasionally found contradictory in results, so, perhaps after all, it
is not very surprising that any further introductions of " scientific "
nature were liable to be held suspect. However, thanks to the
metallurgical microscope, we are enabled to clear up much whicli
was mysterious. It can be seen that, given a satisfactory chemical
composition, incorrect after-treatment may render the finished steel
either wholly or partly unsuitable for use. Again, as the micro-
structure may not be uniform, in such cases uniformity in analysis
is not to be expected, despite the utmost skill of the analysts to
give consistent results. I think this will be fairly well illustrated
in the case of E. 288, which forms the subject of this paper.

By the development of photomicrography, the metallurgist has
a means of providing permanent records, from which much good
may accrue, particularly if he have also a practical knowledge of
the methods used in the manufacture of iron and steel, in which
case precautions can be taken to eliminate the recurrence of similar
difficulties.

The largest percentage of steel in use to-day is of the " hypo-
eutectoid " class, or " mild steel " as it is termed in the trade, and
consists of steels containing various percentages of carbon not
exceeding 0*85 p.c. In such steels examination under the

T

266

Transactions of the Society.

microscope reveals a certain amount of free or uncombined iron,
easily discernible as white silvery veins, as will be seen later. This
is termed " ferrite."

" Hyper eutectoid " steel is more highly carburized than the first
mentioned, and contains no ferrite, its place being taken by the
intensely hard and brittle " cementite." In this paper I propose
dealing only with the hypo -eutectoid form, and have selected from
my records a recent research made on a rail which did not render
the service given by others in similar positions.

The illustration (fig. 1) shows the piece of rail as received ; it
was about 12 inches long, and from this all the test-pieces were
cut, as indicated by the dotted lines. Nos. 1 and 2 were complete
sections, and after being carefully polished were first subjected to
a laboratory adaptation of the Brinell Test, by which a hardened
ball is driven into the steel by a force which remains constant in

Fig, 1.

each case, so that it naturally follows that the spherical depression
will vary in accordance with the resistance opposed to the force
expended. By measurement of the indents the degree of hardness,
or " hardness number," can be arrived at. Both No. 1 and No. 2
sections emerged fairly well from this test, the hardness numbers
being reasonably uniform, as will be seen later. Both were then
prepared for " sulphur-printing."

In practically all commercial steels carbon, manganese, silicon,
sulphur and phosphorus are present in carefully-regulated pro-
portions, but should sulphur or phosphorus be in excess they are
highly detrimental, although little objection can be raised providing
both are kept within certain limits. Of course neither exist in steel
as simple elements, but effect chemical combinations with the
other elements. Unfortunately both sulphur and phosphorus are
exceedingly difficult to entirely eliminate.

The presence of sulphur can be detected and recorded by
sulphur-printing, for which purpose sheets of silver paper are
saturated in a solution of H2SO4, and afterwards placed on an

Oil the Microstruchii'e of Hypo-eutectoid StecL 267

inclined sheet of plate-glass to enable the excess solution to drain
off. The sample is then brought into contact with the paper, when
the H2S evolved produces dark stains of various densities.

The results from Xo. 1 section gave very definite evidence of
the presence of sulphur, and also located the areas in which segre-
gations existed. As will be noted in the illustration (fig. 2), there
is a sharply-defined segregation in that part of the section which
was originally the centre of the head, and, also, there are fine
" sulphur-lines " commencing in the region of the segregate and
continuing down into the web, which terminate, curiously enough,
in a " curved " formation a little to the left of the centre of the foot,
which curve is apparently the most sulphur-free part of this lower
area.

On examination of the print from section No. 2 (fig. 3), it will
be observed that sulphur is also markedly present — a little better
diffused perhaps, although still occupying relatively the same
positions as in section Xo. 1 ; indeed, each feature is again
reproduced, even to the small comparatively sulphur-free " curve,"
although a reference to the first print will show a rather well-
marked area on each side of the foot of considerable density, which
at a point 8 in. away — viz. in the section No. 2 — is very greatly
reduced, though still in evidence, from which it could be assumed
that the sulphur was present through the whole length of steel.

The pieces No. 3 and No. 4 were then cut and prepared for
tensile-testing, one of the physical tests regularly used. For this
the steel is turned perfectly cylindrical for a given distance in the
lathe, and suitable " collars " are allowed for in the turning to
enable the test-piece to be firmly secured in the machine. The
tensile tests were conducted on a 100-ton tensile machine made by
Messrs. Buckton and Co., Ltd., Leeds.

InsufiBcient material remained to enable the test from No. 3
to be made the usual size of 0*798 in. diam. (equal to J sq. in.
sectional area), so this had perforce to be made 0'565 in. diam.
(equal to \ sq. in. sectional area). Knowing that No. 3 contained
a sulphur segregation, experience does not lead us to expect normal
tensile results, as, generally speaking, segregated material is apt to
be more or less hard and brittle according to the character of the
segregation ; consequently I expected that a higher tonnage would be
required to break the test No. 3 than No. 4, whilst at the same time
the reduction in area would not be so great, and also less elonga-
tion would be recorded. To facilitate comparisons, the following
results are given on the square inch in both cases : —

Breaking stress ....
Reduction in area at point of fracture
Elongation .

Tensile Tests.

No. 3.

No. 4.

. 48-24 tons
f fracture . 24-5 p.c.
. 10-0 „

44-51 tons
40-5 p.c.
24-0 „

T 2

268 Transactions of the Society.

An examination of the test-pieces after fracture proves rather
interesting (fig. 4), although the distinctive features are ditlicult
to reproduce photographically. However, the superficial appear-
ance of the cylindrical portions of the two tests is given fair
rendition, although the fractures are not so distinctive as in
the originals. It will be noted that the fracture of No. 4 is of
greater uniformity than the smaller No. 3 above it, and it was of
the dark grey " silky " character, which is much more satisfactory
in the hypo-eiitectoid steels, seeing that it indicates that the steel
has received reasonably correct treatment during manufacture.

The smaller fracture shows a darker area, the sulphur segre-
gation thus again announcing its presence. Apart from this, the
fracture was of a different order, which gave an inkling of additional
irregularities, which were afterwards verified by the microscope.

Drillings were then taken from three positions for analysis, and
the results from the head showed the sulphur and manganese to be
in excess, which could be expected seeing that particular care was
observed to obtain drillings from the segregated area. The chemical
composition was : —

4-65 p.c. FejC 0-21 p.c. FeSi^

l-'JO „ MD3C 0-44 ,, MnSi

0-56 „ Fe^P 92-24 „ Fe (dif.)

And from this we can arrive at the approximate microstructure
of the steel. The cementite contains the FcaC plus the MngC, and
the FcgP and the FeSia are contained in the feriite, wliilst situated
somewhere in the structure is 0*44 p.c. of MnS aS " enclosures " of
non-metallic nature. Hence we get: —

6 '55 p.c. Cementite

0*44 ,, MnS (enclosed impurities)

In hypo-eutectoid steel the pearlite (so termed from its

" pearly " appearance when viewed under oblique lighting) is the

strengthening constituent. Under high magnification it is seen to

be composed of alternate plates of cementite and ferrite ; at lower

magnifications, however, it appears as a dark area in the ferrite.

The total pearlite is represented by eight times the percentage of

cementite. Although this factor has not been definitely decided

on so far, I think we can accept it as being quite near enough

for our purpose, and so from the above we may expect to find

approximately —

52 • 40 p.c. Pearlite
0'44 ,, MnS (enclosed impurities)
55-16 „ Ferrite

100-00

Theoretically, in the presence of such a high percentage of
manganese, all the sulphur present in E. 288 should be in the

JOURN. R. MICR. SOC. 1918. Pl. I.

Section No 1.

Section No. 2.

Tensile test pieces.

Fid.

Fig. 3.

^

\*

Fig. 6.
100 X

¥

^>-.i

Adiard & Son & West Newman, Ltd., Impr.

On the Microstructnre of Hypo-eiUectoid Steel. 269

form of MnS, which, although not a desirable constituent, is
nevertheless the safest form the sulphur can assume, since MnS
is about the first to solidify when the molten steel is crystallizing
■out to form the ingot. The freezing-point of pure MnS is generally
accepted as being 1620° C, whilst that of pure iron is 1500° C.

When sulphur combines with the iron to form FeS it is
highly detrimental if in any quantity. Now, whereas MnS sepa-
rates out and appears as " dove-grey " islands in the ferrite, FeS
tends to form membranous sheaths surrounding the pearlite
•crystals in such a manner as to seriously interfere with the vitally
necessary adhesion of one pearlite crystal to another, or the pearlite
to the ferrite, and consequently it is a source of weakness, and
renders the steel unreliable. The melting-point of i'eS is about
■950° C, so that during the rolling process, which generally com-
mences at a higher temperature than this, it will be seen that
whilst the ingot as a whole has " set " (though still plastic) the
membranous FeS is still in a liquid state, and so destroys the
cohesion which is absolutely essential whilst the ingot is under-
going the required reduction by rolling. In extreme cases the red-
hot ingot will break into several pieces. That such effects are
produced by sulphur has long been known to the steel-maker,
although I believe I am correct in saying that the cause was some-
thing in the nature of a mystery iintil the microscope defined the
form of MnS and FeS. Where the latter is present with its low
melting-point it is now known that it is rather like attempting to
bind two solids together with a liquid. Eather a difficult propo-
sition 1

As in this case we had clear indications of the doubtful areas as
found by sulphur-printing. Three pieces were cut for examination ;
the first containing the marked segregation, the second containing
what was evidently a branch of it in the web, and the third was
from the foot. Visual examination previous to " etching " revealed
the presence of the MnS enclosures, which can be^ seen in the first
photomicrograph (fig. 5). It must be understood that this illus-
tration was not representative of the whole. It was selected from
a part particularly rich in these enclosures in order that the various
formations could be observed. In the centre, where evidently the
rolling-stresses have been least exerted, it will be seen that there is
quite a tendency for the MnS to partly retain the " globular " form,
whilst further away the stresses have apparently tended to break
the larger globules up into smaller units, with a tendency to form
into lines. A glance at the first sulphur-print (fig. 2) will
show that there are fine though well-defined sulphur " lines " in
the web, and in order that the elongated shape of the MnS could
be seen another photograph was taken in the web.

It will be observed in another photograph from the same speci-
men (fig. 6) that, with one exception, the MnS exists in small

270 Transactions of the Society.

isolated particles, and as these do not break up the continuity of
the ferrite to the same extent they are not seriously detrimental.
Visual examination proved that apart from these markedly
segregated positions the MnS was in small particles distributed
over the whole surfaces of the three specimens.

After etching, the specimens from E. 288 became decidedly
interesting. The pearlite crystals (formed by the combination of
the FeaC and the MD3C), and also the silvery ferrite, could be
observed. As seen visually the MnS enclosures in the ferrite are
still very noticeable owing to the difference in colour, although they
do not appear in quite the same sharp contrast when photographed
after " etching."

The position of a second photograph (fig. 7) in the web can be
seen on .the plan. Here the general " banded " structure of the
ferrite predominates, and although it can be expected that there
should be some tendency in this direction, owing to the severity of
the rolling-stresses necessary to reduce the steel down to form this
comparatively thin component of the rail, this is too marked to be
attributable to rolling-stresses alone, and is due to segregation of
phosphorus towards the crystal boundaries whilst the steel i&
undergoing the first crystallization to form the ingot. The ferrite^
rich in phosphorus, apparently resists the entry of carbon, and so-
would appear to confine the pearlite to areas free from phosphorus.
When this " banded " structure, or " ghost lines " as termed by
some, is formed, it is extremely persistent, and is difficult to remove
even by prolonged annealing. It is a frequent cause of weakness
in steel plates and many failures are attributed to it.

The next photograph (fig. 8) is of a character not frequently
met with. The magnification was 50 diameters, and so includes the
structures in the segregation and also the microstructure above that
area, whilst an almost continuous line of ferrite divides the two.
The irregularity of the crystals above the ferrite line afford unmis-
takable evidence of incorrect thermal treatment, although the lower
pearlite crystals are of greater uniformity.

The sixth photograph (fig. 9) was taken midway between the
depression left by the first physical test and the top of the specimen.
The large size of the pearlite crystals will be noted, also the fine
needle-like lines of ferrite in the pearlite, from which it becomes
apparent that the nearer we approach the top of the rail the thermal
treatment has produced worse effects ; indeed the condition of the
structures here very nearly approaches that of the steel as first
cast. It is typical " Widmanstatten " structure, and tends to
weakness.

Of course it is well known that the smaller the crystals are the
better the resultant material, so long as deformation has not taken
place. The old-time smith had some idea of this, and consequently
belaboured his glowing iron right royally so that it should prove

JOURN. R. MICR. SOC. 1918. Pl. II.

Fig. 10. . ' . /^ < >■

100 X A^-i^'-^"^.

Fig. 11.
100 X

St

Fig. 12

100 X

Adlard & Son & West Newman. Ltd., Impr

On the Microstructitre of Hypo-eutectoicl Steel. 271

tougli and durable in use. I remember one such worthy man to
whom I mentioned the crystalline structure of iron and steel. His
concluding comment was, " Well, crystals or no crystals, I gives
the stuff a good hammering, because, as I says, good stuff always
goes in little room ! " If some of that muscular snuth's energy
could have been used to put the " stuff in little room " in this case,
No. 9 would have presented a much more satisfactory picture.

The photograph No. 4 (fig. 10) was taken at the top of the
specimen, and illustrates how the large crystals shown in No. 9
have failed to preserve their original formation under the repeated
pressures exerted by the wheels of the rolling-stock. Seeing that
immediately below this position the general structures w^ere the
same as No. 9, we can safely assume that this was the original
condition at No. 4 when this rail was first put into use. If any-
thing it is possible the condition was aggravated, seeing that this
part must necessarily have been nearer to the surface of the ingot
when exposed to the conditions obtained in the heating-furnace. It
wdll be noticed that the structure as a whole has broken down, and
the original pearlite polyhedrons have been crushed down one upon
the other and deformed.

The seventh photograph (fig. 11) was taken in the sulphur
segregation below the test-depression. The pearlite and ferrite are
well defined, and careful scrutiny will reveal the enclosures of MnS
surrounded by the ferrite in each case, and MnS in turn containing
small inclusions of manganese silicates, although not to the same
extent as seen previously.

In the eighth photograph (fig. 12), taken below the test
depression in the specimen cut from the foot, we find the pearlite
assuming another form quite different from that shown in the
previous photographs. Presenting as it does rather an emulsified
appearance, it leads one to think that the full development has been
arrested before completion. By analysis the carbon-content (which
is the principal element necessary for the formation of pearlite) is
for all practical purposes the same in this part of the steel as in
the other parts already seen, and consequently one expects to find
the structure here to be much the same in formation. To this
imperfect development the name of " sorbite," or " sorbilic pearlite,"
has been given. It is apt to result by a rapid cooling of hot-
worked hypo-eutectoid steel through its critical range, and so leaving
insufficient time for the rejection of the full amount of ferrite.
While sorbitic pearlite is not quite so ductile as pearlite, which is
fully developed, it has a higher tenacity, so that had the foot of
this rail been subjected to the wheel-pressures instead of to the
head considerably better service could have been looked for.

During the examination of the top specimen still another
irregularity was noticed at No. 5 (fig. 13). On the left are a
few pearlite crystals in the segregation with several small MnS

272 Transactions of the Societij.

enclosures present in the ferrite. On the right are crystals out-
side that area. Dividing the two is an irregular network-like struc-
ture such as we have not found in the previous photomicrographs,
to account for which I must revert to the manufacturing conditions.

When the steel has been poured into the comparatively cold
ingot-moulds the reduction in temperature promotes solidification,
and it is during this period of solidification and contraction that the
ingot defects of " blow-holes," " contraction -cavities," and " piping "
are produced. The surfaces of the "piping" are oxydized, and so
cannot be remedied in the later stages ; but " blow-holes " (which
are probably produced by the evolution of CO due to chemical
action) generally exhibit bright metallic surfaces free from oxide
films, so that under favourable circumstances they may be
welded up. An enormous amount of experimental work and
research has been conducted to eliminate these defects, and although
considerable improvement has been effected we are still far from
having solved the problem.

Under the conditions obtaining when E. 288 was manufactured
little had been accomplished in this direction beyond cutting a
sufficient portion from the finished steel to warrant the assumption
that the part removed contained the defects. Eeally it rather
introduced the sporting element in which one had to hope for the
best ! Despite this, however, that rather maligned individual the
" practical man " had his own methods of detecting doubtful
material, and a considerable measure of success was achieved when
such a man supervised the manufacture.

In No. 13 I am of the opinion that this fine "network" is
evidence that a small " blow-hole " originally existed in this part
of the steel, the walls of which have been pressed up and welded
together during the rolling. Such welding is by no means im-
possible, and probably occurs with greater frequency than we are
aware of, but as these are conditions pertaining to the interior
anatomy of the steel it is only rarely that the opportunity is
accorded to study them.

In reviewing the foregoing data we have evidence of a marked
segregation of sulphur ; the tensile tests gave its quota towards
proving the continuity of the segregation, and the analysis con-
firmed it. Under such conditions it can generally be taken for
granted that phosphorus is segregated also, and this we found to be
the case in the web, as shown in the " banded " structure there.

The microscope proves that although a little FeS is present the
greater proportion of sulphur exists as MnS, and so is in its most
innoxious form ; in addition there is that welded up " blow-hole " —
all of which points to that portion of the ingot from which E. 288
was rolled.

There is also the marked difference in the crystal structures :
sorbitic pearlite in the foot ; the " banded " structure in the web ;

JOURN. R. MICR. SOC. 1918. Pl. III.

Fig. 17.
100 X

Adlard & Son & West Newman. Ltd., Impr.

0)1 the Microstructm'e of Hypo-eutectoid Steel. 273

and also those large crudely-formed pearlite areas of Widmanstatten
structures in the head, which proved unable to maintain their
foi'mation under wheel action ; and so it becomes comparatively
simple to arrive at the cause of failure by deduction.

MiCROSTRUCTURE OF NORMAL StEELS.

The four concluding photographs serve to illustrate normal
crystal structures. The first one (iig. 14) shows an almost carbon-
less iron, and consequently only the dark tracery of the crystal
boundaries is to be seen, as practically no pearlite areas are present.
The dark spots are enclosures of FeO. The two specimens of more
highly carburized steels (figs. 15 and 16) are from material which
fulfilled all the specified conditions of testing.

The last one (fig. 17) is from a hypo-eutectoid steel of different
composition and treatment, which I have recently perfected and
made on a commercial scale. As could be expected from the
uniformity of microstructure and the absence of enclosed
impurities this special steel possesses tenacity and elasticity con-
siderably in advance of the ordinary steels at present used.

Note on the Microscopic Methods adopted in the Examination

of Steel Specimens.

Preparation,

The sample for examination under the microscope is first lightly
rubbed on a very fine-cut file until perfectly level, and exhibiting
the lines of abrasion lying in one direction. Polishing then pro-
ceeds on commercial emery-papers until the previous file-marks
are entirely removed and replaced with the finer ones produced by
the emery ; which course is followed on each of the four succeeding
grades of specially-prepared French emery-papers. Considerable
care is required to prevent the transference of the coarser grains of
emery to the finer papers, and, if due care is not observed in this
respect, it is practically impossible to produce good specimens free
from scratches. The polishing is completed by placing the specimen
in contact with a cloth or chamois-leather covered disc, primed
with alumina or ferric oxide, and, as the disc is revolved at high
speed by suitable gearing, the specimen soon assumes a featureless
silvery appearance quite free from the minute scratches left by the
previous operations.

The specimen is then washed to remove any traces of the
polishing medium, again washed in alcohol, and rapidly dried in
the hot-air blast. A little plasticine is then placed on the usual

274 Transactions of the Society.

glass slide, the specimen placed thereon, and pressed into a perfectly
horizontal position by a specially-made mounting apparatus, and
is then ready for examination.

Etching.

After the examination of the plain polished surface i&
completed the crystal structure is developed by etching. Many
reagents are used for etching, but perhaps the mention of one or
two will suffice. Probably the simplest is to dip the specimen into
concentrated HNO3 ; it then assumes the passive state, but on
rinsing-off under a jet of water, the metal is sharply attacked
momentarily. It is then immersed in alcohol, and dried in the hot-
air blast. A dilute solution of HNOg in alcohol, or a saturated
solution of picric acid, can be used. These etching solutions darken
the pearlite, but leave the ferrite in its original state.

Illumination.

Illumination is accomplished eitlier by oblique or vertical
lighting, and, although several illuminants can be used, the electric
arc is undoubtedly superior to any other form of light source. The
lens system employed in my laboratory consists of a 4^-in.
Meniscus and two plano-convex lenses of the same dimensions,
suitably enclosed ; the first parallelizing the light-rays received
from the illuminant, and the third projecting a converging beam to
the plain glass vertical illuminator which, at an angle of 45°, is
situated immediately above the objective ; from thence it is
reflected down through the objective and so to the specimen on the
stage.

For oblique lighting the vertical ilhiminator is either removed
altogether, or turned into a horizontal position parallel to the
surface of the specimen.

275

IX.— Two Valuable Methods of
Staining in Bulk and Counter- Staining.

By E. J. Sheppard.

Read April 17, 1918.

A METHOD which will materially cut short a lengthy process such
as Heidenhain's iron-htematoxyliu staining, and, at the same time,
give as good results, should be of value to either histologist or
cytologist ; either of the following methods here described does
this, and for the first I claim some measure of originality.

My work has been confined chiefly to animal and insect tissues
for the study of spermatogenesis, but there is reason to believe that
the methods are equally applicable to vegetable tissues.

1. Details of the actual staining must be prefaced by particulars
of a fixation method which, in my opinion, excels that of fixing
with riemming's chromo-osmic-acetic mixture.

The formula* for the fixative (a modification of Bouin's) is as
follows : —

Picric acid, saturated sol. in water . 75 c.cm.
Formol 40 p.c. . , . . 25 „

Acetic acid glacial . . . . 5 ,,
Chromic acid . . . -. . I'Sgrms. .
Urea ...... 2-0 ,,

And should be used warm (38° C) in the case of tissues from warm-
blooded animals, and cold, or at an ordinary room temperature, for
cold-blooded animals such as the frog, etc., the time being regulated
according to the size of the tissue. Roughly the rate of penetration
at 38° C. upon an object, such as the testis of a rat, is about
one- eighth inch per quarter hour, and when used cold, or at room
temperature, slightly slower. Tissues usually float for some time,
and complete penetration has not taken place until they sink.

When fixation is complete remove the objects and wash in
repeated changes of 70 p.c. alcohol, until no further yellow colora-
tion of the spirit (due to the picric acid) takes place. This usually
takes a day or two. When ready transfer to methylated spirit full
strength, and allow to remain for forty-eight hours. This com-
pletes the hardening process.

Graduate back to distilled water by stages such as 70 p.c,

* R.M.S. Journal, June, 1917, page 347, under " Improved Technique for
showing Details of Dividing Cells.''

276 Transactions of the Society.

50 p.c, 30 p.c. alcohol, an hour or so in each grade, and place direct
into carmalum for twelve, twenty-four, thirty-six hours, according
to the size of the objects. Remove and wash in distilled water
until no more colour comes away; graduate back to absolute alcohol,
■clear with cedar-oil and embed in paraffin. Cut sections, which
should not be over 10/i, and iix, by the water method, to the cover-
glass ; remove paraffin-wax by cedar-oil, wash away the oil by
absolute alcohol, and, subsequently, in one or two changes of
methylated spirit. Counter-stain, by immersion for a quarter of an
hour, in a solution of Gruebler's light green in methylated spirit.

Light green . .0-5 grms.
Methylated spirit . 200 c.cm.

Wash out in one or two changes of methylated spirit, then
absolute alcohol, cedar-wood oil, xylol, and, finally, mount in
euparal, not balsam or other media.

One of the distinguishing features of this method is that the
cytoplasm of dividing cells, or cells about to enter upon mitosis,
is stained a deeper green tone than those not dividing. All nuclei
and nuclear material are sharply contrasted from cytoplasm, not
by grades of intermixed red and green, but by a complete distinc-
tion between the two colours. When differences are to be seen it
is only to be observed in varying depths of one or the other stain.

Finally, on comparing a mounted section which has not been
counter-stained with light green with another that has, it will be
observed that the counter-staining has the effect of considerably
intensifying the carmalum stain, and at the same time rendering
it sharper and crisper in detail.

2. The second method is one which has been formulated for
staining tissues in bulk with an iron preparation of hajmatoxylin.
The formula for the preparation of the stain was given in the
Journal, Clinical Eesearch, May 1910, page 63 ; a short time after
it appeared, by permission, in the Journal of Micrology. I have
given this stain an extensive trial and am convinced of its value.

Fix and harden as already described. Place the pieces in a
freshly-made mixture of the two following solutions : —

1. HEematoxylin . . . . . .1 grm.

95 p.c, alcohol ...... 100 c.cm.

2. Perchloride iron . . . . . 2 ,,
Hydrochloric acid . . . . . 1 „
4 p.c. aqueous solution copper acetate . . 1 „
Water 95 „

Transfer the material to the stain, and allow to remain for a
somewhat longer period, say half as long again, than would be the
case when carmalum is employed, for the reason that this stain is
not so penetrating. Should the piece of tissue be large — that is,

Methods of Staining in Bulk and Coitnter- Staining. 277

about the size of the rat testis — thirty-six to forty-eight hours
will be required. After staining, remove the piece of tissue to
50 p.c. alcohol, to wash out the excess of colour, grade down, and
thoroughly wash out in running tap-water for a few hours, accord-
ing to the size of tissue. This washing out in water is important,
as greater clearness and density of the stain is obtained by this
means. Within certain limits, say six to twenty-four hours-,
according to the size of the piece of tissue, the longer the washing
the denser the stain.

After washing out in water, the pieces are up-graded to absolute
alcohol, cleared with cedar-wood oil, embedded in paraffin -wax, and
sections cut 10 yu,. Sections are fixed to the cover-glass and treated
sccundem artem, then, if desired, counter-stained by immersion for
about ten minutes in erythrosine, not eosin —

Erythorine .... 1 grm.
Alcohol .... 40 c.cm.
Water 160 „

previously down-grading into alcohol equivalent in strength to
that of the erythrosine stain ; washed in 30 p.c. spirit and up-
graded to absolute alcohol, cleared in cedar- wood oil, xylol, and
mounted in balsam or euparal, perhaps preferably in the latter
medium, as I am not yet in a position to say whether this stain
will keep so well in the former, although I must admit that balsam
gives the sharper image with this method of staining.

Centrosomes that are as a rule easily demonstrated by Heiden-
hain's method are equally so by this latter method of staining iii
bulk.

In many cases, counter-staining in bulk with light green, after
previously staining in bulk with caralum or htematoxylin, can be
carried out quite easily.

Light green does not overstain, and therefore needs no differen-
tiation. All that is necessary after staining in bulk, as previously
described, and washing out, is to up-grade into alcohol of 50 p.c.,.
place the pieces of tissue direct into the alcoholic solution of light
green for at least twenty-four hours, wash out in methylated spirit
until no more colour comes from the tissues, dehydrate in absolute
alcohol, pass through cedar-wood oil, embed in paraffin, cut sections,
fix to cover-glass, dry, remove wax by cedar-oil, wash in xylol, and
mount in euparal.

Some tissues, however, are of such density that the light green
only penetrates a very short distance, and prolonged immersion does,
not succeed in remedying this defect.

In such cases, proceed to fix sections on the cover-glass, remove
the wax, and down-grade to methylated spirit, immerse for about
ten minutes in the alcoholic solution of light green, wash out in
methylated spirit, dehydrate, clear, and mount in euparal ; the

278 Transactions of the Society

sections will then be found to be satisfactorily stained, although the
extreme peripheral portion may be rather deeper in colour.

In conclusion, it is absolutely essential to use freshly-made
solutions. Solutions of carmalum and haematoxylin do not keep
longer than a month in the winter, and about half this time in the
summer, and the rate and quality of penetration depreciates with
the age of the solution.

Any appearance of precipitation or fungoid growth may be
taken as a proof of deterioration. The hasmatoxylin solution keeps
somewhat longer than the carmalum, and does not precipitate, even
though kept for some length of time.

To obtain the maximum keeping capacity, make up all stains
with distilled water that has been previously boiled and allowed
to cool.

279

X. — Acetone as a Solvent for Mounting Media.
By John Kitchie, Jun.

{Read February 20, 1918.)

Acetone has during the last few years been used as a reagent for
the extraction of water from specimens about to be embedded in
paraffin wax, owing to the property it possesses in being able to
absorb water from formalin and alcohol, etc.

Hitherto I have found no record of its use as a solvent for
Canada Balsam (or other gums, such as Copal, Dammar and
Sandarac), but as I have been successful in obtaining good mounts
in such a medium, a few notes as to the methods employed may be
of interest.

Various FormuLv of Medium : — Place in a well-stoppered
bottle {a) some Canada balsam in the resinous condition (select the
lighter-coloured lumps), over this pour some acetone (commercial).
At first the acetone acting on the balsam causes a precipitate of a
white flaky character, but in a few hours the medium clears and is
ready for use. This formula gives a slightly acid reaction to litmus,
to avoid which (h) re-distilled acetone, free from acid, may be used ;
but I find that if the mounting process is carried out in an atmo-
sphere impregnated with moisture, much care has to be taken to
prevent the finished mount taking up and retaining moisture under
the cover-glass. Under ordinary atmospheric conditions, however,
it gives almost the same results as the (a) formula, (c) Another
method is to add 2 or 3 drops of Bouin's Fluid (picric acid 60 c.cm..
40% formalin 18 c.cm., glacial acetic acid 2 c.cm.) to each ounce of
acetone before pouring on the resin. This last medium is the most
suitable for specimens which are not stained, {d) Other gums such
as those previously mentioned may be employed and give almost
similar results ; but of course each gives a different refractive
index. A recent slide mounted in the acetone- balsam shows a
rather lower refractive index than does a slide mounted in xylol or
benzole-balsam.

Two methods may be employed. A. In dealing with large
specimens, take the object, either stained or unstained, from any of
the grades of alcohol from 70% upwards and place in a bath of
acetone, from this transfer the specimen to a glass slip, drop on it
any of the above media, and adjust a cover-glass. Specimens which
are rather too large to be mounted on slips can be put into small

280 Transactions of the Society.

museum jars or specimen tubes after having had a second bath of
acetone ; this latter is poured off and one or other of the above
varations of tlie medium poured in. The specimen clears in a short
time, and any air-bubbles left can be removed by the application
of gentle heat, or, if very obstinate, by the use of an air pump. The
acetone used for the baths need not be discarded, as the moisture
can be removed by adding cupric sulphate, heated to white powder,
and then filtering. This method may be used with advantage for
specimens, such as mosquitoes, sent from abroad, which have been
preserved in formalin or alcohol.

B. If one is dealing with small specimens or with wet or dry
cover-glass preparations, these, after stainicg. are takeil from any of
the grades of alcohol between 75% and absolute, placed on a slip and
covered with a cover-glass, filling up any sjtace left with the grade
of alcohol from which the specimen is taken ; if desired a higher
grade of alcohol or even acetone may be transferired between the
cover and slip ; then a drop of the selected mediuih, of such a con-
sistency that it will run easily, is placed at one edge of the cover-
slip, while, with a piece of bibulous paper the alcohol or acetone is
drawn off at tne opposite side, thus causing the medium to flow in
until it entirely replaces the alcohol or acetone. Usually a milky
cloudiness appears in the preparation if the medium is used to
replace 75% alcohol or methylated spirits, but this disappears if
t he slide is gently warmed and the cover-glass quickly raised from
its edge and lowered again. The best results are obtained when
the specimen has had a bath of absolute alcohol or acetone just
previous to the addition of the acetone balsam. Attempts to carry
the specimen direct from water or 5% formalin through an acetone
bath into the medium have so far met with no success ; yet I
believe that this may be possible if the absorbed water is extracted
from the acetone by placing some desiccating agent, such as fired
carbonate of potash (pearl-ash) or copper sulphate, in the bottom
of the vessel containing the acetone bath.

As the medium penetrates the specimen, clearing simultaneous!}^
takes place, in a manner similar to that which occurs when a
specimen is passed from alcohol through some of the essential oils.
The mount will harden in a few hours as the acetone gradually
evaporates, leaving the specimen embedded in a layer of Canada
balsam or other gum. Several slides mounted in a Bouin's Fluid
acetone-balsam medium have now been under observation for nine
months. They show no tendency to deteriorate, but rather indicate
the stability of the medium, there being no signs of precipitated
deposit, no discoloration of the medium, nor uneven shrinkage of
the specimen due to the drying of the balsam ; in fact, any shrink-
age which may occur is due rather, I think, to some fault in
fixation.

Acefone as a Solvent for Mounting Media. 281

Action on Stains. — The medium seems to have very little effect
on borax or lithium carmine, or on acid stains sucli as Van Giesen's ;
or on haimatoxylin, mordanted previously with a 4 p.c. iron-alum
solution, and reduced after staining in ^ to 1 p.c. iron-alum solution ;
but I find that if ha^n)atoxylin is used as recommended by G, E.
La Rue,* the blueing of the stain is affected, if the slide is heated,
by again becoming reddish in colour, as if in an acid bath. In
some ways, however, this is an advantage, as the heating of the
preparation can be stopped at a time when some particular struc-
ture becomes prominent, giving a double-stain effect which is
unaltered by the acetone-balsam, even after six months. I have
also tested the action of the medium on blood-smears stained with
Jenner, Giemsa, and Leishman (Soloid brands). The two former
did not retain the stain for any length of time, but whether due to
a faulty stain or the medium I cannot be sure ; however, with
Leislunan's the staining was quite as brilliant in media (a) and (h)
three months after as when first mounted. I also find that blood-
smears and some of the sporozoa, such as Myxololas csmarJiii
Woodcock,t which I have obtain'ed frequently from the sclerotic
coat in the eye of haddocks (Gadus mjlefimis), retain Ehrlich's
triacid stain (Cabot's formula) when mounted in either of the
variations («) or (h).

Some Advantages of tlte Method : —

1. It clears specimens from various grades of alcohol direct

without the use of essential oils.

2. It does not cause a precipitate or any uneven shrink-

age on the tissues of specimens where these have
been properly fixed.

3. It has the advantage that specimens may be oriented

in any desired position nnder the cover-glass and
kept there until the exchange to the mounting
medium is completed.

4. Many variations are possible in the miking-up and

employment of medium without fundamental change
in the result.
The work was carried out at my own house, but I have to
express my indebtedness to Dr. James F. Gemmill, of the Univer-
sity, Glasgow, for advic3 and encouragement he has given me in
the preparation of this paper, and also for placing at my disposal
.some re-distilled acetone free from acid, which other .vise I would

* " A Revision of the Cestode Family Proteocepbalidse." Illiuois Biological
Monographs, i. (1914) pp. 1.5, 16.

t Considered by Dr. Jas. Johnstone, to whom I sent specimens, to be
Myxobohis esmarkii Woodcock ; and if so, now recorded for a new host, the previous
Report being Johnstone's, from Gadus esmj,rkii, in Lancashire Sea Fisheries
record for 1906.

U

282 Transactions of the Society.

have had some difficulty in obtaining for these experiments. He
tells me that since then he has been using a fairly thick solution of
balsam in this acetone for mounting films, serial sections, and small
objects dii'ect from absolute alcoliol, exactly as one does ordinarily
from xylol, and that he sent some of the medium for trial to various
laboratories in Glasgow with, so far, satisfactory results.

283

XL — A Nci'j Type of Infusorian : Arachnidiopsis paradoxa.

By E. Penard, Sc.D.

{Read June 19, 1918.)
One Plate.

Though our title indicates a type of Infusorian yet unknown, it is
quite probable that we owe to Saville Kent the first notice about
the very interesting group of fresh-water Protozoa of which we are
going to treat.

On page 637 of his " Manual of Infusoria," that author
describes in the following terms the genus which he created for this
small group : —

" Arachnid i am, gen. Tiov. Animalcules free-swimming, ovate
or spherical ; oral aperture terminal, central, surrounded by a
circular wreath of large, flexible, tentaculiform cilia, which consti-
tute the only locomotive or prehensile organs ; endoplast and
contractile vesicle conspicuously developed. Inhabiting salt and
fresh water.

"This new genus holds a position between Mesodinium and
Sti'omhidium, in having the central mouth and even oral circle of
cilia characteristic of the former, but wanting, as with the latter,
its special supplementary leaping setse. This single oral wreath
of cilia at the same time attains a much greater development, and.
assumes a character completely distinct from either of the above-
named genera ; these cilia, indeed, resemble rather small flexible
tentacula than the ordinary cilia or setae of the normal representa-
tives of this group. In their more ordinary condition these organs
are recurved gracefully towards the posterior extremity of the
body, and when in active use exhibit a perfectly independent
motion. The spider-like aspect of the animalcules of this genus,
with their rounded bodies and straggling tentacle-like cilia, has
suggested the title for their distinction. More correctly they may
perhaps be likened to the i'ree-swimming Coelenterate genus
Arachnachtis."

Kent then describes in this genus Arachnidium two species :
A. globosum (PI. 32, figs. 48 and 49), which he found, in 1874, in
a pond at Stoke Newington, represented by a few examples only ;
and A. convoluhtm (PI. 32, fig. 41), a single specimen of which was
met with at Bognor, on the Sussex coast, in September, 1872.

At the same time Kent refers to this new genus, as a third species,

u 2

284 Transactions of the Society.

Froinmenters Haltcria hlpartita ("Etude sur les Microzoaires,"
Paris, 1874), but he seems to be too generous with the French
author's observations. Frommentel, in this latter work, describes
no less than nine new species of Haltcria (bipaiiita, vorax, miaima,
riridis, verrucosa, volrox, ovata, acuta, lohata), but in a few lines
only, and with such defective drawings that all these species are a
puzzle, and might l>e reduced to one or two. As, however, all
these species possess the wreath of leaping setai characteristic of
the genus Haltcria, none of them can be possibly united to
A7'achnidiu7n.

After the publication of Kent's important work, nobody, to my
knowledge, met with an organism related to this group, though
Biitschli has a few words about it.* As for Delage (Zoologie
concrete), he simply indicates (in his " Index for Genera," p. 555)
the genus Arachnidium as synonymous with 3Iesodinium, and
nothing more. Thus Kent's observations seem to have been almost
i<^nored, and these " cilia which resemble rather small flexible
tentacula " appear not to have met with any serious consideration.

And yet Kent is possibly quite right. At all events, I am
entitled to speak of an Infusorian whose locomotive organs are not
cilia nor setse, but flexible tentacula, and, if my observations
necessitate at least the creation of a special genus, this genus would
be very nearly related to Arccchnidium .

The representative specimens of this ncM' genus, " Arach-
nidiopsis," were all found in the same station, Florissant near
Geneva, in the property of my friend, the botanist H. Komieux.
There can be seen a small pond, with gold-fish and aquatic plants,
especially exotic Nymphca and Nuphar, and it is vinder the water-
lilies that, as far back as 191B, I found the first Arachnidiopsis, a
single specimen, unluckily, which, though examined at length,
would not have allowed of any idea of publication ; but on
January 17 of this year (1918), a second specimen was found, and
lastly, a third one on the 1st of March. Since that time, and in
spite of frequent visits to this same locality, no further specimen
has been obtained ; but as the three specimens studied were observed
at length and showed an absolute concordance in all their details,
the facts are now sufficient to allow of a description of this very
curious type.

Araclinidiopsis paradoxa — such is the name which I apply to it
— is a rather small Infusorian, 48 //. in length and about 40 [m in
breadth, egg-shaped, roundish or very little compressed (elliptical)
in its transverse section, but distinctly and broadly truncated at

* Page 1732 of his work on Protozoa (Bronn's Thierreich) : " Zu Stromhidium
gehoren wahrscheiulichauch.4rac7midi«mgfZo6o??w«(Siisswasser)und4.coni>oZMiziw
(Meer) Kent's, welche beide auf Untersuchungen friiherer Zeit (1872 und 74)
basiren. Der unterscheidende cbarakter soil die tentakelformige lilUmg der
adoralen Cilien s'.ia, welche ich iiberhaupt bezweifle."

JOURN. R. MICR. SOC, 1918.

Fig. 1.

Fig. 2.

Fig. 3.

h

^^ Vi.'

Fig. 5.

ARACHNIDIOPSIS PARADOXA Gen. et sp. nov.

[Face p. 2S4.

A New Type of Infusorian : Arachnidiopsis paradoxa. 285

its anterior part, and pointed posteriorly (fig. 1). Yet this pointed
extremity may be wanting, according to the moment of the
oljservation, to reappear a moment after ; or, on the other hand,
this posterior part may terminate in a kind of lobe or knob of
transparent protoplasm, whose presence will be ephemeral also
(fig. 2). In short, this posterior region is somewhat changing,
amceboid, and at the same time somewhat glutinous. Very likely
this terminal point is able to keep the animalcule in place, affixing
it to some support, as I could on several occasions see it remain
quiet, wliilst the locomotory organs were vibrating actively.

Except this particular region, the body is hardly deformable,
and keeps indefinitely its ovoid shape, in spite of the fact that the
animal seems to be naked, without any indication of a cuticle ;
should this latter exist, it would at any rate not be more than a
very thin film.

There are no traces of strict, nor of cilia. However, the surface
of the body cannot be called absolutely smooth ; it shows rather a
rough appearance, and seems to be covered with very fine scattered
asperities ; and I could satisfy myself that these appearances are
in fact due to very fine rod-like particles, which are located under
the superficial film and press it out somewhat.

The possession of these particles, in fact, is one of the charac-
teristics of the cytoplasm in our Arachnidiopsis ; they are dis-
seminated everywhere in the body, very fine as a rule, and mixed
with small round granules. At the anterior part of the body these
particles are much more densely accumulated, forming there a
blackish zone, and showing in their mutual arrangement a vaguely
radiating disposition around a clear and central surface which might
be taken for the oral aperture, but, as we shall see later, is some-
thing different in reality (fig. 3).

Inside the cytoplasm one can also detect the presence — very
likely quite normal, as it could be verified in all the specimens
observed — of a big spherical body, which at first sight might be
regarded as a nucleus, but which in fact is nothing else than
an accumulation of these small rod-like particles, united together
into a mucilaginous pellet.

In short, all these small rod -like bodies may be considered
as very finely divided food-particles, and nothing prevents us sur-
mising that the big spherical bodies themselves are nothing but an
accumulation of useless refuse, wdiich will be later eliminated.

The contractile vesicle, rather large and active, is at the posterior
extremity. Sometimes, when in the state of maximal expansion, it
is seen to project beyond the surface of the body ; after the systole, it
forms itself again with the help of several lateral vesicles which
open in the central one.

The nucleus, about the middle of the body and somewhat
laterally located, is sjjherical, relatively small, uniformly covered

286 Transactions of the Society.

with small punctuations ; a typical Infusorian nucleus, but near
which I could not ascertain the presence of a micronucleus. In one
of the individuals, however, I thought I could distinctly see it, and
in fig. 1 this micronucleus has been represented ; but this small
spherical body, which I could not detect in either of the other
specimens, may not be necessarily a microjiucleus. All the
individuals, in fact, treated with carmine after sufficient observation
in vivo, coloured rather intensively in their entire mass, and if the
nucleus itself was very distinctly delineated and easy to recognize
as such, the small roundish body which was seen close by in one
of the specimens might have simply been one of several other
small red bodies without any particular significance, disseminated
in the cytoplasm.

Up to this, Arachyiidioims faradoxa does not present any
particular features which might distinguish it from other Infusoria ;
but we must now speak of the locomotive or vibrating organs,
which are here absolutely different from anything we know. In
fact, we have here, not cilia nor cirrhi nor undulating membranes
or lamellae, but tubes, or what we might call genuine tentacula.
Of these there are two, both of which start from a common basis,
from a broad fissure-like opening at the anterior part of the body,
rounded at both ends and somewhat constricted in the middle
(fig. 3). This opening — if we may apply that term to it, for it has
surely no real analogy with a " mouth " — is filled with a clear
substance which projects outside like a cushion ; and from it
diverge in opposite directions two " tentacles," transparent, very
pure and opalescent in appearance, rounded or perhaps slightly
elliptical in transverse section, broad at the base and gradually
tapering to a pointed extremity. They are very long, and when in
a state of repose are seen to be trailing to half the distance behind
the posterior extremity of the animalcule, left and right of what
might be called either the dorsal or ventral face of the body. Fig. 1
shows this particular disposition of the tentacles, with their
common cushion-like basis ; in fig. 2, where the animalcule is
supposed to be seen from what one might call the side, with an
orientation at an angle of 90° to the first, the enveloping pellicle
or film — if there is one at all— is seen to be somewhat excavated
at the root of the tentacles.

The tentacles, however, are rarely seen as fig. 1 represents
them — i.e. in the state of rest. The intervals of rest last only for a
very short time, a few seconds at most ; then the tentacles lift up,
develop a graceful curve, somewhat like that of the horns of a ram
(fig. 3, where the animalcule is seen from above, along the longi-
tudinal axis of the body), describing a spiral downwards ; and both
horns begin vibrating, beating the water with such a rapidity that
the shape of the horns disappears from sight to give the impression
of a whirling body.

A JVeiv Type of Infusorian : Arachnidiopsis paradoxa. 287

What, uow, is the structure of the motile appendages? Accord-
ing to my observations they are tubes, filled with a clear and pure
liquid, very likely with water. Such is, at any rate, the appearance
on the living animal ; and the action of reagents goes to prove their
tubular nature. All the three individuals, after observation from
life, were submitted to the action of carmine mixed with glycerin,
and in all the effect of glycerin, if somewhat different according to
the greater or less concentration of the reagent, was such as to show
the tubular nature of the tentacles. In the first specimen one of
the tentacles suddenly contracted from its extremity to its base,
leaving in sight merely a rounded stump ; the other kept its length
and shape, but flattened ribbon-like, as if having suddenly sent
back to the body the internal liquid. In the second case (fig. 5)
both tentacles contracted at the same time, to leave only sack-like
expansions. In the third specimen both tentacles grew thin and
varicose at the end.

We may cite another fact which might throw some light on the
intimate structure of the tubular wall. In a great number of
Infusoria it is often difficult to distinguish the striation of the
body, the appearance delineated by the ciliary lines on the cuticular
surface. Now, it becomes easy in nearly all cases to produce this
striated appearance by submitting the animalcule to a slight
<3urrent of dilute glycerin. This, whilst contracting the pellicle by
the rapid removal of its water, provokes shrinkings which follow
the ciliary lines, and, for a few minutes at any rate, the character-
istic striation very clearly appears. The tentacles of Arachnidiopsis
as already mentioned above, look quite smooth in life, without any
visible indication of longitudinal strife, such as might result, for
instance, of cilia fused together, nor, if these tentacles are
submitted to this glycerin reaction, is there any appearance of
pattern or lines.

But at the same time these tubular tentacles may be, in certain
special cases, for a time extremely plastic, as the following observ-
ations will show : On one of the observed individuals, which did
not move from its place in spite of the vigorous beating of its
tentacles, one of these tentacles suddenly straightened, came to
rest, and its pointed extremity developed into a large lobe (fig. 4) ;
this lobe then began lightly to " taste," or " feel," some green alga
which was near, and I was beginning to think of a state of disease
or rapid disintegration of the animalcule, when the tentacle, leaving
the alga, recovered its pointed form and its normal shape, and
began to vibrate again, the animalcule remaining for an indefinite
time in good health and activity. The whole process may have
lasted two or three seconds.

So much for the vibratory and at the same time locomotory
(as to which I could satisfy myself, but unluckily without adequate
observations) organs of this curious Infusorian. But now I should

288 Transactions of the Society.

like to consider the mouth, or rather to discuss the question of
its existence at all. S. Kent, in his Arachnidium, indicates:
"oral aperture terminal, central"; but it is quite possible, if
at least Kent's Araclmidmm really belongs to the same group as
Araclinidiopsis, that the author might have taken for an oral
aperture what was simply a rounded space encircled with a
wreath of tentacles. In our Arachnidiopsis the first impression
is that of an aperture, even very distinct and sharp (figs. 2, 3) ;
but on better examination one must arrive at quite another
conclusion : this fissure-like, or 8-shaped, appearance as shown
on the animal seen from above (fig. 3), or this excavation as in
fig. 2, is certainly nothing but the base of the tentacles. A real
mouth does not seem to exist ; at any rate, I never found any
indication of it.

But then, how does the animal take its food ? It is surely an
Infusorian, perfect and complete, with its nucleus and contractile
vesicle, and with food-particles everywhere disseminated in the
body.

Unluckily, this question must remain unanswered ; all my
searches ended in the total acquisition of three specimens, and
none of them was seen capturing food. But if my ignorance has
remained complete on this point, yet I may be allowed to indicate,
as a simple but perhaps not very improbable hypothesis, some sup-
positions which real facts induce me to entertain. These facts are
the following : —

1. The animal is, or seems to be, naked ; perhaps with a mere
hardening of its ectoplasm into a fine pellicle.

2. The posterior extremity of the body certainly shows a certain
degree of viscosity, and at the same time is capable of deformation,
emitting at times a small lobe or knob which might recall what
we see, for instance, in some Amoebae.

3. In fig. 4 one can see, at the left and just under the basis of
one of the tentacles, a very small knob or prominence, and within
one small black particle. Now, this prominence was to be seen on
the living animal as a small knob of clear protoplasm with a
brownish granule.

Might we not be entitled, then, to suppose the capture of food
in the form of small particles coming from outside, perhaps thrown
against the viscous surface of the body by the movements of the
tentacular organs, and then drawn inside the cytoplasm ?

This, of course, is pure supposition, but in the absence of any
indication of an oral aperture any hypothesis may be put forward,,
provided it is given as such.

A few words more about the position which must be assigned
to Arachnidiopsis, as well perhaps as to Arachnidium, in the
classification of lower organisms.

The class Infusoria is generally considered as comprising two

A New Type of Infusorian : Arachnidiopsis paradoxa. 289

orders;* the Ciliata because tliey possess cilia, the Tentaculifera
because in 'their adult state they possess Tentacula. Now we
have here, in Arachnidiopsis or Araclinidium, neither cilia nor
tentacles (this term being considered in the sense of Tentacula as
applied to Acincta). It will, then, be hardly possible to refer our
small group to either of these two orders ; bvit our knowledge
about these organisms is still too incomplete to allow of the creation
of a special order, and it is to be hoped that more representatives,
of this rare and interesting type will be found in sufficient,
quantities to allow of a more adequate study.

Since the above was written the organism described has beer»
met with in a new station, and, although not in alnmdance, in
sufficient numbers to allow of definite conclusions about some
points previously obscure or doubtful, e.g. : —

{a) There is no micronucleus.

(b) The large spheroidal body is not covered or composed of the
same rod-like particles as are to be seen at the anterior part of
the animal, but is formed by Bacteria, such as are to be found in
Pelomyxa, collected at the surface of, and partly inside a muci-
laginous pellet.

(c) Food has been repeatedly found in the body in the shape of
small algse, etc., which are digested in the ordinary way, and whose
remains may be expelled by the opening of the body near the
posterior extremity.

* In his "Faune infusorienne des environs de Geneve" (M^m. Instit. Nation.
Genevois, xix. 1901) Roux created a third order, that of the Mastigotricha, for a
single species, Monomastix ciliatus, which, along with a complete ciliation of the
surface of the body, is in possession of a long, anterior flagellum. But having
found more recently this Monomastix in this neighbourhood, I came to the
conclusion that Roux's Monomastix is iu fact a Trachelophyllum, a genuine
holotrichous Infusorian, in which this sort of beak, which is characteristic of some
species of that genus, is protracted into a very long thread ; this thread then
curves behind, and floats along one of the sides of the body, undulating weakly at
tirnes under the influence of the currents produced by the cilia. It is also, I think,
quite in the vicinity of Trachelophyllum that we must locate Stokes' Ileonema
dispar (Silliman's Amer. Journ., xxviii, 1884), an Infusorian also very nearly
related to Monomastix.

290

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES

RELATING TO

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY

(PKINCIPALLY INVERTEBRATA AND CRYPTOGAMIA),

MICBOSCOPY, Etc.*

ZOOLOGY.

VERTEBRATA.

a, Embryolog-y, Evolution, Development, Reproduction,
and Allied Subjects.

Further Experiments on Sex of Frogs developed from Artificially
Activated Eggs. — Jacques Loeb {Proc. Nat. Acad. 8ci., 1018, 4,
60-62) has succeeded in rearing twenty leopard frogs produced by the
methods of artificial parthenogenesis from unfertilized eggs. Some
reached the age of ten to eighteen months, and nine were alive when the
paper was published (March 1918). Some have reached tiie size of the
full-grown normal adult male. Both sexes are represented ; seven of
the nine older whose gonads were examined were males, and two were
females. The males possess the diploid number (26) of chromosomes.
It is not known whether the female or the male is homozygous for sex
in the frog. J- A. T.

Zona Pellucida in Turtle Eggs. — Alice Thing {Amer. Journ.
Anat., 1918, 23, 237-57, 12 figs.) finds that the epithelium surrounding
the ovarian egg of various turtles is represented by one layer of prismatic
cells between the sides of which bridges extend. The intercellular
spaces at the surface of these cells are closed by a special cement, the
terminal bars. The zona pellucida varies from 1 /x to 17 /x according to
the stage of development. During ite growth it is always formed by
two or three different elements ; there is a fundamental homogeneous
substance filling up the spaces between a system of numerous canals or
tubules which enclose filaments or prolongations of the epithelial cells
which are connected with the surface of the yolk. The fundamental
substance is developed as a cuticular element from the terminal bars or
intercellular cement. A secondary network is produced by the superficial

* The Society does not hold itself responsible for the views of the authors
of the papers abstracted. Tha object of this part of the Journal is to present
a summary of Ihe papers as actually puhlishcd, and to describe and illustrate
Instruments, Apparatus, etc., which are either new or have not been previously
described in this country.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANV, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 291

cytoplasm of the epithelial cells, and it gives rise at its surface to a
cement similar to that produced by the terminal bars. The structure of
the zona pellucida is favourable for the conveyance of nutritive materials
from the maternal capillaries to the growing yolk. J. A. T.

Eggs and Embryos of Bdellostoma. — J. D. F. Gilchrist {Quart.
Journ. Jlicr. Set., 1918, 63, 141-59, 2 pis.) describes the naturally
deposited eggs of the South African Myxinoid, BdeUostoma {Hcptatretus)
hexatrema, two of which contained well-advanced embryos. There are
numerous small projections on the surface of the shell, consisting of the
columns of the columnar layer modified at the apex. There are
numerous small fissures, probably respiratory apertures. The two polar
rings show the inner layer of the shell much enlarged, the outer much
reduced. The anchor filaments consist of all the layers of the shell,
the heads of the columns of the columnar layer being drawn out so as
to appear as striations. The anchors consist of the modified columnar
layer and the stratified layer. The segmental duct of the embryo occurs
at the distal end of the last tubule of the pronephros, but does not open
into it. It is found also at the distal end of the last tubule but one,
where, however, it becomes solid and disappears. The tubules of the
mesonephros are not strictly segmentally arranged, in that there are
six tubules in three segments of the body behind the pronephros,
though there is one tubule for each succeeding segment, as far as the
mesonephros extends. J. A. T.

Development of Head-segments of Dogfish. — Edwin S. Goodrich
{Quart. Journ. Mkr. Sci., 1918, 63, 1-30, 2 pis., 1 fig.) has studied the
segmentation of the head in Scyllium canicula. There are three pro-otic
segments, corresponding to the profundus, trigeminal, and facial nerves.
Somite 1 is pre-oral ; somite 2 lies above the mouth, and is related to the
mandibular bar. Somites 3 to 8 lie above each of the six gill-slits,
and are related to the hyoid and five branchial bars. The three pro-
otic somites are supplied by the oculomotor, trochlear, and abducens.
The first meta-otic segment, with the glossopharyngeal root, contains
somite 4, which produces no myotome and has no ventral root. Three
more meta-otic somites, supplied by the occipital ventral roots, and
corresponding to the first three branchial branches of the vagus,
complete the cranial region. The eighth somite belongs to the first
spinal nerve, of which the dorsal root is absent or vestigial in later
stages, and to the fourth branch of the vagus. The author deals also
with the vagus and with the development of the chondrocranium.

J. A. T.

Earliest Movements of Dogfish Embryo. — P. Wintrebert {Bull.
Soc. Zool. France, 1918, 43, 42-4) describes in the embryo of Scyllium
canicula the early automatic movements of the myotomes. They are at
first independently unilateral, and they are independent of the nervous
system. The excised myotomic chain, after entire removal of the
nervous system, retains its power of automatic contraction. J. A. T.

Morphogenesis of Duplicities. — E. I. Werber {Journ. Ejper. Zool.,
1917, 24, 409-43, 27 figs.) has experimented with the eggs of the

292 SUAIJMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

" minnow," Fundulus heteroclitus, and finds that a percentage of dupli-
cities can be produced by adding to the sea-water (50 c.cm.) a varied
quantity (30-40 c.cm.) of a Gram-molecular solution (in distilled water)
of. acetone. In some cases butyric acid was used. The duplicities
seem to be due in part to lowering of the osmotic pressure of the
medium surrounding the eggs, this induces osmotic blastolysis of
the embryonic primordium in the more susceptible eggs. A second
factor of blastolysis— namely, chemical alteration— is also inferred. The
age of the egg, counting from the time of maturation, probably plays
a contributory part, the younger eggs being less susceptible. J. A. T.

Development of Mammalian Notochord. — G. Carl Huber
{Anat. Record, 1918, 14, 217-64, 14 figs.) has studied this in the
guinea-pig in particular, and finds that the endoderm takes no active
part in the histogenesis of the head process, chordal canal, and chordal
plate, and that the latter becomes only partially and temporarily
incorporated in the endoderm. Therefore there seems no justification
for classing the chorda dorsalis as an endodermic derivative. Since
the head process — the primordium of the chordal canal and derived
structures— has its primordium in turn in the cranial portion of the
primitive node, a region of active ectodermic cell proliferation, and
since the chordal canal and plate retain their continuity with the
primitive node, which serves as a growth zone, there seems justifica-
tion in regarding head process— chordal canal and derived structures,
chordal plate and chorda dorsalis— as a derivative of the ectoderm in
the sense that the mesoderm is derived from the ectoderm of the
primitive streak region of the embryonic shield. J. A. T.

Hermaphrodite Fowls.— Alice M. Boring and Raymond Pearl
{Joimi. Exfer. ZooL, 1918, 25, 1-47, 9 pis., 9 figs.) describe eight
cases— females with embryonic or degenerating ovaries. Three were
changing to a male condition in respect- to gonads, external characters,
and sex behaviour. There is no structural counterpart for the abnormal
behaviour of one hen treading another hen. Two guinea-chicken
hybrids had testes composed of undifferentiated tissue. Development
of comb, spurs and wattles does not stand in direct quantitative relation
to the sex of the gonad. Body shape and carriage have a general
relation to the sex of the gonad. The interstitial cells in the abnormal
fowls dealt with had no causal relation to the secondary sex characters.
The amount of lutear cells or pigment is in precise correlation with the
degree of external somatic femaleness exhibited by the individual.
^ J. A. T.

Ultimobranchial Bodies in Pig.— J. A. Badertscher (Amer.
Journ. Anat., 1918, 23, 89-131, 4 pis.) finds that these bodies partici-
pate in the formation of thyroid follicles, though the portion of the
gland in full-term embryos that is derived from them is small in
comparison with that derived from the median thyroid primordium.
The time of the transformation of the ultimobranchial bodies into
typical thyroid structures varies greatly. So does the degree of their
transformation. They usually become entirely embedded in the thyroid
gland. J. A. T.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 293

Development of Blood-vessels without Heart— W. B. Chapman
{Amer. Jouni. Anat., 101«, 23, 175-203, 17 figs.) finds tliafc in cliick
embryos from which the heart has been removed before the establish-
ment of the circulation, the emlirjo and area vasculosa remain alive for
seven or eight days. There is some growth, and the development of
blood-vessels in the area vasculosa is not entirely inhibited. It seems
that certain large vessels, such as the sinus terminalis and the anterior
vitelline veins, develop as a result of hereditary factors ; self -differentia-
tion of the vascular system is very limited ; and the working out of most
of the arteries and veins is dependent upon the mechanical factors
concerned with the circulation of the blood. J. A. T.

Vestigial Gill-filaments in Sauropsida.— Edwaed A. Boyden
{Amer. Journ. Anat., 1918, 23, 205-35, 4 pis., 3 figs.) calls attention
to the formation and relatively late persistence of a band of tissue across
the ventral surface of the neck, which is derived from the ventral union
of the hyoid arches. From its resemblance to the development of the
gill-cover of certain fishes and amphibians it may be called the opercular
fold or plica opercular is. On the lateral margins of this operculum,
after it has grown backward to enclose at least a potential peribranchial
chamber, filamentous outgrowths may be observed on the under side,
which in reptiles have a very transitory existence, but in the chick
undergo a relatively extensive and prolonged development. On account
of the filamentous character of these out-growths, their origin from the
branchial arches (the epithelium of which Ekman has shown to possess
a certain specificity for gill-formation in the Anura), and their constant
relation to the operculum in both reptiles and birds, these structures are
adjudged to be true gill-filaments, evidently vestigial in character, but
none the less comparable in kind to the functional organs of water-
breathing Anamnia. J. A. T.

Cyclic Variations in Permeability of the Activated Ovum. —
Maurice Herlant {C'.R. Soc Biol. Paris, 1018, 81, 151-5) has
studied the period of apparent repose between fertilization or activation
and cleavage. It is marked in the fertilized egg by the development
and regression of the " male " aster and the formation of a bipolar
spindle ; in the artificially activated egg by the parallel development of
the female aster in the frog, by variations in the volume of the nucleus
in the sea-urchin. These are cyclical phenomena, and so are changes in
physiological reaction — e.g. susceptibility to various solutions. As R. S.
Lillie has suggested, the cyclical changes correspond to changes in the
permeability of the cytoplasmic membrane (peripheral zone of protoplasm,
not to be confused with the vitelline membrane). Herlant's experi-
ments confirm this view. J. A. T.

Corpus luteum in Ovary of Chicken. — Raymond Pearl and
Alice M. Boring {Amer. Journ. Anat., 1918, 23, 1-35, 9 pis.,
C figs.) demonstrate the homology of the corpus luteum in the hen and
the cow. The course of its development in the hen is an abbreviation
or fore-shortening of that in the cox. It corresponds directly to the
late involution stages of the cow corpus luteum. Both contain a yellow

294 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

fatty substance, as shown by the Sudan Til, absolute alcohol and xylol
reactions. In both there develops in the cells a yellow amorphous-
pigment containing the fatty substance. In the hen a corpus luteum
forms in both discharged and atretic follicles. Its origin is definitely
from the theca interna. J. A. T.

Chondriosomes in Testis-cells of Fundulus.— G. Duesberg {Amer.
Journ. Anat., 1918, 23, 133-53, 2 pis.) has traced the behaviour of
very distinct chondriosomes in the testis-cells of this Teleost. It is very
probable that, owing to their close contact with the nucleus, they are
carried into the egg at the time of fertilization. , J. A. T.

Growth of Mice. — Helen B. Thompson and Lafayette B.
Mendel {Amer. Journ. Physiol., 1918, 45, pp. 431-60, 10 figs.) find
that up to the twenty-sixth day of life in the albino mouse the actual
gain per day is approximately the same for the two sexes. After the
twenty-sixth day the males continue to grow with comparative rapidity
until about the fortieth day, whereupon the slower, gradually diminish-
ing rate of increment ensues. The females gain from the twenty-sixth
day at the rate of 0*5 grm. per day until the thirty-fourth day, when
their curve flattens perceptibly. The resumption of growth after sup-
pression of growth is followed by a greatly accelerated rate. The
acceleration is ordinarily accomplished on a smaller intake of food than
is ingested during a period of equal growth at the normal rate from
the same initial body-weight. J. A. T

Growth of Blood-vessels in Frog Larvae. — Eliot R. Clark
{Amer. Journ. Anat., 1918, 23, 37-88, 16 figs.) finds that an
extensive vascular development takes place in early embryonic stages
which is independent of the mechanical factors concerned with the
circulation of the blood and the interchange of substances through the
endothelial wall. The extension of the blood-vascular system takes
place by sprouting and by the formation of anastomoses between sprouts,
and the early steps are due to hereditary inertia. This stage, however,
comes to an end relatively early ; and the vascular system, for its
further development into the complicated and nicely balanced system of
the adult animal, comes to be dependent upon the mechanical factors
concerned with the pull and push of outside tissues, with blood-pressure
and blood-circulation, and with the interchange of substances through
the wall. " J. A. T.

Inheritance of Coat-colour in Cats. — P. W, Whiting {Journ.
Exper. Zool., 1918, 25, 539-09, 2 pis.) has made an experimental
study. Maltese dilution segregates distinctly from intense colour, and
is probably recessive. Solid white is a simple and complete dominant
over colours. White spotting is very irregular in inheritance. There
is a partial correlation between dominant white, blue eyes, and deafness.
Yellow is determined by a sex-linked factorial difference from other
colours. Kittens resembling adult Siamese cats have been produced
from common cats. Banding cleanly segregates in three different widths.
Miich-ticking, little-ticking, and black probably constitute a triple allele-

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, ^MICROSCOPY, ETC. 295

moi-pliic series. Intergradeg occur between mnch-ticking and little-
ticking. Black spotting is explained by crossing of transverse and
longitudinal bars. J- A. T.

Development of Shoulder-girdle and Fore-limb in Amblystoma
punctatum. — S. R. Detwiler (Journ. Exper. Zool., ]918, 25, 499-
• 537, 33 figs.) finds that the separate parts of the shoulder-girdle
rudiment are already determined at the stage when the limb rudiment
is present as a definite thickening of the somatopleure. The removal
of a definite portion brings about a definite defect in the girdle.
Transplantation experiments show that the girdle system is not equi-
potential. The limb mesoderm is already determined in embryos in
the stage of open medullary folds. The rudiment can be successfully
extirpated and transplanted at this stage. J. A. T.

Development of Fore-limb of Amblystoma punctatum. — "Ross G.
Haerison {Journ. Exper. ZooL, 1918, 25, 413-01, 45 figs.) finds that
the fore-limb arises from a group of mesoderm cells formed as a pro-
liferation of the somatopleure. It is a self-diff"erentiating system. No
specific stimulus from any particular part of the ectoderm is neces-
sary for its development. The rudiment is not to be regarded as a
definitely circumscribed area, like a stone in a mosaic, but as a centre
of differentiation in which the intensity gradually diminishes centri-
fugally. It is an cquipotential system, for Harrison's experiments
show that a whole will develop from a part, and a single normal whole
will develop out of two separate rudiments fused together. " The limb
rudiment, therefore, is an entity, which, except for its dependence for
nourishment, is independent of its siuToundings in the attainment of its
specific form." J- A. T.

Regeneration after Exarticulation in Diemyctylus viridescens.
— C. V. Morrill {Journ. Exper. Zool, 1918, 25, 107-33, 3 pis.) has
experimented with this American salamander, and finds that regenera-
tion takes place readily after complete extirpation at hip, knee, or
ankle joint. The new skeletal elements are like the old. The new
cartilage appears independently (1) around the shaft of the bone
proximal to the epiphysis (and this peripheral cartilage is of periosteal
orio-in) ; (2) in the axis of the bone and in contact with the marrow
subsequent to detachment of the epiphysis (and this axial cartilage arises
from cells of the old epiphyseal cartilage and from the endosteal hning
of the marrow cavity) ; and (3) in the tissue of the bud distal to the
epiphysis (and this embryonal cartilage arises from de -differentiation
leading to a substratum of indifferent cells). The removal of single
bones was studied. J- A. T.

Effect of Starvation on Tadpoles. — W. W. Swingle {Journ. Exper^
Zool., 1918, 24, 545-G5, 14 figs.) finds that total starvation inhibits
indefinitely the growth and metamorphosis of larval frogs. It prevents
the development of the germ-glands and delays any increase in the

296 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

number of g;erm-cel]s, interstitial cells and other tissue elements in the
gonads. Starvation greatly ret<irds the normal cycle of development of
the germ-cells, and prevents the onset of sexual differentiation.

J. A. T.

Thyroid-feeding of Tadpoles. — W. W. Swingle {Joum. Exper.
Zool, 1918, 24, 521-43, 11 tigs.) finds that by feeding thyroid extract
to frog larvEe great bodily changes are brought about within a very few
■days ; entire organs and systems are transformed with startling rapidity
from the larval condition to that characteristic of the adult. Yet in the
midst of such somatic transformations the gonads and germ-cells remain
unaffected. In a state of nature it requires two seasons, and sometimes
three, for the larvEeof Rana cateshiana to reach the adult condition. It
is possible by judicious thyroid feeding to bring about almost complete
metamorphosis within a period of three weeks in the immature larva3 of
this species of frog. The animals have all the body characteristics of
the metamorphosed frog, yet the germ-cells and germ-glands are those
of young larvse. J- A. T.

Removal of Thyroid from Tadpoles.— Bennet M. Allen iJourn.
Exper. ZooL, 1918, 24, 499-519, 1 pi., 8 figs.) finds that absence of the
thvroid gland in the tadpoles of Rana pipiens does not affect the course
of'early development up to the time when the hind limlis have begun to
grow. Further differentiation of the soma — form of body, limbs, gut, brain,
^tc. — ceases, and metamorphosis does not occur. Thyroid administration
to thyroidless tadpoles brought about a resumption of development even
four months after it had ceased. The removal of the thyroid does not
affect gonads and germ-cells. J. A. T.

to*-

Effect on Ossification in Tadpoles of Extirpating Thyroid.— George

S. Terry (Journ. Exper. Zool, 1018, 24, 5G7-87, 2 pis., 2 figs.) experi-
mented with tadpoles of Rana pipiens and found that the vertebra; of
thyroidless tadpoles continue to grow long after the normal time ; that
they retain primitive characters, e.g. in having little in the way of
spinous process ; and that they show almost no trace of ossification. The
removal of the thyroid greatly retarded, if it did not completely stop,
both ossification and growth in the bones of the hind leg. Calcification
of the cartilage is proceeded with, but there is extreme retardation in
the process of ossification. J- A. T.

Effect of Thyroid Extirpation on Thymus and Pituitary Glands.
—James B. Rogers (Journ. Exper. Zool, 1918, 24, 589-605, 1 pi.,
2 charts) has experimented with tadpoles of Ra7ia jnpietis, and finds
that the pituitary and thymus glands continue to develop when the
thyroid gland is extirpated. The pituitary gland may be larger than in
the controls. The young sexually mature frogs have smaller thymus
glands than thyroidless tadpoles of the same age. The thymus glands
of thyroidless tadpoles do not migrate to the position occupied in adult
frogs, and do not degenerate like those of normal frogs. J. A. T.

Influence of Thymus-feeding. — Eduard Vklenrvth (Journ. Exper.
Zool, 1918, 25, 135-55) has experimented with larva of Amhly^toma,

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 297

-and finds that the thymus diet accelerates development up to the stage
when worm-fed larvae go into metamorphosis. At that point develop-
ment of most organs seems to stop, and disturbances often fatal ensue.
There is apparently the .suppression of some factor, without which further
•development is impossible. Severe tetany occurs. The acceleration of
-early growth and development seems to be the effect of quantitative
conditions, and not the result of a specific quality of the thymus, such
as a specific growth-stimulating agent. The thymus gland apparently
contains all the nutriment necessary to build up an amphibian organism,
for specimens of Amhlystoma punctatum, kept at low temperature, were
reared on thymus diet from the fourteenth day to the fourteenth month.

J. A. T.

Effects of Underfeeding Young Albino Rats.— Chester A.
Stewart {Journ. Exper. ZooL, 1918, 25, 301-353, 1 fig.) removed
newborn rats from the mother for nearly one-half of the total time for
the usual three weeks of nursing. Great retardation of growth resulted.
There is a progressive tendency in the skeleton and (to a slight extent)
in the musculature to increase in weight, counterbalanced by a decrease
in the integument and viscera. There is great diversity as regards the
individual organs, and in regard to this detailed measurements are
submitted. J- ^- T.

Grafts in Amblystoma. — E. Uhlenhuth (Journ. Exper. ZooL,
1017, 24, 237-301, 5 pis., 3 figs.), working with larvae of A. pimc-
tatim, grafted the two halves of the skin of the head, including an eye,
on to two other larvae. The skin grafts developed the network and the
yellow spots, not simultaneously with each other, but simultaneously
with their hosts. They metamorphosed only if the host did. Skin
from A. punctatum, grafted on to A. tigrinum, metamorphosed there,
and in the same time-relation as on a host of the same species. It seems
that the development of the yellow spots of A. punctatum depends on
two factors. One factor is responsible for the kind of yellow spots that
will develop, and is contained in the skin itself. The other factor,
which may be called the " metamorphosis factor," is necessary to start
the developrueut of the yellow spots, i.e. the metamorphosis of the skin;
it is not contained in the skin ; it is produced by the body or some
particular organ ; it is non-specific ; it may be identified with an agent
like thyroid-substance. J- A. T.

Sexual Activity of Male Rabbit in Relation to Progeny. — Frank
A. Hays {Journ. Exper. Zool., 1918, 25, 571-613, 22 charts) finds
no inferiority in body-weights of offspring from heavy service groups,
nor in body growth, nor in vigour. Heavy service of males gives a
perceptible decrease in the proportion of male to female offspring.
Female offspring are, to some degree, more likely to succumb than male
offspring in all service groups, except the twentieth. The high per-
centage of deaths of female progeny is largely due to the predominance
of females to males in the litters. " By no means thus far used has
any inferiority of progeny from heavy sexual service been discovered.

X

298 SUMMARY OF CUREENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

They are fully equal, if not superior to, progeny from very light service
of male." In short the fitness of the heavy service male's germ-cells is-
not lessened as regards inheritance. J. A. T.

Sexual Activity of Male Rabbit.— Orren Lloyd- Jones and F,
A. Hays {Journ. Exper. Zool., 1918, 25, 463-97) have investigated
the results of excessive sexual activity on the properties (number of
sperms, motility, duration of motion, certainty of pregnancy, etc.) of the
seminal discharge. Excessive sexual service — e.g. twenty services in
about three hours — causes decrease in amount of ejaculated semen,,
decrease in number of sperm-cells per cubic millimetre, decrease in
the proportion of sperms that show progressive motion, decrease in
duration of motion, and decrease in the percentages of pregnancies
induced by the copulations. In extreme cases — e.g. of over fifteen
services in a short time — there was a notable increase in the percentage
of small litters. J. A. T.

h. Histology.

Shape of Mammalian Red Blood-corpuscle. — Leslie B. Arey'
{Anat. Record., 1918, 14, 135-9) has studied the wing of the living
bat, and is convinced that the mammalian erythroplastid is correctly
described as a biconcave disc. He eliminated the deceptive simulations-
of cups afforded by corpuscles viewed obliquely on the flat. Many
corpuscles were seen which appeared as veritable cups until rotation
presented an edge view. The excavated faces seemed to be especially
deep. J. A. T.

Lobules of Pig's Liver. — Franklin P. Johnson {Amer. Journ.
Anat., 1918, 23, 273-83, 2 pis.) has studied the "hepatic lobules,"
which physiologically and morphologically are the true units of the
liver. The smallest may be no larger than 0*5 mm. in diameter ; the
largest may be 2 mm. or more. The average weight of a lobule is
2*41 milligrams ; the average number in nine livers was 702,000.

J. A. T.

Melanophores of Lizards. — E. S. Ruth and R. B. Gibson (Philip-
pine Journ. Sci., 1917, 12, 181-8, 2 pis.) have studied the melano-
phores of Philippine house-lizards {Cosmyhotus plafurus, Feropus
muiilatus, Hemidactylus frenatus, and H. luzonensis), and find that they
are definitely fixed stellate cells, neither contracting nor expanding, with
the pseudopodia remaining in situ during the fading and repigmenta-
tion. No migration of pigmented or colourless granules was observed
in the cell. The pigment is dispersed and disappears both in vitro and
in vivo, leaving colourless granules. This is seen also in lizards bleached
m white surroundings. In life the disappearance of the pigment is
probably due to the stimulation of the melanophore by a hormone,
probably adrenin. J. A. T.

Branchial Epithelium of Ammoccetes. — Ivan E. Wallin {Anat.
Record, 1918, ]4, 205-15, 2 pis.) finds evidence that the branchial
epithelium of the advanced lamprey larva is a compound tissue com-
posed of endoderm and mesenchyme. The same mingling is seen in
localized areas in the development of the thymus in higher animals ;

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 299

the mingling now described occurs throughout the general branchial
epithelium. In the lamprey there is a normal mingling of endoderm and
mesenchyme in forming the thymus, but the cells of the greater portion
of the mixed tissue are transformed into leucocytes, indicating the histo-
genetic relationship of lymphocyte formation (and probably erythrocyte
formation) to thymus formation in this primitive animal. J. A. T.

Minute Structure of Sensory Root of Trig;eminal Nerve. — L. A.
HoAG {Anat. Record, 1918, 14, 165-82) has studied this in 3Ius nor-
vegicus. The peripheral supporting tissues, endoneurium and epineurium,
together with the neurolemma, meet, without intermingling, the central
supporting tissues, neuroglia and pia mater, to form an indefinite lamina
cribrosa, through which the bundles of nerve-fibres pass. There seem
to be distinct chemical and physical differences between the central and
peripheral myelin. A number of other mammals show a similar or
identical picture. J. A. T.

c. Greneral.

Seasonal Changes in Kidney of Stickleback. — Walter X. Hess
{Anat. Record, 1918, 14, 141-63, 10 figs.) has made a study of the
kidney of the five-spined Eucalia inconstans cayuga. For most of the
year it is an excretory organ. At the breeding season the uriniparous
tubules and glomeruli remain excretory, while the epithelial cells of the
muciparous tubules, urinary ducts, bladder, and common urinary duct
become modified for producing slime. The nuclei seem to pour into
the cell-bodies certain products, in the form of secretion granules, which
function in breaking down the granular cytoplasm. The secretion
granules seem to be produced from certain products of the karyoplasm.
The making of the adhesive slime which glues, rather than ties, the
material of the nest together is probably unique among fresh-water
fishes ; it is comparable to the secretion of slime by the genital ducts of
amphibians during the breeding season. J. A. T.

Study of Malagasy Perch. — J. Legendre (Comptes Rendus, 1918,
166, 617-9) has made a study of Parcitilapia polleni Blecker, one of
the Cichlidfe. It lives in lagoons, lakes and marshes with much vegeta-
tion, but neither in rivers nor canals. Tlie colour of the adult is very
variable and is adjusted to that of the surroundings. After the parent
fishes have sojourned together for a fortnight in a chosen corner, the
eggs are laid in a sort of nest. They are guarded thereafter by one
parent, probably the male. At least a thousand minute eggs are laid ;
the incubation lasts about fifteen days ; the developing eggs are very
black ; the larvae suggest tadpoles. Buccal incubation, which is common
in Cichlidfe, does not occur, but the nest is courageously guarded.

J. A. T.

Anomalous Pelvic Fins in Cottus bubalis. — Jean Delphy (BidL
Soc. Zool, France, 1918, 42, 118-21, 3 figs.) discusses remarkable
cases of atrophy. In the first there was coalescence, so that there
seemed only one fin. Perhaps there was some arrest of development at
an early stage. In the second case there was a reduction of one
fin almost to a vanishing-point — perhaps the outcome of an early
accident. J. A. T.

X 2

300 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Otolith-method of Estimating Age of Plaice.— H. Chas. William-
son {Journ. Zool. Research, 1918, 3, 13-29, 17 figs.) criticizes Reibisch's
otolith-method of estimating the age of the plaice, which was based on
the postulate that the rings seen in the structure of the otolith are
year-rings. It is maintained that this postulate does not rest on any-
solid basis, and that the assumption that all plaice three years old are
mature is at variance with the facts. J. A. T.

Rings in Scales of Plaice and Flounders. — D. Ward Cutler
{Journ. Marine Biol. Assoc, 1918, 11, -1:70-96) has made experiments
on scale growth, and concludes that the broad summer bands, produced
by broad sclerites, and the narrow winter bands, produced by narrow
sclerites, are due to changes in the temperature of the w^ater. As
the temperature varies from month to month, or even from week
to week, the scale curves do not show a continuous rise and fall, but
exhibit at certain places secondary elevations or depressions, secondary
maxima and minima. The amount of food does not affect the produc-
tion of summer and winter bands, save that poor nutrition tends to
there being few sclerites produced, and high food consumption leads to
high sclerite formation. Cutler's view is against that of J. Stuart
Thomson, who concluded that the amount of food supply, rather than
variation in temperature, brought about the formation of annual rings
in scales. J. A. T.

Blue Andalusians. — W. A. Lippincott {Ayner. Naturalist, 1918,
52, 95-115) finds that blue Andalusians are like black Andalusians
in that they are self-coloured. They are like the blue-splashed in that
homologous pigmented feathers in both sexes have the same condition
with reference to the restriction of pigment in the feather structure.
The fundamental phenotypic differences between black, blue and l)lue-
splashed Andalusians are briefly described. It is pointed out that the
1:2:1 ratio is in reality a combination of two 3 : 1 ratios. The con-
dition in the blues is shown to be due to the combined action of two
factors R and E. R acts on black pigment, restricting its distribution
in such a way that it gives the characteristic blue-grey appearance,
E extends black pigment to every feather on the fowl's body. It is
impossible to decide on the basis of present facts whether R and E are
located on identical loci of homologous chromosomes or are the domi-
nants of two pairs of factors, each linked to the recessive allelomorph of
the other. J. A. T.

Baculum or Os penis in some Genera of Mustelidse. — R. I. Pocock
{Ann. Nat. Hist., 1918, 1, series 9, 307-12, 12 figs.) confirms in regard
to some Mustelidte what Oldfield Thomas has shown for Sciuridas, that
the baculum has great systematic value as an index of affinities. He
deals with the genera Gharronia, Grison, and Mellivora, and attention is
drawn to the singular differences between the bacula of llustela erminea
and M. nivalis. By the shape of the bone the latter falls into the same
category as Mustela {Putorius) putorius and faro. In 31. africana the
bone is shaped substantially as in M. nivalis. J. A. T.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 301

Tunicata.

Sensory Reactions of Ascidia atra.— Selig Hecht {Journ. Expp,r.
ZooJ., 1018, 25, 261-99, 2 figs.) finds that this Ascidiau has sis negative
reactions to stimuli — three direct (depending on stimulation of the
exterior) and three crossed (depending upon a stimulation of the interior,
and al>olished by severing the intersiphonal ganglion). The Ascidian
is sensitive to tactile stimulation, especially in siphon rims and oral
tentacles ; to vibrations, in the lobes of the siphon rims ; to light of
high intensity, not in the " ocelli," but within the siphon near the oral
tentacles ; to temperatures above 32° C. and below 20° C. ; to large
changes in osmotic pressure ; to salts, acids, bases, alkaloids, and
anaesthetics (but not to sugars) in solution. On the whole, the animal's
reactions are few. J. A. T.

Photic Sensibility of Balanoglossids. — W. J. Crozier {Journ.
Exper. Zooh, 1917, 24, 211-7) has experimented with Ptychodera
lahamensis, and finds that it is negatively photokinetic. In addition to
this orienting stimulus, it is shown that light has another, possibly
separate, effect upon these animals — namely, the inhibition of light-pro-
duction. The tip of the proboscis is the part most sensitive to illumina-
tion, but the rest of the animal's surface is likewise open to stimulation
by light. The collar nervous system (delaminated part) is unnecessary
for the co-ordinated movements of orientation, and also for the inhibi-
tory influence of light on the production of luminescence. J. A. T.

INVERTEBRATA.

Mollusca.
y. Crastropoda.

Smell and Taste in Marine Snails. — Manton Copelaxd {Journ.
Exper. ZooJ., 1918, 25, 177-227) has studied the olfactory reactions of
Alectrion ohsoleta and Busycon canaUcnlatum, which move towards the
dilute chemical stimuli of distant food or extrude their proboscides.
The osphradium is an olfactory organ, but all the skin surfaces tested
were found to be more or less susceptible. The movements of the
siphon are of much importance. Both snails show positive reactions to
relatively strong food solutions, and are therefore gustatory. The
principal external receptive areas for taste stimuli appear to be the
tentacles, the anterior part of the foot, and the under part of the head.
Touch may assist in reactions to food ; the eyes do not seem to play
any part ; taste is effective only in the last stages of food-procurement ;
smell is all important. J. A. T.

Locomotion of Gastropods. — J. M. D. Olmsted {Journ. Exper.
ZooL, 1917, 24, 223-36, 1 fig.) distinguishes lateral, diagonal, composite
and other types of locomotion in Gastropods. Cilia are the means of
pedal locomotion in Marginella, Haminea and Bulla. It was found
that Chiton and Fissurella can move backward without reversing the

302 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

normal direction of their pedal waves. By the use of a manometer
it was shown that pedal waves are areas of suction, and therefore
concavities. J. A. T.

Pedal Locomotion of Aplysia californica. — G. H. Parker {Jonrn.
Exper. Zool., 1917, 24, 139-45, 1 fig.) finds that pedal locomotion in
this sea-hare " is due to monotaxic retrograde waves, which lift the foot
locally and temporarily from the substrate, enabling it thus to move
forward with freedom, while the rest of the foot for the time being
holds the snail in place by many small areas of local suction." J. A. T.

Arthropoda.
a. ^nsecta.

Insects and Disease. — Malcolm E. MacGregor {Trans. Amer.
Micr. Soc, 1918, 37, 7-17. See also Journ. Tropical Medicine and
Hygiene, 1917, 20) publishes five provisional tables showing the part
that insects play in spreading diseases of unknown origin (like trench
fever), of bacterial origin, of spirochsetal origin, of Protozoan origin,
and of Helminth origin. A fifth table shows the more important
diseases directly attributable to insects and Acarina. Much of our
knowledge with regard to insects and disease is still indefinite, but the
author's tables, which are in no way dogmatic, afford striking illustration
of the multiplicity of inter-relations. J. A. T.

Wing-markings of Arctiidae.— J. F. van Bemmelef {Proc. R.
Acad. Sci. Amsterdam, 1918, 20, 849-60) finds in a study of Arctiidse
additional evidence in support of his view that there was for Rhopalocera
and Hepialids an original pattern, common to all members of the group,
and modified in various but not independent ways in the several
families, genera and species. The colour-pattern of Arctiidse may be
deduced from an ancestral fundamental form, in which a light ground
is divided into seven fields by a corresponding number of transverse
rows of dark spots, running uninterruptedly from fore to hind margin,
on both sides of the fore as well as of the hind wings. It represents
not the primitive Lepidopterous pattern but the secondary He])ialid
design. No fundamental control exists between ground colour and
markings ; they have a common origin, and become altered in the same
way by similar influences. J. A. T.

Wing-venation of Lepidoptera.— R. J. Tillyard {Proc. Linn. Soc.
N.8.W., 1917, 42, 167-74, 7 figs.) describes the wing of a Triassic
fossil insect which represents a generalized type called " Protome-
copterous," and is regarded as near the ancestral stock of the four
orders Mecoptera, Trichoptera, Lepidoptera and Diptera. J. A. T.

Observations on Caterpillars of Cabbage-white Caterpillars. —
Cl. Gautier {C.R. Soc. BioL, 1918, 81, 196-7) has seen these cater-
pillars regurgitate the well-known green syrupy alimentary content
to a distance of 4 cm. The fluid shows nutritive particles, occasional

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 303

chloroleucites, and very minute granular filaments. The blood has some-
times a marked oxydase reaction, but this is very variable.
.• .'- In another paper {G.R. Soc. Biol, 1918, 81, 197-9) Gautier notes
that as many as fifteen to eighty larvaB of the Braconid Apanteles
glomeratus may emerge from a single caterpillar of Pieris brassicse,
and fifty to sixty often appear. They form cocoons below the moribund
•caterpillar, but this position is not indispensable. The rough-and-
ready method of crushing the caterpillars against the leaf is apt to
kill their Braconid parasites as well. J. A. T.

Maritime Coleoptera. — James H. Keys (Jonrn. Marine Biol.
Assoc, 1918, 11, -197-513) has done an interesting piece of work in
recording from South Devon and South Cornwall, with especial reference
to the Plymouth district, the beetles whose habitats are covered by the
sea for a considerable time during the ebb and flow of the tide. The
maritime beetles in the list comprise eight species, the sub-maritime
fifty-four, and the coast species eighty-nine. J. A. T.

Spiracles of Hypoderma Maggot. — George H. Carpenter and
F. J. S. Pollard {Proc. R. Irish Acad., 1918, 34, 73-84, 6 pis.) have
demonstrated the presence of a paired series of (six) minute lateral
spiracles, and of solidified air-tubes connecting them with the branches of
the main longitudinal tracheal trunks. The vestigial structures are
present in the fourth stage of larvse of Hijpoderma Jomand H. lineatum,
and also in the larvse of (Edemagena tarandi, the Reindeer Warble-fly.
They occur from the second to the seventh abdominal segments. Pantel
observed vestigial lateral spiracles in Tachinine larvae ; the authors have
not been able to find them in any other Muscoid larvse. As Hijpoderma
is highly specialized, and yet has remains of the lateral spiracles, it is
suggested that it must have diverged very early from the Muscoid stock
before the larval lateral spiracles had been lost. J. A. T.

Temperature and Crossing-over in Drosophila. — Harold H.
Plough {Journ. Exper. Zool, 1917, 24, 147-209, 9 figs.) finds that
the percentage of what is called " crossing-over " among the offspring
of this fly is increased in the first brood, but not in the second, by
alterations of temperature, which probably affects the structural make-up
of the nuclear mechanism. The percentage is not affected by wet and
dry food, starvation, and increased fermentation of the food. The high
temperature influences appear to act at one stage in the oogenesis — in
very early oocytes. J- A. T.

Reactions of Drosophila to Light and Gravity.— R. S. McEwen
{Journ. Exper. Zool, 1918, 25, 49-106, 3 figs.) finds that females of
Drosophila ampelophila react to light somewhat more readily than do the
males, but the difference decreases with age, and has almost vanished at
€ight or nine days. The removal of the wings involves a loss of most
of the phototropism, but has little or no effect as regards response to
gravity. The effect as regards phototropism is roughly proportional to
the amount of wing cut off, but is not the result of the operation as
such. Operations on the antenna3 may produce a weakening of the

304 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

response to gravity, though they have httle effect on the reaction tc>
light. In a mutant stock called tan there is evidence of a sex-linkecJ
inheritance of indifference to light, which is apparently not due to any
structural defect. The diverse effectiveness of different coloured lights-
is defined. J. A. T.

Digestion in Cockroach. — Eldon W. Sanford {Journ. Exper,
ZooL, VMS, 25, 355-412, 21 figs.) finds that the crop is the principal
digestive area. Its enzyme splits up fats, and three times as actively as.
the stomach. The crop is also the chief area for the absorption of fats,
and all the cells of its epithelium may share in absorbing. The crop is.
also an important storing organ ; it can store enough for two months.
The gizzard has an important sphincter action, and may keep back food
from the stomach for several days. The needles on the cushions are
moved by special muscles, but their function is doubtful. They may
aid in moving food through the gizzard. The caecal epithelium, like-
that of the stomach, digests and absorbs. In both there are special
groups of absorbing cells. The tracheal end cells absorb fatty products
from the lumen of the crop, and the peritracheal cells from the blood.
The tracheae themselves never normally contain fat, but in certain,
tracheffi there is commonly a sticky substance of uncertain origin, often
containing leucocytes. J. A. T.

Pathological Effects of Phthirus pubis. — G. H. F. Nuttall,
{Parasitology, 1918, 10, 375-82) notes that the Crab-louse is not known
to serve as the vector of any infective disease, and that its pathological
effects on man are on the whole of slight degree. It may induce
pruritus. It induces pale bluish-grey maculge, but not invariably.
These mark the site of the insect's bite ; they appear eight to twenty-
four hours after the louse commences to feed on the spot affected. They
usually disappear in about a week after the removal of the parasite..
They may be due to extravasated and altered blood. Apart from the
macular a febrile condition of the skin may be brought about, and the
lesions due to scratching may lead to secondary skin infection with
pyogenic bacteria. J. A. T.

Collembola of Abor Expedition. — George H. Carpenter {Records-
Indian Museum, 1917, 8, 561-8, 3 pis.), reports on a collection of
Spring-tails from the Abor hills and elsewhere. A description is given
of Cyphoderopsis Jcempi, g. et sp. n., a blind pale form found under
stones at Rotung, N.E. Assam. It seems to be in many respects a
connecting link between typical Cyphoderini and the Paronellini. A
number of new species of Faronella, Lepidocyrtus, and Protanura are
dealt with. J. A. T.

Caudal Gills of Larvae of Zygopterid Dragonflies.— R. J. Tillyard
{Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1917, 42, 31-112, 6 pis., 32 figs.) has made
a detailed study of these structures. There is a median gill formed
from the appendix dorsalis, a median out-growth from the eleventh
abdominal tergite. There are two lateral gills formed from the two.
cerci of the eleventh segments, and homologous with crustacean uropods.
Each caudal gill is a hollow out-growth of the body-wall, with cuticle

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

305

and hypodermis, with tracbeje, two blood-canals, nerves and alveolar
tissue, formed from hypoderm cells growing into the htemocoele. Each
gill is attached by a basal piece, with a breaking-joint. Tillyard dis-
tinguishes (1) the saccoid type, more or less sausage-shaped, either

mr

Ideal (Semi-diageammatic) T.S. of Median Caudal Gills to show
THE Internal Structure of the Gills.

A. Across the saccoid gill-system of Diphlebia.

B. Across the vertical lamellar gill-system of Austroagrion {Agrionid
form of gill).

al, alveolus : cu, soft inner layer of cuticle ; dh, dorsal blood-canal ;
dl, principal dorsal internal lamina ; dn, dorsal longitudinal nerve of
gill ; hy, hypodermis ; il, internal lamina ; tr, main longitudinal trachea
of gill ; tr', branch trachea of gill ; vh, ventral blood-canal ; vl, principal
ventral internal lamina ; vn, ventral longitudinal nerve of gill.

simple or constricted ; (2) the triquetro-quadrate type, triangular m
transverse section ; (3) the lamellar type, with a rachis and vertical or
horizontal blades, but admitting of further classification ; and (4) the-
reduced (non-functional type), with a vanishing tracheal system.

J. A. T.

/3. Myriopoda.

Peculiar Variation in Brachydesmus. — Henky W. Beolemann:
(Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., 1918, 1, series t), 281-J:, 3 figs.^ describes a
peculiar condition in an immature specimen of a species oiBrachydesmus —
namely, the presence of almost adult copulatory organs. Such a structure-
is frequent and even normal with Diplopods of archaic type, such as-
Colobognatha or Spiroboloidea ; but that it should be witnessed in the
highly specialized Polydesmoidea is certainly most striking. It seems-
to be an instance of " neotania." J. A. T.

306 SUMMARY OF CUREENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

5. Arachnida.

Hydracarina of Epping Forest. — Charles D. Soar (Essex Natu-
ralist (published Oct. 1917), 18, 96-105, 23 figs.) gives a list of
fifty-two species, in twenty genera, from Epping Forest — about one-fifth
of the total number of species for the Britannic area. Eleven forms are
figured. J. A. T.

Lebertia sefvei Walter. — W. Williamson and Charles D. Soar
{Journ. Quekett Micr. Club, 1918, 13, 1-4, 1 pi.) record the discovery of
this Arctic form in Dartmoor, bringing the number of British species of
Lebertia up to twelve. They give a description and figures of the
external features. J. A, T.

New Pentastomid from a Fish. — P. de Beauchamp {Bull. Soc.
Zool. France, 1918, 43, 14-20, 3 figs.) describes Porocephalus nematoides
sp. n., from the food -canal of a species of Mastacembelus from Lake
Tanganyika. The only other species known from fishes is P. gracilis
(Diesing), and the two are nearly allied. Both are elongated and
cylindrical, very like Nematodes. J. A. T.

e. Crustacea.

New Parasitic Copepod. — Ch. J. Gravier {Comptes Rendus, 1918,
166, 502-5) describes Flabellicola neapolitana, g. et. sp. n., found
attached to the restricted area anterior and dorsal to the gills, and
between two fans of setas, on the first segment of the Polychaet
Flabelligera (Siphonosfoma) diplocliaitos. The body of the female shows
no appendages, nor segmentation, nor food-canal — little more indeed
than ova and granular reserve material. Some spermatozoa were found,
but no males were discovered. The remarkable parasite may be pro-
visionally referred to Hansen's family of Herpyllobiidge. J. A. T.

Annulata.

Peculiarly Adapted Annelid. — F. Mesnil and M. Caullery {Bidl.
Soc. Zool., France, 1918, 42, 127-32, 5 figs.) describe Exogone hebes
Webster and Benedict, var. hibernica Southern, a rare Syllid, requiring a
new sub-genus Parexogone. It lives in compact sand and has a some-
what Oligochset appearance. The head is prolonged into a sort of cone
with fused palps ; the anterior part of the food -canal is very muscular,
with proboscis, crop, and gizzard ; the cuticle is very thick. In short
the worm is remarkably adapted to peculiar conditions of hfe.

J. A. T.

Notes on Syllids. — F. Mesnil and M. Caullery {Bidl. Soc. Zool.,
France, 1918, 43, 34-40, 2 figs.) discusses some interesting Syllids
from the Litliothamnion zone at the Hague. These include Myrianida
fasciculata, a new Autolytus, and various species of Exogone, Sphserosyllis,
and Grubea. Attention is directed to the occurrence of a sexual stolon
and schizogamy in Grubea limbata, and to the presence of a species of
Rhopalura inside Sphserosyllis erinaceus Clp. J. A. T.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 307

Effect of Radium on Fertilization Membrane of Nereis. — Alfred
C. Redfield and Elizabeth M. Bright {Amer. Journ. Physiol., 1918,
45, 374-87) find that the fertilization membrane of the Q^g of Nereis
limhata becomes abnormally thick if the Qgg is exposed to radiations
from radium prior to fertilization. The change leading to the condition
is irreversible. The physiological effect is not proportional to the
product of intensity and time. The time factor is relatively more
important than the intensity factor. J. A. T.

Branchiobdellids from Michigan Crawfishes. — Max M. Ellis
{Trans. Amer. Micr. Soc, 1918, 37, 4:9-.51) defines and distinguishes
Xironodrilus formosus Ellis in ed., Camharincola vitrea Elhs in ed.^
C. philadelphica (Leidy), and Pterodrilus durhini Ellis in ed. from
numerous crawfish hosts. J. A. T.

Nematlielinintlies .

Filter-bed Nematodes. — N. A. Cobb {^Nemntologij, Baltimore, 1918,
189-212, 9 figs.) finds that towards the end of a period of use the
number of Nematodes in the topmost three inches of a filter-bed often
amount to hundreds of millions per acre, and sometimes exceeds a
thousand millions. About thirty species were found. The commonest
are carnivorous. Their soluble excretions may give flavour to water.
A description is given of the process of discharging the secretion from
the caudal glands. It is pointed out that species of Nematodes regarded
as parthenogenetic may turn out, as in the case of Plectus, to have
minute functional spermatozoa. Some hermaphrodite forms begin by
producing spermatozoa which are stored till the ova are produced. The
reproductive phenomena are discussed and new terms are proposed. A
number of new genera and species are described and figured. J. A. T.

Development of Ascaris lumbricoides and A. mystax in Mouse. —
F. H. Stewart {Parasitology, 1918, 10, 189-96, 1 pi.) has continued
his study of the migration of A. lumhricoides in the mouse, and has
followed the course of the parasites from the ninth to the fifteenth day,
during which period many make their way down the intestine. The
structure of the young stages is described. Cultures of A. mystax in a
damp atmosphere showed three-cell stages on the first day, advanced
segmentation on the second, curved vermicules on the fourth and fifth,
plump vermicules on the seventh, and so on. Ripe eggs were given to
mice, and active larvse were found in the liver between the first and third
days after infection. J. A. T.

Life-history of Ascaris lumbricoides. — F. H. Stewart {Para-
sitology, 1918, 10, 197-205) finds that ripe eggs of A. lumbricoides or
A. suilla hatch in the intestine of their definitive hosts, man or the pig,
and also in the rat and mouse, and develop in the body of man and of
these animals in an identical manner up to the 2 mm. larva in the
trachea. Further, that in the mouse the larvae then pass through the
ahmentary canal unharmed and are evacuated in the faeces. It may be,
however, that the normal development of either species is in one host

308 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

only. The eggs of A. lumhricoides were found to develop in fgeces
of man and pig freely exposed to air. No development was observed
in contaminated water, but some may develop in tap-water. Develop-
ment also occurs on the surface of moist clayey earth. The author
doubts v.'hether the importance of human Ascariasis is sufficiently
recognized. J. A. T.

Acanthocephala of North American Birds.— H. J. Van Cleave
{Trans. Amer. Micr. Soc, 191<s, 37, 19-47, 5 pis.) deals with new
species of Gorynosoma, Plagiorhynchus, and Folymorphus, and with
a number of systematic points. A key is given to all described
species of Acanthocephala from North American birds. Among North
American birds the occurrence of two different species within the same
host-individual has not been recorded. There is no positive case on
record of the occurrence of two different genera of Acanthocephala withia
the same species of North American bird. J. A. T.

Platyhelminthes.

Trematode Larva from Buccinum undatum. — Marie Y. Lebour
{Journ. Marine Biol. Assoc, 1918, 11, 514-8, 7 figs.) describes from the
digestive gland of this Gastropod a sporocyst and cercaria which are
almost certainly stages of Zoogo7ius viviparus (Olsson). The life-history
of this species, common in the intestine of fishes, is so far unknown.
From the structure of the cercaria (a Cotylocercous type), which is able
to use the posterior end of its body as a sucker-hke organ, it is probable
that the intermediate host is an actively swimming animal, as in all
probability the sucker is used by the cercaria for fixing the hind end of
its body whilst the free part waves about in order to catch a host. The
stylet on the head and its glands opening beside it show that the cercaria
bores into its host. Notes are made on a number of immature and
adult Trematodes found in young fishes. J. A. T.

Life-history of Distoma luteum sp. n. — J. D. F. Gilchrist
{Parasitology, 1918, 10, 311-9) found in Fhysa tropica, in S. Africa,
the redige and cercarise of Distoma luteum sp. n., which he found as an
adult in the alimentary canal of frogs. Several other Trematode stages
were found, but the S. African host of the liver-fluke remains uncertain,
Limnsea trimcatula being at the most very rare. A description is
given of the eggs, redige, cercarise, cysts, and adults of D. luteum.

J. A. T.

Trematodes of Queensland Reptiles and Frogs. — W. Nicoll
{Parasitology, 1918, 10, 368-74, 1 pi.) describes Brachysaccus juvenilis
sp. n., from the intestine of burrowing frogs {Chiroleptes hrevipalmatiis) ;
Sigmapera cincta n. g. et sp. n. from fresh- water turtles {Emydura latis-
ternuni) — a minute form, hardly over 1 mm. in length, with a character-
istic Y-shaped excretory vesicle ; Lecithochirium dillanei sp. n., from a
sea-snake ; and some other forms. J. A. T.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. ' 309

New Trematode from Australian Poisonous Snakes. — AVilliam
NicoLL {Parasitology^ 1918, 10, 290-3) describes DoUchopera macalpini
sp. n., which, like D. parvula, seems to have its normal habitat in the
cesophagus, trachea and lungs of snakes. J. A. T.

Structure and Development of Cladorchis. — Feed D. Weidman
i^Parasitology, 1918, 10, 267-79, 1 pL, 2 figs.) deals with Cladorchis
{Stichorchis) subiriqitPtrus Rudolphi, from the ctecum of the beaver. He
■describes the external features, the alimentary, reproductive, muscular,
and excretory systems. Special attention is directed to the pre-
oesophageal sphincter, the oesophageal musculature, the heavy ventral
subcuticular musculature, the slight branching of the young testes, the
late development of the yolk glands, and so on. It is probable that
this Trematode is a commensal as much as a parasite. J. A. T.

Liver-rot.— C. L. Walton {Parasitology, 1918, 10, 232-66, 5 figs.)
has studied the occurrence of this disease in the Aberystwith area.
There is a marked coincidence between the distribution of clay and
Limnsea truncatula, and of L. truncatula and Liver-rot. Drought and
severe frost work against the snails. Rainfall and its distribution
throughout the year is the most important factor governing the increase,
spread, and infectivity of the snail. The ova may develop even after
the egg-masses have dried down to a hard scale. Roadside ditches are
very frequently inhabited by infected snails, and drainage from them
may be the cause of cases of rot. Cercarise of Distomum hepaticuni
were obtained from L. truncatula practically throughout the year, but
not from snails measuring less than 4 • 5 mm. Seventy cercarite were
given off naturally, within forty-eight hours, from one specimen
measuring 7 mm. in length. A few cercaria3 resembling those of
D. hepaticum were obtained on one occasion from L.peregra. J. A. T.

Regeneration in Planaria maculata. — J. M. D. Olmsted {Journ.
Exper. Zool., 1918, 25, 157-77, 14 figs.) has studied the regeneration
-of triangular pieces cut from the side. They will regenerate heads at
right angles to the original long axis if the following conditions are
fulfilled : — (a) the point of the intersection of the two cut edges must
lie at or near the old median axis of the worm ; {b) the angle between
the cut edges must be 90° or less ; and (c) the cut edges must be of the
same length. Under all other conditions the old polarity is most
•evidently unchanged. If the piece is small, it may regenerate a head
only, but the position of this head shows the tendency to retain the old
polarity. Numerous special facts in regard to the regeneration of
triangular pieces are stated ; the general result is the possibility of
retaining polarity even in extreme cases. J. A. T.

Incertse Sedis.

Life-history of Dicyemids. — Aug. Lameere (Bull. Soc. Zool. France,
1918, 42, 122-6) finds that there are five successive generations : —
(1) an asexual immigrant generation of " founder-nematogens " ; (2)
a sedentary asexual generation of " primary nematogens," which are

310 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

transformed into " rhomhogens " ; (3) a hermaphrodite generation of
" infusorigens," which arise inside the rhomhogens ; (4) an asexual
emigrant generation ; and (5) an asexual generation in some host (still
unknown) different from the Cephalopod. There is a period com-
parable to the Orthonectid's stay in its first host, and there is a period
in the kidneys of Cephalopods. The latter has been, as it were, inter-
calated between the emergence of the Orthonectid from its first host
and its return to the same in the form of an infusiform larva arising
from a fertilized ovum. A Dicyemid is a hermaphrodite Orthonectid
which, instead of reproducing in the sea, penetrates into the kidneys
of Cephalopods, becomes asexual, exhibits several generations, and
eventually gives rise to the larvae which find the primary host.

J. A. T.

Rotatoria.

Controlling Sex in Rotifers. — D. D. Whitney {Journ. Exper,
ZooL, 1917, 24, 101-138,4 figs., 4 diagrams) finds that when the green-
food supply {CMamydomonas) is very abundant the rotifers Brachionus
militaris, B. bakeri and Euchlanis cUlatata produce a high percentage of
male-producing daughters. If the same food is scanty, very few, if any,
male-producing daughters are produced. The same is true for the
marine B. midhri for either green or colourless food. A race of New
Jersey Hydatina senta fed on Chhmipdomonas in the dark without
excess of oxygen present produced male-producing daughters nearly as
readily as in the light with an excess of oxygen. The excess of oxygen
in the culture water acts indirectly on the mother rotifers by influencingr
the number of micro-organisms which form the food. J. A. T.

Echinoderma.

Permeability of Sea-urchin Ova, — Ralph S. Lille (Amer. Journ,
Physiol., 1918, 45, 406-30) finds that fertilized eggs of Arbacia and
Echinarachnius shrink rapidly and undergo creuation in hypertonic
sea- water or van't Hoff's solution (of thirty to forty atmospheres osmotic
pressure), while unfertilized eggs shrink slowly in the same solutions and
remain round. The relative rates of swelling in dilute sea-water are
similar. It follows that fertilization results in a marked increase in
the permeability of the plasma-membrane (the semi-permeable surface-
layer of protoplasm) to water. Artificial formation of fertihzation
membranes by butyric acid causes similar though more variable effects
in Arbacia eggs. The change in permeability begins two and four
minutes after fertilization, and is completed in about twenty minutes.
The increase of permeability is prevented by anaesthetics and some other
reagents. J. A. T.

Homologies of Anal Plate in Antedon. — F. A. Bather {A7in.
May. Nat. Hist., 1918, 1, series 9, 294-302) discusses the homologies of
the plate which appears, migrates, and disappears in the posterior iuter-
radius of the larval Antedon, and is what is called the anal plate. It
has been regarded as homologous with the plate generally known as

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 311

anal x (the brachianal of Bather, 1890) in the Crinoidea inadunata
and flexibilia. This conclusion is upheld in opposition to Austin H.
Clarke's suggestion that the anal plate of Antedon is homologous with the
radianal (Bather, 1890). J. A. T.

Cell-division in Monaster and Narcotized Ova. — Theophilus S.
Painter (Journ. Exyer. ZooL, 1918, 24, 445-97, 5 pis., 10 figs.) has
studied the division of sea-urchin ova treated with narcotics, or shaken
so that many Monaster forms (with one division-centre) result. At each
division cycle, the egg-protoplasm is affected in three ways : (1) there
is a pronounced swelling of the ectoplasmic layer ; (2) this is followed
by intense changes in surface tension leading to the formation of
pseudopod-like processes ; (3) there is a flow of the superficial protoplasm
towards the area where the streaming is taking place. Ingenious
experiments point to the nucleus as the source of a second factor in cell-
division which finds expression in a swelling of the ectoplasm, great
changes in surface tension, and a flow of the cortical layers of protoplasm
towards the cleavage area. The asters seem to act as regulative centres
during cell-division ; by forming denser areas they restrict the action of
the nuclear factor to a prescribed area. J. A. T.

Physiology of Synaptula hydriformis. — J. M. D. Olmsted {Journ.
Exper. ZooL, 1917, 24, 333-79, 2 figs.) has made a study of this
Holotliurian at Bermuda. It occurs in red and green varieties. It
feeds chiefly on a filamentous alga. There is a rhythmic pulsation of
the intestine. Nearly every specimen contained a mass of symbiotic
bacteria lying free in the body-cavity. There seems to be a well-
developed chemical sense. Probably, as in Lumhrkus (where, according
to Langdon, a specimen of 152 segments, 19 cm. long, has 150,000
sensory structures, about 1,000 to each segment), there are " universal
sense organs," receptive to tactile and photic as well as chemical stimuli.
This is at the other pole from man, where there are no recognizably
universal sense organs, but some twenty (Herrick) special senses. In any
case in Synaptula, in addition to eyes and otocysts, only one type of
sense organ has been found. J. A. T.

Coelentera,

Activities of Corymorpha. — G. H. Paeker {Journ, Exper. ZooL,
1917, 24, 303-31) has studied Corymorpha palma, a large and hardy
Hydrozoon. Its stalk measures as much as 10 cm. or more in length,
with a diameter at the thickest part of about 0*5 cm. The mucous
glands are insignificant ; cilia seem to be absent ; the stinging cells are
not under the control of the nervous system ; the muscles may or may
not be so controlled. There are four longitudinal ectodermic muscles —
of the stalk, of the proboscis, of the proximal, and of the distal tentacles.
There are two circular endodermic muscles — of the stalk and of the
proboscis. Both are stimulated directly, but the second is probably
also under partial nervous control. Nervous transmission is diffuse
except in the stalk, where it is predominantly longitudinal. The stalk,
proboscis, and tentacles show great autonomy. The locomotion is very

312 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

circumscribed and slow. There is a neuromuscular negatively geotropic
response. In quiet water the mouth and distal tentacles are pressed on
the mud. lu running water the proximal tentacles entangle food and
transfer it to the distal tentacles and mouth. The neuromuscular
mechanism of Gorymorflm is not intermediate between that of the
receptor-effector system of Actinians and the independent effectors of
sponges. It resembles a reduced Actinian system rather than a primitive
state from which such a system could be derived. J. A. T.

Suction in Sea-anemone. — G. H. Parker {Journ. Exper. Zool,
1917, 24, 219-22, 1 fig.) has experimented with Crihrina xanthogram-
mica, which has great power of suction in its tentacles, and in tubercles
which extend in rows from the oral to the pedal disc. The tentacles
grip food ; the tubercles grip pieces of shell. The breaking force
required to separate fragments of shell from the tubercles was measured.
The average for ten trials was 47 "2 grm., and the average suction-
pressure was 11 grm. per square millimetre. This amounts approxi-
mately to 15 "6 pounds per square inch. As the limit of suction under
■ordinary circumstances is one atmosphere, or 14 "7 pounds per square
inch, it appears that .at the moment of breaking the sea-anemone was
■exerting as much suction as, under the circumstances, was physically
possible. J. A. T.

Antarctic Actiniaria. — T. A. Stephenson {British Antarctic
<" Terra Nova ") Expedition, 1910. Zoologij, 5, No. 1, 1-68, 6 pis.
Printed by order of Trustees of the British Museum, 1918) establishes
five new genera — Hormosoma, Lilliella, Artemidactis, Aiptasioides, and
L&ptoteichus — and gives careful descriptions of fifteen species, of which
•eleven are new. All were collected by the " Terra Nova " Expedition,
and seven were obtained in deep water in the Antarctic area. Among
the general notes reference is made to nutritive amoeboid cells in the
mesogloea, to the presence of zooxanthellse in the male gonads, and to the
relative value of diverse structural features. It would seem that the
most generally reliable generic characters are to be found in the external
features of the body other than its length, in the number of perfect
mesenteries, and in the musculature. J. A. T.

Protozoa.

Metabolic G-radients in Amoeba and their Relation to Amoeboid
Movement. — Libbie H. Hyman {Journ. Exper. Zool., 1917, 24, 55-99,
14 figs.) finds in each pseudopodium a gradient in susceptibility to
potassium cyanide. It is greatest distally and in the most recent
vigorous pseudopodia. The regions of highest susceptibility are thus
■anterior, as in other organisms. The gradient arises before the pseudo-
podium appears, and hence the metabolic change which produces
increased susceptibility is the primary cause of pseudopodium forma-
tion. Evidence is adduced to show that the surface of most amoeboid
•organisms is in a state of gelation, and it is argued that amoeboid move-
ment must be due to alterations of the colloidal state. Liquefaction or

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 313

solation is regarded as the cause of the extension of a pseudopodium ;
coagulation or gelation as the cause of the withdrawal of pseudopodia ;
and of active contraction. This theory is an extension of one previously
iidvanced by Rhumbler. J. A. T.

Reactions of Pelomyxa to Food. — AY. A. Kepner and J. Graham
Edwards {Journ. Exper. Zool. 1917, 24, 381-407, 14 figs.) find two
kinds of reactions, according as the objects engulfed are capable or
incapable of retreat. The food includes plants and animals, and varies
in size from Nematodes to very minute Infusorians. The paths of
possible retreat of motile organisms present a wide range of variability,
and the details of the amoeba's reactions cannot be predicted. No
hypothesis yet advanced to explain the movement of Rhizopods can be
applied to the solution of the problem of the movement of Pelonnjxa in
relation to the food-bodies. J. A. T.

Entamoeba histolytica and Entamoeba ranarum.— Clifford
DoBELL {Parasitology, 1918, 10, 294-310) has made numerous experi-
ments in the attempt to infect tadpoles with the human Entammha
histolytiea, but it seems that the cysts, when ingested, pass unchanged
through the intestine, without undergoing any development. This
indicates the conclusion that the two species, in spite of close resemblance,
are somehow distinct, and that the frog, in all probability, is not a
*' reservoir " of human amoebic dysentery. J. A. T.

Races of Entamoeba histolytica. — Clifford DoBELLand Margaret
W. Jepps {Parasitology, 1918, 10, 320-51, 1 pL, 7 figs.) find that
Entamaba histolytica Schaudinn (vel E. dysenterise Councilman and
Lafleur) is a collective species, comprising a number (five) of distinct
races, strains, or pure lines, distinguishable from one another by the
size of the cysts which they produce. These races remain constant in
character within a given host ; and the dimensions of the cysts are not
determined by the action of the host upon the parasite, since two
different races may co-exist side by side in the same host. Since cysts
of E. histolytica may be found with all diameters from about 5ju, to
20 /A — a range overlapping or covering the dimensions of the cysts of
the harmless intestinal amcebre {E. coli and E. nana) and of other cysts
and cyst-like bodies in human fteces— it is of considerable practical
importance to recognize and distinguish the diverse races of the collective
species in question. J- A. T.

New Amoeba from Man. — Margaret W. Jepps and Clifford
DoBELL {Parasitology, 1918, 10, 352-G7, 1 pi.) describe Dientammha
fragilis g. et sp. n., a very small amoeba from the human intestine. The
diameter when rounded is about 3-5 /x to 12 /a, averaging about 9/x;
the cytoplasm is differentiated into ectoplasm and endoplasm ; the
pseudopodia are flattened, hyaline, and leaf-like, usually few, with
irregularly dentate margins ; the progression is snail-like ; there are no
contractile vacuoles. There are typically two nuclei, averaging about
2 fx.. Each possesses a large central karyosome surrounded by a clear
zone containing no peripheral chromatin and limited externally by a
very delicate achromatic nuclear membrane. The organism probably

Y

314 SUMMAKY OF CUKKENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

divides into two uninucleate daughter-individuals, which become
binucleate. Cysts are unknown. The food consists of small vegetable
organisms in the intestinal contents. J. A. T.

Intracellular Respiration in Paramecium. — E. J. Lund (Amer^
Journ. Physiol., 1918, 45, 351-73) has studied in Paramecium candatum
the relation of oxygen concentration and the rate of intracellular oxida-
tion. He finds that the oxidations stop when the cell is killed by too
high oxygen-concentration, but below the limit of fifty-five times the
minimal concentration the rate of intracellular oxidation is independent
of the concentration. The rate is entirely independent of the toxic
action of potassium cyanide, but intracellular oxidations stop when the
animal undergoes cytolysis in cyanide solutions. J. A. T.

Experimental Induction of Endomixis in Paramecium aurelia. —
R. T. Young {Journ. Exper. ZooL, 1017, 24, 35-53, 3 pis. referred to^
not in number) finds that endomixis can be induced experimentally,
especially by the use of metabolic end-products (e.g. waste products of
Infusorians), and by increasing the rate of metabolism of the animals
themselves. It is not a lethal process, but may be associated with a
temporary depression. It is more or less cyclical in character, and
probably has a rejuvenating function. It is not, however, a necessary
accompaniment of temporary depressions, and may not be followed by
rejuvenation. Other factors are concerned in determining the division-
rate. Its rate to parthenogenesis in Metazoa is not clear. J. A. T.

Reversibility of Morphogenetic Processes in Bursaria. — E. J.
Lund {Journ. Exper. ZooL, 1917, 24, 1-33, 38 figs.) finds that
de-differentiation of the gullet of this Ciliate always occurs before
division, encystment, and regeneration of lost parts of the cell, and also
spontaneously. But the primordium of the gullet remains, and from
it a new gullet is formed by differentiation. The processes are re-
versible. They concern changes in relatively unstable, secondary struc-
tures in the cell, and do not visibly affect the more stable nuclear
mechanism. The author finds evidence for the existence of a specific
type of physical-chemical mechanism for de-differentiation similar in its
action to the mechanism of autolysis. J. A. T.

Trypanosomes in Monkeys.^M. Leger and E. Parry {C.R. Soc,
Biol. Paris, 1918, 81, 180-3) report the occurrence of some new non-
pathogenic Trypanosomes in South American monkeys — a very distinct
form {Trypanosoina lesourdi sp. n.) in Ateles pentadadylus; and another
{T. devei sp. n.) in Midas midas, with the general features of non-
pathogenic forms from small mammals. J. A. T.

New Microsporidian in Cabbage White Caterpillars. — A. Paillot
{C. R. Soc. Biol., 1918,81, 187-9,26 figs.) describes Perezia leyerisTp.n.,
from caterpillars of Pieris brassicse, especially in adipose tissue and
certain giant cells of the blood. An account is given of the schizogony,
the sporogony, the maturation of the spores, and the emergence of a
binucleate unit from the spore. The new species is near P. mesniliy
previously described. J. A. T.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICKOSCOPY, ETC. 315

New Cephaline Gregarine. — D. Keilin {Parasitology, 1918, 10,
406-410, 1 pL, 1 tig.) describes Leidijana tinei sp. n., from tlie mid-gut
of the larvEe of the moth Emlrosis fenestrella found in the nests of the
house-martin. An account is given of the small trophozoites, the
full-grown sporonts, the cyst formation, and the spores. The main
characters of the genus are the solitary sporont, the simple subspherical
epimerite, the dehiscence by sporoducts, and the barrel-shaped spores.
The difference between the new species and the two already known are
detailed. This seems to be the first record of a Gregarine as a parasite
in Lepidoptera. J. A. T.

Foraminiferal and Nullipore Structures in some Tertiary Lime-
stones from New Guinea. — R. Bullen Newton {Geol. Mag., 1918,
Decade 6, 5, No. 5, 203-12, pis. viii-ix). The rolled Limestone pebbles
collected in the upper reaches of the Fly River, New Guinea, prove, on
examination by sectioning, to represent two distinct horizons. Apart
from the confirmation afforded by the corals, the presence of Alveolina
and the closely related Lacazina unchmanni Schlumberger, in association
with characteristic Miliolines, are sufficient to identify some of the Lime-
stones with the Lutetian or Middle Eocene, contemporary with our
Bracklesham beds. The striking similarity between sections of the
New Guinea pebbles and the well-known " Mixen " rock of Selsey, is
referred to by the author and confirmed by his photos. It will be of
great interest if subsequent discoveries of more suitable material result
in the discovery of Gydoloculina and other forms typical of the Selsey
beds.

The identification of the remaining pebbles as Miocene is mainly
dependent on the occurrence of the calcareous alga LitJiothamniiim
ramosiasimimim (Reuss), typical of that formation, and especially of its
later horizons. In the absence of any specimens of Lepidocyclina, the
Foraminifera recorded are not very convincing, but the author considers
that the pebbles may probably be referred to the Aquitanian or older
Miocene. E. Heron-Allen & A. Earland.

Y 2

136 SUMMARY OF CUERENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

BOTANY.

GENERAL,

Including the Anatomy and Physiology of Seed Plants.

Cytology,
Including- Cell-contents.

Nature and Significance of the Chondriome. — A. GtUilliermond
{Compt. Rend., 1918, 166, 649-651). A short note upon the chon-
driome, which the author regards as a c onstituent element of all cells,
whether of animal or vegetable origin. The chondriome is represented
by mitochondrias, which exist as minute bodies in the homogeneous
cytoplasm, distinguishable from the latter by their greater refractive
power. They are granular or in the form of short rods or filaments,
sometimes elongated and of undulate outline, more rarely branched.
They are the most fragile parts of the cell and are especially sensitive to
osmotic influences. In a hypotonic medium the granular mitochondrias
swell and form large, aqueous vesicles, while the chondriocontes break up
into granules and subsequently form similar vesicles, but it is easy
to prove that these formations do not represent the normal evolution of
the mitochondrias.

Researches as to the nature of both animal and plant mitochondrias
show that they are living entities, capable of reproduction by division ;
during mitosis the chondriome divides into two portions, one of which
passes to each pole. The mitochondrias give rise to the greater
part of the secretory products of the cell, and are entirely similar in
character to the well-known plastids.

In general the chondriome of the plant-cell is represented in the egg
by granular mitochondrias ; in the embryonic cells a portion of these
elements is transformed into chondriocontes, which subsequently
develop into plastids ; others retain the granular form and assume other
functions, or simply serve for the perpetuation of the chondriome.

S. G.

Constancy of Cell-Shape. — L. A. Tenopyr {Bull. Torr. Bot. Club,
1918, 45, .51-76, 1 fig.). The author has studied the relative length
and breadth of leaves and their constituent cells in three types of plants
— viz. (1) species with broad basal leaves, narrow stem-leaves and tran-
sitional leaves, represented by Camimnula rotundifolia and Lobelia
Erinus; (2) broad and narrow-leaved species belonging to the same
genus, such as Plantago major and P. lanceolata ; (3) varieties of the
same species having entire leaves as compared with others having lobed
leaves, such as ai-e found in Cichorkmi Intyhus.

The cells of the plants examined show considerable variability in
size in the same tissue, but the average cell-size for any one tissue of a
species or variety is a fairly constant and hereditary character. The
cell-size of closely related species may be the same, but may differ con-

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 317

siderably in closely related varieties of the same species. Cell-size
depends to some estent on the stage of development of the plant when
the organ was formed, the cells of organs of late development being
smaller than those in organs of early development. Difference in size
of any given organ is due to a difference in number of cells, not to cell-
size.

The number of cells in each type of leaf is determined by
heredity, and the size of the organ is due to factors of periodicity
in growth, which determine, the rate and duration of cell-division.

The cells of the lower epidermis of leaves have a characteristic length
and breadth, but in other regions their shape is modified by other factors
— e.g. presence of veins, stomata, etc. Differences in shapes of leaves
of the same plant are independent of the shape of the cells. The shape
of the leaf is due to factors of periodicity limiting the number and
direction of the cell-divisions in each type of leaf. S. G.

Structure and Development.
Vegetative.

The Use of Microscopical Characters in the Systematic Study
of the Higher Plants {Jo2fni. Q.M.G., April 1918, ser. 2, 13,
353-60). — In the Presidential Address to the Quekett Microscopical
Club for 1918, Dr. Rkndle points out the great use that may be made
of minute characters in the detection of species, instancing the valuable
work done on the microscopical structure of timber, especially in those
cases where only fragmentary material is available. Also that the
recognition of affinities among fossil plants is almost wholly based upon
microscopic characters. Plant hairs, pollen grains, and secretory glands
are also referred to. A. W. S.

Reproductive.

Effect of Foreign Pollination on Cycas Rumphil. — M. J. Le Goc
{Ann. Roij. Bot. Gard. Peradeniya, 1917, 6, 187-194). The author
describes his preliminary observations carried out in Ceylon. He finds
that while female plants of Cycas Rumphii are very abundant in Ceylon,
no male plant has been observed of late years. The dispersal of this
species of Cycas in Ceylon takes place by means of offshoots, and no
true seeds can be obtained. In the districts where no male plant of any
Cycad can be found, the ovules of C. Rumphii thrive only for a short
time, shrivel, decay, and fall off. But in localities where male cones
even of different genera occur, the ovules of C. Rumphii attain the size
of a fully mature seed ; but they contain no embryo, and consequently
do not germinate. On investigation it is found that foreign pollen
grains belonging to Encephalartos or Macrozamia have not only pollinated
C. Rumphii, but have produced male gametophytes. The full growth of
the ovules of C. Rnmphii must be attributed to the stimulus exercised
by these foreign male gametophytes. No true fertilization, however,
has been observed, or is likely to have taken place. Some minor points,
such as the effect of spores of fungi received inside the pollen chamber,
have also been discassed. A. B. R.

318 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Graft-hybrids.— F. La Marca {Compf. Rend., 1918, 166, 647-6i9).
A note upon a new graft-hybrid ; the graft is the GannelUna variety of
the olive-tree, while the stock belongs to the Gaiazzana variety. The
writer found three such grafted trees which produced black fruits similar
to those belonging to the stock, and white fruits like those of the graft.
Further investigation showed that the kernels of the fruits, both in form
and marking, were intermediate between the graft and the hybrid. The
peduncles and leaves were also intermediate in character. Analysis of
small quantities of oil taken from the hybrid showed that in acidity,
and in its behaviour under the influence of light and air, this oil differs
from that extracted both from the stock and the graft. The observa-
tions extended over four years, and may be regarded as confirming the
opinion of those writers who support the theory of asexual hybridization.

S. G.

CRYPTOGAMS.

Pteridophyta.
(By A. Gepp, M.A..,F.L.S.)

Study of Some New Cases of Apog^amy in Ferns.— W. N. Steil
{Bull. Torrey Bot. Club, 1918, 45, 98-108, 2 pis.). During the past
six years the author has discovered apogamy in many ferns, especially in
PeUsea, Pteris, Aspidium. In a summary of his results he states that
the material was grown under cultural conditions favourable for the
development of sex-organs and embryos in non-apogamous species. The
apogamous prothallia became heart-shaped before producing the embryo,
and bore antheridia, but rarely archegonia. The embryo usually appears
as a compact region of cells posterior to the apical notch and on the
ventral side of the prothallium ; and in several species tracheids are
visible in the pale portion of the gametophyte. First appears the apical
cell of the leaf, then that of the root, and later that of the stem ; but so
far no foot has been observed in an apogamous embryo. Either root or
leaf or both may develop on the dorsal side of the prothallium, but as a
rule arise on the ventral side. As a rule the embryo is produced behind
the apical notch, but may be formed on a cylindrical or conical
"process," and occasionally on the lobes of the prothallium. Several
apogamous embryos may be formed on a single prothallium. Secondary
prothallia are readily produced (just as in non-apogamous species), and
these form embryos like those of the ordinary prothallia. The " light "
area present on some apogamous prothallia is rendered more conspicuous
in cultures maintained in weak light ; also the conical or cylindrical
" process " increases considerably in length when the prothallia are
grown under these conditions ; and, further, the embryo often arises
directly from the apical region of the prothallium in weak light. In
the case of Osmunda regalis, prothallia cultivated in strong light and
prevented from fertilization for a year and a half failed to produce
apogamous embryos. A. G.

Comparative List of Fern Pinna-traces, with some Notes on
the Leaf-trace in the Ferns. — E. C. Davie {Annals of Botany, 1918,
32, 233-245, figs.). The author gives a complete tabular list of all the

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 319

ferns which he has examined, showing; whether they have the marginal
•or the extra-marginal type of pinna-supply. In the extra-marfjinal type
the portion of the pinna-trace which comes from the adaxial side of the
leaf-trace is nipped off from the back of a " hook," technically from the
abaxial face of the curved leaf-trace ; tlie extreme tip of the adaxial
portion of the leaf -trace is continued upward as part of the leaf -trace.
In the marginal type, the adaxial portion of the leaf-trace (nearest
to the pinna) is itself given off to supply the piima. In both types
(usually in connexion with large pinnte) a portion of the pinna-trace may
be derived from the abaxial side of the leaf -trace. In the tabular
■scheme of ferns appended to the paper, it will be found that 94
■species (46 genera) possess the extra-marginal type, and 126 species (.51
•genera) possess the marginal type. In 7 genera only do both types of
pinna-supply occur among the species. In studying the ferns for this
'Criterion it is necessary to examine the lower pinnae of the older leaves.

A. G.
Bryophyta.

(By A. Gepp.)

Structure of the Cytoplasm in the Cells of Alicularia scalaris.
— M. F. RiVETT {Annals of Botany, 11)18, 32, 208-214, pi. and figs.).
The author describes the structure of the cytoplasm of this hepatic with
special reference to the oil-bodies, their meaning and origin. The oil is
a catabolic waste-product and is secreted into vacuoles. Further, as to
the cytoplasmic structure of the leaf -cells, the author finds that (1) the
actively dividing cells of the growing point and young leaf-bases, where
the protoplasm fills the whole cell, show achondriome structure ; (2) the
maturing cells have a vacuolar protoplasm forming a spongy network ;
(3) in the fully-grown cells the lining layer is so reduced that it serves
merely as a covering to its own products. A. G.

Le Reboulia Raddi. — Ch. et R. Douin {Rev. Gener. de Botanique,
1918, 30, 129-145, .5 figs ). The authors have carefully studied and
cultivated the hepatic genus Reboulia, which has generally been supposed
to comprise a single polymorphic and cosmopolitan species, and have
come to the conclusion that three distinct species occur in France —
R. hemispherica (L.) Raddi, R. occidentalis, R. Charrieri, the two latter
"being new to science. They discuss in detail the essential characters of
the species — the inflorescence, the capitulum (with a critical examination
of the terms " lobes " and " rays "), the development of the thallus, the
spores. In R. hemispherica the androecia are medial on the thallus ; in
:the other two species the androecia become divided and laterally
displaced. The spores of R. Charrieri are smaller than those of the
■other two species, and are much less conspicuously winged or crested ;
also the plant is reduced in all its organs, and the lobes of the capitulum
are but 2-4 (as against 4-8 in the other two species). A. G.

Ptilidium pulcherrimum.— J. Ross {Essex Naturalist, 1918, 18,
187-9). The author records the occurrence of the hepatic Ptilidium
pulcherrimum in Epping Forest, and describes the conditions under
fwhich it is found, and tbe mosses, etc., with which it is associated.

A. G.

320 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

New Lejeunea from Bermuda and the West Indies. — Alexander
W. Evans {Bull. Torrey Bot. Club, 1917, 44, 525-28, 1 pL). The
author describes Lejeunea minuHloha, a new hepatic species which is
not uncommon in the West Indies. He discusses briefly its morphology
and structure. A. 6.

Archegonium of Sphagnum squarrosum. — E. Melin {SvensTc Bot^
TidsJcr., 1910, 10, 289-311, G figs. See also Bot. Centmlbl., 1917,
135, 331-332). The author writes on the archegonia of Sphagnum
squarrosum, and states that archegonia are not at all uncommon in
Sphagnum, especially in the dioecious species, though sporogonia are
rather rare. In S. squarrosum archegonia were very common in the
years 1911-1913. The material examined came from Nocby, near
Upsala in Sweden. The number of archegonia in a fertile shoot varies
according to the species, the coarser species having generally more and
the delicate ones less. Growth begins in August and takes place by
means of a two-edged apical cell, which cuts off segments on each side,
thereby forming the massive foot of the archegonium. So soon as
about seven segments have been formed, division takes place in these
in the manner characteristic of all moss archegonia, which is here
described in detail. As regards development the Sphagnum archegonium
holds a position between that of mosses and liverworts. The number of
canal-cells varies, according to the species, from ten to twenty. Specially
interesting is the behaviour of the central cell, which divides into such
similar cells that the author designates them both egg-cells, as well as
their daughter-cells when they divide. Immediately before fertilization
one of the egg-cells degenerates (not always the same one), which points
to the equal physiological value of both cells. The further process of
fertihzation could not be followed. The position of the ventral canal-
cell as a reduced egg-cell is established. E. S. Gr.

Collection, Taxonomy, and Ecology of the Sphagna. — J. A.
Wheldon {Lancashire and Cheshire NaturaUst, 1917, 10, 233-6,
253-60 ; 1918, 10, 302-6, 319-24). The author gives hints as to the
collection and preservation of specimens, discusses the diverse systems-
of classification of the species and the distinguishing characters adopted
by various authors, and the variability of the plants in response to
environmental conditions. The rest of the paper is devoted to the
ecology of Sphagnum under the headings— moisture, climate, altitude,
light, soil, competition and dissemination. A. G.

Moss Exchange Club. — W. Ingham (22,rd Annual Report, YorJcy
1918, 201-81). A list of the mosses and hepatics gathered by and
distributed among the members of the club, with critical notes by the
referees upon many of the specimens. In an appendix are given a
number of corrections and additions to the " Synopsis of the European
Sphagna " recently issued by the Club. A. G.

Rhacomitrium in North America. — T. C. Frye {Brgoloqist, 1917,
20,91-98; 1918, 21, 1-lG). An account of the Rhacomitriums of
Western North America, with clear descriptions of the fourteen species.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICEOSCOPY, ETC. 321

tignres of their habit and structure, and analytical keys. The author
reduces the superfluous species to synonymy, and clears away the confusion
previously existing. A. G.

Ptychomitrium subcrispatum Ther. & P. de la V. — R. Potier de
LA Yarde {Rev. Gener. de Botanique, 1918, 30, 65-69, 1 pi.)- A
description of Ptychomitrium subcrispatum, a new species of moss,
gathered in Natal by H. A. Wager, with a careful comparison of its
structural characters with those of P. crispatum (Hook, and Grev.)
Schimp., tabulated in parallel columns; and a discussion of its syste-
matic position in the genus. A. G.

Schistosteg'a osmundacea. — G. T. Harris {Journ. Quelcett Microsc.
CM), 1918, 13, 361-7-1, 2 pis. and figs.) An account of the luminous
moss, Schistostega osmundacea, giving its history, distribution, peculiar
habitat (in granite crevices facing north), degree of luminosity, repro-
duction by means of deciduous capsules and by abundant gemmaj^
(previously unrecorded), structure of the protonema with its light-cells-
and flask-cells. The flask-cells are the stalk-cells which have borne
gemmae. These and the light-cells are described in some detail, as also
are the chloroplasts and their grouping into rosettes for the maximum
photosynthetic effect. An explanation is given of the peculiar luminous
glow of the protonema by means of the refractive properties of the
obconical light-cells. A. G.

Splachnacese. — E. Timm {Verh. naturw. Ver. Hamburg, 1916, 23,.
pp. Ixxxvi-lxxxviii. See also JBot. Centralbl, 1917, 135, 332). The
author writes on Splachnacea3. The spores are sticky and are dis-
tributed by insects — manure-flies in the case of Splachnum, blow-flies
in Tetraplodon. S. ampullaceum was first recordecl from Winterhude»
near Hamburg, in 1824, and since then has been often found on cow-
dung. Tetraplodon mnioides has been found twice in this century near
Hamburg, and was seen to be visited by blow-flies. E. S. G.

Bryophyta of the Vega Expedition. — H. W. Arnell {Arkiv. f.
Botanik, 1917, 15, 1 111. See also Bot. Centralbl., 1917, 135, 232-34).
A report on the mosses and hepatics collected by F. R. Kjellman on the
north and east coasts of Asia and on Alaska during the Swedish Expedi-
tion of 1878-80. In the same report are included the collections made
at Waigatch, Xova Zembla, and the Samoyed Peninsula during the
earlier Swedish Expedition in 1875 to the mouth of the Yenesei river.
The author divides the area into three geographical regions, and treats
of the Bryophyta found in each : — (1) Nova Zembla ; (2) the Siberian
Ice-sea coast near Behring Strait, and north of the Arctic Circle ; (3)
the coasts of Behring Sea, Siberia on the one hand and Alaska on the
other. Five species and six varieties are new to science ; thirteen new
records for Siberia are noted, and twelve for Nova Zembla which do not
occur in Siberia. Much information is given in the critical notes.

E. S. G.

322 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

On Schistostega osmundacea Mohr. {Journ. Q.M.C., April 1918,
■ser. 2, 13, 361-74, pis. 23-4).— This moss appears to be widely dis-
tribnted in the British Isles, and from his observations, which were
made on Dartmoor, G. T. Harris is led to infer that the moss prefers
a habitat with a northerly aspect, and apparently thrives best in granitic
areas. The luminous appearance of the moss is due, as was pointed
■out by Noll in 1887, to certain protonemal cells, which are so constructed
that light rays falling upon them are refracted through the transparent
sap and concentrated upon the chloroplasts which are grouped at the
l»ase of the cell. The light rays are internally reflected from the basal
wall of the cell and again emitted. The fruit appears to be somewhat
rare, though when fertile the capsules are often produced in abundance.
The distribution of the plant is aided by the deciduous spore-capsule and
by an abundance of geminre formed by the protonema, especially when
ibarren conditions of the plant prevail. A. W. S.

Thallophyta.

Algae.

(By Mrs. Ethel S. Gepp.)

Rhizopodial Development of the Flagellatse. I. Some Rhizo-
podial Chrysomonads with Chromatophores. — A. Pascher {Archiv.
Frotistenk, 1916, 36, 81-117, 2 pis., 14 figs. See also Bot. CentralU.,
1917, 135, 166). The author regards almost all series of coloured
riagellatse as falling into his scheme of two groups :— 1. Rhizopod
organization, characterized by animal nutrition. 2. Cellular organiza-
tion (Algfe_), characterized by holophytic nutrition. A development of
entirely rhizopodial organizations out of a series of holophytic Flagellatas
is taking or has taken place. The rhizopodial form is no characteristic
of primitive organization. Three new genera and species of rhizopodial
Chrysomonads, belonging to the Rhizochrysidinefe — namely, RMzaster
crinoides, Chrysocrinus hydra, ChrysotUaTcion vorax — are described and
figured. E. S. G.

Rhizopodial Development of the Plagellatse. II. Dinamoeba
varians— a Novelty with Dinoflagella-like Swarmers.— A. Pascher
{Archiv. Frotistenk., 1916, 36, 118-36, 1 p]., 4 figs. See also Bot.
CentralU., 1917, 135, 167). A description of the new form and a
comparison of its developmental cycle with that of Cystodinium.
The Dinoflagellatfe are divided into : 1. Rhizodiniante (including
Dinamicha) with rhizopodial organization and animal nutrition. 2.
Dinophycete, with cellular organization and holophytic mode of life, and
comprising Dinocapsales, Dinococcales, Dinotrichales. E. S. G.

Rhizopodial Development of the Flagellatae. III. Rhizopodial
Nets as Capturing-apparatus in a Plasmodia! Chrysomonad.— A.
Pascher {Archiv. Protistenlc, 1916, 38, 15-30, 2 pis., 6 figs. See
also Bot. Centralhl., 1917, 135, 167). Chnjsarachnion insidians, a new
genus and species, belongs to the Rhizochrysidinae, being a permanently
rhizopodial Chrysomonad. Whilst Chrysidiastrum Lautb. has chain-
like filar Plasmodia, Chrysarachnion has flattish nets. In both of them

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICKOSCOPY, ETC. 323

the rhizopodia are developed in the equatorial plane of the cell, which
itself is flattened-ellipsoidal to flat in form. But this circumstance is
certainly secondary, and seems to be an arrangement often realized, for
in consequence the cells can be grouped in one plane. The animal food
is caught in the net, but is also digested, constituting a high order of
apparatus. Ghrysarachnion is oligotlierm, and apparently is confined to
cold mountain-tarns. E. S. Gr.

Rhizopodial Development of the Flagellatse. IV. Fusion-plas-
modia in Flagellatae, and their Significance in the Descent of
Rhizopods from Flagellatae. — A. Pascher (Archiv. Protistenk., 1916,
38, 31-64, 8 pis., 20 figs. See also Bot. Gentralbl, 1917, 135, 167-8).
Myxochrysis seldom develops swarmers ; it can also produce descendants
which have so far lost the characters of FlagellatEe — namely, chromato-
phores, characteristic cysts, special assimilation-products — as to be no
longer recognisable and to stand isolated. Rhizopodial formation is a
secondary acquisition, and the Rhizopods are derived forms, adapted to
an animal nutrition. E. S. G.

Microplankton of Plymouth Sound. — Marie V. Lebour (Journ.
Ifariiie Biolog. Assoc. Plymouth, 1917, 11, 133-182, 2 tables and figs.).
Here are the results of a year's constant study of the microplankton of
Plymouth Sound from the region beyond the breakwater. Both the
flora and fauna were studied from samples collected every fortnight.
Besides the usual tow-nettings, water samples were taken, centrifuged
and examined ; and thus several minute organisms, which escape through
the meshes of the finest silk nets, were added to the records. A syste-
matic list of the organisms is given, and includes seventy-four diatoms.
This is followed by a survey of the plankton in each month, by the
weather records,' and by two tables showing (1) the average number
and relative abundance of each species in each week ; (2) the average
number of Diatomacese and Peridiniales in 1 c.cm. for each month.

A. G.

Peridiniales of Plymouth Sound. — Marie V. Lebour {Journ.
Marine Biolog. Assoc. Plymouth, 1917, 11, 183-200, 14 figs.). A list
including all the Peridiniales identified in the plankton captured
throughout a year from September 1915 to September 1916. New and
rare species of Gymnodiniacese are described and figured. In all sixty
species are recorded ; five of Gymnodinium, two of Spirodinium, and
one of Gochhdinium are new ; and twenty-eight are new records for the
Plymouth area. A. G.

Nuclear Division in Euglena viridis. — B. Tschenzoff {Archiv.
Protistenk., 1916, 36, 137-173, 2 plates and figs. See also Bot.
Central hi., 1917, 135, 148). In Euglena viridis, the splitting of the
chromosomes takes place in the anaphase or telophase of the previous
division. The split chromosomes preserve their individuality through-
out the resting nucleus up to the metaphase, when they arrange them-
selves in pairs and then move off separately. Nuclear division in
Evglena follows none of the twelve types of the primitive mitoses for
protozoa-nuclei given by Alexeiefl^. E. S. G.

324 SUMMAEY OF CUKRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Nuclear Division in Chlorogonium elongatum. — M. Hartmann
{Sitz.-her. Ges. naturf. Freunde Berlin, 1916, 9, 347-51, 20 figs. See*
also Bot. Centralhl., 1917, 135, 15-1). The nuclear division of
Chlorogonium elongatum is as follows : — The organism is slender, spindle-
shaped, and has a green chromatophore, with one pyrenoid before and
behind the nucleus. At the front end arise two cilia of equal length.
The nuclei are typical centronuclei with intranuclear mitosis. The
generative nuclear material in the resting nucleus is permanently situated
in the external portion ; only in the telophase may it be temporarily
united with the inner bodies. The locomotor-material is not as a rule
to be traced in the resting nucleus, though Dangeard holds that the
centriol is here also closely adjacent to the nuclear membrane, as is
found in. other protozoa and algfB. The course of division reveals the
presence of both nuclear components. E. S. G-.

Fresh-water Algse of the Austrian Coast Districts. — B. Schussnig
{Oesterr. hot. Zeitschr., 101.5, 65, 248-52, fig. See also Bot. CentralbL,
1917, 135, 246). Plectonema radioswn (Sch.) wa& found thickly
covered with Ghamsesiphon incrustans Grun. at Gradisca. The forms of
Stigeodonium are so numerous as barely to merit names. S. hngipilum
Kiitz. shows constantly the following mode of growth : The young
germinating plants grow in spring on the filaments of a Gladophora,
which is already growing luxuriantly. In July that dies down, and the
Stigeodonium plantlets cover the stones, which had served as substratum
for the Gladophora, with a light-green velvety growth. A new species
of Ulothrix was found. E. S. G.

Marine Diatoms from the Coasts of Iceland.— E. Oestrup {The
Botany of Iceland, edited hy L. K. Rosenvinge and E. Warming, Gopen-
hagen, 1916, 845-94, 1 pi.) The examination of 438 samples of material
yielded a list of 209 species and varieties, arranged systematically in 42
genera. Seven new species and four varieties are described and figured.
In an alphabetical table the distribution of each species is displayed in
parallel columns — {a) throughout the world ; (J)) in Greenland and the
Arctic Ocean ; (c) on the coast of Iceland. Further tables show the
frequency of occurrence ; also the genera and species that were found to
be associated with several of the larger algae — Ehodophycese, Phaeo-
phycefe, and Chlorophyceas. A. G.

The Quality of " Asakusanori." — Y. Okuda and S. Nakayama
(Journ. Goll. Agric. Imp. Univ. ToTcyo, 1916, 5, 339-340). The ancient
Japanese food "Asakusanori" or " Hoshinori " is prepared from the
alga Porphyra tenera Kjellm. by drying, and is widely consumed. It
resembles black paper. The authors give a chemical analysis of it, and
find that the superior samples contain more nitrogen, mostly in an
assimilable form. A. G.

Relation between the Chemical Constituents of " Asakusanori "
and its Quality. — H. Matsui {Journ. Goll. Agric. Imp. Unir. Tokyo,
1916, 5, 391-393). The author discusses the chemical analysis of
" Asakusanori " prepared from Porphyra laciniata, and states that the

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 325

quality of this food depends upon the conditions of its place of growth
and upon the albuminous constituents. Superior samples come from
waters that are rich in matters nutritious to algas — for instance, where
fields border the main current of a river. Such samples contain more
nitrogen (of various forms), carbohydrate and fat, and less fibre, and
command a higher price in the market. A. Gr.

Iodine in Marine Algae. — Y. Okuda and P. Eto (Journ. Coll.
Agric. Imp. Univ. Tokyo, 1916, 5, 341-353. See also Bot. Centralbl.,
1917, 135, 251-252). An investigation of the form in which iodine
occurs ill certain species of EcMonia, Turbinaria, Sargassum. In living
alga? most of the iodine is in organic combination (not a protein) which
is soluble in water, strong alcohol, dilute alkali and acid solutions.
But in " Dashikombu " (a Laminaria product) most of the iodine is
inorganic. In Ecklonia hicyclis the organic iodine is gradually disinte-
grated by micro-organisms. Dilute solutions of NaCl, CaCl, and HCl
have a strong effect on the decomposition of the organic iodine. Old
algffi contain more iodine than die young. Algte of the open sea
contain more than those of the inland sea. From dead algse the iodine
readily diffuses in salt or fresh water ; hence drifted alg^e are not a
profitable source of iodine. A. Gr.

Marine Algae of Cuba. — Marshall A. Howe {Smithsonian 3fisceU.
Collections, Washington, 1918, 68, No. 11, 13 pp., fig.). An account of
the marine algse collected by J. B. Henderson and P. Bartsch during
the cruise of the " Tomas Barrera " on the west coast of Cuba in
1914, comprising sixty-five species, one of which is new {Phormidium
Hendersonii), and one (Sarcomenia filamentosa) had been but once
collected (in Florida). The only previous lists of Cuban marine algse
were one by Montague in Ramon de la Sagra's " Histoire . . . de Tile
de Cuba," 1842, with fifty-two species ; and one by Farlow in Amer.
Naturalist, 1871, 5, 201-9, with forty-six species. The present list adds
thirty-seven species and a variety to the flora. A. G-.

Fungi.
(By A. LoREAiN Smith, F.L.S.)

North American Peronosporales. — G. W. Wilson (Jlfyco%/«, 1918,
10, 168-9). An account of three species of Peronosporales, one of
them, Rysotheca {Flasmopora) Acalyphae, being new to science.

A. L. S.

Development of Phytophthora. — J. Eriksson {Rev. Gen6r. de Bot.,
1917, 20, 257 et seq.) In a series of papers J. Eriksson has discussed
the problem of the overwintering and recurrence of potato disease. He
gives an account of all the research undertaken and the theories held.
He himself inclines to regard the " sclerotiets " of Wilson as of im-
portance, and with these proposes his theory of my(;oplasm. The
discussion is still unfinished. A. L. S.

Parasites on' Meliola. — F. L. Stevens {Bot. Gazette, 1918, 65
227-49, 2 pis., 5 figs.) has detected a very large number of these, and

326 SUMMAEY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

has published descriptions of them. The material all came from
Porto Rico. The parasitic fungi include one Ascomycete, a number of
Pyrenomycetes (more especially Hypocreaceae), some Sphteropsidae, and
a varied series of Hyphomycetes. Two new genera are described ;
Isthmospora, a genus of Dematiacefe, with two species ; and Grallomyces,
with a peculiar dark brown mycelium. No spores or conidiophores of
the latter were seen, and it is the only fungus recorded in the paper that
is not a parasite ; it is associated with Meliola, but grows on any leaf in
suitable conditions. A. L. S.

South African Perisporiales. — Ethel M. Doidge {Trans. Roy.
Soc. S. Africa, 1917, 5, 713-750, 10 pi.) gives a full and systematic
account of these fungi as contained in the South African Union Myco-
logical Herbarium at Pretoria. There are nine genera, most of them
with very few species. Meliola is represented by thirty-two species out
of forty-five for the group, and seventeen of the species described are
new to science. A host index is supplied, and the paper is well
illustrated. A. L. S.

Development of Cryptomyces Pteridis. — Karl Killian (Zeitschr.
Bot., l',)18, 10, 49-126, 31 figs.) presents his elaborate study of this
Bracken fungus. He describes the effects produced on the host-plants
and the physiological reasons for the rolling up of the leaves under the
influence of the parasite. He then gives an account of the fungus itself
from spore to spore. The attempt to induce germination of the ascus
spores on artificial media failed, but they were found in the very early
stages of attack on young Pteris plants ; it was observed that penetration
of the hosts by the hyphse occurred only through the stomata. During
the summer a conidial form (Sphgeropside^) is freely produced, towards
winter the ascus fruit is formed ; the formation and development of
this stage are fully described ; copulation between two cells of neigh-
bouring hyphse in the ascogonium was observed ; asrial hyph« projected
above the surface of the leaf resembling trichogynes, but they were
wholly vegetative. The further stages of nuclear fusion and ascus
formation are also described. Finally, the author discusses biological
and affinity questions. A. L. S.

Sexuality in Rhizina undulata.— H. M. Fitzpatrick {Bot. Gaz.,
1918, 65, 201-26, 2 pis.) publishes results of his cytological study
of this Ascomycete. Certain hyphte near the centre of the ascocarp
became transformed at a very early stage into archicarps. As many as
eight archicarps may arise. The hyphse of the archicarp are multi-
nucleate, as are the vegetative hyphse, but the nuclei of the former
increase greatly by division and the cells become opaque. The terminal
cell is small, and, at maturity, shows disorganized protoplasmic contents.
It has from analogy been termed a trichogyne, but it does not function
as such. As the archicarp matures a pore arises between the cells ; those
at the centre produce ascogenous hyphre and the contents of the various
cells press into them. The nuclei are paired ; finally crozier formation
takes place and fusion occurs in the young ascus. A. L. S.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY. ETC. 327

Sphseronema fimbriatum.— S. G. Lehman {Mycologia, 1918, 10^
155-63, 1 pi.) gives the development of this fungus as observed in
cultures. It produces two kinds of conidia, and their formation is
contrasted with the development of similar bodies in Tluelavia. Th&
peculiar conidia which originate within the hyphffi and emerge from the
open end are at first endoconidia, but those produced subsequently are
not endoconidia. A. L. S.

Uredineae. — G. Filippo Geavatt and G. B. Posey {Journ. Agric,
Besearch, 1918, 12, 459-62), in discussing the wide-spread distribution
of the white pine blister-rust, Cronartium rihicoJa, indicate the part
played by the larvae of the gypsy-moth in spreading the disease. They
feed on the Peridermmm stage, and their bodies become covered with
the necidiospores. It has been shown that a high wind may carry these
moths twenty miles ; they subsequently feed on the foliage of wild and
cultivated species of Rihes, and in some cases the only infected leaves of
Rihes are those showing insect injury.

J. C. Arthur {31ycologia, 1918, 10, 111-54) publishes an account
of the Uredinales of Costa Rica, mostly from the collection of E. W. D.
Holway. A description of the territory is given. The list comprises
1 88 species ; twenty-two of these are new to science. Species and host
indexes are provided.

G. Fragoso {Bol. Hist. Nat., 1918, 18, 94-6) publishes a list of
twenty-five species collected in Cataluna. Several are new to the Spanish
flora, others are new to Cataluna. The habitat and date of collection are
recorded.

E. C. Stakman and G. R. Hoerner {Phytopathology, 1918, 8, 141-9)
have published a paper dealing with the occurrence of Fuccinia graminis
tritici-compacti in the southern United States, in south-east Texas,
Lousiana, and Alabama. It was first detected on club-wheat and grasses
in the Pacific north-west districts. It has now been found in the
south on wheat. As a number of club-wheats and some soft wheats of
the Vidgare group are congenial hosts, their susceptibility, it is surmised^
may be due to softness. The geographical limits of this biologic form
are still imperfectly known.

J. S. BoYCE (Phytopathology, 1918, 8, 161-2) describes a new form
of hypertrophy on Incense Cedar caused by Gymnosporangium blasda-
Uanum. It is in the form of a spindle-shaped swelUng on the branches
and trunks. The mycelium within these swellings forms small brown
flecks ; it is purely vegetative, and is presumably very long-lived.

The full life-cycle of tropical Uredines has been worked out by
H. E. Thomas {Phytopathology, 1918, 8, 163-4). ^cidial spores of
^cidium tululosum on Solanum torvum successfully infected Faspalum
paniculatum, producing the teleutospores of Fuccinia substriata, while
yEcidium passifloricola produced Fuccinia Sclerise on Scleria pterota.

A. L. S.

Smuts of Cereals. — Leaflet No. 31 {Journ. Board Agric, 1918,
24, 1417-19) issued by the Food Production Office, deals with " Smut&
in Oats and Barley." In it are described the different kinds of smut,
the dissemination of the spores, and the most effective means for prevent-

328 SUMMARY OF CLTKRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

ing contamination of the new crops. Infection takes place while the
€ereals are in the seedling stage, but the disease is not evident until the
time of grain formation. Covered smuts of barley and loose smuts of
oats may be killed out by steeping the seed-grains in formalin or copper
sulphate, concerning which instructions are given. Loose smut of
barley is more difficult to deal with, as the fungus is embedded in the
•embryo, but this type can be countered by the hot-water treatment,
which is also explained. A. L. S.

Hymenomycetes,— E. T. Harper {Mycologia, 1918, 10, 53-7, 3 pis.)
has published a descriptive account of American species of the " Clavaria
fistulosa " group. They are composed of hollow upright clubs mainly
Tinbranched.

W. A. MuRRiLL {Mycologia, 1918, 10, 62-85) completes his survey
of Tropical North America Agaricaceae, taking account of eight different
genera. The plants were collected in the West Indian Islands, Mexico,
etc. A number of species are new to science.

Gertrude S. Burlingham gives diagnostic descriptions of four new
species of Russula collected in Massachusetts. One grew in a swamp,
the others under trees.

W. A. MuRRiLL {Mycologia, 1918, 10, 107-110, 1 pi.) publishes a
coloured plate and descriptions of a series of woody fungi, Polyporiis,
Trametes and Dsedalea. Most of the species described are common on
dead timber. A. L. S.

Study of Tricholoma. — L. Maire {Rev. Gener. Bot., 1917, 29,
S50-1) has issued a synthetic study of this genus. He gives an account
of the limits of the genus, its affinity with other genera, and the varia-
tions of form included therein. He has placed in Tricholoma a number
of species hitherto regarded as Colly biee. The notice of the work is
published by Leon Dufour. A. L. S.

Cultures of Wood-rotting Fungi on Artificial Media. — ^Y. H.
Long and R. M. Harsch {Journ. Agric. Research, 1918, 12, 33-82) had
two objects in view in undertaking this work : (1) a method by which
various wood-rotting fungi might Tdc identifiable by cultures, and (2) a
method by which sporophores might be induced to form, as these are
undeveloped very often in diseased timber. The paper published is
only a preliminary one. They found that the macroscopic characters of
value in determination by cultures were, among others, rapidity of
growth, colour of mycelium, texture of the aerial mycelium, colour effects
on the medium, and comparative rate of growth between aerial and sub-
merged mycelium ; the microscopic characters included septation,
branching, clamp connexion, size and colour of hyphaj, with spore
polymorphism. The data acquired are set forth in a series of tables.
External factors, such as light and culture medium, are discussed.

A. L. S.

Honey-dew Fungi.— F. W. Neger {Flora, 1817, 10, 67-139,
31 figs.) gives a study of the dark-coloured epiphytic fungi that live on
the honey-dew of various leaves— lime, oak, etc. Generally they are

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 329

classified under Famago vcigans or Capnodium salicinum, but Neger has
demonstrated by artificial cultures that quite a large number of fungi,
such as species of Dematmm, Cladosporium, Atichia, Gijroceras, etc., live
on the honey-dew. All of the honey-dew forms are distinguished by
the gelatinous nature of their cell-walls, which imbibe water readily and
thus provide protection against prolonged drought. The fungi are so
mixed up on the leaves, and have so many formations in common, that
they can only be disentangled and classified by pure cultures. A. L. S.

Mycological Notes. — Three separate parts of the above notes by
C. (t. Lloyd (Cincinnati, Ohio, 1917-18, 717-64, 74 figs.) have come to
hand. On the frontispiece of each there is a photograph of Frank H.
Ames, P. A. Saccardo, and Johannes Rich respectively, with a bio-
graphical note appended in reference to each of these distinguished
mycologist?. The author describes and criticizes a large and varied
number of the larger fungi which he has received from many parts of
the world. The illustrations as usual are copious and instructive.

A. L. 8.

New or Rare Fungi.— R. G. Fragoso {Bol. Hist. Nat., 1918, 18,
78-85) has published a paper on microfungi from Persia. They were
found on Phanerogams in the collection made by D. Fernando, which
had been determined by Carlos Pau. Most of them are parasites, and a
considerable number are new species. A. L. S.

Diseases of Plants. — Tyozaburo Tanaka {MycoJogia, 1918, 10,^
86-92) describes a number of new microfungi which have been found
to be injuring theii' host-plants. A Valsa on Paulownia is analagous to
chestnut disease in America, and threatens a loss of valuable timber.

Arthur S. Rhoales {PMjtopathology, 1918, 10, 86-92) continues
his account of some unusual hosts of wood-destroying fungi. Thus, he
records SchizophyUum commune on Finus virgmiana. On Ginglco bilola
he found Folyporus versicolor and F. Mrstitus. Several other hosts and
parasites are given. A. L. S.

Description and Treatment of Plant Diseases. — A. D. Cotton and
Others {Board of Agricidture and Fisheries Leaflets). New editions of
a numl)er of leaflets have been issued lately embodying new information
on the subjects treated, and especially new methods of control. They
are : — No. 39, The Control of Pests of Fruit-trees in Gardens and
small Orchards ; No. 77, Finger-and-Toe in Turnips ; No. 131, Apple
and Pear Scab ; No. 164, Potato-leaf Curl ; No. 193, Dry-rot of
Potatoes ; No. 204, Apple Mildew ; No. 262, Tomato-leaf Rust ;
No. 312, The "Blossom-wilt and Canker" Disease of Apple-trees.
The diseases treated therein are all due to parasitic fungi, and they have
been popularly described and well ilhistrated ; great attention is givtn
to the means employed to combat the pests. To each leaflet is appended
the statement that : " Copies of this leaflet may be obtained, free of charge
and post free, on application to tlie Secretanj, Board of Agriculture and
Fisheries, 3, St. James' -square, London, S.W.I. Letters of application so
addressed need not be stamped." A. L. S.

z

330 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

A Text-book of Mycology and Plant Pathology. By John W.
Harshberger. 779 pp., 271 illustrations. London : J. and A.
Churchill. 1918. Price 15s. net.

There is no branch of botanical study in which progress has been so
marked in recent years as in Mycology. Whether it be in the more exact
descriptions of the many forms with their complicated life-histories, in
the cytology of the various groups, or in the relations of fungi to other
organisms, knowledge has advanced and the records of successful
research have increased in every section of the science. There is, there-
fore, a constantly renewed demand for trustworthy text-books that will
collate the facts and present them in readable form, as has been done in
the present volume. In writing the text-book Dr. Harshberger has
drawn on his long experience as student and Professor of Mycology, and
has given us a work full of the most helpful guidance to a complicated
and difficult subject.

The book has been divided into four parts : — I. Mycology. II.
General Plant Pathology. III. Special Plant Pathology. IV. Labora-
tory Exercises. There are, in addition, a series of appendices dealing
with special aspects of some particular branch of the study. Under
" Mycology " the more purely scientific side is dealt with — the nature
of fungi and the arrangement of the various groups. With them the
author includes an account of Bacteria and of Slime-moulds. These
latter, the Mycetozoa or Myxomycetes, are frequently classified as
animals ; but earlier botanists unhesitatingly grouped them with fungi,
and it is mainly fungologists who now carry on the study of these
organisms. Their presence in a book on fungi is further justified as
with them are closely associated Plasmodiophora and Spongospora, both
virulent diseases of plants that find their way into most text-books as
fungus diseases ; Spongospora is, however, omitted from Harshberger's
volume. Bacteria figure so largely as causing disease in plants that no
book on the subject is complete that does not take account of their
depredations. In considering the more obvious or " true " fungi,
Harshberger gives much useful information on their histology, chemistry,
and general physiology ; finally, an outline of the classification is pro-
vided.

Part I. occupies almost a third of the whole volume ; the remain-
ing two-thirds are devoted to Plant Pathology. All the causes that
foster disease are considered, whether due to climate, soil, or parasite ;
attention is also given to abnormalities, and a welcome feature of the
book is the glossary of teratological terms. We would note in passing
the excessive number of new terms with which almost the whole
book bristles ; fortunately for the reader, an explanation is generally
forthcoming in the text. Special chapters on pathologic plant anatomy
describe the changes induced in the various plant tissues by the intrusion
of the parasite, resulting frequently in the formation of galls, witches'
brooms, etc.

Part III. deals more especially with specific diseases due to fungoid
attack. Lists of these are given under the different hosts, arranged in
alphabetical order. The diseases are those prevalent in the United
States, but many of them are common to this country, and any one

ZOOLOGY AND B0TA3SY, MICKOSCOPY, ETC. 331

might be introduced. An example of importation is afforded by the
recently-discovered onion smut, which has been known as a bad disease
in the States for fifty years, but has only now appeared in England.
It is somewhat disappointing to find only a few diseases fully described,
but no single volume could contain all that one wants to know.

The " Laboratory Exercises " should prove very helpful to student
and teacher alike. Good technique and the proper use of instruments
are of great value in research work, and gratitude is due to the writer
who thus places the results of his experience at the disposal of others.
In the appendices there is detailed information on aspects of plant
pathology that supplements the main body of the work. They indicate
the methods of treating special classes of fungi.

We cordially recommend Harshberger's text-book to mycological
students ; they will find much to interest and instruct, probably also
something with which they will disagree. The author is apt to dogmatize
on subjects such as cytology and symbiosis, which are still debated
points. A. L. S.

332 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES.

MICROSCOPY.

A. Instruments, Accessories, etc.*
(3) Illuminating- and other Apparatus.

Polarization and Color Effects exhibited by certain Diatoms.^
F. J. Keeley {Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, 1918, 69, 334-8).
The author discusses E. M. Nelson's paper reprinted (p. 340) in the
Society's Journal for June, 1917, in which Nelson suggests that "it may-
be that silex deposited by animals does not exhibit polariscope effects,
while that deposited by plants, such as diatoms, will do so." The author
considers that the existence of the innumerable surfaces, in diatoms and
other minute silicious organisms capable of reflecting light, amply
account for the polarizing effects, and that, when suitably illuminated,
all diatoms, radiolaria, sponge spicules, powdered glass, or even the
surface of a ground-glass plate, will show bright polarization, provided
they are mounted dry or in a medium of high refractive index, such as
realgar. When in balsam, or other media approximating to their own
index, the reflections are nearly or quite eliminated, and most such
objects become invisible. Nelson, however, calls attention to the
interesting fact that there are certain species of diatoms that show
almost equally brilliant polarizing effects when mounted in balsam,
and Keeley points out that in all these there is a secondary structure
which the medium has failed to penetrate, and has thus left a number of
reflecting surfaces sufficient for polarization. Among the diatoms which
show by far the brightest colours by transmitted light are certain species
of Actimocyctus, notably raJfsii, in which, so far as the author knew,
no secondary structure had hitherto been observed. His theory led him
to a special investigation, and a secondary stracture was readily found
to be present, and particularly visible in the central blank space and
wedge-shaped radial segments between the coarser cellular structure of
A. ralfsii. This secondary structure is exceedingly delicate, and will
afford an excellent test for the definition of wide aperture objectives,
though, after finding it with oil-immersion and after selecting a well-
marked valve, the author was able to see it distinctly with a well-corrected
water-immersion of about 1 • 00 N.A., and even with an exceptionally fine
dry objective of slightly less aperture.

The author has also found that interesting polarizing effects can
be obtained from the fine granules of a gold film on a glass surface.
Such films reflect various colours according to the size of the particles,
and transmit the complementary colour. The films may be obtained by
means of electrical discharges from the end of a gold wire, or by
deposition from solution of gold chloride in collodion. A. N. D.

* This subdivision contains (1) Stands ; (2) Eye-pieces and Objectives ; (3)
Illuminating and other Apparatus ; (4) Photomicrography ; (5) Microscopical
Optics and Manipulation ; (6) Miscellaneous.

333

PEOCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

AN ORDINARY MEETING

OF THE Society was Held at 20 Hanover Square, W., on
"Wednesday, June 19tr, 1918, Mr. J. E. Barnard, President,
IN the Chair.

The Minutes of the Meeting of May 15 were read, confirmed, and
signed by the President.

New Fellows. — The following were elected Ordinary Fellows of the
Society ;—

Major Robert Cattley, M.B., B.Sc, etc.,

Miss Annie Dixon,

Mr. Harry Godfrey Skepper,
and Lady Mary Elizabeth Bruce was elected an Honorary Fellow.

Mr. Scourfield reported that the Biological Section of the Society
bad paid a visit on the previous Saturday to the John Innes Horticultural
Institution at Merton, and had been shown round the gardens and
laboratories by Professor Bateson. Yery wonderful results were being
obtained there in reference to heredity, etc.

At the suggestion of the President the Meeting expressed its warm
appreciation of Professor Bateson's kindness.

Donation. — The President reported that Mrs. Hebb had kindly

offered the Microscope by Baker, with Polariscope and other accessories,

which had been in constant use by the late Dr. Hebb. He moved from

the Chair the following resolution, which was carried unanimously : —

" That a very hearty vote of thanks be accorded to Mrs. Hebb

for her kindness in presenting to the Society the Microscope

used by the late Dr. Hebb."

Mr. J. M. Offord exhibited slides prepared by Mr. Waddington
showing : Gnat larva emerging from ova ; lids of ova opening ; early
pupating and late pupating stages of gnat larva, showing growth of the
breathing-tubes at the head ; gnat pupa emerging from larval case ; gnat
imago emerging from pupal case ; Anopheles emerging from pupal case ;
Corethra larvae, with inverted pharyngeal tube ; species of Chiro-
nomous (?), very fine colours ; Machalomjx, a rare gnat.

A communication by Mr. Waddington was read, in which he said
that the Anopheles hifurcatus, which is a malaria-carrying mosquito, is

334 PEOCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

the only species of which the larva; survive the winter in England, and
any mosquitoes found up to about the end of May will most probably be
of this species. The larvjfi are fairly common in ditches near Bourne-
month, and are also to be met with in rain-water tubs which contain
much vegetable debris.

By May these winter larvas have all developed. Early in June the
very small larvae of both A. maculiptnnis and A. hifurcatus, hatched
from newly-deposited ova, are easily met with in their proper habitats.

The larvae of the two species may be distinguished by the arrange-
ments of the hairs on the clypeus, and the imagines by the wings of
A. maculipennis being spotted, while the wings of A. bifurcatus are
spotless.

As considerable interest has lately been taken in mosquitoes, he
would indicate the methods he had found most successful in obtaining
them. It is much easier to obtain the larva? and to carry them through
the various stages to maturity than to search for the mosquito itself.

The laivse of A. hifurcatus are to be met with in ditches which
contain a fair amount of water ; the larvfe of A. maculipennis in shallow
patches of water in the grass bordering the edges of country roads, and
more especially in shallow pools, in shady portions of forest ground,
notably in pools of the New Forest, in Hampshire.

The larvae should be taken with a fair quantity of the water in which
they are found, together with a small portion of the debris from the
bottom to afford food. They may be seen at the bottom of the bottle
containing them feeding voraciously.

The larva? should be kept in wide-mouthed glass jars, without any
covering, quite in the open, where they can get a little of the very early
morning sun and are fully exposed to external conditions of wind and
rain.

If the larvae are kept inside the house they rapidly die off. They
should be watched daily until they pupate, the pup^ as they form being
removed into another jar of the original water, by a glass tube. They
require no food. The jar containing them should be tied over with a
piece of coarse muslin to prevent the escape of the mosquitoes after they
have emerged. By this method of full exposure to external conditions
nearly every larva may be developed.

Sufficient importance has not been given to A. hifurcatus, which is
certainly the earliest to appear, and in some places, such as Bournemouth,
is quite as prevalent as the more frequently quoted A. maculipemiis.

The Society's thanks were accorded to Mr. Waddington.

Professor Benjamin Moore, F.R.S., read a paper on " Studies of
Activity of Light in Inorganic and Organic Systems." The author
gave a diseuse illustrated by experiments. The chief points dealt with
were : — 1. The natural modes of production of reduced organic com-
pounds, with uptake of energy. 2. The synthesis of formaldehyde from
carbon-dioxide and water by the action of light. 3. Condensation of
formaldehyde in light to form reducing substances, such as sugars.

4. Reduction of nitrates by sunlight, accompanied by energy absorption.

5. Growths of organisms in nitrate and nitrite-free media in presence

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 335

and absence of air, showing that nitrites in air are essential, and that
nitrogen fixation in soil is probably dne to nitrite fixation from the
atmosphere.

The President said that while the commnnication that Professor
Moore had made to them was not on the face of it precisely microscopical,
yet in all its bearings it touched the roots of all microscopical problems.
He had listened to all he had had to say with very great interest. It
had a bearing on so many vital processes. His own interest was in the
-direction of the action of light on micro-organisms. The hint that was
thrown ont as to the formation of formaldehyde being at the bottom of
the bacteriocidal action of light was very suggestive. It opened up a
very simple explanation of what was supposed to be a complex biological
problem.

Mr. Blood suggested that the patterns on diatoms might liave similar
results, forming diffraction gratings, and affecting the quality of the
light passing through.

The Meeting accorded a vote of thanks to Professor Moore for his
paper and accompanying experiments.

In acknowledging the vote of thanks. Professor Moore referred to
the germicidal action of light. Fungi growing in direct sunlight had
to cover themselves with pigments in order to protect themselves from
the light. Green leaves formed a light shade keeping the dangerous
■colour-rays off. The green in the leaf was simply keeping the wrong
sort of light off the mechanism underneath. The colour-shades letting
■different wave-lengths of lights through and the colours of flowers
might be associated with photo-synthetic phenomena in the petals of
flowers connected with the sexual processes going on underneath.

The paper will appear in the pages of the Journal.

Mr. E. Heron-Allen, F.L.S., F.G.S., F.Z.S., and Mr. A. Earland
gave a lantern demonstration showing photomicrographs, taken by
Mr. Pledge, of " Diatom Ooze from Deep Antarctic Waters," as dredged
;{it the " Challenger" Station 215, off the Great Ice Barrier, 63° 59' S.,
174° 13' AV., from a depth of ISOl fathoms.

The Society's thanks were accorded to Mr. Heron-Allen and Mr.
Earland.

Mr. D. J. Scourfi,eld, F.Z.S., read a communication by Dr. E. Penard,

•" A new type of Infusorian, Arachmdiopsis paradoxa."' The organism
described, egg-shaped and about ^^q in. in length, has neither cilia nor
setae, but its locomotive organs consist of two flexible tentacula which
beat the water with great rapidity. The forms described under the
genus Arachnidium by Saville Kent were possibly of the same type.
^ The communication appears on pp. "28B-289 of the Journal.
The Societv's thanks were accorded to Dr. Penard.

< The President announced that the next Meeting would be held on
October 16.

British Dyes

LIMITED

Manufacturers
of

ACID COLOURS

BASIC COLOURS

CHROME COLOURS

Direct Cotton COLOURS
OIL COLOURS

SPIRIT COLOURS

SULPHUR COLOURS
UNION COLOURS

VAT COLOURS

FOR

ALL PURPOSES

HUDDERSFIELD

JOURNAL

OF THE

ROYAL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY.

DECEMBER, 1918.

TRANSACTIONS OF THE SOCIETY.

XII. — An Improved Method of Apertometry.

By H. Hartkidge, M.A.. M.D., F.R.M.S., Fellow of ICing's

College, Cambridge.

{Read December 18, 1918.)
FouB Text-Figs.

Inaccukacy in apertometry is found to be due to the following
causes : —

1. The use of inaccurate focus or incorrect tube length.

2. The use of rays not strictly corresponding to the centre

of the field.

3. The incorrect setting of the indices.

4. The incorrect determination of the position of the indices

in relationship to the graduated scale ; and inaccuracy
in the graduated scale itself.

5. Employment of an incorrect angle between the plane of

the apertometer plate and the optical axis.

6. Chromatic aberration.

7. The employment of methods based on the measurement

of the Ramsden disc.

Section 1. — Error in Apertometry due to the Use of
Inaccurate Focus or Incorrect Tube Length.

The graduation of the scale of the Abbe apertometer is carried
out on the supposition that the segments illuminated by rays
proceeding to the periphery of the disc have their apices in

2 A

v538 Transactions of the Society.

correspondence with the optical centre of the glass disc. The
edges of the silvered strips lying under the cover slip should
therefore be sharply focused.

The adjustment of tube length is necessary, because it is found
by experiment that aperture varies with tube length, particularly
with lenses of long focal length.

Further, the focusing of the objective should be carried out by
rays corresponding to the peripheral zone of the objective only ;
since it is these rays which are concerned when the aperture is
measured, and since other rays, if spherical aberration be present,
will come to a different focus. This limitation to peripheral rays
may be performed by the employment of an annular post objective
stop. (A Travis expanding stop is admirable for this purpose). {8).*
A fijrther advantage would appear to be given by this method in
cases where residual splierical aberration exists in the outer zone,
since the same focusing adjustment would be employed in making
the measurement of N".A. as that used when structure of the
utmost fineness that the objective will resolve is under examina-
tion. The tube length being correctly adjusted, and the post
objective annular stop being in place, the objective is carefully
focused. The image will in general be a very poor one compared
to tliat usually obtained, because of the aberrations which are
usually found in the peripheral zones of most objectives. In spite
•of this, however, precision of focus is as a rule considerable, because
of the large angle between the rays forming the image.

In the ordinary technique witli the Abbe plate when the
microscope has been focused the eye-piece is removed, and one or
other of two methods employed : —

(A) A special objective (supplied with the Abbe apertometer)
is screwed to the lower end of the draw tube so that a magnified
image of the back lens of the objective is seen in the eye-piece.
{B) The eye is placed over the draw tube and the back lens
examined direct. Both methods are faulty. The first in that the
aperture attached to the brass tube fitted to the apertometer
objective can correspond to one tube length only, and this will
be, by accident alone, that for which the focus has been made
previously. The second in that again the correction for tube
length is ignored, for the iris of the eye is the limiting aperture of
the rays, and should therefore correspond with the plane of the
image formed by the objective. But owing to the eye being
within a convergent optical system formed by the cornea and
aqueous, its effective aperture is considerably above the anatomical
position of the iris, and therefore the eye should in general be
placed 2 to 5 c.cm. below the top of the draw tube in order that the

* The italic figures within brackets refer to the Bibliography at end of the
paper.

Aji IfTiproved Method of Apertometry. 33

eft'ective aperture should be in its correct position. ' In most micro-
scopes this position is impossible. Further, as a rule no care is
taken to keep the eye central with the draw tube, in order that its
effective aperture shall correspond with the centre of the field.
The correct tecimique is obtained by dropping into the draw tube
in place of the eye-piece a suitable aperture in a sunk brass mount,
the aperture being small and corresponding to the centre of the
field, the depth of the mount being such that the aperture is
parfocal with the eye-piece.

Section 2. — Error in Apertometry due to the Use of
Eays not Corresponding to the Exact Centre of the
Field.

Eays lying away from the centre give values which differ
considerably from those obtained with the employment of central
rays, because such rays pass through the apertometer plate as
bundles to one side of, and not necessarily parallel with, those which
illuminate the centre of the field. Since the definition of most
microscope objectives is superior at the centre of the field, obser-
vation is preferably made there, and therefore central rays should
be used for apertometry. There is, however, another and more
important reason. For accurate apertometry the indices and the
image of the restricting aperture of the objective should coincide.
This is rarely the case in practice, for with low-power objectives
the images of the indices are usually in a plane much above the
back lens ; whereas in the case of high-power lenses the plane is
situated more often within the objective. Further, while in most
objectives it is the back lens which limits the aperture, in one
objective in my possession this is done by the front lens, and there-
fore it is with the image of this that the indices should coincide.
As a rule, therefore, the image of the restricting aperture (usually
the back lens) of the objective and the indices do not coincide, and
therefore by focusing alone it is impossible to get both in focus at
the same time.

Now, consideration showed that by restricting the effective iris
of the system it should be possible to increase the depth of focus
to such an extent that the images of the indices and the restrict-
ing aperture should be both simultaneously sharply imaged. It
was further seen that the effective iris corresponded in position
with the focused image of the ol.)jective. Therefore by replacing
the eye-piece by a small aperture, through which the observations
of N.A. could be made, it was possible to avoid the difficulty due
to the indices and the restricting aperture of the objective not
Coinciding.

2 A 2

340

Transactions of the Society.

Section 3. — Ereok in Apertometey due to the Incorrect

Setting of the Indices.

Probably the most accurate of optical methods of measurement
is that in which an index is caused to coincide with the centre of
the image to be measured (^).

But the accuracy is enormously decreased if the field on one
side of the image is invisible to the observer, because the measure-
ments are then affected both by his visual acuity and his judgment.
If the rays from the objective be traced through the apertometer it

B.

Tips invisible
reaoini^ too m ish

Tips visisuc

fltAD\N(j^ TOO LOW

c.

D.

InTERVAL INVlSii^?;
REAOII4Q TOO H (QH

Imterval visible

READINQ -rCO LOW.

Fig. 1. — Diagrams to show how error is caused by the restriction
of the visible field to the aperture of the objective.

At A the indices have been adjusted till the tips are judged to be

invisible. The reading is now too high.
At B the indices are still visible, and therefore the reading is too low.
At C similar conditions to A are not met with.
At D the conditions are similar in their effects to those at B.

An Irnproved Method of Apertometry, 341

will be found that they form a cone, the apex of which corresponds
with the optical centre of the plate. Structures lying anywhere
within this cone will therefore be visible to an observer looking
down the draw tube at the back lens of the objective, while struc-
tures lying outside this cone will be invisible. This makes the
setting of the images of the indices in coincidence with the
restricting aperture of the lens a difficult process. Ainslie (3)
described a similar difficulty in using Cheshire's apertometer.
Diagrams A and B (fig. 1) illustrate this difficulty. Placing the
indices so that their images are formed within the visible field does
not give benefit, as diagrams G and D (fig. 1) show. It is therefore
easily seen that according as one takes case (1) in which the tips,
or case (2) in which the intervals, are either seen or not seen,
so the measurement of the aperture will be too low or too high. A
method which allows the whole of the field (i.e. the region outside
the cone, corresponding to the limiting aperture of the objective)
to be visible removes the difficulty above described by allowing
the method of coincidence to be employed. This may be obtained
by reversing the direction of the light rays through the optical
system. For. this technique, therefore, the light source is placed
in the position of the eye-piece, and the rays of light descend
through the objective to spread out as a fan towards the periphery
of the apertometer plate. The numerical aperture is therefore
measured by setting the indices at the edge of the cone of illu-
mination proceeding from the objective, the edge being rendered
visible by frosting the curved side of the apertometer plate, or
preferably by observing the aerial image by means of a Eamsden
eye-piece. It will be seen at once that there are two advantages
to be gained by this technique : (1) the whole of the field is visible,
and therefore the method of coincidence may be employed ; (2) the
method can be used without modification for the examination of
condenser lens systems. Details of the technique will be given
later.

Section 4. — Erkok in Apertometry due to the Incorrect
Determination of the Positions of the Indices in
Relationship to the Graduated Scale, and Inaccu-
racy IN THE Graduated Scale itself.

Both these factors are entirely concerned with the construction
of the apparatus and its limitations. As manufactured by Zeiss
the instrument is imperfect, for the indices are so constructed that
the graduations are not closer than 0*05 N.A., and the sub-
division has to be done entirely by eye. This is made difficult by
the fact that only one side of the scale is visible (the other part
being hidden by the index itself). This point is clearly shown in

342

Transactions of the Society.

diagram A (fig. 2) ; in diagram B is shown a slight alteration to
the indices which entirely avoids this difficulty. An alternative
form which would allow greater accuracy is shown at C. The
method of using this form of index is as follows : —

The short graduated arm is so constructed that the angle it
makes may be altered without changing the position of the zei'o.
By means of a preliminary measurement the approximate K.A.
of the objective is obtained. Suppose it to lie between 0-8 and
0 • 9, the index is placed so that the zero corresponds to 0*8, and
the graduated arm is now gently rotated till the 10 graduation
corresponds to 0 • 9. The intermediate graduations now correspond
to the decimal subdivisions between 0 • 8 and 0 • 9, and may be
used for reading to approximately 0'003 N.A. It should be noted
that for the scale on the short arm to be uniform its edge must be
the segment of a circle. This circle has nearly the same radius
as that of the glass plate.

A.

B.

C

Fig. 2. — Diagrams to show the present shape of the indices A and
two improved types, B and C.

At A the subdivisions between the graduations are difficult to estimate

by the eye, because only one side of the index is visible.
At B the index has been cut away, thus facilitating the correct

estimation of the interval-
At C the index is fitted with a small scale of adjustable inclination,

thus rendering the subdivision exact. Direct readings may be

obtained to 0"01 N.A. with this device.

An Improved Method of Apertometry.

343

A better plan has been suggested to me by Ainslie, namely, to
utilize the principle of tlie diagonal scale. For this purpose a
specially graduated glass plate would be required, as shown in
fig. 3. The method of using such a scale is well known, and there-
fore needs no further description. The reason for the use of curved
lines is similar to that <^iven above.

Fig. 3. — Diagram to show the design of an apertometer with a
diagonal scale, thus giving direct readings to O'Ol N.A.

Section 5. — Error in Apertometry due to Plane of Aperto-
MKTER Plate not being at Eight* Angles to the
Optical Axis of the Microscope.

Since the light leaves the objective to form a cone of illumina-
tion, and since a cone has its greatest width across its diameter, it
is clear that the pointers of the indices must be symmetrically
placed on a true diameter to the cone, for otherwise the aperture
reading will be too low. Since the prism angle at the back of the
plate is 45° it might be thtnight that this point could be neglected.
Tests show that this is not the case. Without considering the
possible causes of error, the following method of obtaining the
correct adjustment may be described as follows : — If with the
objective focused in the cover slip of the apertometer, the indices
appear to be out of line with the diameter of the cone, then the
apertometer plate must be tilted so as to bring them as far as
possible correctly into line. The fine centring is now performed
by sliding the plate as a whole forward or backward. (This
method of adjustment is impossible with the old type of Abbe
apertometer, in which the silvering forms a complete ring under
the cover glass ; and therefore adjustment must be effected by
tilting alone.)

344

Transactions of the Society.

The fine centring is performed as follows : — The vertical portion
of the indices takes the form of a trident the tips of which are
vertically in line, as shown at A in fig. 4. If the indices are now
adjusted so that the upper prong is in contact with the edge
of the cone of illumination, then if the indices lie in a true
diameter the lower prong will also be just in contact, see fig. 4
at B. If contact is not perfect and the index is set apparently at
too high a reading, as shown at C, the apertometer plate should be
shifted further back and vice versa. Adjustment should be made
until the upper and lower prongs appear to meet the edge at the
same instant, as shown at B in fig. 4. (At D is shown a better,
but somewhat more complicated form of index.)

A.

B.

«

COMPLtTC ADJWTMftWT.

D.

IWCOnPLETE At'-'"^'^'^^^"''

CLASS piSC iNoex

Fig. 4. — Diagrams to show new form of index which facilitates the
setting of the plate at right angles to the optical axis.

At A the new form of trident index is shown.

At B the index is shown in relationship to the aperture, the angle

between the plate and the optic axis being a right angle.
At C the index is shown in relationship to the aperture, the angle

being greater than a right angle.
At D an alternative and better type of index is shown. It is used in

a similar manner to the one shown at A.

A71 Improved Method of Apertometry. 345

Section 6. — Error in Apertometry due to Chromatic

Aberration.

Abbe has pointed out (i) that objectives corrected for chromatic
aberration may show considerable error if the path of the beams
is altered. Thus, with high-power objectives, the aperture as
measured with blue rays is usually larger than that obtained with
red ; with the holoscopic 4 mm. the converse is the case. In
measuring aperture accurately, therefore, monochromatic light
should be used of known, and if possible of standard, wave.
This should be either the " chosen colour " (i.e. that for which the
most perfect corrections have been made —usually yellow-green
rays), or light of short wave length (e.g. blue raysj when the
maximum resolving power is required of which the objective is
capable.

For providing monochromatic light for this purpose good colour
filters are quite sufficient. They may be placed anywhere in the
light path ; between the source and its aperture is a convenient
position.

Section 7. — Error in Methods based on the
Measukement of the Eamsden Disc.

The employment of these methods depends on the accuracy of
the formula N.A. x 2 D = M x R.D., where D is the distance of
distinct vision (10 in., or 254 mm.), M is the total magnification
of the instrument, and E.D. is the diameter of the Ramsden disc.
Now Ainslie {3), who has given a description of the method, points
out that for accurate determinations the diameter of the Eamsden
disc must be measured (because of its small size) by means of
instruments of considerable accuracy. When this has been done
it still remains to determine the magnification and to fix the value
of D, because the accommodation of the eye renders the value of
the latter uncertain. For this purpose I find the Eikometer of
Wright {4) to have definite advantage, because it fixes the value
of D (not at all necessarily at 10 in. however) during the deter-
minations of the magnification. Apart however from .the requii^e-
ment of special instruments I have found the method to suffer
from inaccuracy, which is probably due to irradiation.

Section 8. — Desgiuption of an Impeoved Method
of Apertometry.

The principles on which this method rests have been briefly
considered above ; the description will therefore be limited to
structural features.

346 Transactions of the Society.

With the microscope set up in the usual manner (the tube
length being correctly adjusted), and with the apertometer on the
stage, the annular stop is slipped into position behind the objective,
and the latter then carefully focused on one of the edges of the
silvered bands under the cover slip. The eye-piece is now re-
placed by the 2 mm. aperture parfocal with the eye-piece, which
is lit from above by a small frosted electric lamp of low candle-
power (any otlier suitable method of illumination may of course be
employed).

The aperture being illuminated, the apertometer plate is gently
shifted so that the image of the aperture formed by the objective
shall fall on the centre of the cover. With a Eamsden eye-piece
of medium power (or a hand magnifier) the edge of the shadow on
the periphery of the apertometer plate is examined, and one of the
indices is moved, so that the upper prong of the trident is set to
the exact edge of the shadow. The lower edge is now examined,
and if found to be in exact contact the setting of the apertometer
plate is correct ; if not in contact the setting requires adjustment
as described in Section 5. When the correct adjustment has been
obtained, the central prong is placed in exact contact with the
shadow, and the scale-reading now taken. The left-hand index is
then adjusted and its reading similarly obtained. Ten alternate
readings are logged and a mean taken ; any considerable difference
between any of the sets of readings of the same side indicates that
the apparatus has been accidentally displaced, and the whole
process must be repeated. Assuming that the graduations of the
apertometer are accurate, the values obtained by this technique
may be depended on to 0-003 N.A. This error even may be
reduced by accurate apparatus. A method of this accuracy is
found to be essential if other apparatus is to be calibrated in terms
of N.A.

Section 9. — Simplified Technique.

Abbe has pointed out that for ordinary purposes very accurate
determinations of aperture are not required, because with most
objectives quite considerable variation in aperture is not found to
cause any observable change in resolving power.

It is therefore possible in such cases to employ a simpler tech-
nique than that described above.

For dry lenses of low and medium power the apertometer
described by Cheshire {5), or better, Ainslie's modification {6), can
be utilized. Special care should be taken to see that the tube
length is correct ; the use of an annular post objective stop is not
necessary however. But there are definite advantages from the use
of a descending light path, because the edge of the cone of divergent
rays is more easily observed, and the number of rings counted with

An Improved Method of Apertometry. 347

greater certainty, when the eye examines the apertometer itself
in place of its greatly-diminished injage. Owing however to the
larger surface the light source has to be brilliant, particularly if
outside light has to be competed with. I have found a pocket
electric-battery torch admirable for the purpose. For objectives of
medium and high power the bull's-eye lens frequently fitted to
such lamps may with advantage be retained.

For dry high-power lenses and for oil and water immersion
systems the use of a plate similar to the Abbe instrument is neces-
sary. The use of the correct tube length is not of such importance
as it is with objectives of longer focal length. If the descending
light path be employed both the indices and auxiliary objective
may, however, be dispensed with by having the curved edge of the
plate frosted and graduated. By this means the boundary of the
cone of light may be observed and measured, without the necessity
of indices or hand magnifier (Eamsden ocular). Although these
simplified methods do not give the same degree of accuracy as that
which the more complicated method provides, yet in my hands they
appear quite equal to the original Abbe method, and an accuracy
to • 01 N.A. should be easily obtainable. A further advantage not
previously mentioned which the use of a descending light path
provides is that since the auxiliary objective is not employed there
is no possibility of the error arising which Spitta (7) has drawn
atttention to.

For very low aperture objectives, Conrady's method would
appear to be very reliable, and to be accurate to a least 1 p.c, if
proper precautions have been taken with regard to tube length.
(The relatively long focal length of such objectives renders the use
of the correct tube length of the greatest importance.) In this case
also, however, in my opinion, there is definite advantage to be
obtained by the employment of the descending light path.

Section 10. — Application of the Method to the Sub-
stage Condenser.

For many purposes it is necessary to obtain the values of
apertures, iris-diaphragms, or central stops placed in the lower
focal plane of the condenser in terms of N.A. This may be done
in several ways ; probably the most accurate hitherto described
was that employed by the author for measuring working aper-
ture (9). Better results should be obtainable by means of a
direct method by employing the apertometer in the same way
as that described above for ttie objective. For this purpose the
Abbe apertometer is placed on the stage upside down, and the
rays from the condenser caused to enter the plate in a similar
manner. It will be at once observed, however, that the method

348 Transactions of the Society,

•
of foci;sing and centring employed in the case of an objective
cannot be used with the condenser, because the light source
cannot be replaced by an eye-piece without considerable incon-
venience. An alternative method is therefore best employed,
which may be described as follows : — To the sloped reflecting
edge of the Abbe apertometer, and immediately above the cover
glass, is temporarily mounted the hypotenuse of^ a small right-
angled prism (for this purpose stiff cedar-wood oil, or, better,
bifocal cement, will be found satisfactory). The upper surface
of the small prism should now be parallel with the plane of the
stage, and therefore an image of the silvered strips of the aper-
tometer may be clearly observed by means of any low-power
objective with sufficient working distances, since the spherical
aberration introduced by the considerable thickness of glass does
not cause sufficient degradation of the image to matter for the
present purpose. The images of the strips having been sharply
focused, the image of the light source is sharply focused in the
same plane by adjusting the condenser. The right-angled prism
is now removed, and the sloped surface of the apertometer care-
fully cleaned, in order that the rays incident on it may be
reflected to the periphery of the plate without degradation. This
must be done without removing the apertometer from the stage
or spoiling its adjustment relative to the condenser. A more
elaborate method, which avoids any difficulty due to this cause,
necessitates the application of a semi-transparent coating of silver
to the sloped surface of the apertometer. Above this is per-
manently cemented the right-angled prism, so that the greater part
of the light is internally reflected at right angles, to spread out
towards the periphery of the apertometer, while sufficient light
passes through the silver and prism to the low-powered objective
in order that accurate focusing and centring may be effected. It
should be noted that such a procedure does not in any way spoil
the apertometer for more genei'al use, so that when much work
of this nature is to be done this latter technique should be
employed.

BiBLIOGKAPHY.

1. Abbe. — Journ. Roy. Micr. Soc, 1880, p. 20.

2. Hartridge,— Proc. Roy. Soc, 1913, B, p. 128.

3. AiNSLiE. — Quekett Journ., 1914, p. 287.

4. Spitta. — Microscopy, 1907, p. 432.

5. Cheshire. — Journ. Roy. Micr. Soc, 1914, p, 398.

6. AiNSLiE. — Journ. Roy. Micr. Soc, 1914, p. 400.

7. Spitta.— Microscopy, 1907, p. 97.

8. Travis.— Journ. Roy. Micr. Soc, 1907, p. 362.

9. Hartridge. — Journ. Roy. Micr. Soc, 1913, p. 363.

JOURN. R. MICR. SOC, DEC. 1918.

/<

'\hr ^^^t.*^^^.*iuy

Face p. 349.)

349

OBITUARY.

Pkofessoe Henry George Plimmer, M.R.C.S., F.R.S., etc.*
[President R.M.S.. 1911-12.]

I. — Life.

Henry George Plimmer was born in Melksham, Wiltshire, on
January 29, 1856. As a young child he suffered from ophthalmia,
and practically lost the sight of his right eye thereby. It is
ironically curious that ever since he began medicine he used
microscopes more than any other instrument.

His father, Dr. George Plimmer, though Melksham is a small
town, had a good practice for the country. He was fond of hunting
and shooting, indeed of sport of all kinds, and was a well-known
figure in the county. George Plimmer had been previously
married, and had by liis former wife one daughter, who had great
musical talent. Henry George's mother and her family were not
musical, so that his talent must have come from his father, although
the latter often remarked that " music was only fit for women and
fools." This is a curious anomaly — the father, with his skill in
sport and contempt for music : the son, with no interest in sport
and with passion for music.

His father died in 1865. Henry George records that he had
no really distinct memory of his father, although he was nine years
old at the time of his death, and attributes this to the fact that he
was at boarding-school from the age of six, at Devizes. After his
father's death it was decided to send him to Shaw House School,
which had a local reputation, and was about a mile from Melksham.
He seems to have taken every prize at this school except those
for conduct and Scripture. He learned very little, but remembeied
some mathematics, for which he was grateful.

In September, 1867, his mother married John Kerslake, of
Bath. He died the following year, and she left Bath early in 1870,
and took a tiny house in Ironbridge, Shropshire. ' Young PHmmer
left school in June, 1870, and joined his mother at Ironbridge.

* Professor Plimmer has fortmiately left an autobiography in which he set
dowu details of his life for the purpose of any biography or fair statement of his
work. It was mostly written in the garden of his friend Goetze, during the
summer of 1917. It would seem that he had a presentiment of the fatal illness to
which he succumbed in less than a year iafterwards.

350 Obituary.

About a year later he became engaged as a clerk in the Coalbrook-
dale Co., at a salary beginning at 20/. a year. He soon got on,
and was a favourite of the general manager, who chose him as his
private secretary during the absence of his own secretary in
America.

Knowing that he could do better things than clerking Plimmer
wrote in 1877 to Dr. J. H. Gal ton, who had years before been his
father's assistant, asking how one began medicine and whether a
man could get qualified without money. His whole capital was
400/. from his father. Dr. Galton replied that an assistant who
had been with him for four years had just qualified and was
leaving, and would he like to come and do the same. Feeling that
here was his chance, he left his occupation at the Coalbrookdale
Co. and went to Dr. Galton on April 2, 1878, at a sala.ry of 50/.
a year and board. He lived with Dr. Galton at Norwood, and had
at first to do the dispensing and book-keeping. He gradually got
on to helping in the poor part of the practice, which was large, of
Galton and his partner, Sidney Turner. He became in fact •' an
unqualified assistant."* He entered Guy's Hospital as a perpetual
student in the following October, the full fee being paid out of his
small capital. His mother came to Norwood in 1880, so he left
Galton's house and lived with his mother.

He was Prosector to the Eoyal College of Surgeons in 1882,
became L.S.A. in October of the same year, and M.E.C.S. in
January, 1883. The v."ork at Norwood had been very hard and it
was impossible for him to do more than just qualify. He did
practically the whole of the parish and dispensing work, and fre-
quently went two and three times a day backwards and forwards
to Guy's Hospital, as well as being up at night two and three
times a week attending midwifery cases. He did not regret these
hard years, for he saw and did as much before he was qualified
as many men do in ten years after. His interest in pathology
arose from his association with Dr. (Sir) Samuel Wilks. He did
not however hold any resident appointment. About 1883 he
became intimately acquainted with Alfred Aders, of Manchester,
and his Mdfe and family, who were living at Norwood. After the
death of Alfred Aders he married his widow, Helena, in ' 1887.
His domestic life with this lady, who survives him, was ideally
happy. He had previously been made a partner, in 1883, and
the firm became Sidney Turner, Galton and Plimmer. In 1889 he
moved from Norwood to Sydenham.

In 1892 he retired from general practice so as to devote himself
to bacteriology and research, which he began with Professor
Crookshank at King's College. In October of this year he described
those inclusions in cancer cells subsequently called " Plimmer's

* The unqualified assistant's post was at that time a recognized method of
entering the medical profession.

Obituary. 351

"bodies," and became acquainted shortly afterwards with the late
Sir Armand Ruffer, who was working at the same subject. At
Buffer's sujxgestion they went to work together at the laboratories
of the Royal College of Surgeons. They worked together there
and later at the British Institute of Preventive Medicine; whither
they had gone on its establishment in 1893, until illness compelled
Ruffer to resign. He became Pathologist to the Cancer Hospital
in 1894, where he further studied the various cell inclusions. He
was appointed Bacteriologist and Lecturer on Bacteriology at St.
Mary's Hospital in 1895, and succeeded Silcock, through whose
efforts the appointment was mainly made, as PathoLjgist and
Lecturer on Pathologv in 1899. His mother, to whom he was
devotedly attached, and by whose side he was afterwards himself
buried, died in 1896. In memory of her he founded the Eliza
Kerslake prize at St. Mary's Hospital. After his mother's death
he moved from Sydenham to St. John's Wood.

In 1902 Sir John, then Doctor, Rose Bradford asked him to
take charge of the cancer laboratories at the Lister Institute which
had just been started. He resigned his post at St. Mary's Hospital,
and later he resigned his post as Director of the Pathological
Department at the Cancer Hospital in order to have njore time for
this work.

From 1898 he had been working attrypanosomes partly alone
and partly with Bradford, and in 1906 he undertook the research
work on the subject of trypanosomiasis, which was organized and
directed by the Tropical Diseases Committee of the Royal Society,
and the same time he was made a member of that committee.

He became Pathologist to the Zoological Society in 1907, a
post from which he resigned in 1917.

His contributions to science were at last recognized in 1910,
when he was elected a Fellow of the Royal Society. It was the
only honour he ever desired, and its attainment left him quite free
of desires in that direction. In July, 1913, he was elected a
member of the Royal Society Club, of which he was a Treasurer
for the years 1914-1917. He was offered and accepted the Pro-
fessorship of Comparative Pathology at the Imperial College of
Science and Technology in 1915, was elected a member of the War
Oflfice Tetanus Committee in 1916, and later of the Trench Fever
Committee. He was actively engaged with the work of his Pro-
fessorship and with the work of the War Office Committees until
a few weeks before his death, being largely concerned in the recent
discoveries relating to trench fever. During part of this time he
was suffering from that illness of which eventually he died. His
death took place on June 22, 1918, at Coombe Bank, Sevenoaks, the
residence of his friend, Robert Mond, J. P. Robert Mond, and
more especially Mrs. Mond, his mother, were amongst his most
intimate friends, and Plimmer would have been the first to eulogize

352 Obituary.

the kindness and hospitality they offered not only during the days
of his last illness, but throughout the period of their close friend-
ship.

Plimmer was a Fellow of numerous scientific and medical
societies. The first society of which he became a member was the
Eoyal Microscopical, in 1883, soon after he was qualified. He
always took a keen interest in the work of this Society, and on
several occasions he gave demonstrations of his microscopical
preparations. He also showed his preparations at the meetings of
other societies. The specimens were justly admired, for he
possessed a wonderful microscopical technique and was always
making efforts to improve his methods. He never wearied showing
his specimens or other technical details to his friends and colleagues ;
evenings were often spent alone and with his friends in the study
of critical illumination and in discussions of technique.

He was elected to the Council of this Society in 1883, and was
President in 1911-1912.

In 1887 he was elected to the Sydenham District Medical
Society ; became President in 1894, and Honorary Member in 1896.

He was a member of the Medical Kesearch Club from 1894 to
1911 ; his resignation was due to the fact that he could not attend
the meetings during the time that he was President of the Eoyal
Microscopical Society.

He was a member of the Physiological Society from 1894 to
1913, and also of the Pathological Society.

The Linnean Society elected him a Fellow in 1890, and
appointed him to the Council in 1917.

His other Societies were : — The Eoyal Medical and Chirurgical
and Eoyal Society of Medicine (1901) ; The Eoyal Institution
(1902), of which he was Visitor in 1914-16 ; Association of
Economic Biologists (1917), of which he was a member of the
Council from 1917.

He was the only English member of the Deutsche Komite fur
Krebsforschung, and was also a member of the Deutsche Patho-
logische Gesellschaft. He knew many of the foreign Bacteriolo-
gists and Pathologists intimately, and was welcomed during his
many visits to their laboratories on the Continent. His work was
as well known to his foreign colleagues as it was to those at home.

II, — Scientific, Artistic and Liteeary Works.

During his partnership with Sydney Turner and Galton, Plimmer
performed a great deal of surgery, and would undoubtedly have attained
the position of a great surgeon if he had specialized in that direction.
Amongst his surgical cases must be mentioned : (1) A case of Hysterec-
tomy ; (2) a case of Ectopic Gestation. These were remarkable opera-

Obituary. 35^

tions carried out for the first time in this country, and described in the
Lancet of 1883. Another early publication was on " Quinsy and
Rheumatism," pubUshed in the British Medical Journal of 1886.
Even in his busy days of practice he was continually occupied with
histological preparations. The specimens demonstrated perfectly the
exact structure of each organ. This was the beginning of the histological
skill of his later years. An article deahng with the histology of the
cell, protoplasm, etc., was written for the first edition of Hazell's
" Encyclopaedia."

He was particularly interested in the histology of cancer; his fir^t
paper dealing with the subject appeared in 1892, entitled, "Note on the
Parasitic Protozoa lately found in Cancer," in the British Medical
Journal. Herein he described tlie inclusions called Plimmer's bodies.
At the same time he devised a technique which differentiated these cells
from the known degenerations. This was followed by two papers jointly
with Armand Ruffer, " Further Researches on some Parasitic Protozoa
found in Cancerous Tumours," in the Journal of Pathology and Bac-
teriology in 1893. Together they published " Sur le mode de repro-
duction des parasites de Cancer " in Comptes Rendus de la Societe de
Biolgie and the Comptes Rendus des Academies de Science. In 1894
there was a criticism entitled "The Rhopalocephalus Carcinomatosous,"
published in the Journal of Pathology and Bacteriology.

While working with Armand Ruffer at the British Institute of Pre-
ventive Medicine he was concerned chiefly with bacteriology. For
several years their, main work was on diphtheria, some of the early
sampler of diphtheria anti-toxin being produced by them. In the autumn
of 1894, together with Blaxall, he gave a magnificent demonstration of
nearly all the known bacteria at the meeting of the British Medical
Association at Bristol. For those days it was really a grand show.

Though continually occupied with the problem of cancer, very few
papers were published on the subject, but several reviews were written,
namely, " On the Microscopical Diagnosis of Benign and Malignant
Growths of the Cervix Uteri " in the British Gynecological Journal,
1895 ; " J^tiology and Histology of Cancer" in the Practitioner, 1899.
In 1898 he wrote " A Critical Summary of Ehrlich's Recent Work on
Toxins and Anti-toxins " in the Journal of Pathology and Bacteriology.

In 1899, whilst at St. Mary's Hospital, he isolated a yeast from a
cancer which was ulcerating, then from others. They showed great
similarity to some of the cell inclusions, and the fact that they caused
tumours in animals lead to the hope that here was the long-looked-for
cause of cancer. It was a disappointment, as although they were found
in several cancers, they did not produce genuine cancers in animals, and
were no doubt accidental infections. Their association with cancer, as
shown by his work and that of Sanfelice, Roucali and others, was interest-
ing. These results were published in the Proceedings of the Royal
Society under the title, " Preliminary Note u'pon certain Organisms
Isolated from Cancer and their Pathogenic Effects upon Animals."
There was also an article in Nature, " Pathogenic Organisms of Cancer,"
and a short paper in the Centraiblatt fiir Bakteriologie on the same
subject.

2 B

354 Obituary.

A paper, " The Parasitic Theory of Cancer," appeared in the British
Medical Journal of 1903. Plimmer always adhered to the parasitic
theory. He was one of the first to try the effect of radium bromide on
cancer, after having been on a special visit to Vienna to see the results
of the treatment. His experience was published in the Lancet of 1904.
From 1899 until his death in 1918 his attention was given to blood-
parasites, and he published numerous papers on Trypanosomata. The
following is a list of the papers :— (With J. R. Bradford): " Preliminary
Note on the Morphology and Distribution of the Organism found in the
Tse-tse Fly Disease," Proc. Roy. Soc. 1899. "Ueber die Morphologic
und Verbreitung der Tse-tse gefundenen Parasiten," Centralblatt f.
Bakt., 1899. "The Organism of the Tse-tse Fly Disease," Nature, 1899.
" Organisms Infesting the Blood of Animals suffering from Tse-tse Fly
Disease," Nature, 1902. (With J. R. Bradford) : "The Trypanosoma
Brucei," Quart. Jour. Micr. Science, 1902. " Note on the Effect pro-
duced on Rats by the Trypanosomes of Gambia Fever and of Sleeping
♦Sickness," Proc. Roy. Soc, 1905. " Further Observations on the Effects
produced on Rats by the Trypanosome of Gambia Fever and of Sleeping
Sickness," Proc. Roy. Soc, 1907. (AVith J. D. Thomson) : " A Pre-
liminary Summary of the Results of the Experimental Treatment of
Trypanosomiasis," Proc. Roy. Soc, 1907. " Experimental Treatment
of Trypanosomiasis," Nature, 1907. "Comparative Effects of th«
Trypanosomata of Gambia Fever and of Sleeping Sickness," Nature,
1907. "Abstract of Work on the Experimental Treatment of Trypano-
somiasis carried out under a Sub-Committee of the Royal Society," Govt.
Blue Book, 1907. (With J. D. Thomson) : " Further Results on the
Experimental Treatment of Trypanosomiasis," Proc. Roy. Soc, 1908 ;
reprinted in the Reports of the Sleeping Sickness Commission of the
Royal Society, 1908. (With H. C. Bateman) : " Further Results on the
Experimental Treatment of Trypanosomiasis," Proc. Roy. Soc, 1908 ;
reprinted in the Reports of the Sleeping Sickness Commission of the
Royal Society, 1908. "Abstracts of further Results of Experimental
Treatment of Trypanosomiasis carried out under a Sub-Committee of the
Royal Society," Govt. Blue Book, 1908. " Experimental Treatment of
Trypanosomiasis," Nature, 1908. " Ergebnisse von Versuchen Try-
panosomiasis in Ratten zu behandeln," Centr. f . Bakt., 1908. " Weitere
Ergebnisse von Versuchen Trypanosomiasis in Ratten zu behandeln,"
Centr. f. Bakt., 1908. " Weitere Ergebnisse von Versuchen Trypanosomi-
asis in Ratten zu behandeln," Centr. f. Bakt., 1909. (With W. B.
Fry) : " Further Results on the Experimental Treatment of Trypano-
somiasis," Proc. Roy. Soc 1909. (With W. B. Fry and H. S. Ranken) :
" Further Results on the Experimental Treatment of Trypanosomiasis,"
Proc Roy. Soc, 1910. " Experimental Treatment of Trypanosomiasis,"
Nature, 1910. " Note on Methods," Appendix to paper by W. B. Fry
and H. S. Ranken on "Granules," Proc. Roy. Soc, 1913. "Blood
Parasites," Proc Roy. Inst., translated into French in Revue scientifique,
1913. " Blood Parasites," Nature, 1913. " Note on the Genus
Toxoplasma, with a Description of Three new Species," Proc Roy. Soc,
1916. " On the Blood Parasites found in Animals in the Zoological
Gardens during the four years 1908-1911," Proc. Zool. Soc, 1912.

Obituary. 355

This long series of papers on blood-parasites shows that a great deal
of the work was devoted to combating sleeping-sickness. Plimmer was
the first to use antimony compounds as a means of killing the parasite,
after he had tried numerous arsenical preparations and had found them
to be uncertain in their action and frequently producing serious after-
effects. This was not noticeable in the case of antimony salts, but
occasionally the use of antimony, like arsenic, produced parasites immune
to the drugs. It was remarkable to see the effects of doses of sodium
or lithium-antimonyl tartrate upon the infected rats. The moribund
rat became lively a few minutes after the injection of the drug ; after
several doses its coat and general condition could not have been more
healthy. The appearance of the blood was also most striking ; before
the injection parasites swarmed ; five minutes later only a few parasites
were seen ; fifteen minutes later no parasites were visible. There was
no doubt that the treatment removed the parasites from the blood and
the rats were cured. Parasites, however, wander into the cerebro-spinaSi
fluid, and these are not killed by the drug. Some of these enter the
blood after the antimony has been excreted, and they can be killed
by a second dose. A third dose will kill another invasion from the
cerebro- spinal fluid. The antimony-salt is only a real cure in those
cases in which the cerebro-spinal fluid is not infected. In these cases
it was found that injections of finely-divided metallic antimony into
the muscular tissue produced a cure. The best results were ultimately
obtained by injecting a suspension of metallic antimony directly into
the blood-stream. Horses, goats, rats, and other animals have been
cured of the disease. There is a private record of the successful treat-
ment of a few human patients suffering from sleeping-sickness. They
were living many years after the injection of antimony, and some had
been treated unsuccessfully with arsenic. The curative treatment of
sleeping-sickness with antimony was carried out on a large scale in
Africa by his late colleagues. Major W. B. Fry, R.A.M.O., and Major
H. S. Rankeu, V.C, R.A.M.C. Major Fry has also published the
results of the successful treatment of yaws with antimony, Plimmer
and Fry had previously treated cases of syphilis with this drug with
most excellent results. It is a pity that there was no opportunity for
further studying the cure of syphilis with antimony. This work of
Plimmer and Fry seems to have escaped the notice of other workers.

Plimmer's other papers consist mainly of yearly reports on the deaths
in the Zoological Gardens. For four years, 1908-1911, an examination
of the blood of the animals was made for parasites, and in 1911 he
made a report on the examination of 500 rats caught in the Zoological
Gardens. A quarantine house was instituted at his suggestion and the
animals in it were under his charge, as well as many other important
items in connexion with the health and care of the animals.

Plimmer was an extraordinarily fine musician. In addition to an
immense knowledge of music, gained by his own study and by attending
musical festivals, he was a wonderful pianist. At the time lie left
school in 1870 he had no other inclination than towards music, and at
that period had taught himself notes and could play fairly well for his
age. He used to sit with the organist at the church in Melksham

2 B 2

356 Ohitaary.

duriug his holidays, and at Ironbridge he practised on the organ in
Coalbrookdale Church. He became organist there in 1877, just before
he came to London. He first heard orchestral music in Bath. Here
also his mother took him to his first opera. He attended a performance
of "Elijah" in Worcester Cathedral in 1872 — his first choir and organ
performance. Another stimulus towards music was the piano recitals-
given by Rubinstein at Birmingham in 1875. Here he has said that
he heard for the first time the real thing, and in consequence his own
music improved enormously.

The hard medical work at Norwood did not lessen his desire for
music. He could generally manage to find a little spare time for
playing the piano and to go to concerts. He was a frequent visitor to
the opera. In later years he became a Fellow of the Royal Philharmonic
Society. His figure was well known in the musical world.

He was quite broad-minded in his music, but he had, if anything, a
preference for the works of Wagner. He was present at the first
performances at Bayreuth, and was a member of the Patronat Verein.
He went to almost every festival until about 1895. One instance
showing his broad-mindedness was a visit to Stuttgart to hear the first
performance of the new opera "Ariadne," by R. Strauss. Whether he
. played the works of Beethoven, Brahms, Chopin, Franck, Debussy,
Tschaikovsky, Strauss or others, all were rehearsed by Plimmer with
equal patience, and in addition their developnient was carefully studied.
For several years he gave recitals of music to his friends in his music
room, 3 Hall Road. It was extraordinary for a man so busy in other
fields to find the time and to give renderings which were a revelation.

He wrote an analysis of Sinding's pianoforte quintette, and two
articles on the Bayreuth Festival of 1891 in the Musical News, and a
long article, "A Great Conductor," in the Times of March IS, 1911.
He was well acquainted with many of the foremost musicians of his
time.

Fine literary gifts were also included in his mentality. During his
early life at Ironbridge he read a great deal, in particular the works
of Carlyle, Emerson, and Ruskin. At the same time he taught him-
self German and French, and added enormously to his school-boy
knowledge of Latin and Greek. He had correspondence with Ruskin,
for whom he translated a passage from the German. By Ruskin he
is mentioned in " Fors Clavigera " " as a young student belonging to
the working class," and he had a letter from Carlyle. He visited
Carlyle in his Chelsea home whilst he hved at Norwood. Later he
became acquainted with William Morris and visited Kelmscott House.
He knew Hubert Herkomer and many other distinguished literary
men. He was most intimate with George Meredith, who visited him
annually in the earlier years of their friendship. Throughout his busy
life literature always occupied part of his time. He collected a large and
valuable library. Many of his best books were secured by chance. He
could not and never cared to pay a large price for a book, and was not
in the ordinary sense a book collector. His scholarship in literature is
only dimly seen in the few articles which he wrote outside his scientific
papers. The following are some of these articles : —

Obituary. ' 357

" Fourth Dimensions in Space," Hazell's Encyclopedia. " Some
Aims and Methods in Medicine " (Introductory lecture to medical
students at the session 1000-1901), St. Mary's Hospital Gazette.
" Bedullus Immortalis," Presidential Addresses to the Roy. Micr. Soc,
1911 and 191:3. "Omariaua," privately printed for the twenty-first
birthday of the Omar Khayyam Club (1913). "The Curves of Life,"
Science Progress, 1915. "The Father of Modern Science," Science
Progress, 1916. " Annals of the Eoyal Society Club," Science Progress,
1917. " Sir M. A. Ruffer, C.M.G.," Nature, 1917. " Hyperacoustics,"
Science Progress, 1918. "Sir Alfred Keogh and the Army Medical
Services," Nature, 1918.

All other branches of Art were thoroughly appreciated, and he was
a connoisseur of the Italian School of painting. Many journeys were
planned for the further acquaintance of Architecture and Painting. His
first journey abroad was in 1881, to Belgium and to Nuremberg and
other parts of Germany. In 1887 he first went to Italy, to A^enice, and
from 1895 onwards he went almost annually to Italy. Wherever he
went his first visit was to the picture gallery, and in these visits he
obtained his great knowledge of Fine Art, Sculpture, and Architecture.

He delighted in the intercourse with his fellow-men, and was a
brilliant conversationalist ; he seldom missed those opportunities of
meeting his friends and other men that were offered by the Omar
Khayyam Club, the Royal Society Club, and the Savile Club. He was
President of the Omar Khayyam Club in 1911, and Treasurer of the
Royal Society Club from 1914 to 1916. He was one of those mainly
concerned in the formation of the Lucretian Club, of which he was
Secretary and Treasurer from its foundation in 1910 to 1917.

A friend of his has written — " When one thinks of the fuluess of
his life, his keen interest in literature, music, art, and all the things that
really matter, it is wonderful that he should have found room for them
all as he did. He had a nature, in the words of one of the old Greek
poets whom he loved — ' Terpaytovos, avev (//oyou TCToy/xeVos ' ('Foursquare,
fashioned without fault ')."

358 Obituary.

Kate Maeion Hall, F.L.S., RZ.S., F.E.M.S.

In the Proceedings of the Linnean Society of London (Oct. 1918)
appears an appreciative notice by Beatrice Harraden of the life
and work of Miss Hall, who was •'.lected Fellow of the Eoyal
Microscopical Society in 1910, She was for years the Curator of
the Stepney Borough Museum, one of the founders of the School
Nature Study Union, and was closely connected with the social
and educational work initiated by Toynbee Hall.

Lord Avebury and many other eminent scientists were induced
by her to visit Whitechapel for the purpose of lecturing on popular
scientijfic subjects to the inhabitants of that district, whom she had
been able to interest in the wonders of Nature.

One of her greatest pleasures was to conduct parties of boys to
the parks and woods and talk to them about the birds and flowers,
while the renown of her sea-anemone tank and observatory bee-
hive spread far and wide.

Miss Hall was born in August, 1861, and died at Lingfield,
whither she had retired, on April 12, 1918.

Albert McCalla, M.A., Ph.D., F.E.M.S.

We regret to announce the death of Mr. Albert McCalla, aged 72,
who died suddenly of heart failure on Thursday, June 6, 1918, at
Chicago.

Mr. McCalla was much interested in scientific research, and
received a nuniber of degrees. He was possessed of unusually
expert ability with the microscope, and was the inventor of an
attachment widely used in days gone by. He was a Past-President
of the American Microscopical Society.

359

SUMMAEY OF CURKENT RESEARCHES

BELATING TO

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY

(PEINCIPALLY INVEETEBRATA AND CRYPTOGAMIA),

MICROSCOPY, Etc.*

ZOOLOGY.

VERTEBRATA.

a, Embryologry, Evolution, Development, Reproduction,
and Allied Subjects.

G-erminal Vesicle in Cryptobranchus. — Bertram G. ^wit^ {Report
Michigan Acad. Sci., 1916, 17, 73-5, 1 pL). In the ovum about to
leave the ovary of this amphibian, the vicinity of the nucleus shows
opaque white globules readily visible to the naked eye. They seem to
be not nucleoli, as was at first supposed, but " yolk-islands," i.e. small
masses of yolk that become imprisoned between the vitelline membrane
and the germinal vesicle when the latter approaches the surface. The
subsequent dissolution of the germinal vesicle takes place not at the
very surface, but at a short distance from it. During recession a
trail of cytoplasm is left between the germinal vesicle and the animal
pole. In some ova the germinal vesicle appears to be in a state of
disintegration without ever having reached the animal pole, as shown by
the absence of this trail of cytoplasm. The dissolution takes place by
a gradual disintegration and convergence of its membranes. The
germinal vesicle usually collapses before the ovum escapes from the
ovary. J. A. T.

Early Development of Opossum. — J. P. Hill {Quart. Journ. Micr.
Sci., 1918, 63, 91-139, -4 pis.). Observations were made on the early
stages of Didelphys aurita, and confirm the view that there is one
common mode of early development characteristic of the Didelphia as a
group. Cleavage, in the absence of a morula-stage, results in the
formation of a unilaminar blastocyst, the wall of which consists of
opposite polar areas of formative and non-formative regions. The
former is destined to furnish the embryonal ectoderm and the entire

* The Society does not hold itself responsible for the views of the authors
of the papers abstracted. The object of this part of the Journal is to present
a sunamary of the papers as actually published, and to describe and illustrate
Instruments, Apparatus, etc., which are either new or have not been previously
delscribed in this country.

360 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

endoderm of the blastocyst : the latter gives origin to the tropho-
blastic or extra-embryonal ectoderm (tropho-ectoderm). The formative
cells, the homologue of the inner cell-mass of the Monodelphia, are
always freely exposed at the surface of the blastocyst, and are never,
even temporarily, enclosed by the tropho-ectoderm, as appears always to
be the case in the Monodelphia.

The first cleavage in Didelphys aurita tends to be unequal, and is
differential, separating the formative from the non-formative. The
unsegmented ovum must be potentially polar in its constitution.
Perhaps the first cleavage in Monodelphia is similarly differential.

J. A. T.

Lead-poisoning of Germ-cells.— L. J. Cole and L. J. Bachhuber
{Proc. Soc. Exper. Biol, and Med., 1914, 12, 24-9). Two series of
experiments with rabbits point to the conclusion that the offspring
of males which have been poisoned by the ingestion of lead acetate
into the alimentary canal have a lower vitality, and are distinctly
smaller in average size, than the normal offspring of unpoisoned males.
Other experiments with fowls indicate that poisoning of the male parent
with lead results in offspring of a distinctly lower average vitality.

J. A. T.

Seminiferous Tubules of Mammals.— G. M. Curtis {Amer. Journ.
Anat, 1918, 24, 339-94, 24 figs.). Observations were made on
isolated tubules of adult mouse, adult rabbit, and three-week dog. Adult
tubules present, in their course, no blind ends, blind diverticula, or
nodular enlargements. They show in their simpler form an arch, both
tubule ends being open and having a functional connexion with the
rete. But they form linked series of arches, as many as twelve arches
occurring linked in one complex. In rabbit and dog lobules are present,
composed of an entire tubule surrounded by a connective tissue sheath.
These are divided into sublobules, each with a separate sheath, which
contains a part or parts of the single tubule. The waves of the semi-
niferous tubules were studied in detail. The average wave-length in
the mouse is 1*83 cm., in the rabbit, 1 • 4 cm. J. A. T.

Spermatogenesis in Mouse.— Harry B. Yocum {Univ. California
Puhlications in Zoology, 1917, 16, No. 19, 371-80, 1 pi.). In the
common house mouse the primary spermatocytes have twenty chromo-
somes, which correspond in number, shape, and seemingly in size varia-
tion to those in the ovum. In the first division all of the chromo-
somes divide. In the secondary spermatocytes some sections show only
nineteen chromosomes, while others show nineteen in one plane or focus
and one in another. There is one chromosome which does not divide
in the second division, but passes in advance toward one pole of the
spindle. There is no secondary pairing of the chromosomes such as has
been described in horse, pig, guinea-pig, opossum and man. The
spermatids are dimorphic, half having nineteen, and half having twenty
chromosomes. j. a. X.

Spermatogenesis of Dog.— Julian Y. 'NLa.-lo^-r {Trans. Amer. Micr.
Soc, 1918, 37, 97-110, 2 pis.). The spermatogonia show deeply

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 361

Staining nucleoli which fuse before activity is marked ; the result is
possibly the X-chromosome or associated therewith. The spermatogonia
show twenty-one oval chromosomes. Following the spermatogonial
division the chromosomes weave out into separate leptotene threads,
while the X-chromosome remains as a rounded or slightly oval dark-
staining mass. The leptotene threads undergo parasynapsis. Eleven
chromosomes appear in the primary spermatocyte, ten are bivalent
autosomes, and one is the X-chromosome. The X-chromosome passes
undivided to one pole while the autosomes divide by longitudinal split-
ting. Thus there are produced two kinds of secondary spermatocytes,
the division being a reducing division. These two kinds of secondary
spermatocytes give rise by division to two kinds of spermatids, one with
ten univalent autosomes, the other with ten univalent autosomes and
the X-chromosome. During spermiogenesis the centrosome gives rise
to the end knob, axial filament and the posterior centrosome ; the sphere
substance of the secondary spermatocyte division to the acrosome ; and
the spermatosphere to the sheath of the middle piece. Measurements
of mature spermatozoa give a distinct bimodal curve, also indicating
their dimorphism. J. A. T.

Idiosome in Spermatogenesis of Guinea-pig. — George N. Papa-
nicolaou and Charles R. Stockard {Amer. Journ. Anat., 191<s, 24,
37-69, 2 pis.). The idiosome in the spermatogonia is very variable.
In the primary spermatocytes it shows an internal idioendosome sending
processes into a larger surrounding idioectosome. When the primary
spermatocytes prepare to divide the idioendosome breaks into granules
(idiogranulomes), which by the breaking up of the idioectosome are
scattered in the cytoplasm. They reunite after division, forming a
granular idiosome in the secondary spermatocytes. This breaks up as
before and a reconstruction occurs in the spermatids, in which each
idiograuulome in the idiosome appears to be surrounded by a minute
vacuole, the idiogranulotheca. They run together until there is one
large granulome, the idiosphferosome, surrounded by one large vacuolar
wall, the idiosphierotheca. The subsequent differentiation of the sperma-
tozoon is described in detail. During all stages there are a number of
granules in the nucleus, karyogranulomes, which eventually seem to be
dissolved within the sperm-head in the same'way as the chromatin. The
role of granulation is probably to secure a distribution of the idio-
plasmatic substance during cell-division. J. A. T.

Development of Red Blood Corpuscles. — Vera Danchakoff
{Aiuer. Journ. Anat., 191S, 24, 1-32, 1 pi). The differential factors
in the development of a polyvalent cell are extrinsic, and in the erythro-
blastic differentiation of a hgemoblast depend on the conditions present
within the vessels. These factors are active not only in the lower
vertebrates, in which normally no extravascular erythropoiesis is
observed, but the same factors seem to determine the erythropoiesis in
mammals (erythropoiesis in embryonic early stages and experimentally
produced in the adult), rendering the derivatives of the hremoblasts,
the erythroblasts, specific — univalent and irreversible in development.

362 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

If transferred outside the vessels, the erythroblastic tissue, as seen in the
allantois of the chick and in the kidney of the mammal, continues its
proliferation and its homoplastic differentiation. The extravascular
erythropoiesis in mammals, until new evidence is at hand, may be looked
upon as the development of specific blood-cells, which can no longer
alter their metabolism in response to environmental factors, J. A. T.

So-called Thymus IV. of Cat.— Fred. W. Stewart (Amer. Journ
Anat, 1918, 24, 191-223, 4 pis.). The ultimobranchial body of the
cat develops essentially as a fifth pharyngeal pouch, although as such it
does not make ectodermal contact. The internal thymic lobule of the
thymus (the so-called Thymus IV.) is not a branchiomeric structure. It
is contributed to by the whole of the ultimobranchial body, or by all
that does not degenerate. The ultimobranchial body of the cat is an
essentially regressive structure. J. A. T.

Development of Hypophysis of Rabbit.— Wayne J. Atwell
{Amer. Journ. Anat., 1918, 24, 271-337, 39 figs.). The hypophysis
eyagination is plainly visible in a rabbit embryo having sixteen primi-
tive segments, on the earlier part of the tenth day after insemination.
The endoderm does not contribute. The stalk connecting the hypo-
physis with the oral epithelium becomes solid during the fourteenth day ;
it loses its connexion with the epithelium at a variable time between the
sixteenth and twenty-fourth day. The residual lumen of Ratke's pouch
at first extends from end to end of the epithelial portion ; later it
does not reach to the nasal extremity. From the thickened epithe-
lium just nasal to the early Ratke's pockets two ridge-like elevations
are developed ; these are the " lateral lobes," the primordia of the
pars tuberalis and of a temporary cortical plate at the nasal extremity of
the gland. Their development is followed in detail. The neural lobe
undergoes a series of complex foldings and compressions which result
in the dividing up and partial obliteration of the cavity of the lobe,
and in the formation of a medullary layer and a cortical layer. It
seems that processes grow from the neural lobe into the mtermediate
part. The lateral lobes of mammals and reptiles seem to be homologous,
but it is precarious to say the same of the lateral lobes of Elasmobranchs,

J. A, T.

Development of Hypophysis of Anura.— W. J. Atwell {Anat.
Record, 1918, 15, 73-92, 18 figs.). There are three epithelial lobes and
a neural lobe. The lobes of epithelial origin are the anterior lobe proper,
the pars intermedia, and the pars tuberalis. From their development
and their mature structure these lobes in Anura may be considered
homologous with corresponding lobes in all higher vertebrates. The
anterior lobe proper develops from the main central portion of the
solid epithelial primordium. It comes to be caudal and ventral to the
other portions. The pars intermedia develops from the caudal tip of
the hypophysial primordium. The pars tuberalis has a paired origin
in the lateral lobes, which appear very early and become detached from
the brain-floor in the pia mater. J. A. T.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 363

Rig-ht and Left Testes of Pig-eons. — Oscar Riddle {Anat. Record,
1918, 14, 283-334). In healthy adult doves and pigeons the right
testis is larger than the left in a very high percentage of cases. The
left testis, in a high percentage of cases, is absolutely longer and thinner
— more nearly the shape of the single persistent (left) ovary of the
female — than is the right testis. It is relatively longer and thinner in
probably nearly all cases. In disease — particularly in tuberculosis — the
testes undergo extreme atrophy (often DO to 95 p.c.) ; the reduction is
greater in the right than in the left testis ; the ovary probably suffers
no reduction whatever. In hybrids the normal size relations of the two
testes are much disturbed. It is suggested that a male which has been
forced to arise from a female-producing egg may show in the relative
size of its gonads an approximation to the relative size of the gonads of
a female. J. A. T.

Influence of Age on Reproductivity of Fowls. — Raymond Pearl
(Genetics, 1917, 2, 417-32), A new constant, the reproductive or
fertility index, is proposed for the measurement of the net reproductive
ability of mated pairs of the domestic fowl. This index expresses the
actual number of chicks produced by the mating, and capable of living
three weeks after hatching, as a percentage of the maximum total
number of chicks physiologically possible. For a Barred Plymouth
Rock strain the reproductive index has a mean value of about 12 p.c.
Net fertility is a rather highly variable character, like other purely
physiological characters. Reproductive ability, as measured by the
index, diminishes with advancing age of the birds mated, having'' its
maximum when each of the birds mated is from ten to fourteen months
old. The rate of decline with advancing age is more rapid in the
males. J. A. T.

Age and Fertility in Fowls. — Raymond Pearl (Froc. Nat. Acad.
Sci., 1917, 3, 354-56). In mammals it seems that fertility rises from
the beginning of sexual life to a maximum, and then declines with
further increase in age, until total sterility is reached. In the fowls
Pearl worked with there was no approach to this law of fertility.
Instead we find a steady and progressive decline in fertility after the
first breeding season. Up to a combined parental age of four years
what occurs is this : There is a significant drop in reproductive ability
as we pass from a combined age of two years for the mated birds to
three years. In passing from three years to four there is no significant
change in reproductive abihty. In passing from a combined age of
four years to that of five years there is a large drop in the net reproduc-
tive ability of the mating. J. A. T,

Sex-ratio in Domestic Fowl. — Raymond Pearl [Science, 1917,
46, 220). The determination of sex in poultry is primarily a matter
of zygotic constitution, but under certain conditions the normal ratio
of about 48 '57 p.c. of cockerels may be modified. The chief factor
in bringing about the modification in the direction of a larger produc-
tion of pullets is the fecundity or laying ability of the hens used as

364 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

breeders. It is possible to breed strains of hens in which high pro-
ductivity is a fixed characteristic. And when the poultryman breeds
along the right lines for increased egg production, he will at the same
time be producing a strain in which profit-making pullets will pre-
ponderate over the less profitable cockerels. The constitutionally more
fecund hens tend to produce a larger proportion of female offspring.

J. A. T.

Case of False Hermaphroditism. — H. E. Jordan (Anat. Record,
1918, 15, 27-35, 1 fig.). A case of masculine pseudohermaphroditism in
man, showing two abdominal testes and a bilateral pair of symmetrical
bodies like ovarian remnants, which turned out, however, to be lymph-
nodes. The interstitial cells of the testes were very few and small
— degenerate, in short. There was well-attested lack of sexual desire,
which is believed to stand in causal correlation with the activity of the
interstitial cells. The case was one of arrested male development —
atrophied testes, "rudimentary" penis, vestigial scrotum, and cryp-
torchism. But certain female secondary characters, e.g. well-developed
mammary glands, appeared. There were concomitant somatic abnorm-
alities (supernumerary digits and club-foot), besides left-handed n ess and
feeble-mindedness. J. A. T.

Superfetation in Cow.— Mary T. Harman (Anat. Record, 1918,
14, 335-G). A case is described which may be interpreted as super-
fetation. It may, however, have been due to retarded development.
Whatever be the interpretation, the case adds another to the list of
mammals in which the uterus has been found to contain at the same time
embryos of widely different degrees of development. J. A. T.

Grafts of Spleen on Allantois. — Vera Danchakoff (Amer.
Journ. Anat., 1918, 24, 127-89, 8 pis.). Mashed splenic tissue of fowl
grafted on to the allantois shows proliferation and differentiation in the
transplanted tissue, and induces the same in the allantois. Both sets
of cells react to the new conditions. The further existence of the adult
splenic tissue within the embryonic allantois results in a manifestation
of definite new potentialities in its surviving cells. In the vicinity of the
graft definite changes occur in the mesoderm, ectoderm, and endoderm
of the allantois. The mesenchyme is also involved in the general process
of stimulation, and shows granuloblastic differentiation as observed in
the mesenchyme of the body after grafts of splenic tissue. The above
is merely an indication of the lines of this important investigation.

J. A. T.

Notes on Fresh-water Fishes of Madras.— B. Sundara Raj
{Records Indian Museum, 1916, 12, 249-94, 5 pis.). This paper con-
tains many interesting notes on habits and life-histories. In Arius
falcariux the male carries the eight or so large eggs in his mouth for
many days until they hatch. The eggs of Haplochilus melanostigma
give off numerous short adhesive threads, by which they adhere to one
another and to foreign objects. From a certain area there arise very

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICKOSCOPY, KTC.

365

long threads which twist together into a common cord which, protrudes
from the genital opening of the female. The female of Osphrcmemis
gonrami aerates the eggs with mouthfuls of air engulfed at the surface.
The female of Etroplus maculatus ejects a mouthful of dark sediment

3--

A. Cluster of eggs of Haplochilns melanostigma. a, adhesive threads ;

o.g, oil -globule : fil, long filaments; ch, cord formed by union
of twisted filaments ; e, eye.

B. Lateral view of embryo inside the egg-membrane.

nil

Eggs of Gobius (Oxyurichthys) striatus.

A. Outline of three clusters of eggs attached to rock.

B. Two eggs enlarged with advanced embryos, showing egg-membrane (a),

yolk {b), oil-globule (e), heart (d),and eye {e).

into the nest containing the young fry. In Gobius {Glossogohius) giuris
and in Gobius {Oxyurichthgs) striatus the egg-membrane is in the form
of a long tube, which is fixed to the roof of a burrow in the first instance^

and to stones and the like in the second.

J. A. T.

366 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Growth of Parts of Rats and of the Whole. — Shinkishi Hatai
{Amer. Jourii. A/iat., 11)18, 24, 71-89,4 figs.)- The increase of weight
in epididymis, pancreas, stomach, and submaxillary glands is compared
with that of the body as a whole for each millimetre of length from
•47 mm. (weighing 4* i) grm.) to 250 mm. (weighing 448" 5 grm.). Some
results may be noted. Before puberty the weight of the epididymis is
approximately one-sixth that of the testes, after puberty about a third.
The weight of the stomach is about one-ninth of the alimentary tract,
except in the newborn rat, where it is relatively heavier. The females
have a heavier pancreas than males of the same weight. J. A. T.

Proportion of Sexes in Whitefish. — Eaymond Pearl (Report
Michigan Acad. Sci., 1916, 17, 76). There is great dearth of definite
statistics regarding the normal sex-ratios of even the commonest animals.
In unselected catches (five days) of Goregonus albus taken in deep water
gill-nets in Lake Erie, there were 386 males to 455 female, a ratio of
848 males to 1000 females. J. A. T.

b. Histology.

Lining of Perivascular Spaces. — Kaethe W. Dewey {Anat.
Record, 1918, 15, 1-26, 9 figs.). An apparently exceptional behaviour
towards vital stains is exhibited by the endothelial cells lining the
perivascular spaces, or, if the existence of such cells be denied, by the
perivascular connective-tissue within the brain and spinal cord.

Unlike such cells in the perivascular connective-tissue in other
organs and tissues, they do not habitually take up the vital stain, but do
so only under the influence of stimuli from pathological conditions.

Affinity for the vital stain is absent, in general, in the endothelial
cells of the inner lining of arteries, veins, and capillaries, but present in
the capillaries and venules of the spleen, the capillaries of bone-marrow,
the blood sinuses of hseraal glands, and the Kupffer cells of the liver,
ft is absent, in general, in the endothelial cells lining the inner wall of
the lymph-vessels outside the organs ; present in the lymph-channels
within organs except the brain and spinal cord. " With reference to
the central nervous system, affinity for the vital stain is absent, in
general, in the perivascular spaces within the brain and spinal cord ;
present in these conditionally and in focahzed distribution in the
presence of pathological stimuli, in general, within the membranes along
channels conveying lymph or cerebrospinal fluid." J. A. T.

Heart-muscle of Embryo Chick.^ — E. D. Congdon {Anat. Record,
1918, 15, 135-50, 10 figs.). The heart of chicks younger than the
sixteen- or seventeen-somite stages, when rhythmical contraction begins,
has a sarcoplasmic structure whose optical section is a net consisting of
two systems of parallel lines intersecting to cut off spaces approaching a
square form. They measure in the fixed material abott 0*8 micron on
a side. The apparent net is probably produced by three systems of
intersecting membranes which form hexahedral compartments. At all
the intersections of three planes there are small uniform mitochondrial

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 367

granules. There is some indication in the arrangement of the planes of
a division of the early myocardium into mononuclear cell areas which
correspond to lobations on its exterior. J. A. T.

Giant-cells of Yolk-sac and Bone-marrow.— H. E. Jordan (Amer.
Jour/i. Anat., 1918, 24, ■22b-6[), 70 hgs.). The giant-cells of the
marrow of young bones are of two physiological types, htemogenic and
osteolytic. They agree in being multinucleated and in possessing
originally a basophilic cytoplasm, which gradually becomes oxyphilic.

The hemogenic giant-cells or polykaryocytes originate from hyper-
trophied hemoblasts by dirrct division of the nucleus of transitional
polymorphokaryocytes. They are essentially multiple ha3moblasts and
may differentiate erythrocytes intracellularly under certnin conditions,
apparently such as call for increased hfemopoietio activity. They are
the same in yolk-sac and red bone-marrow.

There is no unequivocal evidence that polymorphokaryocytes and
haemogenic polykaryocytes are phagocytic. They may perhaps I'epresent
an incidental phase of intense hemopoiesis.

The osteolytic giant cells (osteoclasts of Kolliker) originate from the
marrow reticulum by a process involving the aggregation of nuclei
within larger cytoplasmic masses and secondary fusion with other
portions of the reticulum and with osteoblasts. They may during their
early stages of differentiation produce blood granulocytes, or possibly
hsemoblasts, but there is no direct genetic homology between them and
polykaryocytes. They eventually disintegrate and are not re-transformed
into marrow reticulum. J. A. T.

Histology of Lymph. — H. E. Jordan {Anat. Record, 1918, 16,
37-45). The primary object of this investigation was to determine
whether blood-platelets occur in lymph. The material employed con-
sisted of smear preparations of lymph from the thoracic duct of the dog.
The evidence seems conclusive that platelets are preformed structural
elements of blood — not precipitated products — and that they do not
form a normal constituent of the lymph of the thoracic duct. Tbis may
mean that only a small quota is contributed to the peripheral portion of
the lymphatic tree, and that disintegration occurs during their relatively
slow progress towards the thoracic duct. J. A. T.

Iridocytes in Batrachian Larvae. — C. R. N. Rao (Records Indian
Musejim, 1917, 13, 281-92, 1 pi.). The larvae of Microhyla ornata
and M. rubra float on the surface in shoals. This habit is correlated
with the presence of air-chambers between the branchial plates, which
function more or less as hydrostatic organs. The attacks of enemies
are warded off by the presence of an acid offensive matter in the
cephalic gland, and this is probably advertised by the bright coloration.
There is a unique occurrence of iridocytes (with guanin crystals) and
argenteum or reflecting tissue. The presence of iridocytes and black
(melanin) chromatophores on the lungs and peritoneum is very interest-
ing, for both these occur in the air-bladder and peritoneum of some
embryo fishes. The iridocytes of the mid-dorsal band and the ventral
argenteum of the sub-cutaneous tissue of the abdomen are free from

368 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

calcium in any form. The iridocytes contain irregular plates consisting
of spherical granules, identical with those obtained by the breaking
down of guanin-nitrate crystals, while the argenteum is a dense opaque
reflecting sub-cutaneous tissue in which no particular structure could be
made out. There are also yellow and red lipochromes in special con-
nective cells transformed into chromatophores. Similarly the cells
which accumulate guanin in their cytoplasm become iridocytes. As
metamorphosis progresses large amoebocytes appear wherever iridocytes
and argenteum occur. J. A. T.

Phagocytosis in Tadpole's Tail. — E. R. Clark and E. L. Clark
(Anat. Record, 1918, 15, 151-63, 1 pi.) In the transparent tails of
tadpoles (of BomUnator, Rana pipiens, and Hyia pickeringii) there are
three types of cell which show the power of phagocytosis in relation to
granules of carbon and carmin injected into the sub-cutaneous tissue.
These are (1) leucocytes (including wandering cells), (2) stellate connec-
tive tissue cells, and (3) the endothelial cells of the lymphatics. , The
leucocytes actively migrate toward the site of injection, while the
mesenchyme cells and lymphatic endothehal cells apparently ingest only
those particles which are in close proximity to them. J. A. T.

Fish-freezing. — J. Stanley Gardiner and Gr. H. F. Nuttall
{Pror. C'amhridge Phil Soc, 1918, 19, 185). The method of freezing
fish usually employed preserves the fish for an indefinite period, but the
product breaks up in cooking, tending to become rather woolly, and
loses flavour and aroma. A fresh process has been developed, freezing
the fish in brine consisting of about 18 p.c. of salt at a temper-
ature of 5'^-20° F. A large fish freezes thoroughly in three liom-s,
a herring in twenty minutes. There is no woolliness, no loss of flavour
or aroma. The difference is due to the fact that, whereas in dry freezing
there is a breaking up of the actual muscular fibres due to the formation
of ice crystals, in brine-freezing the ice crystals are so small that the
muscular fibres are entirely unaffected, and on thawing return to the
normal. J. A. T.

Telescope-eye of Goldfish. — I. Amemiya {Journ. Coll. Agric. Univ.,
Tokyo, 1917, 6, 245-59, 1 pi., 2 figs.) Among varieties of goldfish
two kinds of " telescope-eyes " occcur, those directed laterally and those
directed vertically. These peculiar eyes appear to be in this case the
outcome of artificial selection. In deep-sea fishes the telescope-eye is
adapted to faint light and is quite different from the goldfish eye. Thus
the anterior chamber is spacious in the goldfish, filled up by the lens in
the deep-sea type ; the retina in the goldfish is degenerate in the pos-
terior region, where it is strongest in the d'eep-sea type ; there is no
real accommodation apparatus in the interior of the goldfish eye. Some
other differences are explained. J. A. T.

Caudal Fin of Chaudhniria. — R. H. Whitehouse {Records Indian
Museum, 1918, 14, 65-6, 1 fig.). In this eel from Inle Lake the caudal
fin is discontinuous, whereas in all other eels it is continuous with the

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 369

dorsal and anal fins, whose fin-rays are supported by interspinous bones
■alternating with the neural and haemal spines. There is a space devoid^
of fin-rays (six or seven vertebrae) separating the caudal fin from the
last vertebra with fin-rays attached. Two large hypural bones are
present, fused at their bases, and firmly fixed or fused to the last
centrum. Tlius the caudal fin is ivholly a ventral structure in this fish,
whereas in the majority of Teleosts a few dorsal elements enter into the
caudal fin. It is probable that the caudal fin in Ghaudlmrki is a more
definite propulsive organ than in other Apodes. J. A. T.

c. Greneral.

Fauna of Coastal Waters. — C. G. Joh. Petersen {Rep. Danish
Biol. Stat., 1918, 25, 1-62, 11 pis., 16 figs.). A survey is taken of the
work done from 1883-1917 in the valuation of the sea-bottom in
Danish coastal waters. Much information has been obtained by
using, in addition to the dredge, etc., various forms of " bottom-
sampler." The sea-floor near the coasts shows flat plains of sand, mud,
or clay, or transition stages between these, with or without stones. The
vegetation consists of Zostera and Algge. It is not as a rule consumed
living, but is spread about in the form of detritus and then eaten. It
forms a thin layer on the mud, and is far more important than the
microscopic plankton. Eight distinctive animal communities are dis-
tinguished, and these are named after characteristic types : — Maconia,
Air a, Venus, Echinocardium cor datum and Ampklura fiUformis (con-
tracted to Echinocardiuni-filiformls), Brissopsis tyrifera and Amphiura
chiajei (contracted to Brassopsis-chiajei), Brissopsis lyrifera and Ophio-
glypha sarsii (contracted to Brissopsis-sarsii), Arnphilepis-Fecten, and
Baploops. Wherever there are stones, waving plants, or the like, of
considerable size, there is an " epifauna," such as the llodiola-einf amm
or the 3Iytiliis-eTg[famm. The nature of the epifauna communities or
of the level-living communities depends on the nature of the bottom,
the temperature, the salinity, the depth, the storms, or the inter-
relations established. In the Kattegat there are towards 24 millions of
tons of plants (about 4 millions of dry matter), about .5 millions of tons
of " useless " animals, about 1 million " useful " forms — namely, those
which furnish or may furnish food for fishes. It is estimated that there
are only some few thousands of tons (5-7000) of each important
species of food -fish, such as plaice, cod, and herring. Starfish make up
25,000 tons — more than all the important food-fishes altogether — while
predatory Crustaceans and Gastropods amount to no less than 50,000
tons. The food-fishes, being predatory animals, are far from economical
to produce. Only a relatively small number can be supported in a given
area — and it has to be borne in mind that some animals are much more
nutritionally valuable than others. Much of the weight of the animals
consumed by fishes may be lime-salts or water. A detailed investigation
of a limited area (Limf jord) shows that the quantity of fish-food avail-
able is by no means unlimited. Indeed, ithere may be more fish^ — ■
— e.g. plaice — per acre than the water can stand if they are to grow

2 G

370 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

rapidly. The Zostera areas are noteworthy for the abundance of Rissoa
and shnilar small Gastropods, which are of some importance as fish-food,
besides being devoured by crabs and starfishes. In addition there are
Gammarids, Isopods, Mysids, a few bivalves, and Polychsets. The
author has some suggestions to make in regard to the utilization of
Zostera and the improvement of the feeding-grounds of fishes.

J. A.T

rood of Post-larval Fishes. — Marie Y. Lebour {Joimi. Marine
Biol. Assoc, 1918, 11, 483-69, 7 figs.). It now seems a well-established
fact that the majority of young fish eat the small animals from the
plankton more than the diatoms and other unicellular organisms, except
in the cases of some of the very young fishes which have been found to
eat diatoms before taking to animal food, and in the few exceptional
cases of fish which are true vegetarians. Miss Lebour's investigation
deals with about fifty species. There is evidence of a certain amount of
selection of food. Fish with the smallest mouths eat the smallest forms,
both large and small being eaten by those with large mouths. Ento-
mostraca form the greater part of the food, and the commonest in order
of frequency is the Cladoceran Podon (probably inter medms), and the
Copepods Fseudocalanus elongatus, Temora longicornis, and Euterpina
acutifrons in the proportion of 6:4:3:2. Cirripede larvae and small
ova are also common ; Diatoms and Peridinids are mostly inside the
Copepods. J. A. T.

Disappearance of Conus arteriosus in Teleosts. — Wilbur C.
Smith (Anat. Record, 1918, 15, 65-71, 16 figs.). The conus arteriosus
is characteristic of Elasmobranchs and Dipnoi. It is present only in a
few Teleosts. Its gradual disappearance can be illustrated in a series of
types. In most cases it has been lost by intussusception or recession
into the ventricle, as Hoyer has maintained. In a limited number of
cases this is not the case ; the conus is taken up by the caudal elonga-
tion of the bulbus arteriosus. J. A. T.

Note upon the large Mononuclear Leucocytes of the Peripheral
Blood and the Macrophages at the Site of Injury amongst the
Wounded.— A. Nanta {C.R. Soc. Biol., 1918, 81, 256-9). In a
previous note Nanta showed that tissues around a wound are rapidly
infiltrated with leucocytes, chiefly macrophages ; whilst in the peripheral
blood a leucocytosis of 30 to 60,000 occurs rapidly, the differential
count showing 80-85 polynuclears and 5-15 mononuclears per cent.
In further investigating the role of the mononuclear leucocyte, Nanta
ol)served that the most severe and the most extensive wounds — but not
necessarily the most severe hsemori hages — were attended by the highest
mononuclear leucocytosis. Some of the mononuclears of the blood are
normal, but the majority are abnormal and show considerable increase
in strongly basophile protoplasm, and are often rich in irregular azuro-
phile granules, witli fissured nuclei, similar to those associated with
diseases of the spleen. Smear preparations from the spleen show the
presence of these cells in large numbers in the Malpighian corpuscles.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

371

The author suggests that the haematopoetic centres use up the disengaged
mononuclears to satisfy the immediate defensive needs of the organism,
and do not at the outset proceed to a reparatory proliferation. J. E.

The Leucocytes in Experimental Spirochetosis ictohaemorrhagica
in the Guinea-pig.— J. Bablet {G.R. Soc. Biol., l'J18, 81, 300-3).
Leucocytosis ranging from 7,600 to 35,000 per c.cm. against a normal
of 3,500 {sic) is a constant feature, and reaches a maximum in five
days, associated with the disappearance of mononuclear cells and the
early appearance of abnormal cells, particularly myelocytes ; most
marked during the first three days. The following table gives the
means of numerous counts : —

After Inoculation.

24 hours

1

48 hours

72 hours

4 days

5 days

18,200
36

6 days

White cells
Myelocytes, p.c.

10,900
60

8,000
51

12,400
47

11,600
36-6

13,100
82

The myelocytosis takes place at the expense of the polymorpho-
nuclear cells, which, however, regain their normal fiijure as the myelo-
cytes diminish. At first polymorphs with multilobular nuclei are the
rule, and single or bi-lobed cells the exception ; after the fourth day this
formula is reversed. J. E.

Tuuicata*

Philippine Ascidians. — "Willard G. Van Name {Bull. U.S. Nat.
Museum, 1918, 100, 49-174, 11 pi., 115 figs.). The Ascidian fauna of
the Philippines is an integral part of thit of the Malay region, not a
distinct and separate one. It is very abundant and varied in the
southern part, especially in the Sulu Archipelago. To the north, among
the islands, it diminishes both in abundance and variety. It is distinctly
a tropical fauna. Its relations to that of the temperate portions of the
Australian coast are much closer than to those of the less-distant regions
on the north, since on account of the warm currents many tropical
Malayan forms range southward alnng the east coast of Australia and
even through Bass Strait. Forty-six species are dealt with, including
two new genera and eight new species. J. A. T.

Vascular System of Ascidian. - Selig Hecht {Amer. Journ.
Physiol., 1918,45, 157-87, 6 figs.) finds that the blood of Axcidia atra
is colourless and transparent ; that it flows throuiih the body under an
appreciable pressure ; that the blood plasma is isotonic with sea-water ;
and that the blood has an acid reacti(ni, tlie aciditv being resident in
the green corpuscles and not in the plasma. There are at least two
kinds of cells in the blood — pigmented and unpigmented. Of the
pigmented cells, the green are distributed all over the body, the orange

2 c 2

372 SUMMARY OF CUERENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

are localized in the branchial sac, and the blue in the regions of the
viscera, etc. Some of the unpigmented cells are amoeboid : others are
not. In the green cells the pigment is a compound containing vanadium,
probably in a stage of oxidation corresponding to V2O3. It is not a
respiratory pigment, but is most likely of value as a catalytic agent.
The coagulation of the blood depends on the agglutination of its cells.
Clotting often occurs within the intact blood system as a result of
vigorous external stimulation.

The heart is long and has a node (demonstrable physiologically and
anatomically) which divides it unequally. A pericardial body is present.
In most specimens a pulsation series shows about twice as many advisceral
beats as abvisceral beats. The pulse-rate decreases as the size of the
animal increases. It is greater in the advisceral phase, and the velocity
of the contraction-wave is greater in the advisceral direction. There is
a circulation of the blood in the advisceral direction. The reversal of
the heart-beat may be due to the alternating dominance as pacemakers
of the two ends of the heart. The heart-beat is myogenic, and the
contraction wave passes along the muscular elements across the heart.

J. A. T.

INVERTEBRATA.

MoUusca.
a. Cephalopoda.

Posterior Salivary Glands of Cephalopods. — F. Botazzi {Atti R.
Accad. Lincei Rend., 1918, 27, 191-6, 227-30). Experiments on the
toxic action of the secretion of the posterior salivary glands of Octopus
macropus point to the effect being due to the presence of substances
analogous to tiramine, histamine, and coline in the secretion. The
rapid effect of the secretion on the crabs which the cuttlefish bites
is well known. The secretion also digests crab-muscle, and contains
proteolytic and peptolytic ferments. J. A. T.

Arthropoda.
a. Insecta.

Reflex Immobilization in Arthropods. — E. Eabaud {Bull. Soc.
Zool. France, 1918, 42, 140-5). Some insects become "immobile"
when turned back downwards, and may remain stiff for a few seconds
or for as long as twenty minutes. This is well seen in several dragon-
flies (e.g. Lestes viridis and Aeschna cyanea). The immobility lasted
for about thirty seconds in Gordulogaster annulatus, for twenty minutes
in Calopteryx splendens. The phenomenon was also observed in some
Lepidoptera (e.g.Spilosoma menthastri), some Diptera (e.g. Dexia rustica),
and very markedly in an Asilid, Machimus pilipes. The removal of
the tarsal joints from all contact with a surface is the immediate factor
which puts a stop to mobilizing stimuli and allows immobilizing influences
to get the upper hand. In active flight the tarsal excitation is replaced
by that of the wing-beats and by visual stimuli. J. A. T.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

373

Role of Ganglia in Immobilization. — E. Rabaud {Bull. Soc. Zool.
Frame, 1918, 42, 158-66). Experiments made on a Millipede {Lepto-
iul'us belqicus), and various insects (Coleoptera, Odonata, Lepidoptera)
show that reflex immobilization does not depend exclusively on this or
that ganglion. It depends on the nervous system as a whole, its
excitability, and its relations with the outer world. But the suppression
of particular ganglia means a restriction of a varying number of excita-
tions, and this works towards reflex immobilization. In different types
corresponding ganglia vary in importance. Thus in insects with big
eyes the cerebral ganglia count for much, since the visual stimuli are
intensely counteractive of immobilization. In insects with small eyes
other areas of stimulation become relatively more important. J. A. T.

Study of Ant Larvae. — W. M. "Wheeler (Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc,
1918, 57, 293-343,12 figs.). Various Ponerine larvae when fed by the
workers are turned on their backs, and fragments of insects are placed
on their concave ventral surfaces. On these the larva discharges salivary
secretion with a strong proteolytic ferment, and part of this is licked up
by the nurses. In some other larv» which receive liquid food there
are tubercles and other delicate outgrowths from which exudation
occurs. There may be fleshy lobes of the labium, or a cluster of
tubercles about the head, or a tentacle-like process from the mid-
ventral line of the mesothorax. This stage is called by Wheeler the
" trophidium."

Labval Stages of Pachysima ^thiops.

(A) Ventral and (B) lateral views of first larval stage (" trophidium ")

of Pachysima lethiops.

374 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Larval Stages op Pachysima ^thiops.

(A) Second, (B) third, and (C) fourth (full-grown) larval stages of
Pachysima xthiops.

The exudation is mainly blood-serum plus nutrient material con-
tributed by the fatty body. It probably escapes under pressure through
microscopic pores in the cuticle. There may also be exudation from
special skin-glands. This may evaporate from or be licked, off special
tufts of setaB.

According to Wheeler, who confirms Rabaud's observations on some
tropical wasps, there is a relationship of nutritive exchange between
the larva3 of some' ants and the workers. For this the term "tro-
phallaxis " is proposed, and the theory suggested is that this inter-
relation lies at the basis of the social life of ants. In a widening vortex
it may pass from an exchange between larva and female to an exchange
between adults, or between ants and their guests, or between ants and
Aphides. The paper is one of extraordinary interest. J. A. T,

Dimorphic Colouring- in Lepidoptera. — Arnold Pictet (6'. R. Soc.
Fhys. Hist. Nat. Geneve, 1918, 35, 17-22). The author has calculated
that 99-6 p.c. of insects are eliminated in early Hfe, hence the large
number of eggs usually laid by the female. Homochromic or protective

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY. ETC. 375

coloration does not save more than a small percentage, but if it were not
established there would in some cases be no survivors at all. In some
Lepidoptera the male shows cryptic coloration, while the female does
not ; and the female is often much larger. In some such cases the
male insect hatches out first, in Lymantria dispar, 6 to 12 days before
the female ; in Macrotliylacea ruM, 4 to 10 days ; in Malacosoma neustria,

4 to 10 days ; in Lasiocampa quercns, i) to 13 days ; in Saturnia pavonia^

5 to 13 days. The males hatched out first will have to wait some days
before mating, therefore cryptic colouring is more important for the
males. The female may be immediately mated, and the egg-laying may
be finished the day after hatching, if not on the same day. In twenty-
two species where the sexes are alike in colouring and size it was found
that the duration of the life-history up to the day of hatching is precisely
the same in the two sexes. Mating takes place at once, and survival is
not affected by conspicuous colours or the absence of cryptic coloration.
In species where both sexes are protectively coloured there is often an

.interval between the hatching of the two sexes. Sometimes the males
emerge first, sometimes the females. Therefore both must have defences,
such as cryptic coloratiou. This does not save the majority, e.g., from
other Arthropods which do not depend much on vision ; but it saves the
requisite number of the surviving minority from the eyes of Mammals,
Birds, and other Vertebrates. J. A. T.

Inheritance of Extra Bristles in Drosophila.— Edna M. Reeves
{Univ. Galifornia Ffiblications, Zoology, 1916, 13, 495-515, 1 fig.).
There is some evidence of Mendelian inheritance (with three factors)
concerned in the development of extra bristles in the fruit-fly (Drosophila
melanog aster Merg. = D. ampelophila Leow.) But there is also some
evidence in favour of regarding this as a fluctuating variation. Thickened
hairs gave evidence of a partial inheritance. There is no sex-linkage
involved in the extra bristles. Selection for an increased number of
extra bristles made no advance, the tendency being to return to the
conditions of four and five bristles. High-grade parents do not
produce high-grade off"spring ; in fact there is no definite relation between
parent and offspring as to the number of extra bristles. J. A. T.

Coloration of Tiger-beetles. — Victor E. Shelford (Illinois
Biological 3Ionographs, 1917, 3, 395-532, 32 pis.). The colour-patterns
of Cicindelidffi are definitely related to elytral structures. Longitudinal
stripes in which pigment usually occurs lie in the area of the chief
tracheal trunks ; there are seven cross-bands in which pigment does not
develop ; the second and third and the fifth and sixth of these are often
joined to make one of each pair. Pigment usually occurs about the
bases of setse, which usually lie in the lines of the tracheae. In ontogeny
the elytra show a spotted condition corresponding to the system of cross-
bands and longitudinal stripes. The longitudinal stripes are usually
more pronounced. The origin of the various markings in the group is
traced. The colour-patterns and the structures to which they are related
constitute a mechanism, the directions of movement of which are limited,
i.e. easier in some directions than others. The colour-pattern plans

376 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

break when the related structures do. Hereditary changes and modifica-
tions due to stimulation (e.g. high temperature) during ontogeny are in
the same direction. Laws governing the mechanism are the same
throughout. Orthogenesis is illustrated, but all the ontogenetic changes
cannot be said to illustrate recapitulation of phylogeny. During onto-
geny some species pass through colour-stages corresponding to geographic
races, but the biogenetic law of recapitulation is of doubtful application.
The brilliant colours are due to thin surface films of material having
properties of metals. Changes in colour during ontogeny are from
green and blue toward red or brown, except in Gicmdela lepida, where it
is from yellow (gold) to green. The centre of distribution is about the-
Indian Ocean. Experimental modifications nearly duplicate certain
geographic races in conditions similar to those in the experiment. The
more brilliant colours are in warm arid localities. J. A. T.

Leaf-eating Crane-fly.— A. E. Cameron {Ann. Entomol. Soc.
America, 191H, 11, 67-89, 18 figs.). An account is given of the life-
history of Gylindrotoma splendens Doane from Vancouver Island, which
is peculiar in that the larvae feed openly on Bryophytic and Spermato-
phytic plants. The female cuts a slit in the epidermis on the under
side of the leaf by means of her saw-toothed ovipositor. The sub-
translucent glistening white eggs are partially concealed. The period
of incubation is two to three weeks. The newly hatched larvte eat
holes in the leaves ; their movements suggest those of " looper " cater-
pillars ; they hibernate among dead leaves in their second stage ; they
resume feeding in spring ; they pupate in the middle of May ; the pupal
period lasts for six ta ten days ; there are at least three moults before
pupation, one before and two after hibernation. J. A. T.

Viability of Mosquito-eggs. — A. Bacot {Parasitology, 1918, 10,
280-3). Eggs of Stegomyia fasciata may remain dormant out of water,
but in humid atmosphere, for fifteen months, and develop thereafter.
Immersed eggs remained dormant for five months, but the limit is
probably about a year. J, A. T.

The Pear Thrips.— A. E. Cameron and R. C. Treherne {Bidl.
Dept. Ayric. Canada, 1918, 15, 1-51, 22 figs.). Blighting of fruit-trees
in Vancouver Island is often due to Taeniothrips inconsequetis, the life-
history of which is discussed. An account is given of the egg, the larva,
the prepupa, the pupa, and the adult. The duration of the adult's life
in natural conditions is probably about four to six weeks. The mature
larvaj migrate from tree to soil, the adults migrate from soil to tree. A
careful account of the ovipositor and of oviposition is given. No male
has been seen in America, but a solitary specimen was found byCollinge
in England. Parthenogenesis is thus the normal mode of reproduction.
Unlike parthenogenetic Phasmids and Aphids, the Pear Thrips produces
only one generation in the year. J. A. T.

Rectal Tracheation of Dragon-fly Larva. — Anna M. Cullen
{Froc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, 1918, 75-81, 2 figs.). In the larva
of Aryia putrida there s^'^m to be two areas of respiration in the hind-

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 377

gut, a small one in the seventh segment,, a larger one in the eighth and
ninth segments. The respiration of the former may be carried on
through the trachea supplied by branches of the right and left visceral
trachete. The larger area is supplied through the branches of the right
and left dorsal rectal trachea and the right and left lateral rectal tracheae.
There are also caudal gills, and respiration may take place also all over
the surface of the body through the thin wall. J. A. T.

Rectal TracheaB of Dragon-fly Larva.^jANET P. Jamieson {Froc
Acad. Nat. Sci..\Philadelphia, 1918, 81-.S-1, 2 figs.). The rectal epithelium
of the larval Argia talamanca, which lives by waterfalls, has three main
longitudinal folds. There are two main longitudinal trachea, the
branches of which are traced. All have a black pigment. J. A. T.

Hind-gut and Rectal Tracheas in Dragon-fly Larva. — Mitchel
Carroll {Proc. Acad. Nat. 8ci. Fhiladelphia, 1918, S6-10?>, 6 figs.).
An intimate description is given of the hind-gut of Mecistogaster
modestus. Six divisions are recognized, five of them with epithelial
folds. The distribution of the trachea is dealt with. The tracheole
supply of the hind-gut is not rich. All the tracheal twigs end on the
basement membrane side of the thick columnar epithelium. The
only part of the rectum that has a tracheal supply is the columnar
epithelium. It seems improbable that any diffusion takes place between
the gases in the rectal tracheoles and those in the water in the rectum.
Yet the larva can live without their caudal gills. Perhaps the blood in
the longitudinal folds of spongy or reticulate tissue captures oxygen
from the water in the rectum. J. A. T.

Experiments on Respiration in Larval Dragon-flies. — Joseph H.

BoDiNE {Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, 1918, 10o-12, 3 figs.).
Zygopterous larva (Ischnura and EnaUagma) breathe by means of the
rectum from the time of hatching until transformation. Caudal " gills "
serve only in a mechanical way, as rudders in the locomotion of the
larva. Respiration through the skin of the larva is doubtful, but if it
takes place it is only in a slight degree, not supplying enough oxygen
for the respiratory needs of the larva. Ptegular rhythmic contractions
of the rectum take place throughout the aquatic life of the larva. The
rhythm of rectal contractions is not interfered with by removal of the
caudal "gills." J. A. T.

Spermatogenesis of an Orthopteron. — ^J. Machida {Journ. Coll.
Agric. Univ. Tokyo, 1917, 6, 215-44, 3 pis.). The phases of
spermatogenesis in Atractomorpha bedeli are described in detail. The
first spermatocyte mitosis is a transverse reduction-division ; the second
is a longitudinal equation-division. The longitudinal cleft in the
spermatogonia at least appears to be a true longitudinal split. Some
deeply stained nucleoli always appear in every resting stage of the
spermatogenesis after the chromosomes have diffused, but these bodies
do not seem to give rise to the accessory chromosome or any other.
The accessory chromosome is distinctly seen in the telophase of the
secondary spermatogonia. Throughout the growth period and the

378 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

prophase of the first spermatocytes the accessory chromosome occupies
its position attached closely to the nuclear membrane. It does not
divide in the first spermatocyte mitosis, but passes over to one of the
daughter-cells, being therefore absent in one-half of the second sperma-
tocytes. In the second spermatocytes, in which it is present, it divides
longitudinally. It becomes concealed for a time among the mass of
the chromosomes, appearing again when these diffuse. The idiozome,
the mitochondria, the nebenkern are also discussed. J. A. T.

Biology of Chermes. — H. M. Steven {Proc. Roy. Soc. Edinhnrgh,
1918, 37, 356). The genera Chermes s. str. and Cnaphalodes are found
to have two separate cycles in Britain : — {a) A cycle of two generations,
Fundatrix and Gallicola non-migrans ; and (&) a cycle of five genera-
tions, Fundatrix, Gallirola migrans, Colonici, Sexupara, and Sexuales.
Whether the cycles are those of separate species or of biological races of
one species can only be determined by further research. The non-
migrating forms are more serious enemies to spruce than are the migrat-
ing forms. The collective damage to larch by Colonici of Chermes and
Cnaphalodes, and by Progredieutes of the lattei', is serious in Britain.
The author adheres to Blochmann's theory that the spruce was the
original host of the Chermesidas, and that the winged forms are trans-
ported by the wind to trees of other genera, and there adapt themselves
to feeding and breeding, the migration back to the spruce being similai'ly
effected. ' " J. A. T.

Notes on Earwigs. — H. H-. Brindley {Proc. Cambridge Phil. Soc,
1918, 19, 167-77). Evidence is submitted that the dimorphism of the
forcipes in males of Forficida auricularia is not the result of or influenced
by Gregarine infection, as Cliard believed. Notes are made on other
parasites besides the Gregarine Clepsidrina ovata, viz. Filaria locustse,
the Tachinid fly, Rhacodineura antiqua, in Forficula tomis, scarlet mites,
and fungoid parasites. As regards food, it seems established that many
garden plants are seriously attacked by earwigs, and that the latter can
continue healthy on a purely vegetarian diet. But earwigs sometimes
kill and devour other insects larger than ihemselves, besides small insect
larvse. Only thirteen species of birds seem to have been reported as
capturing earwigs, and most of them as very sparingly. They may be
distasteful, and a large number together emit a well-defined odour.
Domestic fowls always eat them readily. J. A. T.

Biology of Phthirus pubis. — G. H. F. Nuttall {Parasitology,
1918, 383-405, 9 figs.). The crab-louse appears to be parasitic chiefly
on persons leading an active sexual life. So far it has only been twice
recorded on another host than man, namely, the dog. It may spread
from the pubic and perianal region to other parts, e.g. abdomen, breast,
and axilla. It occurs very rarely about the eyelids. The head is rarely
infested, because the hairs are too close together. Infestation mostly
occurs by shed hairs bearing larvae or adufts. The adults cling con-
tinuously to hairs, moving from one to another. The females seem to
be more numerous than the males in the ratio of 3 : 1 . A female raised
experimentally laid three eggs per day, with a total of twenty-six ; the

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 379

hatching (on the leg) lasted seven to eight days ; there are three moults
and larval stages before maturity is reached ; the life-cycle is completed
in twenty-two to twenty-seven days (on the leg). The feeding is prac-
tically .continuous, interrupted only by moulting, and the insects die
very quickly when removed from the host. Warmth attracts them when
they are removed from man. (See also p. 304.) J. A. T.

S. Arachnida.

Notes on Mussel-mite. —Ernest Carroll Favst (Trans. Amer.
Micr. Soc, 1918, 37, 125-X, 1 pL). There is a wide range of variability
in the species Unioiiicola aculeata, and some of the peculiarities of the
material dealt with are recorded. Special attention is directed to the
heteromorphic fourth leg of the male. The external male genital organs
are very complicated, consisting of an ornate sculpture of chitin, to
which prominent muscle-bands are attached. As Koenike has shown,
the mite is free-swimming during a considerable part of its life, and
seeks the mussel at times of metamorphosis and propagation. Those
dealt with in this paper were embedded in thin cysts in the subdermal
connective-tissue of the mantle and foot, and had done no harm outside
the cyst. J. A. T.

Mange Mites. — E. L. Trouessart {Bull. Soc. Zool. France, 1918,
42, 151-8, 3 ligs.). The pilicolous Sarcoptids of mammals form a series
parallel to that of the plumicolous Sarcoptids of birds. In the latter,
however, the most marked peculiarities are seen in the adaptations the
males show for catching and holding the females ; in the former the
most marked peculiarities are adaptations for gripping the hair, and may
be seen i]i both sexes. Some of the varying fixing organs are figured
and described. The author establishes two new genera, Euryzonus
(depressed and elongated), and Atopomelus (compressed laterally).

J. A. T.

Intracellular Dig-estion in an Acarid. — Ed. Reichenow {BoU.
R. Soc. Espan. Hist. Nat., 1918, 18, 258-73, 4 figs.). In a Gamasid,
Llpomjssus saurarimi Oudemans, which is a carrier of the blood
parasites of the wall-lizard, there is in the mid-gut a process of intra-
cellular digestion. In the cells of the lining epithelium there are to be
seen red blood corpuscles of the host in process of digestion. It appears
that there is little or no secretion of digestive juice into the lumen of
the gut, though bacterial action may have a liquefying effect. The
epithelial cells act as phagocytes, and exhibit intracellular digestion, as
in lower Metazoa. Oocytes occur among the epithelial cells of the
intestinal wall and take a direct part in the absorption. The author is
inclined to think that the limits of the occurrence of intracellular
digestion are much wider than has been supposed. J. A. T.

Mites as Disease-carriers.— G. Tegdora {'' Redia,'' 1918, 13,
105-14.). This paper discusses in particular the species of mite,
apparently Leptus aJcamushi, which is the vehicle of a Japanese river-
fever. Attention is also directed to Dermacentor venustus, which

380 SUMMARY OF CUKKENT RKHKAKGHES RELATING TO

appears to disseminate the spotted fever of the Rocky Mountains.
African recurrent fever, due to Spirochseta diMoni, is known to be spread
by Ornithodorus moiihata ; European recurrent fever, due to Spirochseta
recurrentis, is probably spread by Argas persiciis, or by the bed-bug ;
American typanosomiasis, due to Trypanosoma cruzi, may be carried by
Ornithodorus mouhata and Rhipicephalus sanguineus ; and a recurrent
fever of Persia is said to be carried by Ornithodoros tholozani and
0. canestrinii. J. A. T.

New Harvest Mite.— A. Beelese {" Redia,'' 1918, 13,93-7, 1 pL).
A diagnosis is given of Parathromhidium paolii g. et sp. n., a beautiful
form found in Apulia, underground, among the oothecge of Dociostaurus
maroccanus. The author shows how the new genus differs from
JSutrombidium, Neotrombidium, Microtrombidium, and other related
genera. • J. A. T.

f. Crustacea.

Reactions of Sand Crab. — Harold T. Mead (Univ. California
Fubl. Zoology, 1917, 16, 4.S1-8, 6 figs.). Experiments on Eremita
analoga, common on the wave-washed parts of the sandy beaches of
California, show that the animals tend (1) to run down slopes, and
(2) to go towards the ocean, when within 200 feet at least of it, although
their view of tbe ocean be intercepted. A 7 p.c. slope away from the
ocean neutralizes the ocean ward tendency. Normally the eyes count
for much in guiding the crabs to their feeding beds (they catch small
organisms with their feathery antennae), and in apprising them of the
proximity of birds and other enemies. No " learning " the way out of
a simple labyrinth was detected. The range of stimuli to which the
animals are susceptible is comparatively narrow. J. A. T.

Sensory Structures of Crab's Claw. — I. Salkind (Annales Sci.
Nat. ZooL, 1918, 2, 121-31, 5 figs.). The forceps or great claw of
the common shore-crab {Carcinus msenas) is very sensitive, especially
near the tips of the propodite and dactylopodite. It bears three kinds
of sensory structures : (1) crypts in the cuticle innervated by nerve-
fibres, (2) peripheral nerve-ending in simple contact with the cuticle,
and (8) complex rosette-shaped structures with a vibratory apparatus in
the centre. J. A. T.

Further Observations on Xenocceloma brumpti. — M. Caullery and
F. Mesnil {JBull. Soc. ZooL France, 1918, 42, 169-78, 5 figs.). This
remarkable Copepod is embedded between the ectoderm and the somaioo-
pleure of Polycirrus arenivorm, and has neither appendages nor digestive
canal, nor nervous system. It is enveloped in epithelium continuous
with the ectoderm of the Annelid, and its axial cavity is continuous
with the coelom of its host. The united stage has not been found. A
description is given of a " meandriform " organ, of ovaries, oviducts,
testes, and seminal vesicle. The hermaphroditism is noteworthy. The
spermatozoa are filiform and very long. The nearest ally is Saccopsis
alleni, with a distinct fixing apparatus, which Brumpt found at Plymouth
as a parasite of Polycirrus aurantiacus. J. A. T.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, KIC, 381

Crustaceans from Interior of Australia.— Chas. Chilton {Trans.
R. Soc. Australia.. 1917, 41, -475-82, 7 tigs.)- A small collection included
HemiporceUio strzeJecki sp. n., Cubaris daytonmsis sp. n., Apus austra-
liensis, Estheria pacJcardi, a species of Boeckella, and a few other forms.
Collectors of small Crustacea are advised to take samples of dried mud
from the water-holes and hatch out the Crustacea at leisure. " This
would be easier and more likely to lead to the discovery of new forms
than trying to collect the animals on the rare occasions when the
explorer finds the pools are full after rain." J. A. T.

Fossil Species of Phreatoicus. — Chas. Chilton {Journ. R. Soc.
N.S. W., 1918, 51, 865-88, 18 figs.). From shales near Sydney, belonging
to Trias-Jura, or perhaps Upper Trias, R. J. Tillyard obtained several
specimens of a fossil Isopod, which he provisionally named Phreatoicus
ivianamattensis sp. n. This is confirmed by Chilton, who places the
fossil species near P. austraUs. The genus belongs to a primitive group
of Isopods. J. A. T.

Australian Isopods. — Chas. Chilton {Trans. R. Soc. Australia.
1917, 41, 891-404). A survey is taken of the Australian species of
Serolis, including S. bakeri sp. n., near S. minuta. The genus is marked
by the much depressed body, circular or oval outline, and widely
developed epimera. The first peraeon segment has the epimeral portion
very largely developed and produced forwards so as to enclose the head-
shield on both sides. A description is given of the hitherto unknown
adult male of Deto marina Chilton. J. A. T.

Respiratory Mechanism of Shore-crab. — Robeet K. S. Lim (Proc.
R. Soc. Edinburgh, 1917-18, 38, 48-56). The direction of the respi-
ratory current in Carcinns msenas is postero-anterior, whether the crab
is above the sand or buried in it. But reversal may occur, more
frequently when the crab is buried, or when a strong ink suspension is
used in experiment. The sub-branchial cleft may be divided into four
separate spaces which are in direct communication with gaps between
certain gill-origins, the whole constituting the sub-branchial inlets, the
direction of which determines the direction of the inhaled currents. The
relation between the position of the gills and these inlets allows for a
convenient and maximal flow. J. A. T.

New Isopod from British Guiana. — Walter E. Collinge {Journ.
Linn. Soc. ZooL, 1918, 34, 61-3, 1 pL). A description is given of
Paracubaris spinosus g. et sp. n., a terrestrial Isopod, one of the
Cubarida3, differing from Cubaris in the form of the cephalon, antennse,
maxillipedes, and the first mesosoraatic segment, and in the extension of
the uropods beyond the telson. It is of special interest in that it
represents a type of Cubarid^e only known as yet from the Western
Hemisphere. J- A. T.

Oral Appendages of Isopoda. — Walter E. Collinge {Journ.
Linn. Soc. ZooL, 1918, 34, 65-93, 8 pi.). The first maxilla and the
maxillipedes of Idoteidse are minutely described in twenty-four types, e.g.

382 SUMMAKY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

1

with reference to the number of spines on the inner lobe of the former
and the number of joints in the palp of the latter. It is proposed
to divide the sub-order Valvifera into two groups : — Astacillinea
(Astacillidsp, Chgetiliidsi, Amesopodidse), and Idoteina (Idoteidae,
Pseadidotheida^, Holognathidse). J. A. T,

Siboga Crabs, — J. J. Tesch {Resultats Explor. Sihoga, 1918,
Monographe 39c, 1-148, 6 pi.)- The Siboga Indo-Pacific collection of
Catometopous Crabs in the five families : Hymenosomida?, Retroplumidae
(= Ptenoplacidae), Ocypodidag, Grapsidae, and Gecarcinidse, comprised
sixty-eight species. Of these only four were new, which is explained by
the fact that the Siboga was mostly concerned with deep water, whereas
the Ocypodidse, Grapsidse, and Gecarcinidse are shore animals, and have,
moreover, been largely collected of recent years. The author has
discovered numerous new facts, and he has extended his range beyond
the Siboga material so as to present a synopsis of all the known Indo-
Pacific species. J. A. T.

British Occurrence of Nematoscelis megalops. — 0. M. Jorgensen
{Report Dove Marine Laboratory, 1918, New Series, 1, 65, 1 fig.).
Large numbers of the Schizopod Nematoscelis viegalops Sars. were
found dead in high-water sandy pools at Cullercoats. It is an oceanic
form occurring in the North and South Atlantic ; it is recorded also
from the Indian Ocean, the Mediterranean, off the Labrador and Nova
Scotia coasts, and in the Irish Sea. This appears to be the first record
of its occurrence on the eastern coast of Great Britain. The largest
specimens were 20 mm. long. Amongst them there were specimens of
the large form of Euthemisto compressa Goes. • J. A. T.

Notes on Development of Shore-crab. — Olga M. Jorgensen
{Report Dove Marine Laboratory, Cullercoats, 1918, New Series, 7,
62-4). The length of the first larval or protozosea stage of Garcinus
msenas appears to be between twenty and thirty hours (in one case
about forty-four hours). The second stage or first zoasa appears to last
from forty-eight to seventy-two hours. Average length measurements
for the first three stages are given : — protozosea, 1 • 7 mm. ; first zo«a,
1*95 mm. ; and second zo^a, 2*1 mm. J. A. T.

Annulata.

Lymph-glands of Pheretima. — G. S. Thapar {Records Indian
Museum, 1918, 15, 69-76, 1 pL). In earthworms of this genus there
are segmentally arranged whitish glands on each side of the dorsal
blood-vessel throughout the intestinal region. The capsule of the gland
is peritoneal in origin, and may be regarded as an irregular sac-like
forward bulging of the septum which has become very delicate. The
main mass of the cells of the glands consists of leucocytes with a phago-
cytic function as Schneider showed. The ccelomic fiuid is yellowish ;
it contains leucocytes, minute colourless non-granular cells, yellow cells,

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC, 383

and cells with refractile granules or globules. The coelouiic pouches or
tunnels described by Beddard and Fedarb in Pheretima postlmma were
found by Thapar only in one specimen out of many, and appear there-
fore to be inconstant. J. A. T.

Oligochseta of Inle Lake. — J. Stephenson {Records Indian
Museum, 1918, 14, 9-lS, 5 figs.). Specimens of Branchiura sowerhyi
have enabled the author to demonstrate the presence of a penis (perhaps
a pseudopenis, according to Micliaelsen's definition), and to show that
in this form, as in Kaivamuria japonim, the muscular coelomic chamber
is the apparatus for extrusion. The number of gills was forty to forty-
seven in the shorter worms, and over ninety in the longer specimens.
One fragment had 140 pairs. They vary considerably in length. The
description of a posterior sucker in Chsetogaster bengalensis seems to be
a mistake. The posterior attachment is effected by hooked setas.

J. A. T.

Monograph on Polychasts. — R. Horst {Monographie Siboga Ex-
peditie, 1917, 24 lb, 45-14.3, pis. xi-xxix). This portion of the Siboga
monograph on Polychaeta Errantia deals with the two families Aphro-
ditidge and Chrysopetalida3, and includes a large body of microscopic
detail in regard to the seta; and scales. J. A. T.

Nematohelrainthes .

Reproduction in Nematodes. — Paul S. Welch and L. P. Wehrle
{Trans. Amer. 3Iicr. Soc, 191 s, 37, 141-76). Two species, Gephalobus
dtibins Maupas and DipJogaster serivora Cobb, were studied in culture
continuously for over three years. In the former no males were found ;
the average duration of oviposition is sixteen days ; the average number
of eggs per individual was 139 ; the larvae emerge in •2-5-4 days after
oviposition and reach maturity in eight to fourteen days ; growth usually
ceases three to six days after sexual maturity ; the average daily increase
in body-length is about 0-020 mm.; the length of life varies from
twenty to sixty-one days. In DipJogaster serivora the sexes are separate ;
one female may unite with several males and one male with several
females ; fertile ova follow mating for a time, after which infertile ova
are laid until a second mating, after which the same sequence usually
occurs ; it seems that the supply of spermatozoa received by the female
becomes exhausted ; viviparity occurs from time to time, and the young
as produced devour the mother from within ; the viviparous young
develop from fertilized eggs and develop into normal males and females ;
females are in the majority, but males are common ; the cessation of
o-rowth occurred on the eighth to ninth day ; the length of life follow-
ing cessation of growth varies from six to fifteen days ; the average
length of life wasabout eighteen days for both sexes. J. A. T.

Toxic Constituent of Nematodes. — Torai Shimamura and Hajimb
Fujii {Journ. Coll. Agric. Univ. Tokyo, 1917, 3, 189-258, 4 figs.).
From the perivisceral fluid and the dried powder of Ascaris lumbricoides

384 SUiMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

and A. megalocephala lias been isolated a highly toxic albumose-peptone
(" Askaron "). It produces symptoms like those associated with infection
with Ascarids. It is present in Filaria iminitis, Sderosfomum vulgare,
Oxyuris curvula, and Trkliocephalus depress iusculus ; and also in bot
larvas. Horses are the most susceptible ; then, in descending order,
guinea-pigs, dogs, and rabbits. Eats and mice are refractory. After
poisoning with Askaron a high specific cellular resistance is rapidly
established. J. A. T.

Platyhelminthes.

Cestodes of Hilsa. — T. Southw'ell and Baini Prashad (Records
Indian Museum, 1918, 15, 77-88, 2 pis.). In the lateral muscles of
the anadromous fish Hllsa iltsha were found larval (cystic) stages of
Rhyncliohothrium ilisha sp. n. ; and practically all stages between these
and the adult tapeworms were found in the intestine of the shark
Carcharinus gamjeticus which had swallowed the Hilsa. This is the
first case in which the life-history of an Indian Cestode has been
worked out. The cysts, containing the young tapeworm, consisted of a
club-like head and a long tail-like structure which was capable of con-
siderable movement, and appeared to help to moor the parasite in the
intestine, or to retain it in the lumen until the young tapeworm had
time to emerge. Cysts of Syndesmobothriumfilicolle were also found in
the lateral muscles of Hilsa. The mesentery and liver yielded an
interesting doubtful form, provincially named Ilisha partlienogenetica.
The generic characters are : — Small parasitic leaf -like worms occurring
in cylindrical cysts. Anteriorly there is a rostellum with four unarmed
suckers symmetrically arranged round its base. Sexual organs and
pores are absent. The development is parthenogenetic. The young are
quite like the adult, and find their way out of the parent, and repeat
the same life-history. J. A. T.

Hymenolepis nana Siebold and H. murina Dujardin. — F. H.

Stewart {Records Indian Museum, 1916, 12, 295-8, 2 pis.). Some
authorities regard H. nana in man as only a dwarfed variety of
H. murina in the rat ; others regard them as distinct species. If the
two are identical it is probable that man is infected as a rule by the
contamination of food by rats. The author was unsuccessful in trying
to infect two rats with H. nana from man, and this negative result
suggests that the two species are distinct. A short account is given of
microscopic sections of H. nana, with especial reference to the repro-
ductive organs. J, A. T.

North-American Trematodes. — H. W. Stunkard {Illinois Biol.
Monographs, 1917, 3, 287-39-4, 11 pis.). This paper deals with the
structure and relationships of Polystomidae (differing from all other
known Heterocotylea in being endoparasitic), Aspidogastridaj (both
ectoparasitic and endoparasitic, of direct development or with an inter-
mediate host, as adults found in both vertebrates and molluscs), and

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, KTC. 385

Paramphistomidse (the only forms retaining a primitive posterior sucker).
Four new species of PoZystom^i are described. Among- Paramphistoniidie
the new genus Alassostoma is established, characterized by the presence
of large oral evaginations which open independently into the oral
sucker, an oesophageal bulb of concentric muscle lamellse, a hermaphrodite
duct, germ glands near the middle of the body in the median line, both
testes anterior to the ovary, and other genital peculiarities. Important
also is the new genus and species Zijijocotyle ceratom, with subterminul
oral sucker, the posterior sucker divided or provided with a caudal
overhanging lip, separate openings to the male and " female ducts,
and without a cirrus sac. Considerable light is thrown on the inter-
relationships of the families of Trematodes. J. A. T.

New Amphistomid Trematode from a Fish. — S. CIoto and
Y. Matsudaira {Journ Coll. Sci. Univ. Tokyo, 1918, 39, Art. 8, 1-1'J,
1 pi., 2 figs.). A new parasite, Dissotrema papiUatum g. et sp. n., was
found in the rectum of Siganus fiiscexcens, a marine fish distributed from
Tokyo to the Philippines. Its appearance suggested the genus Param-
phistomum, but it seems to require the erection of even a new family.
For this the following diagnosis is given : — Digenea with more or less
cylindrical body ; with oral sucker close to the front end, and aceta-
bulum close to the hind end ; with long convoluted pre-pharynx and
well-developed pharynx ; ovary pre-testicular ; common genital aperture
ventral and median ; no buccal pouches, no ventral pouch. J. A. T.

American Stephanophialinas. — Ernest Carroll Faust {Trans.
Amer. Micr. Soc, 37, 1918, 183-98, 2 pi.). In this sub-family of
Trematodes (in the family Allocreadiidae) the integument is usually
aspinose, the circumoral papilltB are always six, the yolk glands extend
from tlie region of the pharynx to the posterior end of the body,
and the excretoiy bladder extends to the anterior border of the anterior
testis. There are three genera, Stephanophiala, Grepidostomnm, and
AcroUc//an//.s, and all the species (except C. metoectis Braun) are para-
sites of fresh water fishes. The new species, S. vitelloba, is described.
No life-hisrory has been worked out, but the cercarise probably have
pigmented eye-spots and a heavy tail. It is probable that the cercarise
and preceding parasitic stages occur in water-snails, and the distomula
in aquatic insects or crustaceans. J. A. T.

Reactions of Fresh-water Turbellarian. — Bbrnol R. Weimer
{Trans. Amer. Micr. Soc, 1918, 37, 111-24, 1 pi.). Experiments with
Pha/jocata gracilis show that these little animals exhibit a preference for
a smooth surface rather than for a rough one. That is to say, the
animal is positively thigmotactic to a smooth surface. This is not due
to varying amounts of mucous secreted. The animal is positively
geotropic (like unfed PJanaria macidata) and strongly negatively
phototropic. The rate of locomotion is the same for rough and smooth
surfaces. A histological study of specimens from Morgantown, W. Va.,
showed no cilia on the dorsal surface, but Woodworth described them
there on specimens from New England. J. A. T.

2 D

386 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Triclads from Inle Lake. — Tokio Kaburaki {Records Indian
Museum, 1918, 14, 187-94, 1 pL). Three new species of Planaria are
established, and the reproductive system in particular is described in
considerable detail. J. A. T.

Echinoderma.

Experiments with Larval Echinoids. — E. W. Macbride {Proc.
Roy. Soc, 1918, B., 90, 323-48, 7 pis., 5 figs.). If the larvae of
Echinus miliaris be exposed to the action of hypertonic sea-water for a
week commencing with the fourth day of development, many of them
will develop on the right side as well as on the left a hydrocoele or
water-vascular rudiment. In connexion with this second hydrocoele all
the structures which normally develop in connexion with the left
hydrocoele may make their appearance, viz. spines, tentacles and dental
sacs. If the larvas be starved during the first week of their existence
and then placed in favourable conditions as regards food and space,
they will continue their development, but many of them will be devoid
of both pedicellariffi and hydrocoele, and will have in place of both a
group of pointed spines on each side. Such larvse will, in the majority
of cases, be devoid of madreporic pore and axial sinus, but will possess
,a well-developed madreporic vesicle.

As hypertonic sea-water may unloose the potentiality of an unfertilized
ovum and lead to development, it is probable that the formation of a
right hydrocoele in larvge exposed to hypertonic sea-water implies the
actualization of a potentiality which is normally in abeyance. The
probable Gephalodiscus-V\ke ancestor of Echinoderms may perhaps be
credited with the possession of two hydrocceles. In the proto-echinoderm
one hydroccfile alone persisted. It is suggested that a small area of the
ccelomic wall gave origin to the hydrocoele bud or buds, and that
hormones producing morphogenic modifications were stored in the
hydrocoele bud. " When this area under the influence of stimulation
produced two hydrocoeles instead of one, these hormones were shed
abroad on both sides of the larva, although they had only been evolved
in connexion with the left side. The body of an embryo is not, like a
picture puzzle, a mosaic of pieces each destined to form a particular
organ, but consists of sheets of indifferent material ' without form or
void ' on which a formative ' something ' works and evokes the
beautiful detail of the adult structure." J. A. T.

Unstalked Crinoids of Siboga Expedition. — Austin H. Clark
(ResuUats Ezplor. Siboga, 1918, Monographic 421), ix + 1-300, 28 pi.,
17 figs.). The collection made by the Siboga, at the Aru Islands, Sulu
Archipelago, etc., included 149 Comatulids, of which 64 were new.
Among the features of special interest may be noted : — A new type
(Atopocrinus) with five arms and no basals, extremely small species of
Monachocriniis and Bythocrinus ; a very large species of Democrinus ; a
new type of Atehcrinus, with short cirri and very large basals ; extremely
small species of Compsometra ; small species of Decametra ; Psathyrometra ;
a series of types from the warm, shallow and muddy Java Sea, which
are marked by long and slender long-segmented cirri ; the most ornate

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPE, ETC. 387

Comatulid known (Strotometra ornatissimus), which exhibits an exag-
gerated eversion of the distal edges of the brachials, finding a parallel
only in the pentacrinite genus Comastrocrinus. J. A. T.

Coelentera.

New Australian Hydroids. — E. A. Briggs (Rec. Australian 31 us.,
1918, 12, 27-47, 2 pis.). A description is given of two new Plumularids,
Aglaophema hoivensis sp. n., near A. sinuosa Bale ; and Aglaophenopsis
vaga sp. n., which differs considerably from the four previously described
members of this genus. These species were all recorded from North
American coasts, so the discovery of a fifth on the coast of New South
Wales is interesting. The genus is marked by the presence of a phylacto-
gonium, which is a jointed, unbranched appendage springing from the
proximal internode of the hydrocladium, and bearing a single row
of sarcothecffi, and one or two terminal hydrothecse. A revision is made
of the Hydroids of Lord Howe Island. J. A. T.

New Sea-anemones from New Guinea.— Gilbert C. Bourne
{Quart. Journ. Micr. ScL, 1918, 63, 81-90, 3 pis., 2 figs.). A descrip-
tion is given of four new species of Phellia, and a new genus DecaphelUa
is erected for a fifth new form, with the characters of Phellia, save that
the capitulum has no musculature except for a mesogloeal sphincter at
its distal extremity, and that there are only ten complete macromesen-
teries bearing longitudinal retractor muscles. The order of appearance
of the tentacles in Phelliinie is discussed. It is argued that the
PhelliiuEe must stand apart from the other sub-families of the hetero-
geneous Sagartiidre (a group which has to be broken up), and must be
approximated to the Halcampidae. An interesting suggestion is made
in regard to the application of genetic principles to questions of morpho-
logy and classification. The presence of a single unit character like
acontia is not in itself such a positive mark of inter- relationship that all
the forms possessing it must be united into a single family. J. A. T.

Irish Actiniaria. — T. A. Stephenson {Proc. R. Irish Acad., 1918,
34, 106-6J:, 7 pis.). A collection made off Ireland includes Garlgrenia
desiderata g. et sp. n., an Efidocoelactid with six pairs of macromesen-
teries, Actinostohi atrostorna sp. n., Cgmbactis gossei sp. n., Actinernus
aurelia sp. n., w'hich is like a jellyfish, Chondrodactis coccinea sp. n., and
two other new species of this genus. The paper includes much histo-
logical detail. The amoeboid cells of the mesogloea show considerable
variety, and seem to have nervous as well as nutritive functions.

J. A. T.

Nature of Madreporarian Skeleton. — G. Matthai {Proc. Cambridge
Phil. Soc, 1918, 19, 160-3). It seems highly probable that von
Heider was right in regarding the Madre])orarian skeleton as formed
within the calicoblastic protoplasm. The calicoblastic ectoderm is now
found to be a multinucleated sheet of protoplasm devoid of cell-limits,
i.e. a syncytium. In Alcyonarian and Madreporarians alike the skeleton
seems to be formed within syncytial protoplasm according to physical
laws under the presiding activity of the living protoplasm which directs

2 D 2

cu

88 SUMMAEY OF CUERENT EESEARCHES RELATING TO

the complex skeletHJ architecture. The elements remain separate as
spicules in most Alcyonarians, but are united to forma compact skeleton
in others, and in all Madreporarians. " From this point of view, a
separate calcareous piece of an Alcyonarian might be regarded as a
diminutive corallum, and the corallum of a Madreporarian as a massive
spicuV, and finally, the formation of the Antliozoan skeleton would be
essentially similar to the formation of membrane bore in Vertebrates."

J. A. T.

Reactions of Astrseid Corals. — G. Matthai {Proc. Cambridge
Fliil. Soc, 11)18, 19, 164-6). Observations were made on species of
Mmandrina, Isophyllia, Favia and other genera. Ciliary movement
passes the food-particle into the nearest oral aperture. The mouth
dilates and the lip is directed towards the particle. The peristomial
cavity is narrowed and deepened, which helps to roll the food-particle
into the oral opening. There is an expansion of the tentacles of the
affected oral disc and of adjacent oral discs. There is an eversion of
the stomodajum and consequent exposure of the coelenteric cavity and
mesenterial coils. Then there is a restoration of the original condition.

A tentacle touched with a fine glass needle is withdrawn in a
manner resembling pseudopodial movement. The movement spreads to
neighbouring polyps. The amoeboid appearance of t'ne movements is in
conformity with the author's view that there are no muscular or nervous
elements. The so-called muscular fibres at the base of ectoderm and
endoderm are specialized connective tissue fibres which are without
nuclei and form part of the mesogloea. J. A. T.

Locomotion and Reactions of Charybdea. — Naohide Yatsu
{Journ. Coll. Sri. Univ. Tokyo, 1917, 40, Art. y, 1-12, 5 figs.). In the
Cubomedusan Charyhdea ruMonii the locomotor activity is not affected
V)y transference from diffused light to direct sunlight. Whatever be
the position of the medusa, the concretion is always at the lowermost
end of the rhopalium. Its extraction does not affect swimming. Medusse
deprived of all their rhopaUa usually cease to pulsate. In rare cases
they may exhibit weak pulsations, or even swim for a short distance.
The pulsation centre is located in the region of the rhopalium between
the eye part and the stalk. In the upper third of the bell and in the
region near the velarium the nerve plexus is probably lacking. Nerve
stimuli are not transmitted in those regions. Fatigue comes to the
pedalial muscles after fourteen to sixteen contractions as tested by the
rhopalium-pedalium reflex. The mouth margin is spread out if the
lower region of the subumbrella near the velarium is stroked. The
phacellse of this species are nine to ten in each inter-radial corner of
the ga-tial cavity, and are arranged at irregular intervals. Each is
composed of a very elastic stalk and a terminal tuft. J. A. T.

Porifera.

Larvae of Grantia compressa. — Olga M. Jorgensen {Report Dove
Marine Laboratory, Cullercoats, lliis. New Series, 7, 60-1, 9 figs.).
Actively swimming Amphiblastulae were collected by centrifuging from

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICIJOSCOPY, ETC. 389

a few sponges attached to a wire fixed in the mouth of a centrifuge tube.
Some were still active after nineteen hours. The overgrowth of the
larger granular cells was observed, and the fixation. Material not centri-
fuged showed that the Amphiblastula? may be active for about twenty-
four hours, and that fixation is complete two days after. The freshly-
hatched larva3 swim at the surface except when disturbed, when they
seek the lower layers for a time, but as proliferation of the granular
cells increases the larvae sink to the bottom, while still retaining their
motile character for a short time. J. A. T.

Sponges from Inle Lake. — Nelson Annandale {Records Indian
Museum, 1918, 14, 75-1), 1 pi.). Only three species of sponges were
found in this Shan Plateau lake, and these were varieties of cosmopolitan
forms,— SponfftUa lacustris, var. proJiferens, &'. fragills, var. calcuttana,
and Ephydatia fluviatiUs, var. intha var. nov. The most noteworthy
features of the new variety are the extreme softness of the body, which
often collapses in drying into a mere slimy layer, and the regularity of
the arrangement of the radiating fibres of the skeleton. The canals of
the sponge shelter quite a little fauna of Annelids (e.g. three species
of Chsetoii aster) and larval insects (including at least two species of
Chirouomidge, a Sisyra (Xeuropteron), and a caddis-worm without a
protecting case. J. A. T.

Protozoa.

New Amoebae. — Asa A. Schaeffer {Trans. Anier. Micr. Soc, 1918,
37, 79-1)6, -2 pis., 9 figs.). A description is given of Anmba bigemma
sp. n., with tapering pseudopodia, with numerous small twin-crystals
attached to "excretion spheres" in the endoplasm, with a single nucleus
and chromatin granules aggregated in a spherical mass, with numerous
small contractile vacuoles, with rapid movements — about 125 microns
per minute. A second new form is Pelomyxa lenUssima sp. n., very
small and very sluggish, with a very much compressed body, with few
pseudopodia except in the quiescent state, with a spherical nucleus and
often two, with numerous contractile vacuoles, with numerous bacterial
rods and few refractive bodies (starch grains). A third form, F. schiedti
sp. n., the smallest species known, with rare pseudopodia, with fluid
protoplasm, with movement .by eruptive waves of endoplasm partly
reflected back along the sides, with nucleus usually double, with numerous
small contractile vacuoles, with very numerous starch grains and
numerous bacterial rods. J. A. T.

Respiration in Paramecium. — E. .J. Lund {Amer. Journ. Physiol.,
1918, 47, 107-77). When Paramecium is removed from its native
hay infusion in a well-nourished condition, to a condition of starvation
in tap-water, the rate of oxidations in the cell decreases simultaneously
with the disappearance of .the greater amount of the deutoplasmic food
reserves of the protoplasm. Feeding boiled yeast to a Paramecium
which has been brought into a state of acute starvation by placing it in
tap-water may increase the speed of the oxidations two or three times
the original amount in the acutely starved but otherwise normal active

390 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

cell. This increase was not accompanied bj cell division in these
experiments. In connexion with the above results, it may be recalled
that the rate of respiratory metabolism in mammals is markedly in-
creased after ingestion of food, particularly of protein, while during
starvation the respiratory metabolism in general decreases. J. A. T.

Blood-red Seas. — Ramon Sobrino Buhigas {Mem. R. Soc. Espan.
Hist. Nat., 1918, 10, 407-58, 5 pL, 3 figs.)- The remarkable pheno-
menon of " hffimatothalassia," or blood-red seas (of which a coloured
picture is here given) is frequent off the coasts of Galicia. It has been
attributed to superabundance of Nodiluca, and to Radiolarians, but
investigation has shown it to be wholly due to a Dino-flagellate,
Gonyaulax polyedra, which has a yellowish colour. It forms an impor-
tant part of the food of sardines. J. A. T.

New Diatom-eating Flagellate. — Asa A. Schaeffer {Trans.
Amer. Micr. Soc, 1918, 37, 177-82, 1 pi). A remarkable flagellate,
Jenningsia diatomophaga g. et sp. n., was found in marshes, among alg«
and diatoms. It is cylindrical, 180 microns in length by 40 in breadth,
with a flagellum 150 microns long. The cuticle shows spiral striations
bearing numerous movable club-shaped appendages about 1 • 5 microns
in length. There is a large central nucleus, 35 microns in diameter,,
and a large contractile vacuole near the anterior end. There are several
rod-like structures in the pharynx immediately anterior to a large mouth
at the anterior end. There are numerous bodies like rings or strongly
biconcave discs throughout the endoplasra, and sometimes large clear
spheres as well. The animal creeps along, feeds exclusively on diatoms,
and multiplies by longitudinal fission. J. A. T.

Relapsing Fever.— H. Werner and 0. Wiese {Arch.f. Srhiffs u.
Trop. Hyg., Gassel, 1917, 21, 139). The authors examined eleven
Pediculi (Pedicidns capitis) which had been fed on a healthy man for
five days and then fed on a relapsing fever patient at the height of the
disease. Two of these, eight days later, showed the Spirochseta
rerMrrentes multiplying in the body-cavity. The view that the disease
may be carried by P. capitis was thus confirmed. J- E.

Studies on Infusoria.— Ekendranath Gosh {Records oj the Indian
Museum, 15, part 3, Aug. 1918, 129) records a new species of
Anoplophrya Stein {emend Cepede) to which he gives the name Anoplo-
plirya Uoydii. This species, from the seminal vesicles of the earthworm
Pheretima jwsthuma, comes nearest to A. striata. It is a "dished"
organism, elongately oval with a subtruncate posterior end curved
longitudinally. Macro-nucleus irregularly ribbon -shaped, micro-nucleus
small, spherical, placed at the side of the macro-nucleus. The recognized
species of Anoplophrya now number seventeen, and the author gives a
complete synopsis of the genus. He also records two new species of
Gonchophthirus Stein, G. etongatus and G. lamellidens, and a new type
of G. curtes Englemann. The recognized species of Gonchophthirus are

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 391

thus raised to eight, of which the author gives a synopsis. All the
species under consideration are adequately illustrated, and a list of the
literature on the subject is appended. E. H.-A.

Protozoa of Lahore. — B. L. Bkatia (Records of the Indicm Museum,
12, part 5, Sept. 1916, 77) contributes notes on ciliate Protozoa of
Lahore. 1. On the occurrence of three contractile vacuoles in specimens
of Paramsecium caudatmn. The occurrence of the third contractile
vacuole is recorded for the first time in this species (It had been
observed by Butschli in P. putrimmi). 2. The author records a number
of the more striking Ciliata that he has come across in ditches and
ponds in and about Lahore. The list is not claimed to be complete,
but includes a new species Holophrya indica and a new species of
Loxophyllum fasciola (Ehrbg.) to which he gives the name Pimjahensis.
In addition to these, ten species are recorded, four of which are adequately
described. The paper is efficiently illustrated, and full references to
the literature are given. E. H.-A.

392 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

BOTANY.

GENERAL,
Including the Anatomy and Physiolog-y of Seed Plants.

On the Cretaceous Flora of Russian Sakhalin.— A. Kryshto-
FOVICH {Jo urn. Coll. Sri. Imp. Univ. Tokyo, 1!)1S, 40, Art. 8, 15 figs.),
as the results of his studies in the fossil flora of the Island of Sakhalin^
in the summer of 1917, comes to the conclusion that this flora, hitherto
regarded as exclusively Miocene, belongs in fact to several geological
horizons, not only of the Tertiary period but also of the Cretaceous. It
is found that the latter deposits play a more important part in the
structure of Russian Sakhalin than was formerly assumed, and Heer
(1878) included in the Miocene flora a Nilssonia, which is charac-
teristically Mesozoic. A list of fossil plants obtained from all the
localities worked is given, followed bv a critical examination and de-
scription of the species (thirty-four), of which six are new. When the
complete study of all the material has been made, the number of species
will reach 100. The variation of the forms from difi"erent localities has
enabled the author to trace three horizons in the flora of Sakhalin from
the Middle Cretaceous to the Upper. A. W. S.

Fungi.

Phycomycetous Fungi from the English Coal Measures.— David
Ellis {Proc. Roy. Soc.Edin., 1918, 38, 130-4.5, 1 pi. and 8 text-figs.).
An account of the results obtained by a systematic search in the Lower
Coal Measures for fossilized fungi. In the fossilized vegetable debris of
this horizon it is not unusual to meet with fragments of fungal threads
when these are specially sought for ; it was only when remains of the
hyphfe and attached structures occurred with specific clearness that they
were studied in detail. Altogether some fifteen species of fungi have
been assigned with some degree of certainty to the Phycomycetes. The
majority of the thirty slides examined were prepared from petrifactions
from the Upper Foot Mine, Shore, Littleborough. One of the species
described in the paper, Peronosporites gracilis, was found in the cortex
of the stem of Lepidodendron amleatum, and also in the cortex of a
secondary root of Lygnirdendron Oldhamium. T^he structure is described
and its close relationship with P. anticmarius W. Smith indicated. The
second fungus, described under the name Paleeomyces baciUoides, was
found in the parenchymatous cells of the leaf-bases of a species of
Lepidodendron (probably L. fuJiginosus) from the Upper Foot Mine.
Vesicles found attached to the hyphas may be regarded as the remains

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 393

of sporangia of the type found in modern Phycomycetes. Bodies of the
nature of Oidium-celh are also described, and tlie Saprolegniacete are
indicated as being the nearest allies among modern fungi. A. W. S,

Myxomycetozoa.

New Mycetozoa.— C. Meylan {Bull. Soc. Vaudoise Set. Nat, 52,
1918, No. 194, 95) describes two new Mycetozoa from, cold altitudes.
1. Laniproderma crucheti, differing from L. rohmihimim hy the colour
of the Plasmodium and sporangia and spores, and the form of the
sporangia and length of the pedicel. 2. Stemonitis hyperopia. A new
name suggested for the variety heterospora of ('omatricha typhoides.
The author discusses the affinity of the organism with G. Lister's
Comatricha dictyospora (Cel.). Again, the features upon which the
author relies would appear to be the possible result of climatic condi-
tions, and it appears to us that judgment should be reserved until these
new forms have been cultivated under normal conditions of temperature
and environment. E. H.-A.

Mycetozoa from the Jura Mountains. — C. Meylan {Bull. Soc.
Vaudoise Set. Nat., 51, No. 191, 1916-17, 259) describes Mycetozoa
from high altitudes (900 to IGOO mm.) in the Jura Mountains, of which
Badhamia lilacina and Comatricha elegans are new to the district. The
author does not, however, lose sight of the world-wide distribution of
most of the recorded Mycetozoa. The feature of the paper is the
revision of the genus and species Lamproderma inolaceum. He proposes,
for reasons which he sets out at length, to raise the variety sauteri (Rost)
to specific rank, the variety carestiae becoming a variety of L. sauteri.
He discusses the distinction between the latter species and L. cribrari-
■ oides (Fr.).

It is a question whether the distinction is a sound one, and we
should be inclined to think that the author's revision is little more than
taxonomic, regard being had to the altitudes and conditions of frigidity,
which must have a specific influence on the development of the sporangia.
The author gives a complete synopsis of the group. A new variety,
cameo -griseum, of the species Enerthenema papillatum (Pers.) is described ;
the only difference between the variety and the type is in the rose-grey
• colour of the sporangia. It would appear to bean autonomous variation
■resulting from the conditions of altitude and temperature. E. H.-A.

Schiz op hy ta.
Schizomycetes.

Botulism. — DoEENDORF {Deutsche med. Wehnschr., 1917, 46,1531-4,
1554-G). Poisoning, due to toxin produced in raw ham, sausages, meat,
.fish, by Bacillus botulifius is comparatively rare, but during three months
Dorendorf studied six cases. Examination after death shows widespread
■hypergemia, especially of the meninges, lungs, liver and kidneys,
JVIicroscopically the ganglion-cells show disappearance of Nissl's granules.

394 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

displacement and cloudiness of the nucleus, and eventually complete
destruction of the cell. These changes occur in the medulla and cause
nuclear paralysis, and respiratory or cardiac stoppage. J. E.

Bacteria of Gas Gangrene. — R. Pfeiffer and G. Bessau {Deutsche
med. We/inschr., 1917, 43, 1217, 1255, 12S1). The authors regard " ijas
gangrene " as due to the combined action of a variety of anaerobic
bacilli, and never as the result of a single variety. In 150 cases from
the Somme front, Fraenkel's bacillus, B. serogenes e neaps ulat us, was the
most common, but never alone. They emphasize the difficulty of
obtaining pure cultures of any of the anaerobes.

They describe in detail four organisms only, two classified as " non-
putrefiers " and two as "putrefiers."

Non-putrefying organisms : —

1. Bacillus of Fraenkel (probably i?. serogenes encapsulatiis, B. ivekhii,
B. perfringens, of British writers), a plump, non-motile bacillus, does
not form spores in agar or broth even after a period of weeks. Very
scanty spores may be formed after a time on coagulated serum and in
meat-broth.

2. Bacillus of Malignant (Edema (Koch) is longer and narrower
than Fraenkel's bacillus, and is very Gram-labile. Varies in motility.
SHght sporulation in agar and liver-broth, very abundant spores in a
meat-broth culture. On agar-plates the colonies develop very slowly,
and after tiiree days appear as very small, fine, slightly cloudy colonies
with finely branching filamentous margin. In old meat-broth cultures
many free spores may be found, and after a fortnight the meat in the
medium begins to dissolve. The cultures have a slightly rancid odour,
and there is no putrefaction.

The putrefying organisms are the following : —

1. The so-called " Uhrzeiger," or Clock-hand Bacillus. Very motile.
Gram-positive, and spores abundantly on all ordinary media. Abundant
gas is produced, and a very foul odour. Meat-broth and brain-broth are
both blackened.

2. The " Par oedema Bacillus," morphologically similar to Koch's
bacillus of Malignant CEdema, but producing marked putridity in
culture. It is non-motile, forms spores in meat-broth, and the meat is
slowly dissolved. J. E.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MIOEOSCOPY, ETC. 395

MICROSCOPY.
A. Instruments, Accessories, etc.*
(3) Illuminating' and other Apparatus.

Modified Safety-razor Blade-holder for Temperature Control. —
T. H. GooDSPEED {Botanical Gazette, 191<s, 2, 176-7, 1 fig:.). The
necessity of keeping the knife cool in ribbon section-cutting has led in
the University of California Laboratory to a simple modification of the
usual type of safety-razor blade-holder. The original holder made by
Strickler has been found the most desirable type of a number at present
on the market. To such a holder a small brass tube is longitudinally
attached. This tube has a bore of 4 mm., and is soldered to the outer
leaf of the holder, thus in no way interfering with the separation of the
leaves when the safety-razor blade is to be inserted. The tube is
extended approximately 6 mm. beyond the holder proper at either end to
allow the attaching of small rubber tubes. For class use where very
thin sections are not ordinarily required, it has been found that the
temperature of the knife in such a holder is sufficiently low if tap-water
is allowed to flow through the tube. A very short time is required for
the temperature of the water to be communicated to the knife. A
cooling-cell, such as Land's or Gardner's, also regulated with tap-water,
may be employed in addition, but its use in most cases is superfluous.
Where sections from soft or medium paraffin under 5 /a are required the
modified safety-razor blade-holder and the cooling-cell are attached to
Gardner's apparatus, with the buckets filled with ice-water. Under
such conditions sections 2 ^ thick have been cut very sflccessfully from
a paraffin melting at 53° C. A. N. D.

Scattering of Light by Dust-free Air, with Artificial Reproduction
of the Blue Sky. — Hon. R. J. Strutt, F.R.S. {Royal Societtj Proceed-
ings, June 1918, 94, 453-9). It is now recognized that the blue
colour of the sky on clear days and at considerable altitudes can be
accounted for by the scattering of light by the molecules of air, without
postulating suspended particles of foreign matter, such as were thought
necessary by earlier writers. The laboratory method described of
demonstrating this is in principle a modification of the ultra-microscope
of Siedentopf, which again is founded on the observations of Tyndall.

* This subdivision contains (1) Stands ; (2) Eye-pieces and Objectives ; (3)
Illuminating and other Apparatus ; (4) Photomicrography ; (5) Microscopical
Optics and Manipulation ; (6) Miscellaneous.

396

SUMMARY OF GUKRENT RESEAKGHES RELATING TO

In arranging an experiment for this purpose, the chief essential was to
avoid, as far as possible, stray light from the wall of the vessel used as
an air-container, and to observe the beam transversely against the
blackest possible background.

The source of light was a hand-regulated carbon arc, taking about
twelve amperes. A quartz condenser (used on account of its trans-
parency to blue and violet light) was adjusted to give a convergent
beam. This passed through a quartz water-cell to take our heat-rays,
then into the experimental vessel. The latter was in the form of a
cross, constituted of brass tubiug l|-in. diameter, as shown in the
figure (drawn to half -size). The interior was dead black. The light

ARC

PLATE

entered by the quartz window A and passed on through the rectangular
diaphragm B to the far end, where it was stopped by the closed end of
the tube. The beam was observed through the glass window D.
The side-piece E constituted a black cave, and the mouth of it
afforded the necessary background against which a feeble transverse
luminosity of the beam would stand out well. In spite of all precau-
tions enough light was diffused by the walls of the tube to enclose this
black background in a luminous ring, which, however, was not bright
enough to cause inconvenience. The beam passed diametrically across
this luminous ring, which is seen in all the photographs.

For photography the lens F, of 6 c.cm. focal length, was arranged

ZOOLOGV AND BOTANY, MIGUOSCOPV, KTC. 397

to form an imuge on a sensitive plate held in an ordinary camera. For
visual observation, the plate-holder was removed, and the image viewed
with an eye-piece of 3 c.cm. focal length. This moderate magnification
was found to be of considerable advantage, though of course it does
not increase the intrinsic brightness of the scattered light.

With ordinary untreated air in the apparatus, a very bright track
due to scattering by the dust particles was observed. Passing a current
of air dried by phosphorus pentoxide, and filtered by cotton-wool, the
dust particles became fewer. It took a little time to get rid of them,
because the shape of the vessel was unfavourable for a wash through of
air. After a few minutes, however, the dust particles became so scarce
that they could only l)e seen occasionally crossing the track, and they
soon vanished entirely.

At this stage there was a blue track along the beam, which, though
much fainter than the original dusty track, was visible without difficulty
when the eyes had been rested in the dark.

When the vessel was exhausted, the blue track disappeared, nothing
remaining except the above-mentioned ring of light diffused by the
vessel. Readmitting filtered air, the blue track reappeared exactly as
before.

These various tests and precautions seem to prove beyond doubt
that the observed scattering was not due to dust surviving imperfect
filtration, or to any false light, but that it is properly of pure air. Its
intensity is of the order of magnitude to be expected. 1. By proper
arrangement of the experimental conditions it is possible to observe the
scattering of light of pure air, free of dust, in a small-scale laboratory
experiment. 2. Similar results can be obtained with other gases.
Hydrogen gives much less scattering than air, oxygen about the same,
carbon dioxide decidedly more. 3. The scattered light in air and in all
the other gases is blue — the blue of the sky — illustrating very directly
the theory that attributes the blue of the sky to scattering by the mole-
cules of air. 4. The scattered light is almost completely polarized.

J. E. B.

Some Principles of Illumination.— M. A. Ainslie {Proc. Photo-
micrographifi Soc, 1918, 7, 1-23, 6 text-figs.) analyses the elements
of the subject clearly and concisely. C S.

The Polarization of Lig-ht.— F. C. Reynolds (Proc. Photomicro-
graphic Soc, 1918, 7, 24-30, 4 text-figs.) gives an elementary description
of the principles involved. C. S.

The Barnard Incandescent Gas Lamp, manufactured by H. F.
Angus and Co., may be used either with an ordinary Bunsen flame (4) or
witii a high-pressure methylated spirit-burner. It embodies a somewhat
new but very simple method. It consists of a specially made incan-
descent mantle in a metal tube (1), which gives an intense uniform
source of light of about 5 mm. across. It is sufficiently intense for
seeing Spironema pallidum, and for differentiating it from other similar
organisms. In front of the light is placed a bull's-eye or condensing

398

SUMMARY OF CUKRKNT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

lens (6). The position of the latter should be such that the image
of the radiant is projected about 7 to 9 in. from the condensing
lens, and falls exactly in the centre of the mirror. The tube containing
the mantle can be rotated in the cradle (2) until the incandescent
material presents a convex surface to the flame. The relative position
of incandescent material to flame can be adjusted exactly by means of a

1 — r

Half Actual Size.

fine-adjustment screw (?,). The milled head (C) regulates the supply of
gas, and the lever (D) the supply of air. The bull's-eye condenser sHdes
in sleeve (H), and is attached to the gallery of the lamp by clamping
screw (K).

*| (4) Photomicrography.

Wratten "M" Filters (Kodak, Limited, London, 1919, 12 pp.).—
A booklet has been issued by the Kodak Company in place ;of their

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

399

larger publication, " Photomicrography," and includes several novelties.
In the table of exposure factors for Wratten " M " filters with Wratten
" M " plates (p. 11) factors are given for use with the recently intro-
duced pointolite lamp instead of the previous cohimn of Nernst factors.
In addition to the nine filters forming the well-known " M " set, thi'ee
others (K8, 78, 96) are described which may be of use to microscopists.
K3 is a luminosity screen for orthochromatic reproduction, and should be
used if daylight or equivalent daylight is to be employed. No. 78 is a
filter primarily intended for the conversion of the light from a metal-
filament lamp into the visual equivalent of average daylight. It may
also be used with the pointolite lamp and with the smaller-powered
half-watt lamps, and, less efficiently, with incandescent gas or oil. It
gives a very close approximation to daylight, and will be found very
useful and restful to the eyes in the case of long-continued visual
observation. Xo. 96 (D 1-5) is a neutral tint filter, and transmits
about 3 p.c. of the incident light for use when focussing with a strong
illuminant, or for lengthening the exposure (about thirty-three times)
when inconveniently short, as with low powers. It does not alter the
contrast obtained with coloured filters. The Kodak Company hope
soon to be able to supply a blue filter, of dominant wave-length 47U0,

Fig. 1.

Fig. 2.

Illusteations showing the Control of Detail by the use of

Wratten " M " Filtees.

Fuchsin-stained Section. T.S. Stem of Clematis flammula X 40.
Fig. 1. Ordinary plate, no filter. Fig. 2. Wratten " M " plate, B and G filters.

400

SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Fig. 3.

Fig. 4.

Part of head of Telescope fly, Diopsis apicalis x 22.

Fig. 3. " M " plate, C filter, to obtain maximum contrast.
Fig. 4. " M " plate, F filter, to obtain maximum detail.

which does not transmit any red, especially for visual use when the
highest possible resolution is required. They invite inquiries for it
under reference No. 38aM. A. N. D.

Telescopic Focussing Apparatus for Photomicrography. — A. F.
Hallimond, M.A. {Iron and Steel Institute, 1918). In the ordinary
vertical camera, in which the plate is supported at a distance of 10 in.
or more above the microscope, the height of the focussing screen is
often the source of much inconvenience. It was suggested to the
author by Mr. J. H. Whiteley that to meet these difficulties a means
might be found of reflecting the beam horizontally, and so adjusting
the focus without the use of a ground-glass in the usual position. The
telescopic arrangement here described was designed for this purpose,
and resembles the ordinary form of reflex focussing camera.

The construction of the apparatus is shown in the adjoining figure,
where the broken lines indicate the path of a beam which converges to
form a point in the image. •

Rays proceeding from the microscope eye-piece A, which would
normally converge to a focus on the photographic plate, are reflected
horizontally by the movable mirror B ; this mirror is attached to a
metal plate large enough to cut off all light from the camera when in
the position shown, and is prevented from passing beyond the 45°
position by an adjustable stop D attached to the spindle. The deflected
beam is focussed by the telescope objective E (focal length 4 in.) upon
the cross-wires F, and the image so formed is seen, together with the
cross-wires, when examined through the eye-lens G (focal length f in.).
The magnification thus obtained is about the same as that given by the
use of a hand-focussing lens upon (or without) the ground-glass.

It will be seen that to each length of camera there corresponds a
fixed position of the focus at F, to which the cross-wires must be set by

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY? MICROSCOPY, ETC

401

pushing in the sliding tube and closing the clamp H. It is convenient
to graduate the sliding tube, by direct comparison with the ground-
glass, in numbers representing the corresponding camera-lengths. When
this graduation has once been made, it is sufficient, in taking a photo-
graph, to fix the telescope for the proper camera-length and focus, the
microscope so that the image is clearly defined on the cross-wires. As
soon as the focus is ascertained to lie steady and satisfactory, the dark
slide having been opened before focussing, the exposure can be made by
simply turning back the milled head C, so tliat the mirror moves into
the vertical position.

The lenses described are of the simplest type, and have proved
quite satisfactory in working ; the field is, however, rather narrow, about
one-third of the diameter photographed being visible at once. Mr. Swift,
by whose firm the apparatus was made, has suggested that the eye-piece

of the telescope might be provided with a field-lens, and no doubt the
full field could thus be obtained ; at the same time it would certainly be
well to make the objective achromatic. No difficulty has been found to
arise from the use of the mirror, which is a common plane " galvano-
meter mirror," though the best result would no doubt be given by a
silvered right-angled prism. For ordinary purposes the simple form
described has proved sufficient and represents a considerable saving of
expense in comparison with the more correct construction. J. E. B.

(5) JMicroscopical Optics and Manipulation.

Optical Properties and Theory of Colour of Pigments and Paints.
— H. E. Mekwin {Froc. Amer. Soc. for Testing Materials, Philadelphia,
1917, XVII., 2, 1, 2). The hue, purity and brightness of light diffused by
a pigment or paint depends upon the refractive index, colour absorption,
size, shape and texture of the pigment grains, and upon the refi'active
index, colour, and continuity of the vehicle ; and also upon the distri-
bution of the grains in the vehicle.

A black pigment to be most effective optically should have (1)
a refractive index equal to that of the surrounding medium, and (2)

2 E

402 SUMMAKY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RKLATING TO

grains 1 /a (or less) in diameter which should be (3) barely opaque to all
colours. All the ordinary black pigments possess the third characteris-
tic approximately, some of them the second, but only one of them, bone
black in its various forms, has approximately the best refractive index.

A white pigment should have a high refractive index, should be
■even grained, with grains about 0 • 5 to 0 • 1 /^ in diameter. Finer grains
diffuse blue light more than red light under certain conditions, for
•example, when mixed in oil with black or dark red pigments. Thus
blue greys and purples result. Most white pigments contain enough
very fine grains to give bluish greys. Control of size of grain is
important. It is probable that the refractive index of certain zinc
oxides made by the American process can be controlled advantageously.

Colouring efficiency must be considered as much from the stand-
point of the hue and tone desired as of the absolute " quantity of
colour " obtained. Thus, although extremely fine division may favour
tlie last factor mentioned, when the pigment is used in a mixLure with
a strongly diffusing pigment, yet under other conditions size and shape
of grain and refractive index are of great importance. For example,
Harrison red in grains of one shape has about 10 p.c. better diffusing
power than in grains of another shape. The shifting of hue, especially
of orange and yellow paints toward the green, due to admixed black, is
considered in detail. The optical properties which determine whether
a pigment is best suited for producing tints or shades are discussed.

Special methods of studying the optical properties of pigments have
been used, and a considerable number of constants determined. These
properties can be applied in determinative work or to problems in
chromatics.

This investigation has been conducted in the Geophysical Laboratory
of the Carnegie Institution of Washington. J. E. B

(6) ^Miscellaneous.

Chemical Microscopy. — E. M. ('hamot {Trans. American Microscop.
Soc, 1917, 3, 139-57, 2 pis.). This was an address delivered before
a joint meeting of the Chicago Section of the American Chem'ical Society
and the State Microscopical Society of Illinois, and was an appeal from
a chemist for a wider and more intelligent application of the microscope
in everyday chemical practice. The author criticizes the modern micro-
scope, and points out that it is not an ideal instrument for a chemical
laboratory. He considers that the mirror should be mounted on a
swinging bar capable of movements far to one side, or even above the
stage ; that the objective should be of small angle, long available
working distance and marked penetrating power ; and that the instru-
ment should be built of materials capable of resisting the corrosive
atmosphere of an industrial laboratory. With such an instrument,
however, many of the processes of qualitative chemical analysis can be
readily and speedily performed. The author discusses in some detail the
application of microscopy to such investigations as " water analysis,
cements, foods and beverages, metallurgical industries, pigments and
textiles. A. N. D.

ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSGOPY, KTC. 403

B. Technique.*
(4) Staining' and Injecting.

Staining Spirilla with Formol-violet. — P. Spehl {G.R. Soc. Biol.,
1918, 81, 305-6). 1. Spread a thin film on cover-slip and dry.

2. Mordant with acetic formol (Rnge) for five minntes. Repeat this
process twice. (Formol •!, acetic acid 1, distilled water up to 100.)

3. Replace the acetic formol by 10 p.c. aqueous solution of chromic
acid. Allow to act for ten minutes. 4. Wash in absolute alcohol for
two minutes ; then flame. 5. Stain with warm formol gentian- violet
for two minutes. 6. Wash rapidly in water. 7. Treat with Lugol's
iodine solution for five minutes. <s. Wash, dry and mount.

By this process cell protoplasm is stained violet, the nuclei black.
Bacteria are black, Spirilla violet, or more often black. J. E.

Double Staining of the Tubercle Bacillus : a Modification of
Spengier's Method.— P. Spehl (6'. R. Soc. Biol., 1918, 81, 248-9). In
the method the bodies of the bacilli are stained red, Much's granules black,
and the remainder of the preparation pale yellow, and is carried out as
follows : — Smear a thin film of the sputum on a cover-glass, dry, fix with
absolute alcohol one minute, and flame. Stain with a freshly-prepared mix-
ture of Ziehl's fuchsin 3 parts and carbolic gentian-violet 2 parts, for 2-3
minutes warm, or if preferred for 15-30 minutes cold. Replace the stain
by Spengier's picric alcohol cold (sat. aq. sol. picric acid 60, alcohol 40),
and allow to act for one minute. Replace the picric alcohol by 60 p.c.
alcohol, and wash the film three times in this solution. Decolorize for
20 seconds in nitric acid, 15 p.c. solution. Complete decolorizing with
60 p.c. alcohol. Counterstain for one minute with picric alcohol. Wash
in water, dry and mount. J. E.

Metallography, etc.

Testing Hardness of Metals by the Boyelle-Morin Apparatus. —
•C. J. BowEN Cooke (Jourii. of Inst, of Mechanical Engineers, 1918,
5, 331-4, 4 figs.). The essential part of tliis apparatus consists of
a tube a carrying a hardened steel ball c, and a rod h enlarged at the
lower end to slide freely in a. Interposed between the lower end of b
tnd the ball c is a cylinder or cube d cut from a bar whose hardness has
been determined in a 3000-kilogram Brinell machine. The apparatus
must be held vertically, with the ball c resting on the surface e to be
tested, and the top of the rod h struck sharply with a hammer causing
the ball to indent d and e. The diameters d and e of the indentations
are measured by the scale and a magnifying glass, and the correspond-
ing hardness numbers are read oft" on a specially graduated slide-rule.

* This subdivision contains (1) Collecting Objects, including Culture T'ro-
cesses ; (2) Preparing Objects ; (3) Cutting, including Embedding and Microtomes ;
(4) Staining and Injecting ; (5) Mounting, including slides, preservative fluids, etc.;
^6) Miscellaneous.

2 E 2

404 SUMMARY OF CUREENT EESEA.RCHES.

As the result of a number of comparative tests it has been found that
the apparatus may be considered as a workshop tool giving results of
sufficient accuracy for workshop testing of many of the steels in ordinary
use. Whether the concordance would be as satisfactory with harder
steels is questionable. The apparatus would be more reliable if some
provision were made for insuring that the rod b is truly vertical when it
is struck. A. N. D.

Nature of Growths in Colloidal Silica Solutions. — H. Onslow
{Proc. Royal Soc, 191S, B. 628, 2G6-;)). The late Dr. Charlton
Bastian, after having performed a number of experiments, claimed
to have synthesized certain symmetrical bodies resembling torulas and
other minute organisms from steiilized colloidal solutions, which had
been exposed for a long period to the light. Further, he claimed that
such " organisms " were capable of reproducing themselves. Dr.
Bastian was so anxious for independent investigation that the author
undertook to repeat his experiments carefully, in order to ascertain
whether the organized bodies in question were in reality living proto-
plasm. Accordingly, he prepared a series of ninety tubes and repeated
Bastian's experiments, which in some cases required upwards of three
years' culture. The centrifugalized deposits were examined by micro-
scopical observation with a ^-inch objective and by sub-cultivation The
most elaborate precautions were taken against air-contamination. The
results were entirely negative, and the author was forced to the conclusion
that the bodies found by Dr. Bastian, which often resembled living
organisms in a striking fashion, are due to the slow deposition of silica
from the colloidal solutions, either about minute nuclei or about the
detritus of dead organisms, in the manner described by Professor Moore
and Evans, and also by Sydney G. Paine. The only living organism
which occurred in the author's experiments must have been introduced
accidentally owing to the lack of sufficient precautions, for when great
care was taken to avoid contamination the tubes were found to be
uniformly sterile. A. N. D.

Industrial Processes.

Investig-ations on Textile Fibres. — W. Harrison {Proc. Roy. Soc,
1918, A 663, 4(;0-l), 2 pis.). The object of the author's investigations
was to determine some of the fundamental properties of textile fibres
which goverij their behaviour in manufacturing processes, and thereby
to establish a scientific basis for research into such processes. The
investigations included ; — 1. Effect of stress, moisture, and heat on
textile fibres. 2. Cause of the double refraction of textile fibres.

3. Effect of chemical treatment on the double refraction of fibres.

4. Probable causes of the internal stresses existing in natural fibres.
Photomicrographs depending on ultramicroscopy, polarized and ordinary
light are given illustrating the author's observations and conclusions.

A.N. D

405

NOTICES OF NEW BOOKS,

The Foraminifera of the Atlantic Ocean. Part I. Astrorhizidae.—
By J. Cushman. Smithsonian Institution, United States National
Museum, Bulletin 104, i-vii and 1-111, pis. 1-39. Washington :
Government Printing Office. 1918.

J. A. Cushman, having completed his useful series of monographs on
the Foraminifera of the Pacific, is now devoting his attention to those
of the Atlantic, The amount of material at his disposal resulting from
the records of numerous zoologists working on the European coastline,
supplemented by the extensive dredgings and soundings of the U.S.
Bureau of Fisheries, is naturally much larger than was available for the
comparatively unexplored Pacific,

The Astrorhizidge are mainly benthic organisms, and many species
have consequently a world-wide distribution, because physical conditions
in the deep sea are subject to very little variation anywhere. Darkness
and a temperature just above freezing point are the chief physical
features. Bound the poles, and within the influence of the cold currents
which originate in the polar seas, the Astrorhizidte extend into com-
paratively shallow water. Hence the abundant Astrorhizid fauna which
has been dredged in recent years in the deeper areas of the com-
paratively shallow North Sea, and in the area to the north of the
Wyville Thomson Ridge between Scotland and the Faroe Islands. In
the warm area to the south and west of the Ridge the same species are
found at greater depths.

These conditions are probably duplicated on the eastern coast of the
United States, where the Labrador Current and the Gulf Stream meet.
Cushman in his introduction refers to the dissimilarity of the benthic
fauna to the nortli and south of Cape Hatteras, but does not appear to
have appreciated the enormous influence which the Wyville Thomson
Ridge exercises on the fauna of north-western European seas. It would
be interesting to compare lists ♦of Foraminifera from similar depths in
these four widely-separated areas, and as the material from the European
side is already available we hope that Cushman will publish such a com-
parative table in his forthcoming reports.

Physical conditions on the two sides of the Atlantic being so similar,

406 NOTICES OF NEW BOOKS.

it is not surprising to find that nearly all our European forms occur off
the American coast. The exceptions are principally species recently
described from " Goldseeker " dredcfings, and usually of more or less
local distribution in our seas. It seems probable that these also will
eventually be found on the Western Atlantic shores when intensive
search can be made in suitable material. There is no doubt some truth
in Cushman's reference to the existence of groups with general as opposed
to local distribution, but even the nearest -species haVe a disconcerting
way of turning up when least expected, half a world away from any
previous record, and without any intermediate connecting links.

The classification adopted by Cushman is based on the system of
Khumbler, and will not recommend itself to British zoologists, espe-
cially in present times, when everything of German origin is viewed
with something more than distrust. With all its defects and short-
comings, due largely to the limited amount of deep-sea material on which
he had to work, Brady's system is in our opinion more truly scientific,
and will hold its own, at any rate, until we know more about the life-
history of the deep-sea rhizopods than we are ever likely to know in the
immediate future. The fundamental difference between the British and
German schools of rhizopodists lies in the fact that the principal British
rhizopodists have been marine zoologists, who treated the question of
classification from what they knew of its biological side, while the
Continentals have been sytematists bent on reducing the group to hard
and fast specific Hues, regardless of the multiplication of genera and
species thereby involved in treating organisms of such simple and protean
structure as the Foraminifera.

The relative merits or demerits of the two systems can be illus-
trated by an analysis of Cushman's last sub-family (4), Ammodiscinse.
This includes the genera Ammolagena Einers and Fickert = Wehbina
clavata (P. & J.) ; Girvanella Nicholson and Etheridge, a genus created
for fossil remains of doubtful nature, and used by Pthumbler for the
cosmopolitan Hyperammina vagans Brady. These two forms appear to
be very distinct from a zoological point of view, and under Brady's
classification are relegated to different families. But by Cushman they
are .associated with the true Ammodisci, and this genus, which may be
briefly described as an unseptate, coiled, arenaceous tube, is further sub-
divided. Six species, differing principally in the nature of the spiral,
and which would all have been included without dilficulty wwAqv Ammo-
disms^QU?,^ smen Brady, now require no less than four genera for their
reception — Anunodiscvs Reuss, Ammodiscoides Cushman, Gromospira
Rzchak, and Tiiritdlella Rhumbler. At this rate it will soon be a case
of tot genera quot species.

There are many other points we should like to discuss in this valuable
monogiaph, but space will not permit. It is well illustrated by repro-
ductions of original figures, and for that reason it is a pity that the
author did not manage to include figures of all the new form's included
in the monograph. We trust that he will remedy this omission in a
supplementary paper. E. H.-A. & A. E.

NOTICES OF NKW BOOKS. 407

The Fundus oculi of Birds, especially as viewed by the Ophthal-
moscope : a Study in Comparative Anatomy and Physiolog-y. By
Casey Albert Wood, 182 pp., 61 coloured plates by Arthur Head,
F.Z.S., and 145 drawings in the text. Chicago : Lakeside Press.
1917. Price 15s.

In the first year of the present century the Royal Society published
in its Transactions (vol. 11)4) a comprehensive monograph on "The
Comparative Anatomy of the Mammalian Eye, chiefly based upon
Ophthalmoscopic Examination," by Dr. Lindsay Johnson, illustrated by
coloured drawings of the fundus oculi of mammals by Arthur Head.
This was a fascinating and suggestive work which aroused the keenest
interest amongst ophthalmologists, and prompted the hope that allied
fields for research might be explored, to the increase of knowledge. But
the collection of the necessary data is a ^low and laborious process, and
very few are qualified to undertake a research of this nature, so that we
warmly welcome Dr. Casey Wood's volume on avian eyes, which, we
infer from internal evidence, has occupied considerably more than seven
years in the making, and in the preparation of which he has had the
valuable help of the same skilful artist who originally prepared the
drawings of mammalian eyes.

The author in his wisdom — and we would that more followed his
example — summarizes his conclusions at the very outset, and of these
we would select two as of prime importance, viz. : —

" The fundus oculi of Birds exhibits a great variety of areas of
distinct vision, and these correspond closely to the habits and habitat . . . ."

" The appearances .... furnish entirely different coloured fundus
pictures, and it is frequently possible to recognize a species by viewing
its fundus oculi," from which the corollary emerges, "in future no
report upon a particular avian species can be held complete that ignores
the visual apparatus and especially the appearances of the fundus oculi
as shown by the ophthalmoscope."

Dr. Casey Wood details the methods he has elaborated for the
collection, selection and preparation of material ; the examination of the
fundus in the living bird, post-mortem, and in preserved and sectioned
eyes, reviews the anatomy and physiology of the organs and tissues of
the bird's eye, passes to a consideration of the parts and organs visible
to the ophthalmoscope, and discusses their relative importance from the
point of view of function, and describes their combinations and
variations in different species.

The detailed observations of various orders and species of birds which
follow show that the ophthalmoscopic appearances are so striking and so
consistent as to permit of the classification of fundi into two groups,
vascular and avascular, each containing five subdivisions. An atlas of
coloured drawings of avian fundi, each provided with a concise descrip-
tion, completes a volume for which we can find nothing but genuine
praise.

Indeed we would fain conclude this brief notice by saying that the
result of the combined labours of author, artist and publisher leaves
nothing to be desired ; but the very excellence of this result impels us
to voice our further desire, and to quote a short sentence from the

408

NOTICES OF NEW BOOKS.

introduction, which reads: "In addition to these methods of investi-
gation extensive microscopical examinations of the tissues were carried
on," etc. As microscopists we would implore Dr. Casey Wood to supply
the only important omission in the present volume by providing us with a
companion volume detailing his microscopical researches. J. E.

Methods in Practical Petrology. By Milner and Part. Cambridge :
W. Heffer and Sons, Ltd. Price 2s. %d.

An addition to the scanty literature of Petrology is always welcome,
and a concise account of practical work is sure to find readers desirous
of obtaining hints to help them in the rather difficult task of preparing
and examining rock-sectiouR, both macroscopically and microscopically.

AualyBer
: fitted over
lens.

Glass plate covering

stage.

Polarizer.

Mirror.

The present manual is divided into four chapters (each with appro-
priate sub-sections'), dealing with : — 1. The preparation of rock-slices.
2. Examination of rock-slices. 3. Microchemical methods (staining).
4. Mounting of sands and crushed rock material. There is also an
appendix dealing with the preparation of stains, and a satisfactory index.
A commendable feature throughout the book is the number of footnotes
referring the student to standard authors and to a variety of memoirs.
These taken altogether form a quite considerable bibliography.

Several clearly-drawn line-diagrams are included in the text, of
which the first (reproduced) is of special interest to microscopists. As
will be seen, it is a simple polarizing stand, arranged after the manner of
a dissecting microscope, fo(uissing beino- effected by sliding the arm
carrying the lens aud analyser up or down the pillar.

NOTICES OF NEW BOOKS. ' 409

■

The method suggested on page 23 for examining opaque materials
by reflected light does not altogether commend itself to the reviewer.
Eeflecting light by means of a white card on to the specimens would
only be feasible when using low-power objectives, and, as the authors
imply, the loss of light is considerable. The present writer has obtained
good results by tilting the stage to a high angle of inclination, bringing
the illuminant behind the microscope (i.e. immediately in front of the
observer) and focussing the light on to the slide by means of a bull's-eye
condenser. The direction of the incident light being nearly parallel to
the line of sight in the microscope, the loss of light is comparatively
small.

The book will assuredly strike the reader as the production of
petrologists who have themselves grappled with the practical problems
of this branch of microscopy, and are therefore well qualified to act as
guides to others who may be experiencing the inevitable difficulties in the
preparation and examination of rock-sections. F. I. G. R.

Simplified Method of Tracing Rays thirough any Optical System.
By Ludwik Silberstein, Ph.D. London : Longmans, Green & Co.
Price 5s. net.

The purpose of this small volume is to indicate a method of treating
the geometrical optics of any system, particularly that part of a com-
puter's work known as "ray-tracing." It is not of special interest to
microscopists, unless an interest is taken in general optical problems.
The treatment is mathematical, and assumes a knowledge, elementary it
is true, of vector algebra. The book has been produced at the insti-
gation of Messrs. Adam Hilger, Ltd. It is satisfactory to know that
an optical firm in this country, of high repute, is interested in such a
publication. J. E. B.

Elements of the Electro-magnetic Theory of Light. Ludwik
Silberstein, Ph.D., Lecturer in Natural Philosophy in the
University of Rome. London : Longmans, Green & Co. 1918.
Price 3s. Qd. net.

This little volume, the object of which is to present the essentials of
the electro-magnetic theory of light, was rewritten at the instance of
Messrs. Adam Hilger, Ltd., from the author's Polish treatise on Elec-
tricity and Magnetism.

The language adopted is mainly vectorial, so that while the treat-
ment of the subject is of necessity mathematical, it does not entail a
knowledge of the higher mathematics for its intelligent appreciation.
The author accurately describes it as an easy and complete presentation
of the fundamental part of Maxwell's theory of light, and as such may
be commended to those microscopists whose interests are mainly directed
to the optical side of then- subject. J. E. B.

410

PEOCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

AN ORDINARY MEETING

'or THE Society was held at 20 Hanover Square, W., on
Wednesday, October 16, 1918.

The Minutes of the preceding Meeting were read, confirmed, and
signed by the President.

The nomination papers were read of the following Candidates for
Fellowship : —

Mr. Charlton S. Agate, B.Sc, etc.

Mr. Charles Baxter, C.E., M.I.Mar.E., etc.

Mr. John Leslie Berry.

Captain Thomas Buller Bradshaw, J. P.

Miss Lettice Digby.

Mr. Ernest Chalders Garbutt.

Dr. E. C. Hort.

Mr. William Sandford Hoseasou.

Mr. Owen Lloyd Hughes.

Mr. Robert Hicks Kidd, R.E.

Mr. William I. Morrish, M.D., etc.

Mr. Frank Rowley, M.I.M.M.

Mr. Walter Salmon.

Mr. Herbert Sutcliffe.

Mr. Edward E. Triggs.

Sir Nicholas Yermoloff, K.C.B., K.C.V.O., was duly elected a Fellow
of the Society.

Donations were reported from —

Dr. Urban Pritchard . . A collection of Diatoms.
Mr. J. Rheiuberg . . . A set of Photographic Scales and

Micrometer Rulings.

On the motion of the President, hearty votes of thanks were passed
to the above donors for their valuable contributions to the Society's
Collection.

The following report was presented dealing with the Society's
exhibit and demonstrations at the recent Scientific Products Exhibition
at King's College : —

proceedincxs of the society. 411

Exhibit of The Royal Microscopical Society at the British
Scientific Products Exhibition, 1918.

Your President has to report that in July Inst he was informed by
the British Science Guild that it was about to ori^anize the British
Scientific Products Exhibition, 1918, at Kind's Colleffe, and he was
asked whether the Royal Microscopical Society would be prepared to
assist in its endeavour to enlist the aid of Science in the industrial
development of the Empire. Considerinsj that it would be advisable for
the Society to take an active part in such an exhibition, he convened a
meeting of a Special Executive Committee, wliich was held on July I'l.
At this meetitii^ it was agreed that, subject to the approval of the
Members of the Council, the Society should armno-e to send a selection
of instruments from its collection to illustrate the Evolution of the
British Microscope, and that in connexion therewith there should also
be demonstrations showing a number of bacteriological, pathological,
and other slides that had been stained by means of British-made dyes.

The Members of the Council were unanimous in their support of the
proposition, and many offered personal help in furtherinij the success
of the project. A special room was set apart at the Exhibition for the
exclusive use of the Society, and an exhibit of twenty-seven British
microscopes, illustrating the types in use during the last two centuries,
was arranged.

The Exhibition was open for four weeks, August 12 to September 7,
and during this period demonstrntions were given each Tuesday after-
noon and each Thursday evening. A great amount of interest was
aroused by the Society's exhibit and demonstrations, an interest which
cannot fail to be of benefit to the Society ; and the President desires to
record his sincere thanks to those who assisted, among whom were
Miss Francis, and Messrs. S. C. Akehurst, C. F. Hill, T. H. Hiscott,
R. Paulson, I). J. Scourfield, C. D. vSoar, and J. Wilson ; and also to
the following, who very kindly lent modern microscopes for the purpose
of the demonstrations : Dr. Eyre, Dr. Gordon, Messrs. Angus, Hill, and
Lancaster, King's College, and King's College for Women.

On Tuesday, August 20, your President gave an address in the
Exhibition Lecture Theatre on " The Evolution of the English JMicro-
scope." Dr. Walmsley presided. There was a good attendance, and a
remme of the address will appear in the published Record of the
Exhibition which is being prepared by the British Science Guild.

The following is the list of Instruments exhibited to illustrate
The Evolution of the British Microscope.

1. John Marshall "Double" Microscope, 1744. Invented about
1704. (R.M.S. Cat. No. G.) Type— Compound Microscope, uncorrected.
This instrument was described in the original advertisement as "John
Marshall's New Invented Double Microscope for Viewing the Circula-
tion of the Blood." The word "double" here signifies that it was a

412 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

compound instrument provided with an objective for forming an image
of the object and an ocular for viewing the image so formed.

2. Culpeper's Compound Microscope. Date, before 1738. (R.M.S.
Cat. No. 9.) Type — Compound, uncorrected. A modification of Wilson's
simple Microscope. A body-tube of ivory, with draw-tube, is provided
for the purpose of transforming it into a compound instrument which is
mounted on a pillar with a ball-and-socket joint.

3. CuLPEPER AND ScARLET. Invented about 1738. (R.M.S. Cat.
No. 7.) Type — Compound, uncorrected. This tripod form of Micro-
scope stand, mounted on a wooden box, was a favourite model for more
than a century. It was copied and made by successive opticians with
many variations in form, material, and finish until about the middle of
last century. There is no fine-adjustment. The object-glass is a single
biconvex lens, and the eye-piece has two lenses.

4. Nathaniel Adams. About 1740. (R.M.S. Cat. No. 152.) Type
— Compound, uncorrected. This is of the Culpeper and Scarlet pattern,
and is rendered even more unhandy than its original by the addition of
a fourth pillar in the space surrounding the stage. This inconvenience
was incurred, no doubt, for the sake of the greater rigidity — a distinct
advantage in focussing the instrument.

5. DOLLOND. About 1810. (R.M.S. Cat. No. 121.) Type— Com-
pound, uncorrected. This again is of the Culpeper and Scarlet pattern,
but shows a great advance in its mechanism, being made all in brass and
fitted with a rack-and-piuion focussing arrangement. This specimen is
remarkable for its date as showing the persistence and continued improve-
ment of an obsolete type of instrument. Described in the Journ. R.M.S.,
1901, p. 227.

6. John Cuff's Compound Microscope. Invented about 1744.
(R.M.S. Cat. No. 127.) Type— Alternatively Simple or Compound,
uncorrected. The inventor of this model made a distinct improvement
in the mechanical construction of the Microscope, and it forms an
important link in the evolution of the instrument. The stand is firmer
and more rigid, and altogether more handy, whilst the stage is more
accessible : the fine-adjustment applied to the body has greater delicacy.

7. Benjamin Martin. 1760. (R.M.S. Cat. No. 52.)" Type— Alter-
natively Simple or Compound, uncorrected. For the first time there is
a slow and fine movement for focussing, by rack-and-pinion and l)y screw,
both applied to the stage, with the constant action of a spring to check
the motion. A small compass-joint at the top of the pillar allows the
carrying-ring to be turned out of the way when the instrument is used
as a simple Microscope.

8. Benjamin Martin. 1771. (R.M.S. Cat. No. 5.) Type— Alter-
natively Simple or Compound, uncorrected. This exceedingly elaborate
instrument, of exquisite workmanship, with every conceivable movement,
is said to have been made for King George III. Its authentic descrip-
tion is " Benjamin Martin's Large Universal Microscope." The triangular
upright stem has a compass-joint at its base, and is fixed to an elaborate
foot, over which it is adapted to rotate. The stage has micrometric
movements in three directions ; it moves the object over a wire scale in
the eye-piece. This method of micrometry was invented by Benjamin
Martin. The double mirror, as well as the stage, can be raised and

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 413

depressed l)y rack-and-pinion. The compound body can be removed
and replaced by a simple Microscope ; the stage also can be removed and
replaced. Provision is made for holding and illuminating living objects
and large opaque specimens. This Microscope is fully described in the
Transactions of the R.M.S. of 1862, p. 31.

9. Gregory and AVright. (R.M.S. Cat. No. no.) Type— Alter-
natively Simple or Compound, uncorrected. The makers of this instru-
ment were siiccessors to Benjamin Martin. They follow his lead by
making the stem inclinable by a joint at its base. The body is attached
to a movable arm, which, in turn, is carried by the stem. This arm
can be swung about the axis of the stem, and moved to and fro in its
socket, these movements facilitating the exploration of a large specimen.
Focussing is effected by rack-and-pinion, which move ^he stem and body,
whilst the stage is fixed. This Microscope has a rotating multiple lens-
carrier nose-piece, invented by Pere Cherubini d'Orleans.

10. Shuttleavorth. 1786. (R.M.S. Cat. No. 179.) Type-
Alternatively Simple or Compound, uncorrected. The stand of this
instrument is a somewhat later imitation of the Benjamin Martin type.
The triangular stem has a compass-joint at its base, by means of which
the whole' Microscope is inclinable. The stage has rack-and-pinion
focussing movement. The body is fixed to a movable and rotating arm,
and carries Francis Watkins' rotating multiple lens-carrier nose-piece.
The mirror and condensing lens slide on the triangular pillar. For
description, see Journ. R.M.S.. 1908, p. 365.

11. Jones. 1798. (R.M.S. Cat. No. 51.) Type— Alternatively
Simple or Compound, uncorrected. This model follows an earlier form
of Francis Watkins, inasmuch as the compass-joint making the Micro-
scope inclinable is raised to the top of an upright stem, fixed to a tripod
folding foot. To the joint is fixed a square limb, on the top ot which
a short arm, movable by rack-and-pinion, supports the body of the
Microscope. The stage moves on the limb l)y rack-and-pinion, which
serves for the focussing of the object. The mirror and condensing-lens
slide on the same square limb. The object-glasses are contained in a
rotating multiple lens-carrier nose-piece.

12. Cuthbert's Reflecting Microscope. About 1827. (R.M.S.
Cat. No. 12.) Type— Compound : Catoptric. The maker of this Micro-
scope attempted to produce achromatism by means of mirrors, carrying
into effect a suggestion originally made by Newton. The magnification
of objects is here effected by means of very small reflecting specula, and
the result for low and medium powers was very fairly satisfactory.
The body is fixed by a compass-joint on the top of the telescopic stem
supported on a folding tripod. The focussing is effected by moving the
stage, and the latter has rectangular motion.

13. Hugh Powell. 1839. (R.M.S. Cat. No. 128.) Type-
Compound : Achromatic. This Microscope embodies new features which
have now been very generally adopted. The body, stage, and mirror
are carried by the limb, which itself is attached by a compass-joint to
an upright telescopic pillar raised on a solid tripod. The coarse-
adjustment by rack-and-pinion for the first time moves the body of the
Microscope, but the fine-adjustment is applied to the stage by a wedge
acted on by a micrometer screw. In this model also Hugh Powell

414 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

systeinaticallv applied the method of "springing" in the movements to
prevent loose action. Described in Journ. R.M.S., 1901, p. 728.

14. Hugh Powell's Large Microscope. 1841. (R.M.S. Cat.
No. 2.) Type — Compound : Achromatic. This Microscope is one of
three which the Council of the Microscopical Society of London,* soon
after its formation, ordered of the three best makers of the day — Hugh
Powell, James Smith, and Andrew Ross. The too elaborate and sub-
stantial stand was considered the best of its day, and embodies all the
most refined movements and apparatus the maker was able to devise.
The body is moved by rack-and-pinion. and is attached to a hollow
triangular bar. The fine-adjustment actuates the stage. Originally
this was a monocular Microscope, but the binocular body with Wenham's
prism was fitted to it after the invention of the latter in 1868.

15. James Smith. 1841. (R.M.S Cat. No. 1.) Type— Compound :
Achromatic. This stand was made in execution of an order given by
the Council of the Microscopical Society of London in August 1840,
and has become a model on which many English stands have since been
made. A substantial pillar mounted on a solid tripod supports a
grooved limb, which itself carries directly the body, stage, and mirror.
Coarse-adjustment is effected by rack-and-pinion moving the body,
whilst fine-adjustment for the first time by lever and screw acts on the
nose-piece only. The mechanical stage has rectangular motion and can
be rotated. Described and figured in Microscopic Journal, ii. p. 1.

16. Andrew Ross. 1842-3. (R.M.S. Cat. No. 47.) Type-
Compound : Achromatic. In execution of an order by the Council of
the Microscopical Society of London in 1841, Andrew Ross produced
this type of Microscope. The pillar is mounted on a circular base,
which rotates so as to increase the steadiness of the base when the
Microscope is inclined. The body slides in the grooved hmb, and the
fine-adjustment acts by a lever on the nose-piece. The mechanical stage
has rectangular movements and also I'otates. Described and figured in
Journ. R.M.S., 1899, p. 214.

17. Dr. Bdavin Quekett's Microscope. 1844. (R.M.S. Cat. No. 3.)
Type — Compound : Achromatic. This instrument was designed and
mainly constructed by Dr. Quekett, the founder of the Royal Micro-
scopical Society, and was bequeathed by him to the Society. Whilst
following James Smith's Microscope in general arrangement, this model
is characterized by greater rigidity of the foot and pillar. The
mechanical stage is made on A. Ross's pattern. Below the stage there is
a focussing condenser.

18. Powell and Lealand. 1848. (R.M.S. Cat. No. 129.) Type
— Compound : Achromatic. This model is the first example in which
the Microscope is hanging in a tripod, and also the first example in
which the fine-adjustment moves the nose-piece by means of a lever
within a bar. The mechanical stage has Turrell's rectangular movement,
and possesses a focussing condenser. This type of Microscope appears to
have been first made in 1843. Described in Journ. R.M.S., 1901, p. 727.

19. Microscope by Cary, with Varley's Lever-Stage. About
1850 (.?). (R.M.S. Cat. No. 134.) An instrument constructed by

* Now the Royal Microscopical Society.

PKOUEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 415

Yarley with a similar stage is described and figured in " Quekett on the
Microscope," 1848, p. 94.

20. Jackson's Microscope. Date, about 1860 (?). (R.M.S. Cat.
No. 133.) Type — Compound : Achromatic. This stand was made by
Dr. George Jackson (one of the Founders and a President of the
Microscopical Society of London, now the Royal Microscopical Society).
The limb is in one piece and is planed straight through from end to
end in one cut, so as to form a dove-tailed groove in which the body
and substage move by means of rack-and-pinion. A fine-adjustment is
fitted to the stage ; the mirror is attached to the substage and moves
with it. The limb is mounted on two pillars which are screwed to a
horse-shoe foot, which is too small and gives an insufficient base.

21. Thomas Ross. 1863. (R.M.S. Cat. No. x.) This is the
Microscope presented by Mr. Thomas Ross in exchange for the instru-
ment made for the Royal Microscopical Society in 1841 by Andrew Ross
(see Exhibit No. 16), and represents the ideal Microscope of the period.

22. Ladd's Student's Microscope. About 1864. (R.M.S. Cat.
No. 145.) Type — Compound : Achromatic. This model is of an
original design,' differing in most of its features from all others of its
period. The body, stage, substage and mirror are fitted on a straight
grooved bar planed through from top to bottom, as in the Jackson
stand (see Exhibit No. 20). The substage has rack-and-pinion adjust-
ment, but the position of the mirror is fixed. The tripod foot is made
of light tubing, and has a fairly good spread of base. The coarse-
adjustment and the stage movements are operated by fine chains
workino- on spindles attached to the usual milled heads. The fine-
adjustment is worked by a loose lever hanging from the spindle of the
coarse-adjustment.

23. Powell and Lealand. No. 1 Stand, 1869. (R.M.S. Cat.
No. 122.) Type — Compound : Achromatic. This model is a develop-
ment of their stand of 1848 (see Exhibit No. 18). It is dated 1875,
and with the addition of a fine-adjustment to the substage, rack-and-
pinion to the draw-tube, and diagonal rackwork to the coarse-adjust-
ment, the design remains unaltered to the present day. This stand was
preceded by one of a smaller size, which was probably introduced
after 1851.

24. Ross's Binocular Microscope. 1878. (R.M.S. Cat. No. 40.)
Type — Compound : Achromatic. This is a Ross-Jackson model with a
Zentmayer swinging substage and a rotating stage with Turrell rect-
angular movements. The stage can also be placed at an angle with the
optic axis. The substage has rack-and-pinion and centring adjust-
ments. The tripod foot is cast in one piece with the uprights for
carrying the trunnions.

25. Ross's Large Binocular Microscope. 1888. (R.M.S. Cat.
No. 186.) Type — Compound : Achromatic. The body is suspended by
trunnions on two pillars fixed on a modified horse-shoe foot. The
rotating stage has rectangular mechanical movements and a device for
tilting a slide towards the objective when using high powers in order
that the working distance may be ascertained. There is a rotating
Zentmayer substage with rack-and-pinion focussing and centring adjust-
ments. Schroeder's fine-adjustment is fitted to this instrument.

416 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

26. Beck's Imperial. 1913. A good example of the complete
English model on tripod base.

27. Swift's I.M.S. Microscope. 1913. A special design for medical
Bacteriology and Hsematology. This stand was specially constructed
for use in the Indian Medical Service. It has a built-in mechanical
stage.

The Secretary moved a vote of thanks to the President, who had
at great personal inconvenience given two demonstrations each week.
It was owing to his energy that the Society had been enabled to provide
a striking exhibit in a most important exhibition showing the progress
that had been made during the war by firms associated with the produc-
tion of scientific material. The exhibition had a great influence on a
large number of people, and the demonstrations were well attended.

The vote of thanks was carried unanimously, and it was decided that
the report, together with a list of the Society's exhibit, should be printed
in the Journal.

The following communications were then made : —
In connexion with the exhibition of fresh-water Copepods, Mr.
Scourfield said that the Copepods, or " paddle-footed " Crustacea,
formed one of the divisions of the Entomostraca, and were divided into
three groups, typified by the genera Diaptomus, Cyclops, and Cnntho-
camptus, representing the families Centropagidge, Cyclopidae, and
Harpacticidas respectively. Apart from differences in morphology, which
were very well marked, the methods of swimming in the three types
were quite different. Diaptomus normally progressed with a gliding
motion brought about by the rapid vibration of the second antennge and
the oral appendages. During this gliding movement the long first pair
of antennffi were placed almost at right angles to the body, which was
held obliquely, back downwards. The animal could also move through
the water by very powerful jerks. Cyclops could not glide, but always
jerked about, though it was remarkable that while swimming the body
was held in different ways by different species, some with the back up,
others vertically, and others obliquely with tlie back downwards. Cantho-
cajnptus and its allies also jerked about, but with a peculiar zigzag spiral
motion.

As a rule Diaptomus was found only in the clear w'ater of ponds and
lakes, but D. castor occurred in little grassy pools. Cyclops in one form or
another was met with in fresh water everywhere, but many of the species
were restricted to particular types of pond, etc. Ganthocamptus and its
allies were found not only in weedy ponds and ditches and the margins of
lakes, but certain species could usually be obtained from wet mosses
growing in swamps and bogs, on rocks and walls, and on posts, etc., just
above the surface of the water. One species he had found only in
the cups formed by the leaves of Bromeliaceous plants at the Royal .
Botanical Gardens at Regent's Park and at Kew, while another was
only obtained from the little collections of water in holes on tree-trunks.

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 417

As regards the number of species of British fresh-water Copepods,
there were about ten species of Diaptomus and two of the allied genus
Eurytemora. Cyclops was represented by at least twenty-five, perhaps
thirty, species. Of Canthocamptus, Nitocra, Moraria, and other genera
belonging to the Harpacticidas there were some twenty-five species, but
there was yet much work to be done on this group.

In the determination of the species of Copepods very minute char-
acters were relied upon as a rule, but strangely enough some closely
allied species showed characteristic colour markings and other peculiarities
which could be seen by the naked eye or a pocket-lens. Some of these
characters had been used long ago by Koch, a copy of whose work had
been very kindly brought to the meeting by Mr. Soar.

For the examination of Copepods, the Rousselet live-box was pro-
bably the best method, especially when fitted with a thin metal ring
to which very thin cover-glasses could be cemented. By this means the
highest powers could if necessary be brought to bear on the object.
When so used in conjunction with a good condenser details of structure
could usually be made out which would only otherwise be obtainable by
dissection, a troublesome matter when dealing with creatures no more
than sV-iw- perhaps. For preserving in tubes formalin was probably the
best all-round medium, and for mounts glycerin-jelly was on" the
whole most suitable.

Mr. Scourfield then referred briefly to some of the actual specimens
exhibited.

The following' objects (Fresh-water Copepods) were exhibited: —

Mr. S. E. Akehurst . Diap)tomus castor 6 .

Mr. E. Cuzner . . . Cyclops fuscus, etc.

Mr. D. Davies . . . C. strenuus.

Miss L. R. Francis . . C. phnleratiis.

Mr. J. Grundy . . . C.fiiscus 9.

Dr. J. R. Leeson . . Canthocamptus mimdus.

Mr. J. M. Oflford . . Cyclops vicinus.

Mr. R. Paulson . . . C. hicolor, the smallest British species

of Cyclops.

Mr. F. J. W. Plaskitt . Diaptomus castor 9 .

Mr. J. Richardson . . Cyclops macrurus.

Mr. D. J. Scourfield. . Viguierella cceca {Belisarius viguieri),

from the cups formed by the leaves
of P>romeliaceous plants at the
Royal Botanic Gardens. Moraria
arboricola, from tree-holes in
Popping Forest.

Mr. C. J. TI. Sidwell . Cyclops fiiscus 6 .

Mr. C. D. Soar . . . Canthocamptus minutus.

Mr. W. R. Traviss . , Cyclops affinis.

Mr. J. Wilson . . . Cyclops albidus.

A vote of thanks was accorded to Mr. Scourfield and to those who
|md brought microscopes and specimens.

3

418 PROCEEDTNGS OF THE SOCIETY.

Colonel Clibborn exhibited a tank he had constructed. It was con-
structed of two pieces of plate-glass about nine inches in length, kept
apart and made water-tight by means of an undressed rubber tube
running along the bottom and sides, strips of wood inside the tube keep-
ing the glass sides the required distance apart. Pieces of angle-brass
clamped by means of bolts and nuts kept the sides firm, and the whole
was then fitted to a wooden base. It was a simple thing to make and
could be taken to pieces in a minute.

Colonel Clibborn was thanked for his exhibit.

The President gave a short description of the booklet published by
the Medical Research Committee on the " l^iagnosis of <jronococcal
Infections and the Methods for the Detection of Spiroch^etes." He had
previously invited the Fellows of the Society to put their knowledge at
the disposal of the medical men of this country in assisting them in the
diagnosis of venereal diseases. The booklet referred to was now ready,
and he would be pleased to let those who could assist in the direction
indicated have copies as far as the supply was available. The Council
would be glad to have the names of those Fellows who could help and
who had not yet replied, so that a complete list could be printed as soon
as possible. He was quite convinced there was room for the Society to
do useful work in this direction. The method was very simple with the
dark-ground illumination apparatus now available.

2'he question of iUumination was a difficult one even in ordinary
work, and he had found a difficulty in that resi3ect in connexion with
this particular work. The intensity of the illuminant was a very
important factor. The differentiation of Spirocliseta pallidum was
difficult when other Spirochaetes were present. He had therefore
designed a very simple gas-lamp which helped to solve the problem.
It was sufficiently intense to see S. pallidum easily, and it enabled its
characteristics to be observed. He wished them to note that the main
point of difference from the other similar objects showing in the
field at the same time was the very definite blueness of colour of the
organism. The source of light in the lamp was an incandescent
mantle, but it was not used as an open fabric which gave bright lines
and dark spaces, but the mantle was lightly rolled and put in a tube.
The fabric had to be specially woven, cut off into lengths and made
into cigarette form. It was pushed into a n:ketal tube, with a quarter
of an inch protruding which came in touch with a Bunsen flame. The
end could be actually in the flame for days together while the rest of the
mantle remained unaltered. The mantle could be easily renewed from
time to time by pushing forward the unburnt portion in the tnbe. It
provided an image circular in area, and as large or as small as desired.
It fulfilled the want there was for an illuminant of sufficient intensity
with not too large an area, and he trusted it might be useful in the work
for which it had been designed.

Mr. A. Ashe and Mr. M. A. Ainslie congratulated the President on
the production of a very efficient illuminant, the latter pointing out that

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 419

it was equally good in illuminating the field of view and in filling the back
lens of the objective.

Professor Conrady said that the lamp nipped a lot of microscopical
troubles in the bud, for a round source of light was certainly an ideal.

A vote of thanks was accorded to the President for his remarks, who
in reply stated that he had made up his mind not to leave the Presidential
Chair ^ without saying something about that fetish " the edge of the
flame "-—as so many seemed to think that all other troubles vanished if
only this were used. What was required was a circular source of light
of suitable dimension. As far as electricity was concerned, the only
light that filled the bill was the Ediswan Pointolite, and there the
intensity was somewhat high.

Mr. Rheinberg's donation of Photographic Scales and Micrometer
Rulings was exhibited.

The President, by means of a series of lantern-slides, compared the
results of photographic and diamond rulings.

The thanks of the Meeting were accorded to the President.

The President announced that the next Meeting of the Biological
Section would be on November (i, Avhen the Members would pay a visit
to the King's College Bacteriological Laboratories at Chandos Street.

The business proceedings then terminated.

2 F 2

420 rtlOGEEDiNGS OF THE SOCIETY.

AX ORDINARY MEETING

OF THE Society was Held at 20 Hanover Square, W., on
Wednesday, November 20Tir, 1918, Mr. J. E. Barnard,
President, in the Chair.

The Minutes of the Meeting of October 16 were read, confirmed, and
signed by the President.

The President vdrew attention to the important events that had
taken place since their last meeting. He was sure he was voicing the
feelings of all })resent in expressing gratitude at the altered state of
affairs which enabled them to meet in a time of peace. When peace had
been officially declared the Society would be asked to express its opinion
in a more formal manner. It was a matter for sincere congratulation
that the Royal Microscopical Society had suffered little in loss of
Fellows. •

The Nomination Paper was read of Mr. Herbert George Blackniore.

New Fellows. — The following were elected Ordinary Fellows of the
Society :—

Mr. Charlton S. Agate, B.Sc, etc.
Mr. Charles Baxter, C.E., M.I.Mar.E., etc.
Mr. John Leshe Berry.
Capt. Thomas Buller Bradshaw, J. P.
Miss Lettice Digby.
Mr. Ernest Chalders Garbutt.
Mr. Edward Collefcc Hort, F.R.C.P. Edin.
Mr. William Sandford Hoseason.
Mr. Owen Lloyd Hughes.
Mr. Robert Hicks Kidd, R.E.
Mr. William I. Morrish, M.D., etc.
Mr. Frank Rowley, M.I.M.M.
Mr. Walter Salmon.
. Mr. Herbert Sutclifte.
Mr. Edward E. Triggs.

Mr. A. Earland read the following : —

REPORT OF THE MICROSCOPICAL SLIDES CABINET

COMMITTEE.

1. A Sub-Committee, consisting of Messrs. A. Earland, J. Hopkinson,
and the Honorary Curator, E. J. Sheppard, was appointed on the 21st
February, 11)17, to revise the collection of Micro SUdes and arrange the

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 421

residue, with the object of makmg the collection available to Fellows.
Mr. Hopkinson has unfortunately been unable to take any part in the
work, and the following report represents the work and views of the
other two members only.

2. The Society's collection was found to consist of about 10,000
slides. With the exception of the " Suffolk " and " Beck " Collections,
which have been contained in special cabinets, the whole of the slides are
stored in a large cabinet. The origin and history of this cabinet is
unknown to us, but it may be described as hopelessly unsuitable for its
purpose owing to its construction. Each drawer holds 104 slides
arranged in two layers, and it is impossible to get at a slide in the lower
layer without removing the drawer from the cabinet, and lifting out a
removable tray which holds the top layer of 52 slides.

3. The slides in the large cabinet were arranged on a chronological
system, according to the date of their acquisition, and this has resulted
in an entire absence of systematic classification. The earliest acquisition
bears date March, 1857, and is catalogued as"O.C. 1" (= Old
Collection, No. 1). From that date until April, 1897 all slides as
acquired were entered under consecutive numbers in the old register,
the number being 7,250, although this includes the " Beck " Collection
of Bone Sections already alluded to, which bear an O.C. number, though
kept in a special cabinet in accordance with the terms of the bequest.

4. In April, 1897, the new register was commenced, and the con-
secutive numbering of the slides ceased. From this date a system was
adopted under which each block of slides acquired was registered under
the date of acquisition plus a serial number. The new register begins
with a collection of 424 Molluscan Radulas, mounted by the Rev. H. M.
Gwatkin, and presented by Mr. Rousselet. These are registered as
97.4. 30, Nos. 1-424, the 30th April, 1897, being the date of their
acquisition. The register entry also shows the drawer of the cabinet in
which each slide is to be found. This was unnecessary under the old
system, as the drawers were marked with the numbers they contained.

5. About 1725 slides have been acquired since the new register was
started, and these also are devoid of any classification. Indeed, from
the very commencement of the cabinet the only arrangement noticeable
is that certain collections already classified by the previous owners have
been absorbed en bloc.

6. We are unable to see that the new register system constituted
any advance on the old. In the absence of a subject-index it was
impossible to locate any particular slide without laborious search through
the registers, or even to say whether the Society possessed one or twenty
specimens of a particular subject.

7. Two efforts to remedy this defect have been made. The old
register contains several pages showing the cabinet numbers of slides
belonging to many prominent groups. This was only a makeshift for
the benefit of the Curator.

8. The late Mr. Suffolk, when Curator, made a card-index of the
slides, exclusive of the diatoms. The cards are sorted under a very
elaborate system in a cabinet. The system is, however, faulty ; it was
more or less incomplete at the author's death, and was then abandoned,
so that at present it has no value. We are of opinion that it could now

2 F 3

422 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

with advantage be completed and classified, and that it would prove of
great value to Fellows if thereafter it was systematically kept up to
date.

9. The " Suffolk " Collection, to which allusion has already been
made, consisted of a separate cabinet of about 1000 slides of a very
miscellaneous character, largely vegetable preparations mounted by
Mr. Suffolk. It has now been merged in the general collection in
accordance with the decision of the Council.

In our opinion detached collections lose value by their isolation from
the general cabinet, besides entailing more work on the Curator.

10. Two factors became obvious as soon as we started the revision
of the cabinet : — (1) The repeated duplication of all favourite micro
subjects. (2) The very inferior quality of many of the mounts. The
duplication has no doubt been due largely to the absence of a systematic
catalogue, but it is probably not unconnected with that policy of never
looking at the teeth of the gift-horse, which has certainly been a
standard rule of the Society in the past, and which has been responsible
for the inclusion of a great number of worthless slides. Donations
have been accepted and incorporated in the cabinet, and the grateful
thanks of the Society no doubt tendered for slides which were often
below the mounting standard of a novice. We are aware that it is not
always an easy or a graceful business to refuse a gift tendered by an old
esteemed Fellow, but we are strongly of opinion that the situation is not
beyond tactful treatment, and that the Curator or a Sub-Committee
should in future report on proffered donations before they are definitely
accepted.

11. Our first step was to go through the cabinet and remove all
slides which might be regarded as entirely worthless, owing to inferior
methods of preparation or deterioration from age and neglect. This
resulted in the scrapping of over 1100 slides, and of these it is sufficient
to state that they have neither scientific nor commercial value. They
represent merely their value in waste slips, and in accordance with the
Council's decision will be distributed among such Fellows as may feel
inclined to clean the slips for further use.

12. A second scrutiny of the cabinet was then made, which resulted
in the rejection of about 1750 slides, which may be described as having
some commercial value. These consist of : — (1) Duplicate slides.
(2) Damaged slides, capable of remounting or repair. (3) Slides
unsuitable for the Society's cabinet, either owing to the nature of the
subject or the method of mounting.

13. The value of these slides varies considerably, some of the dupli-
cates being first-class si^ecimens and others of great interest or rarity.
As decided by the Council, these slides will be open to the inspection of
Fellows, who may make any selection at a price which will at first be
fixed at one shilling each. As the collection diminishes the price will
necessarily be reduced, and we suggest that after a reasonable interval
the unsaleable residue should be placed in the hands of Mr. Angus,
with directions to dispose of them to the best advantage. The money
received for these slides should, we think, be devoted to the purchase of
further slides, or become the nucleus of a fund for a new cabinet.

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 423

14. The elimination of these wasters and duplicates, and the dona-
tion of the Wallich Collection to the British Museum, has reduced the
cabinet to about 5125 slides, which we have now re-arranged in the
cabinet on a scientific classification, according to the subjects of the
mounts. It will in future be possible to go direct to the cabinet and
withdraw all the specimens dealing with any particular subject. This
re-arrangement has been a most laborious task, owing to the limitations
of cabinet space, and the number of transposals required in the sorting
processes before the specimens could be assembled in their proper
drawers. Now that the process is complete it becomes painfully
apparent that the cabinet resembles the Irishman's trousers, inasmuch
as it consists largely of gaps. A few subjects are adequately and even
liberally represented, others of equal, or from the microscopist's point of
view, of greater importance, have only the slightest representation, and
sometimes none at all. In a general sense it may be stated that the
collections illustrate the technique of the past. This is not a matter of
any moment so far as many groups are concerned, but in other groups,
especially animal and vegetable physiology, modern histological methods
are poorly represented, and we think it desirable that the cabinet
should be strengthened by a large addition of modern mounts.

15. There were two sections of the collection which we did not feel
disposed to touch as they required specialist treatment. These were : —
(1) Microscopic writings and rulings consisting of about 110 prepara-
tions. (2) Diatoms consisting of about 1000 mounts. Mr. Barnard
was good enough to undertake the examination of the first group, and
reports that they are nearly all of interest and should be preserved. It
appears that these specimens should not be allowed to circulate without
the special permission of the Council, as they are mostly of historic
interest and not replaceable.

The Diatom collection is of a very miscellaneous nature, and a large
proportion of the slides are of such poor quality that we should have
rejected them but for the fact that they have nearly all been examined
and reported on by the late Mr. Comber, whose MS. notes are in the
possession of the Society. Included in the collection are many slides
mounted in special media for resolution purposes, and it is probable that
the majority of these have become valueless.

The Diatom collection has for the time being been incorporated
en bloc, but the Council has accepted the services of a Fellow of the
Society who has kindly offered to revise the collection and arrange the
selected slides under some scheme which will render them available to
Members. A further addition of named and selected species-slides
similar to the " Eulenstein " series recently given by Dr. Pritchard
should also be obtained in order to supplement the collection, which at
present consists largely of spread-slides.

16. Before the cabinet can be advantageously placed at the disposal
of the Fellows two things appear to be necessary : —

(1) A new cabinet, or the reconstruction of the existing cabinet on
more convenient lines, so as to make all slides accessible without the
removal of the drawers from the cabinet.

(2) A printed catalogue of the contents. The card-index, even when

424 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

completed, will be of no use except to the Curator and the few Fellows
who frequent the Society's rooms.

We take it that the Society will not in the present financial period
be prepared to spend money ou either of these objects, and, indeed,
at the present time the gaps in the collection are too obvious to make a
printed catalogue desirable. We think, however, that this would be
a very suitable time to fill in the gaps, so that the catalogue when
ready for printing may worthily represent the collection of the Royal
Microscopical Society. There must be numerous Fellows, and other
microscopists working at special groups, who would respond cheerfully to
an invitation to give some of their best work a home in the Society's
cabinet, and with this end in view we conclude our Report with an
Appendix showing how the groups are now represented, and indicating
the gaps which it is desired to fill. A Fapt anti

E. J. Sheppakd.

Appendix to the Report.
Animal Kinr/dom.

The sul)-kingdom Protozoa is very sparingly represented in the
cabinet apart from Foraminifera, of which there are over 100 named
species and some eighty spread-slides. The Infusoria, the Mastigophora,
and the Lobosa are each represented by a single slide, but the Sporozoa
and Heliozoa are entirely unrepresented. There are about 20 Radiolaria,
but nearly all spread- slides.

Sponges are represented by some 70 preparations, a poor selection
except so far as fresh-water sponges are concerned. Many of the
specimens require naming or re-naming.

CodenUrata are very poorly represented, only about a dozen Hydroids
and as many Gorgonids.

Worms. — A very poor series, about 50 slides, but interesting histori-
cally as they include mounts by Cobbold, Rosseter, and Bastian.

Rotifera. — Less than a dozen mounts, in good condition.

Crustacea. — Very poorly represented by about 50 slides, 29 or more
of which are hard sections. There are only a few mounts of Cladocera
and Ostracoda.

Myriapoda. — Two slides only.

Acarina. — There is a fine set of over 100 OribatidaB, given by
Mr. Michael, but very few of other groups.

Pseudoscorpions. — One only.

Ticks. — About a dozen.

Spiders. — About 15, some good.

Pycnogonida. — Two mounts only.

Insects. — A considerable number of slides, but not many high-class
preparations.

Thysamira and Collemhola. — Over 30 mounts of Podura scales,
which Mr. Barnard has undertaken to examine.

Orthoptera, 7. Neuroptera, G. Mallophaga, 14.

Aphaniptera, 4. Thysanopiera, 1. Hemiptera, 10.

Anoplura, 8.

tilOCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 425

Hymenoptera. — About 50, including ess than 12 high-class mounts.

CoJeoptera. — About 45 medium mounts, very few really good.

Diptera. — About 60. Some good mounts and dissections, but the
latter roughly mounted and in poor condition.

Lepidoplera. — A good series of about 20 eggs ; 50 or 60 scales, not
examined ; and about 20 other slides, Some good.

Mollusca. — Over 400 named Radulte and about 40 hard sections,
chiefly by Carpenter.

Bryozoa. — A good collection of about 200 named species.

Echinodermata. — Over 60 slides, including several mounts by
Carpenter, but in poor condition.

There ure no representatives of the Chaetognatha (Sagitta) or
Hemichordata. One slide for each of the groups Urochordata (Pyrosoma),
Gephalochordata (Amphioxus), and Cydostomata (Lamprey).

Fishes. — About fifty slides, chiefly scales, hardly any anatomical.

Amphihia, Reptilia. — About 40, including some good anatomical
preparations.

Birds. — About 40 slides, half of which are opaque injections of
fowl, of no great interest or value.

Mammalia. — The anatomical section consists of rather more than 100
slides, including some good preparations by Cole and others, a large
number of opaque injections by Farrant ; good examples of this class of
mount, but of little value as micro slides. Modern preparations illus-
trating recent technique and histology are badly required.

Mammalian Hairs. — About 90 mounts, including a series of bat
hairs (dry and balsam) of some interest.

Bones and Teeth. — The Beck Collection consists of over 400 prepara-
tions of the highest class, in a special cabinet. These must not be lent
to Fellows under the terms of the gift.

A fine series of mounts by Tucker will be available for loan.

Human. — Apart from the Zeiss series of about 90 preparations, there
are some 80 or 90 mounts, anatomical and pathological. They are as a
whole poor specimens, and modern preparations illustrating recent
technique are desirable.

Vegetable Kingdom.

The lower Algse, a specially interesting group to the microscopist,
are very badly represented — Oyanophycese by some 20 slides of poor
quality, Ghlorophycex even worse : only 25 slides to represent Green
Alg£e ! 8ome of these are very poor, but have been retained in the
absence of other mounts. Among them is a slide of Volvox globator,
the only representative of its order, which was mounted in 1849. There
should be no difficulty in gathering a suitable collection of Green Alg«.
There are only five poor Desmid slides and one Ghara.

The Red Algae are well represented by over 200 slides mounted by
Mrs. Clarke, of Whitby, which in spite of their age are in good con-
dition.

Fungi. — Very poorly represented by about 20 very old mounts.

Lichens, 2. Liverworts, 8. Mosses, 5.

Ferns, 13. Equisetacese, 4. Lycopodinoe 2.

426 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

Bacteria. — Hardly represented at all.

Phanerogam tissues. — About UO slides of varying merit, few really
first-class mounts. Modern histological preparations and cytological
slides are badly wanted.

Starches. — A fairly representative series.

Raphides. — A few.

Wood Sections. — A useful series of nearly 100 somewhat roughly
mounted preparations.

Vegetable Fibres. — A very large and valuable series of over 200
slides. They are apparently in good condition, though probably un-
touched for nearly 50 years.

Rode Sections, Coal, Flint. — Eight original Eozoon preparations by
Carpenter and about 40 other sections of good quality. About 20
flints with Xanthidia, good but rough mounts. There is room for large
additions to the cabinet in this section. A few interesting coal and
shale preparations.

Minerals. — A good number, including a series of over 50 prepara-
tions of native gold and associated minerals from California and other
parts of the world.

Note. — The figures were taken out before the inclusion of the
" Suffolk " Collection, but this does not materially affect any group.

The President said it was very difficult to realize the enormous
amount of work the report had involved. There was great difficulty in
deciding whether a slide was worth retaining or whether it should be
thrown out. The collection of slides had now been arranged on a
scientific basis, and the cabinet was ready for use. It was the duty of
every Fellow of the Society to look through his own collection of slides
to see what could be presented to the Society to help to fill vacant spaces
in the cabinet.

Pie would like to propose a very cordial vote of thanks to Mr.
Earland and to Mr. Sheppard for the work they had done and the
efficient manner in which it had been carried through.

The vote of thanks was carried by acclamation.

In reply to a suggestion by Mr. J. Richardson that slides of historical
interest as illustrating mounting methods should be preserved in a special
cabinet, Mr. Earland pointed out that there had been no difference in
the methods of mounting since the beginning of the collection. The
Society did possess representative slides of pre-balsam days in connexion
with the collection of instruments, and these included the ancient sliders
and the talc and mica mounts. Other slides, by Mr. Cromwell and Dr.
Carpenter, with quasi-sentimental value, were retained for the sake of
the mounters and for their historical associations.

Mr. R. Paulson, F.L.S., read a paper on " The Microscopic Structure
of Lichens." Mr. Paulson expressed his deep regret at the absence of
Miss Lorrain Smith on account of illness. She was a recognized
authority on the subject of Lichens, and had now completed her great

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 427

work, " A Monograph of the British liichens." The meeting would lose
a gro^t deal owing to her absence. They had agreed that he (Mr.
Paulson) would say something on the microscopic structure of the
thallus, and Miss liorrain Smith would speak of the reproductive organs,
because they were now more necessary in connexion with classification.
Her book had brought British Lichenology up to the most modern
thought and tendencies. On the tsibles had been arranged slides of
foliose and fruticose lichens, and also a series of slides illustrating spore
formation, which Miss Lorrain Smith would have dealt with had she
been present.

The President, on the conclusion of the paper, said he had been very
interested in Mr. Paulson's remarks, but it was a subject on which he
did not feel competent to offer any criticism. He would, however, draw
attention to one point. Mr. Paulson had made every effort by micro-
scopical technique to obtain accurate images and a correct interpretation
of what he saw. This was somewhat uncommon even in the Society.
The illustrations given them on the screen had been particularly
beautiful, and showed a great advance over any work published hitherto.
It would be a valuable addition to the literature of the subject when the
paper was published in the Journal.

Thanks were accorded to Mr. Paulson, coupled with an expression of
regret at Miss Lorrain Smith's illness.

The President announced that the next Meeting would be held
on December 18, and that the Biological Section would meet on
December 2, when Mr. ('. D. Soar, F.Ti.S., would make a communication
on " A Species of Uropoda.

EOYAL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY

MEETINGS FOR THE SESSION 1918-1919

AT 8 P.M.

Wednesday, Oct, 16, 1918

Nov, 20, „

Dec. 18, „

Jan. IS, 1919

(Anniial Mcetiivj for Election

of Council (i)ut Officerx.)

»

Wednesday, Feb. 19. 1919
Mai\ 19, „
Apr. 16, „
May 21,
June 18,

»

Council Meetings are held on the third Wednesday, Meetings of the Biological
Section on the first Wednesday in each month from October to June.

Fellows intending to exhibit any Instruments or Objects, or to bring forward
any Communications at the Ordinary Meetings, are requested to inform the
Secretaries a week before the Meeting if possible.

The Library and Eooms of the Society arc open for the use of Fellows on
Wednesday Evenings, other than ]Meoting evenings, from six to nine o'clock,
except during the vacations.

429

INDEX

Aberystwith Area, Agricultural Zoological

Survey of, 187
Abra, 369
Acanthocephala of North American Birds,

308
AcanthotaBuia, New Species of, IDS
Acari, New Parasitic, 57
Acarid, Intracellular Digestion in, 370
Acetone as a Solvent for ]\[ounting Media.

279
Achrolichanus g. n., 385
Acropora palmata, 200
Acrostichiim prxstaiiiissimum, 208

— aiirenm, 209
Actiniaria, Antarctic, 312

— Irish, 387

Actinernus aurelia sp. n., 387
Actinoslola atrogtoma sp. n., 387
Actinoi'troraaria stellata, 60
Adams, Nathaniel, 412
^cidium tiibalosum, 327

— pasgifloricola, 327
^ieschna rijanea,'dl2

— Larvse, Circulation in, 193
AgaricKs tabuJaris, 220

Age, Advancing, Myelin in, 18.-)
Aglaoplieiiia hoivensis, sp. n., 387

— shiuosa Bale, 387

— vaga sp. n., 387

Agriades thetis. Scales of Leaden Males of,
191

Agrionid Larvae, Circulation in, 193

Ainslie, M. A., Some Principles of Illumi-
nation, 397

Aiptasioides g. n., 312

Alaxsostoma g. n., 385

Alcohol- Effect on Progeny of Fowls. :!7

Alcyonariaus. Australian, 59

Alectrion obsoleta, 301

Alertigorgia orientnlis (Ridley), 59

Alexeieli", A., Blndocystis entereola, 63

Algse, Biology of, 72

— Calcareous, 215
from Malta, 216

— Fresh-water, of the Austrian Coast

Districts, 821

— Minute, Staining of, 73

Algte, Marine, of Denmark, 216

Iodine in, 325

Japanese, 78

of Cuba, 325

of the Danish West Indies, 78

of Shaw Island. 77

■ — of Bermuda, 76

— of Michigan. 215

— of Puget Sound, 77

— of the Hawaiian Archipelago, 216

— Thermal, 215

— Water-supply, 215

Algal Associations of San Juan Island, 77

Algology, Oceanic, 76

Alicidaria scalaris, Cytoplasm in Cells of,
319

Alien Enemy Fellows Removed from Roll,
.112, 240

AlismacesB, Embryogeny of, 65

Allantois, Grafts of Spleen on, 364

AUemand-Martin, A , 201

Allen, Benntt M., Removal of Thyroid
from Tadpoles, 296

Allen, E. J., and E. W. Sexton, Eye-pig-
ment in Gammarus ehevreuxi, 195

Alligator, Blood-corpuscles of, 183

Alter liar ia panax, 87

— sp. 222
Alveolina, 315
Amber, 45, 46
Amblystoma, 181

— Grafts in, 297

— punctatuin. Development of Fore-limb

of, 295, 297

Development of Shoulder-girdle and

Fore-limb in, 295

— tigriiium, 297

Amemiya, I., Telescope-eye of Goldfish,

368
Amesopodidae, 382

Amiotic Division in Adipose Cells, 189
Ammoccetes, Branchial Epithelium of, 298
Ammodiscinte, 406
Ammoducus Reuss senen Brady, 406

— Cushman, 406

— Reuss, 406

Amoeba, Metabolic Gradients in, and their
Relation to Amoeboid Movement, 312

— New, from Man, 313

2 G

430

INDEX.

Amcebae Cysts, Kapid Differentiation of,
96

— New, 389

Amcebidium, Multiplication in, 63
Amceboid Activity of Germ-Cells, 39
Amphidronus macuU/erus, 45

— quadragi, 45

Amphidromus, Philippine Species of, 45
Amphilepis-Pecten, 369
Amphioxus, Hatschek's Pit in, 186

— Wheel-organ in, 187

Amphipods, Body-colour and Blood-colour
in, 196

Auicmia associated with Infection by
Echinostoina, 199

Andalusians, Blue, 300

Andre, Emile, Helininthological Notes
from Switzerland, 199

Anemia, Stelar Ontogeny of, 208

Aueura, 212

Angioblasts and Blood-vessels, 180

Angus, H. F. & Co., The Barnard Incan-
descent Gas Lamp, 397

Annandale, Nelson, Sponges from Inle'
Lake, 389

Annelid, Peculiarly Adapted, 306

Annual Report, 241

Ancestrum, 35

Anopheles hifurcatus, 333

— maculipennis, 334
Anoplodactylus lentus, 57
Anoplophrya lloydii sjJ. n., 390
Ant Larvje, 373

and Workers, Nutritive Exchange

between, 373

" Trophidium " of, 373

Antedon, Anal Plate in, 310
Anthoceros, 212

Anura, Development of Hypophysis of, 362
Apenesia electriphila sp. n., 45
Apertometry, an Improved Method of, 337

— Diagrams to Illustrate, 340, 342, 343,

344
AphroditidjE, 383

Aplodontia, Auditory Ossicles of, 42
Aplysia cah'/ornica, Pedal Locomotion of,

302
Apocynaceae, Ovule in, 65
Apple and Pear Scab, 329

— Canker due to Nectria ditlssima, 226

— Mildew, 329

Apple-rot Fungi in relation to Tempera-
ture, 222
Apple-trees, Die-back of, 87

— Root-rot of, 88
Apus austrnliensis, 381
Arachnidiopsis paradoxa, 283
Arbutus Unedo, 88

Arctiidae, Wing-markings of, 302
Arey, Leslie B., Phagocytosis by Osteo-
clasts, 183

— Shape of Red Blood-corpuscle in

Mammals, 183

Arey, Leslie B., Shape of Mammalian Red

Blood-corpuscle, 298
Argas persieus, 380
Argia talamanca, 377
Arius falcarias, 364
Armadillo, Germ-Cells of, 177
Arnell, H. W., Bryophyta of the Vega

Expedition, 321
Artemidactis g.n., 312
Arthropods from Burmese Amber, 45, 46

— Reflex Immobilization in, 372
Arthur, J. C, Uredinale?, 327

" Asakusacori " — a Japanese Food, 324

— Chemical Constituents of, 324
Ascaris himbricoides and A. mystox,

Development of, in Mouse, 307

— Life-history of, 132

— lumbricoides, 383

— niegaloeephala, 384

— suilla, 187

Ascidia atra, Sensory Reactions of, 301
Ascidian, Vascular System of, 371
Ascidians, Circulation in, 372

— Philippine, 371
Asclepidacese, Ovule in, 65
Ashfordia, 188

Askaron, Rats and Mice after Inoculation

with, 384
Aspergillui flavus, 221

— /umigatus, 221

— niger, Species grouped as, 218

— repens, 221
Aspidium, 318

Asplenum Scelosii, Ecology of, 211

Astacillidae, 382

Astacillinca, 382

Astrohizidse, 405

Atelecriuus, 386

Ateles pentad actylus, 314

Atergates floridus (Linn.), 196

Athyrium humile, New Fern, 67

Atichia, 329

Atkinson, E., Microstructure of Hypo-
eutectoid Steel as contrasted with
that of Normal Steel, with a Note on
the Microscopical Methods adopted in
the Examination of Steel Specimens,
243, 265

Atopocrinus, 386

Atopomelus g. n., 379

Atractamorpha bedeli, 377

Atwell, Wayne J., Development of Hypo-
physis of Rabbit, 362

of Hydophysis of Anura, 362

Auditory Capsule in Man, 33

Austrobilbarzia g. n., 199

Ayers, S. H., 221

B

Bablet, J., Leucocytes in Experimental
Spirochetosis, 371

INDEX.

431

Bachhuber, L. J., 1^60

Jiaclllus aerogenes rap^ulatus, 91

— nerocjenes enrapsulatus, 394

— hotulinus, 393

— citromaculann, 227

— Jy<enterise Flexner, 92

Agglutination of, 92

Hiss, 92

Shiga, 92

— enter idit is sporogenes, 91

— of Fraenkel, 39i

— of Malignant (Edema (Koch), 394

— paratijpkosus A., 92
B., 92

— perfringens, 394

— phenologenes regarded as Causative

Agent of Sclerosis of Arteries, 227

— pyocyaneus. Variety of, 90

— subtUis, 91

— tetani, 91

Medium for Cultivating, 231

— tubercle. Double Staining of: a Modi-

fication of Spengler's Method, 403

— icelchii, 394

Bacot, A., Viability of Mosquito-eggs, 376
Bacteria of Dust, 90

— of Gas Gangrene, 394

— Staining Sporogenous, 99
Bacterium gammari, 197

— tumi/aciens, 207

Badcock, H. D., Ant-like Spiders, 195
Badertscher, J. A.,Ultimobranchial Bodies

in Pig, 292
Badhamia lilacina, 393
Balanoglossids, Photic Sensibility of, 301
Balanoglossus, 187
Bale, W. M., Measurement of Magnifying

Power, 230
Balsam Problem, 230
Balsamorrhiza, Resin Secretion in, 200

— sagitlata, 206

Bamber, Ruth C, Hermaphrodite Dogfish,

181
Banks, J. B., 41
Banta, Arthur M., Sex Intergrades in

Simocephalus, 197
Barbieri, Nicola A., Structure of Optic

Nerve, 41
Barnacle Larvse, Heliotropism of, 197
Barnard Incandescent Gas Lamp, 397
Barrell, Joseph, Origin of Air-breathing

Vertebrates, 185
Bartsch, Paul, Philippine Species of

Amphidnimus, 45
Basidoniycetes from South America, 82
Bateson, A. W., Cytology and Genetics,

lOG
Bather, F. A., Homologies of Anal Plate

in Antedon, 310
Bathynella natans, Morphology of, 196
Batrachian Larvse, Iridocytes in, 367
Baumgartuer, E. A., Development of

Serous Glands of Tongue, 180

Bausch and Lomb, Metallurgical Micro-
scope, 93

Bazin, Method for Discovering Fungi in
the Sputum of Bronchitics, 96

Bdellostnma, Eggs and Embryos of, 291

— (Heptatretus) hexatrema, 291
Beauchamp. P. de, New Pentastomid from

a Fish, 306

Beck's Imperial Microscope, 416

Beetles, Endoskeleton of, 194

Beet-root, Disease of, 85

Bemmelen, J. F. van, Wing-markiugs of
Arctiidae, 302

Bennet, C. W., 86

Berland. James, Alteration of Instinct in
Spider, 57

Berlese, A., New Harveit Mite, 380

Berthelot, A., Bacillus phenologenes re-
garded as Causative Agent of Sclerosis
of Arteries, 227

Bessau, G.. 394

BethyliteUa cyllindrella g. and sp. n., 46

Bhatia, B. L., Protozoa of Lahore, 391

Bijk. P. van der. Notes on Coniotbecium,
81

Birds, Australian, Trematodes of, 199

— Fundus oculi of, 407
Black-rot Fungus on the Apple, 221
Black-wart of Potatoes, 226
Blade-holder for Temperature Control, 395
Blair. K. G., 79

Blastocystis eniercola, Reserve Albu-

menoids of, 63
Blepharospora cambivora, 227
Blood-corpuscle, Red, in Mammals, 182

— Shape of Mammalian Red, 298
Blood-red Seas, 390
Blood-serum, Bile-pigments in, 101
Blood-vessels, Development of, without

Heart, 293

" Blossom-wilt and Canker," Disease of
Apple-trees, 329

Blue-green Algae, Collecting, 215

Bocckella, 381

Bodine, Joseph H., Experiments on Re-
spiration in Larval Dragon-flies, 377

Bombinator, 368

Bombyx mori, 48

Bone Development, Effect of Stress and
Strain in, 179

Bone-marrow, Actions of Micro-organisms
on, 91

— Giant-cells of, 367

— in Plasma Medium, 41

— Transplanted into Spleen, 91
Bonnerot, S., 102

Boodlea i-iamensis, 78

Boquet, A., and L. Negre, Cultivating the

Parasite of Epizootic Lymphangitis,

232
Borgeson, F., Marine Algae of the Danish

West Indies, 78
Boring, Alice M., 293

2 g2

432

INDEX.

Boring, Alice M., Interstitial Cells in
Reproductive Organs of Chickens, ISO

— and Raymond Pearl, Hermaphrodite

Fowls, 292

Bosweil, P. G. H., Britisli Resources of
Sands and Rocks used in Glass Manu-
facture, 281

Botazzi, F., Posterior Salivary Glands of
Cephaloporls, 372

Botellio, C, Method for Double-staining
iSporulating Bacteria, 233

Botrijtis cinerea, 81, 222

Bottomley, Averil Maud, Natal Fungi,
82

Botulism, 393

Boudier, E., New or Rare Fungi, 220

Bouin's Fluid, Modification of, 232

Bourne, Gilbert C, New Sea-anemones
from New Guinea, 387

Bourquin, Helen, Starch-formation in
Zygnema, 74

Boutan, L., Role of Fins in Teleosts with
Swim-bladder, 43

Bower, F. O., Pliylogeny of the Pteroidese,
208

Box salpa, 62

Boyce, J, S., Gymnosporangiuni hlasdale-
anum, 327

Boyden, Edward A., Vestigial Gill-fila-
ments in Sauropsida, 293

Boyelle-Morin Apparatus, Testing Hard-
ness of Metals by, 403 •

Brachionis haheri, 310

— vnlitaris, 310

Braehydesmus, Peculiar Variation in,

305
Britchysuccus jnrenilu sp. u., 308
Branch iobdellids from Michigan Craw-

fislies, 3(i7
Branchiura sowerhi/i, 383
Briggs, E. A., New Australian Hydroids,

387
Bright, Elizabeth M., 307
Brindley, H. H., Notes on Eiirwigs, 378
Briiisopns Aniphiur<( chiajei, 369
• — lyri/era, 369

— sarsii, 369

British Scientific Products Exhibition,

411
Broch, Hjalmar, Australian Alcyonarians,

59

— Coppinia of Grammaria ahietina, 00
Brochet, F-, Circulation of the Blood in

Insects, 1 93

Brolemann, Henry W., Peculiar Variation
in Brachydesmus, 305

Bronchitis, Verminous, 187

Bronze, Annealing of, 103

Brooke, W. J., and F. F. Hunting, Micro-
structure of Commercially Pure Iron,
235

Brooks, C. B., and J. S. Cooley, Apple-rot
Fungi in i elation to Temperature, 222

Brown, James Meikl", On Pyxidicuhi
invisitata,&, Rhizopod new to Britain,
and Hedrioci/stis spinifera. a new
HeliozooL/n'o, 243

Brown, M. M., Embryogeny of Phaseolus
vulgaris, 64

Brown, W., Physiology of Parasitism, 81

Bruner, S. C, 226

Brush, W. D., Characters of Woods of
North American Platanus, 205

Brvophyta of the Vega Expedition, 321

— Welsh, 70
Bryopsis corticulans, 78

— plumosa, 78

Buccinum undatum, Trematode Larva

from, 308
Buffalo-fly, Binomics of, 192

— Milking-yards, Centres of Infection of,

193
Buh'gas, Ramon Sobriuo, Blood-red Seas,

390
Burlingham, Gertrude S., Russula, 328
Burmitemph hallerdlis g. and sp. u., 40
Burnet, E., Bacteria of Dust. 90
Bursaria, Reversibility of Morphogenetic

Processes in, 314
Busycon canalicidatum, 301
Butters, F. Iv., PelJjee in North America,

68
Buxton, P. A., Protocerebrum of Blicro-

pterjx, 190
Byl, P. A. van der, Polyporus lucidus, 88
Bythocrinus, 386

C

Caccabis rufa, 198

Caiazana, 318

Caldwell, J. S., 221

Caiman, W. T., Morphology of Bathynella,

196
Caloptenjx splendens, 372
Calvet, Louis, Atrophy of Right Superior

Vena Cava of Sheep, 43
Calypoijeia flssa, 212
Cambarincola philadelphica, 307

— ritrea, 307

Cameron, A. E., Leaf eating Crane-fly,
376

— and R. C. Treherne, Pear Thrips, 376
('apnodium salidnum, 329
CarabidsB, 194

Carausius morosis. Longevity of Males of,

52
Carborundum, Optical Properties of, 230
Carcliarinus gangeti<us, 384
Carcinus mannas, 380, 381
Caretta carettn, 38
Carl, J., New Spirostreptidffi, 195
Carlgrenia desiderata, g. et sp. n., 3S7

INDEX.

433

Oarponter, C. W., Tuber rots caused by

Fusarium, 84
Carpenter, George H., Collembola of Abor

Expedition, 304

— and F. J. 8. Pollard, Spiracles of

Hypoderma Magj^ot, 303
Carrol], Mitch(>l, Hind-gut and Rectal

Trachese in Dragon fly LarvJE, 377
Carrot, Disease of, 85
Gary's Jlicroscope, 414
Cassiopea, Nerve-conduction in. 201
Cassiopea xamachama, 185
Cat, So-called Tiiymus IV. of, 302
-^ Superfttatiou in, 178
Caterpillars ot Cabbage-white Caterpillars,

302
Cattle-plague, 96

Cats, Inheritance of Coat-colour in, 294
Caullery, M., 58, 300

— and F. Mesnil, Observations on Xeno-

rceloma brumpti, 380

Cedars, Nursery Blight of. 225

Cell-clusters, Aortic, in Vertebrate Em-
bryos, 34

Cell-shape, Constancy of, 316

Cendner, A., 85

Centrums exilicauda, 195

Cepede, C, Method of Staining Tubercle
Bacillus, 233

Ceplialobus dubius Maupas, 383

Ceplialopoiis, Salivary Glands of, 372

Cephaloziella, 211

Cerutomyxa herouardi. Life-history of, 62

Alteration of Sexual Phase of, 02

Cercospora beticola, 226

Infection by, SO

— veticola, 221
Cerebratulus lacteus, 178
ChsBtiliidsB, 382
Chsetoceros criophilus, 214
Chxtoguster bengalensis, 383

— in Sponges, 389
Chsetomorpha antennina, 78
Chameesiphoii incrustans, 324

Chainot. E. M., Chemical Microscopy, 402

Chapman. A. C, Colouring-matter of Red
Torulse, 227

Chapman, W. B., Development of Blood-
vessels without Heart, 293

Characese, Nuclear Division in, 75

Charpy, G.. and S. Bonuerot, Hetero-
geneity of Steels, 102

Charronia, 300

Chari/bdeu rastoiiii, 200, 388

— Reactions of, 388
Chaudhuria, Caudal Fin of, 368
Chermes, Biology of, 378

— Cycle of Generations in, 378
Cheyletus burmtticus sp. n., 45
Chick J^mbryo, Heart-muscle of, 366
Chicken, Corpus luteum in Ovary of, 293

— Interstitial Cells in Reproductive

Organs of, 180

Chicks, Eflfects of Pituitary Body and

Corpus-Luteum on, 181
Chien, S. S., Spirogyra, 74
Chilton, Charles, Australian Isopods,
.381

— Crustaceans from Interior of Australia,

381

— Fossil Species of Phreatoicus, 38 1

— New Zealand Sandhoppers, 58
Chirodiscoides caviie, 57
Chlorogonium elongatum. Nuclear Division

in, 324
ChoanepJiora cururbitarum, 225
Chondriome, Nature and Significance of

the, 316
Chondiioines, Nature and Function of,

201
Chondrodactis coccinea sp. n., 387
Chopard, E., Ab.ioiiiinal Extremity in

Orthoptera. 52
Choristella, 190
Chroraatojiliores, Black, 367
Chromodoris zebra, 188
Chrysarachnion insidians g. ct sp. n., 322
Chrysemys, 38
Chrysocrinus hydra g. et sp. n., 322

— rorax g. et sp. n., 322
Chrysoiiionad, Plasmodial, Rhizopodial

Nets as Capturing-anparatus in a, 322
Chrysomonads, Rhizopodial, 322
ChrysopetalidsB, 383
Chytridium alarium, 77
Cicindela lepida, 376.
Cicindelidse, 194
Citellus frankiini, 1 80

— tridecemlineatus, 180
Citrus Canker, 222

Fungus Isolated from, 222

— " Spot " Disease caused by BariUns

citromaculans, 227
Cladorchis, Structure and Diivelopment of,

309
Cladosporium, 329
Clark, Austin H., Unslalked Crinoids of

Siboga Expediion, 386
Clark, E. R.,aua E. Ii. Clark, Phagocytosis

in Tadpole's Tail, 368
Clark, Eliot R., Growth of Blood-vessels

in Frog Larvae, 294
Clark, Miss, Marine Algae, 77
Clark, N. J., Microscope Illumination. 228
Claviceps Paspnli, Life-history and Poison-
ing Properties of, 217
Cleave, H. J. van, Acanthocephala of

North American Birds, 308
Cleland, J. Barton, 82
Clematis, Stem-rot and Leaf-spot Disease

of. 86
Clepsidrina orata, 378
Clibboru, Lieut.-Col., Exhibit of Tank, 418
Clovers, Stem-disease in, 86
Clupea ilisha, 187
Cobb, N. A., Filter-bed Nematodes, 307

434

INDEX.

Cochlodinium, 323

Cockayne, E. A., Scales of Leaden Males

of Agriades ihetis. 191
Cockerell, T. D. A., Auditory Ossicles of

Aplodontia, 42

— Arthropods iu Burmese Amber, 45, 46
Cockroacli, Digestion in, 304

Cole, L. J., and L. J. Bachhuber, Lead-
poisoning of Germ-cells, 360
Coleoptera, Maritime, 303
Collembola of Abor Expedition, 304
Colletotrichum Brassicas, 225

— Eigginscanum sp. n., 225

Colley, R. H., Cronartium ribicola, 219
Collinge, Walter E., New Isopod from
British Guiana, 381

— Oral Appendages of Isopoda, 381
Collins, F. S., and A. B. Hervey, Algae of

Bermuda, 76

Comastrocrinus, 386

Comalricha dictyospora (Gel.), 393

— • elegans, 3! (3

Comatulids, New, 386

Comparison Screen for Brass, 234

Compsometra, DSO

Comstock, G. F., Method for Distinguish-
ing Sulphides from Oxides in Steel,
103

Conchopthirus curies Englemann, 390

— elongatus.sp. n., 390

— lamelUdens sp. n., 390

Congdon, E. D., Heart-muscle of Embryo

Chick, 366
(Jonidial Development, 221
Coniothecium, 81

— chomatosporum, 81
Coniothi/rium tirolense, 81

Conkliii, E. G., Centrifuged Eggs of

Crepidula, 188
Conrady, Prof. A. E., Theory of Dark

Ground Illumination, 237
Conulus, Buccal Armature of, 59
Gonus arteriosus. Disappearance of, in

Teleosts, 370
Cooke, C. J. Bowen, Testing Hardness of

Metals by the Boyelle-Morin Appa-
ratus, 403
Coons, G. H., Factors involved in the

Growth of Pycnidia, SO
Coons, G. W., 219
Copeland, Manton, Smell and Taste in

Marine Snails, 301
Copepod, New Parasitic. 306
Copepods, Fresh-water, 416
Coppinia of Grammaria abietina, 60
Coral Kcef, West Indies, Sub-faunas in,

200
Coralliniese, 78
Corals, Astrseid. Reactions of, 388

— Ectodermic Cilia of, 200
Nematocysts of, 200

— Food of, 200

— Living, 200

Corals, Mesenteric Filaments of, 200

— Mucus Secretion of, 200

— Tentacular Action of, 200
Gordulogaster annulatus, 372
Coregonus alius, 366

Corner, George W., Maturation of Ovum

in Swine, 178
Corpus luteum, 35
Corpuscles, Red Blood, Development of.

361
Corticolous ramalinas, Attachment Organs

of, 88
Corymorpha, Activities of, 311
Cotton, A. D., Apple Canker due to

Nectria ditissima, 226

— and others. Description and Treat-

ment of Plant Diseases, 329
Cotton Leaf-spot due to an Alternaria, 226
Cottus huhalis. Anomalous Pelvic Fins in,

299
Council, Election of. 111
Counting Chamber, New, 233
Cow, Superfetation iu, 364
Crab, Sand, Reactions of, 380
Crabs, Siboga, 382

Crab's Claw, Sensory Structures of, 380
Cranberry, " End-rot " Disease of, 226
Crane-fly, Leaf-eating, 376
Orepidostomum, g. n., 385
Crepidula, Centrifuged Eggs of, 188
Cretaceous Flora of Russian Sakhalin, 392
Crinoids, Unstalked, of Siboga Expedition,

386
Crocodilians, Fatty Tissue of, 183
Cromwell, R. O., 88

Cronartium ribicola, Teleutospores of. De-
veloping in Ribes, 219
Cropper, J. W., New Counting Chamber.

233
Crozier, Blanche B., Buds of Donatia, 201
Crozier, W. J., Crustaceans from Interior
of Australia, 381

— Immunity Coloration in Nudibranchs,

188

— Multiplication by Fission in Holo-

thurians, 59

— Photic Sensibility of Balanoglossids,

301
Cryphaliies rugosissimus g. et sp. n., 46
Cryptobrauchus, Germinal Vesicle in, 359
Cri/ptoniyces Pteridis, Development of, 326
Cryptorcliism, 364
Gubaris cJaytonensis sp. n. 381
Cuff. John, 412
Culex pipiens, 49
Cullen, Anna M., Rectal Tracheation of

Dragon-fly Larva, 376
Culpeper and Scarlet, 412
Culpeper's Compound Microscope, 412
Culpepper, 0. W., and others. Black-rot

Fungus on the Apple, 221
Cultures, Behaviour of Explanated Striped

Muscle in, 40

INDEX.

435

Currie, J. N., 218

Curtis, G. M., Seminiferous Tubules of

Mammals, 360
Cushman, J., The Foraminifera of the

Atlantic Ocean. Part 1. Astroihizidae,

405
Outhbert's Reflecting Microscope, 413
Cutler, D. Ward, Rings in Scales of Plaice

and Flounders, 300
— and R. Williamson, Rapid Difleren-

tiation of Amoebae Cysts, 96
Cycas RumpJiii, Effect of Foreign Pollin-
ation on, 317
Cylindrocladiuin scoparium, 85
Cylindrotoma splendens Doane, 376
Cymbactis gosgei sp. n., 387
Cynocephalus porrarius, 199
Cyphoderopsis kempi g. et sp. n., 304
Gypridina hilgendorfi, Maxillary Gland

of, 198
Gyrnea seuratii, 198
Cytliaria, 82
Gytospora leucostoma, 87

D

Dsedalea, 328

Dancharoff, Vera, Differentiation of Cells
in the Developing Organism, 39

— Development of Red Blood Corpuscles.

361

— Grafts of Spleen on Allantois, 364
Dauesea, 66

Dangeard, P. A., Nature and Function of

Chondriomes, 204
Dark Ground Illumination, Theory of, 2;-l7
Davidson, P., 103
Davie, E. C, Comparative List of Fern

Pinna-traces, with some Notes on the

Leaf-trace in tlie Ferns, 318
Dearnoss, John, New Fungi, 82
Decametra, 386
Decaphellia g. n., 387
Deciduous Trees, Changes by Pressure in

Wood of, 64
Deliorne, Yvonne, Skeleton of Stromato-

poroids, 60
Delphy, Jean, Anomalous Pelvic Fins in

G<jttus buhalis, 299
Dematium, 329
Democrinus, 386
Demodex erinacei, 57

— ntuscardini, 57 ■

Dendy, Arthur, Chessman Spicule of
» Latrunculia, 60

Dennstsedtia, 209
Derbidse, Philippine, 51
Dermacentor renudus, 379
Dermestes larvalis sp. n., 45
Desmid Flora of Dartmoor, 215

Deto marina, 381

Detwiler, S. R., Development of Shoulder-
girdle and Fore-limb in Ambhjgtoma
punctatum, 295

Dewey, Kaethe W., Lining of Perivascular
Spaces, 366

Dexia rusticu, 372

Diatoms, Changing, of Devil's Lake. North
Dakota, 215

— Colour Effects exhibited by, 332

— from Hanover and the Harz, 215

— Marine, from the Coasts of Iceland, 324

— Polarization of, 332
Dihothriocephalus parvus Stephens, 198
Dichotomosiphon tuberosus, Life-habits of,

74
Dictyoxiphium, 208
Dicyemids, Life-history of, 309
Didelphys aurita, 359

— marsupiales, 178

— virginiana, 178

Didynium nasidum, Conjugation and En-

cystation in, 62
Diels, L., Ecology of Asplenium Seelosi,^

211
Diemydylus nridescens, Regeneration after

Exarticulation in, 295
Dientamoeba fragilis g. et pp. n., 313
Dietrich's Co-ordination Mechanism'

Theory, 42
Difflugia, 37
Diffraction Gratings, Dividing Engine for

Ruling, 229
Dinamceba, Dinoflagella-like Swarmersin.

322

— varians, 322

Dineidus nigrior. Germ-cell Cycle of, 194

Dinophyceae, 322

Diplocarpon Bosm (blackspot), causing

Diseases of Roses, 224
Diplogasler xrivora Cobb, 383
Discomycetes, Remarkable, 220
Diseases, Plant, 84

Dissotrema papillatum g. et sp. n., 385
Distoma lutein sp. n., 308
Distomum liepaticum, 309
Dobell, Clifford, Entamoeba histolytica and

Entamceba rnnnrum, 313

— New Geuu.-i of Heliozoa, 201

— and Margaret W. Jepps, Races of

Entamoeba histolytica, 313
Doriostaurus maroccanug, 380
Dog, Post-cestrous Changes in, 36

— Spermatogenesis of, 360

— Structure of Retractor Penis-muscle of.

183
Dogfish, Development of Head-segments

of, 291
— ■ Embryo, Earliest Movements of, 291

— Hermaphrodite, 181

Doidge, Ethel, Bacillus citromaculans, 227

— South African Perisporiales, 326
DoUond, 412

436

INDEX.

Donaldson, Henry N., Mycelin and Ad-
vancing A/?;e, ] 8.")
Donatia, Buds )f, 201
Donatio is, Lad/ Flower. ]\licrosoope, 244

— Dr. Urban "Pritchard, Diatom Slides,

410

— Mr. J. Rheinberg, Photographic Scales

and Micrometer Rulings, 410
Doratogonus, 195
DoreTidorf, Botulism, 393
Dotilla clepsydra sp. n., 19G
Douglas Fir', Needle-blight of, 225
Douiii, Ch. et R., lieboulia Baddi, 319
Douin, R., Water-conduction in Marchan-

tiacere, 71
Dragon-flies, 55

— Copulatory Apparatus of. 56

— Development of Wings, 55

— Facets in the (.Compound Eye of. .")5

— Larval, Respiration in, 377

— Metamorphosis of, 56

— Mushroom Bodies of Brain of, 55

— Pronynipli of, 56

— Tracliasl Gills in Larvaj of, 5G

— Vision of, 55

— Zygopterid, Claudal Gills of Larvsfc of,

304
Dragon-fly, Larva. Trachea) in, 377

Rectal Tracheae of, 377

Tracheation of, 376

Drosoi^hila. 37, 194

— ampelophia Leow., 375

— Bristle Inheritance in, 53

— huschii, 192

— Inheritance of I^xtra liristles in, 375

— melanogaster Merg., 375

— Reactions of, to Light and Gravity, 303

— Temperature and (.'rossing-over in, ^03
DryopteridesB — a New Tribe of Polypo-

diacese, 67
Duboscq. O., 63
Duesberg, G., Chondrisomes in Testis-

cells of Fundulus, 294
Duncan, Martin, Photomicrographs of

Bacteria, 105
Duplicities, Morphogenesis of, 291
Dustin, A. P., Epithelial Reversions in

Human Thymus, 41
Dysentery on the Somme, 92
Dytiscus, 194

— marginaJis, 193

E

Earland, A., and E. J. Sheppard, Report

of Slides Cabinet Committee, 420
Earwigs, 378

EchiiKicardium rordatum, 369
— Amphiura Jili/ormis, 369
Echinococcus, 187

Echinoderma, Phagocytosis of, 200
Echinoderms, Ceplialodiscus-like Ancestor

of. ;!S6
Echiuoids, Larval, Experiments with, 386
Echinnracliithis parma, 179
Echinostoma ilocanum in Patients of

Manila Hospital, 199
Ecklonia, Iodine in, 325
Edgerton, C. W., Tomato-wilt, due to a

Eusarium, 224
Edison, H. A., New Phycomycete, 79

— Damping-off of Seedlings of Sugar-

beet, 86

— Pliuma Betse, 87
Edwards, J. Graham, 313
Eels, Young, Staining, 99

Eggleston, H. R., Photomicrographs in

Colour, 229
Eofg-rafts of Culex pipiens, 49
Eggs, Eflect of Vital Stains on, 178
Elders. C. Intestinal Flora of Sprue. 91
Eldridge. A. A., 231
Klectriibisium acutum g. et sp. n., 46
JClectriifaeiius graciUpes g. et sp. n., 46
Ellis. Davis, Phycomycetous Fungi from

English Coal Measures, 392
Ellis, Max M., Bninchiobdellids from

Michigan Crawfishes, 307
Ellis. O. W., Comparison Screen for Brass,

234
Elmore. C. J., Charging Diatoms of

Devil's Lake, North Dakota, 215
Embryo (Amphibian) Removal of Prone-

phorus of, 181

— Germ-cells in, 39

— Haemopoiesis in Mongoose, 31
l^mbryos, Vertebrate, 34
Enallagma, 377
Endocladia. 77

Endomixis, Rhythms in, 202

— Influence of Environment on, 202
Endophyllum Spores, 218

— Eii.pluirhix-silraticx, 218
Eiidrosis fenest rella ,315
Enerthenema papiUatum (Perj.), var.

carnea-griseum, var. nov., 393
Entamoeba dysenterise, 202

— histflli/tica. Races of, 313
diameter of, 313

and Eidamosba ranartint, 313

Entumiiphthiira americana, 79

Enzymes. Theory that sex-factors are, 53

J'qjhiidiitid fluHattlis, var. inthu, var. nov.,

389
Epicymatia aphthosse sp. n., 220
Epizootic Lymphangitis, Cultivating the

I'arasite'ot, 232
Equisetum dehile, (j6
Erdmann, Rhoda, Chicken Bone-marrow

in Plasma Medium, 41
Ericaceae, Endotrophic Mycorhiza of, 88
Eriksson, J., Development of Phyto-

phthora, 325

INDEX.

43^

Erythrocytes, Degeneration of, 41

Erytliropoiesis, 361

EstherUi pachardi. H81

Etching with Chromic Acid and Hydro-

s:en Peroxide, 234
Eto, R, 325

Etroplus in<ictilatu><, 3(!5
KuvManis dilifata, 310
Eudemis nasvana, 191
Eugleva riridis, Nuclear Division in, 323
Euryzonus g. n., 379
Euterj^ina ucutifrons, 370
Euthemido compressa Goes, 382
Eutrombidium, 380
Evans, Alexander W., New Lejeunea from

the West Indies, 320
Evans, A. W., North American Hepaticse,

212
Evolution of British Microscope, 411
J^xhihit at King's College, 411
Ijxogone hebes, 30(3
Expeditions, Swedish, to Australia, 59

Farquliarson, C. O., 83

Farwell, O. A., American Fern Notes, 68

— Notes on Hippoclisete, 68
Fauohere, Silkworms in Madagascar, 47
Faul wetter, R. C., Cotton Leaf-spot due to

an Alternaria, 226
Fauna of Coastal Waters. 369
Faust, E. C, Resin Secretion in Bal-

samorrhiza, 206

— Mussel-mite, 379

— American Stephanophialinae, 385
Favia. 388

Fay, Henry, Microscopic Examination of

Steel, 236
Fermentation Organisms. Treservation of,

100
Fern Pinna- traces, 318

— Prothallia, 68

Ferns, American, 68 '

— Australian, 67 i

— of Formosa, 69

— Study of Some New Cases of Apogamy

in, 318
Fever. Relapsing, 390

— Spotted, of the Rocky Mountains, 380
Feytaud, J., Parthenogenesis in Otlo-

rhyncun sulcatiiii. 48
Fig-trees, Disease of, in North Carolina,

caused by Macrophoma Fici, 224
FiJaria inimitis, 384 j

— locustx, 378 j
Filicales, Evolution of Branching in, 209
Filix, Generic Sense of, 68
Fimbriaria, 212
Financial Statement, 242

Fish-freezing, 368

Fisher, Homer G., Structure of Retractor

Penis-nniscle of Dog, 183
Fishes, Cartilaginous, Optic Nerves of, 41

— Fresh -water, of Madras, 364

— Post-larval, Food of, 370
Fitzpatrick, H. M., Sexuality in Rliizimt

undulata, 326
Flahellkola neapoHtana , 300
Flahelligera (Siphonostoma) diplochnitos,

306
Flagellate, Development of the, 322, 323

— Descent of Rliizopods from, 323

— Fusion-plasmodia in, 323
Flagellate, Diatom-eating, New, 390
Florideae, Alternation of Generation in. 75
Flotowianus, 212

Flower. Lady, Donation, 244

Food Production OtSce, Smuts of Cereals,

327
Foraminifera of the Atlantic Ocean. Part I.

AstrorhizidaB, 405
Foraminiferal and Nullipore Structures in

some Tertiary Limestones from New

Guinea, 315
Forrepia fragilis, 61
Forjicula auricidaria, 378

— tomis, 378

Formol-violet, Staining Spirilla with, 403

Formosa, Ferns of, 69

Foster, A. C, 221

Foucher, G., Longevity of Males of
Carausiux morosis, 52

Fouchet, A., Detection of Bile-pigments in
Blood-serum, 101

Fowls. Age and Fertility in. 363

Fowl (Domestic), Sex-ratio in, 182, 363

Fowls, Effect on Progeny of, after Treat-
ment with Alcohol, 37

— Hermajihrodite, 292

— Influence of Age on Reproductivity of,

863

— Melanin in Feather-germs of, 187
Fragoso, G-., Uredinese, 327

Fragoso, R. G., New or Rare Fungi. 329
Franca, Carlos, Classification of HaDmo-

sporidea, 203
Free-Martin, 37

French, J. W., Balsam Problem, 230
Frog Larvae, Growth of Blood-vessels in.

294
Frogs, Artificially Activated Eggs of,

290
Fromme. F. D., and H. E. Thomas, Xylaria

Root-rot of Apple-trees, 225
Frye, T. C, Rhacomitrium iu North

America, 320
Fucus, 77
Fujii, Hajime, 383
Fumago vagaw^, 329
Fundulus, Chondriosomes in Testis-cells

of, 294

— heterocUtus, 292

438

INDEX.

Fungi, Forest, Altitudinal Range of, £22

— from Southern China, 220

— Growth of, in Concentrated Solutions,

222

— Honey-dew, 328

— Irish, 83

— Method for Discovering iu Sputum of

Bronchitics, 96

— Natal, 82

— New, 82

— — or Rare, 220, 329

— Nigerian, 83

— Parasitic, Immunity from, 84

— Phycomycetous, from English Coal

Measures, 392

— Relation to Host, 221

— Schweinitz, Collection of, 82j

— Tuber-rot, 218

— Ugandi, 83

— Variations of, due to Environment, 81

— Wood-rotting, Cultures of, 328
Fungicides, Use of Various, 224
Fungus Fairy Rings, 220

— Pathogenic, 84
Fusarium, 224

— in Potato Tubers, 218

— oxysporum, 218

— radicicola, 218, 222

— tricholhecioides, 224

— Tuber-rots Caused by, 84
Fusicoccum putre/aciens sp. n., 226

G

Gadidae, Optic Nerves of, 41

Galls, History of the, 223

Gammarus c/jerrewa;?, Eye-pigment iu, 195.

Ganglia, Rule of, in Immobilization, 373

Garbowski, L., Sderospora macrospora on

Corn, 226
Gardiner, J. Stanley, and G. H. F.

Nuttall, Fish-freezing, 368
Gastropods, Locomotion of, 301
Gatenby, J. Bronte', Cytoplasmic Bodies

in Germ-cells of Lepidoptera, 47

Inclusions of Germ-cells, 98

in Germ-cells of Snail, 18!)

Gautier, CI., Observations on Caterpillars

of Cabbage-white Caterpillars, 302
Gecarcinidae, 382
Georgevitch, F., Life-cycle of Myxidium

gadi, 63
Georgevitch, Jivoin, Life-history of Cera-

tomijaia heronnrdl, 62

— Leptotheca and Glugea, 63
Germ-cells, Cytoplasmic Inclusions of, 98

— Lead-poisoning of, 360

Gessard, C., Variety of Bacilus pyocyaneus,

Ghose, S. L., Cone of Selaginella pallidii-

sima, 210
Giant-cells, Hemogenic, 367

— Osteolytic, 367

Gibbons, William S., Death of, 176

Gibson, R. B., 298

Gilbert, A. H., and C. W. Bennet, Sclero-

tinia Trifoliorum, 86
Gilchrist, J. D. F., Eggs and Embryos of

Bdellostoma, 291

— Life-history of Distoma lutein sp. n., 308
Ginseng, Root-rot of, 87

Glass Manufacture, British Resources of

Sands and Rocks used in, 231
Glover, W. O., Disease of Clematis, 86
Glugea marionis, 63
Gnat, Fertilization in, 49
Gobius (^Glossogohius) giuris, 365

— (Oxyurichthys) striatus, 365
Godfrey. G. H., Sderotium Rolfsli, a

Disease of Wheat, 226
Godspeed, T. H., Modified Safety-razor

Blade-holder for Temperature Control,

395
Goldfish, Telescope-eye of, 368
Goldschmidt, Richard, Intersexual Forms

of Gypsy-Moth, 52
Gonads, Internal Secretion of, 32
Gongrosira Scourfieldii, 30
Goniolithon Martellii, 216
Gonococcal Infections, Diagnosis of, 418
Gjnyaulax polyedra, 390
Goodrich, Edwin S., " Proboscis Pores " in

Cranate Vertebrates, 186

— Development of Head-segments of

Dogfish, 291
Gosh, Ekendranath, Studies on Infusoria,

390
Goto, S., and Y. Matsudaira, New Amphi-

stomid Trematode from a Fish, 385
Gracilaria, corticata, 78

— lingua, 78
Graft-hybrids, 318
Grallomyces, 326

Grammaria abietina, Coppinia of, 60
Grantia compressa, Larvas of, 388
Grapsidae, 382
Gravatt, G. Filippo, and others, Uredineae,

327
Gravier, Ch. J., New Parasitic C'opepod,

306
Grayson, J. H., Dividing Engine for

Ruling Diffractive Gratings, 229
Gregarine, New Cephaline, 315
Gregory and Wright, 413
Griton, 300

Grouiospira Rzchak, 406
Grove, W. B., Fleodorina illinoiensis, 73

— BUizophidium acuforme, 79

— Septoria Chenopodii, 80
Growth-period and Duration of I^ife,

194
Gruhea limbata, 306

INDEX.

439

Guerin, P., Development of Pullen in
Salvia, 206

Guignani, L., Ovule in Apocynaceae and
Asclepindaceae, 65

Guild, J., Spherometer of Precision, 95

Guilliermond, A., Mitochondrias of Plant-
cells, 204

— Nature and Significance of the Chond-
riome, 316

Guinea-pig, Spermatogenesis of. 361

Gymnoconia interstitialis, 219

Gymnodinium, 323

Gymnosporangium blasdaleanum, 327

Gyroceras, 329

Gypsy-Moth, Intersexual Forms of, 52

H

Hsemosporidia, Classification of, 203

" Hajmothalassia," 390

Hagedoorn, A. G., and A. L., Rats and

Evolution, 185
Haguenau, J., 92
Hahn, G. G., and others, Nursery P>light

of Cedars, 225
Halacaridae, Swiss, 195
Hall, Kate Marion, Death of, 244, 358
Hallimond, A. F., Telescopic Focussing

Apparatus for Photomicrography.

400
Hallmann, E. F., Desniacidonid Sponges,

201
Hainan, E. T., 36
Halstead, 87
Hammond, J., Mammary Glands of Eabbit,

35
Haploehilus melaiiostigma, 365
Haploops, 369
Harman, Mary T., Superfelation in Cow,

364
Harpanthus, 212
Harper, E. T., and others, Hymenomv-

cetes, 328

— Remarkable Discomycetes, 220
Harris, G. T., Desmid Flora of Dartmoor,

215

— Schistostega osmundacea, 322
■ Mohr, 321

Harrison, Colonel, m.d., Spirocliastes, 239

Harrison, Ross G., Development of Fore-
limb of Amblystoma punctatum, 295

Harrison, W., Investigations on Textile
Fibres, 404

Harshberger, John W., A Text-book of
Mycology and Plant Pathology, 330

Harter, L. L.', 88

Hartley, C, 226

Hartmau. C. G., Superfetatiou in Cat, 178

Hartmann, M., Nuclear Division in Chloro-
gonium elongatum, 324

Hartridge, H., An Improved Method of

Apertometry. 337
Harwood, H. F., 281
Hatai, Shinkishi, Growth of Parts of Rats

and of the Whole, 366
Hawkes, Onera A. Merritt, Inheritance in

Silkworms, 191
Hawkins, Herbert L., Buccal Armature of

Conulus, 59
Hawkins, L. A.,Fusarium in Potato-tubers.

218

— Growth of Fungi in Concentrated

Solutions, 222
Hayata, B., Ferns of Formosa, 69
Hays, Frank A., Sexual Activity of Male

Rabbit in Relation to Progeny, 297
Heape, 36

Heat-treatment of Grey Cast Iron, 235
Hebb, Dr. R. G., Death of, 173, 244

— Mrs., Donation of Microscope, 333
Hecht, Selig, Sensory Reactions of Aseidia

atra, 301

— Vascular System of Ascidian, 371
Hegner, R. W., and C. P. Russell, Germ-
cell Cycle of Dineutes nigrior, 194

Heitz-Boyer, and Scheikevitsch, Osseous
Regeneration in the Adult, 41

Heliozoa, New Genus of, 201

Helminthological Notes from Switzerland,
199

Hemiphlebia mirabilis, 55

Hemiporcellio drzelecM sp. n., 381

Hemogenic Giant-cells. 367

Hepaticse. European, 211

— • North American, 212

— South African, 212

Hereditary Characters and Evolution, 37
Herlant, Maurice, Cyclic Variations in

Permeability of the Activated Ovum,

293
Hermaphroditism, False, 364
Heron-Allen, E., The Royal Microscopical

Society during the Great War — and

After : Presidential Address, 1917-18,

153

— and A. Earlanil, Diatom Ooze from

Deep Antarctic Waters, 335
Herpotridiia nigra, 86

— qidnqueseptata sp. n., 86

Herre, A. C, Lichens of Whatcom County,

Washington, 89
Herriolt, E. M., Habits of Lepidurus

viridus, 58
Hervey, A. B., 76
Herzog, T., Multicellular Spores in Mosses,

71
Hess, Walter N., Seasonal Changes in

Kidney of Stickleback, 299
Heterodiuium in the Adriatic, 214
Higgius, B. B., Leaf-spot on Turnip,

225
Hilario, J. S., and L. D. Wharton, Echino-

stoma ilocanum (Garrison), 199

440

INDEX.

Hill, G. F., Binomics of the Buffalo-fly
{Lypevosia exigiia de Meijere), 192

H,ll, J. Ben, Staining of Minute Algae.
73

Hill, J. P., Early Development of Opos-
sum, 359

Hill, Sir Julin, 68

Hilsa, 187

— Cestodes of, ::S84

— ii/sha, 187, 38i
Hippoehsete, Notes on, GS
Hippospongia equina, 201

Hirst, Stanley, New Parasitic Acari, 57
Hirudiuea, Hermaphroditism in, 44
Histological Material, Short Method of •

Preparing, 232
Hoag, L. A., Rlinute Structure of Sensory

Root of Trigeminal Nerve, 299
Hodgetts, W. J., Discharge of Spores of

Leptosph^ria acute, 79
Hollande, A. C, Modification of Bouiu's

Fluid, 232
Holognathidse, 382
Holophrya indica sp. n., 391
Holothuria surinamensix, 59
Holothuriaus, Multiplication by Fission

in, 59
Hormosoma g. ii., 312
Hormidium flaccidum, Structure and

Mode of Life of. 72
Hornyold, A. Gandolfi, Staining Yoiing

Eels, 99
Horse-sponge, Larva of, 201
Horst, R., Monograpli on Polychsets, 383
Howe, Marshall A., Marine Alga? of

Cuba, 325
Howell, J. A., Effect of Stress and Strain

on Bone Development, 179
Howland, Iluth B., Removal of Prone-
phros of Amphibian Embryo, 181
Howlett, F. M., Notes oa Lice," 51
Huber, G. Carl, Development of Mamma-
lian Notochord, 292
Hubert, E. E., 219
Hubert, H., Stereoscope for Examining

Superposed Projections. 94
Huie, L. H., Study of Holly Tcrtrix Moth,

191
Hunting, F. F., 235
Hurd, Miss, Nereocystis. 77
Hurst, C. P., Wiltshire Mosses. 70
Hurst, J. E., Heat-treatment of Grey

Cast Iron, 235
Hyah'spora aspidotiis. Inoculation of, on

Phegopteris, 219

— Polypodii, Inoculation Experiment

with Spores of, 219
Hydracarid, Rare, 57
Hydracarina of Epping Forest. 306
Hydroids, Australian, New, 387
Hyetodesia erratica, 79
Hygromia, 188
Byla pickeringii, 368

Hylaster ater, 194

— funicuJdvius, 194

— palliatus, 194

Hylastes, Structure and Ijife-history of,

194
Hyman, Libbie H., Metabulic Gradients

in Amceba and their Relation to

Amreboid Movement, 312
Hymenolepis nana Siebold and H. murina

Dujardin, 384
Hymenomycetes, 328
Hymenoptera, Paralyzing Habits of, 46
Hymenosomidse, 382
Hyperammina vaijnns Brady, 406
Hypoderma boois, 303

— defurmans, a New Fungus causing

Disease of Needles of Western Yellow
Pine, 223

— lineatum, 303

— Maggot, Spiracles of, 303
Hypolepis, 209

Idioectosome, 361
Idioendosome, 361

Idiosome in Spermatogenesis of Guinea-
pig, 361
Idoteidfe, 382
Idoteina, 382

Ilulia parthendgeneiiea, 384
Illumination, Dark-ground, 418

— Principles of, 397
Infusoria. Studies on, 390

Ingham, W.. Moss Exchange Club, 320
Insects and Disease, 302

— Circulation of Blood in, 193

— Ectoparasitic, 52

— Nuclear Division in the Adipose Cells

of. 189

— Recognition among, 46
Iridocytes, 367
lron,Microstructure of Commercially Pure,

235
Ischnura, 377
Isophpyllia, 388

Isopod, New, from British Guiana, 281
Isopoda, Oral Appendages of, 381
Isopods, Australian, 381

— from British Guiana, 58

— Terrestial, Dipterous Parasite in, 192
Isthmospora, 326

Jaccard, P., Wood of Deciduous Trees, 64

Jackson, H. S., Roestelia, 81

INDEX.

441

Jackson's Microscope, 415

Jagger. C, and V. B. !<tewart, Voiti-

cillium. 224:
Jamiesoii, Janet P., Rectal Tracliese of

Dra?on-fly Larva, 377
Jeffries, Z., Tungsten-Molybdeuuin Alloys,

102

— Effect of Great Hyilrostalic Pressure

on Metals, 234
Jennings, H. S., Hereditary Cliaracters

and Evolution, 37
Jenningsia diatiimo[iliiiga, g. et sp. u., 3'.t0
Jepps, Margaret W., and Cliliord Dobell,

New Amoeba from ^lan, 313
Johnson, C. E., Development of IJver in

Ground Squirrel. 180
Johnson, Franklin P.. Lobules of Pig's

Liver, 298
Johnston, S. J., Trematodes of Australian

Birds,' 199
Joicey, J. J., and G. Talbot, Gynanilro-

uiorph of Papilio hjeojihron, 191
Jolewalaie, J. R.. Phylladiora Boystoiiex —

a Disease of Royal Palm, 22(j
Jones, 1798, 413

.Tones, D. A., Welsh Bryophyta, 70
Jordan, H. E., Aortic Cell-dusters in

Vertebrate Embryos, 34

— Cardiac and Skeletal Muscle of Scorpion,

.57

— Case of False Hermaphroditism, 364

— Germ-cells of Loggerhead Turtle, 38

— Giant-cells of Yolk-sac and Bone-

marrow, 367

— Haemopoiesis in Mongoose Embryo,

— Histology of Lymph, 3G7

— Intercalated Discs in Heart-muscle of

Ox, 41

— Leg-muscle of Sea-Spider, 57
.Jorgensen, O. M., Britiph Occurrence of

Nematn$celis megalops, 382

— Development of Shore-crab, 382

— Larvae of Grantia compress^, 388

K

Kaburaki, Tokio, Triclads from Tnle Ltike,

386
Karrer, Miss, Nereocystis, 77
Karsten, 82
Kashyap, S. R., Equisetum debile, GG

— Targionia hypophylla, 69

— Indian Liverworts, 212

— Kawamuria japonica, 383

Keeley, F. J., Polarization and Colour

Effects exliibited by certain Diatoms,

332

Keilin, D., New Cephaline Gregariue, 315

Kemkel, L. 0., Spongospora subterranea,dO

Kepner, W. A., and J. Graham Edwards,
Reactions of Pelomjxa to Food, 313

Kerrla japonica, Leat'-disease of, 85

Keys, .James H., ^Earitime Coleoptera, 303

Kibbe, ^liss, Chytridium alarium, 77

Killian, Karl, Development of Cryptomyces
Pteridis, 326

King's College Bacteriological Labora-
tories, 419

Kinship, Degrees of, 44

Kittelson, .John A., Growth of Kidney of
Albino Rat, 18G

Klebs, G., Fern Prothallia, 6S

Klocker, A., Preservation of Fermentation
Organisms in Nutrient Media, 100

Kodak, JJmited, Wratten " AV " Filters,
398

Koenike, 379

Kollicker, Osteoclasts of, 367

Kopaczewski, W., Poison of Mursena, 43

— Serum of Mursena, 43

— Toxicity of Serum of Muraena, 43
Kryshtofqvicli, A., Cretaceous Flora of

Russian Sakhalin, 392
Kupffer, Cells of the Liver, 366

Lahrax lupus. Optic Nerves of, 41
Lacazina irichmanni Schlumberger, 315
Ladd's Microscope, 415
T^a Marca, F., Graft-hybrids, 318

; Lameere, Aug., Life-history of Dicyemids,
309

[ Laminaria, 77

I Lamp, Low-voltage Electric, 228

! Lamprey, Thymus-like Structures in
Larval, 40

I — Lymphocyte Accumulations of, 40

— Placodes of, 40

; Laruproderma crucheti sp. n., 393
i — violaceum, 393

— santeri (Rost), 393
Lasiocampa queicus, 375

I Latrunculia, Chessman Spicule of, 60

— hocagei, 60

— apicalis, 60

Lead Acetate, Ingestion of, 360
Lehertia sefvid Walter, 336
Lebour, Marie V., Trematode Larva from
Buecinum undatum, 308

— Microplaukton of Plymoutii Sound, 323

— Peridiniales of Plymouth Sound, 323

— Food of Post-larval Fishes, 370
Le'caillon, A., Variations in Silkworms,

48

— Parthenogenesis in Silk- moths, 48
Lecithochirium dillanei sp. n., 308
Legendre, J., Study of Malagasy Perch,

i 299

442

INDEX.

Leger, L., and O. Duboscq, New Species
of Pseudoklossia, 63

Leger, M., and E. Parry, Trypanosomes
in Monkeys, HH

Le Goc, M. J., Effect of Foreign Pollina-
tion on Cycas Rumphii, 317

Lehman. S. G., Sphxronema fimbriaium,
327

Leidyana tinei sp. n., 315

Lejeiinea, New, from Bermuda and the
West Indies, 320

Lek, Van der, lUiizodonia violacem, 85

Lenus Loxodes, 202

Lei)idoptera, Cytoplasmic Bodies in Germ-
cells of, 47

— Dimorphic Colouring in, 074

— Protective Coloration in, 191

— Wing-venation of, 302
Lepidodendron aculeaturn, 392

— fuliginosus, 392
Lepidtirus riridis. Habits of, 58
Leptoiulus belgicus, 373
Leptosphxria acuta, Discharge of Spores

of, 79
Leptospira of Noguchi, the Newly-created

Genus, 228
Leptoteiclius g. n., 312
Leptotheca and Glugea, 63

— elongata, 63
Leptus ahamusM, 379
Leptyphontes nebulosus Sund, 195
Lestes viridis, 372

Leucocytes, Large Mononuclear, of the
Peripheral Blood and the Macro-
phages at the Site of Injury amongst
the Wounded, 370

Levinseniella howensis sp. n., 199

Lewis, Margaret L., 183

Lewis, Margaret K., 40

— Eflect of Vital Stains on Eggs, 178
Lewis, Warren H., and Margaret E. Lewis,

Behaviour of Explaiited Striped

Muscle in Cultures, 40

Time occupied in Mitosis, 183

Leygue, G., and J. Haguenau, Dysentery

on the Somme, 92
Lice, Human, Bibliography of, 49

— and Disease, 49

— Biology of, 50

— Methods of Raising Experimentally, 50

— Notes on, 51

— on Typhus patient, 50

— Rate of Locomotion of, 50

— Variation in Proportion of Sexes, 50
Lichen Vegetation, Foothills, of the

Rocky Mountains, 89

— Ecology, 89
Lichens, 89

— Microscopic Structure of, 426
liichtenstein, Jean L., New Mode of

Multiplication in Amoebidium, 63
Light, Electro-magnetic Tlieory of, 409

— Necessary for Germination, 68

Light, Polarization of, 397

— Scattering of, by Dust-free Air, 395
Lillie, R. S., 293

— Permeability of Sea-urchin Ova, 310
Lillie, Frank R,, Study of Free-martin, 37
Lilliella g. n., 312

Lim, Robert K. S., Respiratory Mechanism

of Shore-crab, 381
Limnseidse, Hermaphroditism in, 44
Limnohalacarus Walkeri (Walter), 195
Lipochromes, 367
Lipshiitz, A.. Internal Secretions of

Gonads, 32
Lithothamnion, 216

— intermedium, 216
Liver, Kupffer Cells of, 366
Liver-rot, 309

Liverworts, Geographical Distribution of,
212

— Indian, 212

— of Austria, 211

— of Germany, 211

— of Switzerland, 211
Lizards, Melanophores of, 298

Lloyd, C. G., Mycological Notes, 82, 329
Lloyd-Jones, Orren, and F. A. Hays,

Sexual Activity of Male Rabbit, 298
Loeb, Jacques, Heliotropism of Barnacle

Larvae, 197

— Fertilization and Phagocytosis of Echi-

noderma, 200

— Further Experiments on Sex of Frogs

developed from Artificially Activated

Eggs, 290
Lolimanella violacea (Kramer), 195
Lonchitis, 208
Long, W. H., Uredinese, 81

— Heart-rot of Oaks, 88

— and R. M. Harsch, Cultures of Wood-

rotting Fungi, 328

Lopez-Neyra, C. Rodriguez, New Nema-
tode from Partridge, 198

Lophozia Bauerlana, 72

— Hatcheri, 72
Lophius piscalorius, 179
Loxophyllum fasciola (Ehrbg.), 391
Lund, E. J., Intracellular Respiration in

Paramecium, 314

— Reversibility of Morphogenetic Pro-

cesses in Bursaria, 314

— Respiration in Paramecium, 389
Lygnirdendron Oldhamium, 392
Lymantria dispar, 52, 375
Lymph, Histology of, 367

— Blood Platelets in, 367
Lyperosia exigua de Meijere, 192
Lippincott, W. A., Blue Andalusians, 300

M

Macbride, E. W., Experiments with
Larval Echinoids, 386

INDEX,

443

McCalla, Albert, Death of, 358

MacCanghey, V., Algse of the Hawa'ian
Arcliipelago, 216

McClintock, J. A., Pea-nut Disease, 224

MacDowell, Edwin Carleton, Bristle In-
heritance in Drosophila, 53

McEweu, R. S., Reactions of Drosophila
to Light and Gravity, 303

MacGregor, Malcolm E.,. Insects and
Disease, 302

Mclndoo, N. E., Recognition among In-
sects, 46

McKay, M. B., 80, 86, 221

— Cercospora heficola, 226

3IacLeod, J., Statistics of Moss Structure,
69

Machida, J., Spermatogenesis of an Orthop-
teron, 377

Machhnus pilipes, 372

Macoma, 369

Macrophages at the Site of Injury, 370

Macrophoma Fid, 225

Macrophthalmus grandidieri A. Milne-
Edwards, 196

Macrothylacea ruhi, 37;")

Madreporarian Skeleton, Nature of, 387

Maeandra areolata, 200

Mseandrina, 388

Magnifying Power, Measurement of, 230

Main, Hugh, Entomophthora americana,
79

INIaire, L., Tricholoma, 328

Maitland, T. D., and E. M. Wakefield,
Uganda Fungi, 83

Malacosoma neustria, 375

Malacoftraca of Natal, 196

Malarial Blood, Rapid Examination of, 99

— Parasites, Improvised Staining of, 98
Mallorca Marine Biological Laboratory, 99
Malone, Julian Y., Spermatogenesis of

Dog, 360
Mammals, Seminiferous Tubules of, 360
Mammary Glands, 34

of Rabbit, ,S5

Manaloug, C, Degeneration of Peripheral

Nerves, 98
Mangin, L., Chxtoceros criophilus, 214
Marchantiacese, Water-conduction in, 71
Marmota monax, 184
Marrattiac-ese, Stelar System of, 66
Marshall, 35
Marshall, F. H. A., and E. T. Hainan,

Post-cestrous Changes in Dog, 36
Marshall, John, 411
Martin, Benjamin, 412
Mason, T. G., Carbohydrates of Musci, 71
Massaria japonica, 82

— moricola, 82

Massey, L. M., Crown-canker Disease of
Rose, 85

— Use of Various Fungicides, 224
Mast, S. O., Conjugation and Encystation

in Didinium nasutum, 62

Mathewson, C. H., and P. Davidson,

Annealing of Bronze, 103
Mathiola valesiaca, 85
Matliis, C, and L. Mercier, Eufamceba

dysenterias, 201
Matsudaira, Y., 385
Matsueka, Y., Actions of Micro-organisms

on Bone-marrow, 91
Matsui H., Chemical Constituents of

" Asakusanori," 324
Matthai, G., Nature of Madreporarian

Skeleton, 387

— Reactions of Astrseid Corals, 388
Mayer, A. G., Theory of Nerve Conduction,

185

— Nerve Conduction in Cassiopea, 201
Mazza, A., Oceanic Algology, 76

Mead, Harold T., Reactions of Sand Crab,

380
Mecitogaster modest us, 377
Mecoptera, 190
Medical Research Committee, Diagnosis of

Gonococcal Infections, 418
Medusae deprived of Rhopalia, 388

— Fatigue in, 388

— Physiology of, 200
Melampsora sp., 220
Melampsorella spp., 219
Melanospora erythrsea, 83

— Mangini, 220

Melhus, I. E., Peronosporaceae, 79

— and others, Spongospora suhterranea, 223
Melin, E., Archegonium of Sphagnum

squarrosum, 320
Meliola, Parasites on, 325
Mellivora, 300
Melobesieae, 78
Mendel, Lafayette B., 294
Mercier, L., 202
Merill, E. D., 220
Meringosphsera, 216
Merwin, H. E., Optical Properties of

Carborundum, 230

— Optical Properties of Colour of Pig-

ments and Paints, 401

Mesnil, F., and M. CauUery, Dimorphism
in a PolychaBt, 58

Notes on Syllids, 306

Peculiarly Adapted Annelid, 306

Metallurgical Microscope, 92

Metals, Eti'ect of Great Hydrostatic Pres-
sure on, 234

Metcalf, H. E., Electrifying the Micro-
tome, 232

Metcestrum, 35

Metzgeria, 212

Meylan, 0., New Mycetozoa, 393

— Mycetozoa from the Jura Mountains,

393
Mice, " Dislocated," 33

— Effect of Alcohol on, 42

— Growth of, 294
Microphyla ornata, 367

444

INDEX.

Microphyla rubra, 367
Microplankton of Plymouth Sound, 323
Micropteryx. Protocerebrum of, 190
Microscope, British, Evolution of, 411

— Illumination, 228

Microscopical Characters in the Study of
the Higher Plants, 317

Microscopy, Chemical, 402

Microsporidian, New, in Cabbage White
Caterpillars, 314

Microtome, Electrifying the, 232

Microtrombidium, 380

Midas midas, 314

Miller, S. W., Etching with Chromic Acid
and Hydrogen Peroxide, 234

Milner and Part, Methods in Practical
Petrology, 408

Mindal parigiensis g. n., 212

Misra, C. S., Sugar-cane Leaf-hopper, 49

Mistletoes, Parasitic Fungus of, 86

Misunicna vatia Clerck, 47

Mite, Harvest, New, 380

Mites as Disease- carriers, 379

Mites, Mange, 379

Mitosis, Time Occupied in, 183

Mjdberg, E., 59

Mnium, 69

Modiola-epifauna, 369

Mollusca, British Terrestial and Fresh-
water, 188

Monachociinus, 386

Monachosorum subdigitatum, 209

Monaster and Narcotized Ova,Cell-division
in, 311

Mongoose, Hsemopoiesis in Embryo, 34

Moniezia expansa, 187

— trigonophora, 187
Monilia carbonaria, 83
Monilochxtes infuscans g. et sp. n., 88
Monkeys, Hydatid Cysts in, 199

— Trypanosomes in, 314

Moore, Benjamin, Studies of Activity of
Light in Inorganic and Organic
Systems, 334

Moreau, F., and Madame, Anomalies in
Mucorini, 217

— Endophjllum Spores, 218

— Epicymatia aphtltosx, 220

Morgan, T. H., Inheritance in Fantail
Pigeons, 181

Morgans, T. D., and F. Rogers, Unifor-
mity of a Cast of Acid Open-hearth
Steel, 235

Morrill, C. V., Regeneration after Ex-
articulation in Diewyctylus ciridescens,
295

Mosquito-eggs, Viability of, 376

Moss Exchange Club, 320

— Structure, Statistics of, 69
Mosses, Australian, 67

— Dextrose, Levulose, and Sucrose, in, 71

— Multicellular Spores in, 71

— of North- West Germany, 213

Mosses, Wiltshire, 70

Motella tiicirrata, 63

Moth, Holly Tortrix, 191

Mottram, J. C, Protective Coloration in
Lf'pidoptera, 191

Mould-spores, Effects of Pasteurization on,
221

Mouse, Spermatogenesis in, 360

Much's Granules, 403

Mucor Mucedo, Cultures of, 217

Mucorini, Anomalies in, 217

Muenscher, W. L. C, Algal Associations
of San Juan Island, 77

Muir, Frederick, Pliilippine Derbidse, 51

Miiller, K., European Hepaticje, 211

MuUiceps midticeps, 187

Munro, James W., Structure and Life-
history of Hylustes, 194

Murjena, Poison of, 43

— Serum of, 43

— Toxicity of Serum of, 43
MurenidiB, Optic Nerves of, 41
Murphy, P. A., Cytology of the Sexual

Orffaus of Phytophthora erythroseptica

Pethyb., 217
Murrill, W. A., Agaricacese, 328
Mus norvegicus albinus, 34

Nature of, 186

rattus, Nature of, 186

Musci, Carbohydrates of, 71
Mussel-mite, 379
Mustela africana, 300

— erminia, 300

— J'uro, 300

— nivalis, 300

— (Putorins) pidorius, 300
Mustelidae, i^aculum or Os penis in some

Genera of, 300
Muta, Elisa, and Gino Pollacci, Variations

of Fungi due to Environment, 81
Mycale (Paresperella) atlatdica, 61
Mycetozoa from the Jura Mountains. 393

— Irish, 90
-- New, 393
Mycological Notes, 82, 329

Mycology and Plant Pathology, a Text-
book of, 330
Mycorhiza, Endotrophic, of EricacCcie, 88
Mycosphxrella Horii, 82
Myelin in Advancing Age, 185
MyelopMlus minor, 48

— piniperda, 48

Myers, J. A., Development of Mammary

Glands, 31
Myrianida fascicidata , 306
Mytilus-epifauna, 369
Myrmarachne, 195
Myxidium gadi. Life- cycle of, 63
Myxomycett s, Rare, 90
Myxophyceae of North America, 215

INDF-X,

445

N

Nakabara, Waro, Xuckar Division in the
Adipose Cells of Insects, ISO

Nakayama, S., 324

Name, Willard G. Van, Philippine Asci-
diaus, 37 1

Nannochorista, 190

NannochoristidsB, 190

Nanta, A.; Large 31 ononucleav Leucocytes
of the Peripheral Blood and the
Macrophages at the Site of Injury
amongst the Wounded, 370

Neger, F. W., HoncT-dew Fun^i, 328

Negre, L., 232

Nematodes, Filter-bed, 307

— Reproduction in, 383

— Sex in, 44

— Toxic Constituent of, 383
Nematoscelis megalops. British Occurrence

of, 382
NeopecMa Coulteri, 8G
Neotrombidium, 380
Nephrolepis, 209

— tuberosa, 209
^ — voluhilis, 209
Nereocystis, 77

Nephthyigor(iia Kiihenthali, sp. n., 59
Nereis, Effect of Radium on Fertilization

Membrane of, 307
Nerve Conduction, Theory of, 183

— Structure of Optic, 41
Neuville, H., 183

Newborongh Sands, Geology and Physical
Geography of, 70

Newton, R. BuUen, Foraminiferal and
NuUipore Structures in some Tertiary
Limestones from New Guinea, 315

Nice, L. B., Effect of Alcohol on White
Mice, 42

NicoU, William, Hydatid Cysts in Mon-
keys, 199

Nicoll, W., Trcmatodes of Queensland
Reptiles and Frogs, 308

— New Trematode from Australian Poison

Snakes, 309
Nilssonia, 392
Noctiluca, 390
Northop, John N., Growth-period and

Duration of Life. 194
Northop, John H.. 197
Notochord, Development of JIammalian,

292
Nudibranchs, Immunity Coloration in, 188
Nuttall, G. H. F., 3tJ8

— Bibliography of Human Lice, 49

— Biology of Licp, 50
of Phthirus pubis, 378

— Lice and Disease, 49

— Pathological Effects of Phthirus pubis,

304

O

Oaks, Heart-rot of, 88

Obituary —

Gibbons, William S., 17<)
Hall, Kate Marion, 244, 358
Hebb, Richard G„ 177, 244
McCalla, Albert, 358
Plimmer, Heury George, 349
Sargant, Ethel, 175

Ocfopas macropus, 372

OoypodidsB, 382

QSdemagena tarandi, 303

Oehlkers, F., Nuclear Division in Cha-
racea3, 75

Oenothera. 37

CEstrous Cycle in Guinea-pig, 35

(Estrum, 35

Oestrup, E., IMarine Diatoms from the
Coasts of Iceland, 324

Okuda, Y., and P. Eto, Iodine in IMarine
Alga), 325

— and S. Nakayama, the Quality of

" Asakusanori," 324
Oligocliseta, Hermaphroditism in, 44

— of Inle Lake. 383

Olmsted, J. M. D., Locomotion of Gastro-
pods, 301

— Regeneration in Planaria maculata, 309
■ — Physiology of Sijnaptula hjjdroformis,

311 *

Oniscus asellus, 192
Onslow, H., Growths in Colloidal Silica

Solutions, 404
Ophioglypha sarsii, 369
Ophiotsenia, New Species of, 198

— racemosa, 198
Opisthacanlhus elatus, 195
Opisthobranchs, Hermaphrodite Marine,

44
Opossum, Early Development of, 359

— Polyembryonic Blastocyst in, 178
Optical System, Tracing Rays through, 409
Orbicella anmdaris, 200

Organism, Ditferentiation of Cells in the

Developing, 39
Orgyia antiqua, 47
Ormskirk, Immunity Trials at, 84
Ornithodorus eanestrinii, 383

— moubatit, 380

— tholozani, 380

Orthoptera, Abdominal Extremity in, 52
Orthopteron, Spermatogenesis of an, 377
Osmunda, Apogamy in, 67

— cinnaniomea, 67

— Claytoiiiana, 67
Osphromenus goiirami, 365
Osteoclasts, Phagocytosis by, 183
Osterwalder, 0., Disease of Raspberry, 85
Otiorynchus cribicollii:, 48

— ligmtici, 48

— subcatu<, 48

— turca, 48

2 II

446

INPEX.

Ovum, Cyclic Variations in Permeability

of the Activated, 2tKj
Ox, Interculated Discs iu Heart-muscle, 41
Oxnerella maritima g. et sp. n., 201
Oxyuris curvula, 384

Pachysima JEthiops, 373, 374

Pffisii, 208

Paillot, A., New Microsporidinn in Cab-
bage White Caterpillar.-, 314

Painter, Theophilus S., Cell-division in
Mona^ter and Narcotized Ova, 811

Palmomyces bacilloides, 392

PapHnicolaou, G. N., 35

— and Chark-s K. Stdckard, Idiosome in

Spermatogenesis of Guinea-pig, 361
Pai)ilio lycoplu-on, Gynandromorph of, 191
Faracuharis spinosus g. et sp. n., 381
Paramecium auielia, 202
Indnction of Endomixis in, 314

— caiiddtum, 391

— Intracellular Eespiration in, 314

— putrinum, 391

— Respiration in, 389
Paramiihistomidfe, 385
Parampliistomum g. n., 3S5
Parasitism, Phybiology of, 81
Parasyndesis, 49

Paralhrombiclium paolii g. etsp. n., 380
Parker, G. H., Activities of Corymorpha,

311

— Pedal Locomotion of Aplysia call-
fiirnica, 302

— Suction in Sea-anemone, 312
Parmeliopsis. 89

" Par-cedema " Bacillus. 394

Parry, E., 314

Partridge, New Nematode from, 198

Pascher, A. Ehizopodial Development of

the Flagellatre. 1. Some Ehizopodial

Chrysomouads with Chromatophores,

322
II. Binainoeha varians — a

Novelty with Dinoflaggella - like

Swarmers, 322
III. Ehizopodial Nets as

Capturing-apparatus in a Plasmodial

Chrysomonad, 322
IV. Fusion - Plasmodia in

Flagellate, and their Significance in

the Descent of Ehizopods from

Flagellatse, 323
Paspalum dilatatum, 217
Patouillard, N., Fungi from Tonkin, 220
Patterson, J. J., Polyembrionic Blastocyst

in Opossum, 178
Paulson, E., Microscopy at Euhleben. 2(j

— Vareniie Collection of Lichens, 89

•— Microscopic Structure of T-ichens, 426

Pea-nut Disease, 224
Pear Thrips, 376

Pearl, Kaymond, Age and Fertility in
Fowls, 363

— Effect on Progeny of Fowls after

Treatment with Alcohol, 37

— Effects of Pituitary Body and Corpus

Luteum on Chicks, 181

— Influence of Age on Eeproductivity of

Fowls, 363
■ — Measurements of Degrees of Kinship,
44

— Proportion of Sexes in Whitefish, 366

— Sex-iatio in Domestic Fowl, 182, 363

— and Alice M. Boring, Corpus luteum

in Ovary of Chicken, 293
Pearse, A. S., New Isopods from British

Guiana, 58
Pease, Michael S., 28
Pediculus capitis, 50

— corporis, 50

— liumanus, 49

— vestimenti, 50
Pelljea, 318

— atropurpurea, 68

— glabella, 68

— in North America, 68
Pelomyxa Icntiasima sp. n., 389

— Ileactions of, to Food, 313

— schiedti sp. n , 389

Penard, E., a New Type of Infusorian :
Arachnidiopsis paradoxa, 283

— Lenus Loxodes, 202
Penis, " Eudimentary," 364
Pentastomid. Xew, from a Fish, 306
Perch, Malagasy, Study of, 299
Perezia legeri sp. n., 314
Peridermium cerebrum,, 81

— filamentosum, 81

— pyriforme, 8 1

Peridiiiiales of Plymouth Sound, 323
Peripheral Nerves, Degeneration of, 98
Perisporiales, South African, 326
Perivascular Spaces, Lining of, 366
Peronosporule.s, Nortli American, 325
Peronosporacese, 79
Peronosporites antianarius W. Smith, 392

— gracilis, 392

Perrier, Edmond, History of Faunas and

its Eolation to Sex, 44
Pests of Fruit-trees, Control of, 329
Petalura gigantea, 56
Peter, A., Diatoms from Hanover and the

Harz, 215
Petersen, C. G. Joh., Fauna of Coastal

Waters, 369
Petri, L., Medium for Cultivation of

Blepharospora cambivora, 227
Petrographic Microscope, 231
Petrology, Polarizing Stand for, 408

— Practical, Methods in, 408
Peyronel, B., Spondylodadium atrovirens,

86

INDEX.

447

Pezaid, 32

Pfeiffer, R., and G. Bessau, Bacteria of

Gas Gangrene, 391
Phagocafa gracilis, 385
Phagocytosis by Osteoclasts. ISo
Phaseoltis vulgaris, Embryogeny of, tJl
Phegopteris, Apogamy in, 67

— polypodoides, 67

Phellia. Four New Species of, 387
Pheretima. Lymph-ulands of, 382

— Cffilomic Fluid of, 3s2
Pheretima posthuma, 390

Coelomic 1 'onches of, 383

Philosamia (Aitacus) ricini (Boisd.), 191

— cyntliia (Drury), 191
Phlegm necrosis, 85
Phoma Betx, 86, 87

— mali, 81

Photomicrographs in Colour, 229
Photomicrography, Telescopic Focussing

Apparatus for, 400
Phreatoicus, Fossil Species of, 381

— ivianamattensis sp. u., 381
Phthirus pubis, 49

Biology of, 378

Pathological Effects of, 304

Phycomycete, New, 79

Phylhichora Boystoneai : a Disease of Pioyal

Palm, 226
Phyllosticta citricola, 82

— pirina, 81

Physagiriua, Experiments with, 45
Phyto melanocephala, 192
Phytophthora. DovelopmL-nt of, 325

— erythrofeptica Pethyb., Morphology and

Cytology of the Sexual Organs of. 217

— infedaiis, 79

Phytupl.inkton, Caledonian, 213
Phytophthora Faberi, S3

Pictet, Arnold, Dimorphic Colouring in

Lepidoptera, 374
Piemeisel, P. L., 220

— F. J., 219
Pierce, K. G., 226

Piercy, Alma, Structure and Mode of Life

of Rormidium flaccidum, 72
Pieris brassicas. 47, 314
Pig. Thyroid Follicles of, 292

— Ultimobranchial Bodies in, 292
Pig's Liver, I .obules of, 298
Pigeons (Fantail), Inheritance in, 181

— Right and Left Testes of, 363
Pigments and Paints, Optical Properties

of Colour of. 4ul
Pimis ponderosa, Disease of Seedlings of.

81
Plagiochasma, 212
Plaice, Otolith-method of Estimating Age

of Plaice, 300
Plaice and Flounders, Piings in Scales of.

300
Planaria maculata, 385
.^ Regeneration in, 309

Planaria. New Species of, 386
Plankton, Antarctic, 214
Plant-cells, Mitochcndrias of, 204

— Plaslids of, 204

Plant Diseases, Description and Treat-
ment of, 329
Plants, DiscHses of, 223, 329

— Injection Experiments on, 207

— Mechanism of Overgrowth in, 207

— Rate of Conduction of Injected Fluid,

207
Platanus, North American, Characters of

Words of, 205
Platanus occidentalis, 205

— racemosa, 205

— Wrightii, 205
Plalylambrus quemns s]k n., 19t)
Plectonema radiosum, 324
Plendomus fascomaculans, 80
Pleodorina ilUnoiensis, 73

Plimmer, Henry George, Death of, 349
Plough, Harold H., Temperature and

Crossing-over in Drosojihila, 303
Plums. Resistance to Brown-rot, 87
Plumularids, 387
Pocock, R. I., Baculum or Os penis in

some Genera of Mustelidse, 300
Podon, 370
Pollaci, Gino, 81
Pollard, F. J. S., 303
Polychset, Dimorphism in a, 58
Polychsets, Monograph on, 383
Polycirrus areiiivorus, 380

— uurardiacus, 380
Polykaryocytes, 367
Polypodium punctatum, 209
Polyporus, 328

— hirsutus, 329

— lucidus, 88

— versicolor, 329
Polystomidaj, 384
PoJyxenus burmiticus sp. n., 45
Pond-1 jfe Exhibition. 245
Pool, V. W., Phoma Be.tx, 86
Pool, Venus W., 226

— Infection by Cercospora beticola, 80

— and M. B. McKay, Climatic Conditions

and Conidial Development, 221
Poratophilus, 195
Porcellio scaber, 192
Porites f areata, 200

— incrustans. 60
Porocephalus nematoides, 306
Porphyra laciniata, 324

Porter, Lilian, Attachment Organs of

Corticolous Ramalinx, 88
Posey, G. B., 327
Post-cestrous Changes in Dog, 36
Potato-leaf Curl, 329
Potato-tubers, Parasite on, 86
Potatoes, Dry-rot of, 329
Potter. Alden A., and G. W. Coons

LTstilaginero, 210

2 H 2

448

INDEX.

Pottia, 213

" Poiirquoi-pas ? " Expedition of the, 214

Powell and Lealand, 414

Powell, Hugh, 413, 414

Praeger, 11. Llo}'^d. Irish Fungi, 83

Prashad, Baini, 187, 384

Pratt, O. A., Storage-rot in Potatoes, 224

Presidential Address, 153

Prioenemis variabilis, 47

Pritchard, Dr. Urban. Donation of Diatom

Slides, 410
Pro-cestrum, 35
Protozoa of Lahore, 391
Protula meilhaci, Segmentation of Ovum of.

58
Psathyrometra, 38G
Pseud idotheidsB, 382
Fseudocalanus elongatus, 370
Pseudohermaphroditism. 304
Pseud oklossia, New Species of, (!;>

— pedinis sp. n., 63

Pseudomonas Citri, the Cause of Citrus

Canker, 222
Pseudo-pregnancy, 36
Pteridese, Lines of Phylesis of, 208
Pteridium, 208
Pteris, 318

— (^Histiopteris) incisa, 208

— loiKjifolia, (58
Pterodrilns iJurhini, 307
PteroidesB, Phylogeny of the, 208
Ptilidium puJcheirimum, 319
Ptychomitrium suhcrispatum, 321
Puccinia graminis, 84

Experiments on Cereals with, 219

Infection of Timotiiy-grass by, 219

tritici-compacti, 327

— SclerisB, 327

— siibstriata, 327
Puget Sound Algse, 77

Marine Station. 77

Punjabensis, 391
Pustularki gigantea, 220

Puymaly, A. de, Dichotomosiphon tuhero-

sus, 74
Pyenidia, Growth of, SO
Pyrenopolyporis, 82
Pythium Deharyanum, 86
Pyxidicula invisitata, 170, 243

Q

Quaujer, H. H., Phloem Neeropis, 8.")
Quekett, Dr. Edwin, 414

R

Eabaud, Elienre, " Dislocated " Mice, 33
— Paralyzing Habits of some Hymeuop-
tera, 46

Rabaud, Etienne, Reflex Immobilization in
Arthropods, 372

— Role of Ganglia in Immobilization' 373
Rabbit. Development of Hypophysis of,

362

— Male, Sexual Activity of, in Relation to

Progeny, 297
-■ — of, 298

— Mammary Glands of. 35
Itamalinae cah'caris, 89

— fastigiata, 89

— fraxinea, 89

— polHnaria, 89
Ramsbottom, J., 79

Ramsey, G. B., A Ehizoctonia Potato

Disease, 225
Rana pipiens, 296, 3G8
Rao, C. R. N., Iridocytes in Batrachian

Larvae, 367
Rasmussen, A. T., Seasonal Changes in

Interstitial Cells of AVoodchuck, 184
Raspberry, Disease of. 85
Rat, Albino, Growth ot Kidney of, 186

— Development of Mammary Glands in,

179
Eats and Evolution, 185

— Growth of Parts of. and of the Whole,

366

— Young Albino, Effects of Underfeeding,

297

Rawdon, H. S., Unusual Feature in Micro-
structure of Wrought-Iron. 103

Rawlins, F. I. G., Technique of the
Vertical Illuminator, 116

Raw.son, H. E.. 115

Rea, Margaret W., and Margarita de
Stelfox, Irish Mycetozoa, 90

Beboulia Clutrrieri, 319

— hemispherica, 319

— oxidenfalis, 319

— Eaddi, 319

Redfield, Alfred C, and Elizabeth M.
Bright. Eifect of Radium on Fertili-
zation Membrane of Nereis, 307

Reese, Albert M., Blood-corpuscles of
Alligator, 183

Reeves, Edna M., Inheritance of Extrn
I5ristles of Drosophila, 375

Refractometer, Interference, 94

Regeneration, Osseous, 41

Reiehenow, Ed.. Intracellular Digestion
in an Acarid, 379

Rendle, Dr., The Use of Microscopical
Characters in the Systematic Study
of the Higher Plants, 317

Report for 1917, 109

Reptiles, Tapeworms of, 198

— and Frogs, Trematodes of Queensland,

308
Retroplumida;, 382
Retterer, Ed., and H. Neuville, Fatty

Tissue of Crocodilians, 183
Reynolds, F. C, Polarization of Light, 397

INDEX.

449

Bhucodlneuni antlqint, 378
Ehacomitrinm in North America, 320
Eheinberg, J., 419

— Donation of Phutosjraphic Scales, etc.,

410
Rhizaster crinoideg 'j;. et sp. n., 322
Bliizina undidata. Sexuality in, 320
Ehizoctonia, 86

— Potato Disease, 225

— Solani, its effects on i'otato Tubers,

225

— violacea, 85
Khizodinianse, 322
Bhizophiliiim acuforme, 79

Ehoales, Artliur S., M'ood- destroying

Fungi, o2'.)
Rhynchobothriam ilisha sp. u., 384
Rliynchocinetea tyims Milne-Edwards, J!)6
Riccia Frost it, 21'.i

— patlianhotensh, 212
Riddle, L. AV., I'armeliopsis, 89

Eiddle, Oscar, Eigli and Ijeft Testes of
Pigeons, 363

Eielta, 212

Einderpest Virus, Vitality of, U7

Eitchie, John, jun., Acetone as a Solvent
for Mounting Media, 279

Eitchie, Walter, Study of Myelopliilus
minor, 48

Eivett, M. F., Structure of the Cytoplasm
in the cells of Alicularia scalaris, 319

Eogers, F., 235

Eogers, James B., Effect of Thyroid Ex-
tirpation on Thymus and Pituitary
Glands, 296

Eose, Crown-canker Disease of, 85

Eosenbaum, A., Eoot-rot of Ginseng, 87

Eosenbaum, J., 223

— Rhizoctonia Solani, its I^Jffect on Potato

Tubers, 225

— Study of Phytophthora, 217
Eosenviuge, L. K., 324

Eosenvinge, L. N., Marine Algaj of Den-
mark, 216

Eoss, Andrew, 414

Eoss, J., Ptilidium pidchnrriinum, ','>VJ

Eoss, Thomas, 415

Eoss's Microscopes, 415

Eothschild, N. C, Convetgcnce among
Ectoparasitic Insects, 52

Rotifers, Controlling Sex in, 310

Eoubaud. E., Rapid Examination of
Malarial Blood, 99

Eoule, Louis, Evolution of Salmonidaj, 44

Eubber Disease, 83

Eubus, spp., an Orange-rust of, 219

Eudin, E., Tapeworms of Reptiles, 198

Euedemann, E., Median Eye in Trilobites,
189

Russell, C. P., 194

Russula, 328

Rusts and Smuts in New Mexico in 1916,
219

Rusts on Forest-trees, 219
Ruth. E. S., and E. B. Gibson, Melano-
phores of Lizards, 298

S

Sabin, Florence R., Angioblasts and Blood-
vessels. ISO

Saccopsi'f alleni, 380

Saggitaria, Development of Eoot-tip in,
205

— sagittxfolia, Qi), 2U5
Sahni, B., 209

— Evolution of Branching in the Filicales,

209
Salkind, I.. Sensory Structures of Crab's

Claw, 380
Salmo trutta, 44
Salmonidse, Evolution of, 44
Salvia, Development of Pollen in, 206
Samsonoft-Aruflfo, C, Calcareous Algse

from Malta, 216
Sandhoppers, New Zealand, 58
Sanford, E. W., Digestion in Cockroach,

304
Sarcoptids, Plumicolous, of Birds and

Mammals, 379
Sargant, Ethel. Death of, 175
Sargassum dupUcatum, 78

— Iodine in, 325

— Sandei, 78
Saturnia pavonia, 375
Sauchia sjjongiosa g. n., 212
Saui'opsida, Vestigial Gill-iilaments in,

293
Sauver, Dr. Albert, 93
iScalia Hoolceri, 212
Scaphanocephalus audralis sp. n., 199
Schaeffer, Asa A., New Amcebse, 389

— New Diatom-eating Flagellate, 390
Schaifuit, E., and G. Voss, Black-wart of

Potatoes, 226
Schein. H., Studies in Cattle-plague, 96
SchiiTner, V., Lophozia Hatcheri and L.

Baueriand, 72
Schiller, J., Heterodinium in the Adriatic,

214

— Meriugosplia^ra, 216
Scliistoattfja osmundacea Mohr, 321, 322
Schizsea, "Stelar Ontogeny of, 208
Schizopliylluiii commune, 329

Schultz, E. S., Silver-scurf on Potatoes, 223
Schussnig, B., Fresh-water Algaj of the

Austrian Coast Districts, 324
Schweiuitz Collection of Fungi, 82
Soiuridas. 43

Scleroderma (?) quailridentaium sp. n., 45
Sclerospora macrospora on Corn, 226
Sclerostomum vulgare, 384
Sclerotiuia, 85

— cineria, 87

450

INDEX.

Sderotinia libertiana, 87
^- Smilacina, 87

— Trifoliorum, S(!
Scierotium JIoltsH. 224

A Disease of Wheat, 226

Scorpion, Cardiac and Skeletal Muscle of,
57

— Spermatozoa, Chondriosomes of, 195
iScotia. Expedition of the, 214

Scourfield, J). J., 245

— Fresn-water Copepods, 416
Scrotum, Vestigial, 364
acyiUum canicula, 181, 2'Jl
Sea-anemone, Suction in, 312
Sea-anemones, New. fioin New Guinea, 387
Sea-bottom in Danish Coastal Waters, 369
Sea-spider, Leg-muscle of, 57
Sea-urchin Ova. Permeabilitj^ of, 310
of, 200

.•^eas, Blood-red, 390

Seed-tubers, Treatment against Drj'-rot

in, 223
Selaginella chrysocaulos, 211

— cJirysoirhizos, 211

— Emmetiana, 210

— Kraussiana, 211

— Mariensii, 21 1

— pallidisshna, 210

— serpens, 210

— spmosa, 211

Senevet, G., Improved Staining of Malarial

Parasites, 98
Septoria Chenopndii, 80
Sericaria mori, 47
Serolis hakeri sp. n., 381

— minuta, 381 ■
Serum, Hsemolytic, 101

Sex and Fauna, Relation ol, 44

Sex -hormones, 37

Sexton, E. W., 195

Se'zary, A., Rapid Method for obtaining
Hamoelytic Serum, 101

Shad, Indian, 187

Shantz, H. L., and R. L. Pie'meisel, Fungus
l^airy Rings, 220

Sharpies, A., Rubber Disease, 83

Shear, C. L., "End-rot" Disease of Cran-
berry, 226

— and N. E. Stevens, Schweinitz Collec-

tion of Fungi, 82
Sheep, Atrophy of Right Superior Vena
Cava, 43

— Inheritance of Fertility in, 179
Sheikevitsch, 41

Shelford, Victor E., Coloration of Tiger-
beetles, 375
Sheppard, E. J., 107

— Two Valuable Methods of Staining in

Bulk and Counter-Staining, 275
Shiltou, A. W., Vitality of Rinderpest

Virus, 97
Shimamura, Torai, and Hajime Fujii,

Toxic Constituent of Nematodes, 383

Shore-crab, Development of, 382

— Respiratory Mechanism of, 381
Shuttle worth,' 1786, 413

Sidebottom, Henry. Report on the Recent
Foraminifera dredged off the East
Coast of Australia. H.M.S. " Dart."
Station 19 (14 May, 1895). Lat. 29^
22' S.. Lono. 153^ 51' E., 465 fathoms.
Pteropod Ooze, 2. 121, 249
Siganus fascesceng, 385
Sigmapera cincta g. et sp. n., 308
Silberstein, Ludwik, Method of Tracing
Rays through any Optical System, 409

— Electro-magnetic Theory of Light, 409
Silica Solutions, Colloidal, Growths in,

404
Silk-moths, Parthenogenesis of. 4S
Silkworms, Inheritance in, 191

— in Madagascar, 47

— variations in. 48
Silver-scurf on Potatoes, 223

Sim, T. R., South African Hepaticse, 212
Simocephalus retulus, 63

Sex Intergrades in, 197

Sisyra, 389

Slides Cabinet : Report of Committee. 420

Sloane. Thomas G., Endoskeletou of

Beetles, 194
Smerinthus populi, 47
Smith, Bertram G., Germinal Vesicle in

Cryptobranchus, 359
Smith, E. F., Mechanism of Overgrowtli

in Plants, 207
Smith, James, 414
Smith, Wilbur C, Disappearance of Conim

arteriosus in Teleosts, 370
Smuts of Cereals, 327
Snail. Cytoplasmic Inclusions in Germ-
cells ot; 189
Snails, Marine, Smell and Taste in, 301
Snakes, Australian Poison, New Trema-

tode from, 309
Soar, Charles D., Hydracarina of Epping

Forest, 306

— A Species of Uropoda, 427
Soldanellonyz chapjmisi g. et sp. n., 195

— parviscutatus sp. n., 195

Soue'ges, R., Eoibryogeny of the Alis-
maceas, 6o

— Development of Riot-tip in Sagittaria,

205
Soulier. A., Segmentation of Ovum of

Protula meilhact\ 58
Southwell. T., and Baini Prashad, Study

of Hilsa, 187

— Cestodes of Hilsa, 384
Spegazzini, 82
Spegazziuian Meliola Types, 80

Spehl, P., Double Staining of the Tubercle
Bacillus; a Modification of Spengler's
Method, 403

— Staining Spirilla with Formol-violet,

403

INDEX.

45t

.Speiigler'.s Method. Moditication of, 408

Spermatocytes, 360. 361

Sperinatogonial Division, liiil

8peimatospiiere, 361

Sphseronema fimbriatum, 327

Sphcerojms malorum, 222

Effect on Tissues and Cell-contents

of Apple, 221
SphccroxyUis erinaceus Clp.. 306
Sphserotheca pannosa (Powdery JMildew),

224
Sphagna, Collection of the, 320

— Ecology of the, 320

— Taxonomy of the, 320

Sphagnum squarrosum, Archegonium of,

320
Spherometer of Precision, Of)
Spider, Alteration of Instinct in, '<7
Spideis, Ant-like. 95

— Ulster, 195
Spilosoma menthastri, 372
Spirochxta duttoni, 380

— ictero hemorrhagica. Photographing

the Minute Spirals of. 228

— pallidu7n, 418

— recurrentis, 50, 380, 390
Spirochaates, 239

— Detection of, 4l!S

Spirochetosis, Experimental. Leucocytes

in, 371
Spirodinium, 323
Spirogyra, 74

— Effect of Barium, Strontium and Cerium

on, 74
Spirostreptidse, New, 195
Splaclinacese, 321
SpmdyJochuJium atroriren.<, 86

— Causing Silver-scurf on Potatoes, 223
Sponges, Desmacidonid, 201

— from Inle' Lake, 389

— Irish, 61

Spongilla fragilis. var. ealcuttana, 389

— Jacudris, var. prolifevens var. nov., 389
Spongospora sulitevranea, 223

Life-history of, 90

— Types of Dry-rot following, 223
Sporodina grand is, 217

Sporulating P.acteria, Method for Double-
staining, 233

Sprue, Intestinal Flora of, 91

Squashes, Disease of. due to Choniieph<ira
cucuihitarum, 225

Squirrel (Ground), Development of Liver
in. ISO

Staining in Bulk and Counter-Staining.
275

Stakman, p]. C, Immunity from Parasitic
Fungi, 84

— Uredinese, 219

— ■ and G. R. Hoerner, Fuccinia graminis
triUci-com]mcti,'ij\>!l

— and F. J. Piemeisel, Experiments with

Fuccinia yraminis on Cereals. 219

Standley, Paul C, Rusts and Smuts of

New Mexico, 219
Stanford, E. C'., 224
Stebbiag, T. E. R., Malacostraca of Xatal,

196
Steel, Hypo-eutectoid. 243

— Methods for distinguishing Sulphides

from Oxides in. 103
-T— Microscopic Examination of, 23(;

— Microstructure of, 265

— Uniformity of a Cast nf Acid Open-

hearth. 235
Steels, Heterogeneity of, 102
Stefani, Prof, de, 21<;
Stegomyia fasciata, 376
Steil, W. N., Study of Some New Cases

of Apogamy in Ferns, 318
Steinach, 32

Stelfox, Margarita de, 90
Stemonitis hyperopia sp. n.. 393
Stendall. J. A., Ulster Spiders, 195
Stennurosteptus, 195
Stenostreptus, 195
Stephanophiala g. n., 385
Stephauophialinse, American, 385
Stephens, Jame, Irish Sponges, 61
Stephenson, J.. Oligochseta of Inle' Lake,

383
Stephenson, T. A.. Antarctic Actiniaria,

312

— Irish Actiniaria. 387

Stereoscope for Examining Superposed

Projections, 92
Stereum subpileatum. 88
Steven, H. M.. Biolosjy of Chermes, 378
Stevens, N. E., 82

— Relation of Fungi to Host, 221
Stevens, F. L., Spegazzinian iMeliola

Types, 80

— Parasites on Meliola, 325

Stewart, Chester A., Effects of Under*
feeding Young Albino Rats, 297

Stewart, F. H., Development of Ascaris
lumhricoides and A. mystax in blouse,
307

— Hymenolepis na.nn Siebold and H.

muriva Dujardin, 384

— Life-history of Aticaris Innihricoides, 307
Stewart, Fred. W., So-called Thymus IV.

of Cat, 362
Stewart. V. B., 224

— Kerriajaponica, 85

Stickleback, Seasonal Changes in Kidney

of, 299
Stigoclonium, 324
Stockard, Charles R., 361

— end George N. Papanicolaou, Q2strous

Cycle in Guinea-pig, 35
Stone, R. E., Gymnoconia interditiaHs^

219
Storage-rot in Potatoes, 224
Streeter, (reorge L., Development of

Auditory Capsule in Man, 33

452

INDEX.

Stromatoporoids, Skeleton uf, 00

!>troDg, L. W., Short IMethod of Preparing

Histological jMaterial, 232
Strong, R. M., Melanin in Feather-germs

of Fowls, 187
Strong(iJus filaria, 187
tStrongijlocentrotiis puipuiatus fertilized

with Spermatozoa of Starfish, 200
tStrotometra ornatissimas, 386
Struthiopteris, 209
Strutt, Hon. E. J., Scattering of Light by

Dust-free Air, with Artificial iiepro-

duction of the Blue Sky, 395
tStuderiote^ crassa, .59
Stunkard, H. W., North-American Tre-

raatodes, 384
Sturgis, W. C., Rare Myxomycetes, 90
Stiberiopsis austraJis g. et sp. n., 59
Sugar-beet, Fungi cause Damping-off uf

Seedlings of, 86
Sugar-cane Leaf-Hopper, 49
Sundara, Raj B.. Fresh-water Fishes of

Madras, 364
Svedelius, N.. Alternation of Generations

in Floridese, 75
Sweet-Potato, Scurf of, 87
Swim-bladder, 43

Swine, Maturation of Ovum in, 178
Swingle, W. W., Effect of Starvation on

Tadpoles, 295
— Thyroid Feeding of Tadpoles, 29G
Swift's I.M.S. Microscope. 416
Syllids. Notes on, 306
Synaptula hiidriformis, 311
Syndetiuiobothriurn fiUcvlle, 384
ISijngamus trachealh, 187

T

Tadpoles, EfTecl uu Ossification of llxtir-

pating Thyroid in, 296

of Starvation on, 295

— Thyroid Feeding of, 296

Tadpole's Tail, Phagocytosis in, 308

Tadpoles, Removal of Thyroid from, 29<j

Txaiothrips inconsequens, 376

Tait, Jolin, Body-colour and Blood-colour

in Amphipods, 196
Talbot, G., 191
Talorcliestia telluris, 58
Tanaka. T., Japanese Microfungi, 82
• — Tyozaburo, and Arthur S. Rlioales,

Diseases of Plants, 329
Targionia hypoiihi/lla, 69
Tatusia novemci ncta, 177, 178
Taylor, John W., British Terrestrial and

Fresh- water Mollusca, 188
Taylor, Monica, Fertilization in Gnat, 49
Telling, E., Caledonian Phytoplankton,

213

Teleosts, Role of Fins in, 43

Temoia longicornh, 370

Tenopyr, L. A,, Constancy of Cell-Shape,

316
Teodora, G., Mites as Disease-carriers, 379
Terry. George S., Efi'ect on (Jssification in

Tadpoles of Extirpating Thyroid, 296
Tesch, J. J., Siboga Crabs, 382
Textile Fibres, Investigations on, 404
Thapar, G. S., Lymph-glands of Pliere-

tima, 382
Theba, 188
Thing, Alice, Zona pellucida in Turtle

Eggs, 290
Thorn, C. H., and G. H. Ayers, Efifects of

Pasteurisation on Blould-spores, 221
Thom, C, and J. N. Currie, Species

Grouped as Aspenjlllus niger, 211
Thomas, H. E., 225

— Uredinese, 327

Thompson, Elizabeth Lock\jood, Experi-
ments with Phi/sa gi/rhm, 45

Thompson, Helen B., and Lafayette B.
Mendel, Growth of Mice, 294

Thompson. W. R., Dipterous Parasite in
Territorial Isopods, 192

Thraustotheca, Development of, 217

Thymus and Pituitary Glands. Effect of
Thyroid Extirpation on, 290

— Epithelial Reversions in, 41
Thymus-feeding, Influence of, 290
Thy ropy gus, 195
Tiger-beetles, Coloration of, 375
Tilden, J. E., Myxophyceae of North

America, 215
Tilletia Ixvis, 219
~ Tritici. 219
Tillyard, R. J., Caudal Gills of T>arva) of

Zygopterid Dragonflies, 304

— Monograph on Dragonflies, 55

— Studies in Mecoptera, 190

— Wing-venation of Lepidoptera, :>02
Timm, R., Mosses of Nortli-West Ger-
many, 213

— Splachnaceae, 321
Titanideuni 'injobergi sp. u., 59
Tomato-leaf Rust, 329
Tomato-wilt due to a Fusarium, 224
Tongue, Development of Serous Glands of,

180
Torulae, Red, Colouring Matter of, 227
Trabutea. New Species of, 220
Trametes, 328

Transeau, E. N., Algae of INEichigan, 215
Treherne, R. C, 376
Trematode, New Amphistomid, from a

Fish, 385
Trematodes, North-American, 384
Tribondeau, L., Staining Sporogenous

Bacteria, 99

Tubercle Bacilli, 100

Trichocephalus depressiusculue, 384
Tricholoma, 328

INDEX.

453

Triclads from lule Lake, 386

Tricophxa Boudieri. a New Discomycete,

220
Trigeminal Nerve, Blinute Structure of

Sensory Hoot of, 299
Trilobites, Median Eye in, 189
Trouessart, E. L., Mange Mites, 379
Trypanosoma cruzi, 380

— dete! sp. n., 314

— lesourdi sp. n., ol-l

Tschenzoff, B., Nuclear Division in Euglena

riridis, 323
Tubercle Bacilli, Staining, 100

— Bacillus, Method of Staining, 233
TuUoch, W. J.. Medium for Cultivating

Bacillus tetaui, 231
Tungsten-lMolybdenum Alloys, 102
Turbellarian, Fresh-water, Keactious of,

385
Turbinaria, Iodine in. 32.")
Turitellella Rhumbler. 40(i
Turnip. Leaf-spot on, 225
Turnips, Finger-aud-Toe in, 329
Turtle Eggs, Zona pellncida in, 290

— Loggerhead, Clerm Cells of, 38
Twins, 'fwo-sexed, 37
Trypanosomiasis, American, 380
Typhus, Prophylaxis of, 50

U

Uca larteus de Haan. 19G

Uhlenbuth, Eduard, Influence of Thymus-

feeding, 296
— Grafts in Amblystoma, 297
" Uhrzeiger "' or " Clock-hand " Bacillus,

394'
Ulva, 77

Underwoodia columnari<, 220
Unionirola aculeata, 379
Uredineaj, 81, 219,327
Uredo cantunensis sp. n., 220
Ustila^inese, 219
Ugtulina zonata, 83

Valleau, W. D., Brown-rot of Plums. 87
Vaney, C., and A. Allemand-^lartin, Larva

of Horse-spouge, 201
Yanneman, Aimee S., Grerm-cells of

Armadillo, 177
Varde, R. Potier de la. Pfychomitriuin suh-

crispafnm, 321
Vaughan, T. W., Studies in Living Corals,

200
Venus, 367

Vertebrates, Air-breathing, Origin of, 185
— Craniate, " Proboscis Pores " in, 186

Verticillium, 224

Vestal, A. G., Lichen Ecology, 89

Vincens, F., 220

Vrss, G.. 22t)

W

Wade. H. Windsor, Pathogenic l''angii.s.

84
Wakefield, E. M., 83

— Nigerian Fungi, 83

Wallin, Ivan E., Thymus-like Structures
in Larval Lamprey, 40

— Branchial Epithelium of Ammoccetes,

298
Wallrothiella, AiTe.Ktholii, 86
Walter, C, Swiss Halicaridse, 195
Walton, Chas. L., Agricultural Zoological

Survey of Aberystwith Area, 187

— Liver-rot, 309
Warming, E., 324
Warnstorf, C, I'oltia, 213

Warren, Don C, Mutations in Drosophiln
huschii, 192

Wart-disease of Potatoes, 84

Watts, W. W., Australiiiu Ferns and
Mosses, (>7

Wehhina claraUi (P. and .J.), 406

Wehrle, L. I'., 383

Weidman, Fred D., Structure and De-
velopment of Cladorchis, 309

Weimer, Bernol R., Reactions of Fresh-
water Turbellarian, 385

Weir, J. R., Altitudinal Range of Forest
Fungi, 222

— Diseases of Plants, 223

— Herpotrichia, 86

— Needle-blight of Douglas Fir, 225

— Pinus fonder osa, 81

— and E. E. Hubert, Inoculation with

Spores of Hyalospora Poli/podii, 219

Metamsporella spp., 219

Rusts on Forest-trees, 219

Welch, Paul S., and L. I'. Wehrle, Repro-
duction in Nematodes, 383
Wentworth, E. N., Inheritance of Fertility

in Sheep, 179
Werber, E. I., Morphogenesis of Dupliei--

ties, 291
Wernher, H., and 0. Wieso, Relapsing

Fever, 390
Wessenberg-Lund, 213
West, C, Stelar Svsteraof the Marattiaccie,

66
West, G. S., A New Species of Gongrosira,

30

— Biology of Algse, 72

— New Species of Gongrosira, 105
Weston, W. H., Development of Tlirausto-

theca, 217
Wharton, L. D., 199
Wheeler, W. M.. Study of Ant Larvae, 373

454

INDEX.

Whelflon, J. A.. OoUectiou, Taxonomy,

and Ecology of the Sphagna, 320
Whitefish, Propoition of Sexes in, 366
Whitehouse, E. H.. Caudal Fin of Chaud-

huria, 368
Whiting, P. W., Inheritance of Coat-colour

in Cats. 294
AVhitney, D. I).. Controlling 8ex in

Eotifers. 310
Wiese, O., 390
Williams, E. 8.. Interference Kefracto-

meter, 94
Williamson, H. Chas., Otolith-method of

Estimating Age of Plaice, 800
Williamson, E., 96
Williamson, W., Eare Hydracarid, 57

— and Chailes D. Soar, Lebertia sefvei

Walter. 30r)
Wilson, Edmond B., Chondriosomes of

Scorpion Spermatozoa, 195
AVilsou, G. W., North American Perono-

sporales, 325
Winnertziola hurmitica sp. n., 45
Wintrebert, P., Earliest Movements of

Dogfish Embryo, 291
Wolf, Frederick A.. Citrus Canker, 222

— Disease of Squashes due to ChoanepJiora

eucubbitamm, 225
Wolf, F., and E. O. Cromwell. Eoot-rot of

Apple-trees, 88
Wolf, F. A., and E. E. Stanford, Disease

of Fig-trees in North Caroliur caused

by. Macrophoma Fid, 224
Wood. Casey Albert, Fundus oculi of

Birds, 407
Wood, J. Medley, 82
Woodchuck, Interstitial Cells of the Testis

of, 184

— Seasonal Changes in Interstitial Cells

of, 184

— Spermatogenesis in, 184

Woodruff, L. L.. Ehythms in Endomixis,

202
Workman, Thomas, 195
Wratten " M " Filters, 398
Wright, F. E.. Petrographic Microscope,

231

Wright, W. B., 231

Wrought-Irou, Microstructure of, 103
Wuist, Elizabeth D., Apogamy in Phego-
pteris and O.smunda, 67

X

X-chromosome, 361

Hermaphroditism of, 380

Xenocoeloma brumpti, Observations on, 380

XironodrUus formosus, 307

Xylaria, 88

— Eoot-rot of Apple-trees. 225

Xylarlse, 82

Yates, H. S., Fungi fiom Southern China.

220
Yatsu, Naohide. Maxillary Gland of

Cypridina Idlgendorfi, 198

— Physiology of Medusse, 200

— Eeactions of Cliaiybdea. 388
Yendo, K., Japanese Marine Algae, 78
Yendo, Y., Injection Experiments on

Plants, 207 '
Yocum, Harry B., Spermatogenesis in

Mouse. 360
" Yolk-islands," 359
Yolk-sac and Bone-marrow, Giant-cells

of, 367
Young, E. T., Experimental Induction of

Endomixis in Faramecium aurelia.

314

Zosea, 382

Zoogonus viviparus (Olsson), 308

Zos'tera, 77

Zschokke, F., Dibothriocephahts parvus

Stephens, 198
Zygnema cynnospermum, 215
— Starch Formation iu, 74
Zygocotyle ceratosa g. etsp. n^, 385

1

LONDON : I'RINTEIJ BY WILLIAM CLOWES ANT) SOXS, LIMITED
JRKAT WINDMILL STRKET, W.l, AND DUKE STREET, STAMFORD STREET, S.E

MBL/WHOI I.IHKAKV

(J

H IflUN

4^ '

^"■h '>

/^*y-%^'

M./^ f

?^*^^

'^

-■ ^
X k

f?^.>c \^:,^\^

jJ-'-'-it'i?^.- ^^^ j1< ■,

' *' *«»; ?>-^ g'j^*, ^" V V'^

^"'J'^-. ii^.:!k^# :^-^

a^^^Ki^xrzir^pnftifeKiJB

k

»^.

-<*n

iifl^HZ^HB

n

^•Nac ^^ir

^

\^ w'V.L3«^n''

^ -t^*"- V-'^

>:-^ . ..-'^v.

^.^'^'^^kT^

L^^BS^^^^M

^^^ ^

^H^L.^^^^^^^^k.tf^^^V^Ri* ^'I^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^H^^K' ^^H^HB^^R.11

y>^

1 ,'■

5 ' "^

S»'

.' ^

" k.^^mm^

' .-•...

-i- ^

f-%^

^^

''f^f

J

r:wi—

3^.;

> >*

5fr>

>■

.. K. A

^ Jt ^" -y^.

f--^ If

-f" *■■

!t ^'*y

i Aw>'